— eevee
eS Ee ee ee eee ee ae ee eee ae
a
: ‘ tay Hi AP ?
; 7. “y
' Pear '
‘ ‘ ’ ’
' : id J ced ’ c . ‘
; : 4 pane ek i, i Pn ae Dans Be Ad A WP Be oe |
' ; 4 ’ . ; f ad Le ee ee ‘al "7 ’
“he ar) tia t Leyte if P he pee ee, Ay
RT AE EP PAM Ln ee UA
“4 na : " ‘ fie Bete ae: wp we. ae hes . tf ah itr) f.
' ' Amen gi i] oe fd
‘wage A {" One 1 [ J f
é * ; f be f +}
' ‘ [ Ne ‘i A
1 Pty 2a! )
a i ’ Lest
f
1
" ?
’
; :
‘
’
1
ar
‘ “ j
; 1
'
: 4 a | ¢
e 4
*, a)
‘ § '
: ' ‘ i me
' mi
' la
‘ ‘ Npeay Md
: '
' ' ' f
, P ‘ fd
rp Me ea shi ti AY, ie { 1) \
7 a) F i yeti dy i}
© ENS giogl tA [ah ie f A a a
fe : ? ' apie}
; | j : vhs ls
nt HE ely as TeAMIS A k
Pak "aye? ; ‘ ites Py!
7 7 | ite
Snag 4 Wy gieemr ye "
, are a 4 $
E \
i ; : ' a ae '
4 : 7) : “94 .
’ L ?
rma ee |
j
} * és ,
. ‘4
1 p ' i
4 ‘ me
’ ee ee
1 ,* 7 ty.
Pt taiwy
rag
B bang " os
A n 7 “Hit ty bd - ‘
a ’ » ' ‘ .
’ rhe an y ve a iat Paria Wie i
ec" } | ee
' A sd oe if reat a age}
' . =i o] . j haryue
i ’ ’ b $44 VF ecb is
; 4 cenit er a
; ’ ’ ' Ol dw eh poy
, : we ae | i
Mi Pa tyre. © 4 ad, PAV a pti
y He ety ‘ ain *@y 4; ‘ ‘ ey LUA : r
' 7 epee yg ey thee, Ho ha ary uate rene
: it ' Aenean eu italy 34, fr Py
F ; yt hath elf tts RRP et Mer) 4b : ry mt Holt
© te i! ia) ye
, wy 4a," 2
¥ ie
yath
Fett
“ave y {tty
: 4 eC a he YF
Meh bcs We ere
be Tae mae re is Ba V0
3
‘
v
‘
~< i
A '
»
oo
is
’ : we vet 4 Wt F ml ‘ Ho. ie 4 ‘ eae is F : ae a
2 he ie beat 4 tebe Ae Ae oboe ke gob cote ; ‘ , RMN ery 4 : ae :
oa it Tn RP a eee aot ela se, adh aie! Gi } if J
t
a
‘
i ae Mu
} te bay é t f Pe ba VET, : 7 ‘
weed Me es Actas earl, \ ‘ . % vs, i " 7d BK, rive
ar Pox are ou i. A, Ete, Bs =f Mhiaet, i) :
REE aOR eR ANCL PH ENR LSC
; : : ‘ flat. ‘
' Vi ’
Fe heat
7 Nol aetung
; ' toast . Hs Leee es :
‘ oun A hae oe “hha va,
t
ie +e masta sper La nin wee
: ‘ : Mead wots Whitt
ate! Y hy jv Ge &
“Wind
:
: rie 4 ae
Paige ha my ay
ion Scr ar ea
of. s uP a ee
; R i} is awed 9
‘
i oe)
ie
i
i
= 4
$4
'
\
bos
7
THE UNIVERSITY
OF ILLINOIS
LIBRARY
af Oe
ws)
MSVvAG.
Return this book on or before the
Latest Date stamped below.
auien
niversity of Illinois Library
en a a ,
Lon Ee ae nS ‘
_ a Ua poh Mee) Anh) Ke
ee a Vii Raa es ‘ sa | ¥ |
it sou ta Wn an t Ph [2 =
- od
ne
QUARTERLY JOURNAL
MICROSCOPICAL SCIENCE
EDITED BY
EH. RAY LANKESTER, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.,
HONORARY FELLOW OF EXETER COLLEGE, OXFORD}; CORRESPONDENT OF THE INSTITUTE OF FRANCE
AND OF THE IMPERIAL ACADEMY OF SCIENCES OF ST. PETERSBURG, AND OF THE ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA; FOREIGN MEMBER OF THE ROYAL BOHEMIAN
SOCIETY OF SCIENCES, AND OF THE ACADEMY OF THE LINCEI OF ROMF,
AND OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES OF BOSTON 4
ASSOCIATE OF THE ROYAL ACADEMY OF BELGIUM; HONORARY MEMBER
OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, AND OF THE
CAMBRIDGE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, AND OF THE ROYAL
PHYSICAL SOCIETY OF EDINBURGH ; HONORARY
MEMBER OF THE BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY
Or PARIS;
DIRECTOR OF THE NATURAL HISTORY DEPARTMENTS OF THE BRITISH MUSEUM; LATE FULLERIAN
PROFESSOR OF PHYSIOLOGY IN THE ROYAL INSTITUTION OF GREAT BRITAIN.
WITH THE CO-OPERATION OF
ADAM SEDGWICK, M.A., F.RS.,
FELLOW AND TUTOR OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE}
W. F. R. WELDON, M.A., F.RS.,
LINACRE PROFESSOR OF COMPARATIVE ANATOMY AND FELLOW OF MERTON COLLEGE, OXFORD;
LATE FELLOW OF ST. JOHN’S COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE};
AND
SYDNEY J. HICKSON, M.A., F.RS.,
BEYER PROFESSOR OF ZOOLOGY IN THE OWENS COLLEGE, MANCHESTER,
VOLUME 46.—New Serizs.
With Rithographic Plates und Engrabings on dlood.
LONDON:
J. & A. CHURCHILL, 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET.
° 1903.
ig
~~
|i
~ARS mast ii ee
CONTENTS.
CONTENTS OF No. 181, N.S., JULY, 1902.
MEMOIRS:
On a Free-swimming Hydroid, Pelagohydra mirabilis, n. gen.
et sp. By Artuur Denpy, D.Sc., F.L.8., Professor of Biology
in the Canterbury College, University of New Zealand. (With
Plates 1 and 2) : : : : : :
Studies in the Retina. Parts III, IV, and V, with Summary. By
Henry M. Bernarp, M.A.Cantab. (From the Biological
Laboratories of the Royal College of Science, London.) (With
Plates 3—5) ‘ : ; : :
Notes on the Relations of the Kidneys in Haliotis tuberculata,
etc. By H. J. Freure, B.Sc., U.C.W., Aberystwyth. (With
Plate 6) . : 4 :
Notes on the Development of Paludina ae with special
reference to the Urino-genital Organs and Theories of Gasteropod
Torsion. By Isapetta M. Droummonp. (With Plates 7—9) .
Is Chemotaxis a Factor in the Fertilisation of the Eggs of
Animals? By A. H. Reervatp Butter, B.Sec., Ph.D., Demon-
strator in Botany at the University of Birmingham
CONTENTS OF No. 182, N.S., SEPTEMBER, 1902.
MEMOIRS :
Maturation of the Ovum in Echinus esculentus. By Tuomas
H. Bryce, M.A., M.D. (With Plates 1O—12) .
Studies on the Arachnid Entosternite. By R. I. Pocock. (With
Plates 13 and 14) ; ' ;
Natura! Sipe
VIACSA
PAGE
25
17
97
145
aa rey “ibrary
1V CONTENTS.
PAGE
On the Morphology of the Cheilostomata. By Sipnny F. Harmer,
Sc.D., F.R.S. (With Plates 15—18) . ; ; 263
On the Development of Sagitta; with Notes on the Anatomy of
the Adult. By L. Doncastzr. (With Plates 19—21) . abl
CONTENTS OF No. 183, N.S., DECEMBER, 1902.
MEMOIRS:
On a Cestode from Cestracion. By Wittiam A. Haswett, M.A.,
DS8c., F.R.S. (With Plates 22—24) . ‘ 399
The Development of Lepidosiren paradoxa.—Part LT. De.
velopment of the Skin and its Derivatives. By J. Granam
Kerr. (With Plates 25—28) . ; ‘ : ely
The Metamorphosis of Corystes Cassivelaunus (Pennant).
By Ropert Gurney, B.A.(Oxon. oe F.Z5. . (With Pigtesaee
29—31) . . : ; ; : . 461
Artificial Parthenogenesis and Fertilisation: a Review. By
Tuomas H. Bryce : jes. : : . 479
CONTENTS OF No. 184, N.S., FEBRUARY, 1903.
MEMOIRS:
The Movements and Reactions of Fresh-water Planarians; a Study
in Animal Behaviour. By Raymonp Peart, Ph.D., Instructor
in Zoology in the tisk of i iit Ann Arbor, Michigan,
UesAY : 509
On the Diplochorda. part Ty. On the Central Comte of
Cephalodiscus dodecalophus, Mcl. By A. T. Mastermay,
M.A., D.Sc., Lecturer on Zoology, School of Medicine, Edin-
burgh. (With Plates 32 and 33) : : : » bs
On Hypurgon Skeati, a new Genus and Species of Compound
Ascidians. By Icerna B. J. Sottas, B.Sc.Lond. (With Plates
34 and 35) ; ‘a ; : ; : - dan
The Anatomy of Arenicola assimilis, Ehlers, and of a New
Variety of the Species, with some Observations on the Post-
larval Stages. By J. H. Asnwortn, D.Sc. (With Plates 36
and 37) . ; ; : : ; ; . ae
Tite, INDEX, AND CONTENTS.
On a Free-swimming Hydroid, Pelagohydra
mirabilis, n. gen. et sp.
By
Arthur Dendy, D.Sc., F.L.S.,
Professor of Biology in the Canterbury College, University of New Zealand.
jor)
evidently just been thrown up by the tide.
With Plates 1 and 2.
ContTeENTS.
: Introduction
. Notes on the Living erhiiiil:.
. The Hydroid:
(a) External Characters
(b) Internal Anatomy
(c) Histology
. The Medusoid :
(a) Structure
(b) Development
. Discussion of Results, Rekcioiahing ete.
. Diagnosis of New Genus and Family
. Description of Plates
1. INTRODUCTION.
PAGE
The remarkable organism which forms the subject of the
present memoir was picked up by myself on the sandy beach
at Sumner, a small watering-place near Christchurch, on the
east coast of the South Island of New Zealand. One evening
in October last (1901), while walking on the shore, I saw
lying at my feet a small gelatinous object which had
you. 46, PART 1.—NEW SERIES,
On placing it in
2 ARTHUR DENDY.
a glass of sea water I soon saw that it was still alive, and
that it exhibited very unusual features, differing widely from
any pelagic organism with which I was acquainted. After
studying it for some time with the aid of a pocket lens I
took it up to my laboratory at Christchurch, and continued
my examination of the living animal the same night. Being
unwilling to risk the attempt to keep it alive until the next
morning, I then killed it by the addition of osmic acid to the
sea water, and preserved it in alcohol. It was unfortunate
that the lateness of the hour prevented me from making a
more exhaustive examination of the living organism, as.
more light might have been thereby thrown upon its move-
ments and habits; but it seemed best to try and make sure of
having it well preserved for minute investigation subse-
quently, and in this I was fairly successful. The action of
the osmic acid was, as might have been expected in the case
of so large an organism, very unequal, some of the more
superficial parts being much blackened, while the interior
was apparently not affected at all, and consequently turned
out to be not in so good a condition for minute histological
investigation as I could have wished. Had I suspected how
complicated and remarkable the structure of the interior
really was I might have thought it best to cut the organism
in half in order to allow the osmic acid to penetrate, but as
it was it did not seem to me desirable in any way to mutilate
the unique specimen at that early stage of the investigation.
It was very soon obvious that the organism was an
enormous free-swimming hydroid, from the greater part of
the surface of which numerous little medusoids were being
budded off in groups. Being about to pay a visit to
England, however, I postponed the greater part of the
investigation until after my arrival, when I resumed the
work in the zoological laboratory of the Owens College. It
affords me very great pleasure to express my thanks to
Professor Hickson and his staff for the kind hospitality
which I received at their hands, and for the valuable assist-
ance rendered to me during the progress of my research,
ON A FREE-SWIMMING HYDROID. 38
9. Notes oN THE Livina ANIMAL.
The free-swimming hydroid person of Pelagohydra
mirabilis (fig. 1) is apparently a pelagic organism. The
conditions under which it was found, its subsequent be-
haviour when observed in sea water, and its peculiar organi-
sation, all point to this conclusion. When placed in a glass
of sea water in front of a candle (it was too dark to examine
it by daylight) it floated near the surface with the narrow
proboscis-like portion of the body, bearing the mouth at its
extremity, hanging downwards from the much larger balloon-
like structure, which I propose to call the “float.’’? The
latter, though near the surface, was totally submerged.
Subsequently, when placed in a tin can for removal to the
laboratory and kept in the dark, the animal sank to the
bottom, though still alive. Probably, therefore, it has the
power of rising and sinking in the water like other pelagic
organisms, and it may be that it always sinks to some depth
_beneath the surface when it is dark. The general colour of
the organism was a very pale bluish tint, and it was of
course translucent. The proboscis, however, was pale pink,
intensified round the margin of the mouth. The manubria
of the medusoids were also pink. During life the hydroid
exhibited some slight power of changing its shape, the float
being at one time oval (slightly elongated vertically) and
at another contracted into a sphere, while the proboscis
exhibited considerable power both of contraction, under
which condition it became slightly trumpet-shaped at the
end, and of flexion. When both elongated, as shown in
fig. 1, the float was nearly an inch in greater diameter and
the proboscis rather more than half as long as the float.
The long, slender, tentacular processes of the float occa-
sionally exhibited spasmodic movements of flexion, like
gigantic flagella, many of them simultaneously, or nearly so ;
and from this I am led to conclude that the animal has the
power of rowing itself through the water by means of these
organs. | |
4, ARTHUR DENDY.
Whether the medusoids naturally separate from the
hydroid I cannot say from direct observation. ‘They ex-
hibited slight twitching movements of contraction, however, —
while still attached to the parent, and the structure of the
larger ones leaves no doubt that they ultimately become free-
swimming. Moreover many of them became detached when
the organisma was killed.
3. Tar Hyproip.
(a) External Characters.—The body of the hydroid is,
as compared with the ordinary hydroid type—such as we see,
for example, in Tubularia,—greatly modified in form and
structure, and the modification is such as to bring about the
necessary adaptation to the changed conditions of life. The
usual stalk is entirely wanting, nor is there the slightest
indication of its having ever existed. The aboral portion of
the body is enormously swollen out, and quite evenly rounded
off at the upper pole, forming the nearly spherical “ float.”
To the lower pole of the float is attached the cylindrical “ pro-
boscis,” bearing the mouth at its extremity. The line of
junction between the float and the proboscis is well marked
even externally, and corresponds to an even more pronounced
internal demarcation between the two.
The float carries numerous long tentacles, which are
scattered without any definite arrangement at approximately
equal distances from one another all over its surface. ‘These
tentacles are cylindrical and bluntly rounded at the extremity,
never distinctly knobbed. When fully extended they may be
about as long as the float itself. For the most part they are,
as usual amongst the Hydrozoa, unbranched, but two or three
were observed each with a single branch (figs. 3, 5, Se:
this condition being probably abnormal.
The proboscis is differentiated transversely into two Bers
tions (fig. 2). The upper part bears no tentacles, and
exhibits an appearance of circular and longitudinal striation,
ON A FREE-SWIMMING HYDROID. © 5)
The lower part, next to the mouth, bears numerous tentacles
of greatly varying size; these are arranged, not quite
regularly, in transverse rows or whorls, and decrease in size
from the uppermost whorl, which contains the largest,
towards the mouth, around the margin of which the tentacles
are very minute. There is altogether a good deal of irregu-
larity about the size and shape of these tentacles, and here
again one of them was found to be branched (fig. 2, B.7.),
but a better idea of their form and arrangement will be
gained from the illustration than from any description which
I can give.
Scattered all over the surface of the float, between the
bases of the tentacles (figs. 4, etc.), are numerous little
branching processes, which we may term “stolons.” They
branch quite irregularly, their branches remaining short and
keeping close to the surface of the hydroid. On these stolons
are borne groups of very small medusoids in various stages
of development, from minute buds to fully formed bells
apparently just ready to separate.
(b) Internal Anatomy.—The most striking feature of
the internal anatomy is the presence of two large cavities,
completely separated from one another by a thin horizontal
septum, as shown in fig. 5. ‘This septum lies at the level. of
the junction between the proboscis and the float, and is
slightly arched upwards. A preliminary examination reveals
the fact that the lower and very much smaller chamber is
the main gastral cavity, while the upper one is apparently
excavated in the enormously developed mesogloea between
the ectoderm and endoderm of the roof of the gastral cavity :
this second and much larger chamber I propose to call the
“cavity of the float.” Its real origin will be discussed
presently. It is not a simple cavity, but is subdivided by
what I propose to term the “supporting membranes.”
On the inner surface of the wall of the float there is a net-
work of canals, which give it a honeycombed appearance.
These canals are lined by endoderm, and are in reality con-
tinuations of the gastral cavity, into which they open at their
6 ARTHUR DENDY.
lower extremities. I shall speak of them as the “endo-
dermal canals.”
The Gastral Cavity.—The main gastral cavity, then,
occupies only the interior of the proboscis, but is continued
upwards into the float in the form of endodermal canals.
The lining membrane of the main gastral cavity is thrown into
numerous very prominent longitudinal folds, forming ridges
which project inwards (figs. 5—9, L.G.R.), and whose edges,
in the contracted specimen, are very sinuous (fig. 6). Ata
short distance below the septum the gastral cavity widens
out somewhat, and the ridges almost die away. At the
junction of the septum with the outer wall of the gastral
cavity a prominent annular fold projects into the latter
(ist 7, Oe).
The Endodermal Canals.—Above the fold just men-
tioned, around the margin of the septum, which is otherwise
imperforate, lie the openings of the endodermal canals (figs.
7, 8, Op. End.). From the network which these canals form
on the inner surface of the wall of the float (figs. 5, 6,
End. C.) short branches are given off outwards, which run
into the stolons; but the canals themselves have apparently
no communication with the tentacles (fig. 8).
The Septum.—The septum which separates the main
gastral cavity from the cavity of the float is a thin but firm
membrane. As already stated, it is somewhat arched
upwards. Its two surfaces are both smooth, but to the
upper one are attached some of the supporting membranes
in the chamber of the float (figs. 5—8). It is, as already
stated, imperforate, except for the openings of the endo-
dermal canals, and in this respect differs from either of the
two ‘‘diaphragms” in the gigantic Branchiocerianthus
imperator, which in some respects certainly resembles our
hydroid.}
The Cavity of the Float.—The cavity of the float is
very spacious, but it is subdivided by numerous very thin,
1 Vide Miyajima, ‘Journ. Coll. Sci. Imp. University of Tokio,’ vol. xiii,
p. 235, ete.
ON A FREE-SWIMMING HYDROID. ‘|
transparent, membranous sheets, which radiate outwards
from a more solid mass of tissue formed by their union nearly
in the middle of the chamber, and which have their edges
attached to the inner surface of the wall of the float and to
the upper surface of the septum. ‘hese remarkable struc-
tures I have called the “supporting membranes.” ‘The
inner surface of the wall of the chamber exhibits a honey-
combed appearance, being marked out into roundly poly-
gonal areas by the projecting endodermal canals. In the
centre of each depressed area between the endodermal
canals a knob-like projection may frequently be seen; this
is caused by the tissue which fills the cavity of the tentacle
projecting inwards into the chamber of the float like a plug
(figs. 6, 8, Ten. Pl.). These structures we may call the
“tentacle plugs.”
The Tentacles.—All the tentacles are filled with a highly
vacuolated tissue, composed of sheets or strands of delicate
membrane. In the case of the tentacles of the float this
tissue may, as just stated, project as a plug into the float
cavity. In the proboscis the mesogloea in the wall of the
gastral cavity is, in the neighbourhood of the tentacle bases,
much thickened and highly vacuolated, giving rise to cavities
of considerable size, and this vacuolated tissue is continued
into the tentacles (figs. 8,9). The exact nature and origin
of the tissue which thus fills the interior of all the tentacles
are, however, by no means easy to determine, and the
question will be best dealt with under the next heading.
(c) Histology.—Pelagohydra exhibits, for a hydroid,
a remarkable amount of histological differentiation. [or
purposes of description it will be most convenient to sub-
divide this part of our subject according to the different
regions of the body, rather than to attempt to follow out each
layer completely before passing on to the next. Indeed, as
we shall see later, in some parts of the body the delimitation
of the layers is by no means always obvious—at any rate, in
the case of the endoderm.
As already indicated, the histological preservation of the
8 ARTHUR DENDY.
internal tissues is not all that could be desired, and it is
greatly to be hoped that an opportunity may arise of working
out this subject more in detail with the aid of material
specially treated for the purpose. It is also highly desirable
that a detailed comparison should be made of the histological
structure of Corymorpha, Monocaulus, and Branchio-
' cerianthus, which are evidently related to Pelagohydra,
and, like it, of exceptional size.
Wall of the Proboscis.—The ectoderm is a thick layer
densely charged with small, darkly staining nuclei and
thread-cells irregularly scattered throughout its substance
(Hes 9,) 1.0; wict.):.
In section it exhibits numerous fine radial lines running
in at right angles from its outer surface, and perhaps
indicating the boundaries of a single layer of large prismatic
cells. On its inner aspect, immediately contiguous to the
mesogloea, is a well-developed layer of longitudinal muscle-
fibres. In transverse sections (fig. 10) we see that this layer,
consisting of an approximately single row of fibres, is thrown
into longitudinal folds, the mesogloea being produced out-
wards in plate-like ridges between the folds. This arrange-
ment, so well known in the mesenteries of the Actinians, no
doubt serves to increase the extent of the muscular tissue.
The ectoderm decreases in thickness from below up-
wards, and the folding of the muscular layer is especially
conspicuous just above the region of the tentacles, and dies
away as it approaches the upper limit of the proboscis.
Between the bases of the proboscis tentacles the ectoderm is
extremely thick, but thins out greatly over the tentacles
themselves.
The endodermal lining of the proboscis wall 1s enormously
thick, and throughout the greater part of its extent is thrown
into prominent longitudinal folds or ridges in the manner
already described (figs. 5—9). The structure of these ridges
(figs. 9—11) is very peculiar. The mesogloeal supporting
lamella which divides the endoderm from the ectoderm is
uot continued into them, and is indeed sharply marked off by
ON A FREE-SWIMMING HYDROID. 9
another layer of muscle-fibres, which we may consider to be
endodermal in origin. These fibres are arranged in a
circular manner at right angles to those of the ectoderm (fig.
10), and the extent of the muscular layer is increased by
horizontal folds, similar to the vertical folds of the ecto-
dermal layer. These horizontal folds are, of course, recog-
nisable only in vertical sections, while the vertical folds of
the ectodermal musculature are conspicuous in transverse
section (fig. 10).
The free surfaces of the gastral ridges bounding the
gastral cavity are covered with an epithelium of a very
peculiar type (figs. 9—11). It consists of long, slender,
columnar cells arranged at right angles to the surface.
They have a finely granular cytoplasm and distinct nuclei,
and appear in the sections to be collected into small groups,
like bundles of cigars, from the inner ends of which delicate
wavy fibres run obliquely towards the central plane of the
ridge, and thence inwards side by side till they meet the
mesogloeal supporting lamella, where they probably give rise
to the circular musculature.! The grouping of the epithelial
cells into bundles is, I think, probably a post-mortem con-
dition due to contraction in alcohol. I imagine that the cells
are normally arranged so that each is continued inwards
into a separate fibre. We may probably regard the endo-
derm of the gastral ridges as glandular-muscular in function,
for no doubt it secretes the digestive fluid. There are no
thread-cells in the gastral ridges, nor, indeed, have I seen
them in any part of the endoderm. On approaching the
annular endodermal fold which marks the upper limit of the
proboscis the gastral ridges gradually die away, and their
epithelium gives place to that which lines the gastral face of
the septum on the one hand, and the endodermal canals on
the other (fig. 8).
The mesogloeal supporting lamella of the proboscis wall
may be regarded as being bounded on the outside by the
' Compare the structure of the endodermal villi with their muscle-fibres in
Myriothela (Hardy, ‘ Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci.,’ vol. xxxii, p. 505).
10 ARTHUR DENDY.
ectodermal, and on the inside by the endodermal layer of
muscle-fibres respectively. It is continued into the folds of
the muscular layers, and also into the annular fold of endo-
derm. It has the usual clear gelatinous appearance,! and
though everywhere more or less distinct, attains its maximum
development in the neighbourhood of the tentacle bases,
where it appears to become immensely thickened, and at the
same time broken up by large vacuoles into a network of
irregular sheets (figs. 8,9). It may possibly be invaded in
this region by cells migrating from the endoderm, as will be
described later in the case of the supporting membranes of
the float; but this point I have not been able to determine.
Tentacles of the Proboscis.—The larger tentacles of
the proboscis are identical in structure with those of the
float, shown in transverse section in fig. 15. The outer wall
of the tentacle is formed by a single layer of short columnar
cells; it is highly vacuolated, and abundantly charged with
thread-cells in all stages of development ; on its inner face is
a well-developed single layer of longitudinal muscle-fibres.
A more or less distinct layer of mesoglcea comes next, crossed
in places by slender strands (of protoplasm?) extending
inwards from the ectoderm, while the axis of the tentacle is
occupied by an irregular network of sheets continuous with
the vacuolated mesogloea of the proboscis wall. Here and
there over the surfaces of these thin and apparently structure-
less sheets are scattered very well-defined bodies, which may
be either small isolated cells with small nuclei, or, as I am
inclined to think, themselves large nuclei with conspicuous
nucleoli, These bodies are flattened against, or perhaps in
the thickness of, the septa which separate the enormous
vacuoles from one another. When seen en face they are
nearly round, and about 0°0125 mm. in diameter. ‘Their
protoplasm stains fairly deeply, especially that of the small
enclosed body, and is scarcely at all granular. It is note-
1 It seems probable that the fibrillated character of the mesoglea described
by Allman and Miyajima (loc. cit.) in Branchiocerianthus may be due to
the ectodermal and endodermal muscle-fibres attached to it.
ON A FREE-SWIMMING HYDROID. 11
worthy that two of these large nuclei may be found lying
close together, side by side, on the same side of one septum,
which seems to indicate that each cavity in the axial tissue is
not simply the enlarged vacuole of a single cell. Though
abundant in the tentacles themselves, the large nuclei are, so
far as my experience goes, not to be found in the vacuolated
mesoglcea with which the axial tissue of the tentacle becomes
continuous in the proboscis wall.
Owing partly to the specimen being somewhat injured in
the neighbourhood of the mouth (possibly by being washed
about by the tide on the sand, with mouth downwards), I
have been unable to make a satisfactory investigation of the
minute structure of the smallest tentacles. It is evident,
however, that these conform much more closely to the ordi-
nary Tubularian type than do the large ones. ‘This may be
chiefly owing to their smaller diameter, which enables the
membranous septa to stretch right across transversely and
more or less parallel with one another, so as to divide the
interior into approximately a single row of chambers, sur-
rounded by a very thick layer of mesogloea inside the
ectoderm. ‘Thus it would seem that the axis of the smallest
tentacles is occupied by a single row of large vacuolated
endoderm cells as usual. Whether even in the smallest
tentacles these axial cells retain their connection with the
endodermal lining of the gastral cavity is extremely doubtful.
In the case of the large tentacles there is no trace of any
connectiou remaining between the axial tissue and the endo-
derm of the gastral cavity,’ and the origin of this tissue
must remain doubtful. It has probably been originally
derived from the endoderm, but it has become so modified in
structure and so completely disconnected that perhaps only
embryological research can decide the question.
Wall of the Float.—The wall of the float forms but a
comparatively thin shell, enclosing the central cavity with its
remarkable system of supporting membranes. ‘The histo-
logical characters of the ectoderm (fig. 12, Hct.) are very
‘ Compare Miyajima’s remarks on Branchiocerianthus, loc. cit.
12 ARTHUR DENDY.
similar to those of the corresponding layer in the wall of the
proboscis. It is, however, less distinctly muscular. In the
immediate neighbourhood of the tentacles it retains the
characters which it exhibits in the tentacles themselves, being
comparatively thin, and having the muscle-fibres arranged
radially in continuation with the longitudinal muscular layer
of the tentacle. Elsewhere the ectoderm is thick and very
densely crowded with thread-cells.
The Endodermal Canals.—The lining epithelium of
the endodermal canals, directly continuous with that of the
gastral cavity proper, is differentiated into two very distinct —
portions, differing greatly in histological character. The
canals are somewhat flattened against the wall of the float ;
their own outer walls form part of the thickness of the latter
(fig. 12), and are lined by a layer of large epithelial cells with
rounded club-shaped ends projecting into the lumen. These —
cells have very large vacuoles and small round nuclei, and
their very darkly staining granular contents are collected
together in or near their swollen club-shaped ends (fig. 12,
End O.). They also contain darkly staining spherical globules
of various sizes. ‘The epithelium forming the inner walls of
the endodermal canals, on the other hand, consists of a single
layer of smaller cells, approximately cubical in shape, with
small nuclei and only a small quantity of faintly staining,
finely granular cytoplasm (fig. 12, Hind. I.).
The Supporting Membranes of the Float.—The thin
transparent sheets of membrane which subdivide the cavity of
the float (figs. 5—8, 12, Sup. Mem.) appear to have a
very remarkable structure and origin. Hach sheet consists
of a thin structureless layer of mesoglcea (fig. 13, Mes.),
thickening at the angles where the sheets meet one another.
Spread out on each surface of this mesogloeal sheet is a still
thinner layer of finely granulated, frothy-looking protoplasm,
containing rounded nuclei irregularly scattered through it
(fig. 14). No cell boundaries can be distinguished in my
preparations, but the protoplasm appears to form a vacuolated
syncytium. It may occasionally be collected or drawn
ON A FREE-SWIMMING HYDROID. 13
together into a thick rounded blob or drop, containing many
nuclei (fig. 13), but this condition appears to be of rare
occurrence. Probably the nuclei multiply by division, as
indicated in fig. 14, at # This peculiar tissue appears to
originate, in part at any rate, from the inner walls of the
endodermal canals.1 The mesoglceal portion of these walls
may be very thick, and occasionally little groups of cells (fig.
12, End. Bud) may be seen growing into it from the endo-
dermal lining of the canal. These cells have very finely
granular contents and small nuclei. Irregular cavities (fig.
12, D. F. C.) are apparently developed between them,
and gradually enlarge until the nuclei become widely
separated, while the mesogloea is reduced to thin sheets
separating adjacent cavities from one another, and the proto-
plasm of the endoderm cells becomes spread out over these
sheets in the form of a granular syncytium.
Sometimes, where a comparatively thin layer of mesogloea
lies behind the endoderm of the inner wall of an endodermal
canal, threads of finely granular protoplasm may be seen
stretching at right angles through the mesoglcea from the
one surface (covered by the finely granular syncytium) to the
other (covered by the endodermal cells of the canal wall).
Thus it appears that the supporting membranes of the float
originate in a peculiar manner from the endoderm. It is not
certain, however, that they do not receive cells from the
external ectoderm also, for thread-cells in various stages of
development may sometimes be observed in places where the
mesoglcea is thick, beneath the external ectoderm and doubt-
less derived from the latter. This inward migration of the
cnidoblasts can hardly be looked upon as normal, but if they
are able to migrate inwards it seems equally possibly that
other ectoderm cells may do the same, and possible eventually
take part in the formation of the supporting membranes.
1 Professor Ray Lankester has pointed out to me that a somewhat similar
method of tissue formation has been observed in the ‘‘ laminar tissue’’ of
Amphioxus (vide Pouchet, “On the Laminar Tissue of Amphioxus,”
‘Quart. Journ. Micr, Sci.,’ vol. xx, n. s., P. 421, pl. xxix),
14 ARTHUR DENDY.
The Septum.—The histological structure of the septum
which divides the main gastral cavity from the cavity of
the float is practically identical with that of the inner walls
of the endodermal canals, with which it is directly continuous,
On its lower face it is covered by a layer of lightly staining
cells with small nuclei and finely granular contents, and this
is separated by a moderately thick layer of mesogloea from
the finely granular syncytium which covers its upper surface.
Some of the supporting membranes of the float are attached
to its upper surface, and probably originate from the septum
in the same way as those already described originate from
the inner walls of the endodermal canals.
Tentacles of the Float.—The tentacles of the float are
histologically identical with the large tentacles of the pro-
boscis, as will be seen by comparison of fig. 15 with the
description already given. The peculiar manner in which the
axial tissue seems to project into the cavity of the float in the
form of a cushion or plug has already been referred to. In
the projecting plug, however, when best developed, the
network of tissue is made up chiefly of a finely granular
frothy syncytium, with very little mesogloea and small nuclei.
In the tentacle itself the granular material is hardly recog-
nisable, the septa (fig. 15, S.W.7.) are very thin, and the
nuclei (fig. 15, Nw.) much larger and of a different character,
like those in the proboscis tentacles. Thus the “ plug”
seems to be to some extent transitional in character between
the true axial tissue of the tentacle and the very much coarser
reticulation formed by the supporting membranes in the
interior of the float. It is not always recognisable as a
distinct structure, however, and even where best developed
it passes gradually into the axial tentacular tissue beyond,
while its apparent histological differences may be in part due
to the want of penetration of the osmic acid with which the
specimen was hardened. |
The endodermal canals come very close to the bases of the
tentacles, and we may be pretty certain that the axes of the
latter are endodermal in origin, though, as in the case of the
ON A FREE-SWIMMING HYDROID. 15
proboscis tentacles, embryological research may be required
before we can say exactly how they arise.
The Stolons.—The stolons are simply branching hollow
outgrowths of the wall of the float in the neighbourhood of the
endodermal canals, which are prolonged into them to their
extremities (figs. 8, 12, St.). The ectoderm (fig. 12, Het.) is
composed of the usual large clear cells, rectangular in
longitudinal section, with small nuclei pressed against their
dividing walls. At its base les a feebly developed layer of
longitudinal muscle-fibres. Thread-cells are almost entirely
wanting. The mesoglcea is thick, and traversed by slender
threads crossing from ectoderm to endoderm. ‘The endo-
derm (fig. 12, Hnd.) is simply a continuation of the endoderm
which lines the outer walls of the endodermal canals, and,
like the latter, is composed of large cells, often with rounded
extremities projecting into the central lumen, with enormous
vacuoles and darkly staining contents massed together either
in the rounded end or elsewhere. ‘They have small nuclei,
and in addition contain darkly staining spherical globules of
various sizes.
The Thread-cells.—The thread-cells (figs. 16, 17) are of
large size. ‘The actual nematocysts or capsules are approxi-
mately ovoid in shape, but truncated at the somewhat
narrower outer ends, and measure, when fully developed,
about 0°0128 mm. in longer diameter. Hach one is more or less
enclosed in a delicate cnidoblast (fig. 17, cnb.). When fully
developed the thread-cells lie in the outer parts of the large
ectoderm cells just beneath the surface, and the cnidoblast is
prolonged inwards to the base of the cell in the form of a long
thread—the cnidopod! (figs. 16, 17, Cnp.). The cnidopod is
remarkably distinct and tough, so much so that when the
ectoderm of a tentacle has been abraded, so that the large
ectoderm cells have disappeared, the cnidopods may still
remain projecting from the surface like hairs, with or with-
out the thread-cells still attached to their extremities.
1 Compare Allman, ‘Challenger Reports,’ “ Hydroida,” Part 2, p. xv, for
the use of this term,
16 ARTHUR DENDY.
I have seen no thread-cells with the threads everted, and
have not been able to make out any details with regard to
the thread itself. No barbs were visible in my preparations.
Smaller thread-cells, in various stages of development, lie in
the deeper parts of the ectoderm.
4, THe MeEpusoip.
(a2) Structure.—Although no free-swimming medusz
have as yet been observed, there can be little doubt that
they normally separate from the parent hydroid. As already
pointed out, they exhibit movements of contraction while
still attached, and separate very readily in the process of
killing and preserving. Moreover none of the medusa,
which were found attached to the hydroid in large numbers,
were sexually mature, and the largest were only about 1 mm.
in longer diameter of the bell.
In the largest examples the bell is considerably deeper
than wide, and nearly square, though with rounded angles,
in cross-section (figs. 22—24). The mouth of the bell is
still very narrow (fig. 23), probably expanding considerably
later on. It is surrounded by the velum, around which the —
margin of the bell has grown out into four arms or lobes,
arranged in the form of a cross, per-radially, corresponding
to the angles of the bell. Each of these arms bears five
tentacles arranged in a very peculiar manner—a pair of
larger ones, a pair of smaller ones, and a very small odd one;
the largest being furthest from the mouth, the odd nearest to
the mouth, and the remaining pair intermediate in position,
as shown in fig. 23. All the tentacles are short, even in
the living animal, and they are only very slightly if at all
swollen at their extremities. It is possible that the number
of tentacles increases as the medusa grows older, but. their
peculiar and definite arrangement seems to indicate that the
full complement is already present. ‘The tentacles are filled
with solid endoderm formed in the usual manner, while the
arms or lobes upon which they are borne are characterised
ON A FREE-SWIMMING HYDROID. 17
by an enormous thickening of the ectoderm, containing
numerous thread-cells.
At the aboral apex of the bell is a depression, where the
exumbrellar ectoderm dips in to meet an outward extension
of the endodermal lining of the gastral cavity. This marks
the spot where the young medusa is attached to the stolon
(fig. 22, Z.).
The manubrium (figs. 22, 25, Man.) is large, but does not
project beyond the mouth of the bell. Its surface is smooth,
and there are no outgrowths at its extremity.
The subumbrellar cavity is, in the middle, somewhat
octagonal in transverse section (fig. 25), being produced into
four shallow per-radial angles where the ectoderm is attached
to the radial canals, and four deeper interradial angles where
it is attached to the endodermal lamella. Immediately
beneath the subumbrellar ectoderm cells is a layer of trans-
verse (“circular”) muscular fibres, and the entire epithelium
with its musculature is thrown into transverse folds, as shown
-in figs. 22—24. Towards the mouth of the bell the cross-
section of the subumbrellar cavity becomes square, the inter-
radial angles alone remaining.
The gastral cavity immediately above the manubrium is
cruciate in transverse section, the four arms of the cross
being produced outwards into the radial canals, and the
endoderm being greatly thickened between them to form four
ridges. Inthe manubrium itself the gastral cavity is squarish
or irregular in section, with a variable number of longitudinal
endodermal ridges.
The four radial canals present no features of special interest,
nor does the thin endodermal lamella by which they remain
connected. Near the margin of the bell they open into the
circular canal (fig. 22, c. can.), enlarged per-radially in the
tentacle-bearing arms and then produced to form the solid
axes of the tentacles.
No gonads are yet recognisable, but the ectoderm of the
manubrium exhibits a thickening all round about the middle
vot. 46, part 1,—NEW SERIES. B
18 ARTHUR DENDY.
of its length, which probably indicates the position in which
they will subsequently appear.
There appear to be no sense-organs, and I have not satisfied
myself as to the existence of a nerve-ring. In life there isa
pink spot on the outside of the base of each tentacle group,
and the manubrium also is more or less pink in colour.
(6) Development.—The medusz are developed as hollow
outgrowths or “buds” from the branching stolons already
described, and each stolon may bear as many as half a dozen
at the same time in various stages of development. As soon
as one medusoid approaches maturity another bud (fig. 20 a)
appears on the stolon close to its point of attachment, ready
to replace the first when it falls off.
The youngest buds observed are represented in figs. 20 4
and 188; each is a single hollow outgrowth of the stolon,
composed of ectoderm and endoderm, but the thick mesoglea
of the stolon disappears almost if not quite completely in the
bud (fig. 20). The ectoderm and endoderm also change
their character, becoming much more compact and solid-
looking, and staining much more darkly.
In the next stage (fig. 18 c) the endocodon is formed from
the ectoderm at the apex of the bud. There is, in the
section represented in the figure, some appearance of invagi-
nation, but if not at first solid the endocodon speedily
becomes so.
The endocodon grows inwards, and at the same time the
endoderm invaginates as if pushed before it (figs. 18, 19),
forming a deep cup. The bottom of this cup is then pushed
outwards again through the endocodon to form the hollow,
finger-like manubrium, which makes its appearance very
early (fig. 20).
Meanwhile the cells of the endocodon arrange themselves
in a single layer over the outer surface of the manubrium,
the inner surface of the future subumbrella, and the inner
surface of the future velum (fig. 20). These layers are at
first in close contact, but ultimately the subumbrellar cavity
makes its appearance between them.
ON A FREE-SWIMMING HYDROID. 19
While these changes have been going on the original
gastral cavity of the bud becomes further subdivided by
the union of its inner and outer walls interradially (fig. 21)
to form the solid endodermal lamella, thus defining the four
radial canals and the circular canal. The ectoderm becomes
greatly thickened outside the circular canal, and the tentacles
begin to grow out.
Hitherto ectoderm and endoderm have everywhere re-
mained in close contact (figs. 20, 21), but the transparent
gelatinous mesoglcea now appears and forces the layers apart
(fig. 25). About the same time the subumbrellar cavity is
developed and the velum is ruptured in the middle (fig.
20, w.), giving rise to the mouth of the bell (fig. 23).
5. Discussion or Resvuits, RELATIONSHIPS, ETC.
Pelagohydra mirabilis is a remarkably interesting
organism from several points of view. In the first place it
forms an excellent example of adaptation to changed con-
ditions of life, showing us how a representative of a group
whose members are normally attached, in the hydroid phase,
to the ends of fixed stalks may become adapted to a free-
swimming pelagic existence. In the second place it exhibits
remarkable structural features, especially in the compli-
cation of the gastral cavity with its endodermal canals,
and the development of the float with its extraordinary
supporting membranes. It also has very striking histo-
logical peculiarities, showing in this respect a degree of
differentiation perhaps unequalled in any other hydroid.'
As a pelagic member of a typically non-pelagic group of
animals we may compare it with Pelagonemertes amongst
the Nemertines, Tomopteris amongst the Annelids, and
Pelagothuria amongst the Holothurians, and it may
1 The gigantic Branchiocerianthus imperator probably resembles
Pelagohydra closely in histological features, but requires further investiga-
tion (vide Miyajima, ‘ Journ. Coll. Sci. Imp. University of Tokio,’ vol. xiii,
p. 235, etc,).
20 ARTHUR DENDY.
possibly throw some light upon the origin of that remarkable
pelagic group of Hydrozoa the Siphonophora, although it
will perhaps hardly bear close comparison with any known
member of that order.
That it is an aberrant Tubularian hydroid there can, I think,
be no doubt, and its nearest relations appear to be the
enigmatical Corymorpha and its allies! In the genus
Corymorpha we also find that there is no true stalk, and
the curious prolongation of the body by which the animal
fixes itself in the sand or mud is, I believe, homologous with
what I have termed the float in Pelagohydra. In Cory-
morpha also we have a system of endodermal canals forming -
a network around a spongy central mass, and communicating
at one end with the main gastral cavity. Then, again, in Cory-
morpha curious processes are given off from the surface of
the body in the neighbourhood of the endodermal canals,
which may be homologous with the stolons of Pelago-
hydra, or possibly with the tentacles of the float. Little is
known, however, of the minute anatomy and histology of
Corymorpha, and a careful investigation in comparison
with Pelagohydra is greatly to be desired. There are,
of course, sufficiently striking differences between the two
forms, but these are of a more superficial character, and
mainly to be accounted for by the difference in mode of life.
Instead of a float we find in Corymorpha a kind of rooting
process, and the tentacles are confined to one end of the
elongated body, where they are arranged in a proximal and a
distal set, the latter obviously representing the tentacles of
the proboscis in Pelagohydra. The position of the stolons,
between the two sets of tentacles, is totally different; and the
meduse also are quite distinct, for in Steenstrupia, the
medusa of Corymorpha, we find a single odd tentacle,
representing one only of the four tentacle groups of the
Corymorpha medusa. In both cases, however, the medusze
are markedly quadriradiate, and essentially similar in in-
ternal organisation; while in Amalthza, which appears to
' Allman, ‘ Tubularian Hydroids,’ p. 386, ete,
ON A FREE-SWIMMING HYDROID. Pea |
be closely related to Corymorpha, all four tentacles are
developed.
It is a very curious fact that two distinct genera of
Tubularian hydroids agreeing in such striking anatomical
peculiarities should have become adapted to two such differ-
ent modes of life, the one swimming freely in the open ocean,
and the other rooting itself in the sand at the bottom. It
would indeed be difficult to find a better example of the
powers of adaptation to divers conditions of life. So far as
I am aware there is no other hydroid yet known which has
become specially adapted to a pelagic mode of life. It is
true that floating hydranths—Acaulis and Nemopsis—
are known, but these have probably become detached from
stalks, and are not structurally adapted to a free-swimming
existence.
6. Diagnosis or New Genus AND FAMILY.
Genus Pelagohydra, n. gen.—Hydroid solitary, free-
swimming; the proximal portion of the body modified to
form a float, supported internally by a system of radiating
membranes of endodermal origin ; the distal portion forming a
flexible proboscis, with the mouth at its extremity. Gastral
cavity continued from the proboscis into the float in the form
of endodermal canals, from which arise branching stolons.
Tentacles filiform, scattered over the surface of the float and
in whorls around the mouth. Medusz developed on stolons
between the tentacles of the float; quadriradiate, symmetri-
cal, probably with gonads in the wall of the simple manu-
brium ; tentacles in four per-radial groups of five (possibly
more in the adult).
The genus may be regarded as belonging to a distinct
family, for which I propose the name Pelagohydridae, and
for which the generic diagnosis may at present suffice. This
family is, however, closely related to the “Corymorphine”
of Delage and Herouard;' indeed, some zoologists might
1 «Traité de Zoologie concréte:’ “ Les Ceelenterés,” p. 88.
22 ARTHUR DENDY.
prefer to modify and extend their conception of the Cory-
morphine so as to include Pelagohydra (as the authors
referred to include the Hybocodonidz and Monocaulidz
of Allman) in preference to making a new family for its
reception.
7. DESCRIPTION OF PLATES 1 & 2.
Illustrating Professor Dendy’s memoir on “ Pelagohydra
mirabilis.”
EXPLANATION OF LETTERING.
A. F. Annular fold of endoderm around the margin of the septum. JB. 7.
Branched tentacles. C.Can. Circular canal. OCnb. Cnidoblast. Cnp.
Cnidopod. D. F.C. Developing float cavities. Hen. Endocodon of medusa
bud. ct. Ectoderm. End. Endoderm. nd. Bud. Buds of endoderm
growing into the mesogloea from the inner walls of the endodermal canals.
End. C. Endodermal canal. End. I. Endoderm of inner wall of endodermal
canal. Hnd.Z. Endodermal lamella of medusa. Hnd.O. Mndoderm of
outer wall of endodermal canal. H. U. EH. Exumbrellar epithelium of medusa.
Fl. Float. G.C. Man. Gastral cavity in manubrium. JZ. G. BR. Longi-
tudinal gastral ridges of endoderm. Man. Manubrium. Med. Meduse in
various stages of development. Mes. Mesoglea. M. F. Ect. Ectodermal
muscle-fibres. MM. F. End. Endodermal muscle-fibres. Mo. Mouth. Nu.
Nucleus. Op. Hnd. Openings of endodermal canals into gastral cavity.
Pr. Proboscis. R.Can. Radial canals. Sep. Septum between the main
gastral cavity and the cavity of the float. S.M. 7. Internal supporting
membranes of the tentacles. S¢. Stolons. S.U.C. Subumbrellar cavity.
S.U. EH. Subumbrellar epithelium of the medusa. S.U.M. Subumbrellar
muscular layer of the medusa. Sup. Mem. Supporting membranes of the
float. Syn. Vacuolated syncytium covering the supporting membranes of
the float. Z.C. Thread-cells. Ten. Fl. Tentacles of float. Ten. Pr.
Tentacles of proboscis. Zh.A. Thin area of wall of float around tentacle
base. w. The point where the ectoderm of the young medusa ruptures to
form the opening in the velum. @#. Nucleus in syncytium apparently
dividing. y. Point of attachment of subumbrellar epithelio-muscular layer to
endodermal lamella. z The place where the medusa was attached to the
stolon,
ON A FREE-SWIMMING HYDROID. 23
Figs. 1—17 inclusive refer to the hydroid stage of Pelagohydra
mirabilis; Figs. 18—25 inclusive refer to the medusoid stage of the same.
Fic. 1.—The free-swimming hydroid, from a sketch of the living animal.
Mig. d
Fic. 2.—External view of a piece cut out of the preserved specimen,
showing the arrangement of the proboscis tentacles, etc. Xx 7.
Fic. 3.—Three adjacent tentacles of the float, showing variation in shape,
from the preserved specimen.
Fie. 4.—Portion of the surface of the float, much enlarged, showing the
stolons with the developing meduse, lying between thie bases of the tentacles.
Fig. 5.—The preserved specimen after removal of a portion of the wall,
showing the gastral cavity, septum, float cavity, supporting membranes of
float, endodermal canals, etc. x 4.
Fre. 6.—Internal view of the piece represented in Fig. 2, showing septum,
longitudinal gastral ridges, endodermal canals, etc. x 7.
ie. 7.—Portion of the same turned so as to show the under surface of
the septum, with the annular fold of endoderm and the openings of the
endodermal canals into the main gastral cavity. x 7.
Fic. 8.—Diagrammatic longitudinal section through a portion of the wall,
showing the relations of the internal cavities, septum, endodermal canals,
supporting membranes, tentacles, stolon, medusa buds, etc.
* Fig. 9.—Part of a transverse section of the wall of the proboscis, through
the bases of the larger tentacles and the longitudinal gastral ridges of the
endoderm. Drawn under Zeiss objective A, oc. 2, camera outlines.
Fic. 10.—Portion of a transverse section similar to and near the last, to
show especially the arrangement of the muscle-fibres. Drawn under Zeiss
objective D, oc. 2, camera outlines.
Vie. 11.—Portion of a transverse section of one of the longitudinal gastral
ridges, showing the endodermal epithelial cells continued into. muscle-fibres.
Drawn under Zeiss objective F, oc. 2,
Fic. 12.—Part of a transverse section through the wall of the float,
showing an endodermal canal continued outwards into a stolon, and giving
rise to supporting membranes of the float by means of groups of cells budded
off from its lining epithelium. Drawn under Zeiss objective C, oc. 2, camera
outlines (slightly diagrammatic).
Fic. 13.—Part of a transverse section of a supporting membrane from the
interior of the float, showing the mesoglceal layer covered on each side by a
syncytium, here collected on one side into a rounded multinucleate mass of
protoplasm. Drawn under Zeiss objective F, oc. 2, camera outlines.
Fic, 14.—Surface view of one of the supporting membranes of the float,
24. ARTHUR DENDY.
showing syncytium and nuclei. Drawn under Zeiss objective F, oc. 2, camera
outlines.
Fic. 15.—Part of a transverse section of a tentacle from the float. Drawn
under Zeiss objective D, oc. 3, camera outlines.
Fie. 16.—Part of the ectoderm layer from a section similar to the last.
Drawn under Zeiss objective F, oc. 2, camera outlines.
Fic. 17.—Two thread-cells with their cnidoblasts and cnidopods, from one
of the tentacles of the float. Drawn under Zeiss objective F, oc. 2.
(In Figs, 18—21 inclusive, showing stages in the development of the
meduse, the histology is, for the sake of clearness, rendered diagrammatic-
ally ; the endoderm is shaded; the external ectoderm is unshaded, and the
ectoderm of the endocodon and its derivatives is unshaded but has the nuclei
represented by dots. All are drawn, with the aid of the camera lucida, under
Zeiss objective D, oc. 2.)
Fic. 18.—Two young medusa buds seen in longitudinal section,—B before
the formation of the endocodon; C with the endocodon and manubrium
developing. (Owing to slight obliquity of the sections, the cavity of the
stolon is not shown.)
Fie. 19.—Slightly older medusa bud in longitudinal section.
Fie. 20.—Still older medusa bud in longitudinal section, with a very young
bud also springing from the same stolon at A.
Fic. 21.—Transverse section of a medusa bud a little older than the last,
showing the radial canals, etc.
Tie. 22.—Side view of one of the oldest meduse found. Drawn from
spirit specimen under Zeiss objective A, oc. 1, as a transparent object.
Fie. 23.—Oral view of similar specimen under similar conditions. The
mouth of the bell is now visible in the middle of the velum, between the four
tentacle-bearing arms.
Fic. 24.—Aboral view of similar specimen under similar conditions,
showing the four radial canals, subumbrellar musculature, etc.
lic. 25.—Transverse section of a medusa of about the same age. Drawn
under Zeiss objective A, oc. 3, camera outlines.
Nore.—The microscopical sections were all stained with borax carmine.
UBRARY |
ae OF THE |
| GNivee’""Y GF ILLINOIS
Say
y )
4
:
)
& ‘
=
Ss
go
: if |
a if
Sm
2a .
ba P
a La ba :
- wt se. |
Ti “n .
*
ta» “ F
te ae
ont
2
ro
>
d
n
Arthur De
rp
ian fis | 6 ~~ ee . - vo ; re,
as Aen
LONS PL]
NP % te of
NM —— cre gt 3
4 DiGi® oO ese iy Rig
4
fel hs Re Bg 7
en
LIBRARY |
OF THE “ar
| biivEy “Y oF ILLINOIS | oe
&
ME
acon
Arthur Dendy del,
* London.
Ps
1, Lit
Hutl
E
©
~
:
.
cy
ate
7 ce {LLINOIS
LIBRARY
OF 1 HE
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 25
Studies in the Retina.
_ Parts III, IV, and V, with Summary.!
By
Henry M. Bernard, M.A.Cantab.
(rom the Biological Laboratories of the Royal College of Science, London.)
With Plates 83—5.
Part III.
The Migration of the Retinal Nuclei.
In this third part I had hoped to have dealt further with
the material absorbed by the rods from the pigmented
epithelium ; two important points, however, demand im-
mediate attention. In Part I, in referring to the migration
of the nuclei, I slightly misquoted Borysiekiewitz’s observa-
tions, and in Part II I left a serious gap in the description of
the outer ends of the developing rods. ‘They were shown in
the figures (e. g. Pl. 31, fig. 29) as if truncated, just, indeed,
as they appeared in the sections. This gap I am now in a
position to fill (see Part IV), while Part V will describe the
fate of the absorbed pigment.
Referring to the migration of the nuclei from the middle
nuclear to the outer nuclear layer in Part I (p. 44), astonish-
ment was expressed that it had not been noticed before.
The only observer who, so far as I am aware, had called
1 For Parts I and II see this Journat, vol. xliii, 1900, p. 23, and vol. xliv,
1901, p. 443.
voL. 46, part 1.—NEW SERIES. Sa
26 H. M. BERNARD.
attention to the phenomenon is Borysiekiewitz.1_ This writer
recorded two evidences of migration (‘‘ Ortswechsel”) of
nuclei in the human retina. Nuclei wandered outwards—(1)
from the outer nuclear layer into the basal limbs of the cones,
an observation which was not new; and (2) from the middle
nuclear layer through the outer reticular layer. I then added
that in this latter case ‘it was the characters of the migrated
nuclei, exactly like those of the layer they had left, and not
at all lke those of the layer into which they had moved,
which convinced him that migration must have taken place.”
The similarity of these nuclei had been so often noticed by
myself as a convincing proof that the wuclei embedded in the
outer reticular layer were passing through it, to become
transformed into rod nuclei, that after reading Borysiekiewitz’s
two treatises, and finding that he had also noticed the
migration, I inadvertently attributed to him an observation
which, however, he does not make. He only indirectly
indicates it in his quotation from Dogiel, who recognised a
layer of “ subepithelial nerve-cells”? in the outer nuclear
layer, i. e. a layer of “cells” exactly similar to those on the
other side of the outer reticular layer, called by Dogiel?
“the bipolar cells of the ganglion retine.’’? Borysiekiewitz
remarks that such cells are probably merely his migrated
nuclei,® but rightly adds that they do not form a “ layer.”
Borysiekiewitz was himself convinced of the migration of
the nuclei by finding a tract (I. c., p. 37) in one of his pre-
parations in which the middle nuclear layer changed from two
rows into one row and then back again; but where it was in
a single row, the missing nuclei were visible either in, or on
the outer side of, the reticular layer (for a parallel case see
fig. 19, with description). This valuable observation shows
1 *Weitere Untersuchungen tber den feineren Bau der Netzhaut,’ Wien,
1894.
2 * Archiv f. mikro. Anat.,’ 38, p. 317.
% Borysiekiewitz uses the word “ Korn,” which does not exactly mean
nucleus, but in this connection it is practically the nuclei alone about which
anything can be definitely stated. The point will be dealt with in my next
paper.
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. oF
that the migration of the nuclei from the middle nuclear
layer into the outer, which I described for the Amphibia, occurs
also in the human retina; and indeed, I may add, it occurs in
all the vertebrate eyes I have yet examined.
Borysiekiewitz’s own theory of the essential structure of
the retina, in the light of which this migration finds no ex-
planation, is very different from mine. According to him,
these nuclei are inside the “ Miiller’s fibres,” in the more fluid
axial portions of which they can move. The outermost ends
of these radial fibres are, according to his view, the rods and
cones. So that the migration of the nuclei beyond the outer
reticular layer is a kindred phenomenon with their movement
beyond the membrana limitans externa into the basal limbs
of the “‘ cones,” both being mere shiftings outward along the
axes of the “ Miiller’s fibres.” The comparative study of the
“ Miiller’s fibres,” which will be found in Part V, makes the
acceptance of this description impossible. I may add that
the only difference which Borysiekiewitz can see between the
rods and cones of the human retina, is that the latter are
those tips of the Miiller’s fibres into which nuclei have
migrated beyond the membrana limitans externa. There is
no observable difference in the lengths of their outer limbs.
Confining ourselves to the migration of the nuclei, we may
review the position of the argument as far as it was advanced
in Partsland II. Inthe Amphibia migration from the middle
to the outer nuclear layer can not only be seen—(1) in the
actual passage of nuclei through the outer reticular layer
(Part I, Pl. 3, fig. 5, e,f, and Part IT, Pl. 31, figs. 23, 24, 25),
and (2) in the exact similarity of those in the outer nuclear
layer which are not yet rod nuclei, but still close up against
the onter reticular layer with certain nuclei in the outermost
edge of the middle nuclear layer (see Part II, Pl. 380,
fig. 16, b), but is a necessary assumption in order to account
for the number of new rods required by the growing retina.
A short migration within the outer nuclear layer can be
seen in the fact that the “ cone” nuclei, as the cones assume
the definitive rod-form, move outwards from near the outer
28 : H. M. BERNARD.
reticular layer towards the membrana limitans externa. The
only possible escapes from the assumption that when the
original supply in the outer nuclear layer has been exhausted,
fresh supplies migrate outwards from the middle nuclear
layer are two: (1) if it could be shown that the layer of rods
and cones with their nuclei grows only at the edges; and (2)
if it could be shown that the nuclei for the new rods are pro-
duced by the division of those already composing the outer
nuclear layer.
With regard to the former of these alternatives, it is
certainly true that the retina as a whole does grow mainly at
the edges. I am not, indeed, now inclined to lay very much
stress upon the argument used in Part I, that if growth
took place only at the sides, the eye would not keep its
shape, for growth at the sides alone would, I thought,
merely carry up those sides, and the eyes would be funnel-
shaped rather than round cup-shaped. ‘This argument would
perhaps hold if no other factors were present which could
help to keep the retina hemispherical. There is, however,
another traceable factor, the full force of which I did not
then see. I refer to the vitreous humour which, as a collec-
tion of semi-fluid matter in the hollow of the eye, would, if
the supply is kept up at any pressure, compel its flexible
walls to adopt the normal shape. But though this is a
possible factor in keeping the growing retina round, the
argument which refers the persistence of its shape to its own
growth-processes can hardly be put altogether on one side,
for it is a fact that cones, 1. e. new rods, can be seen forming
over the whole Amphibian retina at all stages of its
erowth, and even in the eyes of adults.
Secondly, the suggestion that the nuclei for new rods
might be supplied by the division of those already present
can be met by a decided negative. In embryonic eyes
(Mammalia), or in amphibian eyes before they are functional
(see fig. 5), i.e. before any rods are formed, and only the
merest traces of vesicular protrusions are to be seen,
divisions of nuclei occur over the whole retina in the outer-
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 29
most layers. But as soon as and wherever vesicles are pro-
duced and rods begin to be developed out of them, a
process which always takes place first in the centre of the
retina and spreads outward from the centre, no divisions
normally take place. In order to ascertain this point, I
have examined the retinas of tadpoles (toads and frogs)
killed at almost all hours of day and night.! Nuclear
divisions were very numerous in the tadpoles killed in the
night, and sometimes in those killed in the daytime. A
study of them makes it quite safe to affirm that nuclear
division is normally confined to the edges of the retina,
that is, to those parts where there are no traces, or
only the faintest traces, of vesicular protrusions, although
one may just occasionally be seen dividing a short way within
the zone where the vesicular protrusions are beginning.” This
result is obtained from so many amphibian retinas that I
have no hesitation in affirming that after the rods have begun
to develop, nuclear divisions are never found normally in the
layer of rod nuclei. This is, of course, what we should have
theoretically expected, that cells specialised for some active
function are incapable of mitotic division.
We are, then, debarred from finding the source of the nuclei
for new rods in the nuclear layer itself. Hence the new nuclei
required must come into the outer nuclear layer from without,
i.e. from the middle nuclear layer, by migration through
the outer reticular layer ; and these migrating nuclei, whether
the retina grows mainly at the edges or not, must be many
thousands, considering the great numbers of “ cones” found
in the central regions in all stages of its growth.
‘This, then, brings us face to face with the question, Whence
does the middle nuclear layer obtain the large supply
necessary to furnish the outer nuclear layer with so many ?
No one will suggest that the supply could be kept up from
the “ganglionic cell” layer, which in the central regions is
1 Viz, at almost every hour of the night, from 4 p.m. to 6 a.m.
* They are occasionally found in young fish retinas, even within the already
functioning central region !
30 Hi. M. BERNARD.
seldom more than one deep. It is true that nuclei from this
layer do pass through the thick inner reticular layer to the
middle nuclear layer. Most sections will show, as has been
often noted before and variously interpreted, one or two
actually within the inner reticular layer. Further, all sections
show a number of nuclei in the innermost rows of the middle
nuclear layer so like the “ ganglionic cells” that they have
been recently freely claimed as being “ ganglionic,” 1. e.
as of much the same functional activity as the nuclei of the
innermost layer, which has always been the “ ganglionic
cell” layer of authors. Although this resemblance need not
necessarily have anything to do with the question of migra-
tion, there cannot, to my mind, be any doubt but that the
“ oanelionic cell” layer is drawn upon by the middle nuclear
layer, and may, indeed, for considerable tracts, be quite ex-
hausted (compare fig. 22, g.l. in a, 6, andc). But such
a supply, at its best, would be insufficient to counterbalance
the drain on the middle nuclear layer. Further, as in the
case of the layer of rod nuclei, no mitotic divisions are found
in the “ ganglionic cell” layer after the eye has once become
functional.?
We have therefore to seek elsewhere for the supply of
nuclei required by the middle layer to enable it to send so
many outwards through the outer reticular layer to become
the nuclei of the new rods. One would think the most
probable source for these nuclei would be the division of
those already composing the layer, but here again we are
baffled, for divisions do not occur, at least near or in the
places where they are wanted. Indeed, the primary object I
had in view in examining retinas killed at all hours of the night
was to ascertain whether it was not possible that, as no
divisions were ever seen in this layer in retinas killed during
1 Thave seen a few traces of fragmentation which deserve attention, but
hardly wide-spread enough to meet the present difficulty. See also Borysie-
kiewitz’s figures (‘Untersuchungen itiber den feineren Bau der Netzhaut,’
p. 19, 1887), which represent “twin ganglion cells.” They certainly suggest
divisions of these cells, but are capable of a different interpretation.
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 31
the day, they might take place during the night, when
the eye is at rest. This, however, as above stated, proves
not to be the case; no divisions occur in the middle nuclear
layer, except near the edges of the retina, where it is not
possible to speak of the middle layer because the two reticular
layers which separate the retinal nuclei into zones only begin
where the rods and cones are themselves commencing to
form.
We have, then, no other source, except this undifferentiated
rim, for the enormous number of nuclei required by the middle
nuclear layer in order to keep up the supply of rod nuclei
required by the growing retina. A few, one here and there,
as we have seen, may be obtained from the innermost,
or the “‘ ganglionic cell’’ layer, but none from divisions of
those already present. The real supply must come, as stated,
from the rim of the retina; and however startling the idea may
at first appear, we have to assume a stream of nucleifrom
the undifferentiated edges of the retina towards
the base of the cup. Further, as long as growth lasts,
this streaming must be considerable, for in addition to the
supply of nuclei for the formation of new rods, the thickness
of the middle layer is kept up, even though the layer itself
has to expamd greatly as the eye grows larger. Indeed, it
has not only to extend as the eye grows, but, as compared
with the bulk of the layer in very young eyes, it may also
greatly thicken. Sections of small retinas (of tadpoles) about
0°5 mm. in diameter may show the middle layer in the central
region only three nuclei deep, while eyes over 1 mm. in diameter
may show it six nuclei deep; in the adult frog a layer four
deepis very common. But I do not think that much import-
ance can be laid upon these variations in thickness, as they
are probably accidents of nourishment and growth. It is
quite possible that at times the supply of fresh nuclei may be
greater than the immediate demand, in which case the layer
would temporarily thicken; or in times of bad nourishment
1 Apparently in all eyes, except in the ‘‘ fovea centralis ” of human and
ape retiuas.
32 H. M. BERNARD.
the supply might be less than the demand, and the layer in
consequence thin away. The really important fact is that we
find ourselves compelled to assume a migration of nuclei
ona very large scale. Not only can it be shown that nuclei
travel outwards through the outer reticular layer in great
numbers to become rod nuclei, but that all the nuclei destined
for this function have, at least after the original supply has
been used up, to travel down from the edge of the retina
along the middle nuclear layer to their ultimate destinations.
In addition to these movements it can be shown that
nuclei of the so-called “ ganglionic cell” layer occasionaily
travel outwards through the thick inner reticular layer until
in old eyes (g.l., ig. 21) they may be almost entirely used up.
Our investigations into the growth-processes of the retinas
of some score of frog- and toad-tadpoles having thus
eliminated all other possible sources for the nuclei of new
rods required by the central regions of the retina except this
immigration from the rim, it remains for us to see what direct
or indirect evidence there is for such an unexpected
phenomenon, not as an occasional, but as a normal growth-
process. It is hardly likely that such a movement could take
place without showing visible traces,—without leaving its
mark on the tectonics of the retina itself. We shall now see
that this surmise is fully justified.
The divisions take place in early growth-stages along the
whole of the rim into the iris, but are most numerous in the
angle between the iris and the cup of the retina. To this
angle, as the iris becomes differentiated, they are usually con-
fined. They also take place chiefly, though not exclusively, in
the outermost row of nuclei, in what I have elsewhere called
the palisade layer. Inthe part where the divisions are active
it is common to find the large, radially arranged, more or
less spindle-shaped nuclei attached either to the internal or
to the external limiting membrane by a frequently thick stain-
ing cytoplasmic strand. The nuclei are usually so numerous as
to obscure the sections, so that one cannot state that these
strands, each with its suspended nucleus, run distinct and
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 33
isolated from membrane to membrane. All that is really
important at the present moment is to note that the nuclei in
the region of active division are attached to one or other of
the “ limiting membranes ”’ by definite strands which are only
found in this undifferentiated rim.
Now these strands can often be seen showing the following
interesting arrangement-:—On the axial side of this area of
nuclear division, and just where the differentiation of the
retina into zones 1s commencing, the nuclei, still for the most
part having retained their spindle shapes, are seen to be
arranged in slight curves (figs. 1 and 2) ; the two ends of the
curves are attached by these strands to the hmiting mem-
branes, and their middle parts bulge outwards towards the axis
of the eye. This curving might easily be passed over, and
when seen it might be considered as a purely accidental phe-
nomenon. It is far more probable, however, that it is normal,
and due to the process we are discussing, viz. the tendency of
the nuclei to travel from the rim towards the functional
axial region of the retina. It is clear that the curving could
be so explained.
Again, comparisons of the different thicknesses of the middle
nuclear layer at different parts of the retina and at different
stages in its growth tell the same story of movement. We
always find that the layer is thickest near the rim where the
nuclei produced by division are crowding into it, and thinnest
in and near the centre where the nuclei are presumably in
most demand. Further, the variations in thickness of this
layer in the central region at different stages of growth
clearly show fluctuations in the numbers and changes in the
positions of its component nuclei.
If the nuclei from the undifferentiated rim have, then, this
tendency to stream inwards towards the axis, it is clearly
those occupying the middle ranks in the retina which would
be the freest to move, and which therefore would travel
fastest. Those of the innermost ranks will be more firmly
attached to the internal hmiting membrane, and may,
perhaps, be further entangled by the developing nerve-layer,
voL. 46, part 1.—-NEW SERIES. C
34 H. M. BERNARD. |
while externally the nuclei are for the most part functioning
as rod nuclei. It would thus be only a band of nuclei dowr
the middle which would be freest to travel towards the axis.
This fact gives us a clue to the origin of the zonal arrange-
ment of the retina into alternating nuclear and reticular layers.
It is fairly clear that if a band of nuclei travelled along
between two stationary layers such as the innermost and
outermost layers in an amphibian retina, and if, when they
started, they had cytoplasmic attachments to the limiting
membranes, they would almost certainly leave traces of those
attachments trailed along on each side of the stream, and the
accumulations of the trailings would separate them from
the stationary fringing layers. We get, indeed, in this
somewhat startling and unexpected manner a perfectly in-
telligible reason for the existence of the two reticular layers.
It is unexpected because, considering that all these cyto-
plasmic strands are living protoplasm, it would appear more
natural if they had readjusted themselves in the retina, letting
the nuclei pass on. ‘The evidence, however, shows clearly
that this is not the case, and that they are to a large extent
trailed along and assist in the formation, at least, of the
inner reticular layer. I say “assist ” because they appa-
rently only form its cytoplasmic basis; other elements, as we
shall see later on, contribute to the final result.
In studying thin sections of retinas of tadpoles I had
often been struck by the fact that from the extreme end of
the inner reticular layer irregular threads went off and
curved inwards towards the membrana limitans interna, This
is more striking in some cases than in others. Figs. 1 and 2
are sufficient to show what is meant, but in some cases I have
seen it so marked that it looked as if the inner reticular
layer took its origin, at each end of the section, from
the internal limiting membrane, sometimes almost shutting
off the layer of “ganglionic cells” from those of the un-
differentiated rim. ‘This appearance greatly puzzled me
until the discovery of the migration of the nuclei made
it clear that these threads which joined the inner reticular
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 35
layer to the internal membrane were the remains of the
attachments of the originally spindle-shaped nuclei which
had moved away down the middle nuclear layer.
More conclusive still is the fact that every now and then
a section is found in which the nuclei of the middle layer,
especially near the rim, are actually caught trailing irregular
tangles of cytoplasmic threads in the manner shown in figs. 1
and 2. This can be seen with some frequency, though by
no means always, because it is probably a matter of accident
whether the particular retina happened, at the moment
it was fixed, to be in the exact phase of its life activities
which required such movements. For it is hardly likely that
the inward streamings of nuclei are continuous; periods of
rest would probably intervene. However seldom they occur
there is no mistaking their significance.
Still keeping the movement of the nuclei in view, it is
worth while paying further attention to the inner reticular
layer. We find that the early stages in its appearance
show differences which, though at first disconcerting, are yet
on the whole entirely confirmatory. The earliest stages which
I have so far seen are shown in figs.5, 6,and 7, which [interpret
as follows:—The nuclei, which had been fairly evenly dis-
tributed through the retina, and not tightly squeezed together
(see fig. 7), gradually separate along the line which will be
later occupied by the inner reticular layer, the larger half
migrating outwards. A row, two or three deep, remains
against the internal limiting membrane, although one or two
even of these, in the axis of the eye, may escape outwards,
leaving a gap in the innermost layer (figs. 5 and 6). he great
mass of the nuclei gradually move, as stated, outwards, but the
very outermost can at the most move but a few micromilli-
metres, being arrested at once by the pigment epithelium.
The rest, therefore, leaving a few stragglers, crowd up close
behind, with the result that the irregular but conspicuous rent,
just described, occurs in the previously uniform nuclear ranks.
This rent in its early stages seems to be mainly occupied by
rounded vesicles, at least in the retina from which fig. 7 was
36 H. M. BERNARD.
drawn, but later becomes filled with a rather loose tangle of
staining matter, composed mainly of the cytoplasmic frame-
work in which the nuclei were suspended. ‘These phases not
only reveal the outward movement of the nuclei, but also show
that it is not due to pressure such as might be exerted from
a region of active division. ‘he nuclei in these sections
can only have moved outwards under the action of some
attraction. This fact, that the force bringing about these
migrations is attractive, is important, though we cannot stop
at the present moment to develop it further.
A slightly later phase in the formation of the inner
reticular layer can be seen in figs. 3 and 4. The irregulari-
ties seen in the layer in its first appearance, as a reticulum |
filling up asplit among the ranks of the nuclei, asjust described,
have become more definable as tongues running out among
the outwardly pressing nuclei. In one case (fig. 4) several
tongues appear of nearly equal size, although the one which
appeared to be nearly in the axis of the eye was the largest.
In another case (fig. 3) this axial tongue was very much larger
than any of the others. As will be seen from the direction
of the arrows in this latter figure, I explain these phenomena
as due to the migration of nuclei from the sides. ‘The
attraction which first drew the nuclei from their original
positions in the embryonic retina to press outwards has
extended and drawn nuclei from the peripheral portions of
the retina which have not yet begun to function. This com-
bined centripetal and outward movement of the nuclei would
naturally give the rudiments of the inner reticular layer the
shapes which they assume in these sections. That this
movement is taking place in the direction of the arrows
may be gathered from the closeness with which the nuclei
in these sections are packed in the central and more actively
functioning region as compared with their straggling and
loose arrangement elsewhere.
We have to add to this evidence, each item of which seems
fairly conclusive, the fact that the inner reticular layer grows
thicker as it slowly reaches the adult condition, and not
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 37
only thicker but very much more extensive without the
appearance of any special formative cells which would
account for it.! If, however, the nuclei of the middle layer,
each with more or less cytoplasm trailing behind it, do
actually move along from the rim of the retina towards the
axis, we can account not only for the gradual thickening of
the inner reticular layer as the eye grows, but also for its
curious stratification, which is sometimes very striking.
The layer reaches its definitive thickness when the eye has
ceased to grow and no more nuclei are produced at the rim.
So far, however, we have only considered the inner
reticular layer, but there are two such layers, as there should
be if the mechanics of their formation here sketched be
correct. If correct, it supplies us also with an explanation
of the fact that the two reticular layers are always co-
extensive with the region of rod-formation, only appearing
where the vesicles are being protruded. A slight difficulty,
however, now arises. If these layers are produced by the
nuclei travelling down the middle layer from the rim towards
the centre, why is not the reticular layer on the outer side of
the stream as thick as that on the inner? An answer may
be suggested which is probably correct, although it would
be difficult to bring any evidence for or against it. Great
numbers of the nuclei travelling on the outer side are
arrested as they go and pass into the layer of rod nuclei.
These might be expected to take all the cytoplasm they
could with them as the formative substance of the vesicular
protrusions which they are destined to send out from the
retina for the formation of their rods. Hence it is probable
that the greater part of the cytoplasmic reticulum which
would otherwise be accumulated here as a counterpart of
the inner reticular layer is carried outwards and used up
1 J have never seen any indication of the rows of small, faintly outlined,
formative cells such as Borysiekiewitz (|. c.) describes for the inner reticular
layer in human retinas; whenever nuclei do occur in the layer, in all the eyes
I have examined, they are always quite distinct, and to be regarded as migrat-
ing outwards from the ‘‘ ganglionic cell”? layer.
38 H. M. BERNARD.
in the production of rods. This seems to be a possible
explanation of the difficulty. Some traces of an outer
reticular layer, however, there always are, and doubtless
here again the retinal cytoplasm forms its basis, and only its
basis. In a future paper I shall show that neither of the
reticular layers is a homogeneous structure ; the outer layer,
indeed, presents several difficult problems. In fig. 3, 0.7., we
already see signs of accumulations of deeply staining matter
along the line of the future outer reticular layer. These
accumulations, which we shall meet with again in Part V,
are apparently in some way due to the functioning of the
nuclei, for it 1s obvious they cannot, from their position, be
due to any merely mechanical streaming movements.
In the very existence of these two reticular layers, as well
as in their stratified texture, in their attachments round the rim
by threads to the membrana limitans interna, and in the shapes
they assume during early growth, we find strong evidence of
the migration of the nuclei, which is the subject we have
specially in hand.1. We may sum up the arguments briefly :
(1) the nuclei of the adult rods protrude a little beyond the
membrana limitans externa ; (2) the nuclei of the cones, which
(in Amphibia) are early stages in the formation of new rods,
move gradually outwards from near the outer reticular layer
towards the membrana limitans externa as their rods de-
velop; (3) no nuclear division takes place in this layer where
rods and cones are developing ; the nuclei for the further pro-
duction of rods come through the outer reticular layer from
the middle nuclear layer; (4) no nuclear division takes place
in this middle layer anywhere near the axial portion of the
retina, and the supply must be kept up by migration from
the sides. A very few may come through the inner reticular
layer from the layer of “ ganglionic cells,” but the bulk of
1 We shall refer to some of the very discordant views which have been put
out as to the origin and constitution of these layers when we come to deal
with them in detail. In the meantime a useful summary may be found in the
Literatur- Verzeichniss to Borysiekiewitz’s first paper, ‘ Untersuchungen
iiber den feineren Bau der Netzhaut,’ 1887, notes 19—27.
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 39
those required travel along the middle nuclear layer from the
undifferentiated rim of the retina where nuclear division is
active during growth. Thus a stream of nuclei travels
inwards from this undifferentiated rim towards the axis along
the middle nuclear layer; (5) this stream of nuclei lays
the foundation for the two reticular layers of the retina; the
cytoplasmic trailings of the nuclei being, as it were, swept to
the sides of the stream, accumulate, but while the inner
accumulation persists the outer is mostly used up, probably
in the formation of the rod-vesicles.
Before leaving the subject for the present, I should like to
call attention to the conviction which I expressed in Part II,
p. 452, that the retina is a syncytium, in the reticulum of
which nuclei are suspended, and that it is almost impossible
to speak of “cells” in connection with its component
elements. ‘The streaming of the nuclei and the trailing
behind them of cytoplasmic tangles, which trailings
accumulate as the eye grows, may, I think, be regarded as
complete justification for this conviction. I had not for-
gotten and do not forget the large “ ganglionic cells,”
which appear to supply an easy refutation. On the contrary,
it was a prolonged study of these same “ cells”? which first
led me to this conclusion, as I shall relate in detail in a
future paper.
Lastly, I should like to venture the suggestion that the
principle here established for the retina may be of wide
application, although I cannot hear of any other exemplifica-
tion of it as yet known. The principle is this: an organ
has to continue to grow after it has begun to func-
tion. Assuming that nuclei or cells are incapable of mitotic
division when once specialised for some highly complex
function, we should be compelled to postulate an undifferen-
tiated region which would persist as long as growth lasts.
From this region, which would be the centre of active nuclear
or cell division, the new elements required by the functioning
and growing area would have to migrate, through longer
or shorter distances according to the exigencies of the
AA) H. M. BERNARD.
particular case. Further, as in the case of the retina, these
migrations may have considerable influence on the tectonics
of the organs in which they can be established.
Part IV.
On the Vesicular Swellings at the Tips of the
“Cones” and some Harlier Form-phases in Rod-
production in the Amphibia.
As was shown in Part I,! the tips of the young cones swelied
into vesicles on reaching the pigment layer. Vesicles or parts
of vesicles were figured (PI. 3, figs. 2, 3, and 10), and these justi-
fied the construction of the series of form-changes shown in
the diagram (fig. 4), but they were only certainly seen in eyes
fixed with boiling corrosive sublimate. Other figures on the
same plate (e.g. fig. 12, and on Pl. 31, Part II,? fe. 29)
showed no traces of any such vesicular tips, and in some
cases it was difficult to understand why, if they had existed,
they should vanish so completely from the sections. This
point has now been settled, not, I regret to say, by the
discovery of a new and more perfect fixative, but by a kind
of good fortune. I brought down a few tadpoles from
Table Mountain, Cape Town, killed and fixed them in
Perenyi’s fluid at midnight, i.e. when the pigment would
be retracted. 'The object was to see whether, owing to the
brilliant sunlight of South Africa and the intense heat, the
pigmentation in the retina showed any modifications on that
seen in our indigenous tadpoles, and if so whether any
correlated changes in the retina could be discovered. For
the same reason | made special efforts to obtain baboon’s
eyes (see Part V).
One interesting difference was at once apparent. ‘The
pigment in the South African tadpoles is far greater in
1 This Journal, vol. xliti, 1900, p. 28.
? Ibid., vol. xliv, 1901, p. 448.
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 41
quantity and of a very much darker brown. The colour is in
striking contrast with the reddish brown which is most
common over here. But this was not all; probably in corre-
lation with this increase in mass and quality of the pigment
the rods were also different (see figs. 8,9, and 10), in that
the longitudinal striation is so marked that it can be seen at
once with alow power. Cross-sections of rods which seem
to be somewhat thin, 4 u across, often tapering to 3 py, show
a thick, straggling, branching, and knotted strand running
down the axis of each rod as the representative of the axial
reticulum, and connected irregularly with the dark stria
running down the wall. Here and there the greater part of
the axis of the rod is taken up by a mass of dull grey homo-
geneous matter, in which case the axial reticulum is appa-
rently represented by clumps at the sides, but it usually
comes into view again on focussing up or down. ‘These grey
masses in the rods are the remains of material absorbed from
the pigment granules (see fig. 8, with description).
Apparently correlated with these strongly developed
staining striz is the fact that the rods, though very thin, are
comparatively speaking tough; for, quite unlike those in our
own species of Amphibia, which break up so easily and
usually part at the junction of the inner and outer limbs, in
these eyes, where the retina and choroid have parted, they
are drawn intact out of the dense pigment.
Turning to the cones, we fortunately find that their vesi-
cular tips share in this greater toughness. Very many of
these latter, it is true, have broken down and have been
reduced to a granular mash which is very conspicuous, but
places such as those figured (figs. 9 and 10) might be
multiplied to any extent. ‘I'he vesicles are shrunken, and it
is largely owing to the folds in their walls that they are
visible. Some seem to have clear traces of rows of dots
running down them which remind one of the rows of dots on
the longitudinal striz of the rods. In optical section the
wall of the shrunken vesicle could often be traced quite
plainly into that of the cone (fig. 10).
42 H. M. BERNARD.
We conclude, then, that in all young amphibian eyes, in
which the rod layer seems to consist mainly of cones ending
at some distance from the pigment, the apparently vacant
space between the truncated cone-tips and the pigment is, in
life, filled up by a compact mass of swollen vesicles. ‘These
vesicles are, however, so exquisitely delicate that the process
of fixation and hardening destroys them almost completely.
But I should add that now that I have seen the vesicles in
the Table Mountain specimens, I have been able to discover,
in sections of our native forms, several cone-tips running out
into faint diverging threads. wy
Another peculiarity in the retinas of these Table Mountain
tadpoles deserves mention. In Part I, p. 34, [remarked in a
note that the only long-necked elements which I could find in
frogs’ retinas at all resembling the long-necked “cones” figured
by van Genderen Stort (‘Quain’s Anatomy,’ 10th ed., vol. ii,
part 3, p. 48) were those which appeared in each case as one of
the so-called twin or double cones (see Pl. 3, fig. 5). Besides
these, the only elements with long inner limbs were Schwalbe’s
rods, in which the refractive globule had, as a rule, already
disappeared and the outer limbs had already become
cylindrical (Part I, Pl. 3, fig. 4,7). But in the retinas of
these ‘able Mountain tadpoles, cones with striking refrac-
tive globules like those figured by van Genderen Stort are
very plentiful, close down against the pigment layer. The
greater toughness of the walls may account for the persis-
tence of the shape in a phase where it is quite lost in our
native forms (see the phases Part I, fig. 4, c, andr). The
fact that the refractive globule is not so quickly absorbed
may be referred to the great quantities of pigment to be
dealt with (for the origin of this globule see Part IH, p. 468).
The transformation of these long-necked cones into rods is,
in some cases, very easy to follow. The conical portion
thickens and shortens, while the swollen vesicle at the tip
becomes cylindrical and the refractive globule disappears.
In fig. 9 elements like those on the right and left hand are
very common; that on the right shows a division in the
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. Ad
material filling the rod; the short innermost darker portion
clearly corresponds with the old staining tip of the cone
(cf. the sections indicated by asterisks). ‘he small numerals
_1—7 show a continuous developmental series illustrating the
transformation of long-necked cones into Schwalbe’s rods.
It was stated in Part I that the growth-forms (c¢,, ¢,, ¢,) of
the new rods shown in PI. 3, fig. 4, of that paper were due
to the fact that each new element on being protruded
had to force its way between tightly packed cylindrical
rods; obviously the new vesicle could only swell into a
sac after getting through, that is, against the pigment.
If this explanation be correct we should expect to find
other form-phases where the rods were not so long. A
much more direct transformation of cones into rods was,
indeed, figured in the series of elements supplied by the
axolotl], Part 1, Pl. 3, fig. 8.1. In this animal the rods are
very thick, and, compared with their thickness, very short.
Now it is interesting to note that we have at the sides of
tadpole retinas, where the rods get progressively shorter, a
very similar process of direct transformation of cones into
rods to that which we found in the axolotl. The distal
portion of the protruded cone seems to be neatly rounded off
(fig. 11), as if there had never been any swollen vesicle at
its tip. It is further quite distinctly striated longitudinally.’
Here, then, we have the cones chauging directly into rods by
the absorption of the refractive globule and the lengthening
of the outer limb at the expense of the inner. If we compare
this process closely with that occurring among the long rods
in the central regions of the retina (figs. 9 and 10), we find
that it differs in two points: (1) there is no long thin neck,
and consequently (2) there would appear to be no con-
spicuously swollen vesicle at the tip which would have ulti-
1 To make that figure true to life the tips of the cones in @ and J should
have been drawn with delicate vesicles, but all traces of such vesicles had
been destroyed in the actual sections.
2 Compare the dots seen on the distal vesicles shown in figs. 9 and 10, also
the remarks on the striation of the cones in Part LI, p. 455.
44, H. M. BERNARD.
mately to be brought into the typical cylindrical form. It is
easy to see that both these differences are due solely to the
fact that where the rods are long cylinders the protrusion
has to force its way between them, and only swells out into a
conspicuous vesicle after getting through.
Tt will be seen from the study of these details how important
it is to keep the compactness of the layer of rods very clearly
before the mind. The rod layer, in fact, arises as the result
of the thrusting out of great numbers of vesicles from the
retina, the vesicles only gradually assuming the long, cylin-
drical rod shape. The varying forms which the early stages
of new rods assume when first protruded, and until they are
finally developed, depend not only upon the forms, but
also upon the lengths of those among which they
have to force their way. We have now seen two of
these different series of form-changes, and it will be best in
this connection to record the observations made on still
earlier stages of growth, when the new vesicles are protruded,
not among rods, but among other vesicles which have not had
time to become rods. We shall see that whereas, when the
rods are formed, and their shapes fixed, new vesicles have
to adapt themselves entirely to them; while the rods are
still unformed and vesicular the protrusion of new vesicles
is able to modify their shapes. In the changes described in
Part I we saw that the protrusion of fresh cones altered the
shapes only of other cones, helping to change long cones
into Schwalbe’s rods, but that they had no apparent effect
upon finished rods.
‘The first appearance of rod-vesicles begins very early, as
soon as ever the eye begins to function. They can be seen in
various sizes in figs. 3 to 7, as round clear spaces against the
pigment. At first they are scattered and confused, because
all the nuclei do not secrete vesicles simultaneously (see
figs. 16, 17,and 18). A little later a stage is reached when
they are arranged side by side as large sacs mutually com-
pressing one another (figs. 12 and 15). It is at this
stage that our sections usually failus. Solong as the vesicles
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 45
are small and round their outlines are clear, being preserved,
no doubt, by the fixing of the pigment cells on the one hand,
and of the deep staining matter, which usually forms their
proximal walls, on the other (see figs. 17 and 18, where the
shaded vesicles represent deeply stained walls). As soon, how-
ever, as they lengthen out, the walls become so delicate that
they collapse under the violent processes of fixing, hardening,
and preparing the sections. It is common to find in young
eyes great empty spaces where the rod layer should be
between the retina and the pigment, the spaces occasion-
ally interrupted by single, short, thick, deeply staining
rod-like structures, one here and there having survived.
That elements of some form or other filled these gaps is
absolutely certain ; indeed, the ragged remains of membranes
can often be seen fringing the distal ends of the nuclei, and
protruding a little from the membrana limitans externa. A
great many sections show nothing but this, and one is apt to
become hopeless of ever seeing the vesicles which, in life, had
been crowded together in those gaps. On one occasion I
found one of these spaces occupied by a single large
vesicle with a complete pigment cell, which had left the pig-
ment epithelium, inside it. In time traces of long vesicles
become more frequent because they are supported and
preserved by being in contact with other more formed and
stronger elements (Part I, Pl. 3, fig. 16). It is when a
number of very fragile vesicles are mutually supporting and
squeezing one another that they disappear from our sections
leaving hardly a trace behind.
In sections of retinas killed at night I have succeeded at
last in finding vesicles intact. They are slightly mottled
and dotted over with stain, and I conclude that they owe
their preservation largely to this fact, viz. that their walls
were strengthened by this staining matter, as appears to have
been the case with the rods and the cone tips in the retinas
above referred to from Table Mountain. Fig. 12 shows a
group which have fortunately been preserved intact, and
fig. 13, a—e, are elements from the same retina.
46 H. M. BERNARD.
On looking at these our attention is at once arrested by
figs. a—c. We have apparently typical cones with their
points thrust into terminal vesicles. A little reflection, how-
ever, shows how such appearances could be easily produced
as transitory phases. To makeit clear I give a diagrammatic
series, fig, 14, a—d. a represents an unmodified vesicle
protruded as a long oval. ‘The pressure caused by the
gradual protrusion of new vesicles will be exerted upon a in
the direction of the arrows shown in b, with the result
that a will take the form shown by 6 (cf. the middle vesicle,
fig. 12). In the narrow neck of b staining matter accumu-
lates. Continuation of the pressure further lengthens the
neck, and at the same time the adding of new vesicles forces
back the pigment cells.}
In the stage c I have introduced a refractive globule,
which we may assume to have come out of the distal
vesicle as matter absorbed by it from the pigment, as ex-
plained at length in Part II. At this stage it is again the
turn of the element whose form-changes we are following to
receive another discharge from the retina or, as argued in
Part IJ, from its nucleus. ‘This discharge drives out the
staining matter which occupied the neck, so that it protrudes
into the distal vesicle. ‘The three figures 13, a—c, show
three distinct degrees of thrust, quite accidentally selected,
the figures having been drawn in the order shown in-the
plate before I was at all clear as to their meaning. In a,
only the narrow tip of the matter from the neck has been
pushed into the sac; in c, the tip and a portion of the
refractive globule, in this case the matter composing the tip
itself has been disarranged against the distal end of the
vesicle; in b, a larger portion of the staining matter still has
been thrust outwards into the sac. ‘These curious “ cones,”
1 This lengthening of the vesicles widens the distance between the pigment
layer and the body of the retina. The width is greatest in the centre of the
retina, and in very young eyes diminishes rapidly on either side. This is
certainly due to the greater activity of vesicle formation, i.e. of rod-produc-
tion in the area of most active functioning.
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 47
then, are due to the driving out of the staining matter which
had accumulated in the neck of the squeezed-up vesicle.
There is no telescoping of the membrane into itself. It is
simply another form of the phenomenon shown by asterisks
in fig. 9, where the original contents of what has hitherto been
thought to be the tip of the cone become the proximal portion
of the contents of the Schwalbe’s rod, which arises as soon
as the vesicle has assumed its cvlindrical shape. ‘I'he vesicle
assumes this latter shape apparently in both cases as it
becomes more and more turgid with matter received on the
one hand from the retina, and on the other from absorption
of pigment. The stages cand d in fig. 13 require no con-
necting links, d being the next stage produced by the filling
up of the distal vesicle. Still younger and simpler stages of
transformation of vesicles into rods are shown in fig. 15.
They need no comment.
Many interesting details of observations in relation to this
part of the subject might be added, but the task of dealing
with the retina of the Amphibia alone threatens to lengthen
ont so greatly that only points necessary to a clear under-
standing of the essential morphology of the retinas dealt
with can be mentioned.
How necessary it is to understand the minute details of
rod-formation I need hardly insist, that is if we are to make
any progress with our researches into the mechanics of vision,
for the rods are the specific structures which constitute
the retina the specific organ of this sense. Believing, as I
do, that all structures are produced both phylogenetically
and ontogenetically only in response to physiological needs,
I feel confident that in a case like this where the rods are
produced in situ, and only when required, their processes
of formation must throw lhght upon the mechanics of their
functional activities. Some further details relating to these
activities will be found in the next part.
48 H. M. BERNARD.
Part V.
On the Removal of the Absorbed Pigmentary
Matter from the Rods: an Explanation of the
“Miller’s Fibres.”
In Part II I described in detail a set of phenomena which
found their simplest interpretation in the assumption that
the protoplasmic vesicles, known as the rods, protruded by
the retina against the pigmented epithelium, absorbed the
pigmented granules, and at times also the cytoplasm of the
pigment cells. I propose in this paper to describe another
set of phenomena which indicate the way in which the rods
are freed from the excess of matter thus absorbed.
My results differ somewhat widely from any hitherto pub-
lished, and especially from those obtained by the now popular
impregnation methods, and I ought, perhaps, to make some
excuse for not testing those other methods myself. My
answer, I fear, can only be an apology. I selected the
purely comparative method deliberately as the only absolutely
certain way of obtaining hght on intricate morphological
problems, but the method is slow and laborious, and I grudge
the time necessary to become an adept in the use of others,
the results of which have still to be interpreted.
The pigmented matter was, as we saw, absorbed through
the walls of the outer limbs, and some of it found its way
through the transverse membranes into the inner limbs,
where it helped to form the bodies known as the ellipsoids.
Part of the absorbed matter, then, finds its way through
the transverse membrane into the inner limb. Here, unless
it can find some further method of escape, it must accumulate
and cause the inner limb to swell. No such swelling of
the inner limb takes place in the Amphibia, but it is a
striking phenomenon in many fish. This is the explanation
of their “ giant cones” which are so startling when seen for
the first time (see figs. 20, b, and 21).
ce
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 49
- Although the rods and cones in the fish are not our special
subjects in this paper, it will be necessary to enter into a few
details with regard to them. In the very young the elements
are seen to be nearly all of uniform size, with apparently the
same form-phases in their production as we described for the
Amphibia, viz. (a) small cones, (b) gradually lengthening
cones, (c) Schwalbe’s rods, and (d) fully developed rods
(fig. 20, a). These are the natural stages in the formation
of new rods in the amphibian retina. But in the fish,
after the earlier stages of growth have passed, we find a very
striking change, which seems to begin somewhere near the
central region! and spread gradually over a large part of
the retina. The change is as follows :—The inner limbs of
the earliest formed rods gradually swell, until, in large and
presumably old fish, they may be of monstrous proportions.
So that though, while growth is still going on, there may be
room for a few more young cones to protrude or for a few
more of the inner limbs of the Schwalbe’s rods to shorten
while the outer limbs lengthen, that time comes to an end,
and the retinal elements, at least over the modified area,
consist entirely of (a) rods with monstrous inner limbs, and
(b) bunches of Schwalbe’s rods. The thin thread-like inner
limbs of the latter find their ways between the swollen inner
limbs of the “ giant cones,” while their numerous cylindrical
outer limbs fill up the spaces between the comparatively
speaking small outer hmbs of the ‘‘ giant cones.” ‘Fig. 20,
a, b, shows comparisons between the conditions of the elements
in young and old eyes in the viviparous blenny. Fig. 22,
a, b, c, shows different parts of the same retina of a young
plaice, a being near the centre, where it has functioned most
actively. Similar results might have been shown from my
sections of trout and stickleback. I had no sections of young
cod for comparison with fig. 21, from an old fish, but we may
judge of the original thickness of the elements by those
which persist as Schwalbe’s rods, a few of which are shown.
1 Without having exactly located the region, I believe it to be the postero-
ventral half of the central region.
voL. 46, part ].—NEW SERIES. D
50 H. M. BERNARD.
Here, then, we have the very phenomenon we anticipated in
the event of the refractive matter which passed from the
outer into the inner limbs not being able to escape from the
latter, at least as fast as it accumulates. These inner limbs
become swollen with refractive matter. That this is the true
explanation of the “ giant cones” is rendered clear by a study
of large fish like the cod. While in some, especially smaller
fish, the matter filling the inner limbs is often difficult to
define, in the sections I possess of the retina of an old speci-
men of this fish ! the refractive inatter is quite recognisable.
It is often seen in round homogeneous pellets just inside the
transverse membrane, and usually continued some way up the
axis of the inner limb. Round the periphery the contents
are more granular. Here and there, however, the whole
inner limb is one smooth, bright, homogeneous mass. These
smooth, round, refractive pellets, which seem to accumulate
above the transverse membrane, may be compared with the
refractive globules in the cones of the frog. The refractive
matter here, as elsewhere, is deeply coloured by plasma
stains, such as eosin, but easily gives up nuclear stains.
If further evidence were wanted that the material which
swells the inner limb is the refractive matter absorbed from
the pigment granules by the outer limbs, it is supplied by
those cases in which the colour of the absorbed matter is the
same as that of the pigment. Such cases may be purely
individual differences, and depend upon chemical variations in
the pigments, or, perhaps, may be due simply to a too rapid
absorption. Certain it is that though the shape of the pig-
ment granules is lost, the colour of the absorbed matter may
now and then be hardly altered. Among my sections of the
plaice,? for instance, there is one in which the strong reddish
colour of the pigment only slowly vanishes. It pervades all
the outer half of the swollen inner limbs, sometimes extending
some way up the “ rod fibres.” Other more striking instances
1 Fixed with corrosive sublimate.
2 Specially fixed and preserved for me by my lamented friend Mr. Martin
Woodward at the Plymouth Marine Laboratory.
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. at
of the persistence of the colour right into the retina will be
given below.
Before continuing to consider whether and how the matter
can escape from these inner limbs, one or two points may be
noted in passing. (1) The “giant cones”’ of the eyes of fish
are not the morphological equivalents of the cones in the eyes
of the frog. The latter are almost the earliest stages of rod
formation; the former are not only fully developed rods, but, at
least so far as growth proportions go, the most highly deve-
loped elements known in vertebrate eyes; their great size
will have some bearing upon the question as to the length of
the life of individual retinal elements when that question
comes to be put.
(2) A very large proportion of these “ giant cones” are
double. Although the dividing line in the swollen inner
limb may become very faint, and sometimes only traceable
in tangential sections, the presence of two nuclei and of
two outer limbs will always show whether any large “‘ cone”
is double. I have already shown that the peculiarities of the
double cones in the frog are due to the fact that two
protrusions of the retina start side by side almost simul-
taneously, and their forms are due to mutual pressure, both
being subject at the same time to the general pressure
which we have to assume to account for the ordinary cone
phases of rod formation. In these great double “ giant
cones” we merely have two rods very close together, and about
the same age. The fusion of their inner limbs will take place
sooner or later, as these inner limbs swell with matter. The
only part of the phenomenon which requires investigating is
why these rods of similar age should be so frequently in
pairs, or, tracing it a stage further back, why it is that as
new nuclei arrive to send out their protrusions to form new
elements for the growing retina, they leave so many pairs of
nuclei between which they do not or cannot force their
way.
(3) The remarkable change which takes place in the
forms of the elements of the growing fish retina, from an
52 H. M. BERNARD.
early stage with (a) small cones, (b) ‘ Schwalbe’s rods,”
and (c) fully formed rods, into a stage with only two kinds
of elements, viz. (a) rods with enormously swollen inner
limbs, and (b) ‘‘Schwalbe’s rods” with long thread-like
inner limbs, fully justifies the appeal which throughout all
these papers we have made to pressure in order to account
for the form-phases of the elements of the bacillary layer.
(4) The fact that in the eyes of all Vertebrates higher than
fish refractive matter no longer accumulates in the inner
limbs, at least so as to swell them to such disproportionate
sizes, apparently justifies the conclusion that these accumula-
tions are not helpful to the specific function of the retina.
Returning to the subject in hand, we must now show how
the refractive matter ultimately escapes from these swollen
inner limbs of fish retinas.
Reference to the sections of the cod leaves no doubt on
this point; the very size of the ‘‘ giant cones,’ and the
coarseness of their connections, reveal what the smaller
elements of other eyes could not so plainly show, at least
until the facts have already been made clear. What I take
to be a thick stream ascends from each of these “ giant
cones,” and ends in a refractive clump against the outer
reticular layer, the “‘ cone” nuclei being sometimes elongated
in the line of the stream. The terminal clumps form, as it
were, conical expansions where the streams meet the tan-
gentially arranged tissue of the outer reticular layer. Here,
again, microscopic examination of the “stream,” and espe-
cially of its large conical expansion, as seen in the cod, show
at once the presence of the same matter as that in the inner
limbs. It is not meant, of course, that this matter is alone
present, for in what follows it will be seen that this refractive
matter follows the threads and fibres of the cytoplasmic
network of the retina. In this case the stream and its
conical expansion doubtless have a cytoplasmic framework.
These streams with their expansions occur in one form or
another in most if not all eyes, at least as physiological
stages, and are usually described as the “cone fibres ” with
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 53
their intra-retinal terminal swellings.! Fig. 21 shows them
in the cod, fig. 20, a, b, in the blenny, fig. 22, a, b, c, in the
plaice, fig. 24, a, in the trout. These swellings, which are
also specially conspicuous in Ramon y Cajal’s figures from
metal impregnation preparations, have hitherto found no
explanation. They can now be accounted for as the points
where the refractive matter escaping from the rods is
temporarily arrested as it reaches the outer reticular layer.
Confirmatory evidence can be seen in the fact that their size
depends upon the functional activity of the part. Fig. 22,
a, b, and c, shows three parts of the same retina. They show,
as do all the fish eyes I have examined, that tle retina is
very unequally used up. ‘The part a from the central region
shows the largest swelling of the inner limbs of the knobs of
the rod fibres, and the most marked using up of the inner
and middle nuclear layers.
Having brought the refractive matter thus far in the eyes
of the fish, we may go back and consider some other eyes in
which it escapes from the outer limbs without swelling the
inner limbs to such monstrous proportions. We can only
refer to two cases, for a full treatment of the subject would
require a close comparative study of the retinas of all the
animal groups other than fish. ‘The two cases chosen are
especially interesting because they present such striking
contrasts: (1) the Amphibia, with the inner lmbs of their
adult rods quite small and insignificant as compared with the
outer limbs; (2) the Primates, with their long, rather thick
inner limbs and thin outer limbs not much, if at all, longer
than the inner limbs (see fig. 31, a).
(1) That the refractive matter escapes into the inner limbs
in the Amphibia we know from the invariable presence of
the ellipsoid. But the ellipsoid does not, as a rule, seem to
grow, so that if refractive matter is always exuding through
the transverse membrane, it must as rapidly be transformed
and conveyed away through the retina. Certain it is that
* I need only refer to the familiar text-book diagrams, such as fig. 52,
p. 46, of ‘ Quain’s Anatomy,’ 10th edition, vol. iii, part 3.
54 H. M. BERNARD.
the inner limb is never swollen up with refractive matter.
This sparing of the inner limbs in the Amphibia may
perhaps be correlated with the enormous size of the outer
hmbs, for, so far as I know, no other group of animals has
them so large in proportion. In the frog they are immense
cylindrical vesicles, sometimes as much as 60y long and
9 to 10m in diameter. These, then, form very capacious
reservoirs for the absorbed refractive matter, and, perhaps,
seldom require, during any single period of activity, to
overflow into the inner limb. In this way the matter may
be dealt with by the outer limb itself, and, apart from the
ellipsoid, escape directly into the retina along the wall
of the inner limb without entering it. That the refractive
matter escapes directly from the outer limbs into the retina
along the walls of the inner limbs can sometimes be actually
seen (fig. 25, a, b, c). These cases are all from the South
African tadpoles referred to in Part II], which, owing to the
immense quantity and dark colour of the pigment, are
very instructive in this connection.
(2) Equally decisive for our contention are my sections of a
human retina (the healthy normal eye having been excised
for a morbid growth on the eyelid).!_ This eye had clearly
not been much exposed to light before excision. We conse-
quently find the outer limbs of the rods free from all
refractive matter, and, like the inner limbs, almost clear
vesicles but for the longitudinal fibrils and the granules
taking nuclear stain. ‘I'he fibrils on the inner limbs are dotted
like those of the outer limbs in the Amphibia (see Part IJ and
figures). Naturally no thick refractive streams can be seen
running up into the retina from these rods. In very strong
contrast with this are fig. 31, a, b, from retinas of the South
African chama baboon,’ which live in the full glare of the
' Kindly fixed in Perenyi’s fluid and preserved for me by the well-known
ophthalmic surgeon, Mr. H. Treacher Collins.
2 They were generously obtained specially for the purposes of these re-
searches by Mr. J. C. Kous, 'lafelberg Station, Cape Colony, through the kind
intervention of our mutual friends, Mr. and Mrs. Mallinson, of the Hex
River Valley.
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 55
South African sun. Here the rods, and especially the large
inner limbs, are mostly full of pigment, which can be seen
streaming inwards into the retina, no longer forming single
fibrils with terminal knobs, but great tangles of refractive
matter, which, in the eye (31, a) with dark blackish pigment
are dull and blackish, but in the eye (31,6) with bright
yellowish-brown pigment are bright yellow-brown. I may
say that after seeing how the pigmented matter streamed
through the retina in the tadpoles brought from the slopes of
Table Mountain, I was quite prepared to find something of
the kind in the retina of the baboons, but was myself
surprised to see how very obvious the escape of the absorbed
pigmented matter into the retina is in these cases. The pig-
ment is so dense that the colouring matter is not bleached in
the rods, nor, indeed, does it undergo much loss of colour
throughout its passage through the retina, as it usually does,
say, 1n our indigenous Amphibia.
We have so far, then, traced the matter absorbed by the
rods into the retina as far as the region known as the outer
reticular layer. This is in many respects one of the most
difficult parts of the retina to understand. The matted and
deeply pigmented strands just below this layer in the
baboon’s eye, as well as the conical expansions of the
ordinary ‘ rod fibres,” indicate that the absorbed pigmented
matter is temporarily stopped by it. But the exact cause of
the stoppage at this point I have not succeeded in unravelling.
Krause thought that there was a tangential membrane at
this place, his “ membrana fenestrata,” ' and certainly the
first time one sees the outermost layer of nuclei of the middle
layer arranged tangentially in a compact row, as shown in
figs. 20, a, and 22, c, it is difficult not to think that Krause was
right; but a study of older eyes (figs. 20, b, 21, and 24, a), or
even of the more used-up parts of younger eyes (fig. 22, a),
will show that these nuclei do not belong to any fixed mor-
phological structure in the retina such as a membrane, but
1 I have unfortunately never seen a copy of the book written by Krause
under this title.
26 H. M. BERNARD.
that they are merely nuclei of the middle layer passing out-
wards to become rod nuclei, and apparently flattened against
the same tangentially arranged cytoplasmic tissue as that
which detains the refractive matter in the manner described
above. But the difficulty is not quite so simple as this, viz.
that the stoppage of the nuclei going outwards is due to the
presence of tangentially arranged tissue, or even to a mutual
blocking of the way on the part of the nuclei moving outwards
and of pigmented matter moving inwards. ‘That this latter
is not the cause is clear, because we find the same stoppage
of the refractive matter even when, as in old eyes, nearly all
the middle nuclei have passed outwards (see fig. 21). That
other subtler complications are present can be gathered from
the fact that the “rod fibres” often expand so as to form
chambers in the outer reticular layer, and clumps of matter,
often taking nuclear stains, may be seen in various conditions
within these chambers. The relations of these clumps of
staining matter to the terminal expansions of the “‘ rod fibres”
is not easy to ascertain ; it is clearly necessary to keep them
distinct in our minds. Borysiekiewitz, who, I believe, is
the first to figure these chambers,! took them for a new and
hitherto undiscovered layer of cells, the “nuclei of which may
sometimes be seen dividing.” ‘This description, however, does
not apply to any eye I have yet examined, for I have found
them in all stages of formation, sometimes in patches, some-
times all along the retina (cf. figs. 20, 22, and 24). A com-
parative study has convinced me that they are, as stated,
merely expansions of the inner ends of the ‘rod fibres ”
round some peculiar mass of staining matter. Similar masses
occur in the cytoplasmic chambers between the rod nuclei
aud the outer reticular layer in the frog, as shown in fig. 25,
bandd. I can regard them, therefore, only as form-phases
expressive of some physiological activity, the significance of
which, so far as I have been able to unravel it, will be
explained in a later paper.
But whatever is the real structure of the outer reticular
' Vigured in 1887, but only claimed as a new “cell”? layer in 1894.
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 57
layer, we shall see from what follows that the refractive
matter sooner or later finds it way through it. We shall,
indeed, now proceed to show what very startling effects its
passage may have on the remaining layers.
Every sagittal section of a functional retina will show us
the matter streaming through the middle nuclear layer and
through the inner reticular layer, in which latter, however, the
streams frequently lose themselves. Indeed, as must be
apparent by this time to every student of the retina, | am
putting an entirely new interpretation upon a very familiar
phenomenon, viz. the “ Miiller’s fibres.” These, as is well
known, have hitherto always been regarded as sustentacular,
and are said to be formed out of distinct cells with recognis-
able nuclei. But a survey of many eyes and of eyes of the
same kind at different ages, and of the same eye at different
parts and in different physiological conditions, shows beyondall
mistake that they are only streams of absorbed pigmentary
matter finding its way through the retina. The current
doctrine that they are sustentacular has been based solely
upon their appearances when most developed. Well-de-
veloped streams may be found at almostany age, inasmuch as
their development depends upon the degree of functional
activity of the retina; but according to my experience they
are found in this condition most frequently in very old eyes,
as we shall see in detail below.
This, then, is the next point we have to demonstrate; the
chief difficulty in the way of doing so is how to select from
the abundance of the evidence only that which is the most
conclusive.
First of all, it is best at the outset to record the obser-
vation that the refractive matter seems to be temporarily
arrested by all cytoplasmic strands and membranes which are
arranged tangentially, and only to form definite streams along
strands arranged radially. Hence the rapidity with which
the refractive matter passes through the retina depends upon
the number of suitably disposed radial strands. From the
rods to the outer reticular layer most of the strands are
58 H. M. BERNARD.
radial, e. g. “the rod and cone fibres,” hence accumulations
of amorphous matter seldom take place in this layer. On
reaching the outer reticular layer there occurs, as described,
some temporary obstruction, the exact nature of which we
have not attempted here to unravel. Through this reticular
layer, however, the matter escapes. In young eyes with a
plentiful cytoplasmic reticulum supporting the rows of nuclei,
radial strands can be found in abundance to carry the matter
through the middle layer to the inner reticular layer; but im
older eyes, when the nuclei of the middle layer have been
largely used up and the cytoplasmic reticulum is so reduced
that but few radially disposed strands can be found, the re-
fractive matter tends to accumulate often in large quantities
(m.n. of the figures). In fig. 20, b (blenny), it is seen in small
irregular patches ; in fig. 24, a (trout), in thick tangential
strands just above the outer reticular layer; in others,
again, In immense tangentially arranged sheets. In fig. 23,
a and b (plaice), the accumulations are near the outer
reticular layer; in fig. 21 (cod) near the inner reticular
layer. Many more figures might have been given, but
these must suffice. Fig. 23, a, which was from a very
large old plaice,! should be compared with fig. 22, a,
b, c, which are from a young plaice, six inches long. In
the least used-up part of the retina (c) no traces of these
accumulations can be seen; in b they are beginning ; in a they
are already of considerable size, but in the very old fish they
are enormous, and occur over most of the retine. Of the few
traces which I have so far seen of accumulations of matter
in the retinze of mammals one is shown in fig. 30, where a thick
strand runs along on the inner side of the outer reticular
layer of a mouse which had been exposed to the light of an
arc lamp. As it tapered away it gave off typical ‘ Miiller’s
fibres’ in the way figured (see also p. 37 and fig. 26).
Before going on to the inner reticular layer, one word as to
the supposed nuclei of the “ Miiller’s fibres.” These are nothing
1 Specially selected for these researches by my friend the late Mr. Martin
Woodward, while temporarily associated with the Lrish Fisheries.
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 59
but the ordinary nuclei of the middle layer, and are used up
like the rest. The appearances which have led to the sup-
position that they are nuclei of fixed morphological strands
are due to the fact that single nuclei are not infrequently
involved in these streams of matter, and, indeed, may at
times apparently enter into some intimate physiological
association with them. ‘They may often be seen drawn out,
and even at times robbed of their chromatic substance (see
fiz. 25, c). That they are not the nuclei of preformed sus-
tentacular fibres follows from the fact that a comparative
study shows that no such preformed structures exist, and that
the so-called “Miiller’s fibres” are mere expressions of
functional activity, and great numbers, even when best
developed, have no such involved nuclei (fig. 32, a).
Coming to the inner reticular layer, this also, like the
middle nuclear layer, undergoes changes with age (cf. 7.r., figs.
20, a and b, and 24, a and b). In very young eyes the reti-
culum is close, and forms what is called the “ Punktsubstanz.”
As soon as the eye begins to function, before which time
there are no “Miller’s fibres,” streams of refractive
matter begin to pass through it as very thin radial threads.
Under a high power these are seen to be a fine zigzag; they
are clearly not independent strands, but some staining matter
running along the threads of the inner reticular layer. Fur-
ther, they may branch or end suddenly in thin, tangentially
arranged layers, from which new radial strands arise to run
further in. Again, itis evident that these thin radial strands,
which every one would at once call the ‘‘ Miiller’s fibres,”’ are
not fixed structures, from the fact that in the retina of an
older animal of the same kind (cf. figs. 20, a and b, 24, a and
b) 1 they may have disappeared altogether, and instead there
occur thicker streams finding their way in much coarser zig-
zags(fig.21) along the strandsand between the much more open
1 The specimens of the viviparous blenny were fixed in Blés’ fluid
in the St. Andrews Marine Laboratory, and kindly given me by Mr. Wallace,
who had prepared them for his own work. The trout were specially fixed for
these researches by Dr. Kyle, also of St. Andrews.
60 H. M. BERNARD.
meshes of the now altered reticulum. This fact is an absolute
demonstration that these“ Miiller’s fibres” are not independent
preformed structures, but merely cytoplasmic threads of the
retinal reticulum thickened with matter. When they run
quite straight without any zigzag we must regard it as due
to a gradually acquired radial rearrangement of the threads
of the reticulum (cf. fig. 32, a and b).
Then, again, apparently at any point in the inner reticular
layer, these strands may end suddenly, and the staining
matter which was travelling along them may disperse
to right and left (fig. 28,c). Many of the different aspects
of the inner reticular layer are due to the presence of
this refractive matter accumulated in different ways along
its strands. One phenomenon is particularly suggestive; I
refer to the darker zones which are frequently seen in it
running for longer or shorter tracts round the retina. I
have seen them frequently (see figs. 20, a, 22, b, c, 24, a).
Borysiekiewitz has also called attention to them. These
dark zones are, as it were, waves of absorbed matter, records
of former periods of functional activity, passing through the
retina. This is not evident microscopically when the reti-
culum is a close “ Punktsubstanz,” and the matter finely and
evenly dispersed, but becomes quite obvious when the reti-
culum is coarse and open, for then the individual strands of
the affected part can be seen specially thickened (see fig. 24, a).
All these facts become so obvious to any one who will take
the trouble to study the retina comparatively that I feel it
almost unnecessary to discuss the details any further. One
or two points, however, remain to be noted. Just as the
streams end almost anywhere in the inner reticular layer, the
matter dispersing along the tangential strands, so fresh ones
may begin anywhere within the same layer. And this brings
us to the next layer, the nerve-fibre layer, or, as it is more com-
monly but less accurately called, the “‘ ganglionic cell layer.”
‘'he appearance of the strands which run radially from the
inner reticular layer to the membrana limitans interna is well
known ; they are the typical inner ends of the “ Miiller’s fibres.”
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 61
Usually comparatively thin as they leave the inner reticular
layer, they expand into a conical arrangement of strands or
membranes until they look in some sections like an arcade of
expanding columns supporting the internal limiting mem-
brane with its subjacent reticulum. Under the arches of
this arcade are found the strands of the optic nerve, and the
so-called “ ganglionic cells.” My faith in the sustentacular
character of the “ Miiller’s fibres ” was first shaken by finding
that in many of my preparations the majority of these
columns arise from the edge of, or from various depths
within the inner reticular layer itself, and that those which
did so did not apparently differ from those which came
through the inner reticular layer from the outer layers. It is
quite apparent that when they arise from the edge of the
inner reticular layer; they are in a position to collect and
carry away matter from that layer (figs. 20, b, 21, 24, a,
26, b, 27). It is common also to find them arising in one of
the darker zones above referred to, and when once the
suggestion is made that they are, as it were, draining the
inner reticular layer, a flood of light is thrown upon all
their various shapes, for the typical arcade form I have
described, though frequently found, is not invariable.
In my preparations of the retina of a large cod, for instance,
the typical expanding columns are somewhat rare, so
that the matter, not carried away fast enough, clogs any
strands or membranes running tangentially ; see fig. 21, in
which it coats the strands (v.s.) supporting the nerves.
Solid accumulations of this matter are, however, not often
found in the nerve-fibre layer, although the clotting of the
nerve and other strands which partly occupy the layer may
be very dense (see fig. 28, b, from an old rat). Something
more like solid accumulations are found in certain old eyes;
e.g. figs. 26, a, b, and 28, a, show the absorbed matter
accumulating within the conical expansions of the “ Miiller’s
fibres,’ sometimes causing them to change their forms and
become nearly bell-shaped—the trumpet shapes shown in
fig. 26, b, are apparently due to distortion of the sections.
62 H. M. BERNARD.
But these accumulations and the clottings of strands and
membranes are not sufficient to account for the lifelong
streaming of refractive matter into this layer, and we should
have to assume that it escaped finally through the internal
limiting membrane to join the vitreous humour, even if the
microscope did not clearly show us that this is what actually
takes place.
In very few sections will the internal membrane be seen
quite thin and clear; it is usually found thick and apparently
laminated, and layers are frequently found flaking off into
the hollow of the eye. That these flakes are, at any rate in
part, due to the matter which comes along the “ Miiller’s
fibres ” can be seen in the fact that in osmic acid preparations,
in which these streams are usually blackened, the portions
of the internal membrane which cover their conical expan-
sions not infrequently show different degrees of blackening
(see fig. 29, a). This shows that the refractive matter is
certainly deposited on the internal limiting membrane. The
question is, Does it pass through? It certainly passed into
the retina through the external protoplasmic membrane,
pushed out in the form of rods it traverses the whole thick-
ness of the retina, and if it does not pass through the exactly
similar protoplasmic membrane on the inside of the retina it
ought to accumulate in large quantities. The only accumu-
lations which we actually find in connection with this mem-
brane are the above-mentioned lamine, which, as is well
known, belong to the vitreous humour. Some sections,
indeed, show the stained “ Miiller’s fibres,” looking like so
many processes rooting the similarly stained remains of the
vitreous humour into the retina. And here let me say
that absolute microscopic demonstration of subtle physio-
logical processes may not be possible as so many separate
details, but when all the facts are taken together the evidence
may become as convincing as if we could prove each detail
separately. This particular detail, however, namely, that the
refractive matter absorbed by the rods passes ultimately into
the vitreous humour, admits of demonstration.
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 63
This demonstration is afforded us by the fact that in the
baboon’s eyes the pigmented matter retains its colour right
through the retina, being only slightly less bright and
refractive near the internal limiting membrane, where it 1s
present in enormous quantities. In the youngest baboon’s
retina the congealed vitreous humour was left in situ in the
base of the retinal cup, and appears in the sections. Its
layers nearest the retina are coloured like the
pigmented matter on the retinal side of the internal
limiting membrane.)
Returning to our review of the passage of the matter
absorbed by the rods through the retina, we have seen that
if, instead of the matter having to travel along zigzag paths
on the strands of the cytoplasmic reticulum, it found a sufficient
number of radial strands running in continuous courses right
through, the passage would be much simplified. All the accu-
mulations of matter which we have described in the eyes of fish
might be avoided. The most perfect radial strands which I
have ever seen running through the inner reticular layer occur
in sections of a human retina? which, from the scarcity of the
nuclei in both the nerve-fibre layer and the middle nuclear
layer, and from the condition of the inner reticular layer, I
take to be that of an old individual (see fig. 32, a). Itis hard
to believe that such ‘ Miiller’s fibres” as these were not per-
manent structural elements ; if they were they had become so
only during life, and to meet special functional requirements,
for in the normal healthy retina of a man of forty-eight,
referred to above, hardly a single straight radial strand can be
found through the whole inner reticular layer. Faint zigzag
streams alone occur here and there (fig. 32, 6), but are not
numerous. ‘hat there should be no pronounced “ Miiller’s
' As this absorbed matter strcams through all parts of the retina (except
the blind spot), and during a lifetime of functioning, it is clearly a factor
which no student of the vitreous humour can afford to ignore. It suggests,
for instance, a new and very simple explanation of Stilling’s canal.
2 Purchased many years ago from Messrs. Watson, of Holborn, in a series
of slides to illustrate the structure of the eye.
64. H. M. BERNARD.
fibres,” i.e. streams of matter passing through the inner
reticular layer, in this eye, is just what we should expect, in
view of the fact that for some days prior to excision it had
not been exposed to light; but it 1s surprising that there
should be no traces of any permanent rearrangement of the
cytoplasmic reticulum so as’ to form continuous radial lines.
It is possible that this only takes place in very old eyes, when
both nuclei and cytoplasmic framework, all but its radial
strands, seem to be disappearing (cf. the general condition
of the inner reticular Jayer in fig. 82, a, with that in 32, b).
In the baboon’s retinas, through which an enormous
quantity of matter can be seen to have been passing, and in
which the large inner limbs are filled with the same matter,
all of it the same colour as the pigment, the conditions are as
follows :—In the youngest retina (three months) thick
yellowish-brown streams in immense numbers pass radially
through the compact middle nuclear layer, but when they
reach the inner reticular layer by far the greater number
disappear; the few which seem to run straight through
that layer, on examination with a high power, are seen to have
a very zigzag and interrupted course. On the inner side of
this layer dense streams again form and run towards the inner
limiting membrane, expanding and losing their intensity
before reaching it.
In this young baboon’s eye, then, there are no clear radial
arrangements of the fibres of the inner reticular layer which
could, even under the most strained interpretation, be re-
garded as sustentacular.
In an adult male baboon the same is true, only the pigment
is blackish. We again see what was described above for
other retinas, that the reticulum of the inner reticular layer
has become much coarser than in the younger eye, and
consequently the zigzag of those streams which run con-
tinuously through is much more pronounced.
In an “‘ old, very large male” the streams are still fewer
in the inner reticular layer, apparently because every strand
is clotted with pigmented matter, as is also every strand and
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 65
membrane between this layer and the internal limiting mem-
brane where the dark brown of the pigmented matter is very
dense. Individual streams can hardly be followed.
In these eyes, then, again, and in spite of the quantity of
the pigment absorbed, we find the same difficulty as we found
in the cod (cf. fig. 21, 2.7.) in establishing direct radial paths
for the escape of the absorbed matter through the cytoplasmic
reticulum ; that such paths do occur and may be very highly
specialised we know from the (presumably old) human retina
shown in fig. 32,a. ‘hese, seen alone, certainly appear as
if they were sustentacular.
Other perfect radial tracks seem to occur normally in the
Amphibia, for as soon as the eye begins to function, that
is in quite young tadpoles, there arise distinct, smooth,
nearly straight radial fibres through the inner reticular
layer, and these become so tough in preservation that
they can be isolated intact if a section is teased up or crushed
on aslide.! Further, in tangential sections they often appear
running through the inner reticular layer within a clear
passage. It is possible that this clear passage may be delu-
sive, and due to the fact that the adjacent parts of the
reticulum are drained by them of any matter which would
render their delicate cytoplasmic membranes or threads
visible. Compare with these apparently clear courses of the
“ Miiller’s fibres ” through the inner reticular layer, fig. 29, b,
where ‘ Miiller’s fibres” of a rabbit*are shown cut trans-
versely, and the tangential threads or membranes of the
inner reticular layer thickened with matter are seen to be
running into them.
But the important contrast comes later. The establish-
ment of direct radial streams through the inner reticular
layers in the young tadpole is quite natural, for we remember
that in other eyes the nearest approach we found to a straight
course was in young retinas (see fig. 24, b) when the inner
reticular layer is a close “ Punktsubstanz.” But whereas the
' Many of them with nuclei of the middle layer attached to them (see
fig. 25, c).
vot. 46, pAaRT 1.—NEW SERIES, E
66 H. M. BERNARD.
streams in these fish retinas become more and more zigzag as
the meshes of the inner reticular layer get larger and coarser, in
the frog and toad, for some reason or other, the early straight
paths appear to become fixed. Whether this can in any way ©
be correlated with the other peculiarity pointed out in these
amphibian retinas, viz. that the absorbed matter passes by,
apparently without entering, the inner limbs of the rods, which
consequently remain very small, we are not yet in a position
to decide. It is, of course, quite possible that the physical
condition of the absorbed matter not coming in contact with
the staining matter in the inner limbs might be different, and
consequently its action on the cytoplasmic framework of a
retina might also be different.
It need hardly be pointed out that if a group of such
streams as those shown in fig. 31, a,b, flowing through the layer
of rod nuclei were to combine in or just after leaving the outer
reticular layer (0.7.), and then flow on as one thick stream
through the middle nuclear and the inner reticular layers, we
should have the most developed type of ‘ Miiller’s fibre,” such
as that shown in fig.32,a. Itis these most developed streams,
looking as ifthey were permanent structural elementsin the eye,
which have alone been regarded as typical ‘‘ Miller’s fibres.”
Had all the minor forms of the same streams received equal
notice, the error could never have been made of ascribing to
them any fixed morphological significance. Such a wider
survey would also have saved Borysiekiewitz, to whose works
on the retina I should like here to express my indebtedness,
from his conclusion that the “ Miller’s fibres”’ are tubes
conveying the nerve-fibrils to the rod layer.1 Only these most
developed strands which seem to rise directly from the rods
could possibly supply the necessary conditions, and, if this
conclusion were correct, we ought to find such developed
strands in all and throughout all the retinas of the whole of
the Vertebrata. This, as we have seen, is very far from
being the case. Equally mistaken, too, are the conclusions
based upon the impregnation method. In Ramon y Cajal’s
1 “Weitere Untersuchungen,’ Leipzig und Wien, 1894.
-_— ~~ — ~~ - ——
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 67
well-known figures of “fixed morphological elements ” re-
vealed by the method, we find not only the “dendrites,” but
also the “ Miiller’s fibres ” in their most developed form, and
the “rod fibres” with their terminal swellings all equally
clearly shown. ‘The interpretation which we have put upon
the latter two makes it more than probable that a proportion
at least of the “‘ dendrites ”’ are also nothing but the parts of
streams already so frequently alluded to in the foregoing
pages. I say a proportion of the “dendrites” for reasons
which will be made clear in another paper, in which [ shall
also show that the nerve-paths through the retina can be
demonstrated by ordinary methods of staining, and that they
have no connection whatever with the “ dendrites.”
SuMMARY.
As the results so far attained in the preceding five parts of
these studies are largely hidden under a mass of minute histo-
logical detail, it is better, at this stage, that a summary be
given of the more important. In the next paper we shall deal
with the question of the nerves, which naturally has a much
wider bearing than any detail of retinal structure merely as
such.
The conclusion which of all others now arrived at is of
widest significance from a general point of view, is that the
retina can no longer be regarded as built up of so many
separate “ cells,’ each with some definite and permanent
morphological value. This view, which has always been taught
hitherto, has recently to all appearance been strongly confirmed
by means of the metal impregnation method. This appears
to reveal several distinct types of cells mainly distinguishable
by their positions and by the different forms assumed by the
ramifications of their respective cytoplasms. It is now main-
tained, indeed, that these cells, to which special names have
been given, have distinct and definite functions, so that if one
68 H. M. BERNARD.
single one were absent, a blind spot would ensue as a neces-
sary consequence.
The results here published, obtained solely by comparisons
not only of different eyes but of the same eye at different
ages, involve a direct contradiction to this interpretation of
the phenomena. If there ever were distinct cells com-
posing the retina, their walls were early lost... The func-
tional retinais a continuous cytoplasmic reticulum
in which nuclei are suspended, and the nuclei are
not stationary. (1) A Jarge proportion of those which are
present in the young retina move outwards when it begins
to function to become the nuclei of the new rods required by
growth. (2) Their places are supplied by others migrating
inwards from the rim. (8) The outward movement continues
as long as life lasts, for in old eyes the nuclei of both the
innermost and the middle nuclear layers are found to have
largely disappeared. Whether 38 is for the supply of
new rods or for some regenerative process we have no
means yet of deciding. These migrations, and especially
this using up of the nuclei, in a retina which is all the while
functioning normally, shows clearly that some other value
must be assigned to its structural elements than that which
is needed by the neuron theory as applied to this organ. It
is clear that these nuclei are not the nuclei of cells taking
part in fixed morphological chains, every link of which
is essential. ‘The nearest approach we obtain to anything
like a permanent cell in the retina is the rod with its nucleus ;
that it would be inaccurate to persist in using the term
“visual cell” in this connection will be conclusively shown
im my next paper.
With reference to the retina itself as the specific organ of
vision, by far the most important result obtained is the
discovery of some new details relating to the origin and
structure of the rods, that is of those structures which are
peculiar to the retina as the visual organ. According to the
' What appears to be the gradual dissolution of cell walls may often be
seen where the young retina is passing into the cclls of the iris.
OO
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 69
usual description they are of the nature of cuticular forma-
tions. This is a very natural summing up of the facts—
(1) that they are almost certainly the end organs of the
nerves, and (2) that their tips are filled with refractive
matter of the nature of keratin. But the parallel with
cuticular cells, although justifiable, is not very close. As
protoplasmic vesicles thrust out against the pigment cells
they absorb the pigment granules and (unless the quantity
absorbed he too great, and its colour too intense) clarify them
somewhat as the stratum lucidum of the epidermis receives
and clarifies the pigment brought to it through the skin.
Here, however, the parallel ceases, for while the cells of the
cuticle perish with the waste matter they receive, and ulti-
mately fall away as horn-cells, the rods get rid of their refrac-
tive contents, which stream away through the retina.
The working out of the finer structural details of the rods,
taken up where the subject was left by Max Schultze thirty
years ago, need not be repeated here, but one or two of the
more important corrections of the current doctrine may be
mentioned,
What are called the “cones” of the vertebrate eye, to
which special functions distinct from those of the rods have
been assigned, are not always analogous structures.
In the Amphibia they are the early stages in the forma-
tion of new rods, and their form-phases are due to the
squeezing of new vesicles between the already existing rods.
In the fish analogous stages appear in very young eyes,
but in older eyes the inner limbs of the earlier formed rods
swell to such monstrous sizes that the conditions of the rod
layer are altered, and the protrusion of new vesicles can no
longer result in the formation of the same cone stages.
The rods with the swollen inner limbs have been regarded as
“oiant cones,’ although presenting no analogy whatever
with the cones in the frog.
In the Primates, what are usually called the cones are, as
in the fish, merely rods with swollen inner limbs. In the
centre of clear vision, where the pigmentary matter is
70 H. M. BERNARD.
absorbed in large quantities, all the elements are permanently
of this character, but away from the centre only one here
and there has its inner limb enlarged. Borysiekiewitz refers
this to the protrusion of the nucleus, but as the nucleus is
not always protruded, I prefer to refer it to an extrusion of
fluid from the retina. Not only does the early protrusion of
fluid vesicles from the retina in the first stages of rod-
formation make this probable, but also the fact that globules
of fluid are continually escaping from the retina into the
rods, as described and figured in Part II.
The striation of the rods, which has long been known, has
now been traced to its true cause, viz. the existence of
strands, sometimes taking stain, in the walls of the rod
vesicles, while the lumina of these vesicles are occupied by a
staining network in connection with these strands.
The refractive matter which fills the outer limbs
of the rods is absorbed pigment, which is usually,
but not always, clarified during the process of
absorption. ‘The correlation of this with the results of the
classical researches of Boll, Kuhne, Ewald, and others I am
not in a position to work out, for reasons given in Part V. It
must be left to time, on the one hand, to show where we
mutually confirm one another, and, on the other, to eliminate
our respective mistakes. Had I commented on all the results
obtained by previous workers whenever they overlapped the
subject in hand, these papers would have been lengthened
out indefinitely ; as itis, the histological details given in them
have had to be limited to a small selection of those available.
‘he curious zone formation within the retinal syncytium
has been traced largely to the above-mentioned lateral move-
ment of the nuclei of the middle layer from the rim towards
the centre.
The “ Miiller’s fibres,” however startling they may appear at
their highest development, are merely streams of the pigment
matter which have been absorbed by the rods, and which,
with many interesting variations of detail, pass inwards
through the retina, eventually to join the vitreous humour.
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. v1
EXPLANATION OF PLATES 38—5,
Illustrating Parts III, IV, and V of Mr. H. M. Bernard’s
paper on “‘ Studies in the Retina.”
N.B.—The measurements of the different eyes can only be approximate,
because the shape is not always kept in very thin sections. It should be
further noticed that sometimes a slightly older eye may be smaller than one
obviously younger, a fact to be attributed to the accidents of nutrition.
In all the figures m./. = limiting membrane, g./. = ‘* ganglionic cell”
layer, 2.7. = inner reticular layer, m.z. = middle nuclear layer, 0.7. = outer
reticular layer, 0.2. = outer nuclear layer.
Fig. ].—Frog tadpole (Perenyi’s fluid). Eye diameter 0°32 mm, Part
of section showing the spindle-shaped nuclei of the undifferentiated rim of
the retina, attached to either the ner or the outer limiting membrane, and
arranged on the axial side in curves bulging towards the axis of the eye.
The arrow indicates the direction of the nuclear stream. A few of the
nuclei already in the middle layer, selected because attached by trailing cyto-
plasm to the inner reticular layer.
Fie. 2.—Toad tadpole (Lindsay-Johnson’s fluid), Kye diameter 0°528 mm.
Part of section drawn with the camera lucida, to show the attachment of the
inner reticular layer to the membrana limitans interna, this connection being
apparently due to the nuclei trailing their cytoplasmic attachments behind
them as they travel towards the axis of the eye. Tliese nuclear attachments
tend to accumulate on each side of the stream, but persist as an accumulation
only on the inner side (see text, pp. 10—13).
Fic. 3.—Frog tadpole (picro-sulphuric and iron hematoxylin). Hye dia-
meter 0°24 mm., to show a younger stage in the formation of the inner
reticular layer. The nuclei, which in the central region are loosely arranged
where this layer is beginning to form, are densely crowded, five to six deep, against
the pigment, and are apparently pressing inwards from the undifferentiated
rim where nuclear divisions (&.) are taking place. The arrows indicate the
direction of the streaming; 0.7. indicates a line of dark staining matter where
the future outer reticular layer will run.
Fic. 4.—From the other eye of the same animal. In both these eyes yellow
fluid was apparent in the pigment cells, and here and there also apparently in
vesicles which appear among the pigment granules, and were probably pro-
truded from the retina (cf. Fig. 18).
72 H. M. BERNARD.
Kies. 5 anD 6.—Frog tadpole (picro-sulphuric). Still younger eyes showing
earlier stages in the formation of the inner reticular layer as a kind of splitting
of the nuclear ranks into two divisions, those forming the larger division
crowding outwards against the pigment, leaving a loose, matted, and staining
reticulum in the space from which they have moved. In both sections it is
noticeable that nuclei in the very centre have even gone from the innermost
layer. In Fig. 6 the cornea (c.) is seen thinning and clearing of pigment over
the axis of the eye, and a nuclear division (4.) is seen near the centre of the
retina, the two facts together indicating that the eye was only just beginning to
function.
Fie. 7.—Frog tadpole (picro-sulphuric). Hye diameter 0°20 mm. Showsa
still younger stage (i.e. smaller, and with larger cavity in the lens). The
crowding outwards of the nuclei in the optic axis not yet appreciable; thie
beginning of the split among the loosely arranged nuclei is, however, indicated
by an accumulation of vacuolar reticulum along the line occupied later by the
inner reticular layer; nuclei seem also to be breaking away from the innermost
layer, that forming the later so-called “ ganglionic cells.” A slight curving of the
lateral nuclei, like that shown in Fig. 1, is also seen. The yolk granules which
obscure the section are not indicated either in this or in the last two figures.
Fie. 8.—Frog tadpole, from Table Mountain (Perenyi). Hye diameter
0°§ mm.; cross-sections of rods showing deeply stained internal reticulum ;
this changes its pattern when the focus is changed. The reticulum is some-
times forced to the sides by a refractive greyish mass, which at times may
have a brownish centre of the same colour as the pigment. In these cases
the reticulum frequently comes again into view on changing the focus.
Fic.9.—From the same retina, showing the distal ends of the cones as
vesicles, often torn, but nearly always leaving ragged proximal ends still
attached to the conical tips of the staining portion; in other cases the vesicles
are complete, and their distal ends are immersed in pigment ; they are shrunken
and often beaded with rows of dots. On comparing the elements marked with
an asterisk and numbered 1 to 7, we can trace the transformation of a cone
into a Schwalbe’s rod.
Fig. 10.—The same, in which the relations are shown more completely.
In both these figures the continuation of the vesicle membrane into that
enveloping the ‘‘cone”’ is quite distinct. On the right is a new element with
no staining proximal portion yet visible (cf. Part I, Pl. 3, fig. 2, a).
Vic. 11.—The same, showing the more direct transition of the ‘‘ cone ” into
the rod, nearer the side of the retina where the elements are shorter (namely,
20 p instead of 45 to 50 p, as they are in Fig. 10). In this case the distal
portion of the cone or new rod was visibly striated, which was not the case on
the very young and still slightly swollen Schwalbe’s rod shown in Fig. 9 on
the extreme right.
Fie. 12.—From the same retina as Fig. 1. A group of elements in the
STUDIES IN THE RETINA. 73
early vesicular stage, the large vesicles not destroyed by the reagents. The
exact relations of the nuclei cannot be made out. The nuclei of the two
youngest vesicles may, perhaps, be those shown in or on the outer reticular
layer.
Fie. 13.—A few elements from the same, selected to show some of the
form-changes from vesicles to rods. Most remarkable are the ‘‘ cones ” shown
on the left (a, 6,c). Their tipsare quite clearly within vesicles. The pheno-
menon is explained in the next figure (14). The rod on the extreme right
shows one of the bright staining globules referred to in Part II.
Fic. 14.—A diagram to explain the “ cones” shown in Figs. 13 and 15, in
which their tips are thrust into terminal vesicles. The pressure of new pro-
trusions acting in the direction of the arrows converts the vesicle a into J
and ¢ with a progressively lengthening neck. The staining matter which
accumulates in this neck (see the central element in Fig. 12) is then thrust
outwards (1) by the outward movement of the nucleus, and (2) by a fresh
discharge of material (d). These “cone” tips, therefore, have no other
membrane than the vesicle into which they are thrust. They are therefore
sometimes disintegrated, and without defined outline.
Fic. 15,—Frog tadpole (Perenyi). Hye diameter 0-4 mm. Still shorter
and stouter elements showing the same phenomenon, taken at different dis-
tances from the centre of the retina. The formation of short thick rods out
of vesicles can be easily understood.
Fic. 16.—From the retina of a frog tadpole (picro-sulphuric, safranin). Eye
diameter 0°24 mm., showing early protrusion of vesicles against the pigment.
Deeply staining yolk granules are shown here and there; they are left out of
Figs. 5 and 6. ‘Two nuclei are shown in the figure not yet in contact with the
membrana limitans externa. They are selected because they show vacuoles
inside. Intra-nuclear vacuoles and vacuoles extruded within the retina may be
seen in all the sections of young eyes; the earliest phase of the inner reticular
layer looks, indeed, like an aggregation of such intra-retinal vacuoles (cf. Fig. 7).
Fies. 17 anv 18.—F rom the retina of another frog tadpole of about the same
size (from 0°20 mm. to 0°25 mm.). Portions of sections differently magnified,
showing more vigorous protrusion of vesicles against the pigment. ‘lhose
quite in the pigment are often yellowish in colour, while those nearest to the
nuclei are clear white, partially framed round with densely staining matter
(iron-hematoxylin). In Fig. 18 the vesicles marked with asterisks were
yellowish. In other slides the yellow fluid, which here appeared in vesicles,
was certainly inside the pigment cells as well (cf. Fig. 4).
Fic. 19,.—Frog tadpole (Perenyi). Hye diameter 0°8 mm.; a group of
nuclei crowded outwards. The membrana limitans externa was not distinguish-
able; its probable position is indicated by the marks of interrogation. Where the
crowding was seen, the nuclei of the middle nuclear layer was diminished from
‘> ear etp 7 esrer
- Loe
‘
4
-
a)
ra
ie a
7 aed 5
LIBRARY
mo «(OF THE
UNWEIT "Y 07 ILLINOIS
\
en
on EMIS OO OS
3 0 CRESS O'NLO ign
{Ox (2) ’
mL,
hh. M.B. del
id OLeN;
oe?
Yh Gof «\
7 , Mes
7 Fe *
aL)
Sect Re
: Ags! Y
t Gn we
St Qi CoN Ay Yh
+ B - >) SH Ee
Ce eae
‘ = ¥; 5:
on
p
Quart BournuNor SAVA LEME PB.
7
We.
LIGRARY : ;
OF THE | ;
“Y «? TLLINOIS |
-
f
ro
:
F
“LIGRARY
OF THE
OFT
ain i
S twve
bal
‘LLINOIS
ii
.
:
‘a!
V4
\
7
re
‘ S @ 7
t
; 7
14.
H |
if \f} \\
v \ pd
}/
4
H.M.B. del
Quant Gorn. Mor 80 DALENS' Pt h.
3)
PI
aemerbee He nasa dm AC
AS Huth Lith® London
LIBRARY.
OF THE
univee "OF ILLINOIS
OF THE
__GRIVET OF ILLINOIS
=.
»
~~
4
a
iy Dg
oas
Piast
~
7
a
me S- “4
aS
lt RTT
eh OG
{
H
YY
bile #
H.M.B. del.
Se ee
AS.Huth,Lith® London.
owes
} ' zi
fag 4
PRI lhe Bn
Kit. ' X yy %
Ce Ae fe \e s
: Wig oh We Ae ee Pane,
Pi Se i oN : te =
? eee Peta nay ie. é
~ age 1 TERRE ae ree . #
\ Savant ; Aye ie ¥ anh
‘ m ef Fh A > aD ee
b 4 Ne ff | Wa 1 yt
js *- . fae
LIBRARY
OF THE
Laver” ~Y OF ELLINOIS
RELATIONS OF KIDNEYS IN HALIOTIS TUBERCULATA. 77
**
“Notes on the Relations of the Kidneys in
Haliotis tuberculata, etc.
By
H. J. Fleure, B.Sc.,
U.C.W., Aberystwyth ; Fellow of the University of Wales.
With Plate 6.
Nvumerovs accounts of the structure and relations of the
kidneys of Diotocard Gastropods have been written, chiefly
by workers interested in the question of the homology of the
Monotocard kidney, but in the various descriptions occur
several contradictory statements, which naturally lessen the
value of current theories on the subject. The present paper
is the first-fruits of a study of the gastropod kidney, and it
endeavours, by throwing new light on one or two disputed
points, to help on the solution of this difficult problem.
There are also brought forward certain suggestions concern-
ing the kidney and reproductive organs of Monotocards which
I feel convinced should be studied together; these sugges-
tions are naturally extremely tentative, pending further
work. In making this communication I wish to express my
deep indebtedness to Professor Ainsworth Davis, whose
advice and encouragement have alone made this research
possible.
Haliotis possesses structures right and left of the peri-
cardium (8), which, notwithstanding various views concerning
their relations, are generally allowed to be the representatives
of the right (7 x) and left (7 L) kidney of the primitive Dioto-
78 H. J. FLEURE.
card. The structure on the left of the pericardium is a small
sac, whose walls contain, in parts, lymphatic tissue; it is
doubtfully renal in function, and is called the papillated sac.
That on the right side is the functional kidney, and it
possesses various large lobes, including a long anterior
one (A. L.) stretching forward on the left flank of the great
shell muscle. All workers also find two openings at the back
of the mantle cavity : one (1) placed definitely on the left side
of the rectum, the other (2) further towards the right.
Von Jhering (1), Perrier (6), and Wegmann (4) consider
that the right opening (2) is the orifice of the functional
kidney (78), and the left one (1) that of the reduced left
kidney (71) or papillated sac. They state that the gonaduct
(from 6 R) opens into the right kidney (7 rR). Haller (9)
found that the right kidney (7 rR) communicated with the
other (7 1), and that both opened by the orifice (1) of the
left kidney, the right orifice (2) belonging solely to the
gonaduct. My observations on these points agree with those
of Perrier, who also worked with Haliotis tuberculata.
Haller used H. glabra, and it would be necessary to study
that species before rejecting his statements. Perrier, Weg-
mann, and Erlanger (8) described a pericardial communica-
tion for the papillated sac, but not for the functional kidney ;
while Haller found a funnel opening from the pericardium
into the right kidney, but was unable to discover an internal
orifice to the papillated sac. The former result has been
generally accepted, and it is quoted as evidence that the
right kidney is really degenerating in the Rhipidoglossa, and
that the kidney surviving in Monotocards is therefore the
Diotocard left (71). The methods adopted by these authors
were the usual ones of dissection, injection, and section
cutting, but in this case there seems to be another line of
investigation. It is well known that the Diotocard female
liberates her ova in an irregular fashion a few at a time into
the mantle cavity. Now, if the gonaduct communicates with
the kidney, ova might be found at a certain season in the
cavity of the latter; and, further, if this kidney has a peri-
RELATIONS OF KIDNEYS IN HALIOTIS TUBERCULATA. 79
cardial opening stray ova might even make their way through
it. It therefore seemed to me advisable to examine specimens
of Haliotis taken during the breeding season.
Haliotis tuberculata may be obtained in fair numbers
round the coasts of the Channel Islands, more especially on
the rock-strewn shores of Guernsey and Sark, where it passes
its sluggish hfe attached to the under-side of large boulders.
It therefore lives with ventral surface uppermost, and is said
by the fishermen often to die if removed from its attachment
and left in the reverse position. It frequents the upper part
of the Laminarian zone, and seems to feed largely on small
aloz. ‘lhe breeding season in this locality I have found to
extend from about the end of December to the middle
of February, and the specimens used for this investigation
were collected in Guernsey during the spring tides of that
period. ‘They were soaked in 5 per cent. formalin, and
mostly examined within a few days of their capture. The
specimens were carefully taken out of their shells, and before
they were placed in water or dissected at all their pericardia
were opened on the left side well away from the kidney wall.
The contents of the pericardial fluid were then examined,
and found to consist mostly of corpuscles, a few epithelial
cells, and sundries. One specimen, however, yielded a
pinkish fluid, in which floated several ova; while two or three
others also yielded each a few ova in the same way. ‘lhe
ova are very different in appearance from the other peri-
cardial contents, and from the components of the various
tissues abutting on the pericardium. They seem to retain
their ovarian covering and a short stalk for a considerable
time, very few having been found without them. The
nucleus is prominent, and there is a small granular accumula-
tion usually near the short stalk (see fig. 4, b).
An interesting feature in the female at the breeding time
is a characteristic pink coloration more or less diffused over
the whole body, but most noticeable on the covering of the
hepatic czecum, on the pericardial wall, on the head above
the tentacles, and on the floor of the mantle cavity.
80 H. J. FLEURE.
After sampling the fluid contents of the pericardium the
contents of the right kidney were examined, and proved in
several cases to be roughly divided into two sorts of material
—darker brown fluid with excreta, and lighter coloured fluid
containing both excreta and ova. Just behind the opening
into it of the oviduct the kidney is partially subdivided by
an internal projection of its right wall. The two parts are
respectively an anterior one containing ova as well as excreta,
and a posterior one containing almost solely the latter
(see fig. 4).
From these finds of ova it seems justifiable to conclude—
a. That the gonaduct opens into the right kidney (6R
into 7 R).
b. That the right kidney has a pericardial pore (5).
c. That the anterior part of the right kidney is becoming
connected more particularly with the reproductive system.
Injections of the right kidney were rather unsatisfactory,
as might be expected considering its large size ; but injection
from the pericardium, on the other hand, showed very dis-
tinctly a pericardio-renal communication (5) near the anterior
right-hand corner of the pericardial cavity (8).
By careful dissection of uninjected specimens from the
pericardial side, an opening was found high up on the right
wall of the pericardium, near its anterior right-hand corner.
A fellow-student, Miss A. Ritchie, kindly confirmed this for
me in another specimen. ‘he opening as seen in dissection
seemed fairly distinctly lipped, and is possibly imperfectly
valvular; it is situated near the point where the duct-like
portion of the kidney may be said to begin (5).
Further along toward the external opening, the wall of the
functional kidney comes near that of the papillated sac; I
have not, however, been able to find any interrenal communi-
cation such as Haller describes for Haliotis glabra.
Despite numerous attempts, by dissection, by examination
of contents, and by injection, I have not been able to find
evidence of a pericardial communication with the papillated
sac, a conclusion in accord with that of Haller, but not with
a ——<-"- ad
RELATIONS OF KIDNEYS IN HALIOTIS TUBERCULATA. 81
that of Perrier and Erlanger. The wall of the sac is very
thin, especially where it overlies the branchial vein. When
it abuts on the pericardium it is also thin-walled over a part
of the area, but the remainder is thickened into a mass of
lymphatic tissue. ‘There are vascular connections taking
blood to the efferent branchial vein and thus to the auricle
direct. Perhaps some one of these is what has been taken
for a pericardial communication of the papillated sac.
To sum up, therefore, I think that Haliotis tuberculata
has two separate kidneys right and left of the pericardium,
opening externally by separate apertures (1 and 2). [I find,
also, that the gonaduct opens into the mght kidney, which is
the functional excretory organ, while the left kidney is partly
degenerating into lymphatic tissue, and is becoming con-
nected with the efferent branchial vein by direct blood-
channels. So far my results agree with Perrier’s. I find,
further, in opposition to Perrier, and in agreement with
Haller, that the right or functional kidney communicates with
the pericardium (vid 5), while the left one does not. The
evidence adduced is, in part, of a different nature from
that brought forward by the authors mentioned.
The foregoing results, if correct, lessen the divergence
hitherto supposed to exist in this respect between Haliotis
and Patella. The limpet has two kidneys right (7 R, fig. 3)
and left of the rectum. The right kidney is very extensive,
and performs most of the excretory work; it has several lobes,
including a subrectal one (s. Rk. L.), which abuts on the wall of
the pericardium. It serves as an exit channel for the repro-
ductive elements, but evidence I have collected recently
seems to hint at liberation of ova, at any rate, by rupture
as well. ‘This matter, however, needs further investiga-
tion.
The small left kidney is situated between the rectum and
the pericardium, its circulatory system connects it intimately
with the auricle. It is not shown in the diagram.
The right kidney communicates with the pericardium (8),
the opening (2) being in the floor of the kidney’s subrectal
VOL. 46, PARY 1.—NEW SERIES. F
82 H. 3. FLOR
lobe (s. R. L.), but opinion varies as to a pericardial pore of the
left kidney, the latest statement being that of Mr. H. S.
Goodrich (11), who makes certain he has found it.
Mr. Martin Woodward has recently published a valuable
account (14) of Pleurotomaria Beyrichii, in which he
says that the right (7 R) and left (71) kidneys of that animal
are in many respects comparable with the corresponding parts
in Hahotis. The efferent duct of the right kidney (7 R to 2)
is prolonged forwards, and has thick glandular walls in the
female, so that it is practically an oviduct. Woodward
found a pericardial opening and canal (4) for the left kidney
but not for the right, a result which, if confirmed, makes
Pleurotomaria an exception to the general rule.
The most primitive type of kidney in Diotocards is, how-
ever, that of Cemoria described by Haller (9). Here both
kidneys are well developed and functional, each communi-
cating with the pericardium (via 4 and 5), and each receiving
genital products from the gonad of its side. If this type is
truly primitive we can, as Haller has said, derive from it the
excretory organs of Pleurotomaria, Haliotis,and the Trochide,
from which series the Docoglossa and the Fissurellidee would
be fairly early offshoots. Throughout, the left kidney and
the left gonad degenerate, whilst the right kidney becomes
both the functional excretory organ and the exit channel for
the sex products. The right kidney retains, in most forms,
its pericardial pore.
Perhaps the most marked contrast between the Diotocards
and their Monotocard descendants is the presence of
numerous accessory genital organs in the latter and their
complete absence from the former group. In the latter, also,
the reproductive and excretory systems are entirely separate.
We must therefore seek out hints of the coming change
among the ancestral forms.
Mr. Woodward has shown that the excretory duct of the
right kidney of Pleurotomaria is practically transformed, in
the female, into an oviduct (vide fig. 2).
In Haliotis the large anterior lobe (a. L., fig. 4) of the right
RELATIONS OF KIDNEYS IN HALIOTIS TUBERCULATA. 83
kidney is, practically, an accessory genital organ in posse.
The external opening (2) of the right kidney is evidently
becoming a genital pore.
Trochus and Turbo vary very much in this respect, but in
some species the “anterior lobe” is very sharply marked off
from the rest of the kidney. There is the same conflict of
opinion between Perrier and Haller about the reno-pericardial
funnels in T'rochus as in Haliotis, and Haller finds also an
interrenal communication in Trochus gibberosus. With
regard to these reno-pericardial funnels it is noteworthy that
in all Teenioglossa, even in the most primitive (figs. 6 and 8),
and in Nerita there is a well-marked communication between
kidney and pericardium on the right side of the latter—a
fact which strongly supports the view here put forward, that
the right reno-pericardial pore is retained, as a rule, in the
Rhipidoglossa. |
If the right excretory pore (2) becomes monopolised by the
genital system, the functional kidney must find an exit for its
excretory products; and it seems probable that this exit is
through the external opening (1) of the left kidney, which
would thus be the homologue of the Monotocard excretory
aperture. ‘The probability of this is increased by the fact
that in no Monotocards have traces of a pore or sac been
found to the left of the kidney opening. ‘This view, however,
entails the further supposition that the right kidney, or
rather its posterior part, comes to communicate with the left
kidney, and Haller claims, as was mentioned above, that such
a communication already exists in Haliotis glabra and
Trochus gibberosus. Perrier contradicts Haller, though
he, too, supposes that the two kidneys come to communicate ;
he, however, almost certainly errs in stating that the Monoto-
card kidney opening is the right one (2) of Diotocards, for
this statement raises a serious difficulty as to the homology
of the genital opening.
Bouvier found such an interrenal communication in Am-
pullaria (5), and Perrier justifiably uses this observation in
support of his views above mentioned. He further supports
84, H:. J. FLEURE:.
his conclusions by observations on the “renal gland.” He
brings forward much evidence in favour of considering this
oland, so generally found in Teenioglossa, as a modified vestige
of the left kidney which has become intimately connected
with the “ pericardial gland.” This gland consists of tubules
which are lined by ciliated epithelium and open into the renal
cavity (see fig.9,b). The absence of this renal gland from the
primitive Paludina suggests the hope that further work will
reveal traces of the old left kidney in a less modified condi-
tion. The probability that further work will result in the
discovery of the above-mentioned interrenal connection in
other forms is increased by the fact that such connections
are by no means unusual in Mollusca. They exist in several
Lamellibranchs and in Cephalopods, and, without presuming
to suggest that they are homologous throughout, their occur-
rence diminishes the improbability of their occurrence in
Gastropods. |
The remaining problem is the derivation of the accessory
reproductive organs of the Tzenioglossa and of their descend-
ants the Opisthobranchs and Pulmonates.
The male has, typically, a large penis (P) at the right side
of the head; this organ is retractile in more primitive forms
(Paludina, fig. 8), but permanently extruded in more special-
ised forms (Buccinum, fig. 10). A very similar structure is
found in the hermaphrodite Opisthobranchs, though their
hermaphroditism has been shown by Pelseneer (10) to be due
to the development of a male gonad in the female.
Mr. J. E. 8. Moore (12) found an archaic form in Lake
Tanganyika, which he named after its abode—Tangan-
yikia rufofilosa. The female of this animal possesses a
brood pouch (8. P., fig. 5, a) on the left side of the head in the
position of the penis of a male Paludina. He found the same
structure in Melania episcopalis, and both also possessed
a groove connecting this pouch with the genital aperture.
This strongly resembles the spermatic grooves of some
Opisthobranchs, and similar grooves also exist in the females
of some Tenioglossa (figs. 8 and 9), while in the males the
RELATIONS OF KIDNEYS IN HALIOTIS TUBERCULATA. 85
spermatic duct (s.D.) running to the penis along the floor of
the mantle cavity (fig. 10) or situated internally (fig. 8) has
probably been formed by the covering in of such a groove. A
groove of this kind is found in the male 'l'anganyikia, but the
penis is absent (fig. 5, 0).
From these facts Mr. Moore has argued that the common
ancestor of Tzenioglossa and Opisthobranchs possessed some
accessory reproductive organ which had probably become
separated from the genital duct and remained connected
with the genital opening by means of a groove, which tended
to become covered over. ‘This accessory reproductive organ
was somewhat variable, as it is lost in all Tzenioglossate
females except the two named, though the groove is retained
in a few. In Opisthobranchs, which are originally female,
and in male Tzenioglossa this organ becomes the penis, while
the groove is very often covered over and thus transformed
into a duct. ‘he development of such an accessory repro-
ductive organ de novo is a difficulty further enhanced by the
presence of the groove, but it is still premature, perhaps, even
to suggest that possibly its ancestor is the anterior lobe of
the Diotocard right kidney. It is interesting to note that
Typhobia horei has a penis (fig. 7 Pp) which is extruded
apparently via the genital aperture, and which is placed as an
anterior dilatation on the reproductive duct.
To sum up, it will be most appropriate to give a brief
statement of the views of previous workers and of the chief
points raised in this paper.
The first theory is that of Professor Ray Lankester. He
believed that the excretory aperture of Monotocards is the left
kidney opening of Diotocards, but he thought also, from its
position with regard to the rectum, that the Monotocard
kidney (7) was the Diotocard left (71). Since these views
were stated, the supposed absence of a pericardial pore of
the right kidney has been used as evidence of the degeneracy
of this organ, and, consequently, in favour of homologising
the Monotocard kidney with the Diotocard left. Hrlanger’s
work on the development of Paludina is also quoted in
86 H. J. FLEURE.
support of this homology, but the structure which he takes
to be the forecast of the Diotocard right kidney is merely a
problematic and very transient vestige. The right kidney, on
Lankester’s view, would become part of the reproductive
system.
Haller thought that the reproductive organs developed a
duct which became continuous with the right kidney duct and
opened through what was previously the right kidney
aperture. The left kidney, he thought, degenerated, but
became connected with the right, so that the Monotocard
excretory organ was mainly right kidney, but opened through
the left kidney’s aperture. According to him, only the right
kidney retained a pericardial pore.
Perrier agrees with Haller’s conclusions except as regards
the pericardial communication, which, he holds, persists only on
the left side. He differs also in a point of great importance,
for he says that the Monotocard kidney opening is the
Diotocard right. His principal contribution to the discussion
is the tracing of the fate of the left kidney. This, he found,
became the renal gland, consisting of tubules lined by
ciliated epithelium, and opening into the kidney cavity. This
oland was, he said, typically associated with that ancient
molluscan feature, the “‘ pericardial gland.” ‘The conclusions
supported in this paper are—
1. Lankester’s view that the renal aperture of Monotocardsis
the left one of Diotocards. This opposes Perrier’s conclusion.
2. Perrier’s and Haller’s view that the twokidneys in some
‘Tenioglossate ancestors came to communicate inter se.
3. Lankester’s and Haller’s view that the right kidney
opening becomes the genital aperture. ‘I'his opposes Perrier’s
conclusion.
4. Haller’s view that the right kidney retains its peri-
cardial communication in most Diotocards. This opposes
Perrier’s conclusion. The evidence adduced is partly new.
5. Perrier’s and Haller’s view that the Monotocard kidney
is composed of the right kidney of Diotocards, together with
the cavity of the left (whose walls form the renal gland).
RELATIONS OF KIDNEYS IN HALIOTIS TUBEROULATA. 87
This I would slightly modify by stating that it is the posterior
part of the Diotocard right kidney which seems to me to
become the functional part of the Monotocard kidney.
6. I would also suggest, in a very tentative fashion, that
perhaps the forecast of the accessory reproductive organ,
which becomes penis or brood pouch in the Monotocards,
was originally a dilatation on the reproductive duct. Perhaps
even an earlier condition of this organis what has been called
the anterior lobe in the Diotocard kidney.
After outlining these conclusions I saw Mr. Martin Wood-
ward’s paper on Pleurotomaria Beyrichii. Ina short
discussion at the end of his paper he speaks in favour of con-
clusions identical with Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 5 above, but from his
observations on Pleurotomaria he sides with Perrier as
regards 4. Hven, however, had i not found a reno-pericardial
communication for the right kidney in Haliotis, I think there
would still have been a balance of evidence from Fissurella,
Patella, perhaps from Trochus, and especially from Nerita,
Nassopsis, Paludina, etc., in favour of the view that the
Monotocard reno-pericardial opening is that of the Diotocard
right side.
More work on the Trochidz and Neritidee is necessary for
any further advance towards certainty in the matters above
discussed, but it is interesting to note that Nerita has a
single kidney with a well-marked pericardial opening on the
right side of the pericardium, while the external aperture is
to the left of the rectum. The genital system, described by
Haller, is quite separate from the excretory organ, and lies to
the right of it. The kidney has no anterior lobe correspond-
ing to that of Haliotis. The chief interest of the Trochide, etc.,
arises from the theory put forward by Perrier, Bouvier, and
others that these forms are very near the ancestral stock of
the Monotocards. Mr. Woodward, however, does not seem
to share this opinion.
It has been a difficulty to represent, in diagrams 1—10 the
true relations of the anal, excretory, and genital openings,
and Professor Davis therefore suggested to me the addition
&§8 H. J. FLEURE.
of schematic cross-sections of the mantle cavities of various
forms, showing the rectum and oviduct or right kidney duct
cut through, and the relative position of the left kidney or
the Monotocard kidney opening. |
It will be seen that the openings of right and left kidneys
in Diotocards have the same positions, with reference to one
another, as the genital and excretory apertures in Monoto-
cards. The relation of these openings to the rectum, on the
other hand, varies to some extent in different forms.
The most striking feature of these diagrams (11—15) is
the migration of these openings to the animal’s right side,’
and we also notice the disappearance of the right ctenidium
and the folding over to the left side of the originally right
leaf of the other ctenidium.
In the primitive Gastropods, as in Cephalopods, the in-
coming streams of water entered the gill cavity on either
side and bathed the gills, after which they made their way out
along the median line of the cavity, taking away the excreta
from the openings on this line (fig. 11). Later on, the left
kidney degenerated, being perhaps partly pressed out of
existence, and the right kidney became the sole functional
excretory organ. This process, already begun in Haliotis,
was correlated with the disappearance of the ctenidium from
the right side, and to the shifting of anus, renal, and
reproductive openings to this side. The respiratory stream in
such forms (figs. 12—15) would now come in along the left
side and go out past the anus, etc., along the right, in-
current and excurrent streams being thus freed from mutual
interference. This more perfect separation, Professor Davis
thinks, was the advantage which led to natural selection of
variations along the lines of the changes just mentioned. This
clockwise shifting of apertures and ducts has in some cases
been continued so far that one or more have become situated
along the extreme edge or even, in some cases, on the floor
of the mantle cavity, so that their original relations appear,
in horizontal plan, to have been reversed. Paludina shows a
further modification, for here the reual opening is situated
RELATIONS OF KIDNEYS IN HALIOTIS TUBERCULATA. 89
between the anus and the genital aperture (fig. 15), but this
peculiarity may be connected with the development of a ureter.
APPENDIX.
Since the above paper was written I have had an oppor-
tunity of seeing Pelseneer’s recent publication ‘ Les
Mollusques archaiques, and as he touches here and
there the questions of kidney homologies, a short discussion
of the work of this eminent scientist will add to the com-
pleteness of this little paper.
The chief new facts which he brings forward all support
the conclusions I have ventured to set forth.
1. He finds that, in the Trochide, the right kidney has a
communication with the pericardium, and, as I have found
the same feature in Haliotis, arguments for the degeneracy
of the right kidney of Rhipidoglossa, based on the absence of
its pericardial communication, are definitely demolished.
Pelseneer also finds the distinction between anterior and
posterior regions of the right kidney of Trochus which has
been mentioned in this paper as regards Haliotis.
2. He finds that Haller’s interpretation of the kidneys of
Cemoria was based upon errors of observation. As he has
carefully examined specimens both from the source to which
Haller had recourse (the Vettor Pisani collection) and
from the White Sea, there seems to be little doubt that
Pelseneer is right. If so, Cemoria, in its excretory and
genital systems, resembles the typical Fissurellid. Its right
kidney is of enormous extent, while the left is quite tiny,
and only the right gonad is found.
This result is of great interest, as it 1s now possible to say
that in all known Rhipidoglossa the left kidney is either ex-
tremely reduced or has undergone a transformation into
a “papillary sac,” an alteration which has profoundly
affected its minute structure and its circulatory arrange-
ments. It is therefore still more difficult than before to
90 H. J. FLEURE:
homologise the left kidney of these forms with the single
kidney of Monotocards.
Towards the end of his paper Pelseneer briefly discusses
this question of the homology of the Monotocard kidney.
He first of all sets aside Haller’s views, as every sub-
sequent worker has differed from that writer regarding the
relation of gonaduct and kidney. Proceeding next to discuss
Perrier’s theory, he points out the following weak points:
1. It necessitates the supposition that the rectum and right
kidney have undergone relative translocation. This he finds
difficult to imagine. 1
2. If we accept Perrier’s further conclusion that the Mono-
tocard nephridial gland is the remains of the papillary sac,
we are forced to assume that in some type the kidneys came
to communicate inter se. Having examined Ampullaria,
Pelseneer denies that such a connection exists in that type.
Like the late Mr. Woodward, I cannot see that these
objections are really vital. Perrier’s theory of the nephridial
gland seems to have much in favour of it, as also has the
idea that while the Monotocard kidney is that of the Rhipido-
glossan right side the opening is that which formerly be-
longed to the left kidney, but these are not essential to the
theory. If, pending further evidence, we leave aside these
additions, the whole of Pelseneer’s second objection dis-
appears.
As I have said further above, the frequent existence of
the required interrenal communication in the more primitive
molluscan classes seems to me to minimise the difficulty.
The question of translocation of the rectum is raised and
discussed in rather a new light in this paper, and I venture
to think that the conclusions reached very markedly diminish
Pelseneer’s objection. The rectum has undoubtedly shifted
a great deal to the right, such shifting being far more
important for the cleanliness of the ctenidium, and therefore
for the efficiency of the branchial cavity, even than the
rightward shift of the kidney.
On the whole it does not seem too much to say that, not-
RELATIONS OF KIDNEYS IN HALIOTIS TUBERCULATA. 91
withstanding the views he expresses, Pelseneer’s results in this
matter tend to strengthen the theory supported in this paper.
If this theory be adopted it is possible to say, now
Pelseneer has settled the ‘‘ Cemoria”’ difficulty, that in all
Anisopleura the (post-torsional) right is par excellence
the excretory side, even in those forms which still have a
median anus. ‘This opens up a possibility of very great and
far-reaching interest as regards gastropod morphology.
Pelseneer’s theory of the gastropod twist is now generally
accepted as amended in the matter of terms by Amaudrut
and others.
According to this the far-off untwisted ancestor had a gut
going straight from front to back. This underwent —
1. A ventral flexure, giving the gut a cephalopod-lke
disposition.
2. A lateral torsion through 180° in a counter-clockwise
direction, affecting all the animal except the head and foot.
As a result of this torsion the branchial cavity and anus,
previously postero-ventral, became antero-dorsal.
It is generally allowed that the pre-torsional position of
the branchial cavity militated against its efficiency in a form
possessing a creeping foot, for it would be pressed down
against the top of the foot by the weight of the shell.
Natural selection, therefore, led to the upward shifting of
the cavity by survival of upward variations of its position.
As far as Iam aware, no one has yet shown how it is that
the twist is counter-clockwise, and this has been an undoubted
weakness in the theory; but the difficulty is, I think,
removed by a consideration of the excretory organs and
ctenidia on the lines suggested in this paper.
Let it be granted that in all Gastropods which have under-
gone the torsion the right is the excretory side of the
branchial cavity, the left being more particularly devoted to
respiration.
Then it is at least possible that this differentiation was
already established during or before the torsion. It is not
sufficient to argue that this is unlikely because the two
92 H. J. FLEURE.
ctenidia of Cephalopods are equivalent, for the Cephalopods
have increased the efficiency of this branchial cavity by a
device of their own, which permits the retention of the
kidney and anal openings in their ancient position. The
early Gastropod had to adapt itself to a shore life, where the
branchial cavity was not as easily rinsed as in the more
pelagic ancestor, and where, therefore, the excretory pro-
ducts tended to spread over and interfere with the efficiency
of the ctenidia, a tendency very imperfectly counteracted by
the appearance of the slit in the shell. It was therefore
desirable that any possible separation of incoming and —
outgoing currents should be encouraged. The reduction of
its excretory function by the post-torsional left (pre-torsional
right) kidney promoted this kind of separation between the
incoming current of that side and the median outgoing
one, and thus made the ctenidium of this side the more
efficient.
Probably long before this the pre-torsional left side had be-
come more especially connected with the genital function, for
we find such a condition in practically all Cephalopods and
Gastropods. As the genital products in the ancestral Gastro-
pods were expelled through the kidney, the renal opening of
this side was very important. This explains why it is that
when one kidney diminishes it is that of the pre-torsional
right (post-torsional left) side.
In such a form slight clockwise variations of the position
of the branchial cavity would—
(a) Place the more efficient ctenidium in a less suitable
position nearer the median line where the blockage of the
foot would be most felt.
(b) Place this ctenidium at a lower level than the anus
and excretory openings, and thus make it likely to get soiled
and hampered by feecal and excretory matter falling on it,
there being no such powerful outgoing clearing currents as
in Cephalopods.
Counter-clockwise variations would, on the other hand—
(a) Place the more efficient ctenidium always in a better
RELATIONS OF KIDNEYS IN HALIOTIS TUBERCULATA. 93
position in the sense of being further out of the chink
between foot and shell.
(b) Place this ctenidium ata higher level than the anus
and excretory openings, and thus assure it against damage
from the outgoing current.
It may be urged against the suggestion—
1. That, as Boutan says, we must not consider the excre-
tory, etc., organs in discussing the torsion, because in
ontogeny (in Acmzea) the torsion is completed before the
definite appearance of kidney rudiments. The torsion, how-
ever, entails such a serious disturbance of organs that its
appearance in ontogeny is peculiarly liable to be hastened,
for the earlier it appears the smaller is the derangement.
2. That it proves too much; in other words, that accord-
ing to it the pre-torsional left ctenidium should have dis-
appeared before the torsion was complete. This ctenidium
has disappeared in most Gastropods, but its occasional
persistence is not a serious difficulty. In the first place its
diminution would be retarded by the fact that its possessor
was adapting itself toa life on the shore, where the time
for breathing dissolved oxygen would be limited, thus making
even a less efficient breathing organ temporarily valuable.
In the second place this ctenidium persists mainly in forms
which have evolved on special lines :
(a) Among the Fissurellidz, where the deepening of the slit
and further changes have shortened the path of the outgoing
current, thus reducing the possibility of its interference with
the incoming one.
(b) In the Hahotide, which have certainly come off from a
very primitive prosobranch stock. Here, too, a secondary
downward tilting of the other side of the branchial cavity
has given this ctenidium an improved position.
(c) In modern Pleurotomariz. The primitiveness of these
forms is well known, and their very deep-water habitat seems
likely to make respiration more difficult and so encourage
the retention of all available respiratory tissue.
3. The other objection is that it accounts for little more
94, Hi. J. FLUUERS:
than the first 90° of the torsion. This objection is to some
extent valid, but I think the process of completion of the
torsion is correlated with the evolution of the shell-muscle,
which I am at present endeavouring to investigate.
If the supposition that the pre-torsional left side performed
most of the excretory function thus enables us to solve
satisfactorily the mystery of the counter-clockwise torsion,
this is surely a strong argument in its favour. I therefore
venture to hold, even more strongly than before, the view
supported in the earlier part of this paper, though it is not
in harmony with the opinion of a zoologist of M. Pelseneer’s
eminence and insight.
REFERENCES.
1. Hl. von Juenine.—“ Zur Morphologie der Niere der sog. ‘ Mollusken,’ ”
‘ Zeit. fur wiss. Zool.,’ t. xxiv, 1877.
2. BW. R. Lanxester.—Article “ Mollusea,” ‘ Encye. Brit.,’ 9th edition.
3. J. T. Cunninenam.—< The Renal Organs of Patella,’ ‘Quart. Journ.
Mier. Sci.,’ 1888.
4. H. Weemann.—“ Contributions a |’Histoire naturelle des Haliolides,”
‘Arch. de Zool. exp.,’ 2me série, t. 1i, 1884.
5. B. L. Bouvrer.—‘ Etude sur l’Organisation des Ampullaires,’ Mém.
publ. par la Société Philomathique, 1888.
6. Rémy Prerrter.—‘ Le Rein des Gastropodes Prosobranches,’ ‘Thése
présentée a la Faculté des Sciences de Paris, 1889.
7. R. von Ertancer.—‘ Zur Entwickelung von Paludina vivipara,”
‘Morph. Jahrb.,’ Bd. xvii, 1891.
g. R. von Ertancer.—‘ On the Paired Nephridia of Prosobranclis,”
‘Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.,’ June, 1892.
9, Beta Hatier.-—‘ Studien tiber Docoglosse und Rhipidoglosse Proso-
branchier,’ Leipzig, 1894.
10. P. Persenrer.—< L’Hermaphroditisme chez les Mollusques,” ‘Arch. de
Biol.,’ t. xiv, 1895.
11. B. 8S. Goopricu.—* On the Reno-pericardial Canals in Patella,” ‘ Quart,
Journ. Mier. Sci.,’ vol. xli, 1898.
12. J. &. S. Moorg.—“‘ The Molluses of the Great African Lakes,”
‘Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci.,’ vols. xli and xlii, 1898 and 1899,
RELATIONS OF KIDNEYS IN HALIOTIS TUBERCULATA. 95
13. Arnot» Lanc.—‘ Lelirbuch, ete.,’ ‘ Mollusca,’ Jena, 1900.
14. Martin F. Woopwarv.—* The Anatomy of Pleurotomaria Bey-
richii,”’ ‘ Quart. Journ. Mier, Sci.,’ vol. xtiv, 1901.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 6,
Illustrating H. J. Fleure’s paper ‘‘ Notes on the Relations of
the Kidneys in Haliotis tuberculata, etc.”
EXPLANATION OF REFERENCE LETTERS, ETC., IN DIAGRAMS.
1. External aperture of left kidney of Diotocards and of kidney of Monoto-
ecards. 2. External aperture of right kidney of Jiotocards and of genital
system of Monotocards. 3. Anus. 4. Left reno-pericardial opening. 5. Right
reno-pericardial opening. 6 L. Left gonad. 6. Right gonad. 7 L. Left
kidney. 7 R. Right kidney. 7. Monotocard kidney. 7 wN. Renal gland.
7 7. Tubules of renal gland. 8. Pericardium. a... Anterior lobe of right
kidney. B.P. Brood pouch of Tanganyikia rufofilosa. p. Penis.
er. Groove connecting genital aperture with brood pouch (sometimes vestige
only). s.D. Spermatic duct on floor of mantle cavity, probably formed by
covering in of groove. vu. Ureter of Paludina. s.r. u. Subrectal lobe of
right, kidney of Patella. .c. Renal cavity (Fig. 9,4). G. Rectum.
Ly. Tissue of pericardial gland, in which renal gland is embedded. ct. Cteni-
dium. ct'. Ctenidium of right side in Haliotis (Fig. 11).
D1oTOCcARDs.
Fic. 1.—Lxcretory and genital organs of Cemoria noachina (after
Haller). Contradicted and disproved by Pelseneer.
Fig. 2.—Excretory and genital organs of Pleurotomaria Beyrichii
(after Woodward).
Vie, 3.—The right kidney of Patella vulgata (after Lankester).
Fic. 4, a.—Kidneys, gonad, etc., of Haliotis tuberculata.
Fie. 4, .—Ova of Haliotis, much magnified.
Monorocarns.
Vig. 5, a.—Excretory and genital organs of the female of Tanganyikia
rufofilosa (after Moore).
96 H. J.: FLEUR
Fic. 5, 4.—Excretory and genital organs of the male of Tanganyikia
rufofilosa (after Moore).
Fic. 6.—The same organs in Nassopsis nassa (after Moore).
Fie. 7.—Male genital organs of Typhobia horei (after Moore),
Fre. 8, ¢.—Excretory and genital duct in Paludina vivipara—male.
Fie. 8, 6.—The same—female.
Fre. 9, a.—The samc—female of Littorina litorea.
Fie. 9, 6.—Section of the hamatic gland (pericardial gland and renal gland)
of Littorina (after Perrier).
Fic. 10.—Excretory and genital ducts, ete., in Buccinum undatum.
Scitematic Cross-Sections or Mantip Cavities.
Fic. 1].—Haliotis.
Fre. 12.—Acmeea.
Fic. 138.—Trochus.
Fic. 14.—Littorina female.
Fie. 15.— Paludina female.
In Figs. 5, 8, 9,a@, and 10 it is supposed that the roof of the pallial chamber
has been cut along near the middle line and reflexed.
In Figs. 11—15 it is not suggested that the various apertures, ete., occur
in one and the same transverse section.
LIBRARY -
k OF THE: —
UNIVER*'TY OF ILLINOIS
OS Oey,
SR mre
0800;
=~
=
—
S
io ee a eae ee a eee
» Laart Bourn Mion Sci, VSG NS PLE
BR
" 4 Ait Bett Tak
LIBRARY - 2
OF THE ~ an
UNIVE TY OF HLLINOIS
nt
THE DEVELOPMENT OF PALUDINA VIVIPARA. 97
me
Notes on the Development of Paludina vivi-
para, with special reference to the Urino-
genital Organs and Theories of Gasteropod
Torsion.
By
Isabella M. Drummond.
With Plates 7—9.
THESE researches have been conducted in the Laboratory
of Comparative Anatomy at Oxford, under the super-
intendence of Professor Weldon. ‘They were originally
undertaken in order to confirm or correct the account of the
ccelom and its derivatives given by von Erlanger, and the
results obtained are set forth in Part I of this paper. These
then led to a renewed study of the whole course of develop-
ment with a view to obtaining evidence upon the theories of
torsion recently put forward by Pelseneer, Amaudrut, and
Boutan. Von Erlanger’s account deals only with the organo-
geny, and leaves the question of torsion on one side; it is
perhaps for this reason that the development of Paludina
has lately been sometimes regarded as too much modified
and abbreviated to give any clear evidence on this point.
Doubtless great modification has taken place owing to the
loss of the free larval life; nevertheless, bearing this in mind,
it is possible to a large extent so to disentangle the different
processes of development which, owing to abbreviation, here
go on side by side, as to be able to compare the results
VoL. 46, PART 1.—NEW SERIES. G
98 ISABELLA M. DRUMMOND.
obtained with those of the authors above mentioned. In
Part II, therefore, I give a brief account of the development,
aiming not so much at a description of the organogeny,
except in one or two cases where my results differ from those
of von Hrlanger, as at making clear the changes in position
and relative proportions of the organs in successive stages.
Before concluding this introductory note it is conve-
nient to say a few words with regard to the plates. The
outlines of the figures of whole embryos have all been drawn
with a camera lucida from preparations of the whole animal, —
which is represented as transparent, the organs being shown
by a dotted line. These have, in fact, been also traced,
where possible, from whole preparations, but the tracings
thus obtained have been added to after a careful study of
sections. Figs. 11 to 17 explain themselves; they are for
the most part transverse sections through the visceral hump,
taken as far as possible through corresponding regions in
successive stages, and all orientated the same way on the
page, that is, as if the creeping sole of the foot were parallel
with the bottem edge, in order to facilitate comparisons.
Allare taken looking from behind forwards,—that is, the left
side of the figure is also the animal’s left side.
. Part I.—The Urinogenital Organs.
Von Hrlanger (5 and 6), in his account of the developing
coclom and its derivatives in Paludina, made known for the
first time the existence of the rudimentary original left
kidney, and showed conclusively that the existing kidney of
the Prosobranchs corresponds to the definitive left kidney of
other Gasteropods. Moreover, he brought the Prosobranchs
much more closely into line with other Molluses than had
hitherto been the case, by describing the gonad as a deriva-
tive of the pericardium, and as discharging its products
through a duct which was probably the duct belonging to
the rudimentary kidney. While entirely agreeing to this
extent with his results, | have arrived at conclusions with
THE DEVELOPMENT OF PALUDINA VIVIPARA. 99
regard to the manner of development which differ from those
of von Hrlanger in certain important points, and which bring
Paludina even more closely into line with other Molluscs in
respect of their ccelom.
According to von Hrlanger, the pericardium, while still
showing its two distinct chambers, forms two little evagina-
tions, one on each side, which are the rudiments of a pair of
kidneys. These, from the time of their first formation, lie
against the ectoderm, which very soon forms the inward duct-
like prolongations of the mantle cavity. Of these the right
one coalesces with the original right kidney and forms its
duct, while the left is arrested in its growth and the left
kidney disappears. At a later stage a new outgrowth of
the pericardium takes place in the same position as that
which formed the original left kidney, becomes nipped off
from the pericardial epithelium, and forms a little vesicle,
which is the rudiment of the gonad. At the same time
there is an ingrowth of the mantle cavity, which is pre-
sumably the arrested duct of the kidney that has disappeared.
This grows towards the gonad, and finally fuses with it to
form its duct. This account of the origin of the urino-
genital organs has since been confirmed by the more recent
researches of Tonniges (17).!
I have nothing to add to von Erlanger’s description of the
early stages of development of the pericardium and kidneys,
and of their relation to the mantle cavity. The series of
somewhat oblique transverse sections of which one is repre-
sented in fig. 1 shows just such a condition as von Erlanger
describes. In this figure the pericardium is shown with its
two chambers still separated, the right being very much the
larger of the two; the first rudiment of the heart, as appear-
ing at h. ; and just to the left of this is seen the original right
kidney (r. k.) with its lumen, hardly showing in this section,
communicating with the cavity of the pericardium. Ina
' | have, unfortunately, not been able to obtain access to the original paper
by Tonniges in the ‘S.B. Ges. Bef. d. ges. Naturw., Marburg,’ for 1899, and
have had to rely upon the abstract in the ‘ Zool. Centralb,’
100 ISABELLA M. DRUMMOND.
corresponding position on the wall of the narrow left-hand
chamber of the pericardium is seen the little left kidney (J. k.),
much less developed than its fellow on the right. In the
next section of the series the solid ends of the two horns of
the mantle cavity are found abutting each against the
kidney of its respective side. It is probably at about this
stage of development that von Erlanger describes the first
appearance of the retrogressive development of the primitive
left kidney. It is, indeed, extremely rudimentary at this
time, and might easily be overlooked, but I cannot find that
it ever wholly disappears ; rather it might be said that its ©
growth is arrested for a time, but at a slightly later stage it
again resumes its development. Still less can I find traces
of real retrogression in the primitive left horn of the mantle
cavity. It ceases to grow, or at least does not grow nearly
as rapidly as the primitive right horn which is to form the
kidney duct, but it always retains its original relation to the
pericardium, with its solid end abutting against the primitive
left ventral corner, and is never, as von Erlanger both
describes and figures, separated from it by a considerable
space (see his pl. xxi, figs. 12 and 13).
As far as can be judged from the relative positions of the
organs, the embryo from which his fig. 12, pl. xxi, is taken
corresponds almost exactly to my fig. F in the drawings of
the whole animal. A section across the visceral hump of an
embryo of this stage is depicted in fig. 15, and shows how
the little left kidney, far from having disappeared, as
von Krlanger describes, is now larger than at the stage when
he believed it to be most fully developed. ‘This figure is
wholly comparable with fig. 1, except for the change in the
position of the organs due to torsion. The heart, now fully
differentiated, is seen at h. in the same position relatively to
the other organs as the similarly marked mass of cells in
fig. 1, and the original right kidney, the definitive kidney of
the adult, is cut across at k., with its duct adjacent to it at
k.d. ‘The original left portion of the pericardium is even
more narrow relatively to the right than is the case in fig. 1,
THE DEVELOPMENT OF PALUDINA VIVIPARA. 101
and in the extreme original left and ventral (now right and
dorsal) corner of it is the left kidney (l.k.), contrasted with
the right in being much less developed, but in every other
respect perfectly comparable to it, and showing exactly the
same relations to both the pericardium and the original left
horn of the mantle cavity as it did before. Dorsally the
pericardium is narrowed to a point beside the liver, and here
a proliferation of cells is just beginning to take place, which
is the rudiment of the gonad (g.).
The same structures are seen further advanced and more
highly maguified in figs. 2, 3, and 4, which are three nearly
adjacent transverse sections through a later stage. The
position of the organs in the body is quite similar to that
already seen, but here only the extreme (original) left-hand
corner of the pericardium (pc.) is cut through. The rudi-
mentary kiduey is seen at /.k., now showing a wide lumen,
but having only a narrow communication with the pericardium,
and the solid end of the duct is seen as before at 1. m.c.
Fig. 4 shows the rudiment of the gonad (g.), now a well-
developed cord of cells, distinctly connected with the peri-
cardial epithelium; while fig. 3, a section intermediate
between figs. 2 and 4, just cuts through the edge of both
kidney (l. k.) and gonad (g.), and shows their close proximity.
This section is, however, chiefly interesting as showing the
thickening of the ccelomic epithelium which connects these
two organs, and very soon becomes indistinguishable from
the gonad. A clear understanding of the position of these
rudiments is important, and will readily be obtained by a
comparison of the above-mentioned figures, especially of
figs. land 15. From these it will be seen that whereas the
kidney is from the first on the original ventral side of the
pericardium, the gonad is a dorsal proliferation, which from
the time of its first formation lies close against the liver, the
proximity of gonad and kidney being merely due to the
extreme narrowness of the pericardium in this region. A
comparison of these figures with von Hrlanger’s (fig. 5,
pl. xxii) seems to me to point to the conclusion that his
102 ISABELLA M. DRUMMOND.
gonad (g.) is in reality the rudimentary left kidney, and that.
he has missed the true origin of the gonad altogether. I
confess that I cannot fully understand this figure, but as far
as I can make out, the gonad should lie in a direction at
riglit angles to that in which it is shown, if it is to maintain
the relation to the liver shown in fig. 6, and again in fig. 17,
and this would bring it into about the right relation with the
evagination of the pericardium marked g., if we regard this
latter as the rudimentary kidney. This view, moreover,
would account for the discrepancy which exists between |
von Erlanger’s account of the origin of the gonad as an
evagination, and my own. ‘The divergence in our descriptions
of the duct is not so easy to explain, but I feel sure that
von Hrlanger is not correct when he speaks of the gonad
(the left kidney, according to the present view) growing
towards the ingrowth of the mantle cavity, for these are,
and have been from the first, in the closest connection with
each other (see figs. 2 and 15, 1. k. and 1. m.c.).
Fig. 5 shows a further development. The pericardium is
cut across at the extreme right of the figure, from this the
left kidney passes downwards at /. k., and the communication
with the pericardium is still shown at r.p.c.ap. On the left
of the figure is seen the gonad (g.), still solid, but now fused
with the wall of the kidney, so that the little connecting
portion of thickened pericardial epithelium is no longer
distinguishable. The duct is cut at lm. c., and does not yet
open into the kidney. The exact position of these organs in
the body may be seen in fig. 17, which is a drawing of a
closely adjacent section of the same series. The lettering is
identical, and the gonad, duct, and pericardium are all shown.
It will be seen that essentially the same relations obtain as in
earlier stages, the gonad following the liver, and keeping
always on the inside of the coil.
From this stage onwards very rapid growth of the gonad
takes place, so that it soon reaches the extreme tip of the
visceral hump, and then it takes part in every coil as it is
formed. At the same time it becomes hollowed out, from
THE DEVELOPMENT OF PALUDINA VIVIPARA. 103
the apex downwards, till its lumen is finally put into commu-
nication with that of the kidney, the opening being very
close to the reno-pericardial aperture. A reconstruction of
these organs from a series of transverse sections through an
embryo, with a well-coiled visceral hump, is shown in fig. 6.
The gonad (g.) is a hollow tube widening considerably at the
apex, in reality following the coils of the visceral hump, but
shown here spread out. The left kidney (l.k.) forms, as it
were, merely the proximal extremity of the gonad (g.), from
which it is separated at this time by no sharply marked histo-
logical differentiation. In this particular specimen the reno-
pericardial aperture (7. pc. ap.) is retained even at this late
stage, and I have occasionally found it in other embryos of
about the same age; more often it appears to be closed, but
it is difficult to tell for certain which is the normal condition,
as the opening is small and might become artificially closed
during preservation. In this case, however, the close proxi-
mity of the reno-pericardial and the reno-gonadial apertures
is well seen. Even at this late stage there is as yet no com-
munication between the left kidney and its duct, but the
walls are now even more closely fused than before, and it is
obvious where the exact point of communication will be.
Details are shown in figs. 7, 8, and 9, which represent three
sections through the same embryo from which the reconstruc-
tion was made. Fig. 7, taken across the line aa in fig. 6,
shows the left kidney (/. k.) with its opening into the pericar-
dium (r.pc:ap.), and its blind end lying against the duct
(l.m.c.), and nearly opening into it. Fig. 8 is the next
section, taken across the line } b, and again shows the new
pericardial aperture. Finally, fig. 9 1s a section across the
widened extremity of the gonad at ¢ c, showing the position
in the narrow space between the liver and the outer
epitheliuin of the body.
All the essential relations between the different parts of
the genital apparatus are now established as in the adult,
and I have not followed their development in later stages.
It is interesting, however, in confirmation of the correctness
104 ISABELLA M. DRUMMOND.
of this account, to notice von Erlanger’s description of these
organs when they have more nearly attained their adult
condition, and are beginning to show the development of
the actual genital cells. Such stages, he says, show “ dass
bei beiden Geschlechtern ein wenn auch kurzes Stiick der
Leitungswege der Geschlechtsprodukte aus der Keimdriisen-
anlage selbst hervorgeht;” that is, this small region, ap-
parently belonging to and originating from the genital
organ itself, never, in either sex, gives rise to genital cells.
It is, of course, situated just at the junction of the gonad
and the duct, which, as he himself points out, ‘findet in der >
Gegend statt, wo der Verbindungskanal zwischen Herz-
beutel und Nieren sich findet.” Surely this must be the
original left kidney, still distinguishable in the adult.
To sum up, then, the original left kidney and its duct do
not, as von Hrlanger believed, disappear. Their develop-
ment is arrested for a time, but they are both clearly present
at the time when the gonad is formed as a proliferation
from the original left dorsal extremity of the pericardium,
and from this time increase in importance. The gonad is
for a long time solid, and is connected with the kidney by a
thickening of the pericardial wall on the left side. Ata
later stage the gonad becomes hollowed out, and its lumen
communicates with that of the original left kidney, pre-
sumably by means of the pericardial thickening, which must
also have become hollowed out. The genital products there-
fore pass through the original left kidney, and are ejected
by its duct.
The theoretical bearing of these conclusions is obvious, in
that they show how, even in the adult of one of the most
highly organised of the Rhipidoglossa, an unexpectedly
primitive condition of the coelom and its derivatives still
obtains. Zoologists have long been agreed that the ancestors
of the Mollusca must have had paired gonads, which shed
their products into the coelom, to be carried thence by the
kidneys; that the ccelom is now represented by the peri-
cardium, and that, though great modification has taken
THE DEVELOPMENT OF PALUDINA VIVIPARA. 105
place, a remnant of the primitive condition is found in the
frequent connection between gonad and kidney in existing
forms.
While there is almost perfect agreement with regard to
the general features of the anatomy of the primitive form,
however, there is considerable divergence of opinion as to
the course which evolution has followed, and consequently
various interpretations are put upon the structures of
existing forms, while hitherto embryology has been almost
silent, and evidence has had to be almost entirely drawn
from the field of comparative anatomy. Pelseneer (12 and
13) and Haller (10 and 11) are among the chief writers who
deal with the ccelom and its derivatives among the Proso-
branch Gasteropoda, and still uphold quite different views
upon many points, though they seem agreed in maintaining
that a gradual loosening of the connection between gonad
and kidney has taken place throughout the group. While
Pelseneer, however, only maintains that the point of com-
munication tends to shift away from its primitive position
by the reno-pericardial aperture nearer to the external
opening of the ureter, as is the case in the Lamellibranchs,
Haller regards the connection between gonad and kidney as
altogether severed among the higher Rhipidoglossa, a
portion of the ccelom becoming specialised as the gonaduct.
Connected with this is the different view which these two
authors take of the homology of the existing kidney. Thus
Haller regards the functional kidney as in all cases the
right one (after torsion). Among primitive forms (e.g.
Fissurella) this keeps its connection with the gonad, while
that on the left side of the body loses its connection with the
gonad and kidney, and is fast disappearing. Further stages
of evolution are shown by Haliotis, Trochus, and Paludina,
in all of which the left kidney has entirely disappeared, and
the connection between the gonad and right kidney is lost,
while the latter has more and more passed over to the left
side of the body. Pelseneer, on the other hand, has demon-
strated, though this is still denied by Haller, that in both
106 ISABELLA M. DRUMMOND.
the Haliotidee and Trochide a very small definitive left
kidney is present, and that the large kidney is the definitive
right, and still maintains its connection with the genital
organ.
It might seem that von Erlanger (5 and 6, see also 7) had
already sufficiently demonstrated from embryology that the
homologies which Pelseneer believes to hold for Haliotis
and Trochus are equally true for Paludina. To this, however,
Haller (11) objects that in a highly organised form, such as
Paludina, torsion is very likely abbreviated, and the organs may
be formed in their definitive position. This view is, it seems —
to me, quite untenable from von Hrlanger’s description, while
a further study of the development of this form shows even
more clearly that a complete rotation of the organs through
180° actually takes place in the course of development,! and
that the adult kidney arises on the right, and ends on the
definitive left side of the body. I have, fortunately, been
able to add further to this evidence by showing how the
gonad still stands in close relation with the definitive right
kidney, though this has altogether lost its excretory character,
and that no such separate duct as Haller describes is ever
formed. It seems, then, that there is every reason for
believing that the definitive right kidney has persisted
throughout the Prosobranchia as the genital duct, in some
cases, as in Haliotis, performing also its renal functions,
while in Paludina these latter are carried on altogether by
the left kidney, the right functioning only as a gonaduct.
With regard to the manner of communication between the
two organs, Pelseneer and Haller are also in disagreement.
In the Docoglossa, at least, Haller describes a ventral
coelomic chamber through which the genital products must
pass in order to reach the kidney ; while Pelseneer regards
this so-called coelom as merely a portion of the kidney itself,
the gonad being in direct communication with this latter, and
altogether separated from the coelom, which is only repre-
sented by the pericardium. Whether Haller believes in a
1 For evidence upon this point, see Part IL of this paper.
THE DEVELOPMENT OF PALUDINA VIVIPARA. 107
coelomic connection between gonad and kidney in the primi-
tive Rhipidoglossa similar to that which he describes for the
Docoglossa is not very clear. Most writers, however, have
described the gonad as having become separated from the
coelom altogether, and having acquired a new opening into
the kidney. ‘To this, and also to Pelseneer’s view that this
opening occurs nearer to the external aperture in the higher
forms than in the lower, von KErlanger’s description of
the course of development in Paludina lent strong support.
This, however, has completely failed, for the communication
between gonad and kidney has been shown to be close to the
reno-pericardial aperture in Paludina, as Pelseneer has de-
scribed in Fissurella and other primitive forms, while traces
of an original coelomic connection between the two are found
in the thickened ridge of pericardial epithelium described
above, which can hardly be otherwise interpreted than as
representing a groove in the ccelomic floor along which, in
more primitive forms, the genital products passed to the
reno-pericardial aperture. ‘That the latter still remains open
even after the communication between gonad and kidney is
established is no real hindrance to such an interpretation, for
the solid nature of the rudiments of both the gonad and the
coelomic connection shows that the ontogeny is abbreviated,
and gives no exact picture of the phylogenetic events. The
opening of this pericardial groove into the kidney must, it is
true, represent at least a portion of the reno-pericardial aper-
ture. Phylogenetically, we may believe, the edges of the
groove drew together and a tube was formed, opening at one
end into the gonad and at the other into pericardium and
kidney at once through the reno-pericardial aperture.
When, by abbreviation, this tube came to be formed in the
course of development as a solid rudiment, it is easy to
understand how the hollowing out and subsequent communi-
cation with the kidney might lead to the appearance of a
rupture of the kidney wall. If this interpretation be correct,
we have in Paludina, which has always been regarded as one
of the most specialised of the Rhipidoglossa, a condition of
108 ISABELLA M. DRUMMOND.
the urinogenital organs in every way comparable to that which
obtains among the Amphinoma.
Finally, with regard to the origin of the single asymmetrical
gonad in the Gasteropoda, both Pelseneer and Haller seem
agreed that this has been formed by the fusion of the
originally separate gonads of both sides. Phylogenetically,
of course, this may have been the case, but ontogenetically
there is no trace of it, the existing gonad being formed
exclusively from the extreme left-hand corner of the original
left division of the pericardium.
Summary.—The conclusions at which we have arrived —
are as follows:
(a) The embryology of Paludina demonstrates that the
functional kidney of the adult belongs morphologically to
the definitive left side of the body, as von Erlanger has
already pointed out.
(b) The definitive right kidney is not lost, as von Hrlanger
describes, but persists as the genital duct.
(c) An indication of the original ccelomic connection
between gonad and kidney is found in the course of develop-
ment of Paludina as a thickened ridge of pericardial epi-
thelium, which finally becomes indistinguishable from the |
gonad, and, after it has acquired a lumen, communicates with
the definitive left kidney close to the reno-pericardial
aperture.
(d) The gonad arises as a solid proliferation of the
morphologically dorsal wall of the pericardium. It arises
from the original left side only, and shows no sign of a
paired origin.
Part I1—The Development of Paludina viewed in Connection
with Theories of Torsion.
(A) Description of Development.
Stage A (fig. 10).—The youngest stage which I have
examined is a bilaterally symmetrical, oval embryo, with
THE DEVELOPMENT OF PALUDINA VIVIPARA. 109
well-developed velum, and already a slight swelling ventrally,
which is the rudiment of the foot. The chief points in the
anatomy are shown in fig. 10, which is a sagittal section
through an embryo of this stage. The gut (st.) 1s a simple
sac opening posteriorly by the anus (a.), and ending blindly
anteriorly where it abuts against an insinking of the
ectoderm (m.), the rudiment of the stomodeum. No very
clear differentiation of parts is yet visible in the gut, but the
ventral wall begins to show the vacuolated structure charac-
teristic of the liver at a later stage. Dorsally to the stomo-
deeal invagination the velum is seen cut twice (v.), and more
posteriorly is seen the shell gland (s.g.), a deep sac, widely
open to the exterior in other sections of the series. The
mesoderm at this stage is represented simply by scattered
cells.
Stage B (fig. B), shows considerable advance upon the
last. The foot (f.) has grown out to form a prominent pro-
jection on the ventral surface. The shell gland is partially
evaginated, and begins to form the visceral hump (v. h.),
which, however, is still partly surrounded by a groove,
deepest behind, and gradually disappearing anteriorly. The
velar area has increased in size, and the tentacles (t.) are dis-
appearing. The stomodzum has now broken through into
the archenteron, and considerable differentiation has taken
place in the latter. The middle portion has swollen and
forms the stomach (st.), which lies at the apex of the visceral
hump (v. h.), and from which the rectum runs downwards and
backwards to open in the middle line behind (a.) The liver
(/.) is an oval structure, sloping downwards and forwards
from the apex of the visceral hump, where it communicates
mostly with the stomach. The opening into the stomach is
still so wide, and the demarcation between the two organs so
vague in this region, that it is difficult to determine their
exact relations, but the liver appears to lie to the left, and
ventrally behind, while in ventral views of the whole embryo
it can clearly be seen to pass below the cesophagus and to the
right side anteriorly. It seems then to be an outgrowth of
110 ISABELLA M. DRUMMOND.
the left ventral wall of the stomach. Below the rectum, and
lying between it and the liver, is a little dense mass of ©
mesoderm cells, which is just beginning to be hollowed out
on either side to form the rudiment of the pericardium. Its
position is shown in the figure at p.c. The otocysts have
appeared on either side at o.¢., and are still widely open to
the surface of the body.
Stage C (figs. © and (C,, and fig. 11).—Considerable
growth in length has taken place, and the different regions
of the body are clearly marked out. The foot is now a
prominent organ in the anterior ventral region, and a slight —
constriction of the body separates the foot and head from the
now well-developed visceral hump. This latter is surrounded
posteriorly by the mantle folds (m.f.), which form a
prominent ridge dorsally to the anus. At this stage the
first rudiments of the mantle cavity appear as two litle
depressions lying one on either side of the anus. These are
best seen in a ventral view of the whole animal, or in section.
Fig. C, is a ventral view ofa slightly older embryo than
fio. C, but the essential relations of the organs are precisely
similar. Here the two depressions are seen at c.m.c. and
r.m.c., the right one being considerably in advance of the
left. The same depressions are seen in transverse section in
fig. 11. Von Erlanger describes the first appearance of the
mantle cavity as “ eine kleine Grube”’ ventrally and just in
front of the anus, but it is quite clear that at this stage there
is a distinct rudiment on either side, the rectum passing
down a ridge between them (w in fig. 11), to open directly on
to the surface of the body. It is only at a later stage that
the portion of the body immediately in front of the anus
sinks in and unites the two original depressions, thereby in-
cluding the anus within the mantle cavity. I have never
been able to find a stage in which these two original depres-
sions are symmetrical. If this stage closely corresponds, as
I believe it does, with von Erlanger’s fig. 1, plate xxi, he
has overlooked an important point in the external anatomy of
the embryo. It is not, as he says, perfectly symmetrical
THE DEVELOPMENT OF PALUDINA VIVIPARA. 111
externally at this stage, for not only is the symmetry dis-
turbed by the inequality of the rudiments of the mantle
cavity just noticed, but the whole visceral hump appears as if
slightly tilted. The apex lies somewhat to the left of the
vertical plane, which would divide the head and foot
symmetrically, while the mantle fold on the left of the body
is at a lower level from that on the right. This tilting is
difficult to represent in surface views, though by rolling the
whole embryo about it is perfectly easy to see. It is, how-
ever, sufficiently obvious in the transverse section through the
hump (fig. 11), which is orientated on the page as it would be
on the body, the hne aa representing the vertical plane
through head and foot.
In the internal organs there is little to add to von Erlanger’s
(5) account. ‘he stomach and liver together form, as before,
the apex of the visceral hump; they are now well-defined,
though still retaining their wide communication with each
other. Posteriorly the liver hes distinctly to the left, while
further forward it gradually becomes almost ventral, passing
over to the right, as before, in front of its opening into the
stomach (fig. C,). From the posterior end of the stomach
the rectum runs almost vertically downwards to open in the
position already noticed between the two rudiments of the
mantle cavity. Just dorsal to these, and anterior to the
rectum, are the two rudiments of the pericardium, still
separated from each other, that on the right being a good
deal the larger of the two, as we saw to be the case also
with the mantle cavity (fig. C,, fig. 11). At the left, in
fig. 11, a slight thickening of the pericardial epithelium is
seen, which must be the rudiment of the left kidney; the
right kiduey is not yet formed. In the head region the first
appearance of the radular sac is noticeable, and also the
appearance of the ganglia of the central nervous system as
thickenings of the ectoderm, as they have been already
described by von Erlanger.
Stage D (fig. D, fig. 12).—The foot now begins to show
for the first time a tendency towards the formation of the
112 ISABELLA M. DRUMMOND.
characteristic creeping sole. The visceral hump is much
developed and surrounded by a strongly marked mantle fold.
Externally the most noticeable feature is a prominent bulge
on the left side, which appears almost lke the first formation
of a coil (fig. 12). A transverse section across the visceral
hump, shows, however, that it is simply a bulging out of the
side of the body where the liver and stomach are located. A
comparison of figs. 11 and 12, in fact, makes clear that this
prominence on the left side corresponds to the original apex
of the visceral hump, which has become still further tilted in
the same manner as before, thus leading to a rearrangement
of the organs when orientated with reference to the head and
foot, while their mutual relations are retained. ‘The liver
now lies ventrally, as well as slightly to the left of the
stomach.
Both liver and stomach are entirely on the animal’s left,
and the mantle cavity hes entirely on the right, while the
anus, also, is displaced from the middle line and has travelled
towards the right. Though readily seen by a comparison of
transverse sections, this tilting is not so obvious when the
embryo is examined entire, as it was at an earlier stage.
This seems in part due to the great growth of the whole
posterior region of the visceral hump, which has caused the
rectum to bend forward to the anus, and the mantle cavity
to take up sucha position that the two original depressions hie
almost vertically one above the other instead of almost horizon-
tally, as in fig. 11, but chiefly is it the result of the rapid growth
of the mantle downwards on the right-hand side of the animal’s
body, so that the right and left edges are now on about the
same horizontal level, and a kind of false external symmetry
is established in this respect. Rapid growth of the mantle
leads, of course, to rapid extension of the mantle cavity, and
consequently we find this far in advance of the preceding
stage. ‘he two original depressions are now united below
the rectum, and form two horns which abut each against
the kidney of its respective side, and then join and widen
out to form the mantle cavity; a slight extension of the
THE DEVELOPMENT OF PALUDINA VIVIPARA. 113
mantle cavity to the right of the right horn is first noticeable
in this stage, but will be more fully noticed in the next.
The kidneys have been formed as outpushings of the
(morphological) ventral wall of the pericardium on either
side; the wall of the little left kidney and the adjoining wall
of the left horn of the mantle cavity are cut through in the
ventral part of the section in fig. 12 (J. k.), while the right
horn is seen more dorsally at r.m.c. The ventral position of
the left horn is also seen in fig. D at l.m.c.1. The right
division of the pericardium has become much enlarged, and
now occupies a very considerable portion of the visceral hump,
while the left division remains small, and hes in the narrow
region between the liver and the left horn of the mantle
cavity. The rectum bends sharply downwards from the
stomach and then runs forward ventrally on the right
to the anus, which lies just anteriorly to the junction of the
two horns of the mantle cavity, and is now included in the
latter.
Stage E (figs. H, E,, B,; figs. 13 and 14).—The foot
has grown back into its definitive position, and is separated
by a marked constriction from the head. The features of
the visceral hump noticed in the last stage are now accentu-
ated. ‘The bulge on the left side has become much more
prominent, and is a very characteristic feature, giving, even
more than before, the appearance of sinistral coiling when
looked at from above (fig. H,). A comparison between figs.
12 and 13 shows that the essential relations are the same as
in the last stage. The liver, now ventral to the stomach, has
increased much in size; the pericardium, of which only a
portion of the right-hand division is shown in the figures, has
swollen, and is found extending for a considerable distance be-
side the stomach to the right of the original right kidney (see
fig. EK, and fig. 15) ; while close to the kidney on the right is
found the first rudiment of the heart as a little solid ingrowth
of mesoderm cells pushing the pericardial wall before it.
1 For further description of the kidneys and their relation to the mantle
eavity, see Part I of this paper.
voL. 46, pART 1.—NEW SERIES. H
114 ISABELLA M. DRUMMOND.
Corresponding to this extension of the pericardium is a great
development of the mantle cavity to the morphological night
of the original right horn or kidney duct. This is shown in
section with the pericardium lying above it in fig. 14, but is
best seen in a view of the whole animal from the left, fig. H, ;
here the left horn is seen ventrally at J. m. c., the former
roof of the mantle cavity is almost vertical and forms the
posterior boundary, while the kidney duct (k. d.) is dorsal.
Dorsal and anterior to this is now the chief extension of the
mantle cavity, which is already visible in a dorsal view of the
whole embryo (fig. E,), and reaching behind to the mid-dorsal _
line, while it narrows slightly in front. Von Hrlanger’s
description of an embryo of this stage differs considerably
in respect of the mantle cavity from the above, but I am
unable to reconcile his fig. 7 on pl. xxi with my own
observations, for he both figures and describes (p. 358) the
kidney duct as arising from the dorsal extremity which is
now advancing over the mid-dorsal line, while a comparison
of the series (of which two sections are shown in figs. 13 and
14) with the living animal (from which the outline of the
mantle cavity in fig. H, was drawn) seems to me to show quite
conclusively that the kidney duct arises in the position where
I have marked it, and that the dorsal extension of the mantle
cavity 1s a new development. If this be so, very rapid growth
must have taken place in the region in front of a vertical
line passing through the opening of the two kidney ducts, as
is in fact the case, and this would lead to the increased
ventral flexure which attains its maximum about this
time.
Very little remains to be said of the other organs. ‘The
cesophagus is much lengthened, and has acquired a sharp
downward bend before entering the stomach, which slopes
obliquely upwards and backwards. ‘The rectum bends sharply
downwards and then runs forward to open on the right side
in the mantle cavity. The right kidney has become further
developed and forms a simple sac, still fairly widely open to
the pericardium, while the left remains in much the same
THE DEVELOPMENT OF PALUDINA VIVIPARA. Bs
condition as in the previous stage. The pericardial septum
has disappeared.
Stage F (fig. F and fig. 15).—AIl the essential features
may be seen in a view of the left side of the entire animal
(fig. F). Comparing this with the similar view of the pre-
ceding stage we find that there has been very rapid growth
in all parts of the body, especially in the ‘ neck” region
between the visceral hump and the head. ‘The bulge con-
taining the stomach and liver now lies nearly ventrally,
the mantle cavity has extended over into the left side of
the body, and just posterior to it is seen the pericardium,
with the heart now well developed, and showing the auricle
and ventricle separated from each other by a deep constric-
tion. ‘The rectum lies higher on the right side than in the
last stage, and runs along the roof of the mantle cavity to
open more anteriorly. Fig. 15 is a transverse section across
the visceral hump of an embryo of this stage, and shows
essentially the same relation of the organs to each other as in
previous stages. The pericardium hes dorsally to the liver
and stomach, and contains the heart. Dorsal to the peri-
cardium are the two kidneys, the morphologically right, a
well-developed but still simple sac, being seen at k., its duct
at k.d.; the opening of the kidney into the pericardium on
the one hand and the duct on the other are neither of them
shown in this section. ‘To the right of the section is seen the
rudimentary left kidney (/. k.), which seems to resume its
development about this time. Its opening into the peri-
cardium is well seen, and just above it is the solid end of
the original left horn of the mantle cavity (J. m. c.). At
the extreme right (morphologically left) of the pericardium
the first rudiment of the gonad can just be distinguished
at g.} 2
A further important feature is the development of the
visceral connectives, which are first visible at this stage.
They arise anteriorly from the pleural ganglia and run back
1 For further description of the gonad and its connection with the rudi-
mentary original left kidney, see Part I of this paper.
116 ISABELLA M. DRUMMOND.
on either side of the cesophagus to about the region where
the anus opens, when they appear to lose themselves in the
epithelium of the floor of the mantle cavity. The morpho-
logically left connective is by far the stronger, and arises
behind, just below the anus, while the morphologically right
appears at the extremity of the right extension of the
mantle cavity. The two connectives are thus separated by a
considerable distance posteriorly, and they are not at present
united by a commissure.
Stage G (fig. G and fig. 16).—The original apex of the |
visceral hump now points ventrally, though it is still more
prominent on the left side than on the right, which gives the
appearance, when the animal is looked at from above, of the
visceral hump being set crookedly upon the foot. The
cesophagus is elongated, and bends sharply downwards to
open into the stomach. The stomach itself is much enlarged
and lies chiefly ventrally, but ascends somewhat to open into
the rectum, which then bends dorsalwards and runs forward
in the roof of the mantle cavity to the anus. The mantle
cavity now extends far down on the left side, especially
posteriorly, and a portion of the kidney is visible in a view
of the left side of the animal. ‘The rudiments of the
ctenidium are clearly formed as projections from the roof of
the mantle cavity on the left. The kidney duct soon after
leaving the kidney now passes below the rectum and runs
backward on its right side to open into a sort of little pouch
of the mantle cavity together with the genital duct, as the
original left kidney duct may now be called. Von Hrlanger’s
fig. 2, pl. xxii, shows very well the disposition of the kidney
duct at this stage. The old relations of the rectum to the
two original horns of the mantle cavity are thus disturbed,
apparently by a drawing together of the edges of the mantle
cavity in this region, the space between the two ducts being
obliterated. ‘Che whole, or very nearly the whole, of the
definitive mantle cavity seems, therefore, to be formed by
the great extension of the original right horn, as noticed in
Stage KH. In other respects the mutual relations of peri-
THE DEVELOPMENT OF PALUDINA VIVIPARA. 117
cardium, kidneys, and ducts remain as in the last stage, but
the gonad is now clearly formed as a thin cord of cells lying
beside the liver.
The visceral connectives are now completely formed, and
are united by a commissure, which in this stage lies asym-
metrically, that is, wholly below the original right portion of
the mantle cavity. This is, however, a secondary condition,
and probably due to a tendency to place itself in relation
with the symmetry of the external form, for a stage inter-
mediate between this and the last shows that the commissure
is formed in part from the floor of the mantle cavity just at
the entrance of the genital duct.
Fig. 16 is a transverse section across the visceral hump
in the region of the kidneys and heart. Liver and stomach
lie ventrally, and above them is seen the pericardium, with
the heart at the extreme left of the section. Dorsally to the
pericardium is seen the kidney (k.) with its openings into
pericardium (pe.) and duct (k. d.), both cut through. The
kidney duct is beginning to pass ventrally to the rectum (rec.)
as described above. The genital duct is cut through at
lL. m. c., and the wall of the left kidney at l. k.
Stage H (figs. 17, 18, 19).—-A definite coil is now being
formed on the right side, about one complete turn of the spiral
having been made, and the old crooked setting of the hump
on the foot is nearly lost. In this stage the organs attain very
nearly their adult condition in all essential points. he ali-
mentary canal has increased much in length and become more
coiled. The cesophagus bends down and towards the right to
open into the stomach, which now stretches as a great sac
below the liver, opening into it dorsally, and forming at the
right-hand extremity a blind sac, which shows a tendency to
follow the coiling of the liver (fig. 17). The rectum now
opens out of the stomach quite ventrally and posteriorly,
passes towards the left side of the body, then bends sharply
upwards behind the pericardium, and runs dorsally along the
roof of the mantle cavity, bending suddenly to the right just
before it reaches the anus. The liver is greatly developed
118 ISABELLA M. DRUMMOND.
and lobed, and forms almost the whole of the coil, being
followed only to a very slight extent by the stomach and
gonad. The pericardium is swollen, and the original left
side, which has hitherto been so narrow, widens out con-
siderably. In connection with this we may notice the
advanced condition of the primitive left kidney and the now
well-developed cord of cells (g.) which represents the gonad.
The definitive kidney (k.) is seen on the left side of the
section, and is easily recognisable by its shghtly staining
and now folded walls. The kidney duct (k. d.) is cut across
to the right of the kidney, just where it passes below the
rectum (rec.) as described in the last stage. Both kidney
and genital ducts have now lost their primitive condition as
simple specialised portions of the mantle cavity, and run for-
ward in the roof of the latter as well-defined ducts, parallel
to and to the right of the rectum, opening somewhat behind
the anus.
The mantle cavity now extends very low on the left side,
especially posteriorly, so that it is just cut in the section
represented in fig. 17, the difference between anterior and
posterior regions being much more accentuated than was
formerly the case. The relations of the visceral connectives,
as noticed already, though in a less degree in the last stage,
are deeply affected by the asymmetrical growth of the mantle
cavity, and as posteriorly the mantle cavity appears to lie
wholly on the left side and with its floor almost vertical, so
in the region just anterior to the commissure the two con-
nectives lie almost in one vertical plane. A discussion of
these relations may conveniently be left till the whole
question of torsion is taken into consideration, but the twist
of the connectives now remains to be described. As is well
known, the two connectives are bilaterally symmetrical when
they leave the pleural ganglia, almost immediately the right
passes below, the left above the cesophagus, each to the
opposite side of the body, after which they again resume
their bilaterally symmetrical disposition, only that now on
the right side is the original left, and that now on the left is
THE DEVELOPMENT OF PALUDINA VIVIPARA. 119
the original right. Following this twist in a series of trans-
verse sections a peculiar relation between the cesophagus and
the counectives is noticeable. In the region of the anterior
ganglia and for some distance behind them the cesophagus is
compressed so as to render its outline oblong in section. At
first bilaterally symmetrical, it soon becomes completely
asymmetrical, the long axis, as seen in section, sloping at
first upwards and to the left, then passing through the hori-
zontal position to slope upwards and to the right; in other
words, the cesophagus apparently follows the connectives in
their twist, as shown in figs. 18 and 19. At the completion
of the twist the cesophagus becomes round in section, and
passes back for some considerable distance lying between the
two connectives, which are now once more in the same hori-
zontal plane; then the connectives appear to become partly
twisted a second time to take up the position with regard
to the mantle cavity posteriorly, which has been already
described. Unfortunately, in this region the cesophagus is
still circular in section, and we have no direct evidence as to
whether or not it follows the connectives in the same way
that it does more anteriorly.
The relations between the connectives and cesophagus are
seen to a greater or less extent in stages previous to this, but
the description of them has been deferred till now as being
easier of comprehension when they are present in such a
marked degree. Already in Stage C, where we first noticed
the tipping of the visceral hump, a slight apparent twist of
the cesophagus was visible; this was more marked in the
following stage, and increased in each succeeding stage up
to the present. It is as well to notice that this condition of
the cesophagus was plainly visible before the visceral con-
nectives appeared at all.
It has already been said that the animal has now attained
in all essential particulars to the anatomy of the adult.
SOUNIVERS'TY OF ILUNOIS
- r
‘
a
7 \
es '
)
a
J
4 =
sh
ath
a ~
a ‘ ‘
as
ri
> y
> a
an .
1M Drummond ad nat.del.
Quart Sourn Mir ki Vel 4ENSL 7
d
LGM: Afe.
Q.
eee
LC.
| eee
ewman |
West,N
tr,
LIBRARY | |
OF THE a
“UNIVETC'TY OF ILLINOIS :
ral ~
3 *
a
—
=
¢
- -
-
~
.
= -
:
.
Z
‘
=
.
D
.
s
ato
ga" ;
‘
aa
4 )
oe
" ¢
, \
( {
( fe
ba f
‘OF THE Ree
WERO'TY UF ILLINOIS
ST a
He >
7)
fi
~ «
\
!
!
f —_
f
a
1
{
v
7 oe
‘4
C “
Le e
ants
oe
etn
_«
ah ais
oe
I.MDrummond ad nat.del.
Quart, Journ Micra Vol 46 NSP 8
West.Newman lith.
LIBRARY
OF THE
bNIVER TY. OF ILLINOIS
!
'
%
: py 4 ‘ *
Ow
a 3
lies oe
Pa) 2. bd
. |
'
é we
, <1
; Thy
4 nA 2s Ve
, i » ; ls
sir Ba,
at eee
;
t
L
LM Drummond & P. J.Bayzand ad nat.del.
:
H
4
‘
We
est.N
sie
wman litt
LIBRARY
OF THE
\
VY ur ILLINOIS
7h
LIVES.
wv
Bi ae os Sas oe —a =! i. ry _ ; eo
FERTILISATION OF THE EGGS OF ANIMALS. 145
9”
@
Is Chemotaxis a Factor in the Fertilisation of
the Eggs of Animals?
By
A. H. Reginald Buller, B.Sc., Ph.D.,
Lecturer in Botany at the University of Birmingham.
ConTENTS.
PAGE
J. Inrropuction . ; A ; « 145
Il. Some FenrrtinisaTion Depeais 3 : ; . 150
III. Marertau : ; : : : : ~ rok
1V. Remarks wron THE [Eecs anp SPERMATOZOA OF THE
EcCHINOIDEA . : ; ; : 352
V. Tue CHemoractic oa ae : : ; 7 e153
VI. Tue Movements or SPERMATOZOA UPON Sie ACES. we bg
VII. Tue Direction or PENETRATION OF THE GELATINOUS Coat . 167
VIL. Tae ArracuMent or SPERMATOZOA TO THE Eee : . 174
IX. Summary or THE Curer ReEsvutts ; : . be
I. IntRopuction.
Tue well-known researches of Pfeffer! have demonstrated
the importance of the part played by chemotactic stimuli in
causing the spermatozoa of liverworts, mosses, ferns, etc., to
approach the oospheres. Among the yet higher plants—
Gymnosperms and Angiosperms—the chemotropism? of
1 Locomotorische Richtungsbewegungen durch chemische Reize,”
* Untersuchungen aus d. Bot. Inst. zu Tiibingen,’ 1884, Bd. i, p. 363.
2 Molisch, ‘“‘ Ueber die Ursachen der Wachstumsrichtungen bei Pollen-
schlauchen,” ‘Sitzungsber. der Kais. Acad. d. Wiss. in Wien,’ 1889 and 18938.
Also, Lidforss, “ Ueber den Chemotropismus der Pollenschlauche,”’ ‘ Ber. d.
D. Bot. Gesell,’ 1895, Bd. xvii, p. 236.
VoL, 46, parr 1.—NEW SERIES. K
146 A. H. REGINALD BULLER.
pollen-tubes takes the place of the chemotaxis of spermatozoa.
We may therefore say that actual contact of the sexual
elements of all plants from the liverworts onwards is brought
about by chemical stimuli.
In all the above-mentioned groups of plants the oospheres
are fertilised in their place of origin without being set free.
The chemical stimulus, so far as is known, does not arise
directly from the oospheres. The spermatozoa of the vas-
cular cryptogams are attracted into the archegonia by a
substance liberated from the cell-sap of the neck-canal-cells.
The pollen-tubes are guided on their tortuous way to the
oospheres by substances excreted by various tissues of the
ovary and ovules.
On the other hand, the ova of animals are fertilised after
being set free from their place of origin, namely, the ovary.
Fertilisation takes place in the case of terrestrial animals,
e.o. mammals, reptiles, birds, and insects, in the oviduct, or,
as happens with many aquatic animals, e.g. Echinoderms,
many fishes, and amphibia, after the eggs have been deposited
in water. If, therefore, chemotaxis plays a role in bringing
the spermatozoa of animals into contact with the ova, the
source of stimulation must be looked for in a substance
excreted from the eggs.
It appears to be the general opinion among zoologists that
chemotaxis is actually a factor in the fertilisation of animal
egos. Thus Bergh! says that during an artificial fertilisation
experiment, e.g. 1n the case of the sea-urchin, “ the sperma-
tozoa collect around the ripe eggs, probably attracted by a
special substance.”
Wilson,” in his latest edition of ‘The Cell,’ in dealing
with the union of the germ-cells, remarks: “ There is clear
evidence of a definite attraction between the germ-cells,
which is in some cases so marked (for example, in the polyp
Renilla) that when spermatozoa and ova are mixed in a small
1 Bergh, ‘ Vorlesungen uber allgemeine Hmbryologie,’ 1895, p. 43.
2 Wilson, ‘The Cell in Development and Inheritance,’ 2nd ed., 1900,
p. 196.
FERTILISATION OF THE EGGS OF ANIMALS. 14.7
vessel, each ovum becomes in a few moments surrounded by
a dense fringe of spermatozoa, attached to its periphery by
their heads, and by their movements actually causing the
ovum to move about. ‘The nature of the attraction is not
positively known, but Pfeffer’s researches on the spermatozoa
of plants leave little doubt that it is of a chemical nature.
The experiments indicate that the specific attrac-
tion between the germ-cells of the same species is owing to
the presence of specific chemical substances in each case.”
Here it may be at once remarked that the collection of
spermatozoa attached by their heads to the eggs in artificial
fertilisation experiments 1s no proof whatever that the
spermatozoa have been attracted from a distance to the ege
by a substance excreted from the latter. All that we can say
in such a case, without further observation, is that the eggs
retain the spermatozoa after these have come in contact with
them.
Verworn! goes so far as to say: “The splendid and methodi-
cal researches of Pfeffer upon chemotropism had their origin
in observations upon the spermatozoa of forms in which
chemotropic relations to the egg-cell were discovered. Such
relations, as we now know, have analogies in almost the
whole of living nature and for the fertilisation of the eggs of
animals by spermatozoa, just as for the eggs of plants, form
an indispensable condition. ‘The spermatozoon seeks the egg
and is guided on the right course everywhere in the living
world by a chemotropic action, which the metabolic products
of the eggs exercise upon the free-swimming spermatozoa.
That from the innumerable hosts of spermatozoa of the most
diverse animals which in many places cloud the sea, each
species finds its right and specific egg, a phenomenon which
would otherwise excite astonishment, is in the great majority
of cases a direct result of chemotropism, and easily explains
itself on the ground that each spermatozoon is chemotropi-
cally attracted by the specific substances which characterise
the eggs of the species concerned.” It is one of the objects
1 Verworn, ‘ Physiologie,’ 1895, p. 425.
148 A. H. REGINALD BULLER.
of this paper to show that such sweeping generalisations with
regard to animals are so far entirely without experimental
justification.
With mosses, ferns, etc., there is as yet no proof that the
egos attract the spermatozoa to them in the manner in which
Wilson, Verworn, and others believe to be the case with
animals. As was pointed out, the eggs of these plants are
fertilised in their place of orngin. This permits of the
surrounding cells, neck-canal-cells, and ventral canal-cell
taking upon themselves the function of chemically attracting!
the male sexual element to the female. ‘The eggs may not
do more than simply retain the spermatozoa after contact has
taken place. Since the eggs of animals are fertilised after
liberation from their place of origin, there is no chance of
such a division of labour as occurs with plants. In the
analogy made by zoologists between ferns and animals there
is thus a weak point. Credit is given to the reproductive
egg of animals for an excretory function, which has not been
demonstrated in the case of plants.
There is one group of Alge—the Fucaceze—which are
unique among plants in that their eggs, like those of the
Kchinoidea, are fertilised after extrusion into water. ‘lhe
egos of the Fucacez differ, however, from those of most
animals, in being perfectly naked during fertilisation, and
in containing chlorophyll which assimilates’ in the light.
1 Tne neck-canal-cells and ventral canal-cell secrete in the cell-sap of their
vacuoles an attractive substance or Substances (probably a salt or salts of
malic acid). When the archegonium bursts these cells burst too, and die,
thus liberating their cell-sap, which diffuses slowly out of, and from, the
mouth of the archegonial tube. Pfeffer, loc. cit.
* This fact I was able to prove by means of Kugelmann’s method, using,
however, the spermatozoa of a sea-urchin instead of bacteria. A vast number
of spermatozoa were added to a preparation containing a few eggs of
Cystocyra barbata (one of the Fucacee). The spermatozoa not in the
neighbourhood of the eggs came to rest in five minutes. Those around the
eggs continued in motion for more than an hour. The movement also took
place around non-nucleated fragments of eggs. When the light was cut off
from the eggs the movement quickly ceased, to return again when light was
once more admitted,
FERTILISATION OF THE EGGS OF ANIMALS. 149
According to Strasburger! they excrete a substance which
attracts the spermatozoa from a distance equal to two
diameters of an egg. On the other hand, the observations
and experiments by Bordet? upon the fertilisation of the eggs
of several species of Fucus led him to entirely negative
conclusions as regards a chemotactic attraction, while he
found that the spermatozoa were highly sensitive to contact.
According to this observer it is simply the ability of the
spermatozoa to adhere to surfaces by the tip of one of their
two cilia, which leads to their collection upon an ege, while
their meeting with it is simply a matter of chance. A few obser-
vations of my own at Naples upon the fertilisation of Cysto-
eyra barbata (one of the Fucacez) did not reveal to me any
certain attraction of the spermatozoa from a distance, but the
collection of the spermatozoa upon the eggs in consequence of
their ability to cling to surfaces was clearly seen. Neverthe-
less, in view of the positive statement of Strasburger, a careful
reinvestigation of the question seems to me desirable.
The other cases® of supposed attraction of spermatozoa to
the egg-cells of plants all await a critical study.
In the cases of Clamydomonas and of Ulothrix,* Pfeffer
has observed that the meeting of the swarm-spores, which
afterwards copulate, is purely a matter of chance. He also
found that the spermatozoa of a bull? were not attracted by
meat extract.
At present, to the best of my knowledge, not a single case
is known where chemotaxis plays a role inthe fertilisation of
the eggs of animals.
Dewitz® has shown that the spermatozoa of certain insects
1 Strasburger, ‘ Das bot. Prakticum,’ 2 Aufl., 1887, p. 402.
2 Bordet, “ Contribution a |’ Etude de l’Irritabilité des Spermatozoides chez
les Fueacées,” ‘ Bull. de |’Acad. Belgique,’ 3e sér., tome xxvil, 1894, p. 889.
3 See Pfeffer, loc. cit., pp. 446—449.
4 Loe. cit., p. 447.
5 Loc. cit., p. 449.
® Dewitz, ‘‘ Ueber Gesetzmassigkeit in der Ortsveranderung der Sperma-
tozoen und in der Vereinigung derselben mit dem Ki,” ‘ Arch. f, die gesammte
Physiologie,’ Bd. xxxviii, 1886, p. 358.
150 A. H. REGINALD BULLER.
find their way to and through the micropyles of the eggs
owing to the remarkable fact that on coming to a surface
they remain in contact with it and continue to move in circles.
This characteristic, which will be discussed more fully after-
wards, I have found also shared by the spermatozoa of repre-
sentatives of every group of the Hchinodermata.
Massart! made a careful investigation of the fertilisation of
frogs’ egos. He came to the conclusion that the spermatozoa
come in contact with the gelatinous coat by accident, and
cling to it owing to a special sensibility to contact. He found
that they bore through it radially. He believed that this is
explained on the supposition that the spermatozoa seek to
bore from the more watery outer layers to the less watery
inner layers in consequence of a sensibility to the differences
of saturation.
My own investigations, undertaken at Naples, were made
to determine the nature of the forces which bring the
spermatozoa and eggs of the Echinoidea in contact, especial
attention being paid to the chemotactic question. ‘The work
was taken up after a fairly extended study of the chemotaxis”
of the spermatozoa of ferns.
II. Some FerrinisaATION PROBLEMS.
In the case of such eggs as those of the Hchinoidea, which
are surrounded by a thick gelatinous coat, some of the
physiological questions that may be asked in regard to the
manner in which the spermatozoa meet and fuse with them
are as follows:
1. Does a spermatozoon meet the gelatinous coat (zona
pellucida) by accident, or is it attracted to it by some
' Massart, (1) “Sur V’Irritabilité des Spermatozoides de la Grenouille,”
‘ Bull. de Acad. roy. de Belgique,’ 3me sér., t. xv, No. 5, 1888; (2) “ Sur la
Pénétration des Spermatozoides dans l’(iuf dela Grenouille,” ‘ Bull. de PAead,
roy. de Belgique,’ 3me, sér., t. xvill, No. 8, 1889.
? Buller, ‘Contributions to our Knowledge of the Physiology of the Sper-
matozoa of Ferns,” ‘ Ann. of Botany,’ vol. xiv, 1900, p, 543.
FERTILISATION OF THE EGGS OF ANIMALS. 15]
chemotactic substance which is excreted by the living egg
and diffuses through the gelatinous coat into the surrounding
water ?
2. After a spermatozoon has come in contact with the outer
surface of the gelatinous coat, is it retained there mechani-
cally or in consequence of a tactile stimulus exerted upon it
by the surface ?.
3. Does the spermatozoon bore through the gelatinous coat
radially ? If so, why ?
4. After reaching the outer surface of the living egg (i.e.
the protoplasm), what is the nature of the forces which lead
the spermatozoon to unite with it ?
5. Closely connected with the latter is the further question:
by what means is the progress of a spermatozoon from the
surface to the interior of an egg brought about ?
III. MATERIAL.
The following species of Echinodermata were made use of:
(Eehinus microtuberculatus, Blv.
Class Hchinoidea |S pherechinus granularis, Ag.
Regulares jArbacia pustulosa, Gray.
\Strongylocentrotus lividus, Brdt.
Trregulares Echinocardium cordatus, Gray.
Asterias glacialis, O.F.M.
ae sepositus, Mill. Tr.
am Ophioderma longicauda, Mill. Tr.
ere uroides Leia ae Lyman.
Class Holothuroidea Holothuria Stellate, D.Ch.
Class Crinoidea . Antedon rosacea, Norman.
Class Asteroidea
Observations upon the motility, especially in regard to
surfaces, were made upon the spermatozoa of all the above
species. The experiments and observations upon fertilisa-
tion were restricted to the first three Echinoidea, namely,
Eehinus, Spherechinus, and Arbacia.
152 A. H. REGINALD BULLER.
IV. ReMARKS UPON THE Eaas AND SPERMATOZOA OF THE
ECHINOIDEBA.
The eggs of the Echinoidea (as is also the case with all
the Echinodermata) are surrounded by a thick, very trans-
parent, gelatinous coat, the zona pellucida, through which
the spermatozoa have to make their way before they reach
the living protoplasm of the egg.
The following measurements from Echinus will give some
idea of the relative sizes of the living eggs, the gelatinous
Fic. 1.—Egg of Echinus microtubereulatus. x 170. a.
Outline of protoplasm. 4. Outline of zona pellucida after five
minutes in sea-water. ce. Outline of zona pellucida after several
hours in sea-water. s. Spermatozoon.
coat, and the spermatozoa :—Diameter of living egg alone
0-11 mm.; diameter of living egg and gelatinous coat
0°18 mm.; thickness of gelatinous coat 0°036 mm.; length
of a spermatozoon 0°05] mm.
Each of the measurements just given is the average of ten
measurements. The eggs were measured almost directly
after being placed in water.
The jelly increases in thickness after deposition of the
egg in sea-water. After twenty-four hours it is found to
have nearly doubled in thickness, and to have become
0°057 mm. wide. The width of the jelly, which in the fresh
FERTILISATION OF THE EGGS OF ANIMALES. 155
ege is less, is, then, in the eggs which have stood twenty-
four hours in water, slightly more than the length of the
spermatozoa (Iig. 1).
The presence of the gelatinous coat is quite unessential to
the union of spermatozoa and eggs, for if by shaking it be
removed, fertilisation will still take place with the greatest
ease.
When liberated at the top, the eggs gradually sink to the
bottom of a beaker containing still sea-water. ‘hey thus
appear to be heavier than their normal medinm. Very small
currents are, however, sufficient to keep the eggs floating.
Probably in the sea, where the eggs are liberated, such
currents are always present. In that case, too, the currents
are of considerable importance in mixing the eggs and
spermatozoa.
V. Tur CaEmortactic QUESTION.
After repeated trials with unilateral illumination, I was
unable to detect the least sensitiveness of the spermatozoa of
Arbacia or Echinus for heliotactic stimuli. It was there-
fore not possible by application of such a stimulus to allow
the spermatozoa to stream in the direction of the eggs (which
may be done in the case of Fucus), and to observe whether,
when passing, they deviate toward them.
A large number of artificial fertilisation experiments were
undertaken. ‘l’o one side of a drop, either open or under a
raised coverglass, a small drop bearing spermatozoa was
added. The spermatozoa spread quickly in all directions,
and in the course of their wanderings came in contact with
the eggs, bringing about fertilisation. Within a few minutes
this was made evident by the raising of the vitelline mem-
brane. I failed, however, to observe any attraction of the
spermatozoa toward the eggs from a distance, or any collec-
tion of the spermatozoa around the eggs outside the gela-
tinous coat. On the other hand, spermatozoa were frequently
154 A. H. REGINALD BULLER.
seen to pass by an egg so as almost to touch it, apparently
without being in any way influenced by its presence.
Nothing was seen which in any way reminded me of the
chemotactic phenomena either of bacteria or of the sperma-
tozoa of ferns.
It is undoubtedly true that the spermatozoa collect rapidly
in the gelatinous coat of an egg. This is, however, due to
the fact that the spermatozoa which strike the outer surface
immediately bore into the interior. It will subsequently be
shown more fully that the phenomenon takes place equally
well when the jelly encloses (1) a ripe egg; (2) an egg not
having undergone maturation; and (3) an egg which has
been killed with osmic acid, and then washed. There is thus
not the slightest necessity to account for the collection of the
spermatozoa in the gelatinous coat by any chemotactic sub-
stance which diffuses through the jelly into the sea-water,
and so attracts spermatozoa towards the ege.
If a substance causing attraction is really excreted by the
egos one should be able to collect it. On this assumption
the following experiments were made.
A freshly obtained female Arbacia was cut open. The
eges, which were then extruded. by the animal in dense
masses from the oviducts, were collected in about 100 c.c. sea-
water contained in a crystallising dish, As soon as the eggs
had settled to the bottom, for the purpose of washing them,
the water was nearly all removed by means of a pipette.
Another 100 c.c. was then added, and so much again removed
after the eggs had settled that the latter, very thickly placed
together, formed a layer in about 1—3 mm. of the sea-water.
Sufficient oxygen could thus be obtained for respiration,
The eggs were left in the water from two to twelve hours,
usually about six. At the end of this period the water was
filtered, and the eggs thus removed. Capillary glass tubes,
about 12 mm. long and 0:1—0°3 mm. internal diameter, and
closed at one end, were then half filled with the water by
means of an air-pump. The tubes were then introduced into a
large open drop of sea-water, in which fresh, highly motile
FERTILISATION OF THE EGGS OF ANIMALS, 155
spermatozoa were swimming. If the eggs excrete an
attracting substance it was argued that it should be present
in the tubes, and the spermatozoa should collect there.
In order to make certain that the eggs had remained
normal during their stay in the sea-water, just before filtra-
tion some of the eggs were tested by artificial fertilisation.
In all the experiments upon which reliance has been placed
for results this took place in the normal manner, 1.e. the
vitellne membrane became raised. ‘he first stages of
segmentation were also often watched, and found in the
majority of cases to follow the usual plan. The eggs were
also tested soon after they had been placed in water. If, as
rarely happened, they did not become fertilised readily they
were rejected. ‘he experiments were repeated with four
sets (g¢ and ?) of Arbacia, three of Spherechinus, and
two of Echinus.
No attraction of the spermatozoa into a tube could be
observed. Except for a surface-contact phenomenon to be
further discussed, they went in and out with indifference.
Apparently, therefore, the water which had contained the
egos exercised no directive stimulus on the spermatozoa
whatever.
I then attempted to find some substance which would give
a chemotactic stimulus to the spermatozoa. The substances
tested were such as are known to give a directive chemical
stimulus to many protozoa, the spermatozoa of ferns, pollen-
tubes, etc. The following solutions were tried by the capillary
tube method: distilled water; meat extract 1 per cent. ;
potassium nitrate 10 per cent., 2 per cent.; sodium chloride
5°8 per cent., 2°9 per cent., 0°58 per cent.; potassium malate
1 per cent., O'l per cent.; asparagin 1 per cent.; glycerine
5 ¢.c. per cent.; grape sugar 18 per cent., 9 per cent., 4°5
per cent., 2°25 per cent. ; peptone | per cent.; alcohol 50 per |
cent., 25 per cent., 10 per cent.; diastase (from Merk) 1 per
cent. ; oxalicacid 0-9 per cent., 0°09 per cent., 0-009 per cent. ;
nitric acid (concentrated) 1 per cent., 0'l per cent., 0°01 per
cent.
156 A. H. REGINALD BULLER.
No definite chemotactic reaction—neither attraction nor
repulsion—was observed in any case. Into tubes containing
the weaker solutions the spermatozoa went in and out with
apparent indifference. On coming into contact with highly
concentrated neutral substances (potassium nitrate 10 per
cent., sodium chloride 5:8 per cent., grape sugar 18 per cent.)
the spermatozoa came to rest from loss of water. They are
evidently not able to avoid solutions by a negative tonotactic
reaction. On coming into contact with strong acid solutions
(oxalic acid 0°9 per cent., 0:09 per cent., nitric acid 1 per
cent., O'l per cent.) the spermatozoa were killed, and thus
formed slight collections. ‘They were thus not able to avoid
acids by means of a negative chemotactic reaction.
Having obtained, so far as chemotaxis is concerned, only
negative results by means of the capillary tube method,
another method was employed, which Massart! found effective
in determining the tonotactic sensibility of a number of
marine micro-organisms.
Two large and equal drops were made in a moist chamber ;
one was of sea-water containing spermatozoa, the other
distilled water. The drops were then joined by a narrow
bridge, so that diffusion between them could take place.
The experiment was watched between one and two hours.
Some spermatozoa gradually entered the fresh water. No
collection, however, took place in either drop. There were
thus no signs of attraction or repulsion. The spermatozoa
that entered the too diluted water were killed.
In another experiment a small drop of sea-water was dried
upon a glass slide. A large oval drop of sea-water contain-
ing motile spermatozoa was then placed near and spread so
that one end just covered the crystals from the dried drop.
The crystals began to dissolve rapidly, locally concentrating
the sea-water. As diffusion from the concentrated end of
the drop took place the spermatozoa in the neighbourhood
! Massart, “* Recherches sur les Organismes Inférieurs. IT. La Sensibilité
a la Concentration chez les Etres Unicellulaires Marins,” ‘ Bull. del Acad.
roy. de Belgique,’ 3me sér., tome xxii, No. 8, 1891, p. 148.
FERTILISATION OF THE EGGS OF ANIMALS. 157
were killed or brought to rest. ‘They were thus not repelled
by concentrated sea-water.
When to one end of a large oval drop containing sperma-
tozoa some crystals of sodium chloride or potassium nitrate
were added, similar results were obtained. ‘The sperma-
tozoa allowed themselves to be surprised by the advancing
salt and were accordingly killed.
The drop experiments were, then, not more successful than
those with capillary tubes. No evidence of chemotactic
reaction could be obtained by either method.
Massart! found by experiment that two _ species of
Spirillum A and C, the flagellate Heteromita rostrata
and two species of Ciliata fled from solutions both more or
less concentrated than sea-water, i.e. they always sought a
zone with the concentration equal to their normal medium.
Oxytricha gibba also fled from solutions more highly
concentrated than sea-water, but failed to avoid those less
concentrated. In the case of his Spirillum B he obtaimed
an organism which did not flee from solutions either more or
less concentrated than sea-water, and which suffered in the
experiments accordingly. Both the drop and capillary tube
experiments described above appear to indicate that the sper-
matozoa of the Kchinoidea, like Massart’s Spirillum B, are
quite insensible to tonotactic stimuli.
Finally, I attempted to determine whether the spermatozoa
are attracted or repelled by oxygen. Fresh spermatozoa
were removed from a testis and placed fairly thickly together
in a drop, so that the latter was very slightly milky. A cover-
glass 0°15 mm. thick and 18 mm. square, supported on pieces
of another cover-glass also 0°15 mm. thick, was then placed
upon the drop in such fashion as to include a small bubble
of air near the middle. Under these circumstances one sees
neither attraction nor repulsion from the bubble, even when
the experiment has continued some time and when the
oxygen supply must be getting low.
When, however, the drop is made very milky by spreading a
‘ Massart, loc. cit., pp. 151—154.
158 A. H. REGINALD BULLER.
little of the thick white sperm-fluid in it by means of a pipette,
a peculiar effect may be observed as a result of the presence
of an air-bubble. ‘The spermatozoa, in incredible numbers
and constantly colliding, first swarm cqually well all over
the preparation. After about five minutes one sees macro-
scopically, when looking at the shde upon the microscope
stage, a black zone arise about 1 mm. from the edge of the
air-bubble. On examination with the microscope one sees
that there are fewer spermatozoa there than anywhere else.
Three zones (ig. 2) may then be made out around the air-
bubble z: a, an inner zone crowded with actively motile sper-
matozoa; b, a much thinner zone (that appearing macro-
Fics. 2 and 3.
scopically black) in which there are comparatively very few
spermatozoa; and c, the zone outside b (which extends over
the rest of the preparation nearly to the edge of the cover-
glass) where the spermatozoa are crowded, so far as I could
judge, about as thickly as in zone a, but have all come to rest
from want of oxygen. As one watches the preparation one
sees (fig. 3) that the spermatozoa gradually leave the zone a
and collect on the inner edge of the zone c, upon reaching
which they cease to move. A ring of thickly placed, dead
spermatozoa thus arises. A similar collection of dead sper-
matozoa also takes place about 1 mm. from the edge of the
cover-glass. The explanation of this curious phenomenon,
FERTILISATION OF THE EGGS OF ANIMALS. 159
which was observed many times for both Arbacia and
EKehinus, may be as follows:—The spermatozoa in the
zone ¢ after using up all the oxygen at once come to rest.
The zones a and b are by diffusion supphed with oxygen
from the bubble of air. ‘he spermatozoa in these zones are
thus able to continue in movement. ‘This they do in any
direction until reaching the inner edge of the zone c; when
the oxygen has all been used up they can move uo longer,
and come to rest there, forming a ring. It is not, however,
clear to me why the zone b should not be as crowded
as the zone a. In any case there is no gathering of
motile spermatozoa in any zone around the air-bubble. The
phenomenon here described has then a totally different
appearance to that figured by Massart! for the oxytaxis of
Spirillum and of Anophrys, and is also quite unlike the
collection of Spirillum undula around air-bubbles, which
I myself have had frequent occasion to observe. I therefore
fail to see in the phenomenon any evidence that the sper-
matozoa are attracted by oxygen.
From the above section of my paper it will be noticed that
I have been unable to obtain any evidence, either direct or
indirect, that the spermatozoa are attracted chemotactically
to the eggs, and that, further, no success has attended my
efforts to find any substance to which the spermatozoa are
chemotactically sensible.
VI. THe Movements or Spermatozoa vrpon SURFACES.
When swimming in a drop of sea-water and not in contact
with its surface the spermatozoa of the Echinoidea swim
spirally. The spirals may be so steep that the spermatozoa
appear to swim in almost a straight line, and they then move
relatively rapidly across the field of the microscope. On the
other hand, the incline of the spiral may be so gentle that
the spermatozoa appear to be swimming almost in circles. In
' Massart, loc. cit., p. 157.
160 A. H. REGINALD BULLER.
this case the progress across the microscopic field is very
slow indeed. Between these extremes there 1s every grada-
tion. An approximation to the first case appears, however,
to be the rule with the most active spermatozoa.
When a spermatozoon comes in contact with a glasssurface
it is influenced by it in a curious manner. The spermatozoon
remains in contact with the surface, and, unless it becomes
immediately fixed to the glass, begins to make characteristic
circular revolutions upon it. If the cover-glass be supported
by pieces of another cover-glass, and the upper surface of the
drop in contact with it be carefully focussed, it is seen that
all the spermatozoa which are not attached by their heads
but are moving there, are revolving, from the observer’s
point of view, in a clockwise direction. If the lower surface
of the drop in contact with the slide be examined a reverse
rotation—the counter-clockwise—is seen to be the rule. In
both cases, therefore, if the surfaces be regarded from the
point of view of the spermatozoa the rotation is always in
one direction—namely, the counter-clockwise.
The clinging to surfaces and rotation upon them by the
spermatozoa in the manner explained is not limited to glass.
It takes place quite as well upon the surface of a drop
bounded by air, and it is easily seen upon the outer surface
of the gelatinous layer of eggs of Echinus which have
just been placed in sea-water. I have also sometimes
watched it (in the case of Echinus) upon the protoplasm
of the eges and upon the vitellime membrane, where it was
made possible by the looseness of the zona pellucida. The
nature of the surface for the phenomenon does not, there-
fore, appear to be of essential importance.
The following rule was found to hold good: whenever the
spermatozoa of the KEchinoidea come in contact with a sur-
face they either become fixed to it at once or, more often,
they rotate upon it, and in the latter case, looking from them
to the surface in question, in a counter-clockwise direction.
The phenomenon is most easily seen in open drops con-
taining not too many spermatozoa. ‘The drops I employed
FERTILISATION OF THE EGGS OF ANIMATS. 161
were about 10 mm. diameter and 1—2 mm. high. The
upper and under surfaces (in which the direction of rotation
appears reversed) are best examined with a magnification of
from 70—240 diameters. In the case of Echinus the rota-
tion is well seen under these conditions for ten minutes after
the beginning of the experiment, fairly well for fifteen
minutes, and ceases to be seen in about twenty minutes, when
the spermatozoa have nearly all come to rest.
The rule given above as regards rotation upon surfaces
was found to hold good not only for the Hchinoidea, but
for every group of the Hchinodermata. Open drops were
employed in the test. ‘lhe names of the species examined
have already been given.
It has already been mentioned that Dewitz! discovered that
the spermatozoa of certain insects revolve upon surfaces.
This has been confirmed by Ballowitz.2 Dewitz also found
that the direction of revolution was counter-clockwise. It
is a remarkable fact that the spermatozoa of groups so far
apart as the Insecta and Kchinodermata should thus be
affected by surfaces in the same manner. It is not improb-
able that a similar phenomenon will be found for the
spermatozoa of yet other animals.
Immediately after my work had been brought to a close a
preliminary paper was published by Dungern,? entitled “ Die
Ursachen der Specictiitt bei der Befruchtung.” In it the
author communicated his discovery of the counter-clockwise
rotation upon surfaces by the spermatozoa of Spherechinus
and Arbacia. He failed, however, to observe any rotation
of the spermatozoa of Hchinus, but this, he states, took
place after the addition of certain (unnamed) “ stimulating
substances.” Since it was in ordinary sea-water and with
the spermatozoa of Kchinus that I (independently) first
became aware of the rotation, and since with this species
1 Dewitz, loc. cit.
2 Ballowitz, “ Untersuchungen tiber die Structur der Spermatozoen, etc.,”
Zeitschr. f. Zoologie,’ Bd. 1, 1890, pp. 392, 393.
3 Dungern, ‘ Centralbl. fiir Physiologie,’ April, 1901, Heft 1.
vot, 46, pART 1.—NEW SERIES. L
162 A. H. REGINALD BULLER.
I have made scores of observations upon the phenomenon in
question, I am at a loss to explain his negative results. The
detailed paper which he has promised will doubtless clear the
matter up. At present, however, I am unable to accept his
account of the “ stimulating substances.”
From the published figures and from my own observations
the spermatozoa of the Echinoidea appear to be radial struc-
tures. The fact, however, that they rotate as a rule only in
one direction shows that they cannot really be thus con-
structed. The researches of Ballowitz! upon bird and insect.
spermatozoa have demonstrated the complexity of their form,
which is often in part spiral. Perhaps a minute investigation
would also lead to similar results in the case of the Echinoidea.
Careful observation of the rotating spermatozoa reveals the
fact that a fewspermatozoa, probably not more than | percent.,
revolve in a direction contrary to that of the great majority.
All that can be seen of a spermatozoon during its rotation
upon the under side of a cover-glass is its head. This moves
rapidly round in a circle. The tail is quite invisible. The
centre of the circle remains fairly constant in position.
Sometimes, however, the spermatozoon makes a wider curve
for a while, and then begins to make circles with the same
diameter as before around a new centre. The width of the
circles varies. It appears, however, in the case of Echinus
to be slightly less than 0°05 mm., the length of a sperma-
tozoon. The rate of rotation of the actively moving
spermatozoa in any preparation is fairly constant, as may
easily be observed by direct comparison of rotating indi-
viduals. In the case of Spherechinus a normally rotating
spermatozoon was observed to make 109 circles around one
point in 90 seconds, which gives a rate of slightly more
than one revolution a second. The diameter of the circle is
about the same as in the case of Kchinus. Assuming it to be
0-04 mm., the rate of movement of the head is calculated to
be approximately 0°12 mm. per second, or 7 mm. per minute.
If a supported cover-glass preparation containing a drop
1 Ballowitz, loc. cit., p. 317.
FERTILISATION OF THE EGGS OF ANIMALS. 163
with freshly obtained spermatozoa be made as quickly as
possible and examined at once, one notices that a large
number of spermatozoa are already rotating in the manner
just described upon the upper and _ lower surfaces.
One also notices, however, that a considerable number
of spermatozoa have become attached by the ends of
their conical heads. The heads then generally continue to
move about their tips, usually executing circles apparently
either clockwise or counter-clockwise.
If a single spermatozoon not fixed by the head and rotating
in circles upon glass be watched, it will often be seen to make a
number of consecutive revolutions and then suddenly stop in its
course and become fixed to the glass by the point of its head.
In this way the number of spermatozoa attached to the glass
surfaces gradually increases.
Although the spermatozoa of the Echinoidea appear to
become most easily fixed to surfaces by the tips of their
conical heads, yet fixation may take place in several other
ways. Thus, I have seen spermatozoa attached (1) by the
middle of the side of the head, (2) by the middle-piece,
proof of such fixation being rotation of the head around
these respective parts. The spermatozoa can also become
attached by the hinder half of the tail, for I have observed
cases in which the head and fore part of the tail have made
excursions from the glass, returning, however, to their
original position, while the hind part of the tail remained in
one place, immovable upon the glass surface. In yet other
cases one sees a spermatozoon apparently attached to the
glass by its whole length, shght waves of movement pro-
ceeding down the tail from just below the head. When
spermatozoa have entirely come to rest upon a surface they
are very frequently seen to be attached to the glass by their
whole length, a fact which Ballowitz! has also observed in the
case of the spermatozoa of Insects. From these various
observations it appears that a spermatozoon may become
attached to a surface in almost every possible manner.
| Ballowitz, loc. cit., p. 393, footnote.
164 A. H. REGINALD BULLER.
One may not infrequently see a spermatozoon attached
lengthwise to the under surface of a cover-glass move in a
circle by means of a series of jerks, between every two of:
which it comes to rest. In these cases one often clearly sees
the whole spermatozoon and not merely the head. One may
then observe that the tail is curved and that circulation
takes place in the direction of the curve. Fig. 4 represents
what apparently happens, the spermatozoon being drawn in
the resting stages. It is quite evident that rotation does not
take place upon the tip of the tail, but that the whole tail at
each jerk takes up a new position. b
Observations upon a few (possibly nearly exhausted or
immature) spermatozoa lying just beneath, and apparently
attached to the surface of the cover-glass, showed that, as
in the case of insects, the head does not alter its shape and
is not concerned in locomotion, and that waves of movement
arise in the fore-part of the tail and proceed toward its end.
The driving force thns appears to lie close beneath the
head. ?
With regard to the manner in which the rapid and con-
tinuous revolutions upon surfaces take place, if isolated
observations upon a number of slowly moving spermatozoa
will allow one to draw conclusions, perhaps the explanation
may be as follows:—When a spermatozoon revolving in a
spiral comes into accidental contact with a glass surface by
the tail, at least the hinder end of this is unable to leave the
olass owing to its adhesiveness, but can more or less easily be
dragged along it. The-fore part of the tail, by means of its
automatic movement, causes the head and itself to make
constant excursions to and from the glass surface. The
tail is probably shehtly curved, and the direction of motion
of the spermatozoon is thus constrained to be circular.
‘he head must frequently come in contact with the glass
by its tip, which is specially adhesive and lable to become
fixed in one place. Ballowitz holds that the circles upon
surfaces for insects are probably simply the modified spiral
turns of the free-swimming spermatozoa. ‘This view, which
FERTILISATION OF THE EGGS OF ANIMALS. 165
gives a purely mechanical explanation, is probably also correct
for the spermatozoa of the Echinodermata. I therefore agree
with Ballowitz' that Dewitz was in error in assuming that the
movement of spermatozoa in circles upon surfaces is due to
a special stimulus arising from the latter.
The Flagellata and Ciliata on meeting with an obstacle
receive a mechanical stimulus,” to which they respond by
reversing their direction of movement for a while. They thus
avoid obstacles. It is evident from what has gone before
that the spermatozoa of the Hchinodermata do not react in
this manner.
One may now inquire what significance the relations of sper-
Fie. 4,
matozoa to surfaces has for fertilisation. Special observations
to obtain an answer were made upon the eggs of Hchinus.
It was found that if spermatozoa be added to eggs which
have just been placed in water, spermatozoa at once collect
upon the outer surface of the gelatinous coat, and a number
can be seen there making the characteristic circles. Others
are seen to penetrate the jelly immediately on coming in con-
tact with it. It is these spermatozoa which do not rotate
upon the gelatinous coat which reach the living egg first. Of
those spermatozoa which do rotate it was seen that they
' Ballowitz, loc. cit., p. 393.
* Jennings, “On the Movements and Motor Reflexes of the Flagellata and
Ciliata,” ‘Amer. Journ. of Physiology,’ vol. ii, Jan., 1900, p. 229.
166 A. H. REGINALD BULLER.
often step in their rotation, and that the head becomes fixed
in the jelly. Sometimes the spermatozoon then succeeds in
boring its way through, and may then reach the living
protoplasm. In most cases, however, the head of a sper-
matozoon which has rotated a number of times gets stuck
in the outer layer of the jelly, and no successful penetration
occurs.
The gelatinous coat of an egg which has only been im
water a few minutes is much more difficult for the spermatozoa
to penetrate than that of an egg which has been in water
several hours. Comparative experiments easily demonstrated -
this point, the difference being really striking. The jelly, as
already mentioned, swells in water, and gradually nearly
doubles its original breadth. At the same time it becomes
softer. When spermatozoa are added after the swelling has
taken place, scarcely a single spermatozoon is seen to rotate
upon the eggs; on the contrary, they nearly all succeed
in fixing their heads in the jelly, and the majority penetrate
almost up to the living egg.
Dewitz! believes that the rotation of the spermatozoa of
Blatta upon surfaces is of prime importance in enabling the
spermatozoa to find their way into the micropyles of the eggs.
This may well be the fact. In the case of the Echinoidea,
however, there are no micropyles, and the gelatinous coat is
everywhere penetrable. Further, rotation upon the eggs
appears not to be the rule. It seems to me, there-
fore, that the fact that the spermatozoa will rotate upon
resistant surfaces has no special biological significance in
respect to fertilisation. On the other hand, the ability of the
spermatozoa to cling to surfaces and to get stuck to them by
the pointed end of their heads is of great importance in
causing them not to leave the gelatinous coat of an egg after
having come in contact with it, and in penetrating the same.
1 Dewitz, loc. cit.
FERTILISATION OF THE EGGS OF ANIMALS. 167
VII. Tue Drrecrion or PENETRATION OF THE GELATINOUS COAT,
Fol! observed for Asterias that when a spermatozoon had
come in contact with the gelatinous coat it placed itself
perpendicular to it, and then penetrated radially to the egg,
meeting and fusing when half-way through with a curious
“cone Wexudation.”’ Fol concluded that the gelatinous
coat is an apparatus for catching the spermatozoa when they
come in contact with it, and attributed the radial structure to
lines of more or less resistance, which serve to guide the
spermatozoa directly to the egg.
Selenka’ investigated the development of the gelatinous
coat, and found that at first it is penetrated by fine radial
protoplasmic filaments, each in its own canal. Later the fila-
ments become withdrawn, but the canals remain until after
fertilisation. Selenka also observed that the spermatozoa
penetrate the jelly “always ina radial direction,” and stated
that this is due to the spermatozoa making their way through
the canals. This explanation appears to be very plausible.
Before, however, accepting it as being sufficient, we shall do
well to bear in mind the observations of Kupffer and Benecke
upon the fertilisation of the eggs of Petromyzon.
According to the last-named authors the spermatozoa of
Petromyzon penetrate a thick gelatinous dome covering
one end of an egg in a radial direction.* This observation,
upon which special stress was laid, confirmed the statements
previously made by August Muller. Although the inner
shell-layer was found to contain radial canals, Kupffer and
Benecke could discover no trace of such in the outer shell-
layer, while they described and figured the dome as being
1 Fol, ‘ Recherches sur la Fécondation, etc.,’ 1879.
* Selenka, ‘ Zoologische Studien, Befruchtung des Kies von Toxopneustes
variegatus,’ 1878, p. 2.
Sec. ctt., p.:5.
4 Kupffer and Benecke, ‘Der Vorgang der Befruchtung am Ei der Neu-
naugen,’ Konigsberg, 1878, p. 11.
168 A. H. REGINALD BULLER.
quite hyaline. The radial path of the spermatozoon is so
striking that the authors believed it necessary to postulate
some attraction! of the egg for the spermatozoon from a
distance. Concerning the nature of the forces, however, no
suggestion was made.
In my own investigations special attention was paid to the
direction of penetration of the spermatozoa through the gela-
tinous coat of the eggs of Echinus. In this case, at least,
it cannot be stated that penetration is always in a radial
direction. A great many spermatozoa penetrate obliquely.
It appeared to me, however, after having made a large .
uumber of observations for determining the point, that on
the whole there is a tendency for the spermatozoa to make
their way from the outside to the inside of the gelatinous
coat. This tendency is best seen after the eggs have been
from three to six hours in sea-water and the jelly has become
considerably swollen. One then observes, upon adding
spermatozoa, that on the whole, although many penetrate
obliquely, the spermatozoa pass in a radial manner through
the jelly to the egg. It is easy to observe spermatozoa which
take an almost perfectly radial course. ‘The path of many of
them is seen to incline to a radius by an angle equal to
between 10° and 30°. Others may be observed to start
fairly radially, soon turn aside, and continue obliquely
striking the eggs thus obliquely, or occasionally even making
their way out again in a tangential direction. A considerable
number of spermatozoa, after entering, stick fast in the jelly.
The heads of these are then seen to be very variously oriented
with respect to a radius.
Having come to the conclusion that the spermatozoa do
pass more or less radially through the gelatinous coat, my
next inquiry was concerning the cause. It was found that
the radial penetration could be equally well observed in (1)
a ripe egg; (2) a full-sized egg which had not undergone
maturation, the nucleus being still very large and uncon-
tracted ; and in (3) a ripe egg which had been killed with
! Kupffer and Benecke, loc. cit., figs. 1, 7, and 8.
FERTILISATION OF THE EGGS OF ANIMALS. 169
osmic acid and then washed. In the last case the osmic acid
turned the eggs brown. ‘The eggs so killed were put in
100 c.c. sea-water for half an hour and stirred round at
intervals. They were then caught in a pipette, placed in a
drop on a slide, and spermatozoa added. ‘The radial penetra-
tion was quite as clear as in the living eggs.
From the foregoing observations it seems evident that the
radial penetration is nob brought about by any special attrac-
tion by the living egg, for it takes place equally well with a
dead ege. Nor do the facts point to any chemotactic attract-
ing substance as causing the phenomenon, for from a dead
egg no excretion can take place. Selenka’s suggestion that
the spermatozoa take a radial course because they make their
way through canals, which during the development of the
ego contained protoplasmic connections, also does not seem
to me a satisfactory explanation. ‘I'he radial structure of the
gelatinous coat after an egg has been a few hours in water
is extremely faint, and, so far as one can directly observe,
absent at the periphery where the spermatozoa start on their
course. Selenka! admitted that the canals were finer than
the width of the head of a spermatozoon. Surely with the
swelling of the jelly these canals must be practically filled up.
I have, as already stated, very frequently seen spermatozoa
penetrate the gelatinous coat obliquely, often very obliquely.
In these cases the spermatozoa could not be making their
way through Selenka’s canals. Hence we may conclude that
the canals, if such there are, are not necessary for penetra-
tion. The thick gelatinous dome of a Petromyzon egg,
and also, according to Massart,” the jelly around the ovum of
the frog, are penetrated radially without the presence of any
canals whatever. These various facts point to the conclusion
that the penetration of the gelatinous coat in a more or less
radial direction by the spermatozoa is not due to canals, but
to some other cause.
The above reflections led me to make experiments to find
1 Selenka, loc. cit., p. 5.
* Massart, “ Sur la Pénuétration, ete.,” loc. cit., p. 217.
170 A. H. REGINALD BULLER.
out how the spermatozoa behave toward jelly from other
sources than that from the eggs of the Echinoidea.
When the -oosporangia of Cystocyra barbata (one of
the Fucacez) are liberated into sea-water, the outer coat
rapidly swells and gelatinises. Spermatozoa from Arbacia
were added to a preparation containing some of the oospor-
angia, Ata certain stage in the gelatinisation the sperma-
tozoa entered the jelly in large numbers, thus becoming
densely crowded together in it.
A similar gathering was observed when the seed-coat of
Linum usatissimum was placed in water containing .
spermatozoa. ‘The outer cell-walls rapidly swell and become
gelatinous. The spermatozoa, when the jelly had reached a
certain consistency, collected in it in large numbers.
It was also found that if the gelatinous coat of an
Echinus egg be separated by shaking, and spermatozoa be
allowed access to the coat after several hours’ isolation, the
number of spermatozoa which will gather in it is very
considerable.
The conclusion that is to be drawn from the above experi-
ments appears to be that the spermatozoa are so constructed
that they will bore their way into any jelly of a certain
consistency without any aid from canals, chemotactic sub-
stances, or influences from living protoplasm.
Massart, as already mentioned, explains the radial pene-
tration in the frog by supposing that the spermatozoa seek
to pass from the more watery to the less watery layers of
jelly, owing to a sensibility to these differences in saturation.
Although this theory is plausible, it does not appear to me
to be convincing. It does not sufficiently explain why the
head of a spermatozoon is at first pushed into the jelly in a
radial direction. After the head has been pushed in, whether
this be radially or somewhat obliquely, the spermatozoon of
Hchinus usually takes a fairly straight course with respect
to the axis of the head. Hvidence of picking and choosing
between the gelatinous layers thus appears to be wanting.
After an egg of Echinus has been in water for several hours
FERTILISATION OF THE EGGS OF ANIMALS. 171
it is doubtful whether the outer layers of jelly are the more
watery and the inner the less so. In fact, from the ease with
which the spermatozoa rotate the egg inside the gelatinous
coat (vide infra), one might well suppose that the innermost
layers are the more watery. ‘The view that the resistance of
the jelly decreases inwards has, indeed, already been upheld
by Selenka! for the eggs of Asterias. For the Echinoidea
and Asteroidea, therefore, the necessary basis of fact for an
application of Massart’s theory seems to be wanting.
There appear to me to be yet two possible explanations of
the penetration: (1) It is due to reaction to a stereotactic
stimulus ; (2) it is purely mechanical.
1. Stereotropism has long been observed. Very many
organisms, both animals and plants, in sea- and fresh-water,
grow perpendicularly to their substratum, owing to the
influence which the position of the latter has upon their
direction of growth. In the same manner as for geotropism,
heliotropism, chemotropism, etc., we have a corresponding
tactic phenomenon, so also may it be with stereotropism. It
is possible to imagine a free-swimming organism which, upon
coming in contact with a surface, receives from it a stimulus
which causes it to alter its movements in such a manner as to
attempt to make its way more or less perpendicularly to the
same, and through the substance concerned. Although such
a stereotactic sensitiveness would neatly explain the radial
penetration for the Hchinoidea, Petromyzon, and the frog,
yet conclusive observations in its support appear to me to be
lacking.
2. Owing to the extreme difficulty or impossibility of seeing
exactly what the movements of a spermatozoon upon a gela-
tinous surface are, the mechanical explanation must at present
remain tentative and almost purely hypothetical. When a
spermatozoon, swimming spirally, comes in contact with the
outer surface of the gelatinous coat, the tip of the conical
head, which reaches it first, possibly owing to the force of
contact, possibly to adhesiveness, may well be supposed to
’ Selenka, loc. cit., IL ‘ Die Befruchtung, Das Spermatozoon.’
rye A. H.- REGINALD “BULLER.
immediately fix itself in the jelly. This is, indeed, what
appears to take place under the microscope. The tail of the
spermatozoon then probably adheres to the outer surface of
the egg-coat, and is dragged round and round on it about
the conical head, which is gradually pushed forward through
the jelly. It may well be these revolutions (the modified
spiral of the usual mode of swimming) which cause a
spermatozoon to bore through the jelly more or less perpen-
dicularly to the surface. The fact that the head is of such a
shape that when once embedded in the gelatinous coat it can
be easily pushed forward, but offers considerable resistance -
to moving either backwards or sideways, together with the
particular consistency of the jelly, may well account for the
steady progress forward of the whole spermatozoon in one
direction. It seems to me probable that some such explana-
tion as the foregoing will be sufficient to explain all that
takes place during the penetration of the gelatinous coat.
It may here be remarked that since the presence of a
gelatinous coat doubles the diameter of an egg its presence
multiplies the chances of contact with its exterior surface
by a spermatozoon four times. Since the more active sper-
matozoa, after coming in contact with the jelly, are con-
ducted by it to the living protoplasm of the egg, the chances
of fertilisation by them is, by the presence of the gelatinous
coat, also increased four times. Since, however, a consider-
able percentage of the weaker spermatozoa get stuck in the
gelatinous coat after entrance, thus not reaching the living
ego, our estimate of the increased chances of fertilisation
must undergo a large reduction. The first function of the
jelly, which surrounds so many eggs, appears to be that of
protection, making them distasteful to larger, and unassail-
able by smaller, enemies. For the purpose of fertilisation its
consistency must be such as to allow easy penetration by the
spermatozoa.
‘The ease with which spermatozoa enter and become fixed
in gelatinous substances will explain a phenomenon which at
first puzzled me. It was observed that, when a capillary
FERTILISATION OF THE EGGS OF ANIMALS. 178
tube containing sea water, in which eggs had previously
been deposited, was placed in a drop containing §sper-
matozoa, the spermatozoa were not attracted into the tube.
On the other hand, it frequently happened that the sper-
matozoa gathered very thickly into small balls just inside
and outside of a tube. The balls were sometimes 0°01 to
0:05 mm. in diameter. It was apparent that, since the balls
were only. formed at the mouth of a tube, the cause of their
formation was to be sought in the filtered sea-water. The
phenomenon was found to take place after six successive filtra-
tions. A drop of sea-water in which eggs had been deposited
was placed upon a slide and a drop containing spermatozoa
near it. On joining the drops a large number of small balls
were formed ina very few seconds. When very numerous
spermatozoa were present the balls became 0°1 mm. in
diameter, containing many thousands of spermatozoa packed
together in a dense mass. The following appears to be the
explanation of the phenomenon:—From the ovary there
come out with the eges a large number of very small bits of
jelly, which are so small that they will (like spermatozoa)
pass through ordinary filter paper, and so transparent that
one cannot directly see them. A few spermatozoa become
attached to each piece of jelly, the presence of which may be
inferred from the manner in which the small group of sper-
matozoa move about. Owing to the length of a spermatozoon,
although its head, may be embedded in a jelly particle, the
tail may remain partly free. The little collections of sper-
matozoa thus move about hither and thither in no particular
direction. When two such groups come by accident into
contact they fuse. Certain of the spermatozoa adhere to
both little masses of jelly and lock them together. The
fused mass combines with other simple and fused masses, and
soon. It is by this curious synthetic process that, in a very
few seconds, there may be formed a ball as large or larger
than an Hchinus egg and containing thousands and
thousands of spermatozoa, looking black under the micro-
scope, and easily seen in a drop of water with the unaided eye.
174 A. H. REGINALD BULLER.
VIII. Tue ATTACHMENT OF SPERMATOZOA TO THE EHaa.
As soon as a spermatozoon has penetrated the gelatinous
coat it usually becomes fixed by the head to the periphery of
the living ege. Sometimes it executes circles for a while
upon the protoplasm, and occasionally even re-enters the
jelly and makes its way through this in a radial direction,
thus leaving the egg entirely.
When a great number of spermatozoa are allowed access -
to an egg which has been some hours in sea-water, so many
immediately penetrate and become attached by their heads
that they set the egg in rotation. ‘The rotation may be in
any direction,! and often continues for about a minute,
ceasing with the formation of the vitelline membrane. The
rate of revolution varies according to the number of sper-
matozoa attached to the egg. A rapidly moving egg of
Arbacia was observed to make ten revolutions in thirty
seconds. The gelatinous coat during rotation scarcely moves
at all, the hving egg revolving quite independently within it.
The spermatozoa often move the egg with such force as to
separate it from its gelatinous coat. One then observes that,
except for those attached by their heads to the egg, there is
no collection of spermatozoa around the latter. This fact is
in accordance with the supposition that no chemotactic sub-
stance is excreted by the egg. Numerous spermatozoa enter
the isolated gelatinous coat.
The spermatozoon attaches itself to the egg by its most
adhesive part, i. e. the tip of the head. The question arises
whether the attachment is purely mechanical. It may be
that the outer surface of the protoplasm is such as to be
best adapted for retaining a spermatozoon by adhesion as
! For the eggs of the Fucacer the rotation appears to be constantly in a
clockwise direction. Thus Farmer and Williams (‘ Phil. Trans. Roy. Soe.,’
vol. 190, 1898, p. 633) state for Halidrys “the movement is always in a
clockwise direction.” I have also found this true for Cystocyra barbata.
The fact as yet has not been explained.
FERTILISATION OF THE EGGS OF ANIMALS. 175
soon as this comes in contact with it by the tip of its head.
On the other hand, it is possible, and even probable, that un-
known stimuli here play a part. ‘The advance of the sper-
matozoon into the egg after leaving the periphery is, like the
formation of the vitelline membrane, doubtless due to a
stimulus given the egg by the spermatozoon. With regard
to the exact nature of the stimulus and of the protoplasmic
movements which appear to be its reaction we are as yet
without any explanation.
IX. SumMARY OF THE CHIEF RESULTS.
The chief conclusions arrived at during the research upon
the fertilisation of the eggs of the Hchinoidea were as
follows :
1. The meeting of the spermatozoa with the outer surface
of the gelatinous coat (zona pellucida) is a matter of chance,
and not due to chemotaxis.
2. The passage of the spermatozoa through the gelatinous
coat (observed chiefly in Echinus) is more or less ina radial
direction as regards the egg. The direction taken is not due
to any chemotactic substance being excreted from the egg.
The phenomenon is possibly due to stereotaxis, but a purely
mechanical explanation seems to the author more probable.
3. The spermatozoa are probably not chemotactically
sensitive. They do not respond to tonotactic or heliotactic
stimuli.
4, On coming in contact with a surface bounding their
medium the spermatozoa cling to it, and usually continue for a
time to revolve upon it in (from their point of view) a counter-
clockwise direction. ‘I'his statement applies to every group
of the Echinodermata.
). The spermatozoa easily become attached to glass and
other surfaces by the tips of their conical heads. This
_ phenomenon doubtless plays a role in causing the spermatozoa
to bore through the gelatinous coat after having come in con-
176 A. H. REGINALD BULLER.
tact with its outer surface, and also in their becoming
attached to the living egg.
6. The vast number of eggs, and still vaster number of
spermatozoa produced, together with the motility of the
latter and the action of sea-currents, quite suffices to bring
the male sexual cells into contact with the zona pellucida.
7. Many writers have supposed that chemotaxis is a
constant factor in the fertilisation of animal eggs. This
generalisation, which has been made by arguing from the
attraction of the spermatozoa to the eggs of certain plants,
is as yet entirely without experimental justification. From
my own results with the Echinoidea, which are in accordance
with those obtained by Massart in the case of the frog, and
with the work of Dewitz upon the fertilisation of the eggs of
certain insects, I have been led to suppose that chemotaxis,
at least for a great number of animal species, plays no
role whatever in bringing the sexual elements together. —
The work for the above paper was done at the Stazione
Zoologica, Naples, during the months of March and April of
each of the years 1900 and 1901. It gives me much pleasure
to thank the Committee of the British Association for grant-
ing me the use of the table, and also to acknowledge my
indebtedness to the staff of the Stazione Zoologica for
supplying me with material and apparatus during the
research.
MATURATION OF OVUM IN RCHINUS RSCULENTUS. 177
E
“Maturation of the Ovum in Echinus
esculentus.
By
v
Thomas H. Bryce, M.A., M.D.
With Plates 10—12.
INTRODUCTION.
Tur subject of the maturation of the sexual cells is a
thorny terrain. It can be attacked only by the highest
powers of the microscope, and the facts can only be
reached by a process of patient mental reconstruction of the
various phases. Historically the subject has been overlaid
by some brilliant but premature hypotheses, which, how-
ever much they may have stimulated research, have also
tended to foster prepossessions. The necessary stimulus
for research has been supplied by the hypothesis that
the chromatin of the nucleus is the hereditary sub-
stance, or, at least, the bearer from one generation to
another of hereditary qualities. But apart from the interest
connected with problems of heredity, and the meaning of
fertilisation, the study of the intricate details of the process
of maturation goes to the bottom of all our knowledge of
cellular morphology. The study of the maturation phe-
nomena in Kchinus was, in the first place, taken up merely
with the motive of seeing some of the actual phases in the
most readily obtaiable material. But it was soon dis-
covered that although the outward phases had been fre-
quently studied, most of the finer details of the process, as
seen in Hchinus, were undescribed, and therefore it was con-
sidered worth while to make a study of the whole process.
yon, 46, part 2.—NEW SERIES. M
178 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
In view of the hopelessly diverging results for different
forms obtained by different observers, an interest in the
behaviour of the chromatin during maturation has declined
of recent years, and the question of the centrosome has
occupied more attention. Results which came out led me to
certain conclusions, which, to my mind, tended to clear up in
some measure the confusion at present prevailing. As
the research was proceeding, Strasburger’s work, ‘ Reduk-
tionstheilung, Spindelbildung, Centrosomen, und Cilien-
bilden in Pflanzenreich’ (1900), came into my hands. In
that work conclusions in the matter of the reducing divisions .
identical with my own, and foreshadowed in several
previous botanical memoirs, are brought, by new com-
parative investigations, to a focus, and are made a means
of harmonising the apparently contradictory results in the
case of plants. This obviously increased the importance of
my own results, and inspired me to follow ont, in spite of the
large amount of labour involved, the whole series of
phenomena, in order to obtain as complete a demonstration
of the facts as possible.
MarturaTION IN ECHINUS ESCULENTUS, hL.
Previous Observations on Maturation in
Echinoderms.
The Echinoderm ovum has been the classical material
for all observations on the lving egg. The earliest
observations on the maturation of the sea-urchin egg
were made by Derbes in 1847. Agassiz, in 1864, described
the polar bodies in both Toxopneustes and Asteracan-
thion. Between 1872 and 1882 Van Beneden examined
the phenomena in Asterias, Hertwig in Toxopneustus
lividus and Asteracanthion, Giard in Psammechinus,
Fol in Asterias glacialis, Greeff in Asterias rubens,
and Flemming in Sperechinus brevispinosus, Hchinus
miliaris, and Toxopneustes, Since then the favourite
material for the examination of the phenomena in the
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECHINUS ESCULENTUS. 179
living egg has been Asterias. Notwithstanding’ this,
httle is known as to the finer details of maturation.
Hartmann (1902) has, since this paper was written, pub-
lished an account of the changes in this egg up to the forma-
tion of the first polar spindle. ‘The early observations were
made on the entire egg—either in the living state, or
fixed and cleared. The polar bodies in EHchinus are
normally thrown off within the ovary, and when the naked
eggs are shed into the sea water they remain entangled
in the connective tissue of that organ. Sometimes it may
happen that a partially immature ovary may be manipu-
lated and some ova caught in the maturation stages. In
the starfish, on the other hand, the eggs commence to
show the phases when placed in sea water, and they can be
watched. Again, by shaking immature sea-urchin eggs
the stages can be induced artificially. Boveri (1890) has
figured a few stages after the formation of the first polar
spindle in Echinus microtuberculatus, but either the
chromosomes, which are very minute in Hchinus sphera,
are still more minute in Kchinus microtuberculatus, and
cannot be further analysed, or he has not seen the figures
which I have made out by my methods. Further, the
number of chromosomes is different. Matthews (1895)
examined maturation in Asterias Forbesii. He was able
to obtain only one ovary showing the stages up to the forma-
tion of the first polar spindle, but supplemented his observa-
tions by stages obtained by shaking the eggs. He describes
the behaviour of the centrosomes, but gives no details as to
the chromatin. Wilson, in his atlas of ‘ Fertilisation and
Karyokinesis,’ shows a single photograph of a second polar
spindle in Toxopneustes, and Boveri has drawn a single
figure of the second polar spindle in his recent work pub-
lished in 1901. Haecker (1893) also gives a diagrammatic
drawing of the first polar spindle, but gives no description
of maturation. In none of these figures is the finer constitu-
tion of the chromatin elements represented. Cuénot and
other observers have written on oogenesis in Kchinoderms,
180 ; THOMAS H. BRYCE.
but their observations were confined strictly to the ovary
and the formation of its epithelium, and to certain points in
the characters of the nucleolus. Various observers have
treated specially of Hchinoderm spermatogenesis
(Jensen, Pictet, and others), and many have studied the
morphology of the spermatozoon, but of these Field (1895)
brings the latest account. Owing to the excessive minute-
ness of the chromosomes he seems to have confined himself
to counting them in the different phases. Haecker (1893)
published observations carried out on the living egg on the
germinal vesicle and nucleolus of Echinoderms, but does not
give any detail regarding maturation.
Personal Observations.
Methods.—My material was obtained from animals
freshly out of the water.1 Small pieces of close on
seventy ovaries were fixed, embedded in paraffin, and a
few dozen sections cut from each. These were all care-
fully examined, and when maturation was found to be
proceeding some hundreds of sections were cut and gone
over, and the details built up from these. The fixative fluids
used were Flemming’s strong solution, and Hermann’s platinic
chloride and osmic acid mixture ; almost identical results
were obtained by both, and the small pieces of ovary—about
a cubic centimetre or a little more—were well fixed through-
out. At a later stage of the research, by way of control,
pieces of ovary were fixed in Boveri’s picric and acetic acid
mixture, and sublimo-acetic acid, as well as Lindsay John-
stone’s fluid. ‘The picro-acetic material was unsatisfactory,
but the sublimate gave good results in some respects. The
chromatin was, however, much better differentiated by the
osmic acid mixtures, especially by Hermann’s fluid; while in
1 The material was obtained at the Marine Biological Station at Millport
in late March and early April. At the end of April and beginning of May
the ovaries are mature throughout. In January maturation has already
begun, and from that time onward the relative proportion of mature to
immature ova gradually increases,
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECHINUS ESCULENTUS. 181
the sublimate material the centrosome gave quite a different
picture, as will be seen in the sequel.
Staining.—Osmic acid preparations being proverbially
refractory to most staining reagents I have confined myself
almost entirely to Heidenhain’s iron hematoxylin method,
but have used by way of control other stains. ‘To facilitate
staining I have always allowed my preparations to stand for
some time in old turpentine to remove the osmic acid. The
best results were obtained by iron hematoxylin alone, the
picture presenting the vivid black chromosomes on a blue-
grey field. Heidenhain’s preliminary stain with Bordeaux
red rather confuses the picture of the chromatin, and the
only other contrast stain used was a very weak coloration
by alcoholic solution of fuchsin 8.
It is necessary here to refer to the recent criticism by
Boveri (1901) of the iron hematoxylin stain. He shows, as
every one knows who has used the method, that different
degrees of washing out yield different results, and refers to
the fact that structures may appear which owe their existence
to a purely mechanical cause and not to any difference in
chemical composition. Thus a part which is not readily
accessible, on account of its position, to the differentiating
fluid retains the stain while the parts in the neighbourhood
are decolourised; further, the fluid having a concentric
effect in washing out, the superficial parts are decolourised
while the central parts retain the black stain. ‘Thus he
explains the different accounts given of the structure of the
centrosome, and points out that by strong extraction of the
colour even the chromosomes may be apparently diminished
in size owing to their peripheral parts being decolourised.
This is weighty criticism in view of a number of the
appearances I shall have to describe, for he combats the
generally accepted view that the true appearances are
obtained by strong washing out, and believes that in regard
to the centrosomes the opposite is true. As to the chromo-
somes I may forestall criticism of my results by stating, first,
that I have obtained similar appearances both with the osmic
182 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
acid and the sublimate mixtures, and by other stains besides
the iron hematoxylin, though the greatest vividness of
differentiation has been obtained by a combination of Her-
mann’s or Flemming’s fluid with iron hematoxylin, and,
second, that the proof that I am dealing with realities and
not illusions is to be found in the fact that the appearances
described for the chromosomes represent a complete and
unbroken series of the steps or stages of a process that can
be explained only by reference to the completed story.
The drawings were made by aid of the Abbe drawing
apparatus of Zeiss, the finer detail being filled in free- .
hand. ‘lhe combination used was in every case Zeiss
2 mm. 1:40 numerical aperture, apochromatic objective,
with either eight or twelve compensating eye-piece. The
illuminating apparatus employed was a Zeiss 1 mm.
numerical aperture, achromatic condenser. The sections
were cut in paraffin, and were of varying thickness. The
object in most cases being to obtain the masses of chromatin
entire, comparatively thick sections were taken, six to seven
microns. ‘Thinner sections down to three microns were
employed to determine certain points regarding the achro-
matic structures.
In dealing with the subject I shall first describe the
changes in the ovum leading up to the disappearance of the
germinal vesicle, and after that treat in separate sections of the
behaviour of the achromatic and of the chromatic structures.
My earliest preparations are from the growth period. Out
of a large number of young oocytes of the first order I have
only seen two or three in mitotic division, and these only in
the spireme stage, so that I cannot speak as to the number
of chromosomes in these divisions. The young ovum shows
a delicate reticular protoplasmic structure (fig. 1). The
nucleus is already large and vesicular, with a distinct
nuclear membrane, and a deeply staining eccentric nucleolus.
This being intensely black, contrasts strongly with the
granular and irregular nuclear network, which refuses to
take on the chromatin stain, and remains pink in prepara-
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECGHINUS ESCULENTUS. 183
tions stained either with “fuchsin 8” or “ Bordeaux red.”
There is frequently a second smaller deeply staining circular
body in the nucleus, but it has no regularity in position and
is not invariably present. I cannot in any of my prepara-
tions see the double nature of the threads described by
Haecker. Close to the nucleus, very frequently on the side
of that body towards which the nucleolus lies, there is some-
times at this stage a body which presents much the appear-
ance of the centrosome of a resting cell. It consists of
either a single granule or pair of granules, sometimes a
group of smaller granules enclosed in a circular area. While
this may represent a centrosome it is impossible to dis-
tinguish it from similar bodies with central granules that
may be found in other parts of the cell, which are un-
doubtedly cell inclusions, and therefore no structure can with
certainty be identified as a centrosome.
Structure of the Protoplasm.—Wilson (1899) has
shown that in the young ovum the protoplasm is granular,
and that as the ovum grows in size an alveolar structure 1s
assumed. In the youngest ova of my fixed material the
protoplasm presents a granular appearance which is certainly
not alveolar, and can hardly be termed reticular (fig. 1). In
the fully grown egg the appearances vary according to the
stain. In fig. 3 the cytoplasm is represented as showing a
reticulum which is composed of separate minute granules ;
the meshes of this reticulum bound alveolar spaces. These
alveoli are on the whole rounded, and in this particular
specimen, from which the iron hematoxylin was very
thoroughly washed out and{replaced by a shght counter-
stain by fuchsin, they were faintly red with a slightly darker
periphery. In fig. 2, on the other hand, the appearances are
different. ‘The iron hematoxylin has not been so com-
pletely washed out, and the alveoli have retained the dark
stain, showing up as rounded dark points separated by an
unstained reticulum. Sometimes the centre of the alveolus
is occupied by a black dot, as if the centre had not been de-
colourised. ‘Thus my preparations fully bear out Wilson’s
184. THOMAS H. BRYCE.
latest conclusion (1899) regarding the structure of the sea-
urchin egg—namely, that the condition of the cytoplasm
conforms to Biitschli’s description. It has the same physical
characters as an emulsion; that is, there is a fluid framework
in which the microsomes are suspended, and the alveoli are
filled with a fluid of different physical characters. When
the alveoli are wholly destained all that is seen is the micro-
somic network, whereas when they are stained the alveoli
stand out as the yolk granules embedded in the cytoplasm.
Wilson shows, however, that the cytoplasm at certain periods
may have a fibrillar structure, but to this point I shall return -
later.
The changes which the nucleus undergoes during the
growth of the oocyte, until it becomes the fully developed
germinal vesicle, are very complicated and uncertain.
Many irregular figures suggest that the germinal vesicle
may undergo changes of shape. ‘hey may well be arte-
facts. I shall only refer to certain facts regarding the
chemical reaction of the nucleus, which seem to be fully
vouched for in my preparations. It has been shown by
a number of observers that the staining reactions of the
nucleus vary at different times. At one time the chromatin
network will take the specific stains deeply, while at other
times it remains unstained (Riickert, 1892). My experience
tends to support these statements, though one must
admit that very different effects are produced by different
degrees of coloration with iron hematoxylin. ‘he effect
depends on the degree of extraction of the colour, but it is
quite certain that at certain stages of the nucleus the
network very readily parts with the black stain, and is left
as an irregular granular reticulum of a blue-grey colour, or
of a red tint, in preparations stained for contrast with rubin.
The nucleolus, on the other hand, is exceedingly tenacious of
the stain, and appears as an intensely black spot (fig. 2).
Again, at a stage I consider to be of later date, the network
shows a basis of delicate linin threads, with deeply stained
chromatin particles arranged on the thread, giving it a very
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECHINUS ESCULENTUS. 185
irregular or feathery structure, while the nucleolus generally
is less deeply stained and vacuolated (fig. 2). Finally, when
the nucleus is fully grown and maturation imminent, we find
the contrast is exactly the opposite of that described for the
young nucleus. The network is intensely black, consisting
of particles of chromatin arranged in a very intricate and
irregular fashion, while the nucleolus parts with the stain
very readily, and is left as an almost colourless, apparently
empty vesicle. Soon after the resolution of the nuclear
membrane it disappears from view. Very similar changes
are described in many other forms,—for instance, in the
Turbellarians, according to Francotte (1897) ; in Polychcerus,
according to Gardiner (1898) ; and according to Gathy (1900),
in T'ubifex (an Annelid) the nucleolus loses its capacity for
staining with iron hematoxylin at the end of the growth period.
It is difficult to resist the conclusion that the chromatin
substance is at first confined to the nucleolus, and later leaves
it to form the chromatic basis of the nuclear network as a
whole, and therefore also of the future chromosomes. The
fate of the nucleolus in Hchinoderm eggs has been variously
interpreted. Derbes (in 1847) thought it was directly
converted into the pronucleus of the mature egg, and
Hertwig (1877) took the same view. Fol (1877) and
Flemming (1882), however, proved that the chromatin
itself became the future nucleus, after it was provided
with a new nuclear membrane. Recently Carnoy and
Le Brun (1899) have maintained the view that in the
amphibian egg where there is no chief nucleolus, but a large
number of smaller ones, certain of these become converted
into the future chromosomes, thus reverting to the older
view of Schultze (1887). It seems certainly true, as said
above, that the chemical substance which is lodged in the
nucleolus in the early ovum becomes later distributed into
the germinal vesicle, and so indirectly goes to form the
chromosomes. Hartmann (1902), for Asterias glacialis,
describes the chromosomes passing directly out of the nucleo-
lus, the remainder of the nuclear reticulum being rejected.
186 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
Strasburger regards the body as a storehouse of reserve
substances, which pass into the cell during division to
form the “kinoplasm,”? which goes to form the spindle,
the Hautschicht, membranes, and cilia. We shall see later
that the phenomena observed in the sea-urchin egg
may combine these two views. But in contradiction to
both is Haecker’s view. His observations on the living
egg of the sea-urchin reveal to him the nucleolus as a
pulsating organ in which, periodically through the whole
growth period, small vacuoles appear; these run into a
single central vacuole, which increases and then diminishes |
in size. When the largest central vacuole appears the
nucleolus removes itself to the periphery of the nucleus, and
meantime the vacuole comes into relation with the outer
layers of the nucleolus, as if to bring its contents into
relation with the nuclear sap; and further, an indrawing of
the wall of the germinal vesicle itself suggested that there
was a communication between the cytoplasm and nucleolus.
From these and other observations Haecker regards the
nucleolus as a secretory organ, collecting the by-products of
nuclear activity—not as a storehouse, or “ nuclein labora-
torium ” (Fick, 1899). So far as my observations go, they
tend to support the idea of the nucleolus being a storehouse
or laboratory of nuclein.
Centrosome.—There has been a great deal of discussion
as to this enigmatical structure in the sea-urchinegg. Vary-
ing accounts have emanated from Boveri, Wilson, Fol,
Biitschli, Reinke, Hill, Kostanecki, and Erlanger. Boveri
says, “ Das Seeigel-Hi ist von allen objecten die von mir
bekannt sind, dasjenige, welches einer sicheren Darstellung
der Centrosomen die grossten Schwierigkeiten bereitet.”
This quotation is taken from his recent work, ‘On the
Nature of Centrosomes.’ He reconciles more or less the
different accounts, and suggests a nomenclature which I
shall adopt as being the latest and most authoritative.
The centrosome is composed of a special and peculiar
substance, the centroplasma, which, according to the perfec-
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECHINUS KSCULENTUS. 187
tion of fixation and the manner of staining, presents different
appearances. ‘I'his accounts for the different forms under
which the body has appeared. It stains best with iron
hematoxylin, and destains concentrically. When destaining
has been carried far, it shows as a discoidal area surrounded
by a clear halo, and has a very fine alveolar structure. This
is the form in which I have observed it in all my osmic acid
preparations, except that I do not see the halo, and when
counterstained with rubin it has a red colour, which in-
definitely fades away into the bluish-grey astral rays and
spindle fibres. This rounded body, as division proceeds,
becomes enlarged, then lens-shaped, and ultimately flattens
into a plate which lies along the side of the nucleus. In
polar view this is dumbbell-shaped; the enlarged ends are
the daughter centrosomes which become surrounded with new
radiations. In the maturation stages my preparations are
not numerous enough to enable me to follow in detail the
behaviour of the centrosomes, and I have not been fortunate
enough to see the division of the body in the first maturation
spindle. ‘The centrosome of Boveri corresponds to the
centrosphere of Wilson. In another set of preparations less
destained, Boveri described the centrosome as a smaller body,
showing in its centre a darkly staining particle, the centriole,
which corresponds to Wilson’s centrosome. ‘This, as division
proceeds, divides into two, and goes through the usually
described evolutions. In picro-acetic and sublimo-acetic
preparations I have seen such a centriole, but have been un-
able to trace its division. Again, when destaining has been
stopped early the whole centroplasm is black. This I have
also seen in picro-acetic and sublimo-acetic material. The
rays, according to Boveri, stop at the margin of his centro-
some, and do not enter it so as to be inserted into the centriole.
This seems to be the case, and in my cleavage preparations
fixed with Lindsay Johnstone’s fluid the central reticular
body is sometimes seen to have completely dropped out, so
that the astral rays are seen to end abruptly, leaving an
absolutely round empty space occupied in the other eggs by
188 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
the alveolar or reticular centroplasm. I do not presume to
give an opinion on the much vexed question of the persistence
of the centrosome as a special cell organ, but one thing seems
clear, that the centroplasm is a focus of protoplasmic
activity, and is ultimately to be explained on physiological
and not on mechanical grounds. |
Changes in the Germinal Vesicle Preparatory to
Division.—When the germinal vesicle has reached its full
growth the nucleolus loses its staining capacity to chromatin
stains, the nuclear network takes an intense stain, and the
cytoplasm to its very outer edge is seen to have an alveolar.
structure. In many cases, presumably in stages close to the
onset of maturation, the nuclear membrane is puckered. ‘The
germinal vesicle then moves towards the surface, and, as long
ago described by Hertwig (1877) for Asteracanthion, at the
spot nearest the surface a protoplasmic process projects into its
interior (fig. 4). In osmic acid preparations the nuclear mem-
brane is seen to be indented and folded before the process ;
this, as it projects inwards, spreads out in every direction
from the neck, so that at the margins of the process are seen
sections of peninsule and islands. In sublimate material the
nuclear membrane is not so sharply differentiated, and the
inward folding of it is not so clearly seen. I have no doubt
from my sections, such as shown in fig. 4, that this is a true
invagination of the germinal vesicle by the cytoplasm. At
the neck of the invagination the alveolar walls of the cyto-
plasm are drawn inwards towards the centre, but in the pro-
cess itself no very distinct fibrillar structure is at first to be
seen.
Hartmann represents at this stage a very distinct aster
between the invaginated wall of the vesicle and the surface
of the ovum. I have not seen such an aster in my sections ;
the wall of the vesicle is always very close to the surface of
the egg, leaving no room for such a formation, and the aster
seems to form within the process. Sometimes the radiations
from the neck of the invagination are much better marked
than in the ovum represented, and in the process itself there
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECHINUS ESCULENTUS. 189
is a distinct suggestion of radiation, which is, however, very
difficult actually to define. The appearances suggest that
the centrosome or kinetic centre lies in the neck of the
invagination ; but at this stage there is not, so far as the
study from sections can determine, any wide-spreading astral
formation as in Asterias. Soon it is seen that the whole mass is
made up of what seem to be looping fibres. Possibly the folded
and puckered nuclear membrane contributes to this appear-
ance. In fig. 5 is represented a stage in which the chromatic
reticulum has become finer, and at the neck of the process is
an irregular mass which is destined to form the future chromo-
somes. All this time the germinal vesicle remains close to
the periphery of the egg.
The next stage I can determine is the one represented in
fig. 6. The nuclear membrane has now entirely disappeared,
and in the irregular mass of looping fibres there are seen two
asters. In each is a circular finely reticular area, the centro-
plasm, and from the periphery pass out in every direction
very delicate interdigitating fibres. Between the two asters
the fibres are drawn out to form an irregular spindle arrange-
ment. Round this area the greater part of the nuclear
reticulum, which does not form chromosomes, but was related
to the vegetative stage of the germinal vesicle, is seen merg-
ing with the cytoplasm, but still retaining its reticular
character. Between the spindle and the surface the chromo-
somal chromatin mass is seen.
This description corresponds with MHertwig’s original
account, and also in the main with Hartmann’s recent repre-
sentation of the facts, but differs from Fol’s in that he describes
no process projecting into the vesicle. It also differs from
Mathews’ description of what occurs in Asterias Forbesii.
He describes the two centrosomes probably passing out of the
germinal vesicle at the nearest point to the surface of the
egg by the rupture of the nuclear membrane at that point.
They then pass some distance from the nucleus, and are seen
to have round them a faint halo of ‘archoplasm.’’ This
latter becomes distinct, radiations are developed, the whole
190 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
archoplasmic area divides, and the two parts beimg drawn
asunder, a spindle is spun out between them, which moves
tangentially over the nucleus. As it grows the spindle-fibres
project into the vesicle, the nuclear membrane is dissolved,
and the spindle then rotates to become the first polar
amphiaster. In Haecker’s text-book (p. 123) the process in
the living egg is described in much the same fashion. A
clear area is developed between the remains of the germinal
vesicle and the surface, surrounded by a radiation which soon
forms a double star, which is the beginning of the amphiaster.
The invagination of the germinal vesicle in the egg of ©
Kchinus is probably secondary. It may be related to the fact
that the wall of the vesicle comes exceedingly close to the sur-
face of the egg. The mounting of the vesicle to the surface
is a fact which, so far as I know, has not been satisfactorily
explained. Haecker (1893) suggested that it is due to the
action of gravity causing a movement in the elements of the
egg after the force connected with the exchange of material
between nucleus and cytoplasm, which keeps the vesicle in
the centre of the egg, ceases with full growth. My prepara-
tions do not throw any light on the point.
Fig. 8 represents a somewhat oblique section of the
germinal vesicle at a later stage. It shows the two asters
arranged tangentially to the surface of the egg, but between
them, and extending towards the surface, is a finely reticular
mass, out of which the delicate wavy and interdigitating rays
of the asters are evidently spun. [mbedded in this reticulum
are seen the chromatin segments. At a later stage (fig. 9)
all these are drawn into the area between the asters, which is
seen now as a finely alveolar or reticular plate. Round this
central plate is a complicated reticulum of fibres crossing and
intercrossing, but on the whole radiating from the central
plate. In this reticular zone is also seen, at a little distance
from the plate, one centrosome surrounded by rays, obviously
part of the general reticulum. In the adjoining section a
second aster was present on the side of the plate removed
from the surface of the ovum. At this stage one hardly ever
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECHINUS ESCULENTUS. 191
sees a preparation in which both asters are cut in the same
section. Griffin, in Thalassema, has described a disappear-
ance of the spindle spun out between the centrosomes, and
the development of a central mass very like that which I
have described between the asters. In most instances,
however, the conditions are more like those described by
Matthews in Asterias Forbesii.
It-is evident that when the nuclear membrane disappears,
and the rejected chromatin passes into the cytoplasm, a pro-
found effect is produced on the organisation of the egg.
Whereas, with the germinal vesicle still intact, the alveolar
structure can be traced to the surface of the egg, we now
find that round the transformed nucleus, and projecting into
the centre of the egg, is a fibrillar mass, which is sharply
differentiated from the alveolar yolk. From this central
area there also extends round the surface of the ege a layer
of differentiated protoplasm. ‘The central mass and surface
layer have each a definite fate. The one is differentiated
into the spindle and asters, while the surface layer is, I
believe, associated with the formation of the membrane
thrown off by the egg at the moment of fertilisation. The
central mass of the yolk is unchanged in appearance, and the
question is whether this reticular mass of protoplasm is
differentiated from the cytoplasm, or is derived from the
rejected nuclear reticulum. I am inclined to think that it
is in large measure formed from, or under the influence
of, the discarded nuclear material. This would be in
harmony with the results of Carnoy and Le Brun (1899)
in Triton. Another evidence of the excitement produced in
the egg at this stage may perhaps be seen in the accessory
asters formed, which, so far as I can see, have no relation to
the formation of the definite asters of the spindle.
From experiments by R. Hertwig (1896) and Morgan
(1896) it seems that under special artificial chemical stimulus
the cytoplasm may be excited to form asters, and even, in
Hertwig’s experiments, amphiasters. Reinke (1894) also
found that in the peritoneal cells of the larval salamander
192 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
three grades of asters are formed—primary, secondary, and
tertiary. The last contribute to the secondary, and these
again to the primary or definitive asters. Carnoy described
accessory asters during the formation of the second polar
body in Ascaris, and Meade (1897) showed that a great
number of such asters were formed before the formation of
the first polar spindle in Cheetopterus (an Annelid), which he
thought contributed to the formation of the spindle asters.
Watase (in Macrobdella) found as many as thirteen asters in
the cytoplasm, with centres varying in size from the smallest
microsome to the true centrosome. Griffin (1899) also de- -
scribes the formation of accessory asters in Thalassema.
These experiments and observations are held to afford strong
evidence of the free formation of the centrosome, in which
case both that body and its aster would be the expression
rather than the cause of cell activities.
The secondary asters in Hchinus at this stage are pos-
sibly produced in the cytoplasm under the influence of the
nuclear material let loose on the disappearance of the nuclear
membrane.
All this tallies better with Strasburger’s views of the kino-
plasm than with any other theory. He thinks of protoplasm
as of two kinds, trophoplasm and kinoplasm: the former is
vegetative in function and alveolar in structure ; the latter
presides over the activities of the cell, forms centrosomes,
mid-bodies, asters, and spindles, constitutes a peripheral layer
from which membranes and cilia are derived, and is fibrillar
in structure. This differentiation of the protoplasm takes
place when mitosis sets in. Further, he thinks the nucleolus
is a storehouse of reserve material, out of which, on need, the
substance of the kinoplasm is drawn.
I have shown that the nucleolus at first seems to contain
all the chromatin substance which later is found in the
nuclear reticulum, the larger portion of which is rejected, to
form in turn, if I be right, directly or indirectly a
reticular zone, out of which the asters and spindle are
spun,
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECHINUS ESCULENTUS. 195
My conception of the meaning of the changes in the ovum
does not, however, involve an acceptance of either Stras-
burger’s kinoplasmic or of Boveri’s archoplasmic theory. It
inclines rather to the view that the same ground substance,
under the influence of the chemical changes underlying vital
activities, may take on different forms in response to varying
physiological needs, and further, that whereas, during the
vegetative period, the main centre of these chemical activities
hes in the nucleolus, in the division period that centre 1s trans-
ferred to the centrosome, which is the expression of activities
resulting in the vital phenomena of division.
Fig. 15 represents a later stage. The spindle is not yet
complete, but the two asters are situated radially, and the
reticular mass, though still showing in some parts a radial
distribution from the central plate, is becoming more and
more focussed on the centrosomes. The spindle, in most
forms, is said to be fully formed before this radial position is
assumed, and the whole spindle is said to rotate through
90 degrees. A very good example of this is seen in the egg
of the mouse, as described by Sobotta (1895).
In my preparations the spindle, as is the case also in
Thalassema (Griffin), is late in being completed, and the asters
seem to move independently through the cytoplasm, the fibres
arranging themselves round the centre of activity until the
definitive position is reached.
The conditions described for the formation of the polar
spindle are not unlike those accompanying the formation of
the multipolar spindles described in the pollen and the spore-
mother cells in many plants by Farmer, Belajeff, Osterhout,
Mottier, Nemec, and Byxbee. According to the description
of these authors there is a filar zone round the nucleus, out of
which the multipolar figure is spun, the poles of which draw
together to form the definitive bipolar spindle. I have seen
one or two four-poled first-maturation spindles, but I cannot
make out that in the reticular zone there are more than two
asters which have any relation to the future spindles, and
such four-poled spindles would thus merely indicate the
voL. 46, PART 2,—NEW SERIES. N
194, THOMAS H. BRYCE.
tendency to the formation of multiple centres of activity, or
putting it in terms of the centrosome, to the formation of four
centrosomes instead of two. :
The whole process leading up to the formation of the first
polar amphiaster is very complicated in LEchinus, and
extremely difficult to trace in sections. It is as difficult
to be sure of the phases in the living Hchinus egg, which
are moreover difficult to get as the process normally
takes place within the ovary. The process does not
seem to me to be so simple as it has been described for
Asterias ; indeed, it is in many respects like what Mead has:
described for Cheetopterus. Dr. Teacher has recently studied
the phases in the living egg, and has kindly let me see his
results, which supplement my own. He has seen frequently
a stage which I have described as follows—“ near the surface
of the ovum is a clear granular area having the appearance
of ground glass, surrounded by a darker ring merging into
the alveolar-looking cytoplasm. ‘This ring, at its circumfer-
ence, is distinctly irregular, and suggests delicate radiations
from the central granular area.” ‘This is obviously the
stage represented by the section depicted in fig. 9, and
corresponds to the transformed germinal vesicle. At this
stage I could not make out distinct asters in the living egg,
and in the sections the astral rays which lie within this area
are of great delicacy. Dr. Teacher has seen in this phase
many specimens with a number of asters in the cytoplasm
around the transformed germinal vesicle, and has made out
at the same time, within the area itself, astral formations
which he believed to be the definitive asters of the spindle.
While, therefore, I have in the foregoing description traced
the centrosomes as if they were persistent centres travelling
through the cytoplasm, I cannot exclude the possibility of
their free formation as described by Mead.
Tig. 16 represents the spindle now completed. The
chromosomes are being drawn into the equatorial plate.
Fig. 17 shows the now completed spindle in metaphase.
[It is relatively bulky, with blunt and rounded ends, and
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECHINUS ESCULENTUS. 195
frequently, when the section is through the side of it, the
centrosome is not cut at either end. ‘There is no central
spindle. The chromosomes extend through the whole
equatorial plate, and the peripheral rays of the asters are
seen interdigitating opposite the equator. The fibres of the
spindle itself are somewhat uneven, and in relation to the
chromosomes there are darker bundles apparently of several
fibres spun together. As metakinesis proceeds the waviness
of the fibres becomes more distinct. The central centrosome
becomes flattened, but I cannot determine the manner in
which a division takes place. The outer centrosome
diminishes in size. Its central astral rays shorten, fig. 19,
and ultimately disappear as the apex of the spindle is
protruded. ‘The lateral rays are obliterated progressively
until the point of the spindle stands clear. The first appear-
ance of the protrusion of the polar body is a tiny elevation
into which the end of the spindle is directed. Later, when
the spindle has risen to the height of the equatorial plane,
there is seen a depression on the surface of the egg where the
constriction takes place, and in which afterwards the polar
body lies. The rise of the spindle and its protrusion are very
difficult to explain. It remains approximately of the same
length throughout, and I do not see any special development
of the central aster over the polar one. Wilson (1900) finds
evidence in the protrusion of the spindle in favour of
Diiner’s (1895) theory that the divergence of the poles of the
spindle in mitosis is due to the progressive elongation of the
central spindle. In Hchinoderm ova, neither before nor after
fertilisation, is there a central spindle spun out between the
centrosomes, but it is probable, according to Wilson, that the
difference is only a secondary one, and that the spindle
consists in part of continuous fibres, and the waviness of the
spindle-fibres in the metakinesis would speak for the pushing
hypothesis. In any event, | cannot see how any hypothesis
founded on mechanical principles, such as illustrated in
Heidenhain’s model, can explain the peculiar circumstances
of the polar mitosis.
196 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
Fig. 23 shows the earliest phase of the second division
which I have had the opportunity of observing. The asters
are already separate, and a bunch of fibres from each is pro-
jected towards the chromosomes, which are immediately
drawn into the equator of the spindle. Thus no resting stage
intervenes between the two divisions. The whole figure is
still surrounded by the remains of the reticular or kino-
plasmic zone. The spindle when fully formed is slighter than
the first polar spindle. The central centrosome and aster
progressively increase in size until the condition is found as
in fig. 30. The astral rays are thick and fairly straight and -
widely spreading. ‘The behaviour of the outer centrosome
and the manner of protrusion of the polar body is exactly as
I have described for the first polar body (figs. 27—29).
Fig. 383 shows the condition of the nucleus long ago de-
scribed by Hertwig after the extrusion of the second polar
body. ‘The first stage in the reconstitution of the nucleus is
the formation of several small vesicles, which run together to
form a single vesicle which is the mature nucleus. The
description given of the process in the living egg is, that
several small vesicles appear approximately in the middle of
the radiations remaining in the egg. In the sections this is
clearly seen not to be the case, but the vesicles surround the
centrosome, and the astral rays are broken up into bundles
passing out between them. Later these all disappear, and a
single vesicle is left without any trace of centrosome or radia-
tion in its neighbourhood.
Fig. 34 shows an interesting abnormality of the second
polar body. It is here very distinctly a small cell, and pre-
cisely the same phenomena are seen in the reconstruction of
the nucleus as in the egg.
I must now refer to a series of figures which accompany
the constriction of the spindle in both maturation divisions.
Associated with the disappearance of the spindle is formed
the body called by Flemming the ‘ zwischenkorper.” This
plays a considerable rdle in spermatogenesis, but is figured
also in a considerable number of the descriptions of polar-
at
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECHINUS ESCULENTUS. 197
body extrusion. I have seen it in various forms. In fig. 30
are seen round the constricting spindle a series of points
which afterwards, as seen in fig. 23, condense to form a ring
round the remains of the spindle. It seems to persist for
some time, fig. 33, and then disappears.
A final point still remains to be described. When the
matured nucleus retires towards the centre of the egg all
remains of the reticular or kinoplasmic zone have dis-
appeared, and the nucleus lies surrounded by the alveolar
yolk, while round the periphery of the egg the kinoplasmic
girdle has narrowed down into a delicate layer of differenti-
ated protoplasm. In sublimate material this is seen as a
distinct layer, in which large microsomes are arranged
regularly side by side. In the osmic-acid material the dis-
tinction is less sharp, but there is generally a difference in
the characters of the surface layer. I think that possibly
this layer has to do with the formation of the membrane
thrown off when the selected spermatozoon enters the egg,
and, as has been said, I refer it to the kinoplasmic zone
which is differentiated on the breaking down of the germinal
vesicle.
History of the Chromatin.—As has been described
the greater part of the nuclear reticulum is rejected, and
gives rise probably to the reticular zone round the trans-
formed germinal vesicle. Close to the base of the neck of
the invading cytoplasm is found an irregular mass of chro-
matin, just as Matthews describes for Asterias, which is pre-
sumably the chromatin destined to form the future chromo-
somes, figs. 5—7. This condensation of chromatin at one point
perhaps corresponds to Moore’s (1895) synaptic phase, though
only a part, not the whole of the chromatin, as in spermato-
genesis, is involved in the condensation. Hmerging from this
condensed mass are seen in figs. 5 and 6 a series of separate
elements as to the number of which I am not certain, but I do
not think there are more than at a later stage. ‘lhe following
stages, figs. 8 and 9, involve the collection of this mass of
chromatin elements into the central plate before described.
198 THOMAS #. BRYCE.
Often one sees the chromatin collected to one side of this
plate ; sometimes the separate elements are widely scattered ;
in many instances, as in fig. 12, there are chain-like clusters,
which suggest that a thread is being broken up into
segments, and in practically every ovum at this stage one
sees compound masses which are breaking down into the
separate elements which enter the equatorial plate of the
spindle. Hartmann, as already mentioned, has quite recently
described the chromosomes as arising directly from the
nucleolus. They arise as isolated rods, clumps, or threads
having the chromatin particles arranged in series in them.
The nature of my material makes it impossible for me either _
to deny or affirm the direct origin of the chromosomes from
the nucleolus, but the appearances I have described are
not otherwise at variance with those described by Hart-
mann.
I have between fifty and sixty sections of this stage, and
the relatively large number indicate that the prophase is
protracted. From the very first these always present the
same form. Fig. 14 shows a fragment of the thread com-
posed of spheres, united by a less deeply staining subtance.
When separation is complete sixteen tetradal chromosomes
of nearly uniform appearance are found. When seen from
the side they have a dumb-bell shape, when seen en face
they are obviously the tetradal groups of authors. I have
counted the chromosomes at the various stages again and
again, and have always reached the number fifteen or sixteen.
Fifteen is an improbable number, and I feel sure that the
proper figure is sixteen. I have never succeeded in making
the number eighteen, which would be double the number
(nine) found by Boveri (1890) in Echinus microtubercu-
latus. R.Hertwig (1896) made the number of chromosomes
emerging from the germ nucleus, in his experiments on the
development of unfertilised sea urchin eggs, sixteen or
eighteen, which would agree with my results. Field
(1893) in Nchinoderm spermatogenesis counted twenty-six to
thirty-two chromosomes in the spermatogonia, sixteen to
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECHINUS ESCULENTUS. 199
eighteen in the spermatocytes, and eight or nine in the
spermatids. He confesses to great uncertainty in regard to
these figures on account of the minuteness of the chromo-
somes, and the last figure is quite out of harmony both with
R. Hertwig’s counts and my own.
Careful analysis of this tetrad body shows that it 1s com-
posed of two short stout rods placed side by side (figs. 8
—10, 12, and 23). The ends have the form of little spheres,
and looking back to fig. 14 one may conclude that they corre-
spond to the spheres seen in that thread united in pairs, but
there is no transverse cleavage of the thread between the
four spheres. A complete tetrad, consisting of four indepen-
dent round bodies as figured for Ascaris, or the mole-cricket,
does not occur in Echinus. Further, one cannot regard the
two rods as separate and independent at this stage; they
are bound together closely, and the figure is really a com-
pound chromosome.
According to the above interpretation the tetrads thus arise
by a single longitudinal split of an original thread or threads.
At no time are there any ring or other irregular figures, as
described in so many other cases. The possibility is not
excluded, that the groups might result from conjugation of
the dyadal bodies in pairs, as described by Wilcox (1895)
in the grasshopper, and Calkins (1895) in the earthworm.
In two instances only out of a large number of prophase
stages have I seen a figure other than those described. In
one section, just before the spindle is formed (fig. 15) there is
a double comma form, which appears in all other sections at
a later stage.
As the compound chromosomes are gathered into the
equatorial plate they he irregularly, and in the metakinesis
they do not seem to be resolved simultaneously, for in all my
sections of this stage, about sixty in number, figures in
different phases are seen, and as the chromosomes lie
throughout the whole equatorial plate, and not only round
the periphery of the spindle, various irregular bodies are
seen which are portions only of whole chromosomes. ‘The
200 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
relatively large number of sections obtained in this stage
indicates that it is of long duration.
The varied figures drawn in figs. 18 and 21 are capable of
only one satisfactory explanation, keeping in view that the
end result is always the same. The little rods come to be
placed radially on the spindle. Their central ends move
apart to form a T-shaped figure. The cross-piece of the T
representing the separating limbs opening out on the
spindle, the stem of the T the outward directed, and still
united portions of the chromosomes. As separation proceeds
the stem of the T is pulled down until the figure is like two
commas placed end to end. It is obvious that this evolution
will open out the chromosome along the plane of the original
longitudinal split from within outwards, as is seen in a series
of drawings (fig. 21) of the chromosomes in profile view, but
when observed en face (same figure) it is equally clear that a
second longitudinal split has simultaneously been effected
along a new plane, from without inwards, giving the double
V-shaped figures represented in figs. 18, 19 and 21.
If we describe the appearance in terms of the minute
terminal spheres of each rod, we see that the spheres come to
lie in a row exactly as Wheeler (1897) describes in Myzo-
stoma glabrum. The equatoria] bodies then divide (figs.
16—18 and 21), but the terminal spheres of each rod remain
undivided, and are drawn away from the equatorial spheres,
so that the whole chromosome is lengthened out very greatly,
and the apical spheres are carried far away from the equa-
torial, delicate, less deeply staining threads uniting them
together. The equatorial spheres, after remaining long in
contact in the equator, then part, and give rise to V-shaped
figures with a single apical and two equatorial spheres, one
at the end of each limb. ‘These figures then shorten up by
the contraction of the elongated thread, and in the final
anaphase condense into short stumpy masses (figs. 19 and 21).
These, when analysed, show that the apical sphere has also
divided, and we have produced small tetradal bodies exactly
like those in the prophases of the division, but of smaller
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECHINUS ESCULENTUS. 201
size. In reality, just like the earlier bodies, they are short,
somewhat curved rods, with dilated extremities placed side
by side. Those at the outer pole pass into the first polar
body, and those remaining in the egg persist, enlarge
somewhat, and pass otherwise unchanged into the second
polar spindle. Sometimes during the metakinesis the second
longitudinal split is not so evident, and then long drawn
out threads are seen, the double nature of which is difficult
to make out. Ultimately, however, the two halves separate
in the anaphase exactly as in other cases. Hxactly similar
figures have been described by quite a number of observers
in other forms, for instance, and especially distinctly, by
Klinckowstrém (1897), Francotte (1897), Van der Stricht
(1898), Griffin (1899), Gathy (1900), but, as I shall describe
in the sequel, their interpretation has been different, and
leads to very different theoretical conclusions. The transi-
tion between the first polar and the second polar spindle is very
rapid, so that the number of sections found in this stage is
relatively few.
The lttle compound chromosomes are drawn into the
equatorial plate of the second spindle (figs. 28 and 24),
and there different appearances are seen, according to the
plane of the section. In fig. 24 we have apparently little
tetrads, which are really the lobed ends of the small, slightly
curved chromosomes. In fig. 25 again the rods are seen
lying back to back. These rods I have every reason to
believe, from the various figures I have drawn, open out just
as in the first spindle, only there is no second longitudinal
split, and therefore the division is homotypical. A single
preparation rather suggests that the rods may sometimes
be simply separated along the plane of cleavage. It may
well be that both methods are adopted, according to whether
the body lies radially or tangentially to the spindle. The
result is the same; the separation is effected in the plane
of cleavage established in the anaphase of the first division.
Similar figures in the second division have been described
by the authors above mentioned, and in other instances,
202 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
also, the short, slightly curved rods have somewhat the
appearance of tetradal groups. When the daughter chromo-
somes have separated they pass to the poles of the spindle.
Those at the external pole pass out with the second polar
body, and remain as short, stout, distinctly bilobed bodies in
many instances, after the second polar body is cut off
(fig. 31). Those remaining in the ovum, however, at once
begin to lengthen, and in the telophase are seen (fig.
30) as long, bent rods. ‘These are gathered into the
series of vesicles already described. Within each of these
vesicles are seen elongated, curved rods, and round the walls
there are tiny particles of chromatin, forming an incomplete
membrane (fig. 33). Later, when the vesicles are fused, the
nucleus is seen to be bounded nearly all round by semicir-
cular loops of chromatin, and in the centre the reticulum is
becoming restored (fig. 31). At a later stage (fig. 32) the
reticulum takes on the form of irregular feathery strands,
beset with chromatin granules of varying size, accumulated
here and there to form irregular net-knots of chromatin.
All trace of the separate chromosomes is absolutely lost in
this network.
The phenomena attending fertilisation and cleavage are so
well known that I do not intend to enter on that subject, but
I wish to refer to the behaviour of the chromatin threads in
the metaphase of the cleavage division. ‘The primary rods
segment into about thirty-two chromosomes. I have counted
them in cross sections of the spindle a good many times, and
generally reach that figure, which would make my count of
the chromosomes in the maturation stages fall in exactly
with the general law.
Hach chromosome when divided forms first a V-shaped
figure. This mounts on the spindle so that a loop is formed
with its apex directed outwards, and the ends of this loop
are drawn out to the poles of the spindle, the threads
lengthening as they go. TF inally, the daughter chromosomes
separate by the breaking apart of the thread at the point
which corresponded to the apex of the loop.
MATURATION OF OVUM 1N ECHINUS ESCULENTUS. 2038
This is exactly the manner in which I have described the
short, stout chromosomes of both maturation divisions as
opening out on the spindle. The difference between the two
types consists only in the stoutness of the chromatin rods in
the polar mitoses, the occurrence of a second longitudinal
split in the first division, and consequently the absence of
the usual longitudinal cleavage in the second division.
Summary of Results (Text-figs. 2 and 3, pp. 213, 214).—
The chromatin thread or threads, derived only from a portion
of the mass of chromatin in the germinal vesicle, are found
split longitudinally and segmented into sixteen bodies—half
the number of the chromatin rods in the nuclei of the
cleavage divisions. These bodies consist of two short rods
placed side by side, and each rod is composed of two spheres
united by a less deeply stained portion of the thread. The
two rods are intimately associated so as to form a tetrad-
like mass, and the whole figure is to be considered a com-
pound chromosome.
After a relatively long prophase each of these is resolved
in the first polar metaphase, in such a manner that while the
body is opened up along the original cleavage plane, another
longitudinal cleft is effected, which is completed in the
anaphase, and the final result is another compound chromo-
some exactly like the original from which it sprang except in
size. Hach of the sixteen double rods which remain in the
ovum after the extrusion of the first polar body is resolved
in the second polar spindle into its two elements without
further cleavage taking place.
In the telophase of the second division the elements which
remain in the ovum after the extrusion of the second polar
body elongate into rods which become bent on themselves,
while those in the second polar body remain condensed as
small bilobed rods.
The maturation phases differ from the ordinary cleavage
mitoses in respect of (a) the thickening and condensation of
the chromatin rods, (b) the second longitudinal splitting
which occurs in the first metakinesis, and (c) the absence of
204 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
longitudinal cleavage in the second metakinesis. The second
mitosis thus merely distributes the granddaughter chromo-
somes formed by the second longitudinal splitting in the first
mitosis.
There is thus no “reducing division.” The only reduction
which occurs is effected in the germinal vesicle, and the
chromatin destined to form the chromosomes of the polar
divisions is diminished in bulk merely.
Critical Analysis of Results and Comparison with
those of other Observers.—In describing the achromatic
structures I have sufficiently indicated how the appearances
I have described in my material are to be compared with
those described by other observers. With regard to the
chromatin elements I may now give a further analysis.
Glancing over the whole field of research on the subject
the first thing that strikes an observer is the remarkable
unity of the process, even in detail, over a very large range of
forms. ‘The figures represented for the great majority of
both the higher plants and the Metazoa show resemblances
so close that one cannot imagine they are produced in one
way in one form and in another way in another form.
Interpretation and theoretical conclusions may differ, the
process is identical throughout.
It has been insisted that the solution of the problem of
reduction lies in the determination of the origin of the
tetrads, but as these in typical form occur in a relatively
small number of cases, it seems that the solution rather lies
in a closer analysis of the heterotypical division, such as has
lately been done for plants by Strasburger.
Heterotypical division was first described by Flemming,
in 1887, as a form of mitosis occurring in the spermatocytes
of the salamander, and in all cases in which tetrads are not
formed a heterotypical division in some sort ushers in the
first maturation division with its reduced number of chromo-
somes, and this is true of plants as well as animals. The
distinctive features of this division as originally stated are:
1. The spireme stage 1s not so compact as in other kinds
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECHINUS ESCULENTUS, 205
of cells. 2. Thesister threads round which the segments split
are fused by their ends up to the metakinesis. 3. The
monaster stage is short lived, and shows a radial arrange-
ment only indistinctly on account of the twisted position of
the threads. 4. The end stage of the metakinesis is very
prolonged, and has a very special character, in consequence
of the fusion of the ends of the threads. 5. A temporary
and not understood second longitudinal cleavage of the
threads appears in the anaphase. The outstanding feature
of the heterotype was considered at first as being the in-
complete separation of the two halves of the longitudinally
splt rods resulting in the formation of ring chromosomes,
but the figures may assume very various forms according as
the loop is bent, or drawn out so as to obliterate the hollow
of it. Again, the rings or their derivatives may be attached
to the spindle in different fashion, so that in their resolution
different irregular figures emerge. This is shown in the
series of diagrams given in the paper of Farmer and Moore,
who first clearly pointed out the essential resemblance of
the heterotype in plants and animals. The feature described
by Flemming, namely, the second longitudinal cleavage
found in the anaphase, seems until recently to have had very
little significance attributed to it.
The simplest idea of heterotypical division is that the two
halves of the ring-shaped chromosomes are drawn out into
U- or V-shaped daughter loops. This simple explanation will
not explain many of the figures observed. Farmer (1895),
in a study of the phenomena in the lilies, described a
double cleavage taking place simultaneously in different
planes as the compound chromosome is resolved into its
daughter elements. In 1896, along with Moore, he gave an
explanation of the phases, which only involved one split, the
second being merely apparent. ‘The idea elaborated was
that the elliptical ring was bent on itself, appled to the
spindle at its apex, and then drawn out to the poles from
the point of bending. ‘The original ends were ultimately
broken across at the equator. Moore, in his work on
206 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
Klasmobranch spermatogenesis, adopted this explanation
of his figures. Gregoire (1899), describing the stages
in lilies, and Strasburger in his recent work, from a
careful examination of the prophase in a large number of
plant forms, absolutely decide against the idea of the bend-
ing up of the ring. In Hchinus, where no ring is seen at
any time, the explanation is easier and more direct, and the
facts decide conclusively against such an interpretation.
Strasburger, in addition to examining a large series of cases,
reviews the results of other observers, and comes to the
general result that all the processes can be referred to one —
type, namely, (1) As the result of the primary longitudinal
cleavage of the chromatin thread, two rods, wavy or
curved, are formed. These straighten and _ ultimately
shorten down into stout rods. In shortening, various adhe-
sions and twistings may take place, so as to form rings or
twisted threads. (2) According to the position assumed by
these various figures on the spindle, the character of the
resulting metaphase figures depends. (a) If the chromo-
somesare placed radially in the form of two rods side by side,
they are drawn apart in the plane of the first cleavage, and
at the same time a second slit is effected from the free end
inwards. The result is the formation of V-shaped daughter
chromosomes, which in the anaphase break apart at the apex
to complete the second longitudinal cleft. (b) If placed
tangentially the result depends on the point of attachment
of the “ zugfasern,” but invariably as the limbs are drawn
apart, a second longitudinal cleavage reveals itself, and two
daughter V’s are formed. ‘The first type (a) is exactly what
I have described in Echinus; the second form (b) is exactly
that described in amphibians.
Flemming (in 1887), and Meves (1896) in Salamander,
McGregor (1899) in Amphiuma, Kingsbury (1899) in Desmo-
gnathus, give us conclusions in the main identical. All
describe and figure a second longitudinal cleavage of
the chromosomes in the dyaster stage, and this cleavage
is preparatory to the second division, The nucleus is
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECHINUS ESCULENTUS. 207
partly reconstructed between the divisions, and the longi-
tudinal cleft is lost sight of, to reappear in the second
division either by re-establishment of the old or by a
new longitudinal splitting. Kingsbury was able to trace
the longitudinal cleft directly into the second division,
owing to the fact that the nucleus is not so far recon-
structed. More recently (July, 1900) Janssens described
the phases in Triton, and took the further step of inter-
preting the process in exactly the same terms as
Gregoire in lilies. Flemming (1887), in his first paper,
described tetrads, but regarded them as abnormal. Vom
Rath (1893) redescribed these bodies as normal appearances,
but his results were not maintained by Meves (1896), who
failed to find the least evidence of tetrads in amphibian
spermatogenesis, though he, in a short paper, described
tetradal figures as an abnormality in the early oocytes.
Amphibian oogenesis has been attacked by Fick (1893)
and Born (1894), and Carnoy and Le Brun (1899). Practi-
cally identical figures are given by all three, but the later
authors give much more complete details, and offer a new
interpretation. ‘hey describe the chromosomes as condens-
ing after some intermediate phases into short rods. These
are complex structures formed by the fusion of a considerable
number of separate elements. These short rods, or rather
blocks, place themselves in the equatorial plane of the spindle
in a circle round its periphery, and orient themselves so as to
be placed with their thicker and larger ends on the spindle,
the other end being directed outwards. Once installed in
this position, the chromosomes go through varied movements,
during which they submit to a double longitudinal splitting.
The one is effected in the equatorial plane, the other in the
axis of the spindle and perpendicular to the first. The
equatorial division shows itself first and begins in the large
part attached to the spindle, rising insensibly into the stalk.
The second occurs later, and begins at the summit of the
stalk, descending by degrees till a kind of tetrad is formed.
Further complicated changes are described, which result in
208 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
double V’s originating in the wings of the “ equatorial
crown.” ‘These are separated and carried to the poles. A
partial reconstruction takes place in the anaphase, but V’s
again appear in the telophase, and the double V’s remaining
in the ovum are separated from one another in the second
polar spindle. The whole description shows a very compli-
cated process, and exactly what I have found in Echinus in
a much simpler form, because as there are no V’s or twisted
threads to complicate the picture, I may say that only the
initial stages described by Carnoy and Le Brun are found in
Kehinus.
This is the only positive evidence of the occurrence of a
simultaneous double split of the compound chromosome of
the heterotypical division in animals. It will be seen that
my interpretation agrees in the main with that of Carnoy and
Le Brun, and Janssens; and further, that the same idea has
enabled Strasburger to reduce the heterotype in the higher
plants to one common plan.
Now Kchinus falls exactly into line in every essential
respect with another considerable series of cases recently
described.
1. Prostheecreeus, Klinckowstrém, 1897.
2. Various Polyclads, Francotte, 1897.
3. Thysanozoon, Van der Stricht, 1898.
4. Thalassema, Griffin, 1899.
5. Zirphea, Griffin, 1899.
6. Tubifex and Clepsine, Gathy, 1900.
In every one of these the figures belong to the same type,
except that Van der Stricht and Griffin describe rings in the
prophases. The last observer has not given details, because
the chromosomes were too minute for analysis.
The first four authors all explain their results according to
the diagram given below (Text-fig. 1). ‘The double rods
resulting from the compression of the ring are placed with
the longitudinal cleft in the plane of the equator of the
spindle, and are drawn apart by their middle points to
form U-shaped or Y-shaped figures, and the breaking
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECHINUS ESCULENTUS. 209
apart of the U’s or V’s at the apex in the anaphase is
held to be a transverse division of the original long
chromosomes. Griffin alone says that the possibility of a
second longitudinal cleavage is not absolutely excluded,
but as the T-shaped figure is rare, he held to the other
explanation. It is obvious that it is extremely unlikely
that such exactly similar appearances should arise in different
ways. I believe that the demonstration I have given of the
nature of the process as it is seen in Hchinus might, if
applied to them, reconcile all these instances with what 1s
known to occur in Amphibia and the higher plants. A certain
part of the contradiction in results would thus be removed,
thi
4. 5. 6.
TEXT-FIG. Ro showing ie successive stages in the resolution
of the chromosomes in the ‘‘ heterotypical divisions ” according to
an interpretation which makes the apical break of the V atrans-
verse cleavage. (After Wilson.)
and instead of these cases being held to prove a reducing
division in Weissmann’s sense, they would, as does Hchinus,
disprove it.
The figures given by Linville (1899) for certain pulmonate
Gastropods are very similar to those described in this group,
but the origin of the figures is not completely worked out.
He decided for a longitudinal division in the first division,
and the elements are doubled in the anaphase, while these
again are distributed in the second division.
On the other hand, in Helix pomatia, Bolles Lee (1897)
describes appearances which lead him to conclusions different
from most other observers. He finds transverse divisions in
VoL. 46, PART 2.—NEW SERIES. O
210 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
both mitoses, but no reduction in the number of chromosomes.
He holds that there is both quantitative and qualitative
reduction. His figures have a strong family resemblance to
those in Hchinus, but the chromosomes are very lumpy and
solid, and do not show the compound character of their
prototypes which I have described. Bonin and Collin, in a
recent paper on the “‘ Mitoses in the Spermatogenesis of
Geophilus linearis (Koch),” also interpret the appear-
ances as due to two successive transverse divisions.
This is a very good example of the extraordinary variety
in the manner of interpretation of closely similar appearances, .
which is evidence of the great difficulty of reaching any
degree of certainty in cases where the chromosomes are
small and numerous.
I come now to another series of cases in which the so-called
tetrads play a large part. A figure consisting of four sepa-
rate spherical bodies is very rare, occurring only in Ascaris
and the Insecta, and can be explained in two different ways.
First, in Ascaris, it seems, from the researches of Boveri
(1897), Hertwig (1890), and Brauer (1893), that the primary
chromatin rods split twice longitudinally, preparatory to two
rapidly following divisions which succeed one another with-
out a pause. Two groups of four rods are formed, which
condense into two tetrads. In the first maturation spindle
two of these are linked together as dyads, and pass to the
poles of the spindle. ‘The dyads retained in the ovum are
resolved into monads in the second maturation division.
Whilst there is a mass reduction there is thus no reducing
division, no dissimilar distribution of the “ids” of the
original spireme thread.
Second, Henking (1891) described in Pyrrhocoris tetrad
groups which arose in another way, by a single longi-
tudinal and transverse cleavage of the spireme thread, and
interpreted the first division as a reducing, the second as an
equation division. Vom Rath (1892) followed this account by
a description of the process in Gryllotalpa, the mole-cricket,
in which he figured the halves of the split rods remaining
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECHINUS ESCULENTUs. 211
united to form rings. The chromatin material was then con-
densed on to four parts of the rings, which broke up to form
typical tetrads. These were distributed as dyads in the first
polar, and monads in the second polar spindle. Vom Rath
held that each of these bodies represented a single chromo-
some, and that both divisions were “reducing.” ‘There is thus
not an “equation division,” but a dissimilar distribution of
the “ids” of the spireme thread. In neither of these cases
is the first maturation mitosis of the heterotypical form.
Vom Rath’s results were partly corroborated, partly modified,
by Wilcox (1896) for the spermatogenesis of Caloptenus
femur-rubrum and Cicada tibicen. The difference
between the two interpretations is that Wilcox found the
tetrad formed by conjugation of dyads, and reduction con-
sisted, therefore, not in the unequal distribution of sister
“ids” lying next each other in the spireme thread, but of
any ‘‘ids” indifferently from any part of the spireme thread.
Paulmier (1899), in Anasa, described the formation of the
tetrads more in the fashion described for the Copepods by
Rickert and Haecker, except that there is no spireme stage,
and his first maturation division is unequal, owing to the
manner in which the tetrad groups are placed on the spindle,
separation taking place in the original transverse plane. ‘I'he
second division is an equal division, the separation being
effected along the original longitudinal plane of the tetrad.
It is to be noticed that his tetrads are not composed of four
separate elements, but are compound bodies, the elements of
which are condensed into a homogeneous mass. Riickert
(1894) and Haecker (1892-3) examined a considerable series
of Copepods. They found the earlier stages to differ in the
various forms, but the end result was always the same,
namely, a condensation of the elements into tetrad groups.
The early stages differed according as the split of the primary
rod was complete or incomplete at one or both ends, the
result being the formation of double rods, angles, or rings.
Among the Copepods the case of Cyclops brevicornis
(Haecker, 1895) requires special mention. ‘lhe splitting was
212 THOMAS H. BRYCE,
here complete, and double rods were formed, which divided
transversely, and then united again by their ends, so that the
original tetrad figure was replaced by a pair of rods lying
side by side. Rickert and Haecker, in explanation of their
results, adopted the ‘apparent reduction” hypothesis, — that
is, the reduction is only apparent in the first division, and
is realised in the second, by a suppression of a second
longitudinal splitting. It is to be particularly noticed that
in Cyclops Haecker makes the chromosomes of the second
division bivalent.
It is interesting to note that, except in insects, the type,
>which Haecker calls the plant type, has claimed most of
recently described cases. In this type, as before explained,
the typical tetrad formation is absent, and Haecker homo-
logises the rings described in the prophases with the tetrad
groups by making them equivalent to the four elements of
these bodies. Griffin has attempted to establish the same
analogy by imagining his cross-figures as derived from a
crushed ring, the four limbs of which represent the four
bodies in the tetrad.
Kchinus will not fall into any of Haecker’s types. ‘The
special value of the observations in Echinus seems to me that
the heterotypical division is present without previous ring
formation on the one hand, and on the other distinct tetrads
are formed which certainly submit to a second longitudinal
division.
I shall now endeavour to explain my results in terms of the
tetrad, but I must first of all refer to Boveri’s and to Wilson’s
figures of the second polar spindle in Kchinus micro-
tuberculatus and 'Toxopneustes. They both show obvious
dyads in the equatorial plate, exactly as seen in Ascaris and
Gryllotalpa, and this was the interpretation I was at first
inclined to give to the appearances, until I convinced myself
of the compound nature of the bodies, which at once trans-
ferred Echinus from the group represented by the insects to
that represented by the more recently described case of the
Turbellarians, that is to Haecker’s plant type, though, as I
MATURATION OF OVUM IN KCHINUS ESCULENTUS. 215
have said above, it differs from that type in certain important
particulars, and agrees closely with the Cyclops type.
Hach half of the compound chromosome or tetrad is a short
rod, showing at its ends small spherical bodies. If these
spheres are to be interpreted as separate elements of the tetrad,
there being absolutely no trace of a second longitudinal
i
ars ‘ ; ay a
division, I cannot represent the figure as in Ascaris ——-
re ae
one adopted Haecker’s idea of a suppression of the last trans-
verse segmentation of the spireme thread, the figure could
a | a
with perfect propriety be represented |||, assuming each
bib
sphere to be the equivalent of a single chromosome. Follow-
ing up this formula through the first and second divisions,
it would work out as follows:
PRoPHASE. METAPHASE. ANAPHASE. TELOPHASE
——SO oo
omme’
OO (AXA)
s =
O'O (AKA)
O10 ELO,O
=)
o 6 (a) (A) oo
8) eX)
l. a. ae 3 4, 5,
Trext-F1G. 2.—Scheme of first maturation division.
1. Double-rod prophase figure or tetrad ; first longitudinal split.
2. Double-rod figure placed radially on spindle; opening out of daughter
chromosomes in plane of first cleavage. Profile view.
2a. Same in face view showing beginning of second longitudinal split.
3. Elongation of chromosomes.
4, Separation of daughter chromosomes. Lach is much contracted, and
the second longitudinal split has further extended, so as to give rise to a V.
5. Completion of second longitudinal split, converting the V's into double-
rod figures, which are the granddaughter chromosomes.
214 THOMAS H. BRYOR.
PROPHASE. METAPHASE. ANAPHASE.
(B)
5 ©
(Ay A) ©
o@
XS Suse
.B)
l. 2. 3. 4,
TEXxT-FIG. 3.—Scheme of second maturation division.
1. Double-rod chromosome = granddaughter chromosomes produced in
anaphase of first division,
2. Opening out of longitudinal split established in first division.
3. Separation of granddaughter chromosomes.
4. Large half-cirele represents ovum; within it a granddaughter chromo-
some elongated into a curved rod. Smaller circles represent, polar bodies ; in
1a double-rod chromosome resulting from the second longitudinal split of the
daughter chromosomes of the first division, in 2 a single bilobed body, the
granddaughter chromosome.
I have given reasons for my belief that the sphere-like
portions of the rod can be identified through the hetero-
typical division, and that each submits to a division in the
a
process ; and if we presume to call the first figure | it must
necessarily follow that the elongated loops in the telophase of
the second polar spindle, and the bilobed rod in the second
a
polar body, mustalso be labelled | , and the final result is that
b
the apparent reduction is not confined to the first division, but
is maintained throughout,—in other words, that the chromo-
somes are coupled in pairs, and go through their evolutions as
linked chromosomes. Now, returning to the case of Cyclops
brevicornis, Haecker regards each half of the double rod of
the first metaphase as the result of a fusion of two elements
end to end—so that each is bivalent, though they go through
their evolutions as if they were univalent rods. ‘Thus, if each
half of my tetrad figure were bivalent, our results would up to
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECHINUS ESCULENTUS. 215
this point agree. In the second polar metaphase I
find double-rod figures, which are the granddaughter
each being bivalent like the
chromosomes lying side by side
daughter chromosome from which it sprung. Haecker, in the
second metaphase, finds half the number of elements seen in
the anaphase of the first spindle, and he accounts for his
_ pseudo-tetrad figures by supposing that the previous anaphase
figures become linked together. According to his account,
there is no second longitudinal splitting apparent, and there-
fore the elements are daughter, not granddaughter chromo-
somes joined together. Hach of the daughter chromosomes
is bivalent, so that when united, a complicated redistribution
of the elements is brought about according to the formula—
o—>
O—_
o>
oS
X
X
or
<— os
<—oa
ae)
SS (oy
and separation being effected in the plane of the last trans-
verse segmentation of the spireme thread, there is a true
reducing division. Haecker suggests several possibilities in
explanation of the figures, that just given being his choice;
it does not seem very convincing to me, and the figures lack
the inevitable sequence which is apparent in Kchinus.'
Returning to my own results, we can only on theoretical
grounds assume that each sphere represents a separate —
chromosome; but the idea certainly provides a_ plausible
explanation, though, of course, such an interpretation de-
prives the process of any significance such as Weissmann and
1 While this paper has been passing through the press Lerat has published
in the ‘ Anatomischer Anzeiger’ a preliminary nofe on the first maturation
division in Cyclops strenuus. He does not adopt the explanations of
Rickert and Haecker, but brings the first’ mitosis into Strasburger’s scheme
of the heterotypical division, in which the longitudinal division of the
daughter chromosomes is a fundamental character.
216 THOMAS H. BRYCE,
others have attributed to it. If we look upon the tetrad as
a single chromosome longitudinally divided, then we cannot
get beyond the statement that during maturation the chro-
matin substance, which is retained to form the chromosomes,
condenses into masses, which are half the number of the
segments characteristic of the cleavage nuclei, and that these
masses adopt a special form in the prophases of the first
division, preparatory to the occurrence of a double longi-
tudinal splitting.
It would be tedious and unprofitable to attempt a complete
recapitulation of all the cases described. In many forms,
owing to the difficulty of obtaining an absolutely complete
series of stages, the evidence is incomplete, while in others
the minuteness of the chromosomes is a barrier to finer
analysis. I must, however, refer briefly to the facts as repre-
sented by the botanists regarding the heterotypical division.
In the earlier days of investigation into the mitosis occur-
ring in the pollen mother-cells of higher plants, Strasburger
(1888) and Guignard (1891) described a longitudinal splitting
at the beginning of each division, and in regard to reduction
of the chromosomes they did not find that the pollen mitoses -
differed from the process in vegetative cells.
Belajeff (1894) was the first to point out that the V-shaped
figures of the heterotype were not due to the rods or rings
being curved progressively in their ascent to the poles of the
spindle.
Farmer (1895), as [have already said, described an apparent
double longitudinal cleavage simultaneously progressing, but in
his paper in conjunction with Moore he elaborated the idea that
the double rod of the prophase was produced by bending of
the ring on itself and the fusion of the two halves. In the
metaphase the rods were separated along the plane of fusion,
so that only a single longitudinal cleavage was involved, and
the separating elements were the original daughter chromo-
somes. He held that there was a longitudinal sphtting of
the chromosomes in the second division.
Strasburger (1895) gave an explanation involving two
MATURATION OF OVUM IN FECHINUS ESCULENTUS. 217
longitudinal cleavages, the second split completing itself in
the anaphase preparatory to the second division.
Dixon (1895) gave a somewhat different explanation,
involving a longitudinal split taking place for the first time ~
in the metaphase.
Miss Sargant (1895) described two longitudinal splits in
the primary chromatin thread, but adopted an idea of the
heterotype, which was essentially similar to that of Farmer’s
second interpretation.
Ishikawa (1897) in Allium, and Calkins (1897) in Pteris,
described for the first time tetrads in plants. According to
the description of the former observer, these tetrads were
resolved in the heterotypical division in such a fashion that
when the daughter chromosomes broke at their apex a trans-
verse cleavage was completed.
Strasburger and Mottier (1897), under the influence of the
idea of the bending of the ring and its subsequent resolution
along the same plane, admitted the possibility that the
separation of the V figures occurring in the prophases of the
second division was a transverse splitting, but a few months
later these authors thought they had discovered a longitudinal
division during the prophase of the second division.
Belajeff (1898) pronounced for a transverse division in
Weissmann’s sense, but Guignard (1899), for Najas major,
returned to the interpretation proposed by Strasburger in
1895 for the lilies.
Grégoire (1899) made a re-examination of the phenomena
in the Liliacez, and concluded for a double longitudinal
cleavage, the daughter V’sin the first division being separated
without further cleavage in the second.
The difficult point in the heterotype in higher plants—a
single longitudinal split being admitted in the prophases—is
to account for the V-shaped forms and their varieties.
Strasburger, after changing his ground several times, returns
in his last pronouncement (1900) to his ideas of 1895 with
some modifications. He finds, as I have already said, the V
figures arise in two ways, according to the position assumed
218 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
by the prophase figures on the spindle, but in every case a
second longitudinal cleavage takes place.
An examination of his plates shows how remarkably closely
the figures ] have drawn for Echinus resemble, even in their
details, those he has figured for the plant forms, and the
general statement of his conclusion is as remarkably in con-
formity with my own. He says (p. 81), ‘ The special peculi-
arity of the first nuclear division of the spore and pollen
mother cells, which follows the numerical reduction of the
chromosomes, consists in this, that the daughter chromo-
somes, which arise by a longitudinal splitting of the mother -
chromosomes, are inclined to a premature separation, and
that they directly suffer a second longitudinal cleavage.
“The second nuclear division, which follows on the reduc-
tion of the chromosomes, has only the mission of distributing
to the granddaughter cells the granddaughter chromosomes
already produced in the first division.
“The two divisions differ from ordinary mitotic division
only in the double longitudinal splitting in the first mitosis,
and the condition thus created for the second division.”
Again (p. 99), “The pith of the heterotypical division lies in
the two longitudinal clefts, not in the form of the chromo-
somes.”
“The cause of the two cleavages of the chromosomes so
rapidly following one another, which again conditions the
rapid sequence of the two nuclear divisions, must lie in the
process of reduction which precedes the maturation division.”
LITERATURE.
Acassiz, 1864.—‘ I.. Agassiz’ Contrib. to Nat. Hist. U.S.A.,’ vol. v, Cam-
bridge, Mass.
3aLrour, F. M., 1878.—‘ Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci.,’ vol. xviii.
Batrour, I. M., 1880.—‘ Comparative Embryology,’ vol. i.
vAN BENEDEN, J. P., 1841.—‘ Ann. de Sc. Nat. Ser.,’ tome ii, 15, p. 126.
vAN BENEDEN, Ep., 1875.—‘ Bull. Ac. Roy. de Belgique,’ xi.
van BENEDEN, Ep., 1883.—‘ Arch. Biol.,’ tome iv.
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECHINUS ESCULENTUS 219
Bontn, P., et Cottin, R., 1902.—‘ Anat. Anzeig.,’ Bd. xx.
Born, 1894.—‘ Arch. mikr. Anat.,’ Bd. xliii.
Boveri, Tu., 1887.—‘ Zell Studien,’ Heft i, separate issue.
Bovert, Tu., 1888.—‘ Zell Studien,’ Heft ii, separate issue.
Bovert, Tu., 1890.—‘ Zell Studien,’ Heft ii, separate issue.
Bovent, Tu., 1895 (1).—‘ Arch. f. Entwicklungsmekanik,’ Bd. ii.
Boveri, Tu., 1895 (2).—‘ Verh. d. Phys.-Med. Gesell. zu Wiirzburg,’ n. F.,
KIX.
Bovenrt, Tu., 1901.—*‘ Zell Studien,’ Heft iv, separate issue.
Buitscuut, O., 1876.—‘ Abhandl. Senkenb. Naturf. Ges.,’ Bd. ix.
Birscnu, O., 1894.—‘ Protoplasm,’ Eng. trans., Adam and Charles Black.
Bretaserr, 1894.—‘ Flora Ergianzungsband,’ 1894.
Brtaserr, 1898.—‘ Ber. d. deutsch. botan. Gesell.,’ Bd. xvi, Heft ii.
Braver, 1893 (1).—‘ Arch. mikr. Anat.,’ Bd. xlii.
Braver, 1893 (2).—‘ Arch. mikr. Anat.,’ Bd. xii.
Byxeee, Evirn, 1899.— Proc. Californian Acad. of Se.,’ vol. ii, No. 2.
Caxkins, 1895.—‘ Journal of Morphology,’ xi.
Catxkins, 1897.—‘ Bull. Torrey Bot. Club,’ xxiv.
Carnoy, 1885.—‘ La Cellule,’ i.
Carnoy, 1886.—‘ La Cellule,’ iii.
Carnoy and Lr Brun, 1899.—‘ La Cellule,’ xii, xiv, xvi.
Cutnot, L.—‘ Zool. Anzeiger,’ xv, No. 387.
Dersss, 1847.—‘ Ann. Sc. Nat.,’ vin, p. 83.
Dixon, H. H., 1895.—‘ Proc. Royal Irish Acad.,’ vol. iii.
Diner, 1895.—‘ Jen. Zeitschrift,’ xxix, 2.
von ERLANGER, 1898.—‘ Biol. Centralblatt,’ xviii, i.
Farmer, 1895.—‘ Flora,’ 1895.
Farmer and Moorg, 1896.—‘ Anat. Anzeiger,’ Bd. xi, 3.
Fick, R., 1893.—‘ Zeitschrift f. wiss. Zool.,’ lvi.
Fick, R., 1899.—‘ Anat. Anz.,’ Erganzungsheft zu, Bd. xvi.
Fiexp, G. W., 1895.—‘ Journal of Morphology,’ xi.
Fiemmine, W., 1882.—‘ Arch. mikr. Anat.,’ Bd. xx.
Fiemmine, W., 1887.—‘ Arch. mikr. Anat.,’ Bd. xxix.
For, 1877.—‘ Arch. des Sciences phys. et nat.,’ Genéve, 1877.
For, 1891.—‘ Arch. des Sciences phys. et nat.,’ April, 1891.
Francorrte, P., 1897.—‘ Mém. Cours de l’Acad. Se. de Belgique,’ 1897.
GakpineR, EK. C., 1898.—‘ Journal of Morphology,’ xvi.
220 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
Gatuy, 1900.—‘ La Cellule,’ tome xvii.
Gr1arD, 1877.—‘ Bull. Sci. du Nord et de la Belg.,’ Bd. viii.
Grarp, 1877.—‘ Revue Scientif.,’ Bd. xx.
GrarD, 1890.—‘ Bull. Sci. de la France et de la Belg.,” xxii.
GreEFr, Van, 1876.—‘Sitz. der Ges. z. Beforderung ic ges, Waters
Marburg,’ No. 5.
GREGOIRE, 1899.—‘ La Cellule,’ tome xvi.
GrirFin, B. B., 1899.—‘ Journal of Morphology,’ xv.
GuienarD, 1899.—‘ Comp. rend. de |’Acad. des Sciences,’ 1899.
Harcker, 1892 (1).—‘ Zool. Jahrbuch,’ v
Haecker, 1892 (2).—‘ Ber. Naturf. ges. Freiburg,’ vi.
Haecker, 1893.—‘ Arch. mikr. Anat.,’ xli.
Haecker, 1895 (1).—‘ Arch. mikr. Anat.,’ xlv.
Harcker, 1895 (2).—‘ Annals of Botany,’ ix.
Haecker, 1895 (3).—‘ Arch. mikr, Anat.,’ xlvi.
HaAeckeEr, 1899 (1).—‘ Praxis und Theorie der Zellen und Befructungslehre,’
Fischer, Jena.
HaerckeEr, 1899 (2).—Art. “ Reifungserscheinungen,” Merkel and Bonnet’s
‘ Ergebnisse,’ viii.
Hartmany, Max, 1902.—‘ Zool. Jahrb.,’ Abth. f. Anat. u. Ontog, d. Thiere,
Bd, xv, i. 2
Herua, V., 1893.— Archiv de Biologie,’ xiii.
Henxine, 1890-92.—‘ Zeitschrift f. wiss. Zool.,’ xlix, |, li.
Herrwie, O., 1875.—‘ Morpholog. Jahrbuch,’ Bd. i.
Hertwie, O., 1877.—‘ Morpholoe. Jahrbuch,’ Bde. ii, iii.
Hertwie, O., 1878.—‘ Morpholog. Jahrbuch,’ Bd. iv.
Hertwie, O., 1884.—‘ Jen. Zeitschrift,’ xviii.
Hertwie, O., 1890.—-‘ Arch. f. mikr. Anat,’ Bd. xxxvi.
Hertwie, O., 1895.—‘ The Cell, etc.,’ English translation.
Hertwie, R., 1896.—* Festschft. fiir Gegenbauer.’
Hitt, M. O., 1895.—‘ Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci.,’ vol. xxxviil.
Isnikawa, 1897.—‘ Journ. Coll. of Sci.,’ Imper. Univ., Tokio.
JanssEns, J. A., 1900.—‘ Anat. Anzeiger,’ xvii, Nos. 24, 25.
JENSEN, 1883.—‘ Arch. de Biologie,’ tome iy.
Kinospury, B. F., 1899.—‘ Zool. Bull.,’ ii, 5
Kuinckxowstrom, 1897.—‘ Arch. f. mikr. Anat.,’ xlviii.
KostaneEck!, 1896.—‘ Anat.,’ Heft vii, 2.
MATURATION OF OVUM IN KCHINUS ESCULENTUS. 221
Lez, A. Bouts, 1897.—‘ La Cellule,’ tome xiii.
Linvituez, 1899.—‘ Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard Coll.,’ vol. xxxv, No. 8.
Loes, J., 1899.—‘ Amer. Journal of Phys.,’ iu, 3.
McGrecor, J. H., 1899.—‘ Journal of Morphology,’ xv (supplement).
Mark, E. D., 1881.—‘ Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard Coll.,’ vol. vi.
Matuews, A. P., with Ep. Witson, 1895.—‘ Journal of Morphology,’ x.
Meap, A. O., 1895.—* Journal of Morphology,’ x.
Meves, F., 1896.—‘ Arch. f. mikr. Anat.,’ xlviii.
Monteomery, T. H., 1898.—‘ Zool. Jahrbuch,’ 1898.
Moore, J. E. S., 1895.—‘ Quart. Journ. Micr. Anat.,’ xxxviil.
Moors and Farmer, 1896.—‘ Anat. Anzeiger,’ Bd. xi.
Morean, T. H., 1893.—‘ Anat. Anzeiger,’ ix.
Morea, IT’. H., 1895.—* Arch. f. Entwicklungsmek.,’ Bd. 11.
Moreay, IT. H., 1896.—‘ Arch. f. Mntwicklungsmek.,’ Bd. vill.
Mortiser, D. M., 1897.—< Jahrb. wiss. Bot.,’ xxxi.
Nemec, B., 1§99.—‘ Jahrb. wiss. Bot.,’ xxvii.
OstenHout, W. J. V., 1897.—‘ Jahrb. wiss. Bot.,’ xxxi.
Pautmisr, IF. C., 1899.—‘ Journal of Morphology,’ xv.
Pictet, 1891.—‘ Mittheil. Zool. Stat. Neapel,’ Bd. x.
Puatyer, G., 1886.—‘ Arch. f. mikr. Anat.,’ xxvi, xxvii.
PiatNER, G., 1889.—‘ Biol. Centralblatt,’ viil.
RaBu, 1885.—‘ Morpholog. Jahrbuch,’ x.
vom Ratu, O., 1892.—‘ Arch. f. mikr. Anat.,’ xl.
vom Ratu, O., 1893.—‘ Zeitschrift f. wiss. Zool.,’ lvii.
vom Ratu, O., 1895.—‘ Arch. f. mikr. Anat.,’ xlvi.
Reinke, F., 1894.—‘ Arch. f. mikr. Anat.,’ xliii and xliv.
Reinke, F., 1895.—‘ Sitz-Ber. Akad. d. Wiss.,’ Berlin, 1895.
Rickert, J., 1892.—* Anat. Avz.,’ vii and viii.
Rickert, J., 1893.—Merkel and Bonnet’s ‘ Ergebnisse,’ iii.
Rickert, J., 1895.—‘ Arch. f. mikr. Anat.,’ xlv. ,
SABASCHNTIKOFF, M., 1897.—‘ Bull. Soc. Nat.,’ Moscow.
Sareant, Erner, 1895.—‘ Quart. Journ. of Micr. Science,’ 1895.
SarGanT, Eruxr, 1896-7.—‘ Annals of Botany,’ vols. x and xi.
SELENKA, 1883.—‘ Studien tiber Entwick.,’ II, Wiesbaden, 1883.
Soporta, J., 1895.—‘ Arch. f. mikr. Anat.,’ xlv.
STRASBURGER, 1876.— Zellbildung und Zelltheilung,’ Jena, 1875.
STRASBURGER, 1877.—‘ Jen. Zeitschrilt,’ xi.
yas A THOMAS H. BRYCE.
STRASBURGER, 1894.—‘ Annals of Botany,’ vol. viii, 1894.
STRASBURGER, 1895.—‘ Jahrb. f. wiss. Bot.,’ xxviii.
STRASBURGER, 1897.—‘ Jahrb. f. wiss. Bot.,’ xxx and xxxi.
STRASBURGER and Mortier, 1897.—‘ Ber. d. Bot. Ges.,’ xv, 6.
STRASBURGER, 1900.—‘ Ueber Reduktionstheilung, Spindelbildung, Centro-
somen und Cilienbildner im Pflanzenreich,’ Jena, Fischer, 1900.
VAN DER StricutT, O., 1898.— ‘ Arch. Biol.,’ xv.
ScHuL1ze, O., 1887.—‘ Zeitschrift f. wiss. Zool.,’ xlv.
Warase, 1892-3.—‘ Journ. of Morphology,’ viii, ‘ Wood’s Holl Lectures.”
WeissMANN, 1893. —‘ The Germplasm,’ English translation.
WueEeELer, W. M., 1897.—‘ Arch. de Biologie,’ xv.
Wuirtmay, C. O., 1878.—‘ Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.,’ vol. xviii.
Witcox, EH. V., 1895.—‘ Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard Coll.,’ xxvii and xxix.
Witson, Ep. B., 1895 (1).—‘ Atlas of Fertilization, ete.,” New York.
Wixson, Kp. B., 1895 (2) —‘ Journal of Morphology,’ xv,
Wixson, Ep. B., 1897.—‘ Science,’ vol. v, No. 114. ‘
Witson, Ep. B., 1899.—‘ Journal of Morphology,’ xv (supplement).
Witson, Ep. B., 1900.—* The Cell, ete.,’ Macmillan, 2nd edit., 1900.
Zosa, 1895,—‘ Anat. Anzeiger,’ xi, 10.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES 10—12,
Illustrating Dr. Bryce’s paper on “ Maturation of the Ovum
in Kchinus esculentus.”
All the figures were drawn by aid of the camera lucida with Zeiss 2 mm.
apochromatic objective of 1:40 mm. aperture (homogeneous immersion), and
6, 8, or 12 compensating ocular. The magnification, tested by the stage
micrometer, of igs, 1 to 6 is 850, of the remainder 1200, except Vig. 20,
which is magnified 1500 times, The drawings represent as realistically as
possible what can be seen in the individual section, and, except in Fig. 18, no
attempt has been made to make the drawing diagrammatic by incorporating
data from two or more sections of the same ovum. A series of photo-micro-
graphs of the stages, kindly taken for me by Dr. J. H. Teacher, was of con-
siderable assistance for comparison with, aud verification of, the drawings.
MATURATION OF OVUM IN ECHINUS ESCULENTUS. 228
PLATE 10.
Fic. 1.—EHarly oocyte.
Fic. 2.—A stage in the growth of the germinal vesicle, showing also the
appearance of the cytoplasm when the preparation is not strongly washed out.
Fie. 3.—Another phase in the growth of the germinal vesicle, showing also
the appearance of the cytoplasm in a preparation from which the iron hema-
toxylin has been strongly washed out.
Fig. 4.—Section through invagination into germinal vesicle.
Fic. 5.—Disappearance of nuclear membrane ; rejection of greater part of
chromatin network; isolated mass of chromatin from which chromosomes are
derived.
Fic. 6.—Later stage, in which two asters have appeared.
Figs. 7@ and 7 6.—Two adjoining sections through the same germinal
vesicle, showing the mass of chromatin from which chromosomes will be
formed.
Fie. 8.—The two definitive asters ; chromosomes in form of bilobed bodies
or tetrads.
Fic. 9.—Another section, showing the chromosomes within a central plate,
surrounded by a crown of radiations fading imperceptibly into the cytoplasm ;
one aster in view, a second lay in the adjoining section. Sometimes a third
aster is seen at this stage.
PLATE 11.
Fics. 10—14 represent the different forms assumed in various sections
by the chromosomes before the formation of the first spindle. The dotted lines
indicate the outline of the central plate.
Fie. 15.—Asters now in radial position; early phase of first division
spindle,
Fics. 16, 17.—Two phases of metaphase of first division.
Fic. 18.—Same stage semi-diagrammatic. ‘The various metaphase figures
in two adjoining sections of the same ovum are each carefully drawn, but
represented in the same plane.
Fic. 19.—Anaphase of first maturation division.
Fic. 20.—Slightly oblique section of constricted spindle in formation of
first polar body.
Fig. 21.—Various chromosomal figures seen during progress of first division,
in profile and face views.
Fie. 22.—The chromosomes retained in the ovum after the extension of
the first polar body, as seen in an oblique section of central aster.
224, THOMAS H. BRYCE.
Fie. 23.—First, polar body and centrosomes of second division before
formation of spindle.
Fies. 24—26.—First polar body and second polar spindle in metaphase,
showing the chromosomes in various aspects.
PLATE 12.
Fies. 27 and 28.—Two stages in the anaphase of second polar division.
Fie. 29.—Constriction of spindle in formation of second polar body.
Vic. 30.—First polar body and second polar spindle in telophase. Section
is oblique, so that second polar body is not seen. The point of constriction
of the spindle shows one form in which the mid-body occurs.
Fic. 31.—The two polar bodies and the reconstituted nucleus.
Fic. 32.—The completely re-formed and matured nucleus, which has retired
to near the centre of the egg.
Fic. 83.—An early phase in the reconstruction of the nucleus; a number
of vesicles are seen which run together to form the single vesicle seen in
Fig. 31. The remains of the spindle and mid-body are also seen.
Fie. 34.—Abnormality of second polar body. It is a small cell in which the
nucleus is being reconstructed exactly as in the ovum.
UNIVERSITY OF
iy 7.
- 7
+}
ay
nn I a oe Ee ee EE EEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEeEeEeEeEeeerreereeeeere eee
VALENS PATO
OC
-_
a
= Es
o.0-6.
~— SP.
en ae
wil
©
=
a |
=
Ltn
oO
>.
we
2]
_ oe
iJ
>
z
=
ae.
aes a: at
: ate a ~ 7
LIBRAR
aper -OF THE
UNIVERSITY CF }
Tit Ria
ca fLEINGTS
/
|
} —
=<
ne
” *
i cf
v “5 7
aa ea! .
th a “
na! aad 9
Fig Ib
Ae @
= .
« .
Face views.
) ‘ I “
ie 4 f = ke ~ - oii
: : Ba? . 4
4 ee : ¢
ya
1!
y |
Fug. 21.
Fig. 22.
p . 4 ’ pe a p nn rs
ee oe ~n /
‘ see gee = ys \ -
_ Bake: . 4 \ :
| oe - MEN \
i ‘a ax - \ ‘ 3 \
>
q
a
es
Lae
et
bth ‘ \
4 r 3
‘ .
< ‘
;
> . ar - a -
A r
. oe
. 7 : wee :
inl ere ont Mn le oe [aie I
iy e
+ arene SS arses .
Yas ei .
=
ss *.
T ¥ »
we ha a a = e211 Ae ai al
bad i | iw P?
i Quart SUI Mor Sa Vea“ OM Fe I]
o* oh
Fug.26.
+
AS Huth, Lith” London.
- UNIV
LIBRAR
roc
B.S
OF THE ns
ITY OF [LEINGIS
oP 2 5
9
/
2°
ea%%ese 2 0
oso 4
.
*
center i an,
a
London.
the
i
Huth, L
- V4 f
a ae ee
— - 7
wr. = 1 Pa 4
¥ qarure ~ an ro i : Di-4,
“ue ne J :
7 ars ane va ”
> a!
i= * i? - a.
4 , oy aa
: ota
J a“ hd
~ a.
4
‘
—
~
,
rma ry
LiBtin
OF THE .
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS
STUDIES ON THE ARACHNID ENTOSTERNITE. Boe
“Studies on the Arachnid Entosternite.
By
R. I. Pocock.
With Plates 13 and 14,
THE investigations here recorded were set on foot in the
first instance with the purpose of settling certain contra-
dictions as to matters of fact in the extant descriptions and
published figures of the entosternites of various Arachnids,
which a preliminary dip into the literature revealed. It was
necessary to ascertain whether these discrepancies were
attributable to a natural variability in the organ, to specific
or generic differences between the species dissected, or to
errors of observation on the part of the dissectors. In some
cases, too, there was an entire lack of agreement on the part
of observers in the interpretation of the facts recorded ; and
the suggested homologies between the constituent parts of
the entosternites of various species did not, on a priori
grounds, appear to be in all cases satisfactory. I was
anxious, moreover, to test the respective claims to recogni-
tion of the two theories of the origin of the entosternite
that have been put forward.
I have made no examination of this organ in the Palpi-
gradi, Pseudoscorpiones, Podogona, Opiliones, or Acari,
and have nothing to add to what has already been said about
the entosternite of these orders.
The contents of this essay, which deals exclusively with
the remaining existing orders, may be tabulated as follows :
VoL. 46, pAkY 2.—NEW SERIES. P
226 R. I. POCOCK.
I. The structure of the entosternite in the Xiphosure,
Scorpiones, Pedipalpi, Araneze, and Solifuge.
1. The entosternite of the Xiphosure, p. 226.
a 2 es » Scorpiones, p. 227.
Oo. “ ef i Pedipalpi, p. 231.
A, ee s e Aranee, p. 238.
5. The “so-called”? entosternite of the Solifuge,
p. 237.
II. The comparative morphology of the entosternite,
p. 239.
III. Theories of the origin of the entosternite, p. 247.
I. SrrucrtuRE OF THE ENTOSTERNITE IN THE XIPHOSURA,
SCORPIONES, PepipaLtpl, ARANE®, AND SOLIFUGH.
1. The Entosternite of the Xiphosure.
The form and structure of the entosternite in the American
Limulus is well known, thanks to the figures and descriptions
of it published by Ray Lankester (5, 6) and Benham (2).
It is a longitudinally oblong plate, with a pair of stout
anterior bars, or cornua, forming the pharyngeal notch, two
pairs of long and slender apophyses behind the anterior bars,
diverging nearly at right angles from the main body of the
plate, and a stout but short apophysis springing transversely
from its postero-lateral angle on each side. There is also an
irregular-shaped posterior median process, as well as a pair
of short apophyses projecting subvertically beneath the
latter. In the Moluccan species T. gigas (=moluccanus),
as was shown by Van der Hoeven, there is only a single
long apophysis projecting from the lateral border in front.
This represents the anterior of the two that are found in this
position in X. polyphemus. ‘This peculiarity obtains also,
I find, in the other Asiatic species, Tachypleus triden-
tatus (=longispina) and Carcinoscorpius rotundi-
cauda, thus confirming the opinion I have already put
forward (‘Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,’ April, 1902) that these
STUDIES ON THE ARACHNID ENTOSTERNITE. 227
three forms belong to a group distinct from and more
specialised than that of polyphemus, as is clearly shown
by the structure of the genital operculum, etc. Also the
pair of posterior ventral apophyses found in polyphemus
are missing in the two young specimens of tridentatus
and rotundicauda I have examined. In all species of
Limulus the upper side of the entosternite is furnished
laterally behind the middle with a short muscle-bearing
excrescence, suggesting a suppressed or undeveloped apo-
physis.!
2. The Hntosternite of Scorpions.
The variations that affect the entosternite of Scorpions
are principally correlated with the compression, antero-
posterior or lateral as the case may be, of the exoskeletal
metasternite. In Palamneus thorelli the ‘ body” of
the entosternite consists of an irregularly transversely oblong
plate. From its anterior angles rise the anterior cornua,
which give off muscles to the appendages along their outer
edge, and present a frayed or ragged appearance when cleared
of these tissues (see fig. 20, Pl. 14). On its underside the
plate dips down on each side of the nerve-cord, and passing
and fusing beneath it forms a complete and rigid ventral
ring through which the nerves pass backwards into the
mesosoma. ‘The lower portion of this ring gives off in front
1 In his paper on the anatomy of Limulus polyphemus (‘ Trans. Linn.
Soc.,’ xxviii, 1873), Owen states (p. 469) that the entosternite of this species
is furnished with a pair of “ sclerous processes’? which diverge from “ near
the fore-part of the dorsal surface,” and reference is made to fig. 5 on pl.
xxxviil, which is an acknowledged copy of Van der Hoeven’s figure of the
entosternite of L. moluccanus. Yet the original figures with which Owen's
paper is illustrated are all, apparently, taken from examples of the American
form (L. polyphemus). Hence it is difficult to account for his overlooking
the presence of the two pairs of processes in this species. It may also be
remarked in passing, though the lapsus is of no great moment, that the
statement in the foot-note to p. 462 that ‘the species which he [ Van der
Hoeven] dissected was the rapier-tailed Molucca crab (Limulus rotundi-
cauda, Latr.) ” is an error.
22S. RL. POvOck:
a median process which divides into a pair of diverging
tendinous apophyses. From the sides of the neural ring
externally spring muscle-supporting processes. The muscles
rising from the posterior of these processes are extended
laterally and dorsally to become attached to the sides and
roof of the body-cavity, forming, with associated connective
tissue, a great muscular sheet or “ diaphragm” which sepa-
rates the cavity of the prosoma from that of the mesosoma.
Inferiorly this partition is completed by muscles which run
from the posterior side of the lower edge of the neural canal
to the floor of the body-cavity. In the middle line above the.
“body” of the entosternite tle connective tissue of this
muscular sheet is perforated by two foramina; the inferior
gives passage to the alimentary canal, the superior to the
aorta.
In addition to the muscles already mentioned, three pairs
of dorso-ventral muscles arise from the entosternite. Those
of the posterior pair are attached to the underside of the
tergite of the genital somite behind the diaphragm, and to
the posterior side of the entosternite in front of it. Hence
in their passage from above downwards they pass through
the diaphragm. ‘T’he median pair extends from the aortic
foramen in front of the diaphragm to the posterior border
of the upper surface of the “body” of the entosternite.
Just in front of their inferior points of attachment spring
those of the anterior pair, which, rising vertically, meet in
the middle line above the aorta, before attaching themselves
to the underside of the carapace.
As might be expected, the entosternite of this species
agrees in all essentials with that of Palamneous indus
(= Buthus cyaneus) as described and figured by Lankester
(6) and Beck (1). In a general way the entosternite of all
Scorpions is formed on this plan. In minor particulars,
however, there is considerable structural variation. In
species with the metasternite antero-posteriorly compressed,
the body of the ‘ entosternite”’? becomes shorter as compared
with its length, as shown in the figure of that of Lurus
STUDIES ON THE ARACHNID ENTOSTERNI'E. 229
dufoureius, one of the Vejovide. In this species the lateral
crests which arise from the anterior cornua are better
developed than in Palamnezeus, and the homologue of the
solid lateral process of the latter is less solidified and rigid.
Moreover the anterior process from the neural arch appears
to be undeveloped (PI. 14, fig. 21).
In Hadruroides charcasus, a member of the same
family as [urus, but with the sternum showing a markedly
greater degree of antero-posterior compression, the ‘ body ”
of the entosternite is relatively much shorter than in the last-
named genus, though in other respects the entosternites of
the two are very similar.
The process of reduction in the size of the entosternite by
longitudinal compression is carried to an extreme in the
Bothriuride (olim ‘Telegonidz), where the sternum is
reduced to a transversely linear sclerite wedged in between
the genital operculum and the cox of the appendages of
the fourth pair (= second walking leg). In Bothriurus
bonariensis (see Pl. 14, fig. 22) the portion of the body of
the entosternite which forms the roof of the neural canal
is reduced to a narrow transverse bar. This modification
seems to have been accompanied by the disappearance of
the anterior pair of dorso-ventral muscles ; those of the second
pair pass up to the aortic foramen without fusing with the
diaphragm. As in the genera of Vejovide examined,
the subneural process is apparently absent in the Both-
riuridz. The structure of the entosternite in this family
bears out the view I have elsewhere expressed that these
scorpions are a specialised offshoot of the Vejovide.
In the Buthidz, which are characterised by a triangularly
compressed sternum, the entosternite shows unmistakable
signs of lateral compression, the ‘ body” being reduced to
a longitudinal bar, from the posterior extremity of which,
and rather between than behind those of the first pair, rise,
in juxtaposition, the dorso-ventral muscles of the second pair.
The lateral crests are well developed, as in the Vejovidew, and
the subneural arch is furnished with a median process
230 R. F. POCOCK.
ending in two fan-shaped apophyses similar to those of
Palamneus, but stouter.
These characteristics are illustrated in the figure of the
entosternite of Centruroides margaritatus (Pl. 14,
fig. 24), which may be taken as fairly typical of the ento-
sternite of Buthidee in general.
Schimkewitsch (10) gives a figure of the entosternite of
Androctonus bicolor, which is quite unlike this plate in
any member of the Buthide I have examined. Presumably
the form he names A. bicolor is the thick-tailed, dark-
coloured species from ‘Transcaspia which Olivier called —
crassicauda. In examples of this species the entosternite
closely resembles that of Centruroides margaritatus
(see Pl. 14, fig. 24), having the same narrow median longi-
tudinal ridge and large lateral crests and the same narrow,
nay, even narrower bar, with broad, fan-shaped apophyses
running forwards from the subneural arch. Yet Schimke-
witsch represents the supra-neural arch as a transversely
oblong plate as wide in proportion to its length as in Hadru-
roides, furnished with lobate lateral projections, and a very
broad subneural process with unexpanding apophyses. An
entosternite of this description should belong to some species
with a broad and short pentagonal entosternite.
Speaking of the entosternite of the scorpions, Bernard
(3) says that its points of attachment ‘to its parent
cuticle correspond with the points of origin of the ento-
sternite of Galeodes,’—that is to say, to the integument
immediately above the preaxial surface of the coxa of the
fourth prosomatic appendage, or, as he elsewhere (4) ex-
presses it, between the third and fourth segments. In
Palamneus thorelli, the species examined by Bernard, I
find that the anterior bar of the entosternite has a fibro-
muscular attachment to the in-projecting anterior rim of the
coxa of the fourth appendage (second leg). But I could not
satisfy myself that there was any union with the adjacent
integument,—certainly there was none such as to justify the
speaking of the integument as the “parent” of this bar
STUDIES ON THK ARACHNID ENTOSTERNITE. 231
of the entosternite. Bernard also homologises the anterior
bars of the scorpion’s entosternite with the second pair of
ventral apophyses which are affixed to the sternum opposite
the base of the third prosomatic appendage (first walking
lez) in the spiders. Since, however, these bars in the
scorpion give attachment diagonally to great muscles which
supply the second and third appendages (chela and first lee),
it seems far more likely that they represent the anterior bars
of the entosternite of the spiders, Thelyphonus, etc., which
are similarly continuous with the muscles supplying these
appendages (PI. 14, fig. 20).
3d. The Entosternite of the Pedipalpi (Thelypho-
nide, Phrynide).
In the Pedipalpi two types of entosternite are found, one
characteristic of the Urotricha (Thelyphonidee), the other of
the Amblypygi (Phrynidee). In the Thelyphonidz the main
portion of the plate is longitudinally oblong in shape. It is
perforated mesially by two foramina, an anterior large and
oval, and a posterior relatively small and circular. The two
are separated by a transverse bridge; a similar bridge
separates the anterior foramen from the pharyngeal notch.
Near the edges of the upper surface of the right and left
bars forming the external framework of the pharyngeal
notch and of the foramina, rise five pairs of tendinous pro-
cesses which are affixed by muscular fibres to the underside
of the carapace. The first rises at the extremity of the
anterior cornu, the second just in front of the anterior
bridge. The latter apophysis is bifid and projects inwards,
backwards, and upwards towards the central depression of
the carapace. ‘he others take a more lateral direction. The
third rises close to the second and a little behind the
anterior bridge; the fourth just behind the middle of the
large foramen ; the fifth on a level with the smaller foramen.
Below the latter may be seen a bifid tendinous crest running
downwards and outwards. Behind this point the entosternite
ye
4 er R.° Fs POCO:
is laterally constricted, then expands into a subcircular softer
plate, to the ragged edge of which are fastened many
muscles passing to the pregenital somite and to the
appendages of the sixth pair. Sometimes at least there is, on
the upper side of this plate, a pair of short processes which
serially repeat apparently the longer tendons of the anterior
part of the entosternite. From the underside in front arise
two pairs of processes, the first passing from the anterior ex-
tremity of the cornua to the coxe of the chele, the second
to the prosternum from a point on a level with the anterior
bridge (Pl. 18, figs, 2, 9).
The figure and description of the entosternite of Thely-
phonus published by Laurie (8) do not agree with this
organ in the species examined by myself. ‘The anterior three
pairs of dorsal processes and the two pairs of ventral pro-
cesses, as well as the lateral crest, are omitted from the figure
and unmentioned in the text; and [ find no process pro-
jecting from the sides of the posterior lobe such as he
represents and describes. So, too, is the figure twice
published by Schimkewitsch (9, 10) from a_ sketch by
Tarnani and copied by Bernard (8) unlike, in certain particu-
lars, the entosternites of the Thelyphonidz I have dissected,
although resembling them in general form and in the
number of the processes. For example, the bifid process
numbered Sa.’ in my drawing is represented as rising from
the side of the anterior bridge shghtly behind the level
whence the processes numbered 2¢g. diverge ; and the pro-
cesses numbered 3tg. spring further back in line with the
posterior bridge, not just behind the middle of the larger
foramen, as shown in my drawing. ‘The lateral crest, too,
was apparently unnoticed. Considering the uniformity
in the structure of the prosoma throughout the family Thely-
phonide, it seems hardly probable that these discrepancies
are due to specific differences between the specimens examined,
I find a practically complete uniformity of structure in the
entosternite in species of the genera ‘'helyphonus,
Hypoctonus, and Mastigoproctus,
STUDIES ON THE ARACHNID ENTOSTERNITE. 930
The entosternite of the Amblypygi is very different from
that of the Urotricha. The pharyngeal notch is semi-
circular and the anterior cornua large. Hach bears a pair
of dorsally directed apophyses near the apex, also one on the
underside, which dips down beneath the pharynx, and one
above, at the base, which projects upwards and inwards.
‘he body of the plate itself is wide, narrowed posteriorly, and
solid, i.e. without foramina. Near its lateral border on each
side arise four apophyses which extend upwards and outwards
to be inserted by means of muscular bundles to the under sur-
face of the carapace. The first is very slender; the second
and third are approximated at the base; the fourth is the
stoutest. These four spring from a common ridge beneath
which the edge of the entosternite runs ont externally into a
short angular crest to contribute support to the great
appendicular muscles (PI. 15, fig. 3).
It would be unfair to criticise the figure of the entosternite
of “ Phrynus”’ given by Bernard (38), because “ the prepara-
tion was accidentally destroyed before the drawing was
completed.” Four pairs of dorsal apophyses are represented,
but I cannot satisfactorily homologise them with the six
pairs shown in the figure here published (PI. 13, fig. 3). It is
stated, moreover (op. cit., p. 20), that this plate has ‘ only
one attachment to the ventral surface, and that is to the
intersegmental membrane between the second and third pairs
of limbs corresponding with the first pair of apodemes
forming the entosternite in Mygale.” It is true that there
is only one pair of ventral processes, and that they represent
the similarly situated processes in Mygale. They are not
attached, however, in the position Bernard states, but to the
coxa of the second appendage, the point of their insertion
appearing as a horny subcircular patch on the soft membrane
below the mouth, when these appendages are pulled apart
and examined from the front.
4. The Entosternite in the Aranee.
In typical members of the Aranez the entosternite closely
234 R. ‘Ts POCOCK,
resembles that of the Amblypygi in general form and in many
structural details. In Ephebopus murinus and other
mygalomorphous spiders of the family Aviculariide it is a
longitudinally oval imperforated plate, with large anterior
cornua bounding the pharyngeal notch. ‘he upper side is
furnished with four pairs of dorsally directed tendinous
processes, arising, as in Phrynus, from a common ridge.
Below this the edge of the plate runs outexternally into angular
processes which afford attachment to some muscles of the
legs. From the underside four pairs of processes pass down-
wards to meet the sternum; the first pair arising from the
anterior cornua and running to the bases of the appendages
of the second pair, immediately behind the prosternum ; the
second, third, and fourth radiating from a common median
excrescence, behind the pharyngeal notch, and reaching the
sternum opposite the third, fourth, and fifth appendages.
Remnants of a similar apophysis corresponding to the sixth
appendage, but failing to reach the sternum, are traceable
near the posterior end of the entosternite. The clief
difference between this entostermite and that of the Ambly-
pygi lies in the presence of the ventral apophyses corre-
sponding to the four posterior pairs of prosomatic append-
ages.
The figure of the entosternite of a Mygale given by
Bernard (8, figs. 3 and 5), and taken from a specimen in
the College of Surgeons’ Museum, is diagrammatic. It is to
be noticed, however, that the ventral processes of the first
pair are correctly represented as fused in the middle line.
‘he entosternites of the species examined by Lankester (5, 6)!
and Wasmann (11) agree closely with that of Hphebopus
murinus.
In the great majority of the Mygalomorphe the ento-
sternite is in the main like that of Mphebopus, retaining
the four dorsal and the four ventral apophyses, the points
of attachment of the latter being visible on the external
1 Jn the figure published in the second of the two works enumerated above
the dorsal side is by an oversight represented as the ventral, and vice versa.
STUDIES ON THE ARACHNID ENTOSTERNITE. 235
surface of the sternum as the so-called sigilla. In many
genera there is a tendency for the posterior pair to increase in
size and shift their point of insertion from a submarginal to a
subcentral position. his is particularly noticeable in the
so-called “trap-door” spiders, where the muscles and append-
ages of the prosoma are specialised for fossorial work.
In a few genera, e. g. Atypus, Hriodon,and Actinopus,
all the four pairs of ventral apophyses have moved from the
margin of the sternum towards its centre, the convergence
reaching an extreme in Actinopus, where their points of
attachment meet in the middle line, forming the well-known
rosette or star-shaped sternal impression characteristic of
this genus. The union of these four apophyses on each
side with one another and with their fellows of the opposite
side results in the formation of a solid plate beneath the
nerve mass, which is thus enclosed, as it were, in a basket,
the lateral nerves to the limbs passing out through the
spaces between the upright portion of the apophyses.
From the middle of the anterior border of this ventral
plate a short median process runs forward, forming the
median unpaired lobe of the rosette-like impression on the
outer side of the sternum.
In Atypus the four apophyses retain their primitive dis-
tinctness, and are arranged on the underside of the
entosternite in the form of a circle, following the curvature
of the pharyngeal notch. A fibrous strand runs forward
from the anterior apophysis to the prosternum.
A. reduction in the number of ventral apophyses takes place
in the typical genera of the Ctenizinew, e. g. Pachy-
fo)
lomerus, Stasimopus, and of the Idiopine, e. g.
Acanthodon and Heligmomerus. In Pachylomerus
the first and fourth apophyses persist, the second and third
disappear. Stasimopus resembles Pachylomerus in this
particular, but differs in that the apophyses of the anterior
pair fuse across the middle line to form a complete collar
round the nerve mass. In Acanthodon the first apo-
physis is retained as in all the Mygalomorphe, and the second
236 R. I. POCOCK.
and third also as slender pillars with a marginal attachment
to the sternum, but the fourth pair has vanished. In some
of the genera of this group, e. g. Stasimopus and Pachy-
lomerus, an additional apophysis is found on the dorsal side
arising from the crest just behind the second apophysis
from the anterior end, and directed inwards. Indications of
a similar tendon are also observable behind the next suc-
ceeding apophysis, and in Acanthodon similar supple-
mentary tendons are observable behind the posterior two
pairs of apophyses.
In an immature specimen of Liphistius I find the four ~
normal dorsal apophyses of exceptional thickness, and repre-
sentatives of the two supernumerary apophyses that occur
in Stasimopus, well developed. ‘The entosternite in this
specimen, however, perhaps on account of its immaturity, has
no ventral apophyses extending to the sternum, although the
muscular scars are visible at the sides of this plate. This
absence of ventral apophyses is full of interest, on account of
its repetition in the Arachnomorphe, with which Liphistius
has other features in common (PI. 13, fig. 7).
On the structure of the entosternite in the Arachnomor-
phous spiders (olim Dipneumones) my observations have not
been far extended. A few examples of genera belonging to
widely separated families have been examined, however,
without the discovery of any very marked differences in the
structure of this plate. In all there are four pairs of dorsal
apophyses corresponding exactly to those of the Mygalo-
morphze and Liphistius, and in all, except Filistata, an
additional pair arising, one on each side, between the normal
second and third pairs, and directed obliquely mwards and
backwards. This represents, no doubt, the muscle, sometimes
with a tendinous base, which arises in the same position in
some of the Mygalomorphe, e. g. Pachylomerus. In many
strong-legged species, such as Lycosa, Ctenus, and Hresus,
it is noticeable that the dorsal tendons are broad and divided
distally into two branches. ‘he extension of this split to the
root of the tendon would give rise in each instance to two
STUDIES ON THE ARACHNID ENTOSTERNITE. 237
complete and distinct apophyses. This cleavage appears to
have taken place, probably once, possibly twice, in the case
of the entosternite of Phrynus.
In none of the Arachnomorphe have I found ventral
apophyses extending to the sternum, such as are found in
all the Mygalomorphe. The underside of the entosternite
of Lycosa ingens, however, is furnished in its anterior
half with a high median crest, from which five short and
slender tendons arise on each side. These tendons appear
to be homologous with the five inferior tendons seen in
Hphebopus (fig. 13) and other genera of Aviculariidee. In
the latter, however, only three pairs spring from a common
centre, the first lying far forward; the fifth, often obsolete,
far backwards.
The diagrammatic transverse section of the entosternite,
with its associated muscles, of the Aranee, figured by
Schimkewitsch (10), shows on each side two dorso-ventral
muscles, a lateral muscle, and two that pass to the legs, an
external or elevator of the trochanter (second segment), and
an internal (the depressor of the coxa), which passes ventrally
to an entapophysis between the sternum and the base of the
leg,—al) rismg from distinct apophyses. ‘The last-named
muscle is, I believe, the ventral portion of the tergo-sternal
muscle, and the pair of dorsal muscles on each side repre-
sent the tergal portion cleft to the base.
do. The “So-called” Entosternite of the Solifuge.
The “so-called ”’ entosternite of the Solifugz, both in its
structure and attachment, is quite unlike the true entoster-
nite of other Arachnids. It consists of a pair of stout, rigid
chitinous pillars united, with or without articulation, to the
narrow prosternal plate, wedged in between the coxe of the
third pair of appendages. From the prosternum it extends
transversely along the narrow strip of integument joining the
juxtaposed coxee of the third and fourth pairs of appendages.
Internally the two pillars, running obliquely or subvertically
238 R. I "POCOCK:
backwards from their base, converge and meet, without actual
fusion, in the middle line, expanding beneath the alimentary
canal to form a somewhat saddle-shaped enlargement for
muscular attachment. ‘This structure 1s supported beneath
by a pair of slender chitinous rods which rise, one on each
side, from a point on the ventral integument of the fourth
somite close to the inner extremity of the tracheal stigma.
In front of this entosternite there is a pair of fibrous
nodules, each of which forms a centre for the attachment of
five tendons, one passing backwards to be attached to a
forwardly directed process from the expanded portion of the ~
entosternite, a second passing vertically downwards towards
the point of attachment of the entosternite, a third passing
forwards, a fourth obliquely downwards and outwards, and
the fifth downwards and inwards to the base of the rostrum.
Bernard (3 and 4) says the entosternite of Galeodes “rises
as a pair of infoldings of the cuticle between the third and
fourth segments,” and his drawings represent the two pillars
as attached some distance from the middle line to the external
portion of the membrane between the coxe of third and
fourth appendages, no connection with the prosternal plate
being shown or mentioned. The only addition to be made to
his description relates to the attachment of the entosternite
to the prosternal plate as mentioned above.
This attachment is of two kinds. Inthe case of a specimen
of Solpuga sagittaria the continuity of the entosternite with
the prosternum and the intercoxal integument is plainly
indicated after clarification in caustic potash and immersion
in glycerine. I can find neither articulation nor sutural line,
to attest its obliteration, between the two. On the contrary,
the strengthening strands of thick chitin which traverse the
entosternite pass without interruption into those of the pro-
sternum, the two forming a rigid and continuous whole. A
similar state of things is shown in the figure of the skeletal
elements of the prosoma of Galeodes given by Schimkewitsch
(10).
The treatment mentioned above applied to the entosternite
STUDIES ON THE ARACHNID ENTOSTERNITE. 239
of Galeodes arabs revealed, however, a joint between the
posterior extremities of the bars of the V-shaped prosternum
and the diverging pillars of the entosternite.
The question as to which of these two arrangements is the
more primitive must remain unanswered until the origin of
the Galeodean entosternite is settled. If, as Bernard main-
tains, it is nothing but an exoskeletal entapophysis, the con-
dition of unbroken continuity with the exoskeleton, as
manifested in Solpuga, must be regarded as the original, and
the jointed condition seen in Galeodes the derivative. If,
on the other hand, the entosternite in this order proves to
be an entoskeletal element like that of other Arachnids, its
fusion with the exoskeleton must be a secondarily acquired
characteristic, and its separation therefrom a_ primitive
feature (Pl. 14, figs. 26, 27).
Il. Tue Comparative Morpoonoay or THE ENTOSTERNITE.
The evidence favouring the hypothesis that the prosoma of
the primitive Arachnid was furnished with a broad segmented
sternal area separating the post-oral appendages of the right
side from those of the left needs no recapitulation. It may be
claimed that the possession of a wide sternal area by the
Amblypygous Pedipalpi and all the typical Aranez is an
archaic feature; and that, in this particular at least, these
orders are less speciaiised than the Scorpiones, Solifugee,
Pseudo-scorpiones, and Opiliones, where the encroachment of
the coxze of the appendages, aided in the case of the first
and last-named orders by antero-posterior compression accom-
panying the forward movement of the generative aperture,
has more or less obliterated the sternal sclerites in the middle
line. Although modified to a very appreciable extent in
the direction of sternal suppression, the prosoma of the
Uropygous Pedipalpi is more primitive than that of the
four orders last named, more primitive even than that of
the Amblypygi and Araneze in the lesser constriction of its
posterior somite to share in the formation of the waist.
240 R. I.’ POCOCK,
What is true of the Pedipalpi and Aranee is also true of
the Xiphosure. In Limulus there is a relatively wide sternal
area extending from the mouth to the posterior extremity of
the prosoma, and strengthened by a pair of strong meta-
sternal sclerites behind and a weakly chitinised promeso-
sternal plate in front.
Correlated with this primitive development of the sternal
area we should expect to find entosternites of a more archaic
type in the Pedipalpi, Aranez, and Xiphosure than in the
other orders of Arachnids. This expectation is justified by
the unmistakably metameric arrangement of the constituent
elements of the entosternite exhibited in these three orders.
On almost any theory of the origin of this plate, segmental
repetition of its parts must be postulated as a primitive
feature. It is obvious that this characteristic is manifested
in a far greater degree in the entosternite of the three orders
named than in that of the Scorpiones, Psendo-scorpiones, or
Opiliones.
A satisfactory settlement of the homologies of the several
parts of the various types of entosternites already described is
a matter of no little difficulty on account of the variation in
number of the apophyses that arise from them. In the
Aranee the dorsal apophyses range in number from four to
six. In the Phrynide there are six; in the Thelyphonide
five, with indications of an additional pair on the posterior
lobe of the entosternite.
In the Araneee the apophyses in question are referable to
two categories, those that are directed obliquely inwards
towards the central apodeme of the carapace, and those that
arise subvertically to be inserted serially along the area
between its middle line and lateral border. The latter
are invariably present, and invariably four in number on each
side ; the former are either absent or represented by one or
two pairs. In the two types of entosternite presented by the
Pedipalpi there is a single pair of apophyses directed
inwards and backwards, arising in each case close to the
base of the anterior cornua.
STUDIES ON THE ARACHNID ENTOSTERNITE. 241
As explained below (p. 249), there are good reasons for sup-
posing that the four apophyses of constant occurrence in the
Aranez represent the tergal elements of the tergo-sternal
muscles of the second, third, fourth, and fifth somites of the
prosoma, those of the sixth somite bemg undeveloped as an
accompaniment of the compression this somite has suffered.
Seeing how nearly related in many particulars the Aranez
are to the Pedipalpi, it can hardly be doubted that the four
apophyses in question in the Aranez are homologous to the
four that project laterally in the Thelyphonide, the fifth
pair which is suppressed in the Spiders being retained in a
rudimentary state by the Pedipalpi. Inthe case of Phrynus
the question is complicated by the presence of an additional
apophysis on each side, making a total of five. The posterior
of these might be held to represent the apophysis which is
missing in the Aranez and rudimentary in Thelyphonus;
but since the last prosomatic somite in Phrynus is compressed
in its sternal portion almost to the sarne extent as in the
Aranez, and since even in helyphonus, where this somite
retains its more primitive condition, the apophysis is scarcely
developed, it seems more probable that this apophysis is also
undeveloped in Phrynus, and that the fifth apophysis in
this genus actually corresponds to the fourth in the Spiders
and l'helyphonus. The likelihood of the truth of this view
is enhanced by the basal juxtaposition of the third and fourth
apophyses in Phrynus, which forcibly suggests their common
origin from a tendon representing the third apophysis of the
Spiders and Thely phonus secondarily subdivided into two.
The possibility of the subdivision of these apophyses is clearly
shown in the case of many Aranez, such as Ctenus and
Lycosa where they are deeply cleft, in Acanthodon where
those of the third and fourth pairs are double down to the reot,
and in Thelyphonus where the apophysis rising from the
upper side of the anterior cornu gives off a secondary branch
towards the middle line.
Cleavage of primary single tendons may account for the
presence of the one or two pairs of supplementary tendons
VoL. 46, PART 2.—-NEW SERIKS. Q
242 R, “T -POCOCK
which run obliquely inwards and backwards towards the
centre of the carapace. ‘The constancy in position of these
tendons in the Spiders suggests their homology throughout
the order, and their origin from the second or the second and
third of the larger normal apophyses. Only one such
apophysis is developed in Thelyphonus, and this arises a
little in front of the second marginal tendon, not behind it
as in the Spiders. Interesting, therefore, it is to observe that
in Phrynus—a genus in many respects intermediate between
Thelyphonus and the Spiders—the apparent homologue of
this tendon lies a little farther back than in Thelyphonus,a
little farther forwards than in the spiders. It is also noticeable
as a peculiarity in Phrynus that in the third tendon, which,
for reasons already given, may be regarded as reduplicated,
the extra branch takes the same direction as its twin. One
other small structural feature bears out the homologies here
suggested. This is the presence in many spiders of a trans-
verse thickening of the entosternite just in front of the fourth
marginal apophysis. The posterior bridge of the entosternite
in Thelyphonus has exactly the same relations. Similarly
the posterior margin of the pharyngeal notch in the Spiders
is generally thickened, so as to suggest its correspondence with
the anterior bridge in Thelyphonus. As for the ventral
apophyses, there cannot be much doubt that the pair passing
from the anterior cornua to the basal segments of the second
appendages in Phrynus and Thelyphonus are the homo-
logues of each other and of the anterior pair, which have the
same origin and are affixed to the sternum close to the base
of these appendages in the Mygalomorphe. So, too, must
the second apophysis attached to the sides of the pro-
sternum in Thelyphonus represent the second apophysis
attached to the sternum opposite the base of the third
appendages (first leg) in the Mygalomorphe. ‘Thus it
is possible to bring into complete accord the apophyses
developed on the dorsal and ventral sides of the entosternites
of the three orders here considered. |
Scarcity of material for comparison seems to have prevented
STUDIES ON THE ARACHNID ENTOSTERNITE, 243
Bernard’s recognition of the homologies existing between the
parts of this plate in different orders, homologies which are,
at all events, fairly obvious in the case of the Pedipalpi and
Araneze. ‘To quote his own words (4), “In the Spiders...
the entosternite consists of four pairs of apodemes which
meet in the centre, the second pair of which correspond with
the entosternite of Galeodes and Scorpio, whilst the first
pair is perhaps represented in Galeodes by the fibrous plate
above described. In Phrynus the entosternite is difficult to
unravel; it may perhaps represent only the first pair of
apodemes of the spiders with secondary attachment of dorso-
ventral muscles. In Thelyphonus we have a long
fenestrated entosternite which may correspond with that of
the Spiders ; the component apodemes not, however, meeting
in a point.”
I venture to think that the new facts and theories concerning
the entosternite of the Pedipalpi and Aranez put forward in
this essay will show that the homologies are by no means
so vague and difficult to unravelas the passage quoted would
lead one to suppose.
Schimkewitsch (10) terms the apophysis that rises from
the upper side of the anterior bar in Thelyphonus a dorso-
ventral outgrowth, and those numbered I#g., 2tg., 3tg., and 4tg.
in fig. 2, Pl. 13, as lateral outgrowths, homologising the latter
apparently with the lateral crest, and the former with one of the
dorsal apophyses in the Araneze. I cannot think this interpre-
tation correct in view of what obtains in the entosternite of
Phrynus. The Pedipalpi and the Aranez are so very closely
related that the conclusion as to the homology between the
apophyses of the entosternite appears to me inescapable.
The entosternite of Limulus forcibly recalls that of
Thelyphonus. The anterior bars correspond in the two.
Following these in L. polyphemus come the two long,
slender apophyses running out towards the bases of the third
and fourth appendages, and representing, I believe, the dorsal
portions of the tergo-sternal muscles of the corresponding
somites. A comparison between these and the second and
244, Rs Fs: POCOCK
third pairs of lateral processes seen in Thelyphonus and
Spiders is obvious, and is fortified by the evidence favouring
the view that in the spiders at least these processes corre-
spond with the second and third pairs of post-oral appendages.
It is only necessary to homologise the muscle-bearing stump
in Limulus with the fourth lateral process in Thelyphonus
and the Spiders, and the strong postero-lateral apophyses in
the entosternite of Limulus with the vestigial processes on the
posterior lobe of the entosternite in 'Thelyphonus to com-
plete the parallel. On the underside similarity between the
entosternite of Limulus and the Arachnomorphous Spiders is
to be found in the absence of ventral apophyses, with the
exception that in L. polyphemus asingle abbreviated pair is
present at the posterior end of the plate exactly as in some
of the Mygalomorphous Spiders, e.g. Kphebopus.
The entosternite of Scorpions has been so affected by the
compression of the prosoma that it isnot easy to bring it into
exact line with those of the orders hitherto considered where
a more primitive condition persists. ‘That the anterior bars
framing the pharyngeal notch are comparable to those of
Limulus, the Pedipalpi, and Aranez hardly admits of a doubt
(Lankester, 5, 6, and 7). Similarly the lateral tendinous
crest supporting the leg-muscles, and so well developed in the
Buthide and Vejovide, forcibly recalls that of the Aranee.
But the dorsal apophyses which form so conspicuous a feature
in the entosternite of the Pedipalpi and the Aranez remain
undeveloped. ‘They are represented by the two pairs of
dorso-ventral muscles which lhe in front of the diaphragm,
those of the third pair which perforate this partition being
usually regarded as the tergo-sternal muscles of the genital
or first somite of the mesosoma.
‘l'’o which three of the four or five pairs of dorsal apophyses
present in the Aranez and Pedipalpi do these two pairs in the
scorpion correspond? Probably, I think, to the fourth and
fifth pairs,—that is to say, to those that belong to the fifth and
sixth segments of the prosoma. ‘l'his homology is suggested
by their position at the posterior extremity of the prosoma,
STUDIES ON THE ARACHNID ENTOSTERNITE. 245
and by the fact that the somites in question have retained
their sternal elements, and are therefore, in that particular at
least, less modified than the somites in front, in which the
sterna have disappeared. If, then, we suppose that the
pharyngeal notch in the scorpions has been prolonged back-
wards almost as far as the position of the posterior transverse
bridge in Thelyphonus, or as the corresponding thickened
ridge in the Aranee; that the anterior three pairs of
apophyses have been suppressed upon the two cornua; that the
lateral tendinous crests represent the similar crests in the
Aranez and Pedipalpi, those of Palamneeus in particular
recalling those of Thely phonus,—it is evident that the ento-
sternites in the orders now under discussion are more alike in
reality than appears at first sight on the surface. Furthermore,
if we suppose that representatives of the muscles which radiate
from the margin of the posterior lobe of the entosternite in
Thelyphonus extended dorsally and laterally to meet
the walls and roof of the prosomatic space, leaving a channel
in the middle line for the transmission of the aorta and the
alimentary canal, it is possible to bring even the diaphragm
into harmony with parts already existing in the Thely-
phonus. In short, strip away the apophyses lettered Itg.,
2tg., dty., aud sa.’ in the figure of the entosternite of
Thelyphonus, remove the anterior bridge (a. b.), and fill up the
posterior foramen, and the homology of the remainder of
the plate with the supra-neural portion of the entosternite in
the Scorpions becomes obvious. ‘The annexation by the
entosternite of the tergo-sternal muscles of the genital somite
probably took place before the upgrowth of the posterior flap
shut off the cavity of the prosoma from that of the mesosoma ;
and this consideration points to the formation of the dia-
phragm after the suppression of the pregenital somite and
after the forward movement of the ventral area of the genital
somite, which brought its tergo-sternal muscle into contact
with the entosternite. |
The origin of the dorsal portion of the diaphragm in this
way from a pair of upgrowing muscular flaps embracing the
246 R. I. POCOCK.
alimentary canal and aorta is attested by the persistence of
the divisional line between its right and left halves. They
are merely united by a strip of connective tissue, perforated
above and below by the aortic and alimentary foramina,
which must be regarded as the sole remnants of the open
space which originally separated the right and left portions
of the flap from one another.
The neural ring in the Scorpions has its counterpart in
Actinopus, even to the development of an anterior median
process. It may have arisen in the same way by the fibrous
solidification and subsequent subneural fusion of the ventral
moiety of a pair of tergo-sternal muscles. If so, the view
that only one such pair of muscles is involved in its con-
struction, and that that pair belonged to the sixth somite of
the prosoma, is suggested by the absence of lateral perfora-
tions in the sides of the neural arch for the exit of nerves to
the appendages, and by the situation of the ring behind the
point whence the nerves to the appendages of the sixth pair
diverge. Equally well, however, may the sides of the canal
have arisen from the downward growth of the lateral portion
of the underside of the posterior portion of the entosternite.
Lankester (6) suggests that the lateral process marked er.
in the figure of the entosternite of Palamneeus (Pl. 14,
fig. 20) corresponds to the antero-lateral processes of the
entosternite in Limulus. More likely, I think, is it that this
process is the thickened and solidified representative of the
posterior part of the crest developed (Pl. 14, figs. 21, 24) im
Centruroides and L[urus, and finds its homologue in the
similar crests in Thelyphonus, and not in the dorsal
apophyses, to which I believe the two processes in Limulus
are comparable. Nor can I agree with the opinion of
Schimkewitsch (10), that the lateral processes he finds
on the entosternite of the Scorpion named Androctonus
bicolor (see p. 231) are the homologues of the processes I
have numbered I#g., 2tg., and 3tg. in Thelyphonus.
STUDIES ON THE ARACHNID ENTOSTERNITE, 247
Ill. Taeorizs or THE ORIGIN OF THE ENTOSTERNITE.
As long ago as 1881 Lankester (5), when describing the
entosternite of Limulus, said it may be regarded as an en-
largement and interlacing of the respective tendons of the
muscles which are attached to it. By implication a similar
origin was predicated of the entosternites of Scorpions and
Spiders. This opinion was accepted by Schimkewitsch (9,
10) in the case of the entosternite of Scorpions, Spiders, and
other air-breathing Arachnids, and for that of Limulus by
Bernard (3), who, however, regarded it solely as a derivative
of the ventral longitudinal muscle-bands. Bernard’s views as
to the origin of the entosternite in the terrestrial Arachnids,
which he considers to be in no way related to Limulus and
its extinct allies, will be referred to later on.
It appears to me that the evidence in favour of Lankester’s
view of the mode of production of this plate in both groups
of Arachnids is overwhelming; a comparative study of the
entosternites in this class precludes, to my mind, any other
hypothesis as to their source.
What muscles, then, have taken the largest share in their
formation ?
There is reason to believe that the prosoma was originally
supplied with five pairs of tergo-sternal (dorso-ventral)
muscles serially repeating those of the opisthosoma, and
passing vertically from the under surface of the carapace to
be inserted ventrally on the sternum close to the points of
articulation of the post-oral appendages. ‘There were also a
dorsal and a ventral pair of longitudinal muscles traversing
the prosoma from end to end (see Lankester, 7).1_ With the
1 «The simple musculature in the ancestor consisted of—(1) a pair of dorsal
longitudinal muscles passing from tergite to tergite of each successive seg-
ment; (2) a similar series of paired longitudinal ventral muscles ; (3) a pair
of dorso-ventral muscles passing from tergite to sternite in each segment ; (4)
a set of muscles moving the coxa of each limb in its socket. The confluence
of the prostomium and the six anterior tergites to form a prosomatic carapace,
as well as the specialisation of the six pairs of appendages of the prosoma,
was common to the ancestors of both Limulus and Scorpio. This modi-
248 R. I. POCOCK.
welding together of the external skeletal elements to form a
compact inexpansible whole, the function of these muscles as
dilators and contractors of the prosoma would cease, leaving
them available for other purposes if required.
The fusion of tergites to form a carapace, accompanied no
doubt by the partial or complete cessation of function of the
longitudinal and vertical muscles, took place, as may be seen, in
the Trilobites, before the five pairs of post-oral appendages of
the prosoma were set apart as the exclusive organs of locomo-
tion and prehension. ‘This specialisation, demanding an in-
crease in the size and strength of the limbs in question, would °
be advantageously accompanied by an increase in the area for
the attachment of the enlarged and subdivided muscles that
control them. This area might be supplied, in the first in-
stance, by the fibrous solidification of the central portion of
the tergo-sternal muscles, aided perhaps by that of the
adjacent portion of a longitudinal muscle on each side pass-
ing from the anterior to the posterior extremity of the
prosoma above the nerves radiating to the appendages,
Does the structure of the most primitive types of ento-
sternite known to us furnish justification for the opinion that
they have originated in the manner here suggested? A
good deal may be said, I think, in favour of an affirmative
answer to this question.
The points of attachment of the tergo-sternal muscles of
the opisthosoma are generally apparent enough externally,
both on its dorsal and ventral walls. On the prosoma they
are usually much less apparent. In the Mygalomorphous
spiders, however, the sternum is typically marked with four
pairs of > the so-called “ sigilla,” one on each side
close to the proximal end of the coxa of the second, third,
fourth, and fifth appendages (i. e. the palpi and first three
pairs of legs). ‘he position and nature of these scars at
‘¢ scars,
fication of form and specialisation of body regions entailed a corresponding
modification of the muscular system. ‘The dorsal and ventral longitudinal
muscles of the prosoma were suppressed. ‘lhe muscles of the prosomatic
limbs acquired large size and became subdivided.”
STUDIES ON THE ARACHNID ENTOSTERNITE. 249
once suggest their correspondence with the similarly placed
scars upon the sterna of the opisthosoma in, e.g., Phrynus,
which admittedly indicate the ventral attachments of the
tergo-sternal muscles. Dissection, however, shows that the
scars on the sternum are the points of insertion, not of
muscles, but of the tendinous processes which project down-
wards from the lower surface of the entosternite. These
tendinous processes are, I believe, the solidified
ventral moieties of the primitive prosomatic tergo-
sternal muscles. Apart from other considerations, their
muscular origin is attested by their representation in the
Arachnomorphe (e.g. Ctenus) by muscles passing from
the lower surface of the entosternite and affixed by a fibrous
strand to corresponding points on the sternum.
The dorsal moieties of these same muscles are represented,
I think, by the paired tendinous apophyses springing from
the upper side of the entosternite and passing into muscular
fibres which fasten them to the lower side of the carapace.
There is never a sternal scar near the base of the sixth append-
age in the Mygalomorphe, and no apophyses, either dorsal
or ventral, of any appreciable length, corresponding to
this limb, on the entosternite. Short chitinous ridges are
observable, however, ou this plate in the appropriate
positions. ‘These considerations suggest the suppression of
the fifth pair of apophyses as a concomitant, no doubt, of the
constriction as the last somite of the prosoma.
The acceptance of this view of the nature of the dorsal and
ventral processes of the entosternite carries the conclusion
that a large part of this plate in the Aranez results from the
tendinous solidification of five pairs of tergo-sternal muscles.
Kvidence that a share in the formation of the plate has
been contributed by at least one pair of longitudinal muscles
is supplied by the following facts. Apart from the appen-
dicular muscles, which originally took a transverse direction,
both the anterior and posterior extremities of the ento-
sternite afford support to muscles; those from the anterior
bars passing forwards to the front wall of the prosoma,
950 R, tT. POCOOK.
those from the posterior extremity running backwards
into the opisthosoma in continuity with the longitudinal
muscles of this region. ‘This is well shown in Limulus
(Benham, 2); in EHpeira by Schimkewitsch, and in the
specimen of Atypus figured in Pl. 14, fig. 17. Again, in the
Thelyphonide, the anterior two thirds of the entosternite,
apart from the dorso-lateral apophyses, consist of a pair
of stout parallel longitudinal bars, united by an anterior and
a posterior transverse bridge, the posterior lobe alone con-
sisting of an undivided subcircular plate.
‘he solidification of these muscles was no doubt brought ~
about to afford a firm support for the muscles of the proso-
matic appendages. ‘l’o resist the action of these muscles,
which would tend to draw the bars asunder, tendinous bridges
were developed across the middle line serving to hold the
entire structure in place. As a later development in the
Aranee and the Amplypygi, the intervals between the bridges
were filled in and the projecting marginal angular crests so
characteristic of the entosternite of the Aranez were formed to
increase the attachment-area of the leg-muscles. Latent
potentiality for transverse fusion between the originally
separated right and left halves of the entosternite may be
inferred from the fusion of this nature that has actually
taken place between the ventral apophyses in Actinopus.
It is possible that the longitudinal muscles have not
played so important a part in the formation of the ento-
sternite as here suggested. The entosternite may be almost
equally well derived’ on theoretical grounds from dorso-
ventral and crural muscles alone, the anterior bars forming
the pharyngeal notch resulting from the fusion of the tendons
of the dorso-ventral muscle of the second somite with those of
the appendages of the second and third somites, and the longi-
tudinal direction of the bars being assignable to the forward
movement of the second appendage pulling the tendons in a
semicircle round the pharynx and brain, the notch thus
formed becoming deeper and deeper to accommodate itself
to the concomitant backward movement of these organs.
STUDIES ON THK ARACHNID ENTOSTERNITE. 251
The opinion put forward by Lankester in 1881 (5) that the
entosternite was formed by the enlargement and interlacing
of muscular tendons was modified in 1885 (7) by the further
suggestion that the prosomatic and smaller posterior (mesoso-
matic) entosternites are merely the original subepidermic
connective tissue of the sternal surface of the segments in
which they occur, which has become thickened and carti-
laginoid, and, in the case of the prosoma, has been at the
same time floated off, as it were, from the sternal surface,
taking up a position deeper, that is to say nearer the
axis of the animal than that which it originally occupied.
“And, again, in both Limulus and Scorpio the _ proso-
matic entosternite or plastron represents the mid-sternal
area of several segments fused, probably in both cases of
all the prosomatic somites, though possibly in Scorpio the
first segment is not included.” ‘The position of the ento-
sternite above the nerve-cord is explained on the hypothesis
that the detachment of the mass of connective tissue from
the sternal surface occurred at a period when the nerve-cords
were still quite lateral in position, their union taking place
after the flotation.
This hypothesis assigns an immense antiquity to the
entosternite, an antiquity dating back probably to the
Trilobitic stage of Arachnid phylogeny, possibly earlier still.
But supposing that the entosternite owes its origin to the
detachment of subneural fibrous thickenings of connective
tissue, a later phylogenetic stage can be ascribed to it by
assuming its derivation from paired thickenings which floated
off on each side of the united nerve-cords, and subsequently
fused with one another both transversely and longitudinally
to form a gate-like framework beneath the digestive tract.
May be the fenestration of the entosternite of Thelyphonus
is a survival of this early stage. But whether the entoster-
nite had its origin in subneural thickenings of this nature,
and, if so, the manner and purpose of their assumption of
their present position, or whether it was derived from the
fibrous solidification of muscular and connective tissue in the
252 R, 1.) POCOCK:
mid-region of the prosoma, as I am inclined to believe, are
questions which must for the present be left unsettled. The
evidence we possess that at least the dorsal and ventral
processes of the entosternite in the spiders are modified
muscular tendons seems to make it unnecessary to look else-
where for the source of the formation of the entire plate.
‘his conception of the origin of the entosternite from
muscular and connective tissue differs entirely from that held
by Bernard (8, 4), who would derive this plate in all
terrestrial Arachnids from integumental apodemes and
segmental constrictions. It may be inferred from, what he
says about the entosternite of Mygale that he regards its
four pairs of dorsal and ventral processes as the remains
of integumental infoldings marking the line of union of
the originally separated tergal and sternal elements of the
prosoma.' He adds, ‘The shape of the whole fused mass
has been, no doubt, much altered by the action of muscles,
but its essential nature as a fusion of metamerically recurrent
apodemes cannot be mistaken” (8, p. 20). In his paper on the
morphology of the Galeodidee (4, p. 327) he says that in the
Pedipalpi and Araneee ‘‘four pairs of dorso-ventral muscles
have been retained, more or less modified, as the dorsal
attachments of the entosternite, and are now largely fibrous;
they suspend the entosternite and separate the alimentary
diverticula in the typical manner.’ Hence may be inferred
the admission that part at all events of the dorsal processes
ot the entosternite have been derived from dorso-ventral
muscles. If part, why not the whole of the dorsal process ?
And if the dorsal process represents the part of the muscle
above the eutosternite, what reason is there for refusing to
! Bernard states that the original distinctness of the terga of the carapace
in the Arancee is shown by the furrows on its dorsal surface. These furrows
are in reality the external indications of the radial arrangement of the great
dorsal appendicular muscles, and mark the lines of attachment of the muscles
rising dorsally between them from the entosternite. If the grooves indicated
the union of tergal plates, such plates should be more clearly defined in the
embryo, but so far as | am aware the carapace of spiders at no period of its
development shows division into separated tergal plates,
STUDIES ON THE ARACHNID ENTOSTERNITE. 253
regard the ventral processes as the representatives of the
ventral moieties of these same muscles ?
Bernard’s hypothesis involves the assumption of a degree
of dislocation and rearrangement of muscles and integu-
mental apophyses for which it is difficult to find justification.
I can discover no evidence that the sternal scars of the
Mygalomorphe and the ventral processes of the entosternite
which rise from them are the remains of integumental dis-
sepiments. If this were the case we should expect to find an
intimate unseverable union between the sternum and the pro-
cesses in question. No such union exists. ‘lhe expanded ex-
tremities of the processes may be readily detached, the extent
of their union with the sternum being quite compatible with
the theory of their muscular origin, but hardly reconcil-
able with that of their derivation from ectodermic ingrowths.
The basis of Bernard’s hypothesis is to be found, firstly,
in the structure and relations of the so-called entosternite of
the Solifugee, which is shown by its histology and union
with the integument to be an ectodermic entapophysis ;
secondly, in the assumption that this skeletal piece is the
morphological equivalent of the entosternites of other
Arachnids; thirdly, in the conception that the Solifuge
retain a more archaic type of prosoma than that of the other
orders of this class.
Assuming the truth of the propositions here stated or
implied, the conclusion Bernard draws as to the ectodermic
origin of the entosternite in the Spiders, ete., necessarily
follows. But from what is known of the structure and
development of the entosternite in the two orders there is
little doubt that the first proposition is true, and that the
second is untrue. As for the third, it is a matter of opinion
depending upon the standpoint from which the morphology
of the Arachnida is regarded.
The available evidence is, in my opinion, decidedly in
favour of the view that the “entosternite”’ of the Solifuge
must be regarded as a post-oral entosclerite comparable to
the crescentic pre-oral entosclerite of the Scorpions. But
254 R. I. POCOCK.
if there are any who see in it the homologue of the
Scorpion’s entosternite, they will remember that chitin has
been shown (Lankester, p. 6) to be present in the ento-
sternites of Scorpio, Mygale, and Limulus, and will realise
the possibility of the formation of the rigid and horny
Galeodean entosternite by increased development of its
chitin, followed or accompanied by fusion with the exo-
skeleton of the second post-oral somite.
Briefly, then, of the three suppositions that may be enter-
tained with regard to the “ entosternite” of the Solifuge,
each points to its being a specialised, not a primitive ~
structure. (1) If it is an entosclerite, as Bernard and
Schimkewitsch maintain, it is not the homologue of the
entosternite of other Arachnids, which is shown by its
morphology and development to be an entochondrite, pro-
duced by the condensation of connective tissue and the fusion
of muscular fibres and tendons. In this case it has fune-
tionally replaced the true entosternite, and is a_ recent
specialisation, not a primitive structure. (2) If it is an
endochondrite and the homologue of the entosternite of other
Arachnids, its structural similarity to, and fusion with, the
exoskeleton also attest high specialisation. (3) If it has
resulted from the union of the true entosternite with a pair
of exoskeletal ingrowths—if, say, the expanded portion
supporting the alimentary canal corresponds with the true
entosternite, and the pillars diverging therefrom to the exo-
skeletal elements,—the absence of all trace of union between
the two, the complete continuity of their tissues, again
indicate great specialisation.
The evidence in favour of the truth of the first supposition
is almost strong enough to enforce its unquestioned accept-
ance. But whichever of the three prove consonant with fact
and be ultimately adopted, the Solifugee must be regarded
as the most specialised type of Arachnid known, so far as the
organ under discussion is concerned—a conclusion which is
perfectly in accord with many, nay most, of the structural
features of this order.
STUDIES ON THE ARACHNID ENTOSTERNITE, 255
The one hypothesis of all others which, in my opinion,
has least in its favour is that in the Solifuge we find a
primitive type of prosoma and a primitive type of entoster-
nite clearly attesting the exoskeletal origin of this plate
in all orders of Arachnida; and the conclusions deduced
from these disputable premisses that the true entosternites
have been derived from chitinous integumental apodemes is
contradicted by their structure in the adult and their meso-
blastic origin in the embryo.
Lastly, according to Bernard (8), the ‘‘diaphragm’”’ of
Scorpio, “like that of Galeodes, is the homologue of the
great constriction between the sixth and seventh segments
forming the ‘waist’ of other Arachnids,. . . . a diaphragm or
waist being typical of Arachnids.” It is not at all clear how
a partition like the Scorpion’s diaphragm, composed of mus-
cular and connective tissue and without exoskeletal elements,
can be the homologue of an exoskeletal constriction. Ana-
logous structures, structures with the same physiological
significance, they no doubt are; but homologous, surely
not.
According to Bernard’s theory of waist formation, I pre-
sume the condition initiated in Thelyphonus and cul-
minating in the Spiders, a condition which results from the
constriction and reduction of the pregenital somite, preceded
the condition now met with in the Scorpions and Solifuge.
In that case the “diaphragm” in these two orders must
represent the pregenital somite, insunk and overgrown, plus
the dorsal and lateral arthrodial membranes which connected
this somite withthe prosoma in front and the mesosoma behind.
This double partition then became united into one, the dorsal
area of the pregenital somite disappeared, setting free the
aorta and the alimentary tract, which were previously confined
with the nerve-cord in anarrow canal, and enabling themto rise
and take up respectively their original positions in the dorsal
and central regions of the body-cavity, cleaving the partition
as they rose. Only by entertaining some such conception as
this is it possible to hold that the ‘‘ waist” of the Spiders and
256 R. I. POCOCK.
Pedipalpi is the homologue of the “diaphragm” in the
Scorpiones and Solifugee.
This theory of the formation of the diaphragm seems to me
scarcely more plausible if the pregenital somite, which was
not recognised as such when Bernard wrote, is left out of
consideration ;! and the following quotation shows that I have
given no exaggerated rendering of lis hypothesis. He says (4),
‘Between the sixth and seventh sezments .. . there isin the
Galeodide .. . a strong intersegmental constriction. Inter-
nally this constriction has given rise to a very striking
diaphragm. It forms a very complete wall between the
interior of the cephalothorax and that of the abdomen, and
is pierced by the dorsal vessel, the alimentary canal, the
nerve-cords, and the tracheze. Close examination shows that
the diaphragm is due to a strong indrawine of the interseg-
mental membrane between the above-mentioned segments, so
that it is composed partly of a chitinous infolding and partly
of muscle-bands. It is clear thatif the opposite two internal
faces of such a deep segmental constriction fuse together, they
form a diaphragm ; if they remain unfused they form a waist.
In the Galeodidz we seem to have an unspecialised arrange-
ment, the intersegmental infolding being fused only in its
deeper parts, forming the diaphragm, while the outer parts
of the fold remain open, making an approach to a waist.”
Such an infolding, in its unspecialised state, must have
disturbed the position of the dorsal blood-vessel, forcing it
down towards the central axis of the body on to the alimen-
tary canal; but, as a matter of fact, the blood-vessel and
alimentary canal show no trace of any disturbance of their
primitive positions, the former perforating the diaphragm
high up beneath the dorsal integument, the latter traversing
its centre, while below, in line, is seen the canal for the nerve-
1 Bernard has pointed out to me that his figure of the section of the
“waist” of a Spider published on pl. xxxiii, fig. 6, of his paper ‘‘ On the
Morphology of the Galeodide,” shows the presence of a pair of dorso-
ventral muscles, and thus confirms the view that the waist is a genuine
somite,
STUDIES ON THE ARACHNID ENTOSTERNITE. 257
cord, to say nothing of the large tracheal apertures on each
side. Hence if the diaphragm originated from an integu-
mental infolding it has secondarily encircled the three median
organs above mentioned, and isa highly specialised structure.
But, as a matter of fact, in the “ diaphragm”’ of Galeodes
I can find no evidence of such a derivation. It appears to
be formed of muscular and connective tissue like that of the
Scorpions, and to have had an internal origin quite apart
from the integument. The infolding of the integument
Bernard speaks of appears to be quite superficial, and to
occur only at the periphery of the diaphragm.
Whether this diaphragm has been developed independently
of the diaphragm of Scorpions, to which it is similar in its
structure and position, or whether the two are to be regarded
as a heritage from a common ancestor, are matters of quite
another kind. The absence of such an organ in the Pedi-
palpi, Aranez, Pseudo-scorpiones, Opiliones, and Acari,
coupled with the wide structural divergences between the
Scorpions and Solifuge, points to the independence of the
origin of the diaphragm in these two orders in response to
similar physiological needs.
Notr.—I have elsewhere suggested (see ‘ Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist.,’ 1893) that the value of the structural characters of the
orders of terrestrial Arachnida may be expressed by grouping
them into four divisions of superordinal rank: the first to
contain the Scorpions; the second the Pedipalpi and the
Aranee; the third the Solifugz; the fourth the Pseudo-
scorpiones, Opiliones, and Acari. A study of the entosternites
confirms this classification in a remarkable and unexpected
degree, especially as regards the isolation of the Scorpiones
and Solifugee, and the association of the Aranez with the
Pedipalpi.
BIBLIOGRAPHY.
1. Beck, HE. J.—‘‘ Description of the Muscular and Endoskeletal Systems of
Scorpio,” ‘ Trans. Zool. Soc. London,’ xi, 1885.
voL. 46, PART 2.—NEW SERIES. R
258 R. 2. POCOCK:
2. Bennam, W. B.— Description of the Muscular and Endoskeletal Systems
of Limulus,” ‘ Trans. Zool. Soc. London,’ xi, 1885.
3. Bernard, H. M.—“‘The Endosternite of Scorpio, ete.,’ ‘Aun. Mag.
Nat. Hist.,’ xii, p. 18, ete., 1894.
4. Bernarp, H. Mi—* The Comparative Morphology of the Galeodide,”
‘Trans. Linn. Soe. Zool.,’ vi, 1896.
5. LANKESTER, EH. R.—*Limulusin Arachnid,” ‘ Quart. Journ. Micro. Soe.,’
xxt, 18ST.
6. Lankester, EK. R.—‘‘On the Skeletotrophic Tissues, ete., of Limulus,
Scorpio, and Mygale,” ‘ Quart. Journ. Micro. Soe.,’ xxiv, 1884.
7. Lanxester, HK. R.—‘‘ Comparison of the Muscular and Endoskeletal
Systems of Limulus and Scorpio,” ‘Trans. Zool. Soc. London,’ xi, —
1885.
8. Laurtt, Mi—“On the Morphology of the Pedipalpi,” ‘Journ. Linn.
Soc. Zool.,’ xxiv, 1894.
9. ScuimKewiTscn, W.—‘“ Sur la Structure . . . . del’Endosternite, ete.,”
‘Zool. Anz.,’ 1893.
10. ScuimKewitscn, W.—“ Ueber Bau und Entwicklung des Entosternites
der Arachniden,” ‘ Zool. Jahrb. Anat.,’ viii, 1894.
11. Wasmann, —.—‘‘ Anatomie der Spinnen,” ‘ Abh. Ver. Hamburg,’ 1846.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES 13 & 14,
Illustrating Mr. Pocock’s paper, ‘ Studies on the Arachnid
Entosternite.”
With the exception of Fig. 1 the figures have been drawn by the author
from entosternites dissected and preserved with others, not here figured, in
the Natural History Museum, where they are available for examination. In
the figures representing the dorsal and ventral views of the entosternite the
anterior extremity is uppermost ; in those showing the lateral surface the
anterior extremity lies to the right. In the case of the so-called entosternite
of the Solifuge, however, the distal or anterior extremity is directed down-
wards.
LetTrerInc COMMON TO MOST OF THE FIGURES, AND INDICATING
SUGGESTED HOMOLOGIES.
A.P. Anterior process or cornu of right side forming part of the framework
of the pharyngeal notch (PA. N.). 1tg., 2¢g., 3tg., 4tg., 54g. Dorsal processes
STUDIES ON THE ARACHNID ENTOSTERNITE. 259
or muscles representing the dorsal moieties of the tergo-sternai muscles of the
somites bearing the first, second, third, fourth, and fifth post-oral appendages,
ls¢., Qst., 3s¢., 4s¢. Ventral processes representing the ventral moieties of the
same muscles. (Cr. Lateral crest developed mainly to support some of the
muscles of the appendages.
PLATE 13.
Fic. 1.—Dorsal view of entosternite of the American Limulus (X. poly-
phemus), showing the two pairs of long slender antero-lateral processes
(2¢g. and 3¢g.), the stunted muscle-bearing process (4/7.), and the large pos-
tero-lateral process (5¢g.). (After Lankester.)
Fic. 2.—Dorsal view of the entosternite of a Thelyphonid (Mastigo-
proctus giganteus) showing the dorsal processes (1/g. to 5¢y.), which are
considered to represent the dorsal moieties of the tergo-sternal muscles of
the second to the sixth somites of the prosoma; sa.', supernumerary or addi-
tional apophysis, which has perhaps arisen from the fission of the apophysis
numbered 2¢g.; a.4., anterior bridge, and p. 4., posterior bridge, bounding
the large foramen in front and behind; the smaller foramen is shown behind
the posterior bridge; /.4., lateral bar, showing perhaps the origin of this
portion of the entosternite from a great longitudinal muscle, or from paired
subepidermal ventral entochondrites ; P. F., posterior plate, with frayed edge
indicating the attachment of radiating muscles, the suggested homologue of
the dorsal portion of the “diaphragm ” in the Scorpions (see Pl. 14, figs. 21,
22); er., lateral crest.
Fie. 3.—Dorsal view of the entosternite of a Phrynid (Damon John-
stoni), showing the duplication of the apophyses numbered l¢g.and 3/g.; er.,
lateral crest, to which leg-muscles are attached; Is¢., anterior ventral
apophysis, the suggested representative of the sternal moiety of the tergo-
sternal muscle of the second segment of the prosoma.
Fic. 4.— Dorsal view of entosternite of one of the Mygalomorphe (Ephe-
bopus murinus), with same lettering as in the last figure, showing the
absence of supernumerary apophyses and the presence of a thickened ridge
(p. b.), the suggested homologue of the posterior bridge in the entosternite of
Thelyphonus.
Fie. 5.—Dorsal view of the entosternite of Stasimopus Schénlandi, a
Mygalomorphous spider of the family Ctenizide, showing the presence of two
supernumerary apophyses (sa. and sa.”) and the fusion of the anterior ventral
apophyses (1s¢.) to form a neural collar.
Fic. 6.—Dorsal view of entosternite of Actinopus Wallacei, a Mygalo-
morphous spider of the family Actinopodide, showing the fusion of the four
ventral apophyses to form a subneural arch with perforated walls for the exit
260 R. I. POCOCK.
of the appendicular nerves ; 1s¢., anterior ventral apophysis; m., median pro-
cess from the floor of the subneural arch.
Fie. 7.—Dorsal view of entosternite of a young Liphistius, sp. ?, show-
ing the thick dorsal apophyses (lég. to 4¢g.), the two pairs of supernumerary
apophyses (sa.! and sa.?), and the absence of anterior ventral apophyses.
Fic. 8.—Dorsal view of the entosternite of Nephila femoralis, an
Arachnomorphous spider of the family Argiopide, with the single pair of
supernumerary apophyses (sa.'), and without anterior ventral apophyses, as in
Liphistius.
Fie. 9.—Lateral view of entosternite of a Thelyphonid (Mastigoproctus
giganteus) Is¢. and 2s¢., first and second ventral apophyses ; other lettering —
as in Fig, 2.
Fic. 10.—Ventral view of entosternite of Pachylomerus nidulans, a
Mygalomorphous spider of the family Ctenizide, showing the persistence of
the first (1s¢.) and fourth (4s¢.) ventral apophyses, and the disappearance of
the second and third.
Fie. 11.—Lateral view of the same, showing the four dorsal apophyses
(1ég. to 4¢g.) ; p. m., posterior median crest.
Fic. 12.—Lateral view of entosternite of Actinopus Wallacei (see
Fig. 6), showing the four dorsal (lég. to 4¢y.) and four ventral (1s¢. to
4st.) apophyses, the latter meeting in the middle line beneath the nervous
mass, leaving lateral spaces for the exit of nerves; m., median process from
subneural arch.
Fic. 13.—Ventral view of entosternite of Ephebopus murinus (see
Fig. 4), showing the persistence of the four ventral apophyses (1s¢. to 4s¢.),
with indications of the fifth (5s¢.).
PLATE 14.
Fie. 14.—Lateral view of the entosternite of Ephebopus murinus,
showing the four dorsal (1ég. to 447.) and the four sternal (1s¢. to 4s¢.) apo-
physes. This figure clearly indicates the correspondence between the dorsal
and ventral apophyses, which suggests their origin from tergo-sternal muscles
(see Pl. 18, figs. 4 and 13).
Fic. 15.—Ventral view of entosternite of Acanthodon opifex, a
Mygalomorphous spider of the sub-family Idiopine, showing the persistence
of the first, second, and third pairs of apoplhiyses (1s¢. to 3s¢.), those of the
fourth pair (4s¢.) being rudimentary.
Fic. 16.—Lateral view of the same, showing the duplication of the third
and fourth dorsal apophyses, and the absence of the fourth ventral apophysis.
Fic. 17.—Mygalomorphous spider of the genus Atypus, dissected from the
STUDILUS ON THE ARACHNID ENTOSTERNITE. 261
dorsal side with entosternite in situ to show the muscles radiating to the
post-oral appendages II to VI, the anterior longitudinal muscles which pass
from an entosclerite above the rostrum to the extremities of the anterior
cornua, and the longitudinal muscles which pass backward into the pregenital
somite.
Fie. 18.—Lateral view of entosternite of the same, with the four dorsal (1ég.
to 4¢g.) and four ventral (1s¢. to 4s¢.) apophyses, and the tendon running
forwards from the first ventral apophysis to the prosternum.
Fie. 19.—Ventral view of the same, showing the arrangement of the four
ventral apophyses in a circle round the pharyngeal notch.
¥1e.20.—Entosternite of Palamnaeus Thorelli, withthe posterior flap or
diaphragm removed, showing the fibro-muscular attachment of the anterior
cornu to the coxa (cr.) of the fourth appendage ; cr., lateral processes repre-
senting the muscle-bearing crest seen in Thelyphonus; 4é¢g., 5¢y., anterior
and posterior pair of dorso-ventral muscles, the suggested homologues of the
apophyses numbered 4¢g. and 5/7. in the entosternite of Thelyphonus
(PI. 13, fig. 2), and representing in all probability the tergo-sternal muscles of
the fifth and sixth somites of the prosoma; V.P., median process of subneural
arch dividing into a pair of apophyses; Da., median dorsal portion of ‘ body ”
of entosternite forming the roof of the neural canal.
Fic. 21.—Entosternite of one of the Vejovide (Lurus dufoureius), with
posterior flap (P. #.) or diaphragm attached, to show its correspondence in
origin with the lateral crest (Cr.), and its median perforations for the gut (4/.C.)
and aorta (doc.), between which lies the channel for the lodgment of the aorta,
formed by the dorso-ventral muscle of the second pair (5¢7.) and a strip of
conuective tissue, which binds the right and left portions of the diaphragm
together.
Fic. 22.—Entosternite of Bothriurus bonariensis, showing the re-
duction of the median dorsal portion of the “‘ body,” forming the roof of the
neural canal, to a narrow transverse bar (Da.).
Fic. 23.—Anterior view of entosternite of the same, showing the neural
canal (1. C.), dorsal arch (Da.), and subneural arch (Sa.).
Fic. 24.—Entosternite of Centruroides margaritatus, with most of the
diaphragm removed, showing the lateral compression of the “ body ” or dorsal
arch (Da.) of the neural canal, the juxtaposition of the second pair of dorso-
ventral muscles (5¢g.), and the tips of the apophyses of the median process
of the subneural arch (V.P.).
Fie, 25.—Entosternite of the same, with its dorsal portion removed to show
the cut ends of the lateral walls (La.) of the neural canal, the floor (Sa.) of
the latter and the median process terminating in two expanded fan-shaped
apophyses (V.P.).
Fic. 26.—The so-called entosternite of Solpuga sagittaria, cleaned
262 R. I. POCOCK.
with caustic potash, to show the continuity of its supporting chitinous strands
with those of the prosternal plate (prs.), which is wedged in between the
coxe of the appendages of the third pair and its attachment to the sternal
membrane (m.), between the third and fourth somites of the prosoma; JZs., left
bar of the entosternite, which expands at the free extremity to form with its
fellow of the opposite side a supporting channel (4/.) for the alimentary canal.
Vie. 27.—Lower extremity of the two pillars of the entosternite of
Galeodes arabs, to show this articulation (4.) with the prosternal plate
(prs.), its union with the sternal membrane (m.); coa., coxa of appendage of
third pair.
~PIBRARY
te
Tai tee
OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS
5)
i a» =
r i
b.
ne ie
eee
RL Pocock del
Lh
LEMS
.
OF
+i
Cl
*
m
7 ie
o i!
9 4
a
tht London.
Huth,
»
| LaMA mys
LIBRARY
‘OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS
=
We 60) ini |
yes
Vol LONS PY t.
Cl,
Dat Foun Mars
>
+s ae
ee
Indany
en Ee
OF THE.
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS
THE MORPHOLOGY OF TH CHEILOSTOMATA. 263
On the Morphology of the Cheilostomata.
By
Sidney F. Harmer, Sc.D., F.R.S.,
Fellow of King’s College, Cambridge ; Superintendent of the University
Museum of Zoology.
With Plates 15—18.
THE observations on which the present paper is based were
commenced with the examination of a Flustra-like Cheilo-
stome, found at Port Jackson by Mr. T. Whitelegge, who
sent it to me for description, believing it to belong to a new
genus. Although exhibiting several remarkable features, I
think it may be placed in Huthyris, Hincks, and I propose
for it the name HK. clathrata, in allusion to the bars which
support its “frontal wall.’ The species possesses a large
“‘compensation-sac,’ a name which is due to Jullien
(1888, 1), although the structure had to some extent been
described by Busk and Waters. Jullien’s results have usually
been discredited by later writers. The study of a number
of Cheilostomatous genera has, however, not only led
me to confirm the accuracy of Jullien’s statements, but
has resulted in various conclusions which I believe to be of
importance for the proper understanding of the Cheilostomata.
A summary of my principal results has been communicated
to the Cambridge Philosophical Society (1901).
The present paper is divided into the following parts :
I. Methods employed.
II. List of the species specially studied.
264 SIDNEY F. HARMER.
III. Description of Huthyris clathrata, n. sp., of
KH. obtecta, Hincks, and of Huthyroides
episcopalis, n. gen.
IV. The morphology of the compensation-sac and of
the operculum.
A. Flustrina.
B. Cribrilinide.
c. Lepralioid genera.
D. Microporelloid genera.
E. Microporoid genera.
V. The primary zocecium or ancestrula.
VI. Classification of the Cheilostomata.
VII. Summary.
VIII. Literature.
IX. Explanation of Plates.
I. MerHoDS EMPLOYED.
‘The choice of species for investigation has been primarily
dependent on the material available for the purpose in the
collection of the University Museum of Zoology at Cambridge.
Spirit material has almost exclusively been used, and I have
in the main selected species in which the calcareous matter
was not developed to so great an extent as to destroy the
transparency of the object. The growing edges of healthy
colonies have furnished the most satisfactory results. The
material was in almost all cases stained, without decalcifica-
tion, in diluted borax carmine for a prolonged period (five to
seven days, or even more). After being placed in absolute
alcohol containing picric acid, the fragments were mounted
whole in Canada balsam.
All my more recent preparations have been mounted by a
method to which my attention was called by Mr. H. D.
Geldart, of Norwich. This consists in transferring the speci-
mens directly from absolute alcohol to a solution of dried
Canada balsam in absolute alcohol. In preparing this solu-
tion, the milky mixture which is at first produced becomes a
THE MORPHOLOGY OF 'T'HH CHEILOSTOMATA. 265
complete solution in the course of a few days, particularly if
the bottle be left on the top of a water-bath at about 60° C.
The cloudiness which appears on first mounting a preparation
soon disappears from a slide left on the water-bath. ‘T'his
method cannot be too strongly recommended for certain
Polyzoa, particularly for the more delicate Ctenostome
genera, which are distorted almost beyond recognition by
the use of oil of cloves.
In the case of some of the more densely calcified species I
have found great advantages in the use of the method
recommended in my paper on Steganoporella (1900,
p: 240) of removing the basal wall, by means of a scalpel,
from stained colonies (not decalcified) embedded in paraffin.
I have also made use of thin slices, cut by hand, of uncal-
cified material embedded in paraffin. I am convinced of the
great importance of studying the Cheilostomata in uncalcified
Canada balsam preparations. Most of my slides have been
examined with a binocular microscope and a quarter-inch
objective.
Il. List oF THE SPECIES SPECIALLY STUDIED.
1. Huthyris clathrata, n. sp. : . Port Jackson.
2. x obtecta, Hincks , . Torres Straits.
3. EKuthyroides episcopalis, Busk
(a. geu.) ; é ; : . Victoria.
4. Flustra pisciformis, Busk : . Bass’s Strait (Challenger Coll.).
5. 3 papyrea, Pall... ‘ . Naples.
6. 2 cribriformis, Busk . Singapore.
7. Farciminaria hexagona, Busk . Amboina (Challenger Coll.).
8. Dimetopia spicata, Busk. ; . Victoria.
9. Bicellaria grandis, Busk, var. pro-
ducta, MacGillivray . : : . Victoria.
10. Bugula neritina, L. : . . Naples.
11. Membraniporella nitida, Johnst. . S. Devon.
12. Cribrilina philomela, Busk . . Marion Is. (Challenger Coll.).
13. 7, radiata, Moll . ’ . Naples.
14. Umbonula verrucosa, sper . = bo, Devow.
15. _ pavonella, Alder. . North Sea.
16. Lepralia pallasiana, Moll : . Naples.
266 SIDNEY F. HARMER
17. Lepraliadorsiporosa, Busk . . ‘Torres Straits.
18. a sincera, Smitt . ; . Davis Straits.
19. = haddoni, n.sp. . . Torres Straits.
20. Schizoporella linearis, eeerl . Naples.
3 2 sanguinea, Norm. . Naples.
22. * australis, Haswell . ‘Torres Straits.
23. Urceolipora nana, MacGill. (=
Calymmophora lucida, Busk) .», Victoria.
24. Smittia trispinosa, Johnst., var.
arborea, Levins. . Greenland.
25. fs reticulata, J. is dGilivtay Naples.
26. Catenaria lafontii, Aud. . : . Naples.
27. Vittaticella cornuta, Busk . . Victoria.
28. Catenicella alata, Wyv. Thoms. . Victoria.
29. - plagiostoma, Busk, var.
setigera, MacGill. . Victoria.
30. ee hastata, Busk . . Victoria (Challenger Coll.).
dl. = lorica, Busk : . Victoria.
De: if wilsoni, MacGillivray . Victoria.
33. Calwellia gracilis, Maplestone . Victoria.
34. 5 (Onchopora) sincelairil,
Busk”. : : . 8. of Kerguelen Is. (Challenger
Coll., Stat. 153).
a5. = (Urceolipora) dentata,
MacGillivray . ‘ . Victoria.
36. Ichthyaria oculata, Busk ; . §.E. of Buenos Aires (Chal-
lenger Coll., Stat. 320).
37. Onchoporella bombycina, Busk
(not El]. and Sol,) —. ' ; . New Zealand.
38. Microporella malusii, Aud. . . Naples.
39. é elliata, Pail. . Naples.
40. Micropora, sp. . : . Torres Straits.
41. Steganoporella siveotnie Hiner Torres Stratis.
III. Kuthyris, Hincks, and Kuthyroides, n. gen.
Kuthyris clathrata, n. sp. Pl. 16, tigs. 18—31.
Zoarium flustrine in habit, of stiff, corneous texture,
composed of narrow, parallel-sided, frequently bifurecating
branches, with truncated ends. ZGocecia opening on one
surface only, the orifices arranged with great regularity in
THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE CHELLOSTOMATA. 267
oblique rows passing entirely across the branch in two inter-
secting directions. Orifices apparently connected by a
continuous, brown, transparent epitheca, a short distance
below which the frontal surface of each zocecium is strength-
ened by a system of irregular calcareous bars, which tend to
radiate from a point in the middle of the base-line of the
operculum towards the proximal and lateral sides of the
zocecium. Basal side of the branch similarly covered by an
epitheca, which each zocecium reaches along a longitudinal
line narrower and shorter than itself. Opercula large,
dimorphic, the ordinary form about as long as broad (250 to
270 «), the others with a broader base (290 to 320 uw). Both
kinds of opercula are strengthened by a conspicuous Q-shaped
sclerite. The distal margin of the vestibule is provided with
a chitinous lip, which is overlapped during retraction by the
large lateral flanges of the operculum. Ovicells not found,
and probably absent.
The material was discovered by Mr. T. Whitelegge under
rock ledges, at low-tide line, Watson’s Bay, Port Jackson,
and in Middle Harbour, Port Jackson. Although part was
in spirit, its condition was not sufficiently good to make a
complete anatomical investigation possible.
The genus Euthyris was founded by Hincks! for a new
species, H. obtecta, from North Australia. The generic
name, introduced “to suggest the idea of higher structure ”
in the operculum, is particularly appropriate to H. clathrata,
in which the operculum is specially complicated. The two
1 ¢ Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.’ (5), x, 1882, p. 164. In 1871 Quenstedt (‘ Petre-
faktenkunde Deutschlands,’ Abth. I, Bd. 11, p. 442), in discussing the struc-
ture of a Brachiopod, used the following words :—‘‘ Man konnte sie daher
wohl Kuthyris aber nicht Athyris nennen.” I have not been able to ascer-
tain that Quenstedt made any further use of the word HKuthyris, and he
does not even refer the species he is discussing to that genus. It appears,
therefore, that he was not in reality proposing a new genus (and he certainly
did not define it), but was merely making a verbal criticism of the name
Athyris. Although Euthyris (Quenstedt) is mentioned by Zittel in his
well-known ‘ Handbuch d. Paleont.’ (i, p. 684) as a synonym of Spirigera,
it does not seem to me that it has any valid claim to recognition.
268 SIDNEY F. HARMER.
species agree in their habit, in their dimorphic opercula
(probably associated with the absence of ovicells), and in the
highly developed chitinous epitheca which overspreads the
entire zoarium. KE. clathrata differs from H. obtecta in
having its frontal calcareous wall composed of irregular bars,
instead of a simple, perforated, calcareous film, and in the
fact that there is no large space between the frontal epitheca
and the calcareous walls.
I feel doubtful whether Huthyris woosteri, MacGillivray,!
is rightly referred to this genus; but, on the other hand,
Carbasea moseleyi, Busk (1884, p. 56), perhaps belongs
to ib.
The largest colony of H. clathrata measures about 18°5
cm. or 74 Inches in length. The branches are 2 to. 4 mm.
wide, averaging about 3 mm. near their free ends, but lessen-
ing towards the base of the colony, which appears to have
been attached by a narrow base without rootlets. A branch
4mm. wide has about thirteen orifices in each oblique row.
The colour is brown in the older parts, yellowish near the
ends of the branches. The zoarium frequently bifurcates,
showing some tendency to form a unilateral cyme. The
terminal divisions (Pl. 16, fig. 18) may reach a length of 3°5
cin. without bifurcating, but the ordinary length of the
divisions is not more than 1°5 cm. The frontal surface is
somewhat convex, the opposite surface flatter. The calca-
reous walls of the zocecia are arranged as follows :—The
lateral and terminal walls are everywhere complete, and are
perforated by numerous pores. At the proximal end (fig. 22)
the two lateral walls pass continuously into one another in a
regular curve, which forms the base of the zocecium, and is
placed some distance within the basal epitheca (fig. 26, b. ep.).
At the distal end the lateral walls approach one another
basally, and are separately inserted into the basal epitheca,
forming a linear mark (figs. 22, 27) constantly shorter than
the zocecium, but varying in length; this is connected with
the similar part of the next zocecium by a chitinous “ mesen-
1 * Proc. R. Soc. Vict.’ (N. 8.), iii, 1891, p. 77.
THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE CHEILOSTOMATA. 269
tery ” (fig. 22, m.). The effect of the arrangement indicated
in fig. 27 is to keep the epitheca stretched as a flat membrane
at some distance from the basal calcareous walls of the
zocecia. ‘The cavity beneath the epitheca is divided into a
series of parallel longitudinal spaces by the parts of the
zocecia above described. The linear figure formed by the
insertion of the zocecium into the basal epitheca is in some
cases bifurcated proximally. On the frontal surface (figs.
20, 21) each orifice is surrounded by a somewhat irregular
ring of calcareous matter, from each side of which is given
off a strong condyle (fig. 21, cond.) or “denticle,” the two
condyles forming the hinge of the operculum. ‘The frontal
surface is strengthened by a highly variable arrangement of
calcareous bars, the general position of which is shown in
fir. 20. The bars are in the main flattened, their flat surfaces
being parallel with the surface of the branch, but in curving
down into the lateral walls they usually give off vertical
flanges from their free surface, and these form bridges across
the depressed intervals between two zocecia, joining similar
flanges in the adjacent zocecia. At the free end of the
branch the proximal parts of the bars are first formed, and
they grow in a distal direction beneath the epitheca.
Along the lateral margin of the branch runs a tube (fig.
20, m.c.)* which has usually been described as a “chitinous
fibre”? in other forms of Flustrine habit. This is merely a
part of the branch which is not divided into zocecia, and
calcareous bars (c. b.) extend from the marginal zocecia nearly
to the outer edge of its free surface; it contains, moreover,
strands of funicular tissue which pass across its lumen. This
space runs as a continuous tube along the whole margin of
the branch, and it communicates with the cavity which lies
between the backs of the marginal zocecia and the basal
epitheca.
H. clathrata, like EH. obtecta, is characterised by the
dimorphism of its opercula. This is shown in figs. 20, 21,
representing the ordinary type (“A’’) and the second form
1 Cf,.Waters, 1896, p. 291.
270 SIDNEY F. HARMER.
(““B”). The zocecia to which the two kinds of opercula
respectively belong also show some dimorphism. In the
A-zooecia the condyles for the articulation of the operculum
are long recurved teeth (fig. 21), while in the B-zocecia they
are short tubercles. The distal calcareous wall of the
A-zocecium is at the same time the proximal wall of the next
zocecium in the same longitudinal line. In the B-zocecium
this is not the case. The distal zocecium has a proximal
wall (p. w.) of its own, from which some of its calcareous bars
may spring, and this is much thinner than the distal wall
(d. w.) of the proximal zocecium, from which it is separated
by a narrow crescentic space, pessing about half round the
operculum of the proximal zocecium. This suggests that
the B-zooecia possess a vestigial ovicell. The condition of
my specimens unfortunately prevents me from ascertaining
whether the production of ovaries is limited to B-zocecia. In
two cases counted at random, about three A-zocecia occurred
for every B-zocecium, no regular arrangement of the two
kinds being apparent. The additional breadth of the
B-operculum is correlated with a slightly increased trans-
verse diameter of the zocecium itself, immediately on the
proximal side of the operculum. This makes an appreciable
difference in the capacity of the zocecium, a fact which is in
favour of the view that the B-zocecia are female. Similar
differences in the opercula are commonly met with in other
Cheilostomes, in which the operculum of an ovicell-bearing
zocecium may be wider than that of the ordinary zocecia.
T'wo features in KH, clathrata demand especial attention,
namely, the compensation-sac and the operculum. For the
discovery of the compensation-sac Jullien (1888, 1) is
entitled to full credit,’ although his results have been re-
1 See my preliminary paper (1901) on this subject. Jullien’s accounts of
tlhe compensation-sac were very short, and his figures were not adequate. He °
nowhere brings out the importance of the sac in the discussion of the mor-
phology of the Cheilostomata. So far as I know, he mentions its parietal
muscles in only one place, This is in the explanation of a figure of Cribri-
lina figularis (1888, i, p. 272), in which he uses words which seem to
THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE CHEILOSTOMATA. OTT
ceived with scepticism, which proves to have been un-
justified.
The Comprnsatrion-sac of this species is a very large cavity
which underlies practically the whole of the frontal surface
of the zocecium. In longitudinal section (fig. 26, c. s.) it 1s
seen to be perfectly distinct from the body-cavity, from
which it is separated by a delicate membrane, constituting
the floor of the sac. This membrane passes continuously
into the base-line of the operculum, immediately proximal to
which the sac opens to the exterior. When the operculum
is closed the aperture of the sac is a virtual transverse slit.
In the case of ordinary Escharine forms this aperture is so
little apparent that it has commonly been supposed that the
base-line of the operculum actually articulates with the
adjacent part of the calcareous wall—a state of affairs which
is often by no means the case. The roof of the compensation-
sac is protected by the calcareous bars (f. b.), and the frontal
wall of the zocecium is bevelled off on the proximal side of
its aperture, in the characteristic way shown in fig. 26. The
purpose of this arrangement is obvious. The sharp edge of
the frontal wall of the zocecium is in contact with the base-
line of the operculum when the latter is closed. When the
operculum is open (fig. 24) the plane of its free surface
becomes parallel with that of the bevelled edge of the frontal
wall, so that water can have unobstructed access to the sac.
As supposed by Jullien, there can be little doubt that the
entry of water into the sac renders the protrusion of the
polypide possible, but it almost necessarily follows that the
constant change of the water in the sac makes this structure
an important organ of respiration.
In this species I have been able to obtain only unsatis-
factory evidence, in consequence of the state of its preserva-
indicate that he had appreciated the morphological importance of his discovery.
The words are as follows :—‘ Muscles rétracteurs de l’abdomen (fibres muscu-
laires pariétales des auteurs). Elles rétractent en réalité la paroi abdominale,
mise en évidence par la découverte de la chambre a eau de compensa-
tion ouchambre compensatrice.”
272 SIDNEY F. HARMER.
tion, with regard to the existence of the “ parietal muscles ”
which elsewhere dilate the compensation-sac ; but the analogy |
of other Cheilostomes leaves little doubt as to their presence.
The OpercuLum is a very remarkable piece of mechanism,
which forms a most efficient means of protecting the entrance
to the tentacle-sheath. Most of the existing descriptions of
Cheilostomatous opercula take account of the appearance
of the outer surface only of this structure—a very inadequate
way of arriving at its real relations. Although K.clathrata
has an operculum which, judged by the descriptions available
for comparison, would appear to be unusually complex, it is
in the highest degree probable that a renewed examination of
other Cheilostomes will show that it is by no means unique
in this particular.
The first part of the introvert which leads to the mouth of
the polypide is constituted by the ‘ diaphragm” or
“ vestibule” (fig. 26, vest.), which is a muscular invagination
projecting into the tentacle-sheath, and communicating with
it by a central aperture.t. The way in which the vestibule
opens and closes has been aptly compared with the action of
a clasp-purse. The structures which protect the vestibule
of EK. clathrata have a superficial resemblance to the skull
of aturtle (Chelone), the skull with the upper jaw being
represented by the operculum, and the lower jaw by a
chitinous lower lip (figs. 23—27, /b.), which I propose to term
the“labium.” The labium was described by Hincks? in a form
from the Queen Charlotte Islands, named by him Lepralia
bilabiata, in allusion to the existence of this structure. It
is probable that it will hereafter be found in numerous
Cheilostomata.,
The labium can be clearly seen in those zocecia of the dry
colony in which the operculum is open (fig. 19). Between it
and the edge of the downwardly projecting flange (/l.) of the
1 See, for a description of this structure, Nitsche (1871, p. 432), Jullien
(1888, 4, p. 38), and Calvet (1900, pp. 180, 201).
7 «Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.’ (5), xiii, 1884, p. 49. The labium is the ‘‘ upper
lip” of Hincks’s description.
THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE CHEILOSTOMATA. 273
operculum is seen the entrance to the vestibule, while the
aperture of the compensation-sac is situated between the base
of the operculum and the calcareous frontal wall of the
zocecium.
The relations of the same parts are explained by the thick
longitudinal section shown in fig. 26, in which the operculum
is very nearly closed. By deep focussing can be seen the
calcareous condyle (cond.) which constitutes the hinge. The
divaricator muscles (div.) of the operculum are paired ;
each originates from one of the lateral walls of the zocecium,
and passes obliquely towards its frontal surface, crossing the
condyle on its proximal side, to reach its insertion into the
basal sclerite of the operculum. The contraction of these
muscles will obviously have the double effect of opening the
vestibule and of opening the compensation-sac. The oper-
culum is prolonged laterally into a very large triangular
flange (fl.), whose plane is at right angles to that of its free
surface (see also figs. 24, 25, 27). The occlusor muscles
(occl.) are similarly paired, each originating from the lateral
wall of the zocecium at a deeper level than the divaricator,
and passing obliquely across the base of that muscle to
reach its insertion, on the distal side of the condyle, into
the tip of the triangular flange. Fig. 25 shows that the
insertion is by means of a broad tendon. Since the
labium articulates with the operculum in this region, the
effect of the contraction of the occlusor muscles will be,
not only to close the operculum itself, but also to retract
the labium from the position shown in fig. 24 to that shown
in fig. 25. In the closed condition, the labium lies just
inside the vertical flange of the operculum.
The Jateral flanges are not really independent structures,
but they pass into one another in a continuous curve round
the distal side of the operculum, their free border, continuing
the comparison with the turtle’s skull, constituting the biting
edge of the upper jaw. In longitudinal section (fig. 26) the
upper jaw appears to be strengthened by a strong buttress
(buttr.) which passes from the free surface of the operculum.
vou. 46, PART 2,—NEW SERIES. 8
O74 SIDNEY F. HARMER.
This is a part of the Q-shaped figure which is seen in a
surface view (fig. 21) of the operculum, an appearance which
results from the fact that the thickness of the chitin is not
everywhere the same. The whole of the region included
within the two hmbs of the Q@ is much thickened (figs.
26, 27), while the rest of the free surface, as far as the edge,
is composed merely of thin cuticle (fig. 29). From the
median thickening a curved chitinous buttress diverges
(figs. 28—31) on each side, passing down into that part of
the body-cavity which immediately underlies the free surface
of the operculum. In young zowcia, the space between the
buttress and the outer lamella of the operculum contains a
conspicuous epithelium, which secretes the cuticular sub-
stance of which the operculum is composed. Remains of this
cellular material may be seen, in the same position, in the
adult operculum. ;
The greater part of the thickness of the operculum is con-
stituted by a superficial layer of cuticle which readily stains
yellow with picric acid. The'whole of the deeper surface of
this layer (and therefore both sides of the strengthening
buttress which depends from the free surface), is lined by a
much thinner layer of chitin (not indicated in the figures),
which takes ared colour in sections stained with borax car-
mine and picric acid. A two-layered chitinous cuticle has
been described in certain Gymnolemata by Calvet (1900,
p. 164).
he buttress of the operculum is crescentic in shape, as
seen from above (fig. 21, buttr.). Thus, if the thin lateral
parts of the outer lamella of the operculum were removed,
there would be exposed a crescentic cavity, the limbs of the
crescent being directed towards the proximal side of the
zocecium, the floor of the cavity being constituted by
the slightly concave upper surface of the buttresses. Distally
the buttress meets and fuses with the vertical flange of the
operculum (fig. 26). Laterally the fusion is incomplete
distally (figs. 27, 28), so that the cavity above the buttress is
here continuous with the general body-cavity. In the
THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE CHEILOSTOMATA. 2789
proximal half of the operculum the buttresses again meet the
lateral flanges (figs. 29—31).
The distal half of an operculum is shown in fig. 27, which
represents a transverse slice of a specimen with its calca-
reous parts, cut freehand! after embedding in paraffin. By
focussing deeply are seen the labium (/b.) and the curved slit
between it and the edge of the operculum. Into the ends of
the lateral flanges of the operculum, and at the same time
into the two sides of the base of the labium, are inserted the
occlusor muscles (occl.). By focussing less deeply the free
edges of the lateral buttresses are seen ; while the cut surface
passes through the region of the condyles (cond.). Fig. 26
shows that the operculum works on its condyles as a lever of
the first order, the occlusors (occl.) and the divaricators (dwv.)
passing on opposite sides of the fulcrum.
Fig. 28 shows a transverse section of the distal part of the
operculum where the buttresses have a free edge. Fig. 29
is through the hinge-line. The vertical flange is still deep
(cf. fig. 26), and is here strengthened by the buttresses,
which have completely fused with it. On the proximal side
of the condyles the depth of the flange rapidly diminishes.
In the entire operculum a small circular mark (fig. 21, 2)
appears on each side near the proximal end of the Q-shaped
figure. In transverse section (fig. 30) this is seen to be due
to the fact that at this point the buttresses leave the vertical
flanges and are inserted into the free wall of the operculum,
so that at this point the body-cavity is separated from the
outside by a single layer of chitin. The small tube thus
formed often stains deeply in carmine preparations. I am
unable to explain the meaning of this arrangement. ‘The
tube does not communicate with the space above the
buttresses. On its proximal side the operculum becomes
very shallow, as indicated in fig. 31, a section just on the
distal side of the basal sclerite. This forms, with the median
thickening, a horizontal J-shaped figure, the outline of which
* The hard nature of the chitin makes it difficult to prepare microtome
sections of the opercula.
276 SIDNEY F. HARMER.
gives rise to the Q-shaped mark seen in an external view of
the operculum (fig. 21).
In decalcified sections the calcareous part of the condyle is
seen to be surrounded by a strong layer of chitin. In longi-
tudinal sections this has the appearance indicated in figs. 29,
26 (cond.), the chitin being developed especially on the
proximal side of the condyle. Fig. 24, which represents an
open operculum, shows that this chitinous investment is pro-
longed into the sharp edge (scl.) which surrounds the cavity
in which the operculum lies (see also figs. 27, 29). ‘This edge
is continuous with a layer of chitin forming the outer wall of
the cavity (figs. 28—31) ; and this, in its turn, becomes con-
tinuous with the deep end of the vertical flange of the oper-
culum. ‘The flange is strongly bent inwards soas to lie along
the surface of the condyle.
I think there is great probability that these arrangements
are in the nature of a spring, and that if the partially opened
operculum shown in fig. 29 be imagined to be closed by the
occlusor muscles, the shape of the lateral flanges and of the
buttresses will be somewhat distorted by the surfaces of the
condyles. The elasticity of the operculum would thus tend
to commence the opening of the orifice and of the compensa-
tion-sac. ‘This supposed elasticity probably gives a reason
for the free ends of the buttresses in the distal part of the
operculum, an arrangement which would facilitate the slight
alterations in the vertical flanges during the movements of
the operculum.
The whole apparatus, consisting of the operculum, the
labium, and the chitinous cutting edge which surrounds the
cavity containing the operculum, is obviously one of remark-
able perfection, and is well adapted to defend the entrance
to the tentacle-sheath.
The most external part of the vestibule is lined by a
distinct layer of cuticle (fig. 26), which is continuous with
the cuticle of the operculum and with that of the labium.
The actual “ biting ” surface of the jaws is constituted by a
thickened part of the cuticle, as shown in the same figure.
THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE CHEILOSTOMATA. Pt bi
That of the operculum is so close to the insertion of the
buttress into the vertical distal wall as to receive support
from the buttress. That of the “lower jaw” is continuous
with the main thickening of the labium, which is the deeper
wall, as shown in fig. 26.
I have few observations on other points in the structure of
this species. In the material at my disposal a certain
amount of disintegration appears to have taken place before
the specimens were preserved. ‘The number of tentacles is,
however, about twenty-two.
Kuthyris obtecta, Hincks,! Pl. 16, figs. 32—37.
The B-zocecia are much larger than the A-zocecia, the
ratio in volume being probably at least 2: 1 (figs. 32, 35).
The A-opercula are of much the same shape as in
K. clathrata, while the B-opercula are relatively much
broader. The condyles are weaker than in EH. clathrata,
and are situated nearer the proximal border of the oper-
culum. But what most strikingly differentiates the two
species is the character of the calcification. The calcareous
wall is everywhere complete in H. obtecta, the basal wall
being uniformly rounded along its whole extent. Both kinds
of zocecia are flask-shaped (figs. 34, 36), the opening of the
neck of the flask being filled by the operculum. A con-
tinuous flat epitheca overspreads the entire zoarium, being
stretched out in the plane of the opercula on the frontal
surface of the branch, and at a considerable distance from
the zocecia on the basal surface (fig. 34, ep., b. ep.). The
space beneath the epitheca (ep.c.) is thus extremely large,
and that of the frontal surface is continuous with that of the
opposite side by means of the undivided space which runs
along each edge of the frond (figs. 382, 35, m. c.).
On the frontal surface the epitheca is supported in the
main by the edges of the orifices of the zocecia, but in
addition by a few calcareous tubercles (fig. 34, calc. p.),
which arise irregularly from various points of the surface of
1 “Ann. Mag. Nat, Hist.’ (5), x, p. 164; (6), xi, p. 177.
278 SIDNEY F. HARMER.
the calcareous wall (fig. 32), and pass vertically to the
epitheca. Basally these tubercles are longer and are rather
more regularly arranged. Their arrangement is seen in
figs. 34—36, from which it is apparent that they serve to
keep the epitheca stretched out at a considerable distance
from the calcareous part of the zocecium. In my preliminary
note (1901, p. 16) I have pointed out that there is evidence
that many Cretaceous Cheilostomes were provided with a
basal epitheca, as is indicated by the presence of calcareous
papille resembling those of E.obtecta. It may perhaps
be suggested that a function of the epitheca is to protect the
calcareous walls from the attacks of boring organisms (e. g.
the Infusorian Folliculina) which infest many calcareous
Polyzoa.
The calcified wall of EK. obtecta shows no trace of the
bar-like arrangement so characteristic of EH. clathrata. It
is, on the contrary, a continuous calcareous film, traversed
by pores. Asin the other species, these pores partly form
communication-pores traversing the partition-walls between
zocecia, and they are partly in relation with the space
beneath the epitheca. It is hardly necessary to point out
that in neither case are they open pores, although the cal-
careous matter is deficient in these regions. The portions of
the vertical walls which are actual partition-walls are of
limited extent (fig. 36), so that but few of the pores are com-
munication-pores (c. p.) between zoccia. I have seen no
evidence that the number of these is restricted to eight, as
stated by Waters (1896, p. 282). The majority lead to the
spaces beneath the epitheca, particularly to that on the basal
side of the frond (figs. 35, 36). They are less numerous on
the frontal side (fig. 36).
The marginal part of the frond may be strengthened by a
system of bars (fig. 87) which recalls those already described
in the zooecia of HK. clathrata. This system makes its
appearance first in the angle between the two lobes of a
bifurcation, and begins as a set of regular calcareous bars,
running near the frontal surface, and originating from the
THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE CHEILOSTOMATA. 279
outer sides of the marginal zooecia. Hach bar is at first
narrow, but soon dilates into a thickened, tuberculated,
rounded head, the heads being closely apposed to form a con-
tinuous calcareous border. From the border a longitudinal
vertical ridge stands up at right angles to the frontal
epitheca, which it meets. A similar ridge (J) connects the
border with the basal epitheca. In older branches each bar
may be dilated at two points, and a second longitudinal ridge
may be formed on each surface (fig. 37, J, l).
The marginal thickening,! thus constituted of a series of
calcareous thickenings, gives flexibility as well as strength to
the margin of the frond. ‘There can be little doubt that the
space beneath the epitheca is a kind of colonial body-cavity.
The marginal bars of EH. obtecta can thus be regarded as
directly comparable with the zocecial bars of E. clathrata.
From the irregularity and variability of the bars in the latter
I am inclined to regard this asa species in which the calcifica-
tion has been reduced from a condition like that in HK. obtecta.
The general arrangement of the viscera in HE. obtecta is
shown in fig. 34. ‘The operculum has conspicuous lateral
flanges, and there is a delicate labium (lb.). The occlusor
muscles (occl.) are inserted into the apices of the lateral
flanges. Some of the fibres of the divaricator muscles (div.)
appear to reach the base-line of the operculum, but some are
probably inserted into the adjacent part of the floor of the
compensation-sac (c. s.). ‘This structure is very large, and in
an adult zocecium it underlies the whole of the frontal
surface. Fig. 33 shows its appearance in a B-zocecium in
back view. The greater part of the basal wall (b. w.) of the
zocecium and part of the polypide have been removed. The
tentacle sheath depresses the sac medianly, but the sac bulges
out on each side into a strongly convex lateral lobe. Each
lobe thus formed is rounded off distally, but by deep focussing
the two lobes can be seen to unite on the far side of the
tentacle sheath into a single cavity, which can be traced to
1 A similar thickening is well known in certain other flexible Cheilostomes.
See, for example, Levinsen’s account (1891, p. 274) of Flustra carbasea.
280 SIDNEY F. HARMER.
the proximal border of the operculum. The divaricator
muscles are seen at div.; occl. indicates the position of the
origin of one of the occlusor muscles, while a pair of parieto-
vaginal muscles are seen at p.v. m. Arising from the sides
of the zocecium are a series of delicate parietal muscles (p. m.).
There is a tendency for these to be arranged in a grouped
manner. ‘They can be traced along the basal surface of the
compensation-sac, into which each is inserted.
A polypide and a compensation-sac occur in both forms of
zocecia. Reproductive organs are, unfortunately, absent, so
that it is not possible to ascertain whether the dimorphism
has any relation to reproduction. |
The compensation-sac develops in what I shall term the
Lepralioid manner ; that is to say, as an invagination formed
at the base of the operculum after the calcification of the
front wall has been completed. Some of the details of this
process are described in the account of the next species.
Huthyroides, n. gen.—I suggest this term for Carbasea
episcopalis, Busk,! a form placed by Hincks ? in the genus
Euthyris. The diagnosis of the genus may be given as
follows:
Zoarium of Flustra-like habit, bordered along each edge
by a tube, interrupted at intervals, which represents a part of
the body-cavity not divided into zocecia, but without other
spaces beneath the epitheca. Frontal wall more or less
calcareous, covering a well-developed compensation-sac. Com-
munication-pores large, typically four on each side. Ovicells
large, external, with a wall composed of two calcareous layers.
The genus differs from HKuthyris in the absence of spaces
beneath the epitheca and in the presence of large external
ovicells, and of a very different type of communication-pore.
The zocecia of HK. episcopalis (PI. 15, figs. 13—17) are
extremely elongated. Their vertical and basal walls are
calcified, but there is so little calcareous matter in the frontal
1 Busk (1852), p. 52; MacGillivray, ‘ Prod. Zool. Vict.,’ 1, Dec. v, 1880,
». 28.
3 2 * Ann. Mag, Nat. Hist.’ (5), x, p. 164,
THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE CHEILOSTOMATA. 281
wall that this part may not entirely retain its shape in
drying.
Large, oval communication-pores, or rosette-plates, occur
in the lateral walls, at about the middle of the interval
between the frontal and basal surfaces (fig. 14, ¢.p.). Hach
zocecium is normally bounded by two zocecia on each side,
and it usually communicates with each of its four lateral
neighbours by means of two (rarely three) rosette-plates.
In the terminal partition-walls, there is a horizontal row of
small pores in place of definite rosette-plates. ‘The vertical
walls have no other pores.
The transparency of this species makes it a favourable
one for the study of the compensation-sac. At the growing
ends of the branches the frontal surface of the zocecium is at
first an uncalcified membrane, in which calcification begins
at the proximal end and gradually extends distally. The
outline of the operculum becomes apparent before calcification
invades its immediate neighbourhood. Shortly before the
edge of the calcified frontal wall (fig. 15, %) reaches the
region of the future operculum, the part of the uncalcified
membrane immediately proximal to the opercular base-line
shows a special accumulation of nuclei (c.s.), towards which a
number of muscle-fibres radiate through the body-cavity from
both lateral walls. When the calcification has advanced so
far as to mark out the future orifice, two lateral calcified
processes and a median tongue-like structure begin to grow
up just proximal to the operculum (fig. 14, 1. p., tg.). The
nuclei are arranged in a more definite mass along the proximal
margin of the orifice, to which the lumen of the tentacle-
sheath (¢t.s.) now extends. Still later, the two calcareous
processes meet, although the suture between them is per-
sistent. There is thus left, between them and the calcareous
tongue, a crescentic pore (fig. 15), the concavity of which is
directed proximally. ‘l'his is an aperture of the compensa-
tion-sac, which, however, opens to the exterior at the proximal
edge of the operculum as well, an arrangement which is most
obvious in the fertile zocecia. The occlusor muscles of the
282 SIDNEY F. HARMER.
operculum are large, and originate from the lateral parts of
the basal wall, close to the distal end of the zocecium. ‘The
divaricator muscles originate from the lateral walls of the
zocecium, in the same neighbourhood.
The zoarium is bounded by a tubular cavity, which is,
however, not continuous, as in the preceding species. The
cavity is a direct prolongation of one of the longitudinal
lines of zocecia, and may be compared with what Smitt calls
a ‘Samknopp” (1865, p. 6). After extending a length of
perhaps five ordinary zooecia it ceases abruptly, and a new
marginal tube is formed as a prolongation of the series of
zocecia next internal to it. The lateral tubes are connected
with the adjoining zocecia by communication-pores.
The ovicell (fig. 16) of this species is well known tecen
Busk’s description. It is very prominent, and is provided
with a median longitudinal keel, on each side of which is a
large elongated fenestra (f.). This is simply a membranous
deficiency in the outer wall of the ovicell, which is composed
of two calcareous layers. The fertile zocecium is distin-
guished from the others by a peculiarity in its calcareous
frontal wall. Instead of having a single pair of prominences
on the proximal side of the operculum, it has several such
prominences (figs. 16, 17), the arrangement of which is some-
what variable. There are either several tubular calcareous
bars radiating towards a point in the middle of the zocecium
(fig. 16), or a short series of bars disposed more definitely in
pairs (fig. 17). The latter arrangement seems to occur
typically in those fertile zocecia which have an ovicell on
their proximal side, and the former in a fertile zocecium
which is the first of a longitudinal series.
The resemblance of these bars to the frontal bars! of a
1 J suggest the term “ frontal membrane ” for the membranous body-wall
which is stretched over the “aperture” of a Membranipora (fig. 48),
The “ frontal bars,” or ‘‘ costules” of some authors, are the bars which grow
over this membrane in a Cribrilina (figs. 8, 44) ; while I propose the term
“frontal shield” for the calcareous part of the frontal surface of a Cheilostome.
The frontal shield is probably not homologous in all Cheilostomes, but the
term may be used as a purely descriptive one,
THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE CHEILOSTOMATA. 283
Cribrilina is very striking. They arch over a greatly
reduced frontal membrane, into which parietal muscles are
inserted in the immature condition of the zocecium (fig. 17).
The bars are calcareous tubes, opening by a foramen into the
body-cavity just external to the frontal membrane, and each
bar has a minute membranous fenestra near its tip. After
the complete formation of the bars there is found (in the
fertile zocecium) a stage in the development of the com-
pensation-sac precisely like that shown in fig. 15 in a
zocecium without an ovicell, and it can now be seen that the
operculum is continuous with the floor of the compensation-
sac, a wide opening into which is left between the operculum
and the first pair of bars. In the mature fertile zocecium the
compensation-sac extends under the greater part of the
frontal shield, as in the ordinary zocecia.
There is little difference between the relations of the frontal
bars in the fertile zocecia of EH. episcopalis and that found
in certain species of Cribrilina (e. g. C. figularis), in
which the frontal membrane surrounded by the bars is of
reduced extent.
In the immature ovicell of EH. episcopalis (fig. 17) the
inner calcareous wall is a concave plate (v7. w.) lying on the
surface of the zocecium next distal to that to which the ovicell
belongs. The outer calcareous layer (0. w.) rises up con-
centrically outside it, and between the two is a mass of living
tissue. It is impossible not to be struck by the resemblance
between the development of the ovicell and that of the frontal
bars. The ovicell may be compared with two greatly ex-
panded bars, composed, like the others, of two layers of
calcareous matter surrounding living tissue.
The median keel of the mature ovicell represents the
line along which these bars meet, and corresponds, I believe,
with a complete septum between their cavities. It may thus
be suggested that the ovicell is formed by the fusion of a
pair of greatly expanded oral spines, the bases of which
should communicate with the fertile zocecium on each side
of the operculum. I cannot claim to have proved this to
284, SIDNEY F. HARMER.,
be the case, though I have obtained some evidence pointing
in that direction.
Dr. G. M. R. Levinsen has kindly given me permission to
allude to his very interesting observation (which he proposes
to publish hereafter), that in Alysidium parasiticum,
Busk,' the ovicells develop as two arched, hollow valves,
corresponding with the oral spines which occur on the
ordinary zocecia. I do not at present know what conclusions
Dr. Levinsen deduces from this observation, with which I was
acquainted before making my own on H. episcopalis.
In Heterowcium amplectens, Hincks? has described
a Membranipora-like Cheilostome, in which the ovicell is
constituted by a number of spines placed distal to the oper-
culum, which meet in a Cribrilina-like manner, and form a
structure which, in other respects, resembles a normal ovicell.
Calvet (1900, pp. 57, 58, 152, pl. 1, fig. 14) states that in
Bugula there is a communication-pore between the ovicell
and the distal zocecium.
It follows from the account given by Calvet and others,
that the cavity of the ovicell, internal to its inner layer, is an
external space which is overarched by the double wall of the
ovicell. This is obviously true in a case like that of
Mucronella coccinea, where the most distal oral spines
of the fertile zocecium are actually inside the cavity of the
ovicell.
Further investigation is necessary to decide the morpho-
logical nature of the Cheilostome ovicell. The existence of
three possibilities is generally recognised :—(1) That the
ovicell belongs to the fertile (proximal) zocecium ; (2) that it
belongs to the distal zocecium ; (38) that it is a modified indi-
vidual, as believed by Nitsche and others. ‘The second possi-
bility would seem to be indicated by Calvet’s observation
above referred to. The relation of the operculum of the
fertile zocecium to the ovicell, the occurrence of the “ internal
1 1852, p. 14.
2 «Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.’ (5), viii, 1881, p. 129, pl. ili, fig. 7; ibid. (6),
ix, p. 332.
THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE CHEILOSTOMATA, 285
ovicells” found in certain species of Flustra and elsewhere,
and in particular Dr. Levinsen’s account of Alysidium
parasiticum, seem to be in favour of the view that the
ovicell is a part of the fertile zocecium.
In his original account of Flustra militaris,! Waters
suggests that this species is allied to H. episcopalis, calling
attention to the resemblance between the ovicells of the two
forms, but noting the existence of differences between the
opercula. ‘The two species agree in the great length of their
zocecia and in their rosette-plates; but a striking difference
is seen in the frontal surface, which is membranous in F.,
militaris, except for a small proximal calcified region.
Parietal muscles appear to be inserted into this membrane,
asin an ordinary Flustra. The two strong suboral spines
of F. militaris may correspond with the two projections
which in KH. episcopalis cut off the median pore. If the
frontal surface has really the importance in classification
attached to it in the present paper, I see no way of admitting
the affinity of the two species (which undoubtedly resemble
one another), except by assuming either that F. militaris
is a species which has secondarily opened its compensation-
sac, or that KH. episcopalis is a modified Flustrine form.
The material at my disposal is not in a condition which
allows me to make a further examination of these points.
IV. Tue MorpHoLocy oF THE COMPENSATION-SAC AND OF THE
OpERCULUM.
I have come to the conclusion that the evolution of the
compensation-sac has not been identical in all Cheilostomes
which possess that structure, but that in some cases it has
been formed by the overarching towards the middle line of
a series of marginal spines in such a way as to cover the
primitive frontal membrane.? The evidence for the occur-
rence of this process is as follows:
(1) Many species of Membranipora exist in which the
Y Ann. Mac. Nat. Hist.’ (5), xx, p. 93.
2 See p. 282.
286 SIDNEY F. HARMER.
arrangement of the marginal spines foreshadows the condition
above indicated.
(2) The Cribrilinide are transitional from Membranipora
to some at least of the Lepralioid genera.
(3) The arrangement of the muscles connected with the
compensation-sac is derivable from the condition found in
Membranipora.
(4) The study of the primary zocecium.
(5) Paleontological evidence.
The view that the Cribrilinide are intermediate between
the Flustrina and the Escharina is not a new one. Smitt
(1868, i, p. 401) states explicitly that the frontal bars of
Membraniporella nitida are homologous with the free
marginal spines of Membranipora lineata; and in his
next paper (1868, u, p. 48) he shows that Cribrilina marks
a further transition to the Escharines. He leaves Membran1-
porella in the Flustrina, while placing Cribrilina in the
Escharina. Hincks, on the contrary (1880), places the two
genera in the family Cribrilinide.
But although taking this view of the intermediate position
of the Cribrilinide, Smitt was not in a position to show in
detail how the Flustrine zocecium could be modified into an
Escharine zoceclum. ‘The compensation-sac enters into the
question as supplying the clue necessary for the solution of
the problem.
The foregoing instances have given some idea of the
relations of the compensation-sac in its fully developed form.
I next proceed to the proposition that the compensation-sac
of some Lepralioid genera has been derived from a Mem-
branipora-like condition through a stage similar to that of
existing species of Cribrilina.
(A) Flustrina.
Flustra pisciformis, Busk.’.—Fig. 4 shows the general
anatomy of a young zocecium of this species. In the lateral
1 1852, p. 50.
THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE CHEILOSTOMATA, 287
walls the calcareous matter is in two layers separated by a
chitinous lamella,' as described by Nitsche (1871, pp. 421,
455). Each zocecium thus has its own calcareous lateral walls,
distinct from those of its neighbours. In two regions,
respectively proximal and distal to the broadest part of the
zocecium, the lateral wall is thickened at its frontal edge.
At the proximal narrow end the calcareous wall becomes
deficient, and the terminal partition wall, which is thicker
than any of the others, belongs to the proximal zocecium of
the two which it divides. This accords with Levinsen’s
statement (1891, p. 251) that in many Cheilostomes the
terminal wall is single, while the lateral walls are double, so
that the longitudinal rows of zocecia can be isolated from one
another by boiling with caustic potash. ‘The frontal surface
is entirely membranous; the operculum is merely a part of
this membrane, and has no basal sclerite. When the oper-
culum is open (fig. 3) it is seen to have a vertical flange, —
produced into lateral points, as in Huthyris. A similar
arrangement is described by Nitsche ? in Membranipora
membranacea. The occlusor muscles (occl.) are inserted
into these points, and originate, as in Huthyroides episco-
palis, from the basal wall. A pair of strong parieto-vaginal
muscles (p. v. m.) pass from the tentacle sheath to the basal
wall, and a smaller pair (p. v. m.’) connect the tentacle sheath
with the frontal wall; but none pass to the vertical walls
(cf. Calvet, 1900, p. 199). Cf. Waters (1881), p, 318.
THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE CHEILOSTOMATA. 307
The characteristic horns of this species are probably to be
regarded as modified avicularian zocecia. In certain zocecia
one of the horns is replaced by a large normal avicularium.
Catenicella alata, Wyv. Thomson! (fig. 53).
The zocecial structure of Catenicella has been described
by Busk (1852, p. 4), and by Waters (1883, p. 428). ‘The
zocecilum develops on each side three structures, which to-
ovether form the great wings so characteristic of this species.
Taking a case which is not complicated by the presence of
the twin zocecium (cf. fig. 56) which occurs just before a
bifurcation of the branch,? the zocecium is found to be some-
what spindle-shaped, each end passing into a tubular sheath
which surrounds the chitinous joint by which it is connected
with its neighbours. The basal surface of the zocecium is
extremely gibbous, and projects in this direction far beyond
the wings. The frontal surface is nearly flat. The large
orifice has, on its proximal side, a scutiform calcareous region
bearing five fenestrae closed by membrane. ‘The zocecium is
considerably wider than this scutiform plate, its convex.
lateral surfaces being overlapped by parts of the wings.
Kach wing consists of three parts: (1) a large proximal
cavity (infra-avicularian + pedal compartments of Waters),
which is almost two thirds of the length of the zocecium, and
is provided on its frontal surface with two large membranous
fenestre, one at each end (fig. 53, anf. avic.) ; (2) a transverse
cylindrical cavity, the free outer end of which has a mem-
branous vacuity (avic.) ; (3) a large distal cavity with a single
large fenestra, its distal point being uncalcified (swp. avic.).
The second of these cavities is morphologically an avicularian
zoceclum, as is proved by comparision with other species of
Catenicella.
The five suboral fenestre perforate the entire thickness of
the calcareous frontal wall. At the level of their internal
1 «Nat. Hist. Review,’ v, 1858, “ Proc. of Societies,” p. 137.
2 Waters terms the solitary zomzium a “ globulus,” aud the two associated
zocecia a ** biglobulus.”
308 SIDNEY F. HARMER.
openings a sharply marked curved line (x) indicates the edge
of a calcareous plate similar to that described below in C.
plagiostoma. ‘he markings between the fenestre and the
operculum are somewhat variable. In a specimen which
partly dried up during its preparation, fine slits containing
air were noticed, radiating from the fenestre to the orifice.
The compensation-sac of this species is described by
Jullien (1888, 3). It is well developed, but its complete out-
line is not easily seen in the mature zocecium in consequence
of the fact that its breadth is greater than that of the exposed —
scutiform frontal wall.
Catenicella plagiostoma, Busk, var. setigera,
MacGillivray! (fig. 54).
This species is remarkable for the obliquity of its orifice,
and for the enormous development of its avicularia, which
may have very different forms, even on opposite sides of the
same zooecium (fig. 54). ‘The infra-avicularian compartment
(inf. avic.) is almost entirely closed by membrane, the single
fenestra so formed extending mainly over the side and basal
surface of the zocecium. ‘The supra-avicularian compartment
(sup. avic.) similarly has membranous walls, a very large
fenestra being common to it and the avicularian zocecium.
The structure of the frontal wall is more easily made out
than in C. alata. The outer calcareous layer is reduced to a
system of conspicuous bars which unite with a calcareous
framework surrounding the operculum. ‘The internal
calcareous layer is an obliquely oval plate® (pl.), which projects
towards the proximal end of the zocecium. ‘l'his forms part
of the roof of the compensation-sac, from which muscles (p. m.)
can be seen radiating out to the adjacent parts of the wall of
the zocecium. The distal groups of parietal muscles (p. m.’)
appear to act as divaricators.
{n a back view of a zocecium it is seen that the avicularian
zocecium has a very large oblique fenestra proximal to the
1 *Prodr. Zool. Vict.,’ Dec. ii, 1879, p. 17.
2 This structure is described by Waters (1883, p. 429).
THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE CHEILOSTOMATA. 209
mandible, and another distal to the same structure, and
common to it and the supra-avicularian compartment. From
various parts of the membrane covering the dorsal fenestree
rise the spine-like processes to which the variety owes its
name.
Catenicella hastata, Busk! (fig. 55).
The supra-avicularian compartment (sup. avic.) 1s calcified
except at its extreme tip, the walls being perforated by small
pores. It forms a broad, flattened spine at the upper lateral
corner of the zocecium. The avicularian mandible is minute,
but the avicularium possesses, 1n addition to its occlusor and
divaricator muscles, a polypide rudiment (pol.), as in various
other Cheilostomes. Ihave noticed a similar structure in other
species of Catenicella. The infra-avicularian compartment
(inf. avic.) is completely divided into two. The outer wall of
both these cavities is usually completely calcified, but the
proximal one may have a slit-like membranous fenestra,
which is usually lateral. Between the proximal portion,
designated by Waters (1885, p. 428) the “ pedal compart-
ment,’ and the zocecium, was noticed a row of three com-
munication pores (c.p.). A comparison with Vittaticella
suggests that the vittaee shown in fig. 56 are the last remains
of the pedal compartments with their communication pores.
This view has already been maintained by Waters (p. 428),
and, though not quite in the same manner, by Jullien (1888, 3).
I have no suggestion to make with regard to the function of
the lateral ‘compartments ” in Catenicella.
The frontal wall has from seven to nine small fenestra, from
which tubular cavities pass transversely towards the middle
line. The arrangement is stmkingly Cribrilina-like, and
the resemblance is intensified by the existence of irregular
slit-like cavities alternating with the fenestra, which suggest
an incomplete lateral fusion of frontal bars.
The compensation-sac is usually clear. Its floor appears to
be deeply pigmented, but this may be the result of the
1 Busk (1852), p. 7; 1884, p. 10.
310 SIDNEY F. HARMER.
method employed, this preparation being the only one which
IT have made with Mayer’s cochineal tincture. The species
seems, however, to have a special development of pigment,
as indicated by Maplestone.! The compensation-sac develops
as in Vittaticella.
Catenicella lorica,? Busk.
The remarkable fertile zocecia which characterise the
venus Catenicella are well seen in this species to be
provided with a large compensation-sac, with strong parietal
muscles. ‘lhe three fenestre of the ordinary zocecia appear ~
to perforate only a single thin calcareous layer, the inner
layer being completely absent.
Catenicella wilsoni,® MacGill.
The great size of the fenestra of the infra-avicularian com-
partment makes it an easy matter to see the outline of the
large compensation-sac of this species, and the arrangement
of its muscles.
(p) Microporelloid Genera.
Under this heading I consider a few of the forms with a
“median pore,” though I am by no means certain that all
such forms are related to one another.
Calwellia gracilis, Maplestone? (figs. 61, 62).
The zocecia are in pairs, back to back, the plane uniting
the middle lne of two zocecia being at right angles to the
1 «Trans. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict.,’ xviti, 1882, p. 49.
3 Busk (1852), p. 6.
3 MacGillivray, ‘ Prodr. Zool. Vic.,’ Dec. ix, 1884, p. 30.
4 The form which I describe in this paper was figured by Maplestone, with-
out description, in a paper entitled “ Observations on Living Polyzoa,’’ in
‘Trans. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict.,’ xviii, 1882, p. 48, fig. 9 [the plate has no
number}. It has not the triangular shape mentioned by Wyville Thomson
(1858) in his original account of C. bicornis. It is not the species described
by MacGillivray as C. gracilis in ‘Trans. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict.,’ xxii,
p. 128; see also the same journal (N.8.), i, p. 106,
THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE CHEILOSTOMATA. 311
similar plane of the next pair. The narrow proximal part of
each zocecium extends the whole length of the subjacent pair,
in such a way that each zocecium originates from the next
lower one which looks in the same direction as itself.
The two lateral horns are not calcified at their tips (fig.
62, f). Below the oblique orifice is a triangular region
sloping to the median pore (m.~p.), which occupies the most
projecting part of the zocecium. ‘The middle line of this
region is marked by a suture (s.), on each side of which is an
“oculiform ” pore. Besides the communication pore at each
end, by which it is connected with its neighbours in the same
longitudinal series, each zocecium has a pair of distal com-
munication pores placed on the basal side, by which its soft
tissues are continuous with those of the narrow proximal
half of the next distal pair of zocecia, while its own proximal
half is similarly provided with a pair of pores (c.p.) which
lead to the two zocecia of the subjacent pair.
The fully developed compensation-sac (fig. 62, c.s.) occu-
pies a large proportion of the body-cavity. Fig. 61 repre-
sents a compensation-sac which is about half grown, with its
parietal muscles. The sac does not extend to the semi-
circular operculum, the straight base-line of which appears
to constitute the hinge. It develops in a Lepralioid manner,
a small, apparently solid mass of cells appearing beneath the
newly formed median pore; and to this mass the parietal
muscles radiate from various parts of the zocecium. Some-
what earlier the uncalcified, oblique, terminal wall of the
zocecium extends as a triangular point as far as the median
pore, so that the sac is probably derived from the proximal
part of the orifice. The suggestion has often been made
(cf. Hincks, 1880, p. 287) that the Microporellid median pore
has been formed by the closure of the sinus of a Schizo-
porella-like ancestor. The above-described immature stage
of ©. gracilis appears to point in this direction.
The occlusor muscles (occl.) are easily seen, but I have
found no divaricators.
O12 SIDNEY F. HARMER.
Calwellia sinclairii,! Busk (fig. 60).
Waters (1888, p. 17) has described the compensation-sac
in this species, as well as in C. bicornis and Urceolipora
dentata, and he correctly states that if opens to the exterior
by means of the median pore. I agree with Waters that
C. sinclairii should be placed in the genus Calwellia. It
differs from C. gracilis principally in the fact that the
proximal half of the zocecium is almost as broad as the
distal half, and the zocecia do not therefore appear to
be so definitely arranged in pairs.
The operculum is a segment of a circle somewhat greater
than a semicircle, and having a straight base-line. From the
middle line of this a longitudinal suture (s.) passes to the
transversely elongated median pore (m..), and on each side
of the suture is a round fenestra. The suture can usually be
traced down the entire length of the zocecium. The position
of the lateral horns of C. gracilis is indicated by a fenestra
(f.), in the neighbourhood of which are one or two smaller
pores. The median pore is somewhat crescentic, with an
anterior concavity. ‘The lateral edge of the large compensa-
tion-sac does not pass to the base of the operculum, but turns
sharply inwards at the level of the median pore, and runs
into the broad tongue-like lobe of the wall of the zocecium
which gives the pore its crescentic form.
The operculum has. a well-marked triangular lobe of its
vertical marginal flange (fl.), into the apex of which the
occlusor muscle is inserted, as in Flustra.
Calwellia dentata,? MacGillivray.
It appears to me that this species should be separated from
U. nana,® and placed in Calwellia, the generic character of
which would then have to be amended so far as relates to the
arrangement of the zocecia. In C. dentata these are placed
Busk (1884), p. 103.
1
2 As suggested by Waters (1888, p. 10).
THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE CHEILOSTOMATA. 313
back to back, alternately, all the zocecia looking towards one
or the other edge of the branch. The zocecial characters
agree with those of C. sinclairii. There is a large compen-
sation-sac, opening by a median pore, which is transversely
elongated, but the concavity of which is on the proximal
side. Between this and the operculum are two fenestre,
placed as in C. sinclairii. In addition to two lateral horns,
similar to those of C. gracilis, there are three other oral
spines placed more distally.
Ichthyaria oculata, Busk! (fig. 59).
There can be no doubt that this species was incorrectly
placed by Busk in the Bicellariide, a family with which it
appears to have no affinity. Its more natural position would
probably be in the Calwelliidee,? with which it agrees in the
characters of its zocecinm and of its ovicell. ‘lhe zocecia are
arranged in a double alternate series, all facing in one
direction. The median pore (m.p.) is circular, and is situated
on the axial side of the middle of the zocecium. It is con-
nected with the operculum by a longitudinal suture (s.),
on each side of which is a funnel-shaped fenestra, as in
Calwellia. In correlation with the asymmetrical position
of the median pore the abaxial fenestra is much further from
the suture than is the other one. There are one or two
distal fenestrae, probably indicating the former development
of oral spines.
The compensation-sac (c.s.) 1s arranged as in Calwellia.
It opens by the median pore, and therefore ends at some
distance from the operculum. ‘The parietal muscles (p. m.)
occur as a series of definite groups, asin Flustra. Calcifi-
cation is deficient along a line extending the whole length
of the basal side of the zocecium. ‘The line is narrow for the
sreater part of its course, but dilates at each end. The
older parts of the colony are supported by a calcareous
1 Busk (1884), p. 46.
2 Waters (1888, p. 10) places it in Calwellia, a view which seems not
unreasonable.
314 SIDNEY F. HARMER.
thickening, which runs along each margin of the branch.
The retractor muscles of the polypide originate from the two
lateral walls. On each side there is a strong fan-shaped
group passing to the base of the tentacles, and another
passing to the junction of the pharynx with the cesophagus.
Onchoporella bombycina, Busk! (not Ell. and Sol.).
Although I have had only dry material of this species to
work with, I can state that there 1s a well-developed com-
pensation-sac, opening by the crescentic median pore, the .
tongue-like lobe to which the crescentic shape is due being
distal, and seeming to be a triangular membrane which curves
into the distal border of the compensation-sac (as in fig. 60).
The operculum is of very delicate texture. On either side of
the orifice, somewhat proximally, there is a short spine, on
the proximal side of which is a pore, which is either a simple
funnel-shaped deficiency of the calcareous wall, or it consists
of two, or even three, funnel-shaped tubes contained in a
single longitudinal groove.
- ree | _
P
mV
t-5
a
ita
OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF
Lp
——
5 km stem ees maine enna womens: 2
et arate emer me
S.F. Harmer del.
*
.
.
.
.
-
oot ee
© » @e i
.
+e
f
a
i)
\
\
\
eee ee a a
ae aS ae aaa Br ise mtas aae xe , ‘
ecareindipaliet ans ‘
| : ar ee = ne an it
} :
~
ea
‘4 = _
eae!
-
:
F Harmer do
al
»]
fe ff H
JL ---rm
‘ Mh ty B i iia he 5
yo
Fig. 33.
Fig. 32,
9. 100. 200.500. 400, 500, 600m.
oe Do oie Q. 50. 100. 200. 300. 400. 500.
a a ee
} Orn ieee
? ceil N
ste
Ss ee :
| svamtinas
Seer
Lhe ald é resin “ee a yee j
Bs ed,
essen
te a
|
'
!
“t
I
~ L.
er
2 OF HETe
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS
LIBR: 7s
Bay
oF 2. OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS
\\
sayy in x Pan aS wi —_
DR Ca ye O
“Ge
Wi
\ me
ea ONS
avic.
200
eae
—-—- =
io
100
i
i
ie
Sa | =-+-
S.FHarmer del
0. } 50.
>
A
rail
Ly LENS ILI
Ss
Tie. Se.
Huth, Lith? London.
ES is
im ce *
Se i t a
oe] . . woe be
an = a.) ,
ar; Boy ra yee : Ss 7
PS hee yr
= ~~ ee
— as Tus )
tHRARY e
OF THE
onrvensiT¥ oF ILLINOIS
«oe eee
hy i
LIBRARY
<
rig OF THE
—NIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS |
=
a
s
&
«
£
3
=
a
wm:
NS PL IS
6,
Se:
We.
aaeeren nem
aw aren eae nae
Aen at ema eat tNs teaser
st
SSS
sth Path? | anwlo
Huta Lita. London.
ee kt a ee
2 opto eee
i A! |
we oe: ba A, ; .
x 7 y meen +,
. = 2 : =
x
4 =.
, =
i.
«=
<<
a
F
7 LISRARY »
: OF THE |
: ENT OF ILLINOIS
oe:
7
r /
e
6 a
ele nae
Le a we Ss -.
ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF SAGITTA. 35]
a :
‘On the Development of Sagitta; with Notes on
the Anatomy of the Adult.
By
L. Doncaster,
King’s College, Cambridge.
With Plates 19—21.
I. HistToricat.
Tax development of the Chetognatha was first investigated
by Gegenbaur, but the earliest full account was given by
Kowalevsky in 1871 (1). He described the gastrulation, the
formation of the archenteric pouches, and the subsequent
stages up to the hatching of the young Sagitta. Biitschh
studied another species taken off the coast of Norway in 1873
(2), and found considerable difference between this species
and that which Kowalevsky had described. The most
important new facts which he added were, firstly, the forma-
tion of separate anterior cavities of the ccelom, separated off in
the earlier stages of the embryo from the archenteric pouches ;
and secondly, the very early separation of the cells which
remain unaltered during the whole embryonic development,
and which ultimately give rise to the male and female genera-
tive organs.
In the species studied, which unfortunately was not iden-
tified, the tissues of the embryo had a much more epithelial
392 L. DONCASTER.
character than those observed by other workers, and the
structure of the embryo is therefore almost diagrammatic in
its simplicity ; the development after hatching was, however
not followed.
The most complete and accurate account of the embryology
of the group which has yet appeared was published by O.
Hertwig in 1880 (3). Besides making a careful investigation
of the structure of the adult in several species, he gives a full
description of the development, from the first cleavage of the
egg up to the tenth day after hatching. He described for
the first time the remarkable cleavage, and pointed out that
the cells which give rise to the sexual organs are at first two,
and later four, and not two or four groups of cells, as was
stated by Biitschli. He gives a fuller and more accurate
account than his predecessors of the formation of the mouth
and alimentary canal, and suggests, without asserting
definitely, that the longitudinal septum in the tail region of
the adult is formed by a continuation of the alimentary canal
into the tail, and not by the prolongation of the splanchnic
mesoderm, as Kowalevsky believed.
Hertwig, however, failed to confirm Biitschli’s observation
on the origin of the anterior pair of coelomic cavities. After
the young Sagitta has hatched he describes the formation of
the body-cavities, which have been obliterated in the embryo,
the migration of the genital cells from the splanchnic meso-
derm to the body-wall, and mentions that the transverse septa
across the body appear also at the same time. He also men-
tions the formation of a lumen in the intestine, the ciliation
of its walls, and refers to the origin of the anus. The origin
of the muscles and nervous system is also shortly described,
but the account of the development after hatching is
altogether much less complete than that of the embryonic
Stages.
Grassi (4) was the next investigator to take up the study of
the Chetognatha, and his account published in 1883 gives a
very full if not always satisfactory description of the anatomy
of the adult, but no new observations of importance were
ON THE DEVELOPMEN' OF SAGITTA. 303
added on the development. Since his time the only impor-
tant work that has been done on the embryology is a note by
Jourdain. ‘This must be referred to, because he contradicts
the statements of all previous workers as to the formation of
the mesoblast, which he says is not formed by archenteric
diverticula, but by a process of delamination between the
ectoderm and endoderm. ‘This process is not fully described,
and there are no figures, so that his exact meaning is hard to
discover.
It will be seen, therefore, that a number of important ques-
tions concerning the Chetognatha have been left unsolved ;
with regard to some points nothing was known, while with
others observers have arrived at different results. Leaving
aside the note by Jourdain, which reopened the whole question
of the origin of the mesoderm and the ccelom, there was
nothing certainly known about the mode of development of
the transverse septa or of the oviducts and sperm-ducts, both
of which are matters of great importance on account of their
bearing on the theory that Sagitta is related to the Annelida.
It was important also that Biitschli’s observation on the
formation of head-cavities at an early stage should be, if pos-
sible, confirmed, or at least that his account of the develop-
ment should be reconciled with that given by Hertwig.
There are also many minor points ; for example, Hertwig in his
mouograph describes the nervous system as being of two
parts, one ectodermal and sensory in function, the other meso-
dermal and motor. ‘This idea was founded on the anatomy of
the adult, but no attempts have been made hitherto to confirm
or deny it by study of the embryology.
The present work, undertaken to solve if possible these
questions, and to throw hght on the systematic position of
the Chetognatha, was carried on chiefly at Naples, between
October, 1900, and June, 1901, while I occupied the Cambridge
table at the Zoological Station. I wish to take this oppor-
tunity of acknowledging my indebtedness to Professor Dohrn
and all the officers of the station for their unvarying kindness
and willingness to give help.
voL. 46, PART 2,—NEW SERIES, Y
304 L. DONCASTER.
Il. Marerian AND Merrnops.
The material for my work was obtained partly at Naples
and partly in the “ Pantano” at Faro, near Messina. The
Pantano is a lagoon about half a mile in diameter, con-
nected with the Straits of Messina by a shallow canal. In
summer, when the water is exceedingly warm, one species of
Sagitta is very abundant, and during the first two weeks of
July, 1900, I obtained a number of eggs in all stages of —
development by fishing with the tow-net at a depth of fifteen
to twenty feet. After allowing the “ Auftrieb ” to settle for
a short time, the bottom layer was drawn off with a syphon
and searched with a lens, and in this way quantities of eggs
could generally be obtained. I have not been able to deter-
mine this species of Sagitta with absolute certainty; the
adults were generally found at a considerably greater depth
than the eggs, although the young occurred at all depths ; but
as only one species was found, there can be little doubt that
the eggs belonged to it. The adult Sagitta belonged in all
probability to the species bipunctata, although it does not
entirely agree with Grassi’s description; but I have found that
this species is very variable, and am inclined to believe that
possibly two species have been included under the name
“bipunctata.”
The eggs obtained at Faro developed very rapidly. At 7
a.m. gastrule were found, and the young Sagitta generally
hatched between 6 and 8 p.m. the same evening. ‘The eggs
were therefore preserved at intervals during the day in order
to get a complete series of the embryonic development. ‘The
methods of preservation adopted were (a) with sublimate con-
taining 20 per cent. of acetic acid, and (b) with osmic acid for
a few minutes followed by Miiller’s solution for several hours.
Of these methods, the first gave good results ; the second was
fairly good for the young after hatching, but the embryos in
the shell treated in this way were rarely satisfactory, being
very brittle and much contracted. Possibly the osmic acid
ON THE DEVELOPMENY OF SAGITTA. 355
remained inside the shell, and therefore its action on the
tissues was too much prolonged.
At Naples eggs of several species were obtained, some in
May and June, by searching the “ Auftrieb ” with a lens as at
Faro; but since many species are common at Naples, these
could not be identified with certainty.
The most satisfactory method was to put a number of
Sagitta in a jar with two or three litres of fresh sea water, and
next day by drawing off the lower layer of water with a
syphon the eggs could be found. In this way a large
number of eggs of S. enflata were obtained in the autumn
of 1900 (from November Ist to December 11th), and again in
the spring of 1901. In the cold weather no eggs were laid ;
the last were obtained on December 11th, and the first in the
spring on March 8th. These eggs developed more slowly
than those obtained in Sicily, possibly in consequence of the
lower temperature, for it was noticed that the development
took longer as the weather got cooler. They were also less
regular than the Sicilian species. At 9 a.m. all stages from
the unsegmented egg up to well-developed gastrule were
found, and hatching took place usually but not always on the
following day. In Sicily it was not found possible to keep
alive the young Sagitta more than afew hours after hatching,
but the 8. enflata larve at Naples were kept easily for a
week, and in one case for fifteen days. They were kept in
jars of about three litres, covered with a glass plate, and
without any especial care would live for several days. Those
that lived for the longest time were kept at an even tem-
perature by placing the jars in running water, and once or
twice a day fresh sea water was run in, in such a way as to
carry down bubbles of air to aérate the water. The young
Sagitta always remained near the surface, so that the water
could be drawn off with a syphon from below to make room
for the fresh supply. ‘The water was in no case filtered, and
the temperature ranged from 16°5° to 18°5°.
I also obtained eggs from 8. bipunctata at Naples during
April and May, and kept the young alive for several days.
356 L. DONCASTER.
Attempts to obtain eggs from Sagitta minima and Spa-
della draco were unsuccessful.
At Naples the eggs were generally preserved with con-
centrated corrosive sublimate, to which a small portion (about
5 per cent.) of acetic acid was added. ‘This method also gave
excellent results with the young after hatching; some of
these were also preserved with osmic acid, followed by
Miiller’s solution for a day or two. The latter method was
more successful with the advanced young when the tissues
had already become differentiated; for purely embryonic
tissue it gave poor results. Some of the young were also
preserved in a solution of potassium bichromate, to which a
little acetic acid was added, a method which gave results on
the whole similar to those produced by sublimate and acetic
acid.
In most cases the material was embedded in celloidin and
then in paraffin, and cut in sections ‘004 or ‘005 mm. thick ;
this method facilitated the orientation and gave good results,
but to get thinner sections paraffin alone was used. The
sublimate material was generally stained in bulk with borax
carmine, the rest on the slide with hematoxylin. Sections
were made of all stages from the young gastrula up to the
ninth day after hatching, but the earlier embryonic stages
can be most satisfactorily studied in the living egg, which is
extraordinarily transparent. After about the sixth hour,
however, the structure becomes somewhat complicated, and
sections are therefore of great value in confirming and
amplifying the observations made on the living embryos and
young.
For staining larve for mounting whole Mayer’s carmalum
gave much the best results.
II]. Empryonic DeveLorment.
The eggs of Sagitta are about 2 mm. in diameter, and are
laid in the early morning, and develop floating not far from
ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF SAGITTA. 357
the surface. ‘They are enclosed in a firm transparent shell,
which may almost fit the egg, as in 8. enflata, or may leave
a large space containing fluid in which the egg is suspended
(S. bipunctata).
O. Hertwig’s account (3) of the early embryonic develop-
ment, as seen in living embryos, 1s so complete and accurate
that it is unnecessary for me to go over it in detail. I con-
firmed in all points his account of the cleavage, gastrulation,
and formation of the archenteric folds, and further the closing
of the blastopore and origin of the month, and found that the
genital cells appear in the archenteron as he describes. ‘They
he slightly either dorsally or ventrally of the middle line, but
I was not able to determine on which side. ‘l'his eccentricity
is shown in one of Hertwig’s figures, but not mentioned in
his text. In one important point, however, my observations
differ from his, and confirm the account of the development
given by Biitschli (2). After the mouth has been formed
the two lateral lobes of the archenteron become much
restricted by the narrowing of the embryo, and their anterior
ends are then separated off as distinct cavities by the meeting
and fusion of their walls. The two anterior “‘ head-cavities ”
so produced lie at the sides of the pharynx (P1. 19, figs. 3—5),
and are from the first very small and soon become obliterated ;
but the mesoblast enclosing them persists, separated off from
the remainder, and gives rise to the mesodermal structures of
the head. ‘he size of the cavities varies in different species
according to whether the egg-shell is large and leaves plenty
of room, or the reverse. In 8. bipunctata they are easily
recognisable, while in 8. enflata they are from the first
mere dots, and might easily be overlooked were not other
species available for comparison (Pl. 19, fig. 4).
The backward growth of the folds and displacement of the
genital cells into the ccelomic cavities takes place as Hertwig
describes, and at this stage a faint line can sometimes be
seen running back on the dorsal wall of the archenteron from
the free end of the folds to the point where the blastopore
closed. This looks in the living embryo rather as if the
358 L. DONCASTER.
dorsal wall of the archenteron took some share in the back-
ward growth, but sections lend nosupport to this assumption.
The folds grow back to the posterior end of the archenteron,
separating off the coelomic cavities completely, and the folds
become pressed together so as to form a thin longitudinal
septum running through the animal. As the embryo elongates
its cavities become reduced, and this is further increased by
the structure of the somatic mesoderm, the inner boundaries
of which become irregular, and cracks appear between the
cells, so that the layer becomes very indistinct and appears
like mesenchyme. ‘his is perhaps the origin of Jourdain’s
statement that the mesoblast arises by delamination between
the ectoderm and endoderm, and not by archenteric diver-
ticula.
The gradual elongation and narrowing of the embryo
causes the obliteration of the cavities, and the whole embryo
becomes solid, as described by Hertwig. As it grows in
length it curls in the shell, and this ventral curvature
becomes more pronounced as development proceeds, so that
in 8. bipunctata the tail meets the head (Pl. 19, fig. 6), and
in 8. enflata the embryo is curled through fully a turn and
a half before hatching. In the latter species, in which the
shell fits the egg, the curvature begins much earlier than in
the large-shelled species. When the embryo begins to curl
it is easy to get optical transverse sections showing the
cephalic mesoderm at the sides of the stomodzum in the
head, and in the trunk the two semicircular mesodermal
masses separated by the thin endodermal septum, which
expands somewhat dorsally and ventrally. My observations
on the origin of the ganglionic rudiments and the remaining
changes before hatching are so nearly in accord with
Hertwig’s that it is not necessary to give them in detail. In
the species that I studied hatching took place at a time
varying from sixteen to fifty hours after the eggs were
laid, differing according to the temperature and the species.
ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF SAGITTA. 359
IV. Furraer Stupy or tur Euepryonic DEVELOPMENT BY
MEANS OF SECTIONS.
In the earliest stages of the embryonic development,
sections show very little which cannot be seen in the living
embryo. ‘The earliest sections made were of the egg shortly
after gastrulation had begun, when the archenteric cavity is
still small. They show comparatively few large cells, with
moderately distinct cell boundaries, and the nuclei arranged
close to the outer limits of the cells, in the epiblast, and at
the free surface in the cells lining the archenteron. I have
not been able to make out with certainty whether the genital
cells are already differentiated at this stage, but in one
section two nuclei larger than the rest lie side by side close
to the archenteric cavity, and it seems probable that these
are the genital cells. In sections of a later gastrula there is
no very important change ; the cells are much more numerous,
so that there is an almost continuous band of nuclei round
the outside of the embryo and round the archenteron. ‘'T'wo
of the latter may be seen to be larger than the rest, and
project a little into the cavity. At a stage when the
archenteron is divided into three branches by the folds,
already four genital nuclei are seen, although the cells still
appear as two when seen alive; but as the four are packed
so closely together, they would not be easily distinguishable
in the living state. (Pl. 19, fig. 7, only one genital cell
[gen. c.| appears in this section.)
At a period slightly later than this the closing of the
blastopore may be seen; it lies now not quite terminally, but
slightly in front of the posterior end, but I do not know with
certainty whether dorsally or ventrally, owing to the absence
of anything to distinguish the dorsal from the ventral surface
at this stage. Observations on the living embryo, however,
lead me to believe that it is the ventral surface on which the
blastopore comes to lie before it closes.
As the embryo elongates, and the different layers come
560 L. DONCASTER.
into such close contact that observations in the living state
are more difficult, the sections become more necessary. At
a stage when the curvature of the embryo is still not much
marked, when the mouth invagination and the head cavities
have recently been formed, a transverse section through the
head (PI. 19, fig. 9) shows the epiblast thickest dorsally and
laterally, and quite thin on the ventral side. The mouth
invagination is seen opening ventrally, and on each side of
it are the two masses of cephalic mesoderm in which the
cavity is already obliterated, but the nuclei can be seen
arranged in a double row, showing how the cavity originally
lay between them. These masses of cephalic mesoderm are
dorsally in contact with one another, but ventrally they are
separated by the mouth invagination, so that their shape in
transverse section resembles that of a horseshoe. When
traced back into the neck it is seen that they overlap the
front ends of the trunk mesoderm, which lies nearer the
middle line, so that in some sections parts of both can be
seen at once, and hind ends of the head mesoderm masses
lying at the outer sides of those of the trunk.
The ectoderm of the head, besides its anterior dorsal
thickening which gives rise to the cerebral ganglion, is also
thickened at the sides in the mouth region, where it forms a
layer, two or three cells deep laterally, while it is only one
cell thick on the dorsal surface. This thickening is the
rudiment of the hood (“Kappe’’), the formation of which
will be more fully described later.
The alimentary canal in the head fills up a considerable
space; it is roughly oval in transverse section just behind
the mouth, and consists of a layer of well-defined cells which
in the earlier embryos enclose a distinct space, but this
disappears later. The alimentary canal in the head is
entirely derived from the ectodermal invagination by which
the mouth is formed, and the true endodermal part only
begins in the neck region. As the embryonic curvature
proceeds, the mouth lies more on the ventral (inner) side,
and becomes elongated, so as to form a somewhat slit-like
ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF SAGITTA. 361
opening lying longitudinally on the ventral side of the head,
and it therefore is visible in a number of consecutive trans-
verse sections. When traced backward to the neck the
alimentary canal suddenly becomes laterally compressed, and
lies more toward the dorsal surface of the body, marking the
point where the ectoderm of the stomodzum meets the true
endodermic gut. The latter is from the first very narrow,
and appears simply as a sort of partition between the masses
of mesoblast lying on each side (Pl. 19, fig. 8). Later it
becomes still narrower, and forms a thin lamina, slightly
thicker dorsally and ventrally than in the middle, and this
condition persists until a considerable time after hatching
(Pl. 19, figs. 18, 14, end. sep.). Just at the posterior end,
however, this extreme lateral compression does not take
place, and there, up till near the end of embryonic life, the
cellular nature of the septum remains visible (fig. 14,
end. sep.).
The mesoblast of the trunk and tail region is from the
beginning sharply distinguished into splanchnic and somatic
layers, which have different origins, the somatic being
derived directly from the primary hypoblast, the splanchnic
‘from the outer walls of the folds. In early stages a distinct
coelomic cavity is seen enclosed by the mesoblast ; it is tri-
angular in transverse section, and placed so that the
splanchnic layer forms the base, and the somatic layer the
other two sides of the triangle (fig. 8). In these ccelomic
spaces lie the genital cells, two on each side, and in contact
with the splanchnic layer ; and behind them, ata stage when
the folds have not yet finished growing backwards, the two
cavities open into one another, and a transverse section shows
a single archenteric cavity.
This condition with open ccelomic spaces does not, how-
ever, persist very long. As the embryo increases in length it
becomes correspondingly narrower, and since itis enclosed in
the egg-shell its growth is restricted, and apparently in con-
sequence of this its internal cavities become obliterated. In
sections rather later than those described above (PI. 19, figs.
362 L. DONCASTER.
9—12) it is seen that no coelomic space is present, and that
the mesoderm forms two strands running through the embryo
and separated from one another by the endodermic septum.
These mesodermic strands appear in cross-section roughly
circular in outline, and near the circumference the cell
boundaries are well marked ; but it is seen that the nuclei are
no longer at the inner ends of the cells, and that beyond them
the space which in early embryos was free and unoccupied is
now filled with cell-substance, in which the boundaries
between the separate cells are very indistinct. This condi-
tion appears to have been brought about, firstly, by the com-
pression of the whole embryo and consequent reduction of its
cavities; and secondly, by the sinking of the mesodermic
nuclei towards the bases of the cells, that is towards the
plane separating the mesoderm from the ectoderm. The cell
protoplasm of the centre of the mesodermal strands, that is
within the ring of nuclei, is of a much looser and more watery
character than that near the circumference, which probably
accounts for the lack of distinction between the cells; in
embryos in which the cytoplasm is less well preserved it tends
to form a mass of strands between which are clear spaces.
That this is not due entirely to faulty fixation and consequent
maceration is certain from the study of the living embryo, in
which an exactly similar appearance is seen at this stage as
was described in Section III. The basal part of the somatic
mesodermal cells is composed of much firmer protoplasm,
and the lines separating the cells can be seen distinctly at
this stage, and also when the embryo is more advanced. As
development progresses the nuclei become aggregated in a
dorsal and ventral mass on each side, while in the lateral
areas they disappear or become very scarce. Between the
nuclei and the base of the cells the protoplasm is becoming
modified, so that it now takes a deep brown stain with osmic
acid (figs. 13, 14), and a longitudinal section shows that the
cells are becoming elongated in the direction of the animal’s
length. ‘The study of the larva after hatching shows that
these dorsal and yentral groups of cells of the somatic meso-
ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF SAGITTA,. 363
derm give rise to the longitudinal muscles of the body, and
that while the greater part of the cell-substance is trans-
formed into muscle, the nucleus and a little protoplasm
remain at the inner end and ultimately form the lining of the
ceelom. ‘This will be further described in dealing with the
sections of larvee.
It will be convenient at this point to describe more fully
the four genital cells, which have now reached their per-
manent condition. ‘hey lie one behind the other in the
coelomic cavity on each side, and when this is obliterated
they become embedded in the mesoderm and lie at the sides
of the endodermic septum. The male and female cells appear
exactly alike, and are characterised by their extremely large
nuclei, each of which is generally oval in shape, is enclosed
by a definite membrane, and contains numerous nucleoli.
The latter are arranged round the edge of the nucleus, close
to the nuclear membrane, and they are generally of a rather
elongated oval shape. In the remainder of the nucleus a
network of fine threads can generally be made out, and since
only the nucleoli take up the stain, in some sections the
genital nuclei appear to be made up of a large number of
very small cells, each with a stained nucleus. Closer exami-
nation with a high power, however, shows that this is not the
case ; the genital nuclei are exactly like those of the rest of
the body, except that they are more than twice as large, and
the nucleoli are less crowded together. The cell protoplasm
of the genital cells is small in amount, and its limits are hard
to see, for when embedded in the mesoderm they become
enclosed in a sort of envelope of mesodermal cells, which,
however, do not at this stage form a definite epithelial
sheath. In some sections this mesodermal envelope is not
conspicuous, but in others (Pl. 19, fig. 15) small nuclei can be
seen closely appressed to the genital cells, and these differ
from the other nuclei of the body im staining evenly through-
out, instead of consisting of a mass of nucleoli embedded in a
colourless matrix.
The ectoderm of the trunk is characterised chiefly by the
364 L. DONCASTER.
development of the ventral ganglion. In the early stages
the ventral ectoderm does not differ from the dorsal, but
when the archenteric folds have not yet reached the pos-
terior end of the embryo, the ectoderm of the ventral
surface from just behind the head along the greater part of
the length of the body undergoes changes somewhat similar
to those described above in the somatic mesoderm. The
nuclei, which at first lie at the outer edges of the cells, sink
in till they reach their bases, and the cells at the same time
become larger than on the dorsal surface (fig. 8). There is |
then a proliferation of nuclei along two bands lying in the
ventro-lateral areas, and at the same time the whole ectoderm
of the ventral half of the body increases in thickness (figs. 10,
11). In this way two bands of closely packed nuclei appear
just beneath the developing muscle-cells of the somatic
mesoderm, and when the latter are deeply stained the two
look very similar, but are always separated by a clear
dividing line. In the dorsal half of the body, and also
ventrally in the tail, this thickening and immigration of the
nuclei does not take place, and the cells retain longer their
original character. As development proceeds the ectodermal
cells along the mid-dorsal region become very thin, and con-
stitute a mere membrane separating the mesoderm from the
exterior ; but traced downwards from the mid-dorsal line the
ectoderm becomes steadily thicker, and is thickest along the
ventral middle line.
V. DEVELOPMENT OF THE YOUNG SAGITTA.
The young Sagitta at the time of hatching differs very
markedly in structure from the adult, so that the term larva
might almost be used to describe it, especially as a rather
sudden change of structure takes place after a few days,
which may be compared with a metamorphosis. It is about
1 mm. in length, and so transparent as to be almost invisible,
but can be recognised by the naked eye as a minute shining
ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF SAGITTA. 365
body, especially when it swims. The larvez, as a rule, lie
motionless near the surface, but swim in a jerky manner
when disturbed, just as does the adult Sagitta. Inthe young
at hatching (PI. 20, fig. 16) the tail-fin is already present to
some extent in all cases, but in 8. enflata there is already a
lateral fin beginning to be formed, continuous with the tail-
fin and extending forward as far as the genital cells. The
head is rounded and separated from the trunk by a slight
neck. The line separating the ectoderm from the underlying
mesoderm is sharply defined, and the mesoderm forms a
solid cord running through the length of the animal, sepa-
rated into two halves by the endodermic septum (end. sep.),
which is expanded in the head into a bulb, hke a thermo-
meter. The ectoderm of the anterior half of the body is
much thickened ventrally, forming the rudiment of the
abdominal ganglion (gang. v.); and scattered about the
surface, especially in the head region, are tactile organs, like
those of the adult, consisting of extremely fine bristles
arranged in a fan-like manner transversely to the length of
the animal (¢. 0.). At the base of each of these organs there
are groups of sensory cells, which become more obvious in
the later stages; but one of them, which later is very
pronounced, is already noticeable just in front of the tail on
each side.
Not much of the internal structure can be seen in the
living larve, but the four genital cells can generally be
observed embedded in the mesoderm in close contact with
the endodermal septum, just behind the middle of the
animal. ‘They are seen better in specimens stained and
mounted in balsam, and these show the rudiments of longi-
tudinal bands of muscle just below the ectoderm.
On the second day the larva has slightly increased in
length and the fin has grown larger, but has still a very
ragged and irregular appearance. Early on the third day
no pronounced change has taken place, the fin is larger and
more regular, long fin-rays having appeared at even intervals.
The musele-bands are more developed, and show a transverse
366 L. DONCASTER.
striation as in the muscles of the adult. During the third
and fourth days very considerable changes take place, giving
rise to a type of structure closely resembling that of the
adult animal. Up to this time the body has been solid,
containing no cavities whatever, and the first indication of
the change is the formation of a cavity in the mesoderm of
each side of the body and also in that of the head. At the
same time the endodermic septum dividing the two meso-
dermic cords from one another becomes thickened in its
anterior half, namely, as far back as the genital cells, so.
marking out the rudiment of the alimentary canal (al.),
though a lumen does not appear in it for several days. In
the head, however, a cavity appears in the front end of the
alimentary canal, which was formed in the embryo by
epiblastic invagination, so that a buccal cavity is now present
opening by the mouth to the exterior. The rudiment of the
hood (“ Kappe ” or “ prepuce’’) of the adult has been form-
ing as an ectodermal fold, and at this stage has reached
considerable proportions, but since it can only suitably be
studied in sections it need not be dealt with here. Under it,
however, at this stage four or five small hooks make their
appearance, the most posterior of which is the longest, while
the front one is hardly visible; as they increase in size new
ones begin to grow in front, until the normal number for the
species is reached (Pl. 20, figs. 18, 19, hks.).
The ectodermic swelling in the front of the head, which
was already visible in the embryo, has grown larger and
forms the rudiment of the brain (gang. cb.), while at the sides
of the mouth a rounded body appears on each side, which is
seen in section to be the lateral ganglion of Hertwig (the
vestibular of Grassi). The eyes (¢.) also appear at this stage
as a pair of minute black specks on the surface of the head,
so small that their structure cannot be made out or compared
with that of the adult, except that, as in the adult, the black
pigment is surrounded by an oval transparent area. The
muscles of the head also take their definitive form during the
third and fourth days; before that time the cells have had
ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF SAGITTA. 367
an embryonic character, but now they develop into muscle-
fibres arranged as in the adult, with special reference to the
movements of the mouth and the action of the hooks.
Behind the head striking changes are also taking place.
The abdominal ganglion is becoming somewhat reduced in
size, and at each end of it the ectodermal cells assume a
remarkable structure, which is especially pronounced in the
neck region, but occurs also at the posterior end of the
ganglion, between it and the fin, which now extends con-
siderably further forward than the genital cells. The ecto-
dermal cells in the parts indicated lose their cell-contents
almost entirely, and become so vacuolated as to resemble the
parenchyma of a plant in appearance; this occurs most
markedly at the sides of the body, but to a less extent
dorsally and ventrally also (Pl. 20, figs. 18, 19, pt.). The
cells so modified resemble exactly the curious vesicular tissue
found in the trunk of Spadella draco, the only difference
being that the cells in the Sagitta larve are much smaller
and are found in a much less area. This parenchymatous
tissue is most prominent about the fourth and fifth days, but
it persists as long as I have been able to keep the young
animals alive (fifteen days).
In the tail region the fin has become divided into two
parts, a tail-fin (f. ¢.), extending a considerable distance
forward along the body, but separated by a gap from the
lateral fin of each side. In the gap is the large tactile organ
mentioned above, situated on a prominent ectodermal swell-
ing (fig. 18, t. 0.). There is at this stage no trace whatever
of the anterior pair of fins of the adult, so that the young
animal closely resembles the genus Krohnia, in which they
are permanently absent, and in which the tail-fin extends
forward as in the young Sagitta.
The most important changes which take place during the
third and fourth days are those affecting the ccelom. The
solid condition of the mesoderm. described above persists
until the third day after hatching, but on that day, unless
development is retarded by cold weather, the mesoderm cells
368 L. DONCASTER.
begin to separate again into two layers, a somatic layer next
to the body-wall, and a thin splanchnic layer surrounding the
endoderm, and in this way the ccelomic cavities reappear.
At first there are two small cavities in the head, and two
large ones extending the whole length of the body, those in
the head being separated from those behind by a transverse
septum. These may be regarded as the same as those
formed early in embryonic life, when the head cavities are
separated off from the rest of the coelom. After the two
posterior coelomic cavities have reappeared, and extend
through the whole length of the body, important changes
take place in the region of the genital cells, which result in
the division of the ccelom into an anterior and posterior part,
and so give rise to the condition found in the adult.
Up to this time the genital cells have lain embedded in
the mesoderm a little behind the abdominal ganglion, and
pressed close to the alimentary canal; they are oval in shape,
and their longest direction coincides with the long axis of
the body (fig. 17). At about this time, however, they begin
to change their position, and gradually come to lie with their
long axes placed transversely to the length of the animal.
They then move slowly across the coelomic cavity until they
reach the body-wall on each side, when they again come to
lie end to end with their long axes in the same direction as
the length of the body. This process is gradual and takes
several hours, and while the large and conspicuous oval
nuclei travel across, protoplasmic connections can be seen
still attaching them to the wall of the alimentary canal, and,
when they approach the body-wall, also to the splanchnic
mesoderm (PI. 20, figs. 20, 21).
While they are traversing the ccelom the two of each pair
lie side by side close together, but not in contact, and
during their progress a transverse septum (sep. ¢7.) 1s formed
between them, so that when they arrive at the outer sides,
against the body-wall, a septum is left across the ccelom,
dividing the body-cavity of each side into an anterior trunk
and a posterior tail portion, as inthe adult. ‘he way in which
ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF SAGITTYA. 369
this septum is formed is not absolutely clear, for the small size
of the animal and the extreme minuteness of the cells made the
actual process difficult to follow with certainty. There are
two possible means by which such a septum might arise:
first, by the splanchnic mesoderm rising up as a fold, and
carrying the genital cells across with it till they reached the
body-wall (or, what would amount to the same thing, the
genital cells moving across and drawing the splanchnic
mesoderm with them in the form of a fold); secondly, the
septum might arise by the coalescence of cellular envelopes
in which the genital cells are enclosed. Such envelopes were
described and figured by Hertwig, but in the species which I
have studied they have been exceedingly difficult to make
out, and I have only rarely been able to see them. By
comparing a number of larve, both mounted whole and in
sections, there seems to be no doubt that the genital cells
are enclosed in a membrane which is separate from them,
and which contains here and there a few nuclei (PI. 21, fig.
32). The nuclei are much less numerous than those repre-
sented in Hertwig’s figures, but they indicate that the
envelope is a cellular structure, which is no doubt derived
from the mesoderm in which the genital cells have been
embedded since an early embryonic stage. When the
genital cells move across the body-cavity their envelopes are
elongated transversely to the body of the animal, and
between the two cells their respective envelopes lie parallel
with one another, almost, if not quite, in contact. If when
the migration of the genital cells begins their envelopes
remain attached to the splanchnic mesoderm at the point
between the genital cells, while elsewhere they become free
and move across with the cells which they enclose, when the
latter have crossed the cavity and reached the body-wall a
two-layered septum will have been produced across the body,
with the two genital cells lying on opposite sides of it.
After comparing a large number of larve, alive and stained,
it appears to me that the septum is formed in this way, for I
have never seen any indication of a fold of the splanchnic
VOL, 46, PART 2,—NEW SERIES, Z
370 L. DONCASTER.
mesoderm, either in the early or later stages of the migration.
The body-cavity 1s narrow dorso-ventrally, so that the cells
appear to be in contact with both upper and lower walls
during their passage. In many larve the septum appears
from the first single, but it can be seen in some that it is two-
layered, for the two layers are not in contact (fig. 21). This,
however, would also be the case if it were formed by a fold.
As the genital cells cross the cavity they retain connections
with the splanchnic mesoderm for a time, apart from the
septum; the anterior (female) cell generally has a strand of
tissue crossing to the wall of the alimentary canal in front of
the septum, and separated from it by a space, while the
posterior (male) has a similar strand behind the septum (figs.
20, 21). These connections are fainter than the true septum,
and appear to contain no nuclei; when the genital cells
reach the body-wall and take up their permanent position
the connections with the splanchnic mesoderm disappear.
At first there are only very few nuclei in the septum, and
one of these generally appears at its outer end, next to the
body-wall, and this makes that end of the septum very con-
Spicuous as soon as it is complete, almost suggesting at times
that afold of the somatic mesoderm is forming, although this,
as a matter of fact, does not take place. The nuclei of the
envelopes seem to get collected between the genital cells, and
so appear in the septum, while on the outer sides of the two
cells no nuclei appear during the migration.
Taking all the facts together, it seems almost certain that
the transverse septum is formed in the way here described ;
but if it should turn out that it is formed by a mesoblast
fold, as suggested by Hertwig, the difference is really of less
importance than appears at first. ‘The envelopes of the
genital cells are mesoblastic structures, derived from the
mesoderm in which the cells have been embedded, so that
in either case the septum is formed by a double sheet of
splanchnic mesoderm in relation with and in consequence of
the migration of the genital cells from one side of the body-
cavity to the other. In any case the septum is formed
ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF SAGI'TTA. B71
directly in connection with this migration, and in a distinctly
different way from that which gives rise to the anterior
septum between the head-cavities and the rest of the colom.
The theoretical bearing of these points will be discussed more
fully later.
The completion of the septum between the trunk and tail
brings to an end the period of development which may be
described as larval, for the animal has now essentially the
form and structure of an adult. It still differs from the
latter in many important respects,—for example, the ovaries
and testes of each side are still each represented by a single
cell, and there are no genital ducts. ‘he alimentary canal is
without a lumen, except in the mouth region, and the anus
has not yet been formed. ‘The abdominal ganglion is also
enormously larger than in the adult, relatively to the size of
the animal; there are no anterior fins, the parenchymatous
tissue in the neck region and behind the ganglion is very
conspicuous, and many minor differences still exist. he
changes, however, which transform the young of this stage
into the adult condition are very gradual, extending over
several weeks, if not more, and comparatively few could be
observed in the young Sagitta raised from the egg.
During the first few days after hatching the alimentary
canal increases steadily in thickness, and its nuclei become
prominent, but the thicker portion ends abruptly opposite
the genital cells, so distinguishing the true gut from the
longitudinal tail septum, with which it is continuous. A
lumen begins to appear in the alimentary canal shortly after
the reappearance of the ccelom. As the ccelomic cavities
grow wider the alimentary canal becomes supported by a
dorsal and ventral longitudinal mesentery, and about the
seventh day its end can be seen bending down in the
mesentery to touch the ectoderm. On the eighth or ninth
day the anus is formed at the junction of ectoderm and
endoderm; it is not exactly opposite the transverse septum,
but a short distance in front of it, and a space is left between
the two layers of splanchnic mesoderm, extending from the
372 S DONCASTER.
posterior end of the gut to the transverse septum. The
space is in the ventral half of the body; dorsally the longi-
tudinal mesentery extends continuously from the trunk into
the tail. This arrangement is also found in the adult
Sagitta, but is most pronounced in 8. lyra, in which the
distance between the anus and the transverse septum is
considerable. When the anus is formed a swelling can
generally be seen in the rectal portion of the gut, just in
front of it, and the endoderm cells develop cilia, which are
especially active in this region. Small particles can be seen
circulating in the distended rectum, so that the young
animal probably begins to take food at this stage.
On the eighth day a horseshoe-shaped group of nuclei is
seen in stained specimens on the back of the head, rather
behind the eyes; the two points of the horseshoe are
directed backwards, and the nuclei are arranged in a double
line. It is probable that this is the rudiment of the ciliated
“ olfactory organ” (the “ corona ciliata ” of Grassi).
The abdominal ganglion begins to be gradually reduced in
size relatively to the rest of the body, and its elements
become more completely separated, so that the nuclei are
packed in a dense mass at each side of the ganglion, while
the mid-ventral region appears clear, and is composed
exclusively of fibres. This gives the ganglion a markedly
bilateral appearance, especially in stained preparations.
In the head the muscles have already assumed the arrange-
ment of the adult by the sixth day, and the cerebral and
vestibular (lateral) ganglia are now conspicuous. The hood
is arranged just as in the adult, and a few days later the
cuticular rods which support the teeth (“ Stutzplatten” of
Hertwig) make their appearance, running forwards and
inwards from the region of the hooks, and ending in front
below the cerebral ganglion. No teeth, however, are as yet
present.
These changes are all practically complete on the tenth or
twelfth day, and on a few occasions when I succeeded in
keeping the young alive beyond that time no further altera-
ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF SAGITTA, 373
tions took place. The further development, leading to the
adult condition, has therefore to be studied in specimens
taken in the tow-net, and the consideration of it will be post-
poned until after the sections of the early young have been
discussed.
VI. FurtHer Stopy or LARVAL DEVELOPMENT BY MEANS
OF SECTIONS.
The general course of the development after hatching up
to the end of the second week has been described in the last
section, and therefore only those points will be dealt with
here which are better seen in section than in the living or
mounted animal. It will be most convenient to consider first
the sections of the head at different stages, and afterwards
those of the trunk and tail.
A transverse section through the mouth region of a larva
killed a few hours after hatching differs little from that
through the embryonic head; it is rather smaller, owing to
the lengthening of the body at the expense of its width, and
it is also becoming more obvious that the ectoderm at the
sides of the head is becoming thickened and consists of more
than one layer of cells (hd.).
On the second day (fig. 22) little change has taken place ;
the nuclei on the ventro-lateral parts of the ectoderm are
more numerous, and at the sides of the head that layer shows
signs of splitting, but otherwise the structure is closely
similar to that of the first-day larva. By the third day,
however, development has proceeded considerably; the
tissues are beginning to take on their permanent form, and
in consequence the definite structure of the head becomes
marked ont.
Beginning with the ectoderm, it is seen in fig. 23 that the
hood has now been formed by a splitting off of the two outer
cell layers at the sides of the head, but on the dorsal surface
they remain continuous with the general ectoderm, and so
374 L. DONCASTER.
appear to constitute a fold on each side (hd.). In sections
taken more anteriorly these two folds are continuous with
one another ventrally, and form a membrane covering the
anterior part of the mouth; but further back they do not
reach so far down, and appear in section as flaps at the sides
of the head (figs. 23—26). There is a tendency for the two
layers of the hood to split apart from one another in the
region of its insertion, and so give rise to a cavity (hd. cav.)
which is sometimes large in sections, but in life apparently
always narrow if present at all.
It is also seen that the epidermis is thickened under the
hood, especially near the insertion of the latter; this con-
dition persists in the adult in the anterior part of the head,°
and, since the thickening is in just the region from which the
hooks (‘ Greifhaken”) grow out, it is possible that it is
connected with their formation. Just at the corners of the
mouth there is an aggregation of nuclei which will give rise
to the lateral ganglia (gang. 1.) (called vestibular by Grassi).
The nuclei plainly belong to the ectoderm, and some sections
show the rudiments of the ganglia extending further forward
than the mesoderm, and therefore Hertwig’s supposition that
these ganglia belonged to the mesoderm must be regarded as
incorrect. On the dorsal surface a lens-shaped thickening of
the ectoderm is now visible on each side, forming the rudi-
ment of the eyes which appear in this stage (e.).
The mouth and alimentary canal of the head have not
altered much on the third day, but the cell layers are
becoming more definite, and a small cavity has already
appeared.
The mesoderm is beginning to be transformed chiefly into
muscle, but on the third day this change is not yet complete ;
the cells, however, have a looser and less regular appearance
than before.
During the fourth and fifth days the structures which were
outlined on the third day are further developed, and by the
sixth day they are approaching completion. Figs. 24—26
represent three sections through the head of an individual of
ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF SAGITTA. 375
this age. The most prominent objects in the first two of
these are the vestibular ganglia lying at the sides of the
mouth, which are now almost completely developed, and
consist of an inner mass of ‘‘ Punktsubstanz,” surrounded by
a layer of deeply staining nuclei.
The cerebral ganglion is also complete by this time; it lies
at the anterior extremity of the head and to a large extent in
the hood, in which it extends ventrally nearly as far as the
mouth. In the adult it becomes more restricted, as does the
abdominal ganglion. At this stage it consists of an outer
layer of nuclei covering a deeper mass of “‘ Punktsubstanz,”
but the latter is more restricted than the nuclear layer. Fig.
25 shows on the dorsal surface of the mouth region two large
masses of nuclei in the ectoderm, representing the eyes (e.),
while in this figure and in fig. 24 the hooks are seen lying at
the sides of the head, covered by the hood (hks.).
The development of the mesodermal structures has now
proceeded considerably, and the chief muscles of the head
are already differentiated. Their general arrangement is
indicated in fig. 26 (h. mus.), where it is seen that they do
not differ much from those of the adult. Behind the mouth
the pharynx lies near the dorsal surface, and when the
muscles are formed a cavity appears just below it, which
corresponds with the cavity called by Hertwig the head
ceelom. A little further forward a cavity is present on each
side more dorsally (figs. 24, 25, b. c.1.), and these are
undoubtedly coelomic. Already about the third day the
pharynx is seen to be surrounded by a layer of cells which
belong to the mesoderm, corresponding to the splanchnic
layer (fig. 23), but, as in the trunk, these cells later be-
come so closely connected with the alimentary canal as to
be indistinguishable from it. About the fifth day, however,
a cavity appears on each side between these cells and the
outer layer of cephalic mesoderm, which is now being
changed into muscles. This cavity is the head coelom, and
that below the pharynx further back appears to be also
coelomic, and to be formed by the coalescence in this region
376 L. DONCASTER.
of the originally paired head cavities. At this stage the
head-ccelom is clearly separated from the hood cavity, but
later the latter seems to be obliterated, and the ccelom extends
into the base of the hood.
The alimentary canal of the head has now a well-defined
cavity, which extends back into the neck; in its walls cell
boundaries can no longer be distinguished, and they appear
as continuous masses of tissue with nuclei at intervals.
The latest sections made were of ninth-day larvee (Pl. 20,
fig. 27); these show the same structures as are described
above, but are further advanced, and approach more nearly
the adult condition.
Before turning to the structure of the trunk, that of the
neck must be shortly described. When a series of sections
of the sixth day is followed backward, a little behind that
represented in fig. 26, a pair of oval cavities appear suddenly,
one on each side, between the pharynx and the epidermis
(fig. 28). These are the anterior ends of the trunk ccelom,
which diverge a little in front (cf. the figures of the living
head), and are overlapped both dorsally and ventrally by the
mesodermal structures of the head. Followed back, how-
ever, the latter disappear rapidly, and at the same time the
pharynx bends towards the ventral surface, so that the two
ccelomic cavities, which take up the greater part of the
section, are separated dorsally by a thin mesentery. The
epidermis begins at this point to assume the vacuolated
structure described above, but this is, as a rule, not well
shown in sections owing to shrinkage; sometimes, however,
as in fig. 29, p. t., it 1s well seen. A paired mass of nuclei is
also seen in the dorsal epidermis, which is the rudiment of
the “olfactory organ” (“corona ciliata,” ol.).
ea
3 _ .
‘ ait
i ’ ri
a
rae
\
$
-
—
oo
y —
ide
ve
~~
a *
a wan
J 4 Ys -
. é
a, ne . 7
-_ e
oe
<= a : e ie
a bd. rts _ * aa a
\
‘\.
“rare Seaauneterteses
aE a a et eee ro
capers fears mt Sg EI PST ISTO Rete sings oisene sotaranpmn sain teas ;
7
7
~\
L6NS L420
7
Lot,
es al
ae - J
Ss
ie)
PE TS
{
en RTI LE re cereae c
\
|
\
mules
\
|
\
\
ne
iy
xm
6.e.1
Fig.25.
/u.maas.
~
.¥- 5
LOnaon.
J 2 ee
H Uth Lin
is “Kee ( be tel, 2 a 4
: 24 rt. i -’
feed —- n . a
4 : Ye OL
Se
: Ss
*
¥ a 5 le
LIBRARY
OF THE
7 Haye T Tt. ¥ OF "ELINGIS 4
enero’ OF ILLINOIS
\\
Se a SSS Sh >
Pane tit hal 65 cp en Pin
~
= rs aY ii” , .
, =
7 2 S ‘ ' - S %
22
Quart Sourn, Mior Sci VALENS AL Al
i
ys
Sw
* =
wid
:
. ae
Am, og) eal
7 = s5 /
. ¢
ae’), ne
y
©
=
ia
=
Ee.
o
Ps
:
3
'<
C
‘<
=
ON A CESTODE FROM CESTRACION. 399
Lf
“On a Cestode from Cestracion.
By
William A. Haswell, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.,
Professor of Biology, University of Sydney.
With Plates 22—924.
General Features.
Tue Cestode, the results of a study of which are embodied
in the present paper, occurs, usually in abundance, in the large
intestine of the Port Jackson shark. It is one of these re-
markable forms to which attention appears to have been first
specially directed by P. J. van Beneden (1 and 2), in which
the proglottides are set free from the posterior end of the
strobila long before full maturity has been reached, and only
attain a stage corresponding to that of the “ripe” proglot-
tides of a Tenia after having pursued an independent
existence for some considerable time.
The strobila is actively locomotive, and appears to use the
suckers more in connection with progression than as organs
of permanent attachment. It is only 9 or 10 cm. long in the
preserved condition. There is an elongated neck-region with
a breadth, in the preserved specimens, of half a millimétre.
The four sessile bothridia (fig. 1) are somewhat spoon-shaped,
the anterior end being the narrower. The margin of the
bothridium is very prominent, finely crenulate, and in the
living condition extremely extensile, so that the shape is
undergoing constant modification. In preserved specimens
VOL. 46, PART 3.—NEW SERIES... BB
400 WILLIAM A. HASWELL.
they are about 1 mm. in length. Each bothridium is so
directed that a line running along the floor of its cavity in
the direction of the long axis, and prolonged forwards, would
meet the median axis of the neck at an angle of about 45°.
The cavity is not divided or reticulated. At its anterior
narrower end, where its margin is lowest, each bothridium
bears a small circular accessory sucker.
The last segment (fig. 2) is 5 mm. long and 2 mm. in
breadth in the preserved specimens; relatively narrower in
the extended living condition.
Separated segments are to be found in abundance along
with the entire strobile, moving actively through the intes-
tinal contents. In the course of these movements the shape
undergoes constant alteration, the phases through which it
passes being comparable to those of a Ligula in its most active
condition. ‘The anterior end becomes thrust sharply forwards
until the “ head” becomes long and narrow and pointed, and
the “neck” constriction becomes more or less completely
obliterated. Then suddenly the anterior end becomes drawn
together and thickened to form a distinct rounded knob,
constricted off from the rest (fig. 3). The part behind this
“head” now becomes drawn forwards, the region imme-
diately following on the head gradually becoming thickened,
while the head itself becomes gradually retracted until it
nearly completely disappears, to become again thrust for-
wards as before. The effect of these movements is clear
enough. By the thrusting forwards of the narrowed head
end, the thick matter contained in the intestine is readily
penetrated, the subsequently formed knob at the anterior end
then forming a point d’appui, towards which the rest of
the proglottis becomes drawn forwards.
These independent proglottides attain a relatively con-
siderable size, the largest being about 11 mm. in length and
1:75 mm. in greatest breadth.
Attention has been recently directed by Liihe (18) to
isolated proglottides from Acanthias, in which there is a
distinct mobile “ head” similar to that above described, but
ON A CESTODE FROM CESTRACION. 401
covered with spinules; and a similar case had previously
been observed by Pintner.
The early separation of the proglottides in this and other
species is obviously correlated with the free locomotive habits
of the strobila. With a much longer train of connected
proglottides, the posterior loaded with eggs, such movements
would be rendered difficult or impossible. The spiral valve
in the intestine of the Hlasmobranch renders it possible for
the separated proglottides, without definite organs of adhesion,
yet with an adaptation for creeping movement, to remain
within their host until such time as the uterus has become
fully charged with eggs.
This Cestode is to be referred to the genus Phylloboth-
rium of P. J. van Beneden. In the definition given by that
author! the bothridia are described as notched externally,
but the notch is not present in one of van Beneden’s own
species (P. auricula), and cannot be looked upon as of
generic importance. I propose the name of P. vagans for
the Cestracion parasite, which appears to be distinct from all
the species described hitherto.”
The only species of Phyllobothrium, of the structure of
which a detailed account has been published, are P. thridax
and P.Dohrnii. These have both been pretty fully described
by Zschokke (20, p. 327 et seq.) ; but, as mature segments
were not met with by that author, many features of import-
ance, more particularly in the reproductive apparatus, were
overlooked.
Integument and Nervous System.
The cuticle (fig. 4, cw.) is homogeneous and not divided into
layers. Immediately beneath it are the usual external longi-
tudinal (e./.m.) and circular (e.c.on.) layers of muscular
fibres. The subcuticular cellular layer is much _ better
developed in the strobila than in the free proglottides, in
1 1, p. 120, and 2, p. 128.
2] have not seen the original description of P. gracile, Wedl., from
Torpedo marmorata, but only the brief definition given by Lonnberg (11).
402 WILLIAM A. HASWELN.
which it has undergone a reduction in thickness. A similar
reduction is observable in the internal longitudinal layer of
muscular fibres (v. 1. m.), which are well developed in all parts
of the strobila, and very conspicuous in transverse sections
owing to their highly refracting character, whereas in the
free proglottides they are barely discernible in transverse
sections, and in longitudinal appear as a few inconspicuous,
often degenerate, fibres.
The nervous system (fig. 3, fig. 4, ».¢.) 1s im no way
remarkable, consisting of the usual head-ganglion in the
scolex, and the pair of longitudinal nerve-cords with their —
branches and commissures. In the separate proglottides,
owing to the reduction in the thickness of the subcuticular
cellular and internal longitudinal muscular layers, the nerve-
cords come to be situated more superficially than in the
strobila. They meet anteriorly in the “head,” where there is
a sheht thickening of the nature of a rudimentary ganglion.
As in many other forms, two of the four longitudinal
excretory vessels of the anterior region—the dorsal pair—
become reduced greatly in diameter in the posterior pro-
glottides. In the last proglottis these open on the exterior
at the posterior end. In the free proglottides (fig. 3) only
the ventral pair remain. ‘These are very narrow towards the
anterior end, while posteriorly they are very wide and very
sinuous; their external openings are situated near together
at the posterior extremity. The excretory vessels in general
have a wall consisting of a thin layer of fibrillated proto-
plasmic material; but in the scolex and neck region the four
main vessels have a fairly thick layer of iongitudinal muscular
fibres.
Reproductive Organs.
The reproductive system will be best described first as it
appears in its fully developed condition in the free pro-
elottides.
The testis (fig. 3, fe.) consists of numerous rounded lobes
extending from the neck to behind the genital aperture.
ON A OCESTODE FROM CESTRACION. 403
They le in the central or medullary region, and are thus
situated on a deeper plane than the vitelline glands. They
average about ‘06 mm. in diameter. Hach lobe has a fine,
thin-walled efferent duct; the ducts of neighbouring lobes
anastomose to form a network. From this network are
derived larger trunks, which towards the anterior end, and
near the ventral surface of the proglottis, combine together
to form a single median vas deferens (s.d.). The latter is
a closely coiled, widish, thin-walled tube, situated in the
middle of the region in front of the genital aperture. Its
wall consists of a reticulated material with superficially placed
nuclei. No muscular layer was definitely made out, but
muscular fibres must be present, as in the living condition the
tube is observed to undergo peristaltic contractions. The
“ prostate ” cells described by various authors (see Braun, 5)
as occurring in certain Cestodes, are not present. This main
testicular duct is always packed full of sperms, and it plays
the part of a vesicula seminalis as well as a vas deferens.
It terminates by passing through the wall of the cirrus sac
and becoming the ejaculatory duct. The cirrus sac has a
wall composed of two layers of muscle. Within it, when the
cirrus is not protruded, lies coiled up a long tube, continuous
internally with the vas deferens. This tube (fig. 5) has a
muscular wall, consisting of an outer thicker layer of longi-
tudinal fibres and an inner of circular fibres. Internal to this
is a homogeneous cuticular layer, beset on its inner surface in
the outer part of the tube with numerous excessively minute
spinules. Outside the muscular layer is a layer of cells
similar to the myoblasts of the oviduct and vagina. In the
space between the wall of the cirrus sac and the enclosed tube
are to be observed numerous muscular fibres which appear to
run about in every direction.
The outer end of the tube is continuous with the outer
extremity of the cirrus sac, and might be described as
invaginated within it were it not for the circumstance that its
inner end is not free, but passes through the wall of the sac
to become continuous with the vas deferens.
4.04, WILLIAM A. HASWELL.
The mode of protrusion of the cirrus is rendered evident on
an examination of living animals and of sections of speci-
mens with the organs in various states. The strong muscular
wall of the cirrus sac contracts, and the narrow outer end
with which the invaginated tube is continuous becomes thrust
out through the genital opening. Further pressure causes
the tube to become evaginated as a narrow cylindrical process,
the cirrus, with a double wall, the space between the two
walls being continuous with the cavity of the cirrus sac. The
retraction takes places through the agency of the muscular
fibres that have been above referred to as situated in the
cavity of the cirrus sac; when the cirrus is protruded these
are put upon the stretch, and each of them is found to be
connected internally with one of the myoblasts in the wall of
the tube, and to run inwards towards the imner part of the
wall of the cirrus sac.
The ovary (figs. 3 and 6, ov.), as in many other Cestodes,
consists of two large lateral portions and a small median
isthmus connecting them together, the whole, on a dorsal or
ventral view, resembling a letter H, with the limbs thick and
near together and the transverse part very short.
ad
my
.
: .
, J
was 4 *
i
=
——__LIpRAnY
=. OFTHE - =
mivers y OF TLLINOIS: =
ou
ers
Yd
:
a
;
= \
.
;
=
pat
:
PA é
a
E
7 <
ie 4 ~~
;
;
®
Nae ae)
ee ee
OOOdA
. &
Welolovey PS
RL Re Oro):
Ga RSS ED
W.A.H, del
= ae
Fi S S. Huth, Lith® London.-
ar a
= -- oat 7 z ve P
ic. hah ae || , os if ve
Ae ~ ," —s — es C= 4 mt
Se vw? - y a
as; at Pe ~~ o. hs
fiiat 3 sae 5 sug?
7 » . ~ -
5 pi? 2 f . 7 es
anes alee. [oe
Ke 7 3
tt a
; ¥ Ne hnd fe
LIDPARY-
_-. . OF THE
operon OF TLLINOIS
fy
AIBRARY
OF-THE
Garver’ Y OF
LLINOIS
\\
po ----- ov.
)
iS ee OC
Se See eetes
W.A.H, del.
Onant Sourn Mion Se VASGNS I 23
vi
\
PASSAT
Stee
emt eid
2
Cra
SU\0\ o
erent ar,
ae
Yr L noon
cl onaon.
Lith®
a
wn
17
thw
LIppany
~Fops press
OF THE” ae
‘OC? LINGIS —
-
\
|
i
|
|
rr + =
"gill
/ \ Poe
—
yt
<2
oe
P 4 ‘ ;
= : Ce.
t
~' +
; a ae Lt
> 4)
| , >
, res d wy ¥ eit ina
ele ET See ERR? ON
ry é
: ° . %
iy ri td s . ~ —/: ; Pi i
v1 Ye a Pa i pad
: ye . ce ee SF
.
4 we? “ " a
hittet re BS Pee fon ig
es .
2 at PAS sii
ey
es ‘ a oe
<2E wis ee ‘
, a at
f 7 .
: ii 6
: «
.
it -
5
i
;
*
‘
aad “@
&
«
in
a
- ¢
"LINOIS
~
-
: 2
MEY 0:
\
wes eee SL
OD
O°
on
| Oe
y, \
i D4)
i 8
-
che cea ily Ps
5
a a oot
4
fal |
‘0
t
3¢,3d ,6a,68
Hniin.MicicxXee. Gol AL V/-
ay be ' :
id ‘ f \ ae rae a
‘ Yi Ki ” .
d ;
\ be Yn Bite , % sescen ent saigis,
ER OEE 6 IO 7 ee
. the
‘.
a
é in
we
‘ o ‘
fo & . ay =
. + .
a A {
te 4 i
’
a, .
SS gl : ;
enn, we .f
aha 3
ee = a : €
> 4
3
x
es
é
4
oe By ;
ry « £
€ ¥ te r
\ *
Po < : :
P : ‘
a
~
m -
. ? —
al
ch :
A, me *
‘ 7 7 s
- a.
p . %
‘ ¥
* ‘ 3
» ® A
* ‘ -
a
ee 4
- .
Riis ¥ 07 ILLINOIS
LIBRARY
OF THE
vs
~
\
et
sthasnenitinensteanengenei diamaaapasin ohrireieapaiaian inline:
> aie ee
- 7 _.
wera ©
—— As
al. apenas te hie tae GS
.
-
%.C
m.m
1
Figs.124,12c
17,112 sae
of 2
lt 4 1 ‘ i ae
Ol : “05
ae meee,
<< f OF ME.
(
4
\
Figs.112,11k,11m,117,
Edwin Wilsor, Cambridge.
v
oF LLINOIS .
LIBRARY Sees a
OF THE =. eae
+
— . “4
_ ‘
7 oe
fe
+ 4 -
- ; ad ‘
« ?
. % >
<
| be oT :
Ea hy hab Soak
” Pe, -
: ~
*
“
* ‘4 in ~
. & |
= ]
©
x
- =
4
”, pf
- 8 4
. : x we
ery
7 ‘
Ss z i ~
.
-
r ¢
*
.
. ¥ 2
» «> a
- 2
2 ig? J ¢
on /
i w x ;
Pies
ul of
.
; ‘
* #
. & bal #
i] - q
a }
.
& r‘é x
- Z
‘ ‘
‘
,
.
. _ %
i
.
- .
* PA . 7
alee
Z ~
pr
«
°
; -
vw a
- a
METAMORPHOSIS OF CORYSTES CASSIVELAUNUS. 461
OThe Metamorphosis of Corystes Cassivelaunus
(Pennant).
By
Robert Gurney, B.A.(Oxon.), F.Z.S.
With Plates 29—31.
Tae material upon which the following account of the
development of Corystes is based has been derived entirely
from tow-net collections, taken generally in or just outside
Plymouth Sound, between February and May of the present
year. Occurring first on February 21st, the larve were
obtained in small numbers fairly regularly from that time
onwards. Advanced stages occurred first on March 15th,
and in considerable numbers. The tow-net collections of
April 14th, taken in the West Channel, were remarkable for
the extraordinary abundance of the zoza stage of Corystes.
They abounded on that date to the almost complete exclusion
of all other zozas, nearly all the specimens being at an
advanced stage of development. Since April 14th the
zozas have continued to occur, but very few have been
found in the early stages.
Zozeas taken in the tow-nets have been kept successfully
in plunger jars for considerable lengths of time, and several
have moulted into the Megalopa stage, the latter being kept
through the next moult, either in a jar immersed in running
water or in a beaker, in which the water was kept in motion
by a stream of air bubbles.
462 ROBERT GURNEY.
Habits of the Larve.
The zova of Corystes is probably the same as that
described by Weldon (1889), and figured as “a Portunid
Zz0xa, though it differs from his figure in several respects.
Weldon came to the conclusion that the long spines have the
function of directing the movements, and enabling the animal
to swim rapidly in a straight line. There can be no doubt
that his conclusion is correct, for the larva always moves in
the direction of the long axis of the spines. This is well .
shown when a zoea is caught in an eddy in the plunger
jar. It then makes a violent effort to escape, darting
upwards, sideways, or straight to the bottom, according to
the position of the spines at the moment. Normally the
larva rises and falls in the water, swimming upwards ver-
tically for a short distance, and then resting. In the
plunger jar larve have a tendency to collect, especially the
younger stages, at the surface against the side of the jar.
Here they often push their dorsal spines through the surface
film, and are hereby suspended. Sometimes they rest against
the rod of the plunger, suspended in this manner, and to this
habit I have owed the death of several specimens which were
caught and drawn up upon the plunger rod. If a light is
brought to the jar at night the zozas become extremely
active, swimming rapidly towards the light, the dorsal spine
directed forwards. The body may, however, be in any
position with regard to the axis of the spines, the animal
swimming upon its back, side, or ventral surface.
It is of interest to note, in considering the function of the
spines, that the period of their presence corresponds exactly
with the period of the absence of an “auditory” organ.
The latter, as Prentiss (1901) has shown, is not developed
functionally till the Megalopa stage, when only traces of the
spines remain. ‘There is a rapid reduction in the length of
the spines as compared to the total length of the body in the
third and fourth larval stages, and it is in the last zowa
METAMORPHOSIS OF CORYSTES CASSIVELAUNUS. 463
that the first trace of the auditory invagination is to be
found. It seems likely, then, that the spines may perform to
some extent the balancing and orienting function of the
auditory sac.
Besides being of balancing and directive function, the
spines probably also serve as a protection. It is, of course,
hard to say what are the especial enemies of the zowas in
nature. They are certainly preyed upon to some extent by
Medusz and Ctenophores, and also by each other, and in
these cases the spines can be of little value. They must,
however, serve as a defence against the attacks of small fish.
That this isso was shown by presenting the zoza to Gobius
ruthensparri, a fish about 4°5 cm. long, and with a width
of mouth of about 3°5 mm. In the first experiment a goby
seized and rejected the zova six times, each time failing to
swallow it. Finally the fish gave up the attempt, and the
zo#@a soon recovered and swam away, being, however,
attacked and swallowed by a second goby after a number of
failures. Other experiments showed the same thing, though
the fish had no difficulty in swallowmg small Brachyurous
zow#as without great development of spines—for instance
Carcinus.
A pecuhar habit of the zowa at all stages is that of
frequently turning its abdomen backwards till the forked
telson reaches and embraces the dorsal spine, scraping
upwards as if to clean it. This action is so frequent that it
seems not to be connected with the process of moulting,
though possibly the stretching of the abdomen entailed may
assist in preparing for the act. Moulting seems usually to
take place at night, and must be a rapid process, for a
successful moult was never observed. Zowas were fre-
quently found half freed from the larval skin, but these
specimens never succeeded in completely freeing themselves.
In fact, the new skin seems to harden so rapidly that unless
the process is completed at once failure results.
The Megalopa stage is remarkably interesting from the
point of view of its habits. It has most of the characters
vot. 46, PART 3,.—NEW SERIES. FF
4.64, ROBERT GURNEY.
and habits of the adult. Like the Megalopa of the majority
of Brachyura it is very active, swimming rapidly by means
of its pleopods, the antenne being carried stretched straight
forwards and parallel to one another, the thoracic legs bent
up under the body. Unhke the zoza it seems to be in-
different to a strong light at night, being neither attracted
nor apparently repelled by it.
It does not seem to be a pelagic form properly speaking,
and was only once obtained in the tow-net, and then within a
fathom or so of the bottom, in deep water. Some of the
specimens moulted in my plunger jars were provided with .
fine sand, and at once burrowed until covered completely
except for the antenne. The act of burrowing is performed
just as in the adult by means of the four posterior legs, the
chelipeds taking practically no part. If the sand, which
must be exceedingly fine, is not deep enough to completely
cover the body, the Megalopa pushes itself backwards till the
sand is heaped up above it, often moving backwards in this
way for some distance. When covered the antenne are not
necessarily held quite parallel, but the position seems to a
considerable extent to depend upon the depth to which the
animal has burrowed. In the buried position the respiratory
current is reversed, and sets down the antennal tube, as Mr.
Garstang has shown it to be in the adult. The efficiency of
the antennal tube as a strainer was well shown by the sand
grains resting on the interlocking hairs. One specimen of
the Megalopa, and one of the succeeding post-larval stage,
were obtained in some sand from Whitsand Bay.
As to the food of the earlier stages of the larva I have
no direct observations to record. Though provided with a
constant supply of the smaller plankton organisms, and with
other small zozas, 1 have never seen the zovwa of Corystes
taking any food. From the appearance of the contents of
the gut it seems likely that the food consists entirely of
floating alge or diatoms. J have several times seen the
zovwas of other forms, such as Hupagurus, devouring other
larvee, but it is quite possible that the zowas of Corystes, at
METAMORPHOSIS OF CORYSTES CASSIVELAUNUS. 4.65
least in the earlier stages, are exclusively vegetable feeders.
The Metazoza and Megalopa, on the other hand, have more
than once been found eating zovzas, and even those of their
own kind, and I have found small pieces of worm or shrimp
muscle a very satisfactory food for the Megalopa.
Development of the Larva.
There appear to be four distinct stages in the development
of the larva preceding the Megalopa, but I am unable to
say how many moults are included in this period. ‘The
zoezas referred to the second stage differ among themselves
to a certain extent in the relative development of the parts
of the body, and this stage, consequently, is not very sharply
separated from those preceding and following it.
First Stage (PI. 29, fig. 1)—The measurements of the
zoza at this period are as follows, the figures given being
the average of ten specimens. I have given here, as also
in the stages succeeding, the minimum and maximum for
each measurement.
Average Minimum and maximum
length. lengths.
I. Length of rostrum . 14mm... 1°3to 15 mm.
2. if dorsal spine 19 _,, SPs. 20"...
oeeuporspines . 40 ,, .. 37, 51 ,,
4. Length of body . eS VO eS ear een
5. a thorax a meets ts Pet ee 8 Buc,
6. Ratio of 4 to 3, 1: 1°66.
The zoza of Corystes is distinguished from all other
Brachyurous zovzas hitherto described by the following
features :—The total length from tip to tip of the dorsal and
rostral spines greatly exceeds the total length of the body.
In the majority of zozas the two measurements are
approximately equal. The posterior edge of the carapace
bears a fringe of short sete. The forks of the telson have
466 ROBERT GURNRY.
the normal form, but bear only a single! lateral spine on
each side. ‘The resemblance between the zoza of Corystes
and that of hia polita as figured by Claus (76) and Cano
(91) is very striking, but the latter differs in having a much
longer lateral thoracic spine, and in having two lateral spines
on each fork of the telson.
The colour and its distribution in the body are also charac-
teristic. The long dorsal spine is a rich orange colour,
deepest towards the tip. The rostrum has the same colour,
but the chromatophores appear to be less numerous. The
labrum contains a dendritic black chromatophore, and similar:
chromatophores are found in the carapace, one above the
mandible, and two near the postero-ventral and postero-
dorsal edge of the carapace. A small orange chromatophore
hes at the base of the dorsal spine. The alimentary canal is
enveloped in black chromatophores, which run back along it
as far as the end of the second abdominal segment. A large
ramified black chromatophore lies at the joint between the
third and fourth, fourth and fifth, and fifth and sixth abdo-
minal segments. ‘T'o the naked eye the liver and gut appear
as a yellowish-black mass continued back as a black streak
through the thorax, and the orange colour of the spines is
conspicuous and distinctive.
The appendages of the zoea are of the usual type,
differing in no important respects from those of Portunus, for
example, and do not need detailed description.
The second maxilla (Pl. 30, fig. 9) is the only cephalhe
appendage which cails for any remark. In it the exopodite
(scaphognathite) is characterised at this stage by the pos-
session of only five sete, the fifth springing almost directly
from the posterior edge, and not, as in Portunus, from the
end of a narrowed prolongation of the edge.
1 Since writing the above I have found a single specimen in the second
stage of development, in which the left fork of the telson bears two lateral
spines as in Thia polita, while the right fork bears but one. The rarity and
asymmetry of this structure seems to show that its presence is due merely to
an individual variation (see fig. 4).
METAMORPHOSIS OF CORYSTES CASSIVELAUNUS. 467
The two pairs of maxillipedes have each a two-jointed
exopodite bearing distally four long ciliated sete.
Behind the first and second maxillipedes there are already
developed rudiments of the six remaining pairs of thoracic
legs. The first pair, or third maxillipedes, are longer than
the rest, and bent forwards between the second maxillipedes.
The fourth pair is covered by the third, and hence is not
visible without dissection (see fig. 1).
As breeding females of Corystes are not easy to obtain,
and I have consequently not been able to hatch the zowa
from the ege, it is possible that an earlier stage remains to
be discovered. Still, the early development of the posterior
thoracic limbs is not uncommon among Brachyurous
zoeas. In many forms the third maxillipede is already
marked out in the first zoza, and in some all the thoracic
appendages are visible on hatching. ‘This is the case in
Portunus puber,and more especially in Inachus dorset-
tensis, where even the pleopods are distinctly traceable.
The abdomen, in the first stage of Corystes, consists as
usual of five distinct segments, the second bearing a for-
wardly curved process on either side. The second, third,
fourth, and fifth segments each bear a short hair on their
posterior dorsal edge on either side of the middle line.
The telson (fig. 2), with which the sixth segment is united,
has the usual forked shape, and bears three strong sete on
the inner surface of either fork. Hach seta is minutely
ciliated, the first, however, bearing several much longer cila
about the middle of its length. ‘There is only one external
spine (the sixth of Mayer’s nomenclature). The spine
formula is therefore 5 + 5 instead of the normal 7 + 7.
Second Stage (fig. 3).—The following measurements
are the average of the first ten specimens of a number
measured, and the limits of variation in those specimens.
468 ROBERT GURNEY.
Average Minimum and maximum
length. | lengths.
1. Length of rostrum . 2°0mm. ... 1°75 to 2°%6 mm.
2 te dorsal spme 2°7 , .. 2°50) ee eee
3. Tip to tip of spmes—- 57 , ... DL eee
4. Length of body . . BA 5, va. 30) aa
5. . thorax . Lis, ... Pia
6. Ratio of 4 to 3, 1: 1°67.
It will be seen that though the absolute length of the
spines is much greater at this stage than in the preceding -
one, the ratio between the total length and the total length
of the body has increased only by ‘01.
The more important differences between the zowa at this
period and that of the preceding one are the following :—In
the second antenna the flagellum, which is barely indicated
in the first stage, has grown out to nearly the length of the
exopodite (spina mobilis). The exopodite and inner spinous
prolongation of the stem are unchanged.
The maxille have changed but little in form, but bear
more sete. ‘The scaphognathite of the second maxilla (fig.
10) has now nine setz along its inner margin, and there are
three terminal sete instead of the single one of the preceding
stage.
The first two maxillipedes are unchanged, except that the
exopodite bears distally six ciliated sete instead of four.
The remaining thoracic legs are more distinctly developed,
and there are traces of six gills on each side, i. e. those of
the third maxillipedes and three succeeding limbs.
In the abdomen the pleopods are marked out as knobs on
each segment except the first, which remains limbless
throughout the larval development. ‘The third, fourth, and
fifth segments are produced into a short spinous process on
each side. The sixth segment is separated from the telson.
In the latter (fig. 4) the number of internal set is increased
by one or even two pairs, so that there are either six or seven
on each side altogether.
METAMORPHOSIS OF GORYSTES GCASSIVELAUNUS. 4.69
Third Stage.—Measurements (average and range of
variation in eleven specimens) :
average Minimum and maximum
length. lengths.
1. Length of rostrum . 30mm. ... 2°7 to 3°5 mm.
2. Fe iteaepme oO . ... o4,, 40 ,,
—ermmorspines . S6 .. ... 80,90 ,,
4, Length of body . meen, .... O22 5, 10) .;,
5. is thorax aoe... 19 ,, 27
6. Ratio of 4 to 3, 1: 1°53.
7. Length of third pleo-
pod . é ; eae ee eee
8. Length of fourth abdo-
minal segment . Meter! 2, Oy 4D
At this stage the reduction in length of the dorsal and
rostral spines as compared with the total length of the body
has become very noticeable, and the increased completeness
of the development of the limbs shows an evident approach
towards the Megalopa.
The differences between the zozwa at this period and that
of Stage 2 consists more in the increased development of
parts already formed than in the acquisition of new ones.
The internal branch of the first antenna is developing, and
the base of the antenna shows a certain degree of swelling in
preparation for the formation of the auditory organ. In the
second antenna the increase in length of the flagellum is very
striking, and it is now about twice the length of the exo-
podite, showing traces, beneath the cuticle, of segmentation.
The mandibular palp is present as a small two-jointed process.
In the first maxilla no change has taken place, but in the
second maxilla (fig. 11) the scaphognathite has not only
increased in size, but is provided with a very greatly in-
creased number of sete, which fringe its edge, and are of
more or less uniform size. Those of the posterior border are
not longer or stouter than the rest. These changes are
probably associated with the further development of the
4.70 ROBERT GURNEY.
gills, which perhaps become functional at this stage. The
first and second maxillipedes retain their original form, but
the exopodite bears now twelve sete instead of six at its
distal extremity. Each bears also at its base a small
epipodite, but there is as yet no trace of gills. The succeed-
ing six pairs of thoracic limbs are all well developed, and
show distinct joints beneath the cuticle. The third maxilli-
pede is the only one that bears an exopodite—a simple
unjointed process,—the others developing directly to the
adult form.
The gills of the posterior thoracic region (fig. 8) are all
distinctly formed except that the podobranch of the third
maxillipede is not yet separated from the epipodite. As yet
also they have not acquired the lamellate form of the adult
eill. In the abdomen the pleopods are further developed on
the last five segments, each being about half the length of
the segment succeeding it. The lateral spines of the seg-
ments are now more conspicuous than before.
The telson at this stage (fig. 5) has generally developed a
new pair of setz on its internal edge in front of the others,
but in some specimens the number was found unequal on the
two sides, the formula being normally 8 + 8, but occasionally
oy f.
Fourth Stage (fig. 7)—Measurements (average and
variation in fourteen specimens) :
Average Minimum and
length. maximum length.
1. Length of rostrum . &4 mm.... 31 to Sa aime
2. “4 dorsal spine. 41 .,, ... 88 ,, Se
3. ‘Tip to tip of spine . 96 , ... 80S ,, 1
4. Length of body . . 8S 5 .. 8S,
5. Length of thorax . . 29 4, (wan Egy
6. Ratio of 4 to 3, 1: 1°31.
7. Length of third pleopod ‘81 ,, ... .¢0 4, “Ogu
8. Fo fourth abdo-
minal segment . .. OS . ves, “O gy un
METAMORPHOSIS OF CORYSTES CASSIVELAUNUS. 471
This stage is characterised by the greater development of
the antenne, gills, and pleopods, but otherwise shows no
essential difference from the preceding one. In the first
antenna the inner branch is more developed, and the outer
branch shows signs of segmentation beneath the cuticle and
an increased number of sensory rods. The base is much
swollen, and the auditory pit is forming.
The second antenna has now a flagellum (endopodite)
nearly two thirds the length of the rostrum, showing two
distinct joints at its base and a number of indistinct joints
beneath the cuticle. The exopodite and spinous process are
relatively unimportant structures, and at the approach of the
moult their contents are absorbed and only the chitinous
cuticle remains.
The first maxilla shows no change, but in the second
maxilla the sete are more numerous upon the scaphog-
nathite, though they are comparatively shorter than before.
The epipodites of the first and second maxillipedes are
larger, but neither podobranchs nor arthrobranchs are
formed.
In the third maxillipede, however, the podobranch is being
separated from the epipodite, and the arthrobranchs are both
present. The anterior arthrobranch, however, shows no
signs of lameilar structure, thongh the posterior one, like the
succeeding pairs of gills, is distinctly lamellate.
The gill formula at this stage 1s therefore as follows:
A B. C Co
Wi. Ep — “Ss — — Kp.
VII. Ep. - a -~ == Kp.
1X. — a ] — is
i: a — — oo i ss
ml. — — — a —f |
X11. — = aes be.
XIII. — — —_ a
7+3 Ep.
|
472 ROBERT GURNEY.
The pleopods are now well developed, each exceeding the
length of the next succeeding segment. ‘The first four pairs
consist of a broad basal part bearing a long exopodite and a
short stump representing the endopodite, but there are no
setee and no trace of segmentation. The fifth pair, on the
sixth segment, are simple unbranched appendages. ‘The
telson is exactly the same as in the preceding stage.
The Megalepa (fig. 13)—Measurements (average of ten
specimens) :
Length of carapace . : . 36 mm.
Breadth across third lateral spine . 2.
Length of antenne . . Sie
The last larval stage passes by a single moult to the
Megalopa, which is distinctly recognisable as Corystes,
though retaining certain features characteristic of the zowa.
The rostrum and dorsal spine are still present, though very
greatly reduced.
The rostrum has now the form of a broad plate extending
forwards between the eyes, its lateral margin arched upwards
and crenulated. Its extremity is trifid, the median process
representing the last trace of the original long rostral spine
and retaining the orange chromatophores of the previous
stage, the lateral processes by which it is flanked being new
formations. A few hairs are borne upon the upper anterior
surface of the rostrum.
The dorsal spime is now an inconspicuous orange-red
process, situated not immediately over, but somewhat behind
the heart. From it a ridge runs forwards for some distance
along the middle line of the carapace.
On either side of the middle line, in the region of the
stomach, there is a single short spine on the dorsal surface.
These spines appear first at this stage, and are lost again
with the next moult.
Laterally the carapace bears three strong teeth on either
side, the first immediately behind the eye, and the third
above the first ambulatory leg. The postero-lateral margin
METAMORPHOSIS OF CORYSTES CASSIVELAUNUS. 473
of the carapace is fringed with a number of sete. The
appendages have now taken on essentially the form of those
of the adult. The second antenne are considerably longer
than the carapace, many-jointed, and provided with the
characteristic dorsal and ventral row of setz. The antennz
have, as already described, the same function of serving as a
respiratory tube as they have in the adult. The mandible
palp is now three-jointed, the distal joint bearing a number
of sete and overhanging the mouth opening in front.
The first maxilla differs from that of the preceding stage
in the form of the endopodite, which is now not jointed, and
bears but a single well-developed seta. This reduction in the
number of sete is remarkable from the fact that in the adult
there is a rich clothing of sete.
There is but little change in the form of the inner lobes,
and the only change from this stage to the condition in the
adult consists in a relative reduction of the superior lobe and
an increase in number of spines.
In the second maxilla there is a great increase in size of
the scaphognathite and simplification of the structure of the
endopodite (fig. 12).
The first and second maxillipedes show an intermediate
condition between the swimming limb of the zoza and the
masticatory limb of the adult. The two-jointed exopodite is
practically unchanged, except that in the first pair it bears
but five terminal sete, and in the second pair eight. ‘The
endopodite of the first pair (fig. 15) 1s no longer jointed, but
has not acquired the lamellate form characteristic of Corystes.
The two basal joints are richly setiferous at their inner
margin, and the epipodite is greatly developed. The endo-
podite of the second maxillipede (fig. 17) has practically the
adult form, while the podobranch and small arthrobranch
are both developed.
The third maxillipede develops directly to the adult form,
the second joint of the endopodite having the characteristic
anterior prolongation. ‘The remaining thoracic legs have in
all essential respects the form of those of the adult. The
ATA ROBERT GURNEY.
abdomen still retains some larval characters. The lateral
spines of segments 2—5 are still retained, and the telson still
shows traces of bifurcation, being deeply indented posteriorly.
The five pairs of pleopods have the shape characteristic of
the typical Brachyurous Megalopa. Those of the first
four pairs each consist of a stem bearing a long exopodite
armed with numerous long ciliated sete. The endopodite is
very small, and interlocks with that of the opposite append-
age as aretinaculum. ‘The last (fifth) pair of pleopods have
no endopodites, and are shorter than the telson itself.
First Post-larval Stage (fig. 14) —Measurement :
Length of carapace . ; . 40 mm.
Breadth (across third lateral spines) eae
Length of antenne . : . oe
The cast skin of the specimen from which these measure-
ments were taken had the following dimensions :
Length of carapace . . 34mm.
Breadth ei
Length of antenne . : . ae
The Megalopa stage lasts, according to my observations,
from eighteen to twenty days, but possibly a more abundant
food supply in natural conditions would somewhat shorten
the period.
The young Corystes has now attained the structure of the
adult in almost all respects. The rostral spine is reduced to
an insignificant tubercle lying at the base of the indentation
between the two anterior spines. ‘The dorsal spine is com-
pletely lost, though a small orange chromatophore still marks
its position on the carapace. The dorsal surface of the cara-
pace is smooth, the median ridge of the previous stage and
the two anterior dorsal spines having disappeared.
Besides the three lateral teeth of the Megalopa a fourth
tooth is developed behind on each side close to the posterior
edge of the carapace, so that the number characteristic of
the adult is attained. The cephalo-thoracic appendages show
no changes worth noting, except that the endopodite of the
METAMORPHOSIS OF CORYSTES CASSIVELAUNUS. 4.75
first maxillipede has attained its final lamellar form (fig. 16).
The abdomen, however, has changed considerably. It is now
kept normally bent up under the body, the young crab having
taken definitely to a burrowing habit. The first two segments
are broad and flattened at the sides, while the remaining
segments narrow out posteriorly and bear no lateral spines.
All the segments bear setz on their lateral margins. The
telson has now an evenly rounded posterior margin.
The plieopods are no longer swimming organs, having lost
all their sete. The first four pairs remain biramous, and of
about the same size as before, but the fifth pair is reduced to
a simple stump. There is still no appendage upon the first
abdominal segment, so that apparently in the female this
appendage never develops, while in the male it is retarded
till at least the second post-larval stage. I have hitherto
obtained no later stage than that now under consideration,
so that I cannot say at what period the distinctive sexual
characters appear. The specimens of the first post-larval
stage in my possession show also no difference in the relative
size of the chelipeds.
CoNCLUSION.
The Corystide, though placed by Milne Edwards (1854)
and by Heller (1863) among the Oxystomata, have by more
recent authors, such as Claus and Miers (1886), been assigned
to the Cyclometopa. The resemblance between the Corystidee
and the true Oxystomata has been shown by Mr. Garstang
(1897, etc.) to be largely superficial, and due to adaptive
modifications of an essentially different character, though
directed to the same ends. He has, in fact, brought forward
clear evidence that the Corystide and the Oxystomata have
been independently derived from Cyclometopous ancestors.
This view is to some extent supported by my observations
on the development of Corystes, though the great uniformity
in the structure of the zoza throughout the Brachyura pre-
vents any conclusion being drawn from the earlier stages.
476 ROBERT GURNEY.
In fact, it must be confessed that the most striking feature
of the zo «a of Corystes, namely, the great length of the spine,
recalls the zozas of such Oxystomata as Dorippe and Ethusa
—forms from which it differs essentially in other respects—
more than those of the Portunide.
Still the final stages of the metamorphosis show that the
peculiar emarginate rostrum of the adult (which recalls that
of the Oxystomata) is preceded by a three-toothed rostral
prominence which exactly resembles that found in most
Portunids. That the central tooth represents more than a
mere entogenetic stage in the reduction of the long rostral
spine of the larva is also confirmed by the retention of a
trifid rostrum in the adult of Pseudocorystes and Trachycar-
cinus (Faxon).
The existence of this Portunid stage in the development of
Corystes was, I understand, the subject of a verbal communi-
cation made by Mr. Garstang to the Toronto meeting of the
British Association in 1897 under the title ‘On Recapitula-
tion in Development, as illustrated in the Life-history of the
Masked Crab (Corystes).” As Mr. Garstang has been unable
hitherto to write up his observations for publication, and as
he informs me that the material at my disposal is more
complete than in his own case, I am glad to be able to give a
full account of the metamorphosis, and to confirm his obser-
vations. I may here express my indebtedness to him for his
kind advice and many suggestions during the carrying out of
my work.
Piymovutnu ; May, 1902.
BIBLIOGRAPHY.
1. Cano, G.—“‘ Sviluppo postembryonale dei Dorippidei, Leucosiadi, Corys-
toidei, e Grapsoidi,”’ Napoli, ‘Atti della R. Accad. d. Sci. Fisiche e
Matem.,’ 1891.
2. Ciaus, C.—‘ Untersuchungen zur Erforschung der genealogischen Grund-
lage des Crustaceensystems,’ Wien, 1876.
METAMORPHOSIS OF CORYSTES CASSIVELAUNUS. 477
3. Faxon, W.—‘ Reports on an Exploration off the West Coasts of Mexico,
Ceutral and South America, and off the Galapagos Islands: XV, The
Stalk-eyed Crustacea,” ‘Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Ilarvard Coll.,’
xvill, 1895.
4. Garstane, W.—‘ The Habits and Respiratory Mechanism of Corystes
Cassivelaunus,” ‘Journ. Mar. Biol. Ass.,’ iv, pp. 2283—232, 1896.
5. Garstanc, W.—‘‘ The Functions of Antero-lateral Denticulation of the
Carapace in Sand-burrowing Crabs,” ‘Journ. Mar. Biol. Ass.,’ iv,
pp. 896—401, 1897.
6. Garstanc, W.—‘‘On some Modifications of Structure Subservient to
Respiration in Decapod Crustacea which burrow in Sand,” ‘ Quart.
Journ. Mic. Sci.,’ xl, 1898, p. 211.
7. Heiter, C.—‘ Die Crustaceen des Stidlichen Europa,’ Wien, 1863.
8. Minne Epwarns, H.—‘ listoire naturelle des Crustacés,’ 1834.
9. Prentiss, C. W.—‘‘ The Otocyst of Decapod Crustacea: its Structure,
Development, and Functions,” ‘ Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard Coll.,’
muavi, No. 7, 1901.
10. Wexpon, W. I. R.—“ Note on the Functions of the Spines of the Crus-
tacean Zozea,” ‘Journ. Mar, Biol. Ass.,’ i, n. s., 1889-90, p. 169.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES 29—31,
Nlustrating Mr. Robert Gurney’s paper on “The Metamor-
phosis of Corystes Cassivelaunus (Pennant).”
All figures drawn with the aid of the camera lucida.
Fie. 1.—( xX 32.) Zowa of the first stage, showing distribution of chro-
matophores.
Fig. 2.—(x 100.) Telson of the first zowa.
Fic. 3.—( X 47°5.) Zowa of the second stage.
Fie. 4.—( x 100.) ‘Telson of the second zowa.
Fic. 5.—( Xx 47°5.) Telson of the third zowa.
Fig. 6.—(X 35.) Third maxillipede of the first post-larval stage.
Fie. 7.—(X 26.) Zowa of the fourth stage.
Fig. 8.—(x 65.) Second maxilla and thoracic appendages of the third
ZO®ka.
Kp. 1—Kp. 3. Kpipodites of maxillipedes 1—8.
a l—a3. Arthrobranchs 1—8.
p', p?. First and second pleurobranchs.
mxp*, ‘Third maxillipede.
478
Fie.
Fic.
Fie.
Fic.
Fic.
F te.
Fie.
Fie.
Fie.
9.—( x 260.)
10.—( x 170.)
11.—(x 105.)
12.—( x 65.)
13.—( Xx 20.)
14.—(x 20.)
15.—(xX 45.)
16.—( x 40.)
17.—(X 45.)
ROBERT GURNEY.
Second maxilla of the first zowa.
Second maxilla of the second zowa.
Second maxilla of the third zowa.
Second maxilla of the Megalopa.
The Megalopa. |
The first post-larval stage.
First maxillipede of the Megalopa.
First maxillipede of the first post-larval stage.
Second maxillipede of the Megalopa.
a2) \\ ss
-_
= - :
pa | : - a
at mm
Y, ‘ p= to, : 7 ,
POs ee i?
|
4
we,
Luart: Sourn Marr Sci. Vals ENS PALLY
ty *
a Dts ,
YW, . lj Wy) fi
i ( I
AS f 4
i | Wael
ANN A |
y f \\\
: Bia 2)
Huth,Lith’ London.
LIBRARY
Se OF THE -
_ br aig +> [ELINOIS
5
a:
;
2»
—
-
pee!
= s
4
4
. .
a
On +
a? é
iT
» ’ bs 7
on A :
Geel f -
. ae)
a>
: ~!
Fy - voy ae
bees
— = ee See ee. Nh om
— . .
SEE :
AR. Gurney del.
Quart. Four Mur Sa VAAONS. ILC
Ay aX
Fig 12.
Huth, Lith’ London.
ve >
Li. .
Reson Wate ¢ YN.
© ,
= be hee bs ;
+ * a
‘ (je vo
LIBRARY
=
OF T
Poe ed oan L Ge
*LINGIS
_
Sem bot
(dn oy
= &
>
}
£
b
t
-
iL
LINOIS
= °
1
COE CCOCCET EOE EO LECECEL CNTY DOLE O REC EEN ©
SSS
OOS SOA |
Uae S| AY |
WY 4
ul,
R Gurney dei
“a ae A Ao a b ; 5
4
Sourn Mion Sei. Vol, LGNS: P81
7
-
.
Ae en - .
eee enn eet] nn nen] nn ees ff — rr
DY »~y©™»»>"
(ai ie ee i ed a es ee ee ee ee ee EE SE
Huth Lith’ London.
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS
,
a ee. CO LY ee eee
va
ARTIFICIAL PARTHENOGENESIS AND FERTILISATION. 479
artificial Parthenogenesis and Fertilisation :
A Review.
By
Thomas Hi. Bryce.
Tuts article is an effort to gather together, in so far as they
relate to the phenomena of fertilisation in the sea-urchin
egg, the results obtained by experiments. It does not pre-
tend to consider the problem of fertilisation as a whole, nor
the phenomena save in Hchinoderms, and no attempt will be
made to establish comparisons with other forms in which the
details may to some extent differ. The hmitation to one form
is in so far appropriate, that practically all the experiments
have been made on Hchinoderm eggs.
I have personally studied fertilisation in the egg of Echinus
esculentus—specially in sections,—and though I have
nothing fresh to add to the description of the facts, this
article may in a measure be considered a sequel to a paper
on maturation in the same form. In that paper my attention
was chiefly directed to the chromosomes, and I did not follow
out the results of observers in the experimental field, but
as some of the phenomena described are of interest in con-
nection with these results, I shall take the opportunity of
returning to them.
The two mitotic divisions characteristic of the maturation
phases, differ markedly from those which take place in the
segmentation phases. In many respects there is a close
resemblance to phenomena observed in the eggs of Toxo-
pneustes, which develop parthenogenetically under the
influence of magnesium chloride solution (Wilson, 1901).
voL, 46, PART 3.—NEW SERIES. GG
480 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
On the dissolution of the nuclear membrane the site of the
germinal vesicle is occupied by a “kinoplasmic” mass,
derived either entirely from the nuclear network, or also
partly from protoplasm differentiated on the distribution of
the nuclear substance into it. In fixed material this area has
a fibrillar appearance. ‘This may be the result of the fixing
reagents used, but in any case it indicates the accumulation
at this part of protoplasm which has undergone some change
in constitution physical or chemical. In the nuclear area,
out of this material, asters are formed, and ultimately the
first polar amphiaster. Besides the asters concerned in
the formation of the bipolar figure, there are secondary
asters, which seem to have only a temporary existence.
In some few cases multipolar figures were observed. No
structure recognisable as a centrosome or centiole was found
before the germinal vesicle broke down, and therefore the
centrosome was either derived from the nucleus, or formed
de novo in the nuclear area. ‘The astral radiations are
confined to a small and superficial part of the egg, and a very
unequal division results in the formation of the polar bodies.
When the two divisions are over all the radiations and the
remains of the kinoplasmic area disappear, the cytoplasm
assumes its alveolar structure throughout, the nucleus retires
from the surface, and no centrosome can be recognised
in relation to it. .
On the breaking down of the germinal vesicle the greater
part of the nuclear material disappears as such, and not only
is a change in the constitution and distribution of the proto-
plasm to be recognised, but experiment proves that the egg
has undergone a physiological change of state. Whereas a
spermatozoon can neither fertilise an egg with the germinal
vesicle intact, nor a fragment without the nucleus (Delage,
1901), after the polar bodies are formed the egg becomes
capable of fertilisation.'. This cytoplasmic maturation, de-
pendent, probably (Delage, 1901), on the influence of the
! Tor evidence and theories regarding the influence of the stage of matura-
tion in Amphibian eggs see Bataillon (1901).
ARTIFICIAL PARTHENOGENESIS AND FERTILISATION, 481
nuclear sap set free from the germinal vesicle, is accompanied
by the conversion of the large vesicular nucleus related to the
metabolic changes underlying the growth of the ovum, into a
small morphologically equivalent nucleus, possessing the same
number of chromosomes as the sperm nucleus. This has been
proved by their enumeration when the nuclei undergo in-
dependent transformation, and the number is one half that
found in the segmentation divisions.
The ege's thus matured remain, in the case of the sea-urchin,
for a considerable time quiescent within the ovary before they
are discharged—for the process of ripening in the ovary
is a gradual one. When discharged into sea water it seems
that, like the eggs of some other forms (O. Hertwig, 1893,
p- 239), after lying for many hours unchanged, the sea-
urchin eggs show spontaneously, karyokinetic transforma-
tion; for instance, R. Hertwig (1896) observed in eggs which
had been deposited prematurely during transport, analogous
changes to those produced by treatment with strychnine.
This phenomenon is one apparently of wide range. In an
interesting review entitled “ Giebt es bei Wirbeltieren Par-
thenogenesis’’ (1900), Bounet, after examination of all the
literature up to that date, comes to the conclusion that,
according to our present knowledge, the phenomena in verte-
brates are due to degenerative divisions, and in meroblastic
egos to fragmentations, and the alleged parthenogenetically
divided tubal, uterine or laid eggs, are either over-ripe, and
therefore badly fertilised, or are eggs normally fertilised
with defective spermatozoa. In the hght of the facts of
artificial parthenogenesis, it may be that this seementation
in unfertilised eggs, at least in certain invertebrates, is an
effort in the direction of true parthenogenesis which is abor-
tive, the egg dying before the tardy process is accomplished.
In 1876 Greeff described parthenogenetic development in
Asterocanthion. The eggs were obtained from animals
early in the season, before the spermatozoa were mobile, and
the blastule formed differed from those preduced in normal
fertilisation. O. Hertwig (1890) recorded some observations
482 THOMAS H. BRYCR.
on spontaneous parthenogenesis. In confirmation of Fol, he
found that eges from fully-matured animals did not segment
spontaneously, but only after a considerable time underwent
changes considered pathological. The nucleus enlarged
more and more, and after ten to fifteen hours the eggs
died and fragmented. Only among hundreds of eggs here
and there one had divided into two. At Trieste, however,
in a season when the animals were late in maturing, and at a
time when males were rarely got, he observed in a limited
number of cases (in Asterias glacialis, and Astero
pecten) that after the polar mitosis had occurred, the nucleus
did not come to rest, but continued to divide. There resulted
an irregular division, but here and there a blastula was found
which had no vitellme membrane. Into the interesting
observations and suggestions regarding the failure of the
second polar body extrusion, and the union of two vesicular
nuclei in the egg, we cannot here enter. The main point
established was, that fully-matured eggs did not develop
parthenogenetically, but that in some few cases immature
egos did divide irregularly, and in a small number of cases
blastula were formed. A number of observers have
described the occurrence of natural parthenogenesis in
Hchinoderms, and it is an open question; but apart from its
possible relation to immaturity of the ovum, the sources of
error in the matter of infection by spermatozoa are so many,
and the causes which artificially start parthenogenetic
development in certain cases are so slight, that all cases of
so-called “ natural parthenogenesis’ are open to suspicion,
but even granting that it may occur, it is a matter of no great
moment in the question of “ artificial parthenogenesis.” It
would be only additional evidence of the fact, that there is in
these forms a tendency to parthenogenetic development,
which, however, does not normally occur.
Mitotic division may be excited in unfertilised eges in a
variety of ways.
First, by increasing the degree of concentration of the
sea water (Morgan, Hunter), or by increasing the osmotic
ARTIFICIAL PARTHENOGENESIS AND FERTILISATION. 483
pressure in various other ways (Loeb). This may be
done by adding various inorganic salts to the sea water,
especially the salts of magnesium, potassium, sodium, and
calcium, in definite proportions (Loeb, Morgan, and others),
or by adding sugar or urea (Loeb). Other salts have also
given results, e.g. chloride of manganese (Delage). The
effect is produced when the eggs, after being left from
half an hour to two hours in the solution, are transferred to
pure sea water, and is due to the disturbance of the osmotic
pressure leading to loss of water by the egg, followed by
rehydration (Bataillon, Loeb, Giard, etc.), not to specific
chemical stimulation.
The nuclear activity may also be roused by other chemical
bodies, as strychnine (Hertwigs, Morgan), chloroform, ether,
alcohol, by lack of oxygen (Mathews), by very dilute hydro-
chloric acid (Loeb, Delage).
Further, purely physical agents may have the same effect—
heat (Mathews, Bataillon, Delage, Viguier), cold (Morgan,
Greeley), and, most important, agitation (Mathews). Mathews
had previously proved for Asterias, and Morgan for Arbacia
also, that shaking of unripe eggs caused them to form the
polar bodies—the shaking presumably causing dissolution of
the nuclear membrane. Ripe eges of Asterias, but not of sea-
urchin, act in the same way, but only after they have lain
some time in water; after two hours larve begin to appear
on shaking; after four hours, hard shaking produces a large
proportion of larvee, and the mere transference of the eggs
by a pipette from one vessel to another is sufficient to form a
few larve. A few hours later the slight amount of shock
experienced in the transference of the eggs, causes a large
number to begin to develop, though they do not go beyond
the late segmentation stages. At this time shaking causes
all to develop, but none reach the blastula stage. Loeb and
Fischer have extended this observation to the Annelids,
Cheetopterus and Amphitrite.
The mitotic phenomena produced artificially are apt to be
irregular, and the division of the cell body is often unequal
A484. THOMAS H. BRYCE.
when it occurs. Thus the nucleus may divide repeatedly
without division of the cytoplasm, and then the egg
may break into as many segments as there are nuclei
(Wilson and others). It is only in a relatively small pro-
portion of eggs that division is regular enough to permit of
development to the larval stage. Further, the eggs of the
same species behave capriciously to the same agents under
different conditions (temperature, etc.), and the eggs of closely
allied species seem to react differently to the same agent.
There is no reasonable doubt, however, that true artificial
parthenogenetic development has been demonstrated for the
Hchinoderms—sea-urchins and star-fish—and for at least two
Annelids, though the same amount of independent testimony
is not available for the latter.
Actual development to a larval stage has been obtained
only by certain of the agents enumerated above.
1. Increase of Osmotic Pressure.—The most successful
results (Loeb, 1902) are obtained at a temperature about
20° C., by the addition of the chlorides of potassium or sodium
to sea water, the optimum degree of concentration being
determined by experiment for each set of observations.!
After the eggs have remained in this for half an hour to two
hours, the optimum being again tested by experiment, they
are restored to normal sea water.
Sea-urchins (Loeb, Wilson, Giard, Prowazek, Delage,
Viguier, Hunter). Annelids: Cheatopterus, Amphitrite,
Nereis (Loeb, Fischer).
2. Agitation. — Asterias (Mathews), Cheetopterus and
Amphitrite (Loeb, Fischer), but not sea-urchins (Mathews,
Viguier).
3. Hlevation of Temperature.—Asterias during maturation
(Delage) ; not for ripe eggs (Greeley, Viguier).
4, Depression of Temperature.—Asterias (Greeley) ; not
sea-urchins (Viguier).
! Loeb (1902) uses a stock solution of 24 n. TIC], and adds this in different,
proportions, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18 c.em., to 100 c.c. of sea water in six
vessels to determine the best grade of concentration.
ARTIFICIAL PARTHENOGENESIS AND FERTILISATION. 485
5, Hxposure to weak HCl in sea water, and subsequent
restoration to pure sea water. Asterias (Loeb, Delage).
6, Continuous exposure to a solution of a specific chemical
substance at the same osmotic pressure as normal sea water.
Potassium Chloride. Cheetopterus (Loeb).
Calcium Chloride. Amphitrite (Fischer).
The Ions of potassium and calcium are said to be specific
for these forms respectively.!
With regard to the influence of the state of maturation,
Delage gives results to show that in Asterias glacialis,
when the eggs are placed in sea water to which is added an
equal quantity of a solution of HCl, raising the molecular
concentrations of the mixture to 0°660, different results are
got according to the stage of maturation. Among the eggs
placed in the liquid before maturation, 20 per cent. of
blastulee were got, at the appearance of the first polar
body 95 per cent., and after the appearance of the second
polar body 5 per cent., while none of the controls showed
any normal segmentation.
From all this it seems that changes in the osmotic
pressure between the egg and its surrounding medium, and
mechanical agitation, are the chief agents so far as yet
1 Delage (‘ Compt. Rendus de |’Acad. des Sciences,’ October 13th and 20th,
1902) announces that he has found an agent which is as certain and effective
as the spermatozoon, in producing development to advanced larval stages, in
Asterias. It is sea water aérated by carbonic acid gas, and at the same osmotic
pressure as ordinary sea water (or lower?). When the eggs, at what he
calls the ‘critical stage ’—i.e. when the nuclear membrane of the germinal
vesicle is dissolved, up to the expulsion of the first polar body—are placed in
this, and after one hour transferred to pure sea water, practically all the eggs
develop. His view is, that the maturation is arrested temporarily, and on
restoration to pure sea water, the carbonic acid gas is quickly eliminated and
division proceeds ; but it is not partial, as in the polar mitoses, but complete,
and goes on to the formation of the normal larval forms. The result is not
obtained at a stage after the polar bodies are extruded and the ovum has again
come to rest, nor is it applicable in sea-urchin, in which the maturation is
over before the ova are shed. His theory as to the action of the gas is, that
it is a temporary poison which arrests maturation completely, and is quickly
removed afterwards without altering the characters of the protoplasm.
486 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
known, which tend to the production of artificial partheno-
eenesis, but that in the case of the Annelids there is evidence
to show that certain Ions may have a specific effect.
According to Loeb (1902) the sclutions must act, first, by
favouring the solution or dissolution of the nuclear mem-
brane; and second, by changing, in some sense, the physical
properties of the protoplasm (viscidity, etc.).
Mathews (1900), as a conclusion from his experiments on
Arbacia eggs, pointed out that the known methods of causing
liquefaction in protoplasm will induce karyokinesis in these
eggs, and also shows that loss of water has a liquefying
action. |
Before considering further the bearing of the physiological
and physico-chemical conceptions regarding fertilisation, I
shall proceed to the morphological changes which have been
described in unfertilised eggs which undergo parthenogenetic
development.
R. Hertwig (1896) studied the changes in the egg after
treatment with strychnine. On the breaking down of the
nucleus, half spindles, and in a few cases whole spindles,
supposed to arise from the fan spindles, were formed. ‘The
fan spindle fibres he regarded as derived from the achro-
raatic network of the nucleus. The chromosomes derived
from the nucleoli became attached to the primary rays.
Later, protoplasmic rays also appeared, centering on the
focal point of the half spindle. At this central point, and
derived from the central parts of the rays, there appeared a
rounded body resembling in every way a centrosome, though
none such was to be found before the nucleus broke down.
The body was an ovocentrum, formed from the achromatic
portion of the nucleus, and, according to Hertwig, the
individualised centrosome is ultimately a derivative of the
nucleus—is, in fact, an achromatic nucleus.
Doflein (1897), contrariwise, examined the phenomena
of karyokinesis of the sperm nucleus in eggs which, after
fertilisation, had been treated by chloral solution after the
manner of the experiment of O. and R. Hertwig. ‘The nuclei
ARTIFICIAL PARTHENOGENESIS AND FERTILISATION. 487
did not unite, but underwent independent transformation.
Doflein, like R. Hertwig, considered the middle piece of the
spermatozoon as equivalent to the centrosome, and from the
experiments concluded, that from the centrosome a complete
spindle could form, and out of this, again, the achromatic
nuclear network. Thus, compared with Hertwig’s results, the
ripe sperm nucleus contains all the parts, even as the ripe
ege nucleus, which are necessary for a further development.
In Hertwig’s results we have evidence of a centrosome
arising from the nucleus de novo. Morgan, in 1896,
described the formation of artificial astrospheres in the
cytoplasm of the eggs of Arbacia treated by salt solutions,
and from his further observations published in 1899 and
1900 he decided, that in spite of certain differences these
artificial astrospheres corresponded to the normal spheres
which occur at the apices of the spindles in the segmentation
stages; further (1900), that both artificialand normal spheres
are due to accumulation of a specific substance, and that the yolk
spheres are excluded from the substance of the astrospheres.
His view of the astral radiations is that they serve to
transport the chromosomes, but are not concerned in the
division of the cytoplasm.
Hividence of free formation of the centrosomes is found
also in the appearance of asters in the cytoplasm in various
forms, Echinus among them, on the breaking down of the
germinal vesicle in maturation.
Boveri (1901) in essence accepted Hertwig’s definition of
the structure described by him as an ovocentrum, and its
origin apparently denovo. He argued that phylogenetically
the centrosome is an individualised cytocentrum, derived
from a centro-nucleus in which the centrosome or its
equivalent is not differentiated from the chromatin nucleus.
To the nucleus of the sea-urchin egg must necessarily
be attributed the properties of a centro-nucleus, with the
capacity of producing out of itself, under the action of
certain stimuli, individualised centrosomes, when such fail to
be supplied in the normal way in fertilisation. If even under
4&8 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
similar conditions, the sperm centrosome be present, the cyto-
centrum remains latent. The centrosome looked at in this
way, is not a specific cell organ in the sense that it must
consist of a specific chemical substance, but that parts of a
substance contained in the nucleus, undergoing certain
changes, and grouping themselves together, are organised
into a centrosome.
Thus the ovocentrum of the sea-urchin egg is not to be
considered an individualised centrosome, but an _ intra-
nuclear latent cytocentrum, and the nucleus is a centro-
nucleus. Thus the centrosome in such a case is not some-
thing strictly new, but arises by the transformation in a
definite manner of a cytocentrum already present. It isa
case not of new formation, but of “ reparation.” “ Gervisse
Centronuclei sind im stande unter bestimmten Bedingungen
Centrosomen zu reparieren.”
Morgan’s artificial astrospheres he did not admit to have
true centrosomes—the essential character of capacity for
division was not proved for them.
This brings me to Wilson’s very interesting and important
paper on the morphological phenomena in parthenogenetic
eggs. |
The main results are that under the influence of the
magnesium chloride solution, not only are asters produced
de novo in connection with the nucleus, but also in the
cytoplasm. ‘‘Not only the asters connected with chromo-
somes (nuclear asters), but also the supernumerary asters
unconnected with nuclear matter (cytasters), may multiply
by division; the cytasters contain deeply staining central
granules indistinguishable from centrosomes, that divide
to form the centres of the daughter asters. These asters
operate with greater or less energy as centres of cyto-
plasmic division. ‘l'ypical cytasters, often containing deeply
staining central granules resembling centrosomes, are formed
in the magnesium solution in enucleated egg fragments
produced by shaking the unfertilised eggs to pieces, and
these asters likewise may multiply by division, though
ARTIFICIAL PARTHENOGENESIS AND FERTILISATION. 489
no cytoplasmic cleavage takes place. The cleavage centro-
somes first make their appearance outside the nucleus, but
directly on the nuclear membrane, and the evidence renders
it nearly certain that they arise by the division of a single
primary ege centrosome that is formed de novo. All the
evidence goes to show that the cleavage centrosomes are of
the same general nature as the central bodies of the cytasters.”’
Among many interesting details I will refer here only to
the changes described for eggs which underwent segmenta-
tion, and were capable of developing into swimming embryos,
because in certain particulars they are reminiscent of what
tukes place in the formation of the first polar amphiaster.
I may summarise as follows :—(1) ‘The first change that
occurs is a coarsening in the appearance of the protoplasm,
better marked in eggs treated by stronger solutions. (2) A
primary radiation appears centering on the nucleus, better
marked in eggs treated with weaker solutions. (3) A varying
number of secondary radiations appear in eggs especially
treated with stronger solutions. ‘The extent of the primary
radiations is inversely in proportion to the number of the
secondary radiations. These latter appear as vague clear
spots in the cytoplasm, which gradually become surrounded
with radiations, and finally assume the form of asters. They
always appear in situ, and do not change their position till a
later period. (4) Coincident with the appearance of the
radiations there is a gradual growth of the nucleus. (5)
Round the nucleus appears a clear perinuclear zone of hyalo-
plasm. (6) The nuclear membrane fades out, and a vague
irregular clear space is left, to which the hyaline zone con-
tributes. (7) The rays then diminish, and, indeed, almost
disappear.
The eges at this point were restored to pure sea water, and
after a pause the radiations reappear and advance centri-
fugally towards the periphery. In eggs capable of develop-
ment the principal rays are now focussed on two centres at
opposite poles of the nuclear area, which now forms a spindle
connecting the two asters. If the amphiaster is typical,
4.90 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
division proceeds as in normal fertilisation. If more than
two asters are formed from the nuclear area, multipolar figures
form, and irregular cleavage results. If there is only a single
radiation which does not resolve itself into a bipolar figure,
the egg never properly segments, but there are regularly
alternating phases of nuclear transformation.
Analysing the meaning of the phenomena, Wilson says, ‘‘ We
may therefore state that the first general effect of the stimulus,
whether the magnesium solution or the spermatozoon, is to
arouse an activity of the cytoplasm, one result of which is the
establishment of a centripetal movement of the hyaloplasm
towards one or more points at which the hyaloplasm accumu-
lates.’ The rays in this view are the expression, in part at
any rate, of centripetal currents, and the substance flowing
in, is the hyaloplasm or interalveolar substance. The hyalo-
plasm spheres at the centres of the asters are local accumula-
tions of this hyaloplasm. In fixed material, studied in
sections, the radiations are fibrillar in appearance, and as
they stain much more deeply than the general network
the hyaloplasm in the rays must probabiy have undergone
some physical or chemical change. The centrosome is a
well-defined body of considerable size and of spongy con-
sistence, composed of intensely staining granules, which often
give the centrosome the appearance of a minute nucleus
containing a chromatin reticulum. The hyaloplasm spheres
in the living egg correspond to the centrosome, the clear area
round it, and the innermost darkly staining radiated zone of
the aster taken together.
‘hus Wilson has proved that structures which cannot be
distinguished morphologically from ‘true centrosomes”
appear in the cytoplasm de novo; and further, that they
divide to form the apices of bipolar figures, even in enucleated
fragments.
In a recent paper Meves (1902), using Boveri’s nomen-
clature, expresses the view that the centrosome is only the
mantle of the centriole, and is only present in rapidly-dividing
cells like the blastomeres. The “ Doppelkérchen” of the
ARTIFICIAL PARTHENOGENESIS AND FERTILISATION. 491
tissue-cells are to be considered as centrioles, and “‘ nur von
den Centriolen nicht aber von den Centrosomen, kann daher
gelten, dass sie allgemeine und dauernde Zellorgane sind.”
The results of Morgan and Wilson can only then be held to _
prove that centrioles under certain conditions may, by the
action of salt solutions, be excited to form centrosomes and
radiations round them, for their results might be explained by
a multiplication of the two centrioles which the egg has
derived from the last division of the division period, and the
distribution of these centrioles through the cell. “Hven in
enucleated fragments there is no proof that the fragment did
not contain the centriole of the cell.
Such a supposition admits of neither proof nor disproof,
and the presence of a free “centriole” in the unfertilised
sea-urchin egg has not been demonstrated. I have seen in
youne oocytes minute bodies, stained black with iron
hzematoxylin—sometimes double bodies,—but I have not been
able to convince myself that they are more than accidents of
staining and fixing.
Turning now to the phenomena of fertilisation in the sea-
urchin, there is to be recognised (1) a local stimulation at
the place of contact of the chosen spermatozoon,! manifested
by the streaming out of the protoplasm to form the entrance
cone. (2) A general stimulation, manifested by the throw-
ing off of the vitelline membrane, and by a change in the
constitution of the protoplasm. It becomes more viscid for a
time (Morgan) ; a funnel-shaped area of darkly staining sub-
stance follows the path of the sperm head (Wilson). (8)
A protoplasmic movement focussed on the situation of the
middle piece giving rise to the sperm aster. This appears
soon after the entrance of the spermatozoon, when the head
has begun a movement of rotation. The rotation goes on
Buller (1902) has studied the question of the bearing of chemotaxis on
fertilisation in Echinoderms. His conclusion is that chemotaxis plays no
role in bringing the sexual elements together. The meeting is a matter of
chance. The passage through the gelatinous coat is radial in direction, and
probably purely mechanical, though possibly due to stereotaxis.
492 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
through 180° till the base of the conical sperm head is
directed inwards. The rays of the aster now extend widely,
and at their centre is a clear area. Meantime the sperm head
becomes converted into a small round nucleus. The move-
ment of the sperm head is, at first, radial; then there is a
change, and it assumes a new direction towards a point not
quite in the centre of the egg; when this change of path is
taken up the egg nucleus begins to move towards the point
where the nuclei ultimately meet (Wilson and Giardina).
The aster now comes in contact with the ege nucleus, and
as the nuclei approach, the clear area at its centre spreads
out over its side. The aster then divides and the nuclei
conjugate. The radiations now die down during a pause in
which the nucleus grows in size (Wilson), to redevelop again
focussed at the poles of the nucleus.
According to Hertwig, Doflein, Erlanger, and Wilson’s
earlier account, the centrosome corresponds to the whole
middle piece, but later Wilson described the middle piece as
cast aside, and in the centre of the aster is a small darkly-
staining granule. Boveri (1901) represents the sperm
centrosome as a spherical body smaller than the middle piece,
and containing within it two centrioles shortly after its
entrance into the egg.
Various other observers have represented a dark-staining
granule at the centre of the aster. My own observations
are inconclusive, and do not warrant me in expressing an
opinion.!
1 The character of the fully-formed centrosome in the sea-urchin egg is
still subject to difference of opinion, The form in which I see it in osmic
acid material is that of a largish sphere of very finely alveolar structure. In
Wilson’s papers on magnesium and etherised eggs, “it appears as a well-
defined body of considerable size, consisting of intensely stained granules,
which often give the centrosome exactly the appearance of a minute nucleus
containing a chromatin network.” ‘This becomes in the anaphases more homo-
geneous, and flattens down into a plate-form, which in the telophases often
lies directly on the membrane of the newly-formed nucleus precisely as Boveri
(1901) has deseribed for Echinus. Boveri (1901) represents it in several
forms. In one set of preparations it is a largish sphere of very finely alveolar
ARTIFICIAL PARTHENOGENESIS AND FERTILISATION. 493
The essential difference between the processes seen in
magnesium eggs and normal fertilisation is that whereas in
fertilisation there is only one, and that a definitely localised
point of astral activity, in the magnesium eggs there are a
number of foci, and development in large measure depends
on the accident of their number in the nuclear area.
There is the same want of unity of purpose that is seen in
polyspermic eggs, in which the number of points of astral
activity depends on the number of spermatozoa which gain
an entrance.
It has long been recognised that the union of the nuclei
and the initiation of division are co-ordinated, but in a
measure independent factors in fertilisation. Partheno-
genetic development under artificial agents is the latest
proof of this. The possibility of the development of
enucleated eve fragments when entered by a spermatozoon,
as described by Boveri, and afterwards named merogony by
Delage, is another. Hither nucleus is sufficient in itself.
With the problems underlying the nuclear conjugation
this article is not concerned. It starts from the assumption
that the union of equivalent nuclei is the end of fertilisation,
but not the means (Boveri).
The cause of the nuclear conjugation is not as yet under-
stood. The first possibility is that the aster is concerned in
bringing them together. Giardina (October, 1902) brings
the latest suggestion on this line. Starting from the basis
of the alveolar structure of protoplasm, he suggests that the
aster is the expression of both centripetal and centrifugal
currents. The centrosome is concerned in the diffusion of
chemotrophic substances into the egg, while at the same time
structure. In another set, in which the centrosome had reacted differently,
there is a centriole within the centrosome, which divides before the centrosome,
so that it is double in the metaphase. In Wilson’s earlier account there was
no central body, but in later descriptions there was a mass of granules in a
well-defined sphere, which succeeded a single granule of earlier stages. In
my previous paper, I regret that I misrepresented Professor Wilson’s nomen-
clature by referring to this as his centrosome. The sphere, as a whole, is
named the centrosome. See note to page 314, “The cell, ete.,”” 1900.
AQ4, THOMAS H. BRYCE.
the hyaloplasm flows in towards the centre. He points out
that the germ nucleus does not move till the rays of the aster
have reached it, and the aster has assumed a position of
equilibrium towards the centre of the egg. The union is
thus the result of the chemotactic forces of which the aster
is the expression.
Wilson (1901 8) shows, however, that the nuclei may
unite in the entire absence of an aster. When eggs, im-
mediately after fertilisation, are placed in a weak solution of
chloral (O. and R. Hertwig), or ether (Wilson), no aster is
developed, but when replaced in sea water the rays reappear
and the nuclei unite. In a certain proportion of cases,
which will be referred to later, the nuclei remain apart and
undergo independent transformation ; but in some instances,
also while the eggs are still in ether, the nuclei enlarge, and
later conjugate in the entire absence of an aster. ‘This
happens, however, only when the spermatozoon has entered
at a point not too far from the egg nucleus. Giardina holds
that this fact, and the other—that the nuclei quickly unite
whenever the eggs are put in pure sea water, and the aster
develops,—makes Wilson’s observation insufficient to exclude
his hypothesis. Other explanations, such as mass attraction
and direct chemical attraction, both observers reject.
Wilson thinks the latter improbable. Again, the idea of
protoplasmic currents such as suggested by Butschli,
Erlanger, and Conklin, is not proved by actual evidence in
normal conditions in the sea-urchin egg (Wilson). ‘The
changes of shape of the germ nucleus might suggest
amoeboid movement on its part; but, again, this does not
apply to the sperm nucleus, which travels through a longer
path (Wilson). ‘The changes in form might be due to the
exercise of chemotactic forces on the nucleus (Giardina).
The phenomenon described by Boveri (1888) under the
name of “ Partial Fertilisation,” has recently been worked
out in detail in Boveri's fixed preparations by ‘Teichmann
(1902). The method by which the results were obtained
was that eggs which had lain fourteen hours in unrenewed
ARTIFICIAL PARTHENOGENESIS AND FERTILISATION, 495
sea water were fertilised with spermatozoa, which were
treated with a ‘05 per cent. solution of potassium hydrate
until only a few were mobile. While polyspermy occurred in
more than half the eggs, the remainder were fertilised by a
single spermatozoon. In these cases, however, the sperm
nucleus did not unite with the germ nucleus, but the aster
became detached from it, and advanced alone to the germ
nucleus, a bipolar figure was formed and division proceeded.
The sperm nucleus took no share in the process, but passed un-
altered into one of the blastomeres. Later, however, either in
the two- or the four-cell space, it broke up into its chromosomes,
which entered into the equatorial plate of the cell in which it
was included, and which now divided lke its neighbours.
Such eggs were capable of developing to the blastula stage.
The question presented itself: Was this aster and the
amphiaster the result of the activity of an ovocentrum, or
were they the product of the sperm aster ?
In monospermic eggs Teichmann found the early stages
very scarce, and, though very suggestive, too few for absolute
proof, and the phenomena seen in dyspermic eggs are
described to fill the gap. It may be admitted that in these
eggs, in spite of the apparent inactivity of the sperm nucleus,
the sperm aster with its centrum is the operative factor in
starting the developmental process. The appearances are
very similar to those in the etherised eggs described by
Wilson (1901). In that form, as in Kchinus, the nuclei con-
jugate when they are very unequal in size, and before the
division of the aster. In Asterias and other forms an amphi-
aster is developed before conjugation, and the nuclei are
nearly equal in size. In the experiments the union was
delayed, as in “ partial fertilisation,” and the amphiaster was
formed before the conjugation.
Among 'l'eichmann’s observations I shall refer only to those
of monospermic eggs. The main feature is the detachment
of the sperm aster from its nucleus, its application to the egg
nucleus, and its normal division, followed by normal segmen-
tation. The fate of the sperm nucleus depends on the
vou. 46, PART 3.—NEW SERIES. HH
496 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
position it assumes in the egg, relative to the cleavage
plane. If it lies outside the equatorial plate of the spindle
it passes unchanged into one of the blastcmeres; if it
lies within the field of the first spindle, it does not
actually unite with the chromatin of the female nucleus, but
its chromatin undergoes a marked relaxation. Though it
shows a marked resistance to the tractive forces, it is drawn
out and torn into several shreds. It thus passes undivided
into one of the blastomeres, and no chromatin elements
derived from it are found at the poles of the spindle. In
several cases where the nucleus lay exactly at the equator,
and the traction of the poles was nearly equal, it was
observed that the chromatin mass was much broken up, and
was torn into two parts. The cleavage of the cell body may
have helped to complete the division. The loosening of the
sperm chromatin mass in the first spindle seems to have
broken its power of resistance, for when the next division is
initiated, the two nuclei lying side by side in one of the
blastomeres unite in the equatorial plate stage, and the
chromatin of both is equally distributed in the next division.
The number of chromosomes is now different in the blasto-
meres, sometimes double, perhaps quadruple in some cases
(though an accurate count was not possible), as if the chromo-
somes of the sperm nucleus emerged in double number,
though the first division was suppressed.
The sperm nucleus in the case where it has not lain within
the power of the spindle in the first division, may now, in
analogous fashion, be caught in the second division, to unite
later with the chromatin of one of the blastomeres of the
four-cell stage, or it may even pass over into the cight-cell
stage, as seen in living eggs by Boveri.
T'eichmann concludes that the radiations are derived from
the sperm centrosome as their starting point, and on the
supposition that the centrosome is introduced by the sperma-
tozoon into the egg, that it has suffered less from the chemi-
cal reagent than the nucleus. The centrosome behaves as
in ordinary fertilisation, the sperm nucleus is passive, and
ARTIFICIAL PARTHENOGENESIS AND FERTILISATION. 497
seems to form no hindrance to the normal processes in the
eve, and it seems to be of no significance, whether it enters
earlier or later into union with one of the descendants of the
ege nucleus. The difference between the phenomena of
“partial fertilisation’? and the normal process is the non-
union of the nuclei. In certain cases Boveri (1890)
described an independent transformation of the nuclei
under normal conditions, but the elements from both entered
into the equatorial plate of the first cleavage spindle, and
normal division tceok place. The mere want of union is not
of moment, if the sperm nucleus lies near enough the germ
nucleus to be influenced by the nuclear fluid of the eg
nucleus. ‘lhe absence of this hastening factor may explain
the fact that the karyokinesis of the sperm nucleus in
enucleated fragments is much slower than in the cleavage
spindle. But such an explanation alone will not hold for
cases of dyspermy in these experiments, where the sperm
uuclear descendants remain far behind the derivates of the
eg@ nucleus, and it must be assumed that a change has taken
place in the sperm nucleus itself, a kind of paresis, produced
by the potassium hydrate. This holds for the monospermic
egos also, and explains why, even in spite of its position, the
nucleus does not enter into union.
Another factor is a change in the egg, defined as an over-
ripeness. In many cases the germ nucleus is a stage ahead,
compared with the normal process, of the centrosome. When
the centrosome met the ege nucleus, the latter must already
have been in a way prepared for division, and this great
readiness to enter into division may be part explanation of
the lagging behind of the sperm nucleus. There has not
been time for the sperm nucleus to undergo transformation
before the egg nucleus has submitted to division. Teichmann
does not explain in what the over-ripeness consists. It may
perhaps be that, since the eggs had lain fourteen hours in
unrenewed sea water, the early preparatory stages of the
natural transformation had supervened, which takes place in
egos after lying long in sea water.
498 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
Regarding the main point, it may be admitted that the
aster and its centrosome here concerned is that belonging to
the sperm nucleus, and that in its behaviour we have a
beautiful demonstration of the independence of the two
factors in fertilisation, or, in other words, of the two func-
tions of the spermatozoon, and that the two functions have
been disturbed in unequal degree. At the same time the
egg protoplasm, after the fourteen hours’ sojourn in
unrenewed sea water, was approaching to that stage in
which it acquires spontaneously the tendency to develop
astral activities, and it might be held that the conditions are
the same as in magnesium eggs in which, as a result of a
general stimulation, asters and centrosomes which are
unconnected with the nucleus appear de novo in the
cytoplasm. While the results are of interest in connection
with the apparent independence of the factors in fertilisation,
they also show how they are co-ordinated together. The
sperm nucleus becomes dissociated from the aster, and fails of
union, because it has not undergone the transformation which
properly corresponds to the phase reached in the cycle of the
centrosomal changes. Further, while the nuclei may be re-
solved into chromosomes before union, and yet unite in the
equatorial plate stage, a certain stage in the transformation
of the dense mass of chromatin of the sperm head into
a nucleus with distinct chromatin network, must be reached
before union can take place. ‘This seems to show that several
co-ordinated factors are at work in the nuclear conjugation.
Further insight into the behaviour of the factors in
fertilisation is given by an experiment described by Ziegler
(1898). ‘This consisted in carrying newly-fertilised eggs by
a gentle current of water in his compressorium against
threads of cotton wool. The egg was caught on a thread
and nearly cut through, leaving only a slender bridge of
protoplasm between the two portions of the egg. ‘The one
contained the sperm nucleus, the other the germ nucleus.
While the sperm nucleus regularly divided, followed by
division of the cytoplasm, the egg nucleus merely underwent
ARTIFICIAL PARTHENOGENESIS AND FERTILISATION. 499
alternate changes of disintegration and reconstruction with-
out division of the cytoplasm. Radiations appeared and dis-
appeared, and after three cycles, owing to the segmentation
of the portions containing the sperm nucleus, the egg-nuclear
portion became detached and disintegrated. In another
experiment the egg-nuclear portion underwent changes of
form suggesting abortive attempts at cleavage. The mitotic
transformation of the egg nucleus was not synchronous with
that of the sperm nucleus, but always a little behind.
These observations show that under the conditions of the
experiments the egg nucleus is excited to division without
direct contact with the sperm nucleus cr aster, but that the
mitotic phenomena are ineffective to produce cytoplasmic
cleavage. Ziegler refers this to the general stimulation of
the egg by the spermatozoon, manifested also by the throw-
ing off of the vitellne membrane. Boveri has shown that
the same phenomena occur in egg fragments produced by
shaking some minutes after fertilisation, and he (1902) refers
to cases of this kind in which he has observed divisions of
the nucleus followed by cell cleavage. The division was
repeated a second time, and thus the four-cell stage was
reached, but development then ceased. Another example of
the effect of this general stimulation is to be seen (Boveri,
1902) in the cases in which the egg is incited to throw off the
polar bodies by the entrance of the spermatozoon.
This brings me to a further reference to Wilson’s observa-
tions on etherised eggs (1901 B). As has already been said,
under this treatment the sperm and germ nuclei remain
apart and undergo independently karyokinetic transforma-
tion. “The most striking fact is that, while the sperm aster
often gives rise to a perfect and symmetrical bipolar figure, the
ego nucleus in a great number of cases produces a monaster,
which seems at first incapable of resolving itself into a
bipolar figure.” In typical cases the egg nucleus gives rise
to a monaster such as described by Hertwig (96), and such
as occurs In magnesium eggs. While the egg monaster does
not at first give rise to a dicentric figure, it does so later, as
500 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
may be gathered from the description of an egg continuously
observed in the lving state. At the height of its develop-
ment the egg monaster lay at one side, the sperm amphiaster
at the other, and no spindle was formed between them. The
ege divided into three cells, two larger and somewhat
irregular containing two daughter sperm nuclei, and a small
one in which the single egg nucleus re-formed. At the second
division each of the sperm nuclei gave rise to a perfect amphi-
aster, and divided into two, the accompanying cytoplasmic
division resulting in the formation of two complete cells and
one binucleate cell. ‘The single egg nucleus gave rise to a
tetraster, and divided into three cells, one binucleate, the
nuclei of the latter quickly fusing together. The embryo
now consisted of six cells—three containing maternal, three
paternal nuclei. At the ensuing division fifteen cells were
formed, of which eight larger ones contained paternal nuclei,
while seven much smaller ones containing maternal nuclei lay
in a definite group at one side. The egg observed afterwards
died. Wilson has not seen an ege monaster become dicen-
tric at the first division, but the above observations prove
that it may operate as an effective division centre, without
establishing a spindle connection with either of the sperm
asters, and that it may divide later. A centrosome was
demonstrated in the monaster, in the same form as in the
sperm aster, and as in magnesium eggs. The possible action
of the chemical as the exciting agent of the karyokinetic
transformation was excluded by control experiments, and it
was therefore concluded, that it was due to a stimulus effected
by the spermatozoon, as in Ziegler’s experiment. ‘These
observations, added to the results obtained in the magnesium
ego's, “demonstrate that under appropriate stimulus the egg
nay give rise to a centrosome capable of progressive division,
but the etherised eggs show in the clearest manner that this
centrosome is less effective than the sperm centro-
some.”
I shall not venture on the general problem of the asters and
centrosomes. It will suffice for the present purpose if it be
ARTIFICIAL PARTHENOGENESIS AND FERTILISATION. 501
admitted that, without prejudice to the question either of the
individuality, or the persistence of the centrosome, the body
and its aster represent a kinetic phase of protoplasm, which
reveals itself in cycles of activity, and that the centrosomes
and asters constitute together, in some sense, a divisional
apparatus, though that term is not used in any definite
mechanical sense.
The egg both before and after maturation lacks the power,
for and by itself, to produce in normal circumstances such a
divisional apparatus as will regularly and equally divide the
cell.
In Ziegler’s and Boveri’s experiments on separated portions
of the egg containing only the ege nucleus, a divisional
apparatus is called up under the general stimulation of the
spermatozoon ; but it is ineffective, or only very partially
effective. In the etherised eggs it is slow in appearing, and
less effective than that associated with the sperm nucleus.
In magnesium ege's the effect of the disturbance of equilibrium
is to cause a change of state in the protoplasm which results
in the differentiation at many foci of kinetic centres, and it is
only in the cases where a single such centre, which divides
into two, appears in the nuclear area, or at most two centres,
that normal division proceeds.
In fertilisation there is only one kinetic centre, and this is
localised on the middle piece of the spermatozoon. Its
activities are rapidly unfolded, and dominate all the other
latent astral activities of the egg. “ The latent capacity of
both nucleus and cytoplasm to give rise to centrosomes is in
this case wholly inhibited”’! By union of the nuclei its
activity is transferred to the cleavage nucleus, and “becomes
a part of an activity on the part of the egg nucleus that
would have ensued even had the germ nuclei not united.’”!
Thus it may be said that the spermatozoon supplies the
lack in the egg, by providing a powerful and effective
“divisional apparatus.” How is this effected? Does the
spermatozoon act by giving a general or diffused stimulus
1 Wilson, 1901 a, pp. 581, 582.
502 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
to the egg, or by disturbing the general equilibrium in some
such way as the loss of water does, when the normal osmotic
relations are disturbed ? Or does the spermatozoon carry into
the egg some specific chemical substance which produces a
local differentiation, of which the centrosome and the aster
are the expression? Or does it import “ a highly active centro-
some or centroplasm about which the cytoplasmic energy is
brought to a focus?”
Boveri (1902) holds that a general stimulation of the egg,
with the sperm head as the point of predilection for the
formation of the aster, as in magnesium eges the ego nucleus
is the point of predilection, is insufficient as an explanation.
There is much rather something special present in the sperma-
tozoon, which determines that the aster shall appear at that
point, and that point only ; and thus he thinks that still the
appearances may best be described as being due to the intro-
duction of a centrosome. Even admitting—which, as has just
been indicated, he does not—that the spermatozoon acts like
Loeb’s agents, and in view of the demonstration by Morgan
and Wilson that their effect 1s to cause the egg to produce
centrosomes de novo, only a modification of secondary
importance would be required in his theory of fertilisation,
viz., that instead of saying that the spermatozoon brings a
centrosome into the egg, it would be necessary to say that it
causes the formation of a centrosome in the egg, from the
division of which the rest follows.
Taking the sperm aster as the manifestation of activities
produced by the spermatozoon, and looking to its sharp
localisation on the site of the middle piece, it seems reason-
able to suppose that the localised excitement is the effect of an
agent operative in fertilisation, and that it is probably related
to the middle piece; but the actual continuity between the
centrosome of the spermatozoon and that in the aster has not
been absolutely demonstrated, and the new facts in regard to
the centrosome put the matter in another light. Thus it
remains for the future to decide which of the two latter
alternatives stated above shall be adopted, and perhaps after
ARTIFICIAL PARTHENOGENESIS AND FERTILISATION. 5038
all there is only a formal difference, for the fundamental
problem is the same when the question is raised how the
centrosome exercises its activities.
Loeb (1901), on the physico-chemical side, suggests that a
catalytic substance is carried by the spermatozoon into the
egg, that is one which accelerates physical or chemical
processes which would occur without it. The K ions act as
catalysers, and the loss of water acts also, though less
directly, in the same way, and it may be that it gives rise to
substances which act catalytically. Inasmuch as in Cheetop-
terus the normal development does not show the character-
istics of a treatment of the eggs by K, it is probable that
normal fertilisation is not brought about by K ions.
Delage (1901) considers that the egg is in an unstable
state of equilibrium, which is readily upset by various
agencies—loss of water, heat, etc., and he lays some weight
on the specific action of the salts. He finds that the
chloride of manganese has, for Asterias, a specific action
superior to that of the alkaline salts. Together with his son,
he showed that in the case of the sea-urchin there was less
magnesium chloride in the sperm than in the eggs, by about
1 per cent., so that this salt could not have a specific action.
Among other possible factors in the action of the sperma-
tozoon, he gives prominence to its abstraction of water from
the cytoplasm. During maturation the nuclear sap is shed
into the cytoplasm; until this is effected by the solution of
the nuclear membrane, fertilisation is not possible ; it is just
at this “critical stage” in Asterias that he finds artificial
parthenogenesis most lable to occur. In the specialisation
of the sexual elements, the egg thus becomes rich, while the
spermatozoon has become poor, in water. After the sperm
head has entered the ovum it increases in size by abstraction
of fluid from the egg protoplasm, and this abstraction of
water by the sperm nucleus has to be reckoned with as a
possible factor in fertilisation.
Apart from the large assumptions involved in such an
hypothesis, the facts of ‘‘ partial fertilisation, and the local-
VOL, 46, PART 3.—NEW SERIES, 1]
504 THOMAS WH. BRYCE.
isation of the aster on the middle piece, are in opposition
to it.”
It has been suggested that the centrosome is the seat of
formation of a ferment. Mathews (1901), from the results of
his experiments on the eggs of Arbacia, believes that ‘ what-
ever the details of the process may prove to be, the essential
basis of karyokinetic cell division is the production of localised
areas of liquefaction in the protoplasm.” ‘The centrosome
might be a liquefying enzyme.”
Experiments on this line have been tried, but without
definite result. Pieri’s results (1899), from which he sup-
posed he had obtained a ferment “ ovulase,” have not been
confirmed. Dubois (1900) showed that there was no
question of a ferment being obtained by Pieris methods.
He made various experiments on sperm and eggs, from
which he concluded that there was evidence of the existence
of a “ zymase,”’ which he provisionally named “ Spermase,”
in the spermatozoa, and in the egg a substance, at least
modifiable by ‘‘ spermase,”’ provisionally named “ Ovulase.”
Spermase cannot enter the egg by diffusion or osmosis, but
only by a mechanical means, which is the raison d’étre of
the spermatozoon. Winkler’s experiments (1900) are also
inconclusive. He used sperm shaken for half an hour in
distilled water and filtered five or six times through three-
fold filter-paper. ‘The filtrate was added to sea water, the
precaution being taken of keeping the mixture at the same
degree of concentration as the sea water. While the sperm
in heated sea water produced no results, the liquid caused in
the case of Spherechinus and Arbacia eggs, though in a rela-
tively small number, the beginnings of segmentation. These
results may have been due to osmotic influences.
Loeb (1900) states that up to that date he had found no
enzyme save papain which had an effect in causing the egg
to segment, and it was uncertain whether this was not due
to some accidental constituent of the enzyme preparation used.
Gies (1901) made a complete study of the effects of extracts
of sperm made by the ordinary methods for the preparation of
ARTIFICIAL PARTHENOGENESIS AND FERTILISATION. 505
enzyme solutions. His results were wholly negative, and he
concluded that, used in certain proportions and under certain
conditions at any rate, such extracts did not possess any
power of causing proliferation of the ripe ovum. No
evidence could be furnished of the existence of a zymogen
in spermatozoa. Extracts of fertilised eggs in the earlier
stages of development seemed likewise devoid of any seg-
mental activity. The results, Gies adds, do not, however,
certainly show that enzyme action is impossible, after, or at
the time of union of the spermatozoon with the ovum, within
the latter.
The same negative result was got this spring by R. T.
Lieper at Millport Marine Biological Station, using an
extract of sperm prepared by spreading fresh sperm on
sheets of glass, then drying in air and sun, and afterwards
triturating the dried extract in sterilised sea water. The
filtrate from this fluid produced no segmentations, though
control experiments with eggs from the same ovaries
normally fertilised, nearly all developed.
LITERATURE.
Arrota.— Atti Soc. Ligrest. Sc. Nat. e Geogn.,’ ann. xii, fase. 3.
Batatrtton, 1900.—‘ Compt. Rendus de |’Acad. des Sciences,’ t. exxxi, p. 115
Baraitton, 1901.—‘ Compt. Rendus de l’Acad. des Sciences,’ t. exxxii, pp
852, 1134.
Batartton, 1902.—‘ Compt. Rendus de l’Acad. des Sciences,’ t. exxxiv, p. 918
BataiLtton.—‘ Archiv fiir Entwickelungsmechanik,’ t. xi, Heft 1.
Barartton.—‘ Archiv fir Entwickelungsmechanik,’ t. xii, Heft 4.
Bonnet, 1900.—Merkel und Bonnet- Ergebnisse u. s. w.,’ 1900.
Boveri, 1888.—‘ Sitzungsber. des Ges. f. Morph. und Physiol. in Miinchen,
Bd. iv, Heft 2.
Boveri, 1901.—‘ Zellen Studien,’ Heft 4, Jena, 1901.
Bovert, 1902.—*‘ Das Problem der Befruchtung,’ Jena, 1902.
Bryce, 1902.—‘ Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci.,’ vol. xlvi.
Bu.er, A. R., 1902.—‘ Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci.,’ vol. xlvi.
506 THOMAS H. BRYCE.
Detace, 1899.—*‘ Archiv. de Zool. Expér.,’ t. vii.
Decace, 1901.—‘ Rev. Gen. des Sciences,’ 12 année, No. 19.
Deace, 1901.—‘ Archiv. de Zool. Expér.,’ t. ix, Nos. 2, 3,
Dortern, 1897.—‘ Arch. f. mikroskopische Anat.,’ Bd. 1.
Dusors, 1900.—‘ C. R. Soe. Biol.,’ Paris, vol. lii, p. 197.
Fiscner, 1902.—-‘ Amer. Journ. of Physiology,’ June 2nd, 1902.
GrarD, 1900.—‘ C. R. Soe. Biol.,’ Paris, vols. lii, liii.
GiarpiIna, 1902, a.—‘ Anat. Anzeiger,’ Bd. xxi, No. 20.
Grarpina, 1902, b.—‘ Anat. Anzeiger,’ Bd. xxii, Nos. 22, 38.
Girs, W. J., 1902.—‘ Amer. Journ. of Physiol.,’ vol. vi.
Greerf, h., 1876.—‘ Sitzungsber. der Ges. zur Beford. der gesammten Natur-
wiss. zu Marburg,’ No. 5, quoted from O. Hertwig, 1890.
GREELEY, A. W., 1901.—‘ Amer. Journ. of Physiology,’ vol. vi, p. 296.
Hertwic, O. and R., 1887.—‘ Jenaische Zeitschrift fiir Naturwissenschaft,’
Bd. xx.
Hertwie, O., 1890.—‘ Jenaische Zeitschrift fiir Naturwissenschaft,’ Bd. xxiv
Hextwie, O., 1893.—‘ Die Zelle und die Gewebe.’
Hertwic, R., 1896.—* Uber die Entwick. des unbefurchteten Seeigeleies
Leipzig, 1896.
Hunter, 8. J., 1901.—‘ Amer. Journ. of Physiology,’ vol. vi, p. 177.
Logs, J., 1900.—‘ Amer. Journ. of Physiology,’ vol. ili, No. 9.
Logs, J., 1900.—‘ Amer. Journ. of Physiology,’ vol. iv, p. 178.
Logs, J., 1901.—‘ Amer, Journ. of Physiology,’ vol. iv, p. 423.
Logs, J., 1902.—* Archiv f. Entwickelungsmechanik,’ vol. xiii, Heft 4.
Logs, J., 1902.—‘ Archiv f. Entwickelungsmechanik,’ vol. xiv, Heft 4.
Maas, O., 1901.—‘ Sitzungsber. d. Ges. f. Morph. und Physiol. in Miinchen,’
Bd. xvii.
Matuews, A. P., 1900.—‘ Amer. Journ. of Physiology,’ vol. iv, p. 348.
Matuews, A. P., 1901.—‘ Amer. Journ, of Physiology,’ vol. vi, p. 142.
Maruews, A. P., 1901.—‘ Amer. Journ. of Physiology,’ vol. vi, p. 216.
Mevegs, I’., 1902.—‘ Verhand. des Anat. Ges, Halle,’ 1902, p. 132.
Morea, I. H., 1896.—‘ Arch. f. Entwickelungsmechanik,’ Bd. iii Heft 38.
Moreany, ‘I’. H., 1899.—‘ Arch. f. Entwickelungsmechanik,’ Bd. viii, Heft 3.
Moxéay, ‘I’. H., 1900.—‘ Arch. f, Kutwickelungsmechanik,’ Bd. xii, Heft 2.
Norman, W. W., 1896.—‘ Arch. f. Entwickelungsmechanik,’ Bd, iii, Heft 1.
Prent, J. B., 1899.—‘ Archiv. de Zool. Exper., Notes et Revue,’ vii, 3,
ProwazeEk, 8., 1900.—‘ Zool. Anzeiger,’ No. 618, p, 358,
ARTIFICIAL PARTHENOGENESIS AND FERTILISATION. 507
TEICHMANN, Ernst, 1902.—‘ Jen. Zeitschrift fiir Naturwiss.,’ n. F., Bd. xxx,
Heft 1.
VicurEr, 1900.—‘ Compt. Rendus Acad. Sci.,’ Paris, t. cxxxi, p. 118.
Vieuier, 1901.—‘ Compt. Rendus Acad. Sci.,’ Paris, t. cxxxii, p. 1436.
VieuiER, 1902.—‘ Compt. Rendus Acad. Sci.,’ Paris, t. cxxxv, p. 60.
VieuiER, 1902.—‘ Compt. Rendus Acad. Sci.,’ Paris, t. cxxxv, p. 197.
Wepexinp, 1901.—‘ Ber. tib. der Verhand. d. 5 internat. Zool. Congress,’
Berlin, 1901.
Wixtson, Ep. B., 1901.—‘ Arch. f. Entwickelungsmechanik,’ Bd. xii, Heft 4.
Witson, Ep. B., 1901.—‘ Arch. f. Entwickelungsmechanik,’ Bd. xiii, Heft 1.
Winker, Hans, 1900.—‘ Nachr. K. Ges. Wiss. Gottingen, Math. Phys. K1.,’
1900, Heft 2, p. 187.
ZIEGLER, H. H., 1898.—*‘ Arch. f. Entwickelungsmechanik,’ Bd. vi, Heft 2.
A
Al
vot. 46, PART 3.—NEW SERIES.
file OIThe ee x awit eee
2 te Oe oe wy, bet ys oP ont
ia : T° sae} 5 ‘ a. oe
1 a” 2s : g 210 alt
Fr F
< 7
ao
'
a 4 :
; ;
eda
‘5 » : _ =
=
.
‘
-
«
'
'
'
4, &
Pa
>
i; . = J ; -
> age ieee eA
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 509
van
“The Movements and Reactions of Fresh-water
Planarians: a Study in Animal Behaviour.'
By
Raymond Pearl, Ph.D.
(instructor in Zoology in the University of Michigan, Ann Arbor,
Michigan, U.S.A.)
ConTENTS.
PAGE
A. INTRODUCTION . , 3 4 <., et
B. R&suME oF LITERATURE . : webb
I. Morphological and detent tic : > Eb
II. Physiological : : . 520
c. MATERIAL ; ; : : . 523
p. Hapits anp NATURAL Fuditer : : : B25
| I. Occurrence and Distribution : : i526
Il. Activities ; 2 ; » “B87
a. Sensitivity : : : . 527
4. Secretion of Mucus : : : . 529
c. Periods of Activity and Rest : . 0832
d. Formation of Collections . : eae
e. Movement on Surface Film 534
III. Food 535
IV. Defecation : 537
V. Summary of Factors in beh wwiviis 538
r. Normat Motor Activities 539
I. Locomotor Movements 539
a. Gliding 539
1. Rate of oe Moy esacnk 545
2. Direction 548
1 Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory, University of Michigan,
Ann Arbor, Michigan, No. 58.
vo. 46, PART 4.—NEW SERIES. LL
> a
310 RAYMOND PEARL.
b. Crawling Movement
1. Direction :
Y. Stimuli which induce Crawhbe :
ce. Movement on the Surface Film
d. Relation of the Movements of Triclads to thse of oiien
Forms :
IT. Non-locomotor Ai oqteeae
1. Contraction of the Body
b Extension of the Body
c. Rest
1. Formation of Calledtens
d. The Effect of Operations on Movement
F. REACTIONS TO STIMULI ;
TI. Reactions to Mechanical Stimuli :
a. Methods
b. Description of Reactions
1. Reactions to Stimuli applied to the Head Radian
a. Reactions to Strong Stimuli
B. Reactions to Weak Stimuli
2. Reactions to Stimuli applied to the Middle Region of
the Body
a. Reactions to Strong Stimuli
B. Reactions to Weak Stimuli
8. Reactions to Stimuli applied to the Posterior Rieti
of the Body
4. Reactions to Stimulation of the Feed Sune
5. Reactions of Resting Specimens to Mechanical
Stimuli k
6. Reactions to Stimuli given 2 Operates Proce-
dure .
7. The Effect of Atanas Higtianes to Mosman
c. The General Features of the Reactions to Mechanical
Stimuli
d. The Mechanism of the Reaneia
1. The Relation of the Brain to the eaatiaee
2. The Neuro-muscular Mechanism
e. Features in the General Behaviour of the Orpanian ae
the Reactions to Mechanical Stimuli explain
J. Summary ‘
Il. Reactions to ieee and ciaminal Stimuli :
i. pre Reactions .
. Food Reactions of Bicdieens ative Onersitene
: Summary of ood Reactions
PAGE
548
550
551
552
553
555
555
556
557
566
570°
576
576
576
577
577
578
582
588
588
589
592
594
595
595
597
600
602
602
606
619
623
623
624
637
640
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 511]
PAGE
b. Reactions to Chemical Stimuli—Chemotaxis . * 643
1. Reactions to Localised Chemical Stimuli . . 643
a. Methods P : ‘ . 643
B. Results : ; ; . 646
2. General Summary : PP aiy
3. Unlocalised Action of Ghignicils : . 669
Ill. Thigmotaxis and the Righting Reaction . 670
a. Thigmotaxis 2 : ‘ 27670
b. The Righting Reaction —. : e673
The Mechanism of the Reaction. : . 676
ec. Summary d : : . 684
IV. Electrotaxis f ; : : . 685
a. Methods : ; f ; . 685
b. Results : : : . 685
ce. Mechanism of the peaeGen: ; : . 690
d, Summary : ; ; O95
V. Reaction to Desiccation . E , . 695
VI. Rheotaxis : 697
G. GENERAL SUMMARY AND Diicoeaton OF Hacer : . 698
H. List oF LITERATURE ; ‘ ‘ ; nO
A. INTRODUCTION.
THE present study has for its purpose the analysis of the
behaviour of the common fresh-water planarian into its com-
ponent factors. It is well known that, aside from the
researches of a few investigators on a small number of forms,
we have little detailed knowledge of the behaviour of lower
organisms. It is coming to be realised, too, that knowledge
of what an animal does is just as important in the general
study of life phenomena as a knowledge of how it is con-
structed, or how it develops. But it must be admitted that
until quite recent times the study of the activities of living
things was a much neglected field in biology. ‘The
publication of the ‘ Origin of. Species’ gave the biological
pendulum a swing towards the study of phylogeny, from
which it is only just beginning to return.
As a consequence of this concentration of interest on other
subjects, we possess an accurate and full knowledge of the
512 RAYMOND PEARL.
activities of very few lower organisms. The behaviour of the
Protozoa has been quite fully described and analysed by the
work of Verworn (’89) and Jennings (’97, 799, 799a, 7996,
99, : 00, : 00a, :00b, :00c,: 01, Jennings and Moore : 02).
In the earlier work of Verworn the general features of most
of the reactions of the Protozoa are described, special atten-
tion being paid to the rhizopods. The reactions of the
Infusoria have been very thoroughly worked out by Jennings.
In the case of the Infusoria we now know exactly the
mechanism of the reaction to a large number of stimuli. The
reactions and general behaviour in the case of two groups of
echinoderms are quite thoroughly known from the early work
of Preyer (’86, ’87) on the starfish and the recent brilliant
work of von Uexkiill (96, ’96a, ’99, : 00, : 00a) on the sea-
urchin. ‘These few instances are the only ones in the
literature where the movements and reactions of an organism,
or group of organisms, have been investigated in any com-
prehensive “‘ monographic” way. There is a great body of
literature dealing with isolated reactions in a variety of forms,
but the thorough investigation of the activities of animals in
a way comparable to that in which their morphology has
been investigated remains in large degree yet to be done.
It appeared highly desirable that this sort of knowledge be
extended, and it was with this idea in mind that this work
was undertaken. The form used, Planaria, was chosen for
several reasons. In the first place, it has come to be a sort of
paradigm for work on regeneration, and its biology from that
standpoint is already well known. Furthermore, in some one
or more of its species it is an almost universally distributed
form and can always be obtained in quantities. Finally, and
particularly, it is a representative of an animal type about
whose activities we know only the most general facts. — It is
a symmetrical aquatic organism of low organisation, and its
behaviour is rather complicated. The importance of possess-
ing a detailed knowledge of the activities of a bilaterally
symmetrical, free-moving, low organism will be apparent
when it is considered that such an organism has never been
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 9013
made the subject of such a study. The behaviour of typically
unsymmetrical organisms, the Infusoria, has been analysed,
as has also that of some radially symmetrical animals, and in
both cases there is found to be a very close interrelation-
ship between the general form of the body and the reactions.
To investigate, then, in a comprehensive way the activities
of a bilaterally symmetrical organism standing low in the
animal series was the purpose of this work. The most
general problem which presents itself is the establishment
of the animal’s position in the objective psychogenetic series.
Are its activities relatively simple or are they complex? Do
they fall under the same general type as those of the
Infusoria or those of the higher organisms, or do they occupy
an intermediate position? Another general problem of im-
portance is whether there is any marked correlation between
the behaviour and the form of the body, such as has been
found to obtain in so marked a degree in the case of the
Infusoria and the rotifers (vide Jennings, loc. cit.). We
have in the flat-worm a symmetrical animal; are its reactions
of a symmetrical type? Besides these broad fundamental
problems there are, of course, a large number of subsidiary
questions which readily suggest themselves in connection
with a work of this sort. These need not be specifically
mentioned here, but will be brought out in the course of
the paper.
As to the scope of the work as actually done, the following
may be said :—The general “ natural history” of the animal
was studied as completely as possible. All the normal move-
ments were studied in detail. ‘he reactions to mechanical
stimuli; the food reactions and reactions to chemicals in
general; electrotaxis ; thigmotaxis; rheotaxis; the righting
reaction; the reaction of cut and regenerating pieces ; and
hydrotaxis and the reactions during desiccation were investi-
gated. No work was done on the phototaxis or thermotaxis, ~
A study of the phototaxis was omitted for two reasons; first
on account of the fact that during the progress of this in-
vestigation Parker and Burnett (: 00) reported their work on —
514 RAYMOND PEARL.
the same subject, and furthermore on account of lack of
opportunity. As a result of some incidental observations
made during the course of this work, it has appeared that it
would be profitable to extend the work of Parker and
Burnett, and this, together with a study of the thermotaxis, I
hope to be able to do in the future. Another field for further
work is afforded in the study of the reactions of regenerating
individuals. As this subject did not fall immediately into
the general plan of this work, but comparatively little atten-
tion has been given to it, yet the work done gives much
promise of important results to be gained by more extended
investigations.
So far as possible the details of the movements and
reactions will be described fully. It is not easy to see why
there is not as much need for a complete knowledge of
details in physiological work as in morphological, yet in
much of the recent work in comparative physiology only the
most general results are reported. ‘To gain a knowledge of
the details one must do the work over again. While such
more or less general papers are easy to read, and put the main
results in such a form as to be easily accessible, yet it is
beheved by the writer that the solid foundations of com-
parative physiology and psychology must consist of detailed
“fine”? work, just as has been the case in morphology. It
seems to the writer that the tendency to abandon the detailed
descriptive method in favour of the extreme experimental
method in biological work is unfortunate. Both ways of
working are methods of getting at the truth, and, as proven
by their results, both are good methods. The current notion
of the sufficiency of the experimental method to the exclusion
of others is not only an evident exaggeration of the facts in
the case, but, in the opinion of the writer, the exclusive use
of the “ crucial-experiment ”? method in work upon the move-
ments and reactions of organisms has in some cases hindered
vather than helped us to gain a clear understanding of the
phenomena. ‘I'he importance of close observational work in
the study of animal behaviour has been strongly emphasised
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 515
recently by Whitman (99). The aim in the present work
has been to get as extensive and detailed a knowledge as
possible of the behaviour of the organism by direct observa-
tion before resorting to experiments.
At this point I wish to acknowledge my indebtedness to
the officials of the laboratory in which this work has been
done. ‘T’o Professor H. 8. Jennings, under whose general
oversight this investigation has been prosecuted, I wish to
extend my heartfelt thanks for his uniform kindness in
freely giving advice, suggestion, and kindly criticism of im-
measurable value. Any adequate expression of my indebted-
ness to him is impossible. I further wish to express my
thanks to Professor Jacob Reighard for the numerous
facilities which I have enjoyed during my stay in his
laboratory, and for his kindly interest, which has made work
there a pleasure. Finally, I desire to acknowledge my in-
debtedness to Professor F. C. Newcombe, of the Botanical
Department of the University of Michigan, for many
valuable suggestions and advice.
B. R&SUME OF LITERATURE.
But little has been done on the physiology of the move-
ments or on the psychology of the T'urbellaria, and, as in
the case of most of the literature dealing with these subjects,
what has been done has been in comparatively recent years.
Investigators of the old ‘ natural-history ” school which
flourished before the time when Darwin’s work changed the
course of zoology seem not to have given much attention to
planarians, while the later systematists and morphologists
for the most part carefully avoided any reference to the
activities of the forms which they studied.
I. Morphological and Systematic.
Among the papers devoted primarily to the systematic or
morphologi¢al treatment of the group, there are occasional
references to points in the behaviour of the organisms which
516 RAYMOND PEARL.
are of importance from the present standpoint. Amon
such references the following may be noted :
Moseley (’74), in a paper concerned principally with the
anatomy and histology of the land planarians, devotes a sec-
tion to a discussion of the habits of these forms. He com-
ments on the “avoidance of light” (negative phototaxis) of
land and aquatic planarians, and discusses the habitat and
food of the animals. He reaches the conclusion that all
planarians are carnivorous, but gives no account of the
method of feeding. He quotes Rolleston as having found
that Planaria torva and Dendroccelum lacteum in a
dish in which had been placed a freshly killed earthworm
‘“‘crowded on to the worm’s body and soon sucked all the
hemoglobin out of it, leaving it white and pulpy.” Brief
mention is made of the habit of the land planarians of
secreting a mucous thread and hanging from it as a molluse
does. Finally, the method of movement of Bipalium with |
the head raised and waved from side to side as the animal
proceeds is described. A bibliography of previous literature
is given.
In another paper Moseley (77, pp. 273, 274) gives an
account of the movements and general habits of Geoplana
flava, a Brazilian species. This species was found to keep
in shaded and moderately lighted places. ‘he direction of
the ciliary currents was tested by placing small bits.of paper
on the surface of the body, and it was found that when the
unimal was in active movement the effective beat of the
cilia on the anterior part of the dorsal surface was forward
and outward, while on the posterior portion of the dorsal
surface the beating was backward and outward. ‘The
currents on the ventral surface were always straight back-
ward. ‘lhe author concludes that the function of the cilia
on the dorsal surface is to quickly remove foreign bodies.
When the organism was at rest there was no movement of
the dorsal cilia; “the animal moves to a large extent by
muscular action, the body alternately contracting and ex-
panding during motion, When moving it lifted its anterior
MOVEMENTS, WIC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 9017
extremity often, .... .and moved it to and fro as if to fee
or see its way.” “ When the anterior extremity of the body
was cut off the remainder of the animal seemed still to move
with definite purpose, avoiding obstacles and retreating from
the light, while the cut end was raised and thrust in various
directions as if to search for an object on which to climb.”
In a brief note Zacharias (’88) mentions the occurrence of
Geodesmus terrestris between the lamelle of Agaricus
deliciosus. Particular points mentioned are: the slow
movement, characterised by the raised anterior end, and the
hanging by a mucous thread after passing over the edge of
a glass plate. Light stimulation of the anterior end with a
needle induces a very strong contraction of the whole body.
Gamble (93), in a systematic paper on marine Turbel-
laria, describes briefly the movements of a number of
species of rhabdocceles and triclads.
Lang (’84), in his monograph on the polyclads, devotes a
chapter to the habits, movements, and natural history of this
group of planarians (loc. cit., pp. 631—641).. While not
done particularly from the physiological standpoint and not
treating the subject experimentally, this work contains
numerous valuable observations. Points especially treated
are the habitat, colouration, food and method of feeding,
defecation, movements, including swimming, copulation,
respiration, regeneration, growth, and duration of life. The
details in the behaviour of the polyclads recorded in this
monograph will be discussed later in connection with the
points on which they have direct bearing.
The most important paper dealing with the movements
and general behaviour of planarians which I have been able
to find in the literature is that of Lehnert (91). This work
is principally devoted to an account of the biology of three
forms of land planarians, viz. Bipalium kewense, B.
kewense var. viridis, and Geodesmus bilineatus.
Besides the work on these land forms, Lehnert also made
some comparative studies on several fresh-water dendrocceles
and rhabdocceles. He gives an admirably fuil and detailed
518 RAYMOND PEARL.
account of the movements of land planarians ; in fact, by far
the best description of these phenomena in the literature.
In this account the relation of the movement to the mucous
secretion from the ventral surface of the body is brought out
in great detail. The principal factors in producing the’
movement in the case of the land planarians he gives as _
(a) cilary movement on the ventral surface, (b) rhythmical
contraction waves passing longitudinally over the ventral |
surface, (c) secretion of slime, and (d) snake-like movements
ot the whole body. A comparison with the movements of
other planarians (fresh-water) 1s made. In this connection
it may be mentioned that Lehnert considered rhythmical con-
traction waves passing along the ventral surface of the
animal to be a factor in the movement of fresh-water
planarians (Dendroccelum lacteum, Planaria_ poly-
chroa, and Polycelis tenuis). This I am unable to con-
firm from observations on the planarians which I have
studied. This point will be discussed more fully later. The’
food and the method of taking food in case of the land
planarians, Lehnert worked out very thoroughly. They were
found to be carnivorous, and in the case of Bipalium the
pharynx was capable of being stretched over a large piece of
earthworm, so that it resembled a very thin transparent skin
covering it. The relations to other phases of the environ-
ment, e.g. air, water, temperature, light, solid bodies, etc.,
are described very briefly.
Raspail (93), in a brief note, mentions the feeding of a_
planarian.
Van Duyne (96) mentions briefly the movements of
heteromorphic forms of Planaria torva (?). He found
that the parts of two-headed individuals moved inde-
pendently of each other, and that each piece would move
away from the other until they had completely torn apart.
Willey (97), in a brief note, describes the structure of a
remarkable asymmetrical planarian, for which he proposes
the generic name Heteroplana, having the left side of the
body almost completely atrophied. Regarding the loco-
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 019
motion of this remarkable form he says, ‘‘In Heteroplana
eee a. « the locomotion is usually conducted in a somewhat
one-sided fashion,” and he furthermore figures the animal
as constantly moving towards the left. It is to be regretted
that no reference is made to how this form reacts to stimuli,
as ib would be of great interest to know whether the reactions
are asymmetrical, and in general how they compare with
the normal planarian type.
A series of papers by Morgan (’98, :00, : 01) contains
numerous references of importance on the movements of cut
and regenerated specimens of various fresh-water planarians.
He finds (98), in confirmation of van Duyne, that in two-
headed individuals each head tends to move in its own proper
direction. In the case of a heteromorphic form with two
heads pointed in opposite directions, this likewise held true ;
but one component being stronger this determined the move-
ment of the whole. The lack of movement in certain forms
of cut pieces is also noted. In his :00 paper Morgan notes
the readiness with which “ Planaria, sp.” ! and Planaria
maculata take food, although no account is given of the
method of the feeding reaction. An interesting observation,
and one of considerable theoretical importance, is also re-
ported in this paper. In an individual split longitudinally in
the median line from the posterior end forward, in which the
two parts were united only by a small connecting band ot
tissue at the anterior end, it often appeared “ as though these
pieces would pull apart, but as soon as the tension on the
connecting band becomes too strong, the rest of the piece, by
a sort of adaptive response, ceases pulling in its former
direction.” In the most recent paper cited (:01) Morgan
corrects a statement of Bardeen? regarding the feeding of
Planaria. It is maintained (and I may mention at this
point that my own observations agree entirely with those of
Morgan) that Planaria “responds freely ” to food sub-
1 Later identified by Woodworth as Planaria lugubris.
= I's be reviewed later.
520 RAYMOND PEARL.
stances not actually in contact with it. This pomt will be
discussed in detail later.
Lillie (: 01) brings out the fact that cut posterior parts of —
the body of Dendroccelum lacteum show very little
movement, and in general fail to give the typical reaction to
light after removal of the brain.
Finally, there are accounts of the natural history and
habits of various planarians in numerous “natural histories”
and text-books. As such accounts are for the most part
brief and of no great significance from our standpoint, they
will not be referred to in detail.
II. Physiological.
The literature dealing with the planarians from a purely
physiological standpoint is very meagre. Furthermore, for
the most part it deals only with special phases of the
physiology of these organisms, there being very little work
attempting to bring the behaviour of planarians into relation
with that of other forms.
The most important work dealing experimentally with the
physiology of the movements of flatworms which I have
found is that of Loeb (?94). The purpose of his work was to
determine in how far the reactions of such low organisms as
worms were dependent upon the brain. The planarians used
were ‘'hysanozoon brocchii, and Planaria torva, In
Thysanozoon he found that if the animal were quickly cut
into two pieces transversely with a sharp scalpel or scissors
the anterior piece crawled on undisturbed, while the
posterior piece showed no further movement. The conclu-
sion is then drawn that ‘“ Die Spontaneitiéit der Progressiv-
bewegungen ist also bei ‘lhysanozoon eine Funktion des
Gehirns.” ‘This form shows no definite ‘ geotropic” reac-
tion, but crawls about with the axes of the body forming any
angles with the direction of gravitation. The very strong
“ stereotropism ” (thigmotaxis) of the ventral side of hy-
sanozoon, which always tends to keep in contact with a
solid body, is noted. This reaction is found to be inde-
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 521
pendent of the brain. There was found to be co-ordination
between the anterior and posterior pieces of a worm in
which the lateral longitudinal nerves had been cut, but in
which a narrow connecting strip of tissue had been left
between the pieces. In P. torva Loeb states that posterior
parts of the body which have been separated by a transverse
cut from all connection with the brain crawl “ ebenso munter
weiter, wie die orale Halfte.” ‘The reaction of this form to
changes of light intensity is discussed in considerable detail,
it being shown that in strong light the organism is stimu-
lated to active movement, while in the shade it remains quiet
or moves very slowly. ‘This was found to occur as well in
decapitated as in normal worms. The “ stereotropic”’ reac-
tion in this form is also mentioned. In concluding, the
author holds that in worms there is no “ associative Gedicht-
niss,’ and hence no consciousness. ‘hese results have been
recently incorporated without essential change into a larger
work (Loeb : 00).
In an earlier paper Loeb (’935) first described the reactions
to ight of Planaria torva. These results were incor-
porated without essential change into the ‘94 paper men-
tioned above.
Hesse (97), in his morphological studies on the eyes of
flat-worms, devotes a section to the subject of the reactions
to light of Euplanaria gonocephala and Dendrocelum
lacteum. His results are confirmatory of Loeb’s, nothing
of particular significance being added.
Steiner (798) found that posterior pieces of Planaria
Neapolitana (=Stylochus pilidium, Lang) separated
from the brain by a transverse cut would move about freely
after recovery from the operation. He believes this ability
to move is conditioned by the presence of ganglion-cells in
other parts of the body than the brain (along the lateral
nerve-cords).
Parker and Burnett (: 00) have recently made a thorough
study, using very careful experimental methods, and treating
the results statistically, of the reactions of Planaria
ioe RAYMOND PEARL.
gonocephala to light. This form moves away from the
source of the hght. ‘The amount of directive influence was
measured. It was found that specimens without eyes, i.e.
in which the anterior end had been cut off, react in much the
same way to light as do normal individuals, “in that they
have a tendency to turn away from the course when directed
towards the source of lhght, and to keep in it when directed
away from the source, though with less precision, and often
to less extent, than planarians with eyes.’ Furthermore,
figures are given showing that planarians from which the
anterior end has been cut off move more slowly than normal
animals. This is thought to be due to the absence of the
eyes.
The most extensive paper dealing with the physiology of
planarians is that of Bardeen (:01). This paper is mainly
devoted to a study of regeneration in Planaria maculata,
but before entering upon the discussion of this subject the
author devotes considerable space to an account of the
anatomy and physiology of the organism. In the section
devoted to physiology, the author discusses, under the
caption ‘ Environmental Activities,” sensation, movement,
and the central nervous system. The author makes the
remarkable, and obviously incorrect, statement that the
planarian is sensitive only to light and contact. A very few
inconclusive experiments having reference to tligmotaxis,
geotaxis (?) and hydrotaxis, are reported. ‘The statement is
made that specimens ‘“ would remain unmoved by the presence
close by their side of a piece of fresh snail, a food much
prized by them.” Two forms of movement are described—
“swimming” and crawling. The author’s description of
what he calls the “ swimming” movement will be discussed
later in this paper. Brief and very general statements
regarding the reactions to mechanical stimuli are presented.
Under the heading ‘ Internal activities” are discussed
deglutition, food dispersion, defecation, and respiration, in a
rather loose and hypothetical way. ‘The author makes the
following contribution regarding excretion in Planaria :—
MOVEMEN''S, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 923
“ Excretion is carried in part through the intestines by the
act of defecation; in part it is doubtless carried on by an
excretory system opening on the surface.” A more detailed
discussion of various points raised by Bardeen will be entered
into in connection with the parts of this work on which they
have direct bearing.
A second paper by the same author (Bardeen, : 01a)
describes briefly the normal food reactions of Planaria, and
shows that a decapitated specimen will not find food material
in a dish, although one such a specimen could ‘ be made to
eat if it were placed on its back on a slide in a small drop of
water. Under the conditions mentioned the pharynx is
usually protruded, and will engulf bits of food placed in the
mouth.” An experiment was performed in which the part
of the head in front of the eyes was cut off. Such specimens,
from which merely the tip of the head had been removed, re-
acted normally to food. It is also shown that specimens
from which the part of the body posterior to the pharynx has
been removed feed lke normal worms. Regarding the
method by which planarians find food in their immediate
vicinity, Bardeen says (p. 176), “It is difficult to determine
the source of the impulse which gives rise to this purposeful
activity. It is possible that the auricular appendages here
act as delicate organs capable of stimulation by slight
currents in the water set up by the minute organisms that
prey at once upon the flesh of the dead snail.” Experiments
to be reported in the course of the present paper show, I
think, that the mechanical and chemical stimuli given by food
are the ones which affect planarians.
c. MATERIAL.
The following species have been principally used in this
study :—Planaria maculata, Leidy; Planaria gono-
cephala, Dugés; Planaria dorotocephala, Woodworth.
Of these P. dorotocephala and P. maculata have been
1 Excellent figures and descriptions of these three species have been pub-
lished by Woodworth, ’97.
524, RAYMOND PEARL.
most used, both on account of their abundance and, further-
more, because P. dorotocephala is a form particularly
favourable for the study of reactions. It is very active, and
after being disturbed continues in movement longer than.
either P. maculata or P. gonocephala, as has already
been noted by Woodworth (loc. cit., p. 7). I have found
also that it moves faster than either of the other two species.
There is a general precision and positiveness of response in
its behaviour which make it especially favourable for experi-
mental work. re
excitation.
and 13) |
Negative responses (0)
592 RAYMOND PEARL.
The specimen was again stirred up in the same way and
another series taken, with the following results:
Expt. V. Indifferent responses (trials
1 to 9 inclusive)
Positive responses (trials 10
and 11)
Negative responses (0)
Specimen in state of
excitation.
The positive responses in all these experiments were very
definite and characteristic. I have obtained the same results
in many other series of experiments, which need not be
recorded in detail. ‘The experiments show very clearly that
in order for the animal to give positive responses to weak
stimuli it is necessary that it be in an unexcited condition.
These results have also an important bearing on the question
of the mechanism of the positive response, in that they show
conclusively that the reaction does not depend on the stimu-
lation of special sense organs located in the head regions
alone.
Weak mechanical stimulation of the dorsal surface in the
middle region of the body is usually without any effect other
than the causing of a slight local contraction at the point
stimulated. If any specific effect on the whole animal is
produced, it is merely a change from the gliding to the
crawling movement, such as results from strong stimulation
in the same region.
3. Reactions to Stimuli applied to the Posterior
Region of the Body.—By “ posterior region of the body ”
I mean that part of the body from the pharyngeal region to
the posterior end. This region is not sharply marked off
physiologically from the middle region, and it is impossible
to say in any given individual at just what level the demar-
cation will be found. ‘The physiological distinction between
the two regions is founded on the fact that it is possible by
unilateral stimulation of the middle region of the body to
produce a change in the direction of the movement of
the animal as a whole, while in case of the posterior region,
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 593
as will be shown, this cannot be done. On this account it
will not be necessary in the description of the reactions to
sharply distinguish between the effects of stimulation of the
margins and of the dorsal surface, as has been done in the
previous cases.
Strong mechanical stimulation of the posterior region of
the flat-worm produces as a specific reaction an immediate
change from the gliding to the crawling movement. The
direction of the crawling is the same as that of the gliding;
that is to say, the worm keeps on in a straight line, taking
itself directly and in the quickest possible way away from
the stimulus. The duration of the crawling movement
following stimulation of the posterior region varies with the
relative intensity of the stimulus and the physiological con-
dition of the specimen. ‘The most usual number of the
strong, crawling contraction waves following strong stimula-
tion is three or four. We may get a smaller number than
this, and very frequently do, but in the species studied I
have very rarely seen more than four of the general con-
tractions following a single stimulus. ‘his is evidentiy all
that would be necessary under normal circumstances, since
four of these strong contractions will carry the animal a
considerable distance ahead, and probably out of reach of
the stimulating agent. The weaker the stimulus is, the fewer
are the contractions and the shorter the distance crawled.
In some individuals it is at times almost impossible to induce
the crawling movement except by repeated stimulation.
Such specimens will merely draw up the posterior end in a
single crawling contraction after stimulation, and then im-
mediately relapse into the ghde. If a strong stimulus is
repeatedly given at the posterior end the crawling is con-
tinued, becoming more and more rapid. This is the only
effect of continued stimulation in this region, there being no
summation effect corresponding to that produced by stimu-
lating the anterior end. No different effect is produced by
stimulating the margins of the posterior region of the body
from what takes place when the point stimulated lies near
594. RAYMOND PEARL.
the middle line. There is no turning towards or away of
any part of the body. The lack of any special effect of
unilateral stimulation is not surprising, for the reason that
rapid movement in a forward direction will get the animal
away from harmful stimuli affecting this region, in the long
run, more quickly than any other. Further, there would be
no adyantage in the production of a positive reaction by
stimuli at the posterior end. If we think of these reactions
as having been developed by natural selection there would
be no possibility of such a reaction having arisen, for the .
reason that practically any favourable stimulus would be
encountered by the anterior end before it possibly could be
by the posterior. Very weak mechanical stimulation of the
posterior end of the body causes only a local contraction at
the point stimulated.
4. Reactions to Stimulation of the Ventral Sur-
face.—In the descriptions of the reactions to mechanical
stimuli up to this point we have been considering stimuli
applied to the dorsal surface and to the margins of the body.
It may be well to describe briefly what the reactions in
response to localised stimulation of the ventral surface are.
This matter can best be tested when the animal is moving on
the under side of the surface film, with its ventral side
uppermost. It might be supposed before the trial was made
that this habit of the animal would afford ideal conditions for
testing its reactions to ventral stimulation, but, as a matter
of fact, the conditions are anything but ideal. The flexibility
and elasticity of the surface film makes it almost impossible
to touch it with a stimulating point anywhere within a radius
of a centimetre about a planarian without causing the animal
to be jerked bodily to one side or the other, quite sharply
and for some little distance. This is, of course, a mere
mechanical effect, which takes place with lifeless bodies also.
furthermore, as has been mentioned in an earlier section, it
appears to be very difficult for planarians to quickly change
the direction of their movement when on the surface film (as
is necessary in reacting to stimuli). On account of these
MOVEMEN''S, E'C., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. D095
conditions it is very difficult to get any certain and trust-
worthy results from the stimulation of the ventral surface.
My results have been as follows :—strong stimulation of the
anterior end on one side of the middle line causes the
negative reaction just as when the stimulus is applied at a
corresponding point on the dorsal surface. For mechanical
reasons the response is not as extensive as when the animal
is on a solid, but there seems no doubt of its character. The
positive reaction to weak stimuli I have not been able to
produce in any certainly recognisable form in response to
stimulation of the ventral surface, but I think this negative
result is due probably to the external conditions, and not to a
real failure of the organism to react. Strong stimulation of
the posterior end of the body catsses the gliding to change
to the crawling just as under other conditions. Very
strong mechanical stimulation of the ventral surface of the
body causes the animal to let go its hold and pass down
to the bottom.
5. Reactions of Resting Specimens to Mechanical
Stimuli. resting specimen gives no response whatever
to weak stimuli which are still strong enough to produce a
definite reaction when the worm is in the active condition.
The stimulus is simply below the threshold of the resting
animal’s sensitiveness. T’o stronger stimuli the reactions
correspond in form with those given by the active animal,
but are less pronounced. Tor example, rather strong stimu-
lation at the anterior end induces a weak negative reaction ;
similar stimulation of the posterior end sets the animal off
into the crawling motion. Strong stimulation of any part of
the body besides producing the characteristic reaction for
that region (that is the negative reaction) will also in most
cases start the animal into movement. ‘l'his will always be
the case if the stimulus is of sufficient strength, or is several
times repeated. As would be expected from the low sensi-
tiveness of the resting flat-worm, it 1s impossible to call
forth from it any positive reaction.
6. Reactions to Stimuli given by Operative Pro-
596 RAYMOND PEARL.
cedure.—Hvidently when a planarian is cut the cutting
induces a strong stimulation, which is of the same kind as
that induced by ordinary mechanical stimuli, only much
more intense. The immediate effects of operations may then
be taken up in this section.
If we take first the typical case given by cutting the
animal transversely in two in the region between the pos-
terior border of the head and the origin of the pharynx, and
make the cut by a single stroke of a sharp scalpel, we find
that the effect on the anterior piece is precisely the same as
that of an ordinary strong mechanical stimulation of the
same place. That is, this piece merely changes from the
eliding to the crawling movement, and after giving three or
four crawling contractions settles down again into the
glide. This is the same result essentially as that obtained
by Norman (: 00) and earlier by Loeb (94 and :00). In the
behaviour of the posterior piece in this experiment under
discussion there is a great deal of variation. In about 70
per cent. of all cases in which I have observed the results of
such an operation, the posterior piece crawled backwards
as a result of the cut. In the remainder of the cases the
piece either stayed in the same place and contracted
violently, or else glided ahead. The amount of the back-
ward crawling when this occurs varies greatly, from a
short distance involving only one longitudinal crawling con-
traction to several times the length of the worm, the move-
ment lasting in this latter case for over a minute. In order
that this backward crawling may appear in a well-marked
and distinct form it is necessary that the posterior piece be
above a certain size. Very small posterior pieces after
operation usually remain quiet.
A cut so made as to split the anterior end of the body in
the middle line in most cases causes the worm to crawl back-
wards just as does a transverse cut. In some cases this, as
well as other operations, merely causes the animal to contract
violently and squirm about at the same place. Splitting the
posterior end of the body in the middle line causes the parts
MOVEMENTS, BTC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 597
on either side of the cut to give violent longitudinal con-
tractions, while the worm as a whole starts crawling ahead ;
that is, it changes from the gliding to the crawling
movement.
Oblique cuts produce essentially the same effects as would
transverse cuts in the same part of the body, i. e. forward
crawling of the anterior piece, and usually backward crawling
of the posterior piece. ‘This is true unless the cuts are very
oblique, so as to form very acute angles with the sagittal
plane of the body. In such cases the effects produced more
nearly resemble those obtained in complete longitudinal
splitting of the body. If the body is split completely into
two parts longitudinally, there is usually very little pro-
gressive movement of either piece afterwards. ‘lhe pieces
contract strongly on the cut sides very soon after the opera-
tion is performed, so that they take on the form of a bow,
which in many instances becomes a nearly complete circle.
This being the case, any progressive movement, either by
gliding or crawling, is nearly or quite impossible. Cuts
involving only a small portion of one side of the body
produce, if in the anterior region, the characteristic negative
reaction given to other strong mechanical stimuli, while if in
the posterior region they cause the crawling ahead.
Cuts made on the resting animal produce essentially the
same effects as on the gliding specimen. Unilateral cuts
have the same effect in producing the negative reaction.
7. The Kffect of Mechanical Hindrance to Move-
ment.—A series of experiments was performed on Dendro-
ccelum, sp., with reference to the behaviour of the animal
when progressive movement was made impossible, and yet
the animal was stimulated strongly at the same time. ‘These
conditions can be realised by thrusting a needle through the
centre of the body from above, and then holding it fixed in
position. ‘The results of this procedure varied somewhat,
according to the portion of the body through which the
needle was thrust. In case the hindrance is in the posterior
region of the body, e. g. at a point just behind the posterior
598 RAYMOND PEARL.
end of the pharynx, the effect immediately following the
thrusting in of the needle is a strong longitudinal contraction
of the whole body. After this first strong contraction the
animal remains perfectly quiet in the contracted form for a
varying length of time (in some cases as long as five minutes,
but usually less). After this period of quiet a series of
rhythmical waves of contraction pass longitudinally over the
still contracted body. The purpose of these waves is
evidently to loosen the restraining object by making the
hole in the body through which it passes larger. This is the
same behaviour that I have observed in the deposition of the
large egg. This process of rhythmical longitudinal contrac-
tion is continued for a time; then the animal stretches to its
extreme length, attaches the anterior end to the substrate,
and attempts to crawl away. ‘The movement of the anterior
end is precisely the same as in crawling. The animal turns
and twists and struggles violently in this attempt to crawl
away, and the cilia beat strongly. If the needle occupies a
position near the edge of the body this first struggle will
usually be sufficient to tear the body loose from the needle, so
that the animal may then move ahead freely. Such specimens
will, of course, have a large jagged wound in one side of the
body, which, however, closes in and heals in a short time. In
case the first struggle of the extended animal to crawl ahead
is not effective, that is if the needle is too far in towards the
centre of the body to make the tearing out possible, the
animal, after continuing the struggle for a time, contracts
strongly longitudinally and goes through the whole series of
stages of quiet, rhythmical, longitudinal contraction and
attempted crawling again. ‘he only difference between the
first and succeeding series of trials is that the stages in which
the animal is strongly contracted longitudinally tend to
become shorter with each repetition.
In case the needle is thrust through the body in front of
the pharynx, the strong longitudinal contraction appears as
before, and is followed after some time by an extension of the
part in front of the needle, while the rest of the body re-
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 599
mains quiet and contracted. This short anterior region,
including hardly more than the head, goes through the
crawling movements, but on account of its small size is very
ineffective so far as pulling the body away from the needle
is concerned. In my experiments I have never seen any
worm succeed in getting free from a needle put through the
body in this position.
This general behaviour of the animal in response to restraint
of movement is very interesting, especially in the cases where
the restraint is at the posterior end, as showing the relation
between the behaviour and the capability of regenerating.
The organism tears itself loose from a restraining body with
entire nonchalance, as it were, and its confidence is well
founded because no permanent harm comes from the action.
The lost and wounded parts are regenerated and healed in a
short time. The behaviour takes advantage of the ability to
regenerate. Whether the form of behaviour (pulling away
from restraining objects) or the power of regeneration and
reparation appear in the organism first we cannot say, for
either might very well follow, in a more or less remote causal
connection, the other. What we do know is that at present
there is a very nice condition of mutual adaptation between
the two things.
The effect of the hindrance of a rather light weight at the
posterior end of a worm is to induce the crawling movement.
This can be seen in case the animal is feeding on a small
piece of food material, and, as frequently happens, starts into
movement before the pharynx is withdrawn. The piece of
food attached to the end of the pharynx is dragged along
behind, and the movement is the crawling. Frequently, also,
in feeding experiments pieces of food will get stuck to the
posterior end of the worm by means of the mucous secretion
of the body, and these have the same effect in inducing the
crawling movement.
Having now obtained a descriptive basis we may pass to a
discussion of some general features of these reactions. We
may first take up—
600 | RAYMOND PEARL.
c. The General Features of the Reactions to
Mechanical StimuliiFrom the above description it
appears that the nature of the reactions to mechanical stimuli
depends upon several factors. These are—
1. The intensity of the stimulus.
2. The localisation of the stimulus.
3. The physiological condition of the organism.
The reactions given may be of several different kinds, de-
pending on the factors mentioned above. These are chiefly
as follows:
1. The resting individual may begin locomotion.
2. The gliding movement may be changed to the crawling
movement.
3. The forward movement may be transformed to move-
ment backward.
4. The animal may turn away from the source of the
stimulus (the ‘‘ negative ”’ reaction).
5. The animal may turn towards the source of the
stimulus (the “ positive ” reaction).
It is evident that the reactions last named—the negative
and positive reactions—are the most important and most
interesting from the theoretical standpoint. It is of the
greatest interest to note that these two qualitatively opposite
reactions are induced merely by differing intensities of
stimuli, the stimuli being otherwise identical throughout.
It is to be noted further that the positive and negative
reactions have the characteristics of purely reflex acts. Hach
reaction has a perfectly definite and characteristic form.
While, in some cases, which of the two reactions will be
given in response to a particular stimulus depends on the
physiological condition of the organism, yet it is practically
always either one or the other of the typical reactions, Only
very rarely do we get any deviation from the type forms,
and in such cases the reaction 1s evidently a combination of
easily recognisable components of the two typical complexes
of reflexes.
‘hese two reactions are evidently not single simple
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 601
reflexes, but are complexes of several simple reflex acts. It
may be well to present in tabular form the different com-
ponents in each of these reactions, indicating by the position
in the table the relations of the parts.
Component Phases of the Reactions to Mechanical
Stimuli, with special reference to the Head
Region.
POSITIVE. NEGATIVE.
A. Momentary stopping of pre- A. Same as in positive.
vious movement. Lleferred
to as “‘ pause ” or “ hesita-
tion’ in description.
B. Longitudinal extension of the B. Longitudinal contraction of ante-
anterior end to greater or rior end of greater or less
less extent. Amount de- intensity. ‘Tends to make A
pends on previous extension. appear more pronounced and
Usually distinctly noticeable. longer in duration.
C. Turning towards one side, viz. C. Turning towards one side, viz.
that stimulated. This side that not stimulated. Defined
is defined by the position of as in positive. No sharp
the source of the stimu- “orientation.”
lus, not structurally. Sharp
* orientation.”
C’. Raising of anterior end. This
takes place at the same time
as C.
D. Movement towards stimulus. D. Movement away from stimulus.
Direction determined by Direction determined as in
position taken by anterior positive.
end at termination of C.
Time relations are indicated by vertical position in the table. Components
occurring at the same time are included in braces.
Kach of the components before D may be considered as a
single reflex, and thus there are in one case four and in the
other case three simple reflexes which go to make up the
whole reaction. That these reactions are composites of the
distinct parts is evidenced, first, by direct observation of the
reactions themselves; and second, by the fact that it is
602 RAYMOND PEARL.
possible by varying the strength of the stimulus to produce
only certain parts of the whole reaction without the
remainder, and, furthermore, that a part of one reaction may
in rare instance be combined with a part of the other
(v. sup., p. 587).
d. Mechanism of the Reactions.—A question which
is of the greatest importance in all work on the reactions of
organisms is, what is the mechanism of the reaction? In
the case of the flat-worm this becomes, what is the neuro-
muscular mechanism of the reactions? Very little direct
evidence bearing on this question can be obtained from the
reactions themselves. Taking the positive and negative
reactions as they occur, there are several different sets of
muscles and of nerve connections by means of which they
might conceivably be brought about. The best evidence on
the question is the indirect evidence from operation experi-
ments, in which parts of the mechanism are injured or
removed.
1. Relation of the Brain to the Reactions.—The
first specific problem which may be taken up may be stated
thus: is the brain necessary for the performance of the
normal reactions to mechanical stimuli? Or, in other words,
will a planarian from which the brain has been removed
react normally to stimuli? This question can be answered
from the study of specimens which have been cut in two
transversely, and consequently we may proceed at once to a
description of the reactions of the pieces resulting from such
an operation. A typical specimen is cut in two transversely
at the level of a point about halfway between the head and
the origin of the pharynx, as shown in Fig. 16. As has been
mentioned above, the cut itself acts as a strong mechanical
stimulus, and the immediate effect of the operation is to set
both pieces crawling, the anterior one ahead and _ the
posterior one usually backward.
If now the pieces are allowed some hours to recover from
the immediate effect of the operation, and then stimulation is
tried, the following results are obtained :—With the anterior
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 603
piece A, containing the brain, the results are entirely similar
to those obtained in case of the normal animal. Strong
unilateral stimulation of the head causes the negative
reaction, weak stimulation of the same sort the positive
reaction. Stimulation at the posterior end causes the crawl-
ing movement to appear, and altogether the appearances are
essentially the same as in the normal complete specimen.
The posterior piece B (lacking the brain) behaves in a
somewhat different manner. If the anterior end of this piece
is given a stimulus of moderate intensity anywhere on the
cut surface the piece will usually start crawling straight
backwards. This is almost always true for a short time
after the operation, and is especially well shown in such
specimens as started crawling backwards as a result of the
eut. When from twenty-four to forty-eight hours have
elapsed after the operation this tendency of posterior pieces
Fie, 16.—Operation diagram. Heavy line indicates cut.
to crawl backward on stimulation of the anterior end begins
to grow less marked, and, as regeneration proceeds, finally
disappears. In many such posterior pieces I have been able
to produce this backward crawling in a very pronounced
form, and of comparatively long duration (three or four
minutes at a time). The character of the movement has
been described above. If the stimulus is applied to one side
or the other of the anterior end of such a posterior piece,
instead of squarely against the cut surface, a well-marked
negative reaction is produced; that is, the anterior end
turns away from the stimulus just as a whole animal would.
The reaction is very definite, and of precisely the same
character as the normal negative reaction. The only
difference to be observed is that in proportion to the strength
of the stimulus the reaction 1s not so pronounced as in the
604 RAYMOND PEARL.
normal animal, this being due to the generally lowered tonus
in such a piece. I have not been able to obtain any positive
reaction (i.e. turning towards the stimulus) in such a
posterior piece after operation. Stimuli which are at all
effective produce the negative response. ‘This experiment
has been tried many times, but always with the same result ;
the positive reaction never appears. If the posterior end of
such a posterior cut piece is stimulated the crawling move-
ment is produced just as in case of the normal complete
animal. As has been noted in connection with the move-
ment, there is a general reduction of tonus in the posterior
pieces resulting from transverse cuts. This low tonus in-
volves not only the motor functions, resulting in slower
movement, but also to a less extent the sensory functions.
Such a piece is somewhat less sensitive to mechanical stimuli
than normally. The cut surface is more sensitive to
mechanical stimuli than any other part.
Now it will be seen from the above description of the
reactions of a piece from which the brain has been removed,
that the most striking difference in the behaviour of such a
piece from that of a normal animal is to be found in the
absence of the positive reaction.
There are three conceivable possibilities as to the cause of
the absence of the positive reaction in pieces from which the
head has been removed. First, the positive reaction might
be due to the stimulation of certain sense organs which are
removed by the operation. But this is decisively negatived
by the fact that in an entire worm stimulation of points
posterior to the level of the cut removing the anterior end
will cause the positive reaction.
Second, it might be conceived that the reaction is brought
about by a special localised muscular mechanism, which is
removed or destroyed by the cut. But there is no evidence
of the existence of such a mechanism ; and further, it will be
shown later that the ordinary musculature of the body, which
is of course uninjured in the posterior part, is sufficient to
bring about the reaction,
MOVEMENTS, ETO., OF FRHSH-WATER PLANARIANS. 605
Finally, the positive reaction might in some way be a
specific function of the brain, which is removed by the
operation. As the evidence seems to be decisive against the
first two possibilities this seems probably true. Is this
because the brain contains a special “ centre” whose function
it is to produce the reaction ?
There is no reason to think of the reaction as a function of
the brain in the sense that that organ forms a centre which
originates the impulses which cause the reaction. On the
contrary, it seems much more probable that the loss of the
brain causes the loss of reaction for the following reason.
It has been shown that removal of the brain causes a general
lowering of the tonus of the organism, and further that the
appearance of the reaction in a normal animal is closely
dependent on the tonic condition of the organism. Probably,
then, the chief reason for the non-appearauce of the positive
reaction in posterior pieces is that in these the conditions of
general tonus are so changed by the loss of the brain that the
reaction is no longer possible. Expressing it in another way,
the animal is too sluggish to give the positive response.
This being the case, it would be expected that it might be
possible to induce the positive reaction in a decapitated
specimen provided the tonus were raised in some way. As a
matter of fact, as will be shown later, positive reactions to
certain chemical stimuli have been observed in a few cases
(cf. p. 649). In its form and mechanism the positive reaction
is not directly dependent upon the brain.
Summing up the evidence on the relation of the brain to
the reactions of the flat-worm, it may be said that all the
reactions to mechanical stimuli shown by the normal animal,
with the single exception of the positive reaction, are given
by specimens from which the brain has been removed.
The relation of the brain to the positive reaction is, in large
part, so far as evidence can be obtained, an indirect one, viz.
it is necessary for the maintenance of the proper tonic
conditions of the organism. ‘Thus far there is no evidence of
any special “ centre” functions of the brain, similar to those
voL. 46, PART 4,—NEW SERIES. RR
606 RAYMOND PEARL.
supposed to exist in the cortical centres, for example, of a
mammal.
2. The Neuro-muscular Mechanism.—lIn the negative
reaction to mechanical stimuli the anterior end of the body
is turned sharply away from the source of the stimulation,
while in the positive reaction it is equally sharply turned
towards the source. ‘These relations immediately suggest the
following questions :—Is the negative reaction the result of a
crossed impulse, which, originating at the point stimulated,
crosses over to the other side of the body and causes the
contraction of the longitudinal muscles on that side, thus
producing the turning away from the stimulus? What is the
course of the nerve impulse which produces the positive
reaction? What sets of muscles are concerned in the pro-
duction of each reaction ?
The discussion of the negative reaction may be taken up
first. If the nervous impulse producing this reaction
crosses the body to produce a contraction on the side
opposite from the stimulus, the experiment cited in the
section above shows that this crossing cannot occur entirely
in the brain, but must also occur in some part of the body
posterior to the brain; or at any rate, be capable of so doing
in a quite normal fashion immediately after removal of the
brain. In this experiment where the body has been cut
in two behind the brain, the posterior piece performs the
negative reaction in a quite normal way immediately after
the operation. ‘his experiment may be carried farther,
and the animal cut in two transversely in places nearer
and nearer to the posterior end of the body. In all of these
cases, until the piece becomes too small to show definite
movements of any sort, the negative reaction may be obtained
by strong unilateral stimulation. ‘This shows conclusively,
then, that if the negative reaction is to be considered a
crossed reflex, there must be all along the body a series of
cross-commissures which are at all times ready to bring about
in co-ordinated perfection a result with which they have never
previously had anything to do. ‘This conclusion seems in-
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 607
evitable because, as has been shown above, unilateral
stimulation of the posterior region of the body in a normal
individual does not cause the negative reaction, but instead
merely causes the animal to move ahead faster by crawling.
If these paths for the crossing of impulses which are so
immediately effective after the operation are present in the
uninjured specimen, one would expect the reaction to be of
quite a different character from what actually occurs. A
stimulus applied near the posterior end would naturally cross
over at once and produce a bending on the opposite side at
the same level. Or the stimulus might diffuse, so that the
entire opposite side would be affected and the worm would
become uniformly curved on that side. But as a matter of
fact we find that the turning affects only the anterior portion
of the body. If it is urged that after operation the crossing
of impulses takes place through the general protoplasm the
difficulties encountered are no less, for it must be shown how
passage of an impulse through the protoplasm to cause a
perfectly well co-ordinated reaction can appear so quickly and
produce such perfect results at once. If tested immediately
after the operation, before the general lowering of tonus is
felt, the reaction time for the negative response of a posterior
piece of the body will not differ appreciably from that of a
normal worm. Now, according to the views of the advocates
of the theory that after operations involving loss of nervous
tissue, impulses may be conducted through the general
protoplasm, it is held that such conduction is always at first
appreciably slower than in nervous tissue. It would also
seem on purely a priori grounds that this must be true.
Thus it is seen that there are serious objections to the view
that the negative reaction is the result of a contraction on the
side of the body opposite to that stimulated—that is, that it is
a crossed reflex. ‘The question now arises, if the reaction is
not produced in this way, in what other way can it be
produced? Kvidently it is quite possible that the anterior
part of the body can be turned away from the stimulus by a
lengthening of the side stimulated, quite as well as by a
608 RAYMOND PEARL.
shortening or contraction of the opposite side. We may now
consider the evidence as to whether or not the turning away
is actually due to a lengthening of the side stimulated.
Very little evidence can be obtained regarding this from
observation of the normal moving animal, because the
general appearance in the turning would be the same
whether it were due to a shortening of one side or a
lengthening of the other. The results from certain sorts of
operation, however, give definite evidence on the question.
A specimen spht longitudinally in the posterior end, as _
shown in Fig. 17, a, and the cut was extended forward to the
posterior border of the head region. Several days were
A
B a
4 x
Fic. 17.—a. Operation diagram. 0b. Showing side A supported on
B. For further explanation see text. (The pharynx is omitted
for the sake of clearness.)
allowed for recovery from the shock of the operation, care
being taken to prevent the two parts from growing together
again. By this time the cut edges had healed well, and the
specimen was in good condition for experimentation. The
results of mechanical stimulation were as follows: strong
stimulation of the head or anterior part of the body on either
side caused the negative reaction; the anterior end turned
away from the stimulus. But it was possible to tell in this
case which of the two pieces or halves of the body were
effective in producing the turning. It could be seen clearly
that the half stimulated, immediately on stimulation, flattened
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 609
out slightly ventrally, thus bringing the ventral cilia in close
contact with the bottom, as is necessary for their effective
working. At the same time it lengthened along its outer
side, thus forcing the anterior end around towards the side
opposite from the stimulus. That the “side opposite ” had
nothing to do with the turning could be observed in many
cases directly, for this side (B) would remain in an almost
entirely relaxed condition after the stimulus was given, and
not get any effective hold on the bottom so that it could
affect the movement. It was further possible by a little
manipulation to get the piece B laid over on A so as to be
practically entirely supported by it, as shown in Fig. 17,6. If
with such conditions the worm was stimulated rather strongly
on the A side of the head, it gave a strong negative reaction,
the point about which the turn was made being as far back
as @. Hvidently with part B up on the dorsal surface of A,
and consequently having no hold on the bottom, it could
have no effect in the reaction. ‘The reaction must have been
due to the side A alone. The same thing could be shown by
very gently lifting on a needle the side B so that it was not
in contact with the bottom, and then stimulating A, when
again the negative reaction occurred. This experiment I
have repeated with variations many times, but always with
the same result, showing that the side stimulated is the
effective one in producing the turning.
It may be mentioned here that the effect of strongly
stimulating the posterior end of either of the two pieces of a
specimen slit in this way was to cause a local contraction of
the piece stimulated, and a crawling movement of the short
portion of the body in front of the sht. This crawling was
not very effective, since so small a portion took part in it,
but it is of interest to note that what crawling appeared
involved only the uncut part of the body.
It being established that the side stimulated produces the
turning, the question may be raised, how, supposing in these
longitudinally split individuals that this side does produce
the reaction, is it known that it does this by lengthening
610 RAYMOND PEARL.
along its outer margin rather than by actively contracting on
its inner cut margin? This question may be answered by
operative experiments of a different character. If the side
stimulated, acting independently, produces the reaction by
lengthening on its own outer side, then an isolated longitu-
dinal half of the body ought to be able to give only one
reaction wherever stimulated, or, in other words, it ought
always to turn towards the same side. Furthermore, such a
piece onght always to turn towards the cut edge, since only
on the side opposite to this has it a margin possessing
the necessary circular muscles for extension (vide sup.,
pp. 556, 557). On the other hand, if the contrary view is
correct, that the turning away is due to contraction of the
longitudinal muscles on the side opposite that stimulated,
Fie. 18.—Showing the appearance of a longitudinal half of a
planarian when at rest.
then such an isolated longitudinal half of the body ought to
be able to turn either way, according to the localisation of
the stimulus, since there are longitudinal muscle-fibres along
the cut edge as well as along the other. We may determine
from experiments which of these two views 1s correct.
Unfortunately, it is impossible to get any clear evidence
on this point from entirely separated longitudinal halves of
the worm. When a planarian is split in two lengthwise
each of the pieces immediately becomes strongly contracted
longitudinally on the cut side, the apparent purpose of this
reaction being to reduce the exposed surface at once to a
minimum. After this strong contraction has taken place,
giving the piece the form shown in Fig. 18, no further
progressive movement can take place, and the general tonus
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS, 611
becomes immediately very much lowered. In view of these
facts it is impossible to get any very trustworthy results
from the stimulation of such a piece.
There is another operation, however, which, while it does
not isolate completely two longitudinal halves of the body,
yet does separate into longitudinal halves the essential
reacting parts, namely, the head regions. This is the
splitting of the worm in the middle line for a short distance
back from the anterior end, as shown in Fig. 12. After this
operation the two anterior pieces move about violently and
independently for a time, taking all the various positions
shown in Fig. 19. The animal soon recovers from the imme-
e, e
Fic. 19.—Diagram showing the different positions taken by the two
components resulting from longitudinal splitting of the head. —
diate effects of the operation, glides about in a normal way,
only at a rather slow rate, and responds welltostimuli. The
anterior piece keeps comparatively straight, there bemg much
less tendency to contraction on the cut side than when the
split extends the whole length of the body. The reactions of
such a specimen to mechanical stimuli are as follows. ‘To
stimuli apphed at the posterior end along the sides of the
body the reactions are precisely the same as those already
described for the normal individual. Stimulation in the
regions aa (Fig. 20) of moderate or strong intensity produces
the negative reaction. The organism turns away from the
612 RAYMOND PEARL.
side stimulated quite as promptly and in the same way as
does a normal specimen. If now the cut edges A and B (Fig.
21') are stimulated in the same way (a needle may best be
used for this) the specimen will always turn towards the
stimulus. This can best be brought out by describing a
typical case in which a series of fifty stimulations in the
regions A and B were made ona favourable individual cut in
this way. In thirty-nine of the reactions the animal turned
towards the stimulated side. That is, if the stimulus was
applied at A the animal turned in the direction of the arrow
a; while if B was the stimulated edge the reaction was in the
direction of the arrow 6b. In eight of the remaining eleven
trials the reaction was indifferent. The animal stopped at
Fic. 20.—Operation diagram. See text.
stimulation and then started moving straight ahead again,
the stimulus evidently having been ineffective so far as
special reaction is concerned. In only three cases out of
fifty did the specimen turn away from the stimulus. Since
it required the greatest care in manipulation to give the
stimulus to one cut edge without touching the other side,
especially in view of the fact that the animal was moving all
the time, it seems very probable that in these three cases a
stimulus was accidentally given to the side which it was not
intended to stimulate. The same general result of turning
' After this operation the two parts of the head usually take the position
shown in this figure after the first spasmodic movements following the opera-
tion have ceased.
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 6153
towards the stimulus when applied to the cut edge was
obtained in several other series with this same specimen, and
many times with other specimens similarly mutilated. It
will be seen that this is the result which would be expected
if the turning away is due to lengthening of the side stimu-
lated. Stimulation of either side of the cut portions, inner
or outer, causes turning in the same direction, and that
Fie. 21.—Diagram to show the reactions to mechanical stimuli and
their mechanisms in the case of a specimen in which the head
has been split longitudinally. For further explanation see text.
direction is the one in which turning would be caused pro-
vided each piece did actively lengthen on its outer side.
There seems to be no reason whatever, if the turning away
were due to contraction of the side opposite that stimulated,
why the specimen should not turn away from stimuli applied
to the cut inner edges. This it does not do. There seems
to be no escape, then, from the conclusion that the turning
614 RAYMOND PEARL.
away from the stimulus (negative reaction) is due to a
lengthening of the side stimulated.
It may possibly be objected to the last experiment that
the impulse from a stimulation at, for example, B (Fig. 21)
took the path indicated by the dotted line in that figure, and
caused a contraction on the left side of the body, so that
really the observed turning was the result of a contraction on
the side opposite that stimulated. ‘To this objection it may
be answered that by stimulating different points along the
edge B it is possible to cause the point about which the
turn occurs asa pivot to be located anywhere along the linea y.
It is very evident that contraction of muscles in the region N
can have nothing whatever to do with turning of the right
piece about the point a. So this objection is without force.
As the process of regeneration of a cut longitudinal half of
the body goes on, the piece will straighten out from the
curved form it takes after the cut is made, and it is conse-
quently possible to obtain specimens in which the regenera-
tion of the missing half of the body has produced only a very
small amount of new tissue, and which are at the same time
nearly straight in outline and able to make progressive move-
ments. The reactions of such partially regenerated speci-
mens are of importance as throwing light on the normal
mechanism of the reactions. The reactions of a typical
specimen of this sort may be described in detail. On October
10th, 1901, a small piece of the anterior end of a specimen of
P. maculata was isolated. The piece was cut as nearly as
possible in the form shown in Fig. 22, a. On October 16th
the piece had the form shown in Fig. 22, b. A narrow strip
of new tissue had formed down the right side, and the forma-
tion of the outline of the head and of the right eye was just
beginning. At this time the reactions of the specimen were
as follows. Stimuli applied at y caused the head to turn
sharply away from the stimulus (typical negative reaction).
This reaction was quite like that given by a normal individual
stimulated in the same way. Stimulation at a, however,
produced no trace whatever of a negative reaction. On
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 615
stimulation at this point the specimen contracted longitudi-
nally, and then started moving ahead again in exactly the
same direction in which it was going before stimulation. It
was impossible to induce any turning away following stimula-
tion of the side a, although this was tried many times.
Now it is evident that this specimen comes very near
to being an isolated longitudinal half-planarian. All the
structures of the original one half are present, and there
is only a very little of the other side of the body produced in
the line of new tissue, down the originally cut edge. In this
new tissue there is probably very little differentiation, and the
muscle layers are not well formed. It was brought out above
(p. 610) that an isolated half of the body ought to be able to
Fie. 22.—a. Operation diagram. b. Piece which regenerated from A
in Diagram a. The new tissue is indicated by stippling.
give only one reaction, or, in other words, ought to be able to
turn the body in only one direction in response to stimulation,
provided this turning is due to an extension of the stimulated
side. We find precisely this result in the regenerating speci-
men just discussed. It turns away from stimuli applied at y
because on that side are present all the muscles necessary for
extension just as in a normal animal. It does not turn away
from stimulation of the side x because it has not the necessary
muscles for extension on that side. On the view that the
turning away is due to contraction on the side opposite that
stimulated, there is no reason why stimulation at « should not
cause the animal to turn away from the stimulus, because the
opposite side (y) has all its muscular mechanisms intact.
616 RAYMOND PEARL.
The reason why the specimen in this last experiment does
not turn towards the stimulus when stimulated on the side a,
is apparently because the regeneration has proceeded only far
enough to produce just enough new tissue to form the
beginning of a new side to the body. ‘This new side receives
the stimulus and is sufficiently potent to determine the re-
action of the whole (the straight longitudinal contraction),
but is lacking in the mechanism necessary to produce its own
proper reaction, the negative reaction. On the other hand,
in the case of the individual with the split anterior end, each
piece turns towards the stimulus after stimulation of the cut
edge because here only one half the organism is present
either to be stimulated or to react; there is not even the
beginning of the formation of a new side along the cut edge.
Putting all the evidence together, I think it must be re-
garded as demonstrated that the turning away from the
stimulus in the negative reaction to mechanical stimuli is due
to an extension of the side of the body stimulated. This
extension is brought about by the contraction of the circular
and dorso-ventral muscle-fibres—probably also assisted by
the transverse and oblique systems of fibres—in the region
stimulated. This reaction is a simple reflex act involving
only the side stimulated. The normal organism, so far as this
response is concerned, is to be considered as composed of two
identical, but in a certain sense independent longitudinal
halves. Thus, representing these halves diagrammatically,
asin Fig. 28, a, the evidence presented indicates that stimula-
tion of one side of the worm, as A, causes a reaction in that
side, and, so far as essential features of the directive reactions
oo, only in that side. ‘The movements of half A after its
stimulation determine and, in fact, cause the reaction of the
wholeanimal. Furthermore, these longitudinal halves retain
their individuality as halves if they are isolated from each
other. A separated half-worm (longitudinal) reacts as a
half-worm, just as it did when in connection with the other
half in the body, and not, as might perhaps be expected on
a priori grounds, as a whole worm. It reacts as a whole
MOVEMENTS, ETO., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 617
worm only after a new half has been regenerated along its
cut edge. The various stages in the change from the
reactions as a half-worm to those as a whole worm can be
followed step by step as regeneration proceeds. The new tissue
formed along the cut edge very quickly takes on some of the
functions of a side. When only a narrow strip has been
formed it serves for the reception of the stimulus, and hence
stops the reaction of the opposite side, as in the experiment
last discussed. To make the meaning more clear, reference
may be made to diagrams b and c of Fig. 23. In b is repre-
sented, in a straightened position, the half B of anormal worm
A ¢.
Fie, 23,—Diagrams to show the relations of the halves of the body
of Planaria to the reception of stimuli, and the reactions
thereto. See account in text. (The pharynx is omitted for
the sake of clearness.)
immediately after being separated from the other half, while
c represents the same half after regeneration has begun and
a strip of new tissue has been formed down the cut edge.
Now stimulation of the cut edge of b causes the anterior end
of the piece to turn towards the stimulus, 1. e. to give its
own proper negative reaction (cf. experiment given above on
slitting anterior end). ‘This is because in this case it is
side B that is stimulated, although along its inner edge.
Stimulation along the right-hand edge of ¢ does not cause
the turning towards the stimulus, because in order that this
618 RAYMOND PEARL.
may take place it would be necessary for the side B to give
its proper negative reaction. It cannot do this because it is
not directly stimulated, but the new very small side A is
stimulated. ‘This side may not have the necessary muscles to
give a negative reaction itselfi—as in the experiment
described above,—yet may receive the stimulus and so
indirectly prevent B from reacting. Another way of ex-
pressing this same fact is by saying that in regenerating
longitudinal halves of planarians the physiological middle
line remains at the line of the former cut edge for some time
after regeneration has begun.! In connection with this
discussion of the reactions of half-aninals it is greatly to be
regretted that Willey (97) did not get any data on the
reactions of the remarkable form Heteroplana. In this
form we have a natural “ half-planarian,” or very nearly that.
One side is so greatly atrophied as to be practically absent.
It seems to me very probable that this organism would react
to stimuli in much the same way that a longitudinally split
specimen of Planaria, which had begun to regenerate,
does.
I do not wish it to be understood from the analysis of the
negative reaction which has been given that I intend to
maintain that in this reaction the side opposite that stimu-
lated never contracts longitudinally. It probably often does
this, especially in cases of very strong stimulation which cause
a general excitation and reaction of the whole body. I have
merely wished to show that the fundamental basis of the
negative reaction is the extension of the side stimulated. It
seems to me quite possible that it may be shown by close
analysis in other cases that supposedly crossed reflexes are
not fundamentally such at all.
We may now pass to a brief consideration of the mechanism
of the positive reaction of the planarian to mechanical
! | have records in my notes of experiments which show that in the case of
oblique cuts the physiological middle line remains at the cut edge until after
the new head is well formed in the new tissue on the oblique edge. Lack of
space forbids detailed description of these experiments here,
MOVEMENTS, BTC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 619
stimuli. As has been shown above, removal of the anterior
end of the body containing the brain causes the disappearance
of this positive reaction, and this result is probably due rather
to the lowering of tonus than to the removal of any special
centre having the causation of this reaction as its function.
Additional evidence on this view that lowering of the tonus
is the chief cause of the disappearance of the reaction is found
in the fact that other injuries to the head, such as longitudinal
splitting, which produce a lowering of the general tonus, also
cause the disappearance of the positive reaction.
This very close dependence of the reaction on the general
tonic conditions of the organism makes its analysis difficult,
but it seems most probable that its mechanism is as follows :—
a light stimulus, when the organism is in a certain definite
tonic condition, sets off a reaction involving (1) an equal
bilateral contraction of the circular musculature, producing
the extension of the body; (2) a contraction of the longi-
tudinal musculature of the side stimulated, producing the
turning towards the stimulus (this the definitive part of the
reaction); and (3) contraction of the dorsal longitudinal
musculature, producing the raising of the anterior end. In
this reaction the sides do not act independently, but there is
a delicately balanced and finely co-ordinated reaction of the
organism as a whole, depending for its existence on an
entirely normal physiological condition. It is to be noted,
however, that the definitive part of the reaction, namely, the
turning, is a response of the side of the body stimulated.
This point is one of fundamental importance for the general
theory of the reactions.
The mechanism of the other reactions to mechanical
stimuli are evidently very simple. The crawling movement,
which must be considered as the specific reaction to mechanical
stimulation of the posterior region of the body, is due to
rhythmical contraction of the longitudinal musculature. he
only other reactions to mechanical stimulation are local con-
tractions, whose mechanism is evident.
e. Features in the General Behaviour of the
620 RAYMOND PEARL.
Organism which the Reactions to Mechanical
Stimuli explain.—That much of the behaviour of pla-
narians in their natural surroundings is the result of the re-
actions above described is very evident to any one watching
them. Among specific features of this sort in which these
reactions play a part may be mentioned the escape from
enemies or harmful surroundings, the getting of food (to be
discussed in detail later), the localities chosen for coming to
rest, the behaviour on meeting solid obstacles in the path of
movement, the passing on to the surface film, etc. All —
of these need not be discussed specifically, as their relations
will be evident enough on a moment’s thought, but the last
two deserve special mention.
The behaviour of planarians on meeting solid bodies in
their path in the course of movement is entirely made up of
reactions to mechanical stimuli. The behaviour in detail is
as follows :—If a gliding specimen meets squarely head-on an
obstruction of considerable size, so that it cannot glide over
it without changing to some extent the position of its long
axis, it will stop an instant, raise the head, let it drop down
till it touches the obstruction again, and then glide directly
up on to and over the solid body. ‘This behaviour is invari-
able, so far as my observations go, if the worm meets the
obstruction squarely. It is at once seen to be merely a
special case of the usual reaction to a weak mechanical
stimulus, characterised by the raising of the head. ‘The
behaviour is evidently purposeful in the long run, because it
will take the organism up on to food material just as well as
indifferent bodies, If the gliding worm meets the obstruc-
tion obliquely the behaviour depends in large part on the
physical nature of the cbject. If it is food material, or some-
thing else of a rather soft and yielding texture—as, for
example, another planarian,—the worm will immediately raise
the head, turn it towards the object, and crawl up over it.
‘his behaviour is evidently the typical positive reaction to a
weak mechanical stimulus. A special and rather curious
case of this positive reaction, which I have twice observed,
MOVEMENTS, PTC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 621
appeared when two specimens gliding along, with the anterior
ends slightly raised in the normal manner, met head-on.
Both were simultaneously stimulated to the positive reaction
and raised the anterior ends, and then let them drop again.
As they came down the two ventral surfaces were brought
squarely together in the way shown in Fig. 24; then each
started gliding up the ventral surface of the other. In a
movement as a result of the constantly changing form of the
body, the ventral surfaces slipped off from one another and
the two worms went on their way. When the obstruction is
a hard body, asa piece of glass, the specimen meeting it
obliquely usually turns the head away slightly at the first
contact (negative reaction), and then glides along parallel to
the edge of the body fora distance. If it happens to touch
it again with the side of the head, it frequently gives the
negative reaction and turns away again. After the solid body
Fie. 24.—Side view of two planarians starting to glide up on the
ventral surfaces of each other.
has been touched several times, however, the positive reaction
is usually given, and the worm passes at once up on to the
solid body. This behaviour is shown in Fig. 25. The precise
form of the behaviour on meeting obliquely a solid body in
the path varies considerably with the general physiological
condition of the individual. In case it is much excited, the
first touch will induce a strong negative reaction, and the
individual will turn away and pass out of the neighbourhood.
In the cases where the final positive reaction is preceded by
two or three negative ones, it would seem as if repetition of
what must be an almost identical stimuius causes it to be-
come in effect weaker. Leaving aside all variations in the
exact character of the behaviour on meeting a solid, the
important point to be brought out is that all this behaviour is
based on the simple reactions to mechanical stimuli.. The
vo, 46, PART 4,—NEW SERIES. Ss
622 RAYMOND PEARL.
exact behaviour in any given case depends on_ several
different factors. These are the position of the animal with
reference to the obstruction, the physical nature of the
obstruction, and the physiological condition, whether of
creater or less excitation.
So, again, with reference to the habit of the animal of
moving about on the surface film, a problem is presented.
When a specimen, gliding up the side of a dish, touches its
anterior end to the surface film at the point where the latter
joins the glass, it immediately gives a characteristic positive .
reaction, precisely like that in response to any other weak
mechanical stimulus. The head is raised and turned towards
the side from which the stimulus came, and then dropped
Fic. 25.—1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are successive stages in the reactions of
Planaria on meeting obliquely an obstacle in its path. The heavy
straight line represents the obstacle. |
again. As a consequence of this reaction, the head end
comes to rest on the under side of the surface film at a point
some little distance out from the side of the dish. The
ventral surface of the anterior end of the body flattens out on
the surface film, and the animal glides out on to the film,
following the direction determined by the reaction of the ante-
riorend. Thus itis scen that the going on to the surface film is
only aspecial case of a response to a weak mechanical stimulus,
i. e. the positive reaction, the film itself acting as the stimulant.
The leaving of the surface film and passing down the side of
the dish is evidently also due to the same positive reaction.
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 625
There are a number of other points in the general behaviour
which are directly related to the reactions to mechanical
stimuli, which will be taken up later in connection with the
other reactions.
jf. Summary.—Before passing on to a discussion of the
next subject, it may be well to summarise briefly the chief
findings with reference to the effect of mechanical stimuli on
planarians.
It has been shown that the planarian responds in a well-
nigh perfect manner to the localjsation and intensity of
mechanical stimuli. It turns away from strong stimuli (in
the long run harmful) applied to the side of the body ; turns
towards weak stimuli (in the long run beneficial, almost never
harmful) ; it crawls rapidly away from strong stimuli applied
to the posterior end; backs and turns away from similar
strong stimuli applied at the anterior end.
It has been shown, further, that these reactions have all
the characteristics of reflex actions, complex, it is true, but
still reflexes.
The mechanisms of the reactions to unilateral stimulation
are unilateral, and lie in the side stimulated.
Discussion of the implications of these results on
mechanical stimulation, with reference to the psychology of
the organism and the general theories regarding the reactions
of organisms to stimuli, is deferred tili the results from other
sorts of stimuli are in hand.
Il. Reactions to Food and Chemical Stimuli.
Evidently one of the most important factors in the sum
total of the activities of any aquatic organism is its reactions
to chemical substances. Its ability to receive chemical
stimuli and react to them must be of prime importance in its
struggle for existence, for in its natural habitat such an
aquatic organism must be almost constantly encountering
different chemical substances. Some of these may be harm-
ful and some beneficial, and it would seem that if a species is
624 RAYMOND PEARL.
to survive, its dividuals must have some sort of reaction
whereby they may avoid the harmful and take advantage of
the beneficial. In the case of planarians, the reactions to
chemicals seem to be of about equal importance with the re-
actions to contact stimuli in the general activities. Since the
reactions to food substances are a special case of the reactions
to chemicals in general, they may be discussed first.
a. Food Reactions.—The nature of the things used as
food by fresh-water planarians has been discussed already in
the section on “ Natural History,” and hence need not detain
us here.
A typical case of the food reactions to a bit of crushed
Fre. 26.—Diagram showing the successive stages in the normal food
reaction of Planaria. A represents a small bit of meat.
molluse may first be described, to serve as a basis for the
account.! Ifa piece of the body of Physa which has just
been extracted from the shell and crushed between the points
of a pair of forceps is placed in a small dish containing a
number of active planarians, it will result from chance alone
that some of the flat-worms must in course of time pass near
the food material. For a very short time after the food has
! The food reactions of Planaria have been briefly described by Bardeen
(:O1, a).
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 625
been placed in the dish specimens may pass very near it—
within two or three millimetres—without being affected in
any way. ‘They simply glide straight by as if there were no
food there. After a few minutes have passed, however, it
will be found that a worm coming near the food is affected
in a very characteristic manner. Its behaviour is as
follows:—When within about three or four millimetres of
the piece of meat (lig. 26, a) it stops abruptly, raises the
head, and turns it towards the food (Fig. 26,b). As the head
is raised and turned the gliding is resumed, and the head
being almost immediately lowered, the movement is directly
towards the food. ‘Thus far the reaction is _ evidently
precisely like the positive reaction to weak mechanical
stimuli, and so we may speak of it as the positive reaction to
food, the reaction being the same in the two cases, though
the stimulus differs. When the anterior end of the head
ee ee
=, 27 -—Diagram matic side view of Planaria to show the
‘ sripping” of a bit of food, A.
touches the food it flattens down upon it, and, if the con-
figuration is such as to make it possible, “grips”? it
(Fig. 26,c). The details of this “ gripping ” (shown in side
view in Fig. 27) are as follows:—The anterior end closes
down over the very edge of the piece of food, or over the
whole piece provided it is small enough, and _ then
apparently squeezes it by contraction of the longitudinal
muscles on the ventral surface of the head. ‘The action is
very characteristic, and evidently forms an integral part of
the normal food reaction. Its probable function will be
brought out later. While it is taking place the worm as a
whole stops its progressive movement and remains quiet.
After the “ gripping”’ has continued for some time the worm
starts gliding ahead up on to the food. It passes forward
till the point where the opening for the extrusion of the
pharynx is located is approximately over the place pre-
626 RAYMOND PEARL.
viously “gripped” (Fig. 26,d). Then the pharynx is ex-
truded and feeding begins (Fig. 26,¢e). After a time the
worm voluntarily leaves the food and glides off over the
bottom. ig
Having described the typical case of a food reaction, we
may take up some of the more important variations from the
type, and describe the various phases in the reaction in
greater detail. 3
Starting with the very beginning of the reaction, it may
be said that the distance from the food at which any effect
on the planarian is produced varies greatly, as is to be
expected. This distance, of course, depends on the extent
which the juices or chemicals of the food have diffused from
it. When a piece of meat is first put into the water
specimens will pass very close to it without being stimulated.
In fact, if a specimen finds a piece of food within three or
four minutes after it is put into the dish, it will usually have
done so as a result of accidentally coming in contact with it.
As has been brought out above, when a gliding worm
touches anything of a rather yielding texture, like food, it
immediately gives the positive reaction and passes up over
it. This plays an important part in the getting of food,
because, as I have found in experiments, unless the food is
crushed and pressed with forceps the juices diffuse rather
slowly, and for some time specimens will not give the
positive reaction unless they actually touch the food. On
the other hand, after the food has been in the water for
some time, so that diffusion has taken place, the distance at
which specimens may be affected becomes quite considerable.
I have seen specimens gliding by a small piece of meat at
a distance of 14cm. from it give the positive reaction and
turn towards it. At greater distances than this food is not
effective, according to my observations. ‘he distance from
food at which a given specimen will give the positive
reaction and go towards it depends also on the physiological
condition of the individual. Specimens in a state of general
excitation will, as I have frequently observed, go closely by
MOVEMENTS, BIC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 627
a piece of food without turning towards it, while other
specimens in a more normal condition will give the positive
reaction some distance from it.
After the first specimen has begun feeding on a piece of
material the zone of influence of that piece becomes almost
immediately widened appreciably. As the number of feed-
ing specimens increases the area in the surrounding water
which affects others becomes correspondingly greater. ‘I'his
phenomenon is very striking in many cases, as an illustration
will indicate. Several pieces of crushed snail were put in a
dish with a number of planarians. In a short time a
specimen in gliding about the dish had come near to one
of these pieces, had given the positive reaction and begun
feeding. At almost the same time another of the pieces of
food had “attracted” another specimen. The other bits of
food were quite similar in every way to these two, and lay in
the dish not far from them. Yet at the end of fifteen
minutes the two pieces by which the first two worms had
been affected were completely covered with feeding
specimens, while the remaining pieces of food, with a single
exception,! did not have a specimen on them. ‘This increase
in the effectiveness of the food as a stimulus must be due
to the diffusion of more chemical substance from it.
Apparently the increase is due either to some secretion of
the feeding animals or to some change which they induce in
the food. It is probably due to a combination of these two
factors. That a digestive secretion is poured out through
the pharynx of the feeding worm is well known, and clearly
shown by the appearance of a piece of food on which a
specimen has been feeding. ‘The surface of the meat is
turned white, and rendered very soft and almost flocculent.
It is probable that this digestive secretion acts as a positive
chemotactic stimulus to other worms, and that coupled with
this there is an increased diffusion of juices from the food
itself caused by the changes which it is undergoing.
The reaction which is caused by this chemical stimulus
‘ One piece farthest removed from the others had a single specimen on it.
628 RAYMOND PEARL
from the food is evidently essentially the same thing as the
positive reaction given to weak mechanical stimuli. It con-
sists in a turning of the anterior end of the body towards
the source of the stimulus. There is no reason for supposing
that its mechanism is in any way different from that of the
same reaction to mechanical stimuli, and hence this need not
be further discussed here. A question of prime importance
with regard to this positive reaction in response to chemical
stimuli, which was not taken up before, is— how well localised,
with reference to the stimulus, is the reaction ? or, in other
words, how precisely does the anterior end point towards the —
source of the stimulus,—in this case food? Have we here a
clear-cut orienting response? In answer to this problem it
may be said that when the worm is only a short distance
from the food the response is very precise. The anterior
end is brought by the first positive reaction so as to point
exactly towards the meat, and as the worm glides ahead it
never misses it. This is true where the specimen is near
enough (usually within three quarters of its own length), so
that the stimulus which reaches it is a fairly strong one.
In case the worm is stimulated near the edge of a large
diffusion area when the stimulus is very weak, the first
reaction may not suffice to direct the animal straight towards
the food. In this case the behaviour is usually like that
shown in Fig. 28, in which the hne B, B, B, represents the
effective margin of the diffusion area of the piece of food A.
(By “ effective margin” is meant the line outside of which no
effect is produced by the food on passing specimens.) The
first reaction which the worm gives on reaching this diffu-
sion area (Fig. 28, 1 and 2) is a weak positive one. It then
proceeds on the new path into this area, but not directly
towards the food. After a short time, however (Fig. 28, 3),
it is again stimulated to a positive reaction (4). ‘This time
both the stimulus and the reaction are stronger than before,
and the worm is directed more nearly towards the centre of
diffusion, but still not exactly. When it gets opposite the
food again (5) another positive reaction (6) is given, and this
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 629
time, since the stimulus is a rather strong one, the reaction
is a very precise one, and the subsequent movement carries
the animal directly to the food (Fig. 28, 7). This behaviour
is typical for this sort of stimulation, but may vary in its
component phases, depending on the relative strength of the
stimulus—the distance from the food when first stimulated.
~~
-—— -—~..
~-
~
.
\
ot
.B
x
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
i)
\
|
|
|
U
(
|
U
'
‘
‘
/
/
/
/
/
’
,
,
4
s
7 B
4
,
7
Fig. 28.—Diagram showing the reactions of Planaria to food (A)
from which juices have been diffusing into the water for some time.
B, B, B, represent the effective margin of the diffusion area of the
food A. 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6, and 7 are successive positions taken by
the organism.
Thus either two or as many as four positive reactions may be
necessary to bring the animal to the food. This shows
clearly that with reference to chemical stimuli, the precision
of localisation of the positive reaction decreases as the in-
tensity of the stimulus diminishes. Indeed, I have observed
what is evidently an unlocalised positive reaction, although
630 RAYMOND PEARL.
this seems paradoxical. The behaviour was as follows :—A
large diffusion area had been formed, and a specimen was
stimulated to a weak positive reaction at a distance of about
twice its own length from the food (Fig. 29, 1). It passed
into the diffusion area, but did not give another positive reac-
—
\
\
\
/
/
=
-
Pd
oem “2-2-,.. .,
a=
Fic. 29.—Showing the reaction of a planarian to a very weak food
stimulus. Letters as in Fig, 28.
tion when opposite the food, but instead glided by and away
from it. When it had gone some distance in this direction
it stopped and gave a very clear and characteristic positive
reaction, so far as the form of the reaction indicated, but
with the turn away from instead of towards the centre of
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 6381
diffusion. There was no doubt of the character of the
reaction; the head was raised and the body turned in the
usual manner of the positive reaction, which one can never
mistake after once having become familiar with it. ‘he
specimen kept on in the path determined by this last
reaction (Fig. 29, 4), and passed entirely out of the region of
the food. LHvidently in this the worm was stimulated very
weakly by a chemical, and the stimulus was nearly as strong
on one side of the body as on the other, and when the reflex
was set off it was on the wrong’ side of the body. This is
not the usual result of weak stimulation, and has been
observed in only two cases, but it serves very well to show
the decrease of the power of localisation when the stimulus
is very weak.
When, as frequently happens, the worm approaches the
food exactly head-on, the reaction usually consists merely
of that portion of the reflex expressed in the raising of the
héad, while the worm keeps on in its straight path till it reaches
the food. ‘The head may be waved from side to side slightly,
but the general direction of motion is not changed. ‘The
action evidently corresponds to the positive reaction following
weak mechanical stimulation of the dorsal surface of the head
in the middle line, as described above. In some cases, how-
ever, | have observed very active and hungry specimens of
Dendrocélum, sp., which were going straight towards the
food, give a complete positive reaction and turn to one side
and start off in a new direction away from the food. This,
however, of course brought the specimen at once into a
position where the stimulus was acting unilaterally, and it
again gave a positive reaction, this time heading it again
for the food, which it usually reached without further
reaction. But in some cases J have observed the specimen
give so strong a reaction as to be taken almost directly
away from the food by the subsequent movement, and,
passing out of the area of diffusion, fail to reach it at all.
Specimens behaving in this way were ‘‘wild” in their
general reactions. ‘lhe responses were very vigorous, but
632 RAYMOND PEARL.
not localised with reference to the stimulus with the usual
precision.
The “ gripping” of the food substance by the anterior part
of the worm is a very characteristic feature of the normal
food reaction. Its exact form depends on the configuration
of the food or other body “ gripped.” In its most typical
form, where the food material 1s in the form of a cylinder, or
approximately such, the action reminds one of the action of
the human hand in grasping a stick. The tip of the head
closes over the material in the same way that the fingers do,
while the region just behind the auricles bears the same
relation as does the proximal part of the palm, just in front
of the wrist, in grasping. After the head has been placed
over the material in this way it can be seen to contract
rather strongly, and thus hterally squeeze the food. In case
the surface contour of the food does not admit of this reflex
being carried out in its typical form, as close an approxima-
tion to this is made as possible. ‘To compare again with the
human hand, when the surface is flat, or forms the surface of
a cylinder of large radius, the ventral surface of the head is
pressed closely to it, the tip attempting to dip in, as it were,
below the surface, in just the same way that a man “ claws”
with his finger tips in attempting to obtain a hold on a
similarly configured body, too large for complete grasping.
While the “ gripping” is in general a very characteristic
feature of the food reaction, it may be omitted in rather
exceptional cases. The cause for the omission where it
occurs, or any laws governing the matter, I have not been
able to discover. A necessary accompaniment of the
“oripping” of the food is the cessation of the forward
movement of the animal as a whole. This pause when the
food is first touched by the anterior end and before the worm
passes up on to it, occurs in practically every case, whether
the gripping accompanies it or not. ‘The length of the pause
eripping ”
2)
is, of course, considerably greater when the “
occurs than when it is absent.
‘he function of the “gripping” of the food material before
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 633
feeding begins is not immediately apparent, but I am inclined
to think its purpose is to intimately test the substance with
regard to its availability as food. Some evidence on this
point and further discussion regarding it will be introduced
later.
After the preliminary pause and “ gripping” of the food
the worm glides up on to it to begin active feeding. The
position taken by the worm brings out a very nice correlation
in reflexes. Ina very large number of cases (certainly over
75 per cent., so far as my observations have gone) the worm
advances over the food until the pharyngeal opening is
exactly over the place where the first “ gripping” occurred,
and there the pharynx is extruded and feeding begins.
4}
Fic. 30.—Diagram showing great extension of the pharynx. The
stippled area represents food substance on which the planarian
is resting,
When the worm reaches this position the posterior part of
the body relaxes and takes on the appearance character-
istic of the resting specimen. ‘The pharynx is thrust ont,
and becomes attached very quickly. As it passes out through
the opening in the body-wall it becomes usually considerably
extended, and its diameter becomes correspondingly smaller
than when it is in the pharyngeal sac. It may or may not
attach to the food directly beneath the body. When con-
ditions are favourable it usually does, and consequently
cannot be seen on looking down on the animal from above.
On the other hand, I have frequently seen it stretched out
and attached some little distance to one side of the body, as
shown in Fig. 30. The stimulus, causing the extrusion of the
634 RAYMOND PEARL.
pharynx, is the contact of food or other solid body with the
pharyngeal region of the ventral surface, together with an
appropriate chemical stimulus. The pharynx is not extruded
until the animal gets up on to the food so that the opening of
the pharyngeal sac is in direct contact with it. ‘This can be
demonstrated by direct observation by the use of a very
small piece of food material and a plane mirror placed
beneath the glass dish in which the specimen is moving. By
lifting gently the posterior end of the body on a needle it can
also be seen that the pharynx is not extruded before itis over
the food. The most striking illustration of the correlation in
the reaction which brings about the extrusion of the pharynx
when it is just over the food, is to be seen when a specimen
of the nemertean Stichostemma asensoriatum is used as
food, and the long axis of the planarian and of the nemertean
are at right angles to each other. After first “ gripping ”
Fig. 31.—Diagrammatic longitudinal section of a planarian feeding
on a nemertean (shown in cross-section at x ).
the nemertean the planarian glides along over it until the
pharyngeal opening is just above it, and then pauses, and the
pharynx is extruded and attached (a and b, Fig. 31). ‘hese
facts strongly indicate that the effective stimulus for pharyn-
geal extrusion is received, at least in part, in the pharyn-
geal region itself. That it is necessary for both contact
and chemical stimuli to act to produce the extrusion of
the pharynx may be shown by experiments on specimens
eliding on the surface film ventral side uppermost. If, with
such a specimen, a chemical known to produce under other
conditions extrusion of the pharynx, is allowed to come in
contact with the pharyngeal region, there is no result. Of
course in performing this experiment proper precautions
were taken not to disturb the animal by allowing the solution
to drop uponit. Another demonstration of the same fact that
a chemical stimulus alone does not suffice to cause extrusion
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 655
of the pharynx is that specimens immersed in favourable
solutions, such as sugar solutions, do not show this phe-
nomenon. ‘hat mechanical stimulation alone does not suffice
is demonstrated by the fact that planarians pass over and rest
on other planarians without extruding the pharynx, although
the consistency of their bodies is evidently much the same as
that of the animals used as food. In fact, they will be
used as food frequently if they are wounded so as to afford
the proper chemical stimulus. ‘he stimulation of the anterior
end of the body by the food seems also to be necessary before
pharyngeal extrusion takes place. The data on this point will
be presented later in connection with operation experiments.
The appearance of the body on the food is quite charac-
teristic. As mentioned above, when the pharynx is extruded
forward, movement stops, and the posterior part of the body
becomes more or less relaxed. The anterior third of the
body, however, keeps in movement during a considerable
part of the time the specimen is feeding. The head is waved
about from side to side, and touched to the food or the
bottom of the dish here and there. It keeps its character-
istic extended form to a greater or less degree. A favourite
position is for the anterior third or half of the body to lie on
the bottom and move about, while the posterior part lies up
on the food. This is the position most frequently seen in
specimens feeding on a rather small piece of meat. When
the anterior end gets on the bottom it gives every appear-
ance, in many cases, of attempting to glide away, and being
only restrained by the attachment of the pharynx to the
food. In other cases, however, the anterior end remains
quiet. ‘The importance of the attempted movement. will be
brought out later. As has been mentioned above, the flat-
worm is able to move off and drag the food still attached to
the extruded pharynx along behind it. In the fastening of
the food to the body in this case the sticky slime undoubtedly
assists the pharynx.
After the food has been softened by the digestive juices,
it is taken into the body through the pharynx.
636 RAYMOND PEARL.
After the worm has been feeding for a certain length of
time it will detach the pharynx and spontaneously move off
from the food, the pharynx being withdrawn again into its
sac. The length of time after the beginning of the feeding
at which this takes place varies very greatly in different
cases. J have observed a specimen which fed on a piece of
molluse for as long as an hour and thirty minutes, while in
other cases the worm may stay on the food only ten minutes,
or even less. Judging from the rate at which food is taken
up while the animal is feeding during the day, and from the |
fact that pieces of meat left in the dish overnight are almost
entirely consumed by morning, it would appear that much of
the time during the night is spent in feeding when any
material available for the purpose is at hand. While the
anterior end of the feeding worm retains its normal sensi-
tiveness to stimuli, it nevertheless requires considerable
stimulation to induce a feeding worm to leave the food.
Shaking of the dish, which would ordinarily set all resting
specimens into rapid movement, has little or no effect on:
feeding specimens. If a worm is suddenly pulled off a piece
of meat on which it is feeding a very good view of the
extruded pharynx may usually be had, as this organ is
retracted somewhat slowly when torn from food in this way.
So far as I have been able to discover, the presence of
food in the immediate neighbourhood of a resting planarian
has no effect upon it. Apparently the stimulus afforded by
crushed meat is not sufficiently strong to produce a response
from such an individual. ‘The following experiment copied
from my notes will show this.
May 14th, 1901, 3.10 p.m.—A piece of freshly crushed
snail was placed 1 mm. distant from the anterior end of a
resting specimen. No reaction or other effect produced.
3.30 p.m.— Worm in same position as before.
4.5 p.m.—No change. (At this time the worm was acci-
dentally started into movement and the experiment conse-
quently ended.)
This lack of effect of food on resting specimens may be
MOVEMENTS, E''C., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 637
the reason for the statement of Bardeen (loc. cit., p 522) “ that
worms which had been kept in pure rain water for a week or
two, and were thus in a hungry condition, would remain
unmoved by the presence close by their side of a piece of
fresh snail, a food much prized by them.”
1. Food Reactions of Specimens after Opera-
tions.—For the purpose of throwing light on the general
mechanism of the food reaction, experiments were tried on
specimens cut in different ways. It is unfortunately very
different from practical reasons to get many certain results
from these experiments. Many of the results are negative,
and hence not entirely conclusive. Since, however, some
important facts have been brought out by these experiments,
they will be described.
The first operation which will be discussed is that of
cutting the animal in two transversely. If such a ent is
made in the region in front of the pharynx, the anterior
resulting piece, after it has recovered somewhat from the
shock effect of the operation, will show the following reac-
tion. On coming into the zone of diffusion about a piece of
meat it gives the positive reaction just as a normal worm
does, and turns towards the food. On reaching the edge of
the meat its behaviour is again like that of the normal
animal; it stops, usually “grips” the food, and then passes
on over it. At this point appears the striking difference
between the behaviour of this anterior piece, which, it must
be remembered, has no pharynx, and the behaviour of the
entire worm. ‘The anterior piece after gripping the food
glides up over it, and without the shghtest change, even in
the rate of gliding, passes down off of it on the other side.
There is not the slightest indication of any stopping for the
pharynx to be extruded.
If the transverse cut is made farther back, so that the
pharynx is included in the anterior piece, this will then
behave with reference to food quite as a normal animal does.
It will stop on the food and extrude the pharynx.
The posterior pieces resulting from transverse cuts do not
VOL. 46, PART 4.—NEW SERIES, TT
638 RAYMOND PEARL.
give any definite food reaction, so far as I have been able to
ascertain, until they have been regenerated to some con-
siderable extent. Posterior pieces from which only the head
has been cut will glide by pieces of snail on which other
worms are feeding, without giving the slightest reaction."
In experiments so arranged that the gliding posterior piece
would just touch with its anterior end the edge of a piece of
food, it gave no reaction. This same arrangement with a
normal worm practically never fails to call forth the positive
reaction and bring the worm up on to the food. Posterior
pieces placed gently on pieces of food material do not extrude
the pharynx and start feeding, but immediately glide down
from it and over the bottom of the dish. These experiments
with posterior pieces have been tried many times and under
varied conditions, in the hope that some sort of positive
results might be obtained, but never with success. ‘his is
true for three days after the operation. After a new head
has been fairly well formed the animal will react to food
again. ‘The behaviour of one of these posterior pieces on
touching with the anterior end a piece of food is very
strikingly different from that- of a normal animal. The cut
piece, if it touches with the front or sides of the anterior end
the smallest shred of food material, or any other substance,
gives a well-marked negative reaction, and goes in a new
direction away from the obstruction. It does not, as a rule,
crawl up over anything which it meets squarely “ head-on,”
but instead turns away. |
Thinking that possibly the pharynx might play a more or
less independent part in the normal food reaction, 1. e., that
it might have a set of reflexes of its own, not determined by
the rest of the body, I tried experiments with the isolated
pharynx removed entire from the body. Such an isolated
pharynx will remain alive for a considerable period, and
respond to stimulation. When first removed from the body
' Bardeen (:01, a) has shown that if the transverse cut is in the region in
front of the eyes the posterior piece (comprising in this case nearly the whole
worm) will react normally to food,
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 639
it contracts rhythmically in a longitudinal direction for a
time, and then comes to rest at about its normal leneth when
in the body. Mechanical stimulation causes merely longi-
tudinal contraction, while the presence of food near it has no
effect whatever. Freshly crushed snail meat placed within a
millimetre of such an isolated pharynx had no effect upon it
in the course of an hour. I have tried laying the isolated
pharynx directly on pieces of meat to see if there would be
any tendency for the end of the organ to attach itself as it
normally does. This was not done, nor was any other
definite reaction produced.
These operation experiments show, so far as they go, that—
(1) The presence of the pharynx in the body (i.e., the
functional ability to take food) has nothing to do with deter-
mining the reaction of the anterior end of the body to food
stimuli. The anterior part of the body gives the same re-
action to food in every case, without regard to whether so
doing actually puts the animal ina position to get food or
not. The reaction is only purposive under certain circum-
stances; when changed conditions make it no longer purpo-
sive, no adaptive change in the behaviour of the anterior end
occurs. This shows clearly how little basis there is for con-
sidering the behaviour towards food as angling of the
nature of intelligent behaviour.
(2) The stopping of the worm on the food under normal
circumstances is due to the posterior half of the body, not the
anterior. The behaviour of the anterior cut piece in gliding
directly over the food is what one might be led to expect from
the behaviour of the same part of the body under normal
circumstances. As described above, it was seen that the
anterior end of the normal individual gives every appearance
of attempting to continue moving forward while the posterior
part is feeding, and is only prevented from doing this by the
mechanical hindrance of the attached pharynx. In a sense,
we may consider that in a large degree the work of the
anterior end of the body with reference to feeding is over
when it gets the animal up on to the food.
640 RAYMOND PFARL.
(3) The reception of the food stimulus is a function of the
head. In other words, the head is the only part of the body
capable of receiving very weak chemical stimuli.
(4) Decapitated specimens do not extrude the pharynx, so
far as my observations go, even though the proper normal
stimuli are given the pharyngeal region. Presumably the
brain is the necessary organ in this connection, as we have
already seen that the sense organs concerned with the act of ex-
trusion are not those of the head, but of the pharyngeal region.
Bardeen (: 01, a, p. 178) states that ‘‘ the simple reflexes of
extending the pharynx and of swallowing are preserved after
removal of the head. I found, by repeated trials, that one of
the headless pieces could usually be made to eat if it was
placed on its back on a slide in a small drop of water. Under
the conditions mentioned the pharynx is usually protruded,
and will engulf bits of food placed in the mouth.” Regard-
ing this conclusion, I can only say that in a large number of
experiments with decapitated specimens I have never been
able to induce extrusion of the pharynx, under conditions
approximating as closely as possible to the normal. I do not
wish to affirm that the decapitated planarian cannot extrude
the pharynx, but merely that it does not when placed in
situations which normally produce pharynx extrusion.
(5) The pharynx is not an independent organ in its reactions,
since, when separated from the body, it does not react with
reference to the localisation of the stimulus, as it does when
normally connected with the remainder of the body.
2, Summary of Food Reactions.—It is shown above
that planarians have a very definite and characteristic set of
reactions to food substances which enable them to become
aware of the presence of food, and find it. The importance
of these reactions in the life of the individual can hardly be
over-estimated. While planarians, like many other lower
organisms, can live for a considerable time without food, yet
in the long run they must, of course, have it. The question
1 Tvidence on this latter point will be brought forward in connection with
the reaction to chemicals,
MOVEMENTS, UTC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 64]
of how a lower organism gets its fuod, taking advantage of
the good and rejecting the bad, and thus apparently choosing
one thing from several, is one of the most interesting and
important in comparative psychology.
The food reaction of planarians consists of an extremely
well co-ordinated set of reflexes, which may be set into action
by stimuli of two sorts,—first, chemical; and _ second,
mechanical. Both sorts of stimuli are, of course, given by
the food. ‘The first and most important of all the reflexes in
the food reaction is the turning of the head towards the
source of stimulation, followed by movement in that direction.
This is the reaction which enables the animal to find food.
Evidently it is the same thing exactly as what has been
described as the positive reaction to mechanical stimuli; or,
in other words, the positive reaction to mechanical stimuli is
only a special case of the general food reaction. Its primary
function is evidently the getting of food, whatever the stimulus
which calls it forth. The reason for a food response following
mechanical stimulation is to be found in the fact that it most
frequently happens that many things (e.g., whole animals)
which are available for food are not emitting chemical sub-
stances into the water in sufficient quantity to cause an
effective stimulus. If the planarian did not give a positive
reaction atter contact with such bodies they would be missed,
and no advantage taken of them as food. By reacting
positively to weak mechanical stimuli the animal is in a
position to take advantage of the presence of food of all sorts,
whether it is in condition such as to diffuse chemical sub-
stances through the water or not. This fact that the animals
react to food substances as a result of mechanical stimulation
affords a possible explanation of the “ gripping” phase of the
general response. ‘The purpose of this ‘ gripping” may be
to bring the sense organs of the head, which are sensitive to
chemical stimuli, into very close contact with the substance
in order to determine whether it possesses the chemical
characteristics of food. In other words, this reaction isa
“tasting” reaction, which is made necessary by the fact that
642 RAYMOND PEARL.
the organism turns toward all bodies of a certain physical
texture under most circumstances. ‘The active squeezing of
the material in the “ gripping” undoubtedly helps to press
out to the surface any juices which may be in the material.
In closing the section on food reactions it may be well to
give a sort of general picture of the whole behaviour of
fresh-water planarians towards food. ‘The method by which
the planarian finds material suitable for food is as follows:
1. Chemical substances diffusing from food come in con-
tact with the sensitive head region of the planarian; or—
The moving animal touches with the head some soft sub-
stance, and as a result of either of these two sorts of
stimulation—
2. The organism gives a positive reaction, i.e. turns
towards the source of the stimulus. This reaction is very
precisely localised in most cases, and is the most essential
part of the whole food behaviour. Its mechanism has been
previously described (v. sup., p. 619).
3. When the anterior end squarely touches the food as a
result of this reaction it typically closes tightly over it,
giving what I have called the “gripping” reaction. This
reaction is evidently a very much specialised feeling move-
ment for the purpose of closely testing the chemical nature
of material. It is produced by a contraction of the ventral
longitudinal muscles of the head region. While it is taking
place progressive motion ceases.
4, After this pause the worm glides over the piece of food
till the opening of the pharyngeal sac lies over or nearly
over the place “ gripped,” and there the posterior part stops
and the pharynx is extruded and attached to the food. The
factors determining the place where the pharynx shall be
extruded are (a) the stimulation of the véntral surface of
the body in the pharyngeal region of the food (pure reflex
factor), and (b) the presence of the brain, which probably
acts as a co-ordinating centre for this reaction,
5, A digestive fluid is poured out through the pharynx,
aud the food is partly digested before being taken up.
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 645
6. The softened food is takeu into the body through the
pharynx.
7. The animal spontaneously stops feeding after a certain
time.
‘The question now arises, if the normal process of getting
food is at bottom in the majority of cases a reaction to a
chemical stimulus, what is the nature of the chemical sub-
stance causing it? Can the same response be induced by
the use of different inorganic and organic chemicals? Is
there any relation between chemical composition and the
intensity or form of the reaction? ‘lo answer these and a
number of other questions arising out of them recourse must
be had to experiments in which the nature and concentra-
tion of the chemicals affecting the organisms may be con-
trolled. All the experiments of this kind I will group
together under the heading—
b. Reactions to Chemical Stimuli—-Chemotaxis.
1. Reactions to Localised Chemical Stimuli.—
This particular phase of the general subject of the effects of
chemicals may be considered first, since it is most closely
related to what has preceded on the food reactions. The
plan of the experiments was to try the effect of a series of
substances when applied to restricted areas of the body. A
sufficiently large number of chemicals were used to include
representatives from each of the main groups of substances
which have been found to have marked effects on organisms.
a. Methods.—The method which was found to give the
most satisfactory results in the application of localised
chemical stimuli was the use of a capillary tube filled with
the solution whose effects it was desired to test. The form
of the tube used is shown in Fig. 32. The tubes were 10 to
15 cm. long, and were made from glass tubing of about
2°5 mm. internal diameter. Hach end was drawn to capillary
fineness, and then broken off so as to give an opening of the
desired size. ‘The opening at the upper end was made
644. RAYMOND PEARL.
slightly larger than that at the lower, which was used in
giving the stimulus. The tube was filled with solution by
suction. ‘The rate of diffusion can be regulated by changing
the sizes of the openings, and can be determined for each
tube from the rate at which the fluid sinks at the upper end
of the tube. Considerable experimenting is necessary in
order to get the best rate of diffusion for work on planarians.
Since the animal is moving rather rapidly while the stimulus
is being apphed it is necessary to have reasonably rapid
diffusion or the worm will not react at all, or not for so long
a time after the stimulation has begun that one cannot be
certain of the results. It is easily possible to get the
capillary so fine that no results can be obtained. On the
other hand, when it is too large the solution affects too large
a portion of the body at one time, and furthermore, as will
be shown later, may cause a rheotactic reaction of the
organism. ‘This, of course, introduces a possible source of
Vic, 32.—Glass tube used in giving localised chemical stimuli.
serious error. It can be avoided by frequent and proper
control experiments.
It will be well to describe in advance the conduct of a
typical experiment and the precautions taken, so that it may
not be necessary to repeat these details in the account of
each experiment. 1x to ten normal active planariaus were
taken from the aquarium dish and put in a Petri dish of
about 10 cm. diameter, in freshly drawn, filtered tap water.
Knough water was put in the dish to give a depth of about
lcm. ‘Two or three of the capillary tubes with different
sized openings were filled with the test solution. These
tubes were all tested before a final experimental series was
begun, and usually only one which had been found to allow
diffusion at the satisfactory rate was used. In some cases,
however, varying degrees of sensitiveness among the
different specimens made it necessary to use for some in-
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 645
dividuals capillaries of faster or slower rates than what may
be called the standard. After preliminary experiments to
determine the relative sensitiveness of the different parts of
the body to chemicals, attention was devoted almost entirely
to stimulation of the head region, and consequently in the
experiments which will be reported first the stimulus was
applied only to the head, unless otherwise stated. The
method of applying the stimulus was to place the point of
the capillary tube a short distance (about 2 mm.) from the
place on the body to be stimulated. The animal was stimu-
lated as it was gliding along in the normal way, and hence
it was necessary to move the capillary tube at the same rate
the animal moved in order to keep it opposite the same point
in case the reaction was not given at the instant the capillary
was put into place, which, of course, almost never happens.
With a little practice one can move the tube along as the
worm glides so as to keep the relative position of the two
almost identically the same. Just as soon as a reaction had
been obtained with a given specimen the capillary tube was
removed from the water, so as to permit as little as possible
of the chemical to get into the water surrounding the
organism. After a series with any substance, the worms
were transferred at once to a dish of fresh water before
beginning another series. Further, in any long series, when
for any reason it might be supposed that the water was
becoming contaminated with the chemical .to an extent
sufficient to affect the results, the worms were transferred to
‘another dish of fresh water. All through the course of an
experiment frequent control tests were made by trying the
effect on the worms of the water surrounding them when
diffusing out from the same tube used previously for the
chemical. After each experiment the tubes were thoroughly
rinsed by drawing distilled water back and forth through
them many times. ‘lhe tubes were also frequently discarded
and new ones substituted,
646 RAYMOND PEARL.
The following substances were used in the experiments :
Ee
Mineral acids . 4 Hydrochloric
leap
age
Citric
Formic
{Sodium hydrate
| Sodium carbonate
Organic acids
Alkalies
{Copper sulphate
| Zine sulphate
(Sodium chloride
Other salts . LR Sodium bromide
Potassium chloride
Baerna chloride
Salts of heavy metals
Cane-sugar.
Distilled water.
Since distilled water was found to have a decided effect in
producing a reaction, the solutions were prepared in both
distilled water and in filtered tap water. In case of any
doubt, as with very dilute solutions, the effects of the solu-
tions prepared in each sort of water were tested and
compared.
Since only qualitative results were desired, and for the
practical reason of greater convenience, percentage rather
than molecular solutions were used.
(3. Results.—The results are, in a way, so remarkable that
they will be presented in some detail.
Mineral Acids.
Nitric (sp. gr. 1:42), + per cent.—This solution causes
strong negative reaction, If applied to the head region the
animal turns away from the side stimulated immediately, and
strongly. If the stimulus is long continued the animal
writhes and twists about violently.
Stimulation of the posterior region causes the part where
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 647
the solution strikes to contract very violently, and the whole
animal to start crawling ahead rapidly. his concentration
is very injurious, and if its action is continued, quickly kills
the individual. It will be noted that its effects are the same
essentially as those of strong mechanical stimuli applied to
the same parts of the body.
5 per cent. and 54, per cent.—Results the same as in 4
per cent. The animal is not as quickly and extensively
injured by these solutions as by the former. It is to be
noted that with these comparatively strong solutions the
reaction time after stimulation of the posterior end of the
body is so slow that this part of the body is permanently
injured or destroyed before the animal gets away.
zy per cent.—In some cases a well-marked positive re-
action was caused by stimulation of the head region with
this solution. The head would turn towards the mouth
of the pipette in the characteristic fashion of the food reaction,
or the reaction to weak mechanical stimuli. In other in-
dividuals the reaction given was weakly negative, while still
other specimens were indifferent. In cases where there was
an indifferent reaction there was a local contraction of the
side of the head stimulated.
sy per cent.—Clearly marked positive reaction in large
majority of cases after the stimulus has acted for some
time. This solution never caused the negative reaction. Some
individuals were, in a few cases, indifferent to this solution.
This solution is too weak to start a resting specimen into
movement.
xia per cent. and weaker.—Indifferent reactions or weak
positive.
This acid appears to be avery strong stimulus for the
negative reaction in concentrations down to 7, per cent.,
while below that it is a rather ineffective stimulus, and the
reaction when induced is positive.
Hydrochloric, = per cent.—Strong negative reaction.
There is noticeable in some cases a teudency for some
individuals to turn very slightly towards the source of
648 RAYMOND PEARL.
stimulation before giving the strong negative reaction.
Stimulation of the anterior end of a decapitated specimen
caused a slow negative reaction with long reaction time.
This solution causes the change from the glide to the crawl
when applied to the posterior end of a normal worm.
zy per cent.—Negative reaction; rather weaker than with
preceding solution. With this solution one specimen would
turn towards the source of the stimulus until the head came
into the strong acid near the mouth of the pipette, and then
give the sharp negative reaction. .
zy per cent.—Specimen A gave positive reaction in every
case; specimen B in about 50 per cent. of all cases, while
in the remainder of trials gave weak negative. Other
specimens negative reaction.
wp per cent.—Specimen A as in preceding case. Specimen
B gave positive reaction in about 90 per cent. of all trials.
Other specimens weakly negative reactions.
zip per cent.—All specimens give well-marked positive
reaction. They glide up to the end of the capillary and
“orip” it with the anterior end as in the food reaction.
After holding on for a moment they let go and give a sharp
negative reaction, indicating that the stimulus is still too
strong when continued. This behaviour will indicate the
machine-like character of the positive reaction.
sty per cent.—In the majority of cases indifferent re-
action. Remainder positive.
‘lo give an idea of the dependence of the reactions to
chemicals on the physiological condition of the organism, the
following series of experiments with HCl in solutions of 73>
per cent. and weaker concentrations may be described. It is
to be understood that these experiments were carried out
on different animals from those just given.
‘i; per cent.—No sharp positive reaction. Specimens
will give a weak negative reaction if the opening of the
capillary is held very near the head. In most cases reactions
wre indifferent.
1
32
5 per cent.—One specimen gives positive reaction and
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARTANS. 649
goes through whole food reaction on the end of tube.
The remainder still give weak negative reactions.
gin per cent.—Reactions essentially the same as in 335
per cent.
At this point this series was discontinued. It shows that
any absolute concentration for a chemical solution which will
cause all planarians to give the positive reaction cannot be
assigned. How a given individual will react to a given
concentration of chemical depends almost, if not quite as
much, on the individual as it does upon the solution.
Sulphuric, ; per cent. and = per cent.—Caused imme-
diate and violent reaction. Decapitated worm reacts like
normal. ‘This is evidently a very strong stimulus.
qa per cent.— Caused strong negative reaction in majority
of cases. One specimen reacted as follows :—the capillary
tube being held some distance away from the head, it
first gave a well-marked positive reaction. On coming
into the stronger solution near the mouth of the tube it
began strong convulsive contractions (evidently on account
of too strong stimulation). It remained, however, at the
same spot, and after a few minutes extruded the pharynx
and swept it about over the bottom. The specimen re-
mained this way for some time. The tube was, of course,
removed immediately after the first positive reaction was
given. A decapitated specimen in one case gave a very
distinct positive reaction to this solution, the tube being
held some distance away from the specimen.
sa per cent.—Negative reaction. Decapitated specimen
gave positive reaction once. ‘l'lis solution, applied to
the posterior end of the body, induces the crawling move-
ment. }
za per cent.—Negative reaction. Isolated pharynx con-
tracts into a ball when stimulated with this solution.
zip per cent.—Positive reaction in one case. Remainder
$20
negative. Same result with pharynx as in ;4, per cent.
gzip per cent., z545 per cent., and 534, per cent.—With
these solutions the reactions were for the most part negative.
650 RAYMOND PEARL.
In a few cases positive responses were produced, but not
reeularly.
siza per cent. — Positive reaction in all cases. The
whole food response was produced in case the end of the
tube was left in position. ‘he worms “ gripped” it, glided
up on toit,and extruded the pharynx, in many cases running
the latter up into the lumen of the tube. Anterior piece,
resulting from cutting animal in two transversely, acts like
¢
whole worm (positive reaction), but less strongly. Decapitated
worm gave no response. In order to make sure that in this.
case it was the extremely diluted acid which was producing
the result, numerous controls with distilled water and culture
water and fresh tap water were tried on the same speci-
mens, in alternation with trials with the acid. With tap
water and culture water the specimens were indifferent ;
but with the acid solution (44,5 per cent.) mixed in either
tap water or distilled water they gave a well-marked positive
reaction. ‘This showed clearly that the results were due to
the acid.
Summary.—With the three mineral acids tested it was
found that to concentrations above a certain point the speci-
mens always gave the negative reaction, while to concentra-
tions below this point the positive reaction was given. The
absolute value of this ‘critical point” varies widely with
different individuals. The behaviour is essentially the
same as that in response to mechanical stimulation, viz. to
strong stimuli the negative reaction 1s given, to weak the
positive.
Organic Acids.
Oxalic, + per cent. and +4, per cent.—Sharp negative
reaction. his solution affords a very strong stimulus
and quickly kills the specimen. The negative reaction
is very violent when once induced, but several specimens
were killed before they turned away. There was notice-
able a shght tendency to turn towards the stimulus the
instant it was perceived, and before this could be replaced by
MOVEMENTS, BTC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 651
the negative reaction the specimens were nearly or quite
killed.
za per cent.—Convulsive negative reaction in the great
majority of cases. In one case stimulation was followed
by sharp positive reaction, succeeded by extrusion of the
pharynx.
zi; per cent. and 4, per cent.—A few specimens on some
trials give positive reaction, and then go into convulsive
twisting movements as they get into stronger solution.
Remainder negative.
ria per cent. and ,4, per cent.—Positive and weak nega-
tive reactions about equally divided.
giy per cent. and ;,4, per cent.—Positive reactions
becoming proportionately more numerous. Negative re-
actions are very weak when given in response to these
solutions. In the cases where there is a positive reaction
the full response is not given; the specimens go up to
the mouth of the tube, but do not grip it nor extrude the
pharynx.
ssiga per cent.—With this solution all but one specimen
give the positive reaction. Specimens will follow the end of
the pipette about the dish if itis moved slowly. This is done
by a series of positive reactions. Specimens will give the
_complete food reaction on the end of the tube.
Citric, 2 per cent.—Strong negative reactions.
1 per cent.—Less marked negative reactions. ‘l'endency
to positive in some cases.
zs per cent.—Positive reactions in nearly all cases. Re-
mainder indifferent.
7; per cent.—Indifferent.
Citric acid in weak solutions seems to be a very ineffective
sort of stimulus, not causing pronounced reactions of any kind.
Formic, + per cent. and ;4, per cent.—Prompt and de-
cided negative reaction. Causes a resting worm to give
a weak negative reaction of the anterior end, but does not
start the whole animal into movement, provided the tube is
withdrawn after the first reaction is obtained.
652 RAYMOND PEARL.
sy per cent.—Negative reaction, but decidedly less pro-
nounced than with preceding concentrations. Does not
cause any movement whatever in resting specimen.
jz per cent.—Negative reaction, less strong than in pre-
vious cases. In some cases positive reaction. Noticeable
tendency to give slight positive reaction just before the
definite negative response.
siz per cent.— Well-marked positive response.
Summary.—The same conclusions are to be drawn from
the experiments on organic acids as from those on mineral
acids, viz. that to strong concentrations of a given substance
the negative reaction is given, while weak concentrations
cause a positive response. Oxalic acid is rather peculiar in
that it appears to furnish in all concentrations a stimulus of
the proper quality to induce the positive response, but is at
the same time excessively harmful in any above the weakest
solutions.
Alkalies.
Sodium Hydrate, 4 per cent., 4, per cent.,and 51, per
cent. — Immediate strong negative response. Specimens
turn away very sharply. In 54, per cent. the reaction is
slightly weaker than in the other two.
zy per cent.—Negative reaction. Stimulus applied to pos-
terior end of body is sufficiently strong to cause crawling
movement,
zi; per cent.— Weaker negative reaction. Sufficiently
strong to start resting animal into movement.
xiv per cent.—Weak negative reaction. Ineffective on
resting worm and on posterior end of body of moving
specimen.
shy per cent.—Very weak negative response. In one
specimen sharp positive reaction; performs whole food re-
action on the end of the tube.
giy per cent.—Positive reactions from all specimens. ‘he
complete food reaction is given.
MOVEMENTS, HTC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARTANS. 655
To solutions below this concentration the organisms are
either indifferent or, in a few cases, weakly positive.
Sodium Carbonate, + per cent.—Rather weak negative
reaction.
qb per cent.—Mayjority of all reactions positive. Remainder
weakly negative.
za per cent.—Well-marked positive reaction in all cases.
The specimens can be led around the dish by moving the tube
slowly.
Below this concentration the reactions were either in-
different or weakly positive.
Summary.—A caustic alkali (NaOH) and a salt of strong
alkaline reaction (Na,CO;) produce essentially the same
results as the acids. In strong solutions they cause negative
reactions ; in weak, positive.
Salts of Heavy Metals.
Copper Sulphate, ~, per cent.—At the very first
trials the animals all turned sharply and immediately towards
the stimulus (positive reaction), but the solution was so
strong as to throw the animal into convulsions, when the
head came very near the mouth of the tube. Subsequent
trials produced the negative response.
zy and #7, per cent.—All specimens give positive reaction.
The head is brought up to the tube, and the worm glides up
over the latter.
With all concentrations of CuSO, there is a very well-
marked local contraction of that part of the body which is
stimulated.
In another series of experiments with this same substance,
the strongest concentration which would produce the positive
reaction in all cases was z+, per cent.
Zine Sulphate, + and +4, per cent.—Sharp and imme-
diate negative reaction.
zg per cent.—Negative reaction, but less pronounced than
in former cases.
qo and , per cent.—Specimens stop when stimulated,
40 0
vou. 46, pArT 4,—NEW SERIES, U U
654 RAYMOND PEARL.
and wave the anterior end about in the water, first
away from and then towards the source of stimulation.
As the head comes nearer to the end of the tube, where the
solution is strongest, 1t 1s more strongly stimulated, and
gives a definite negative reaction. As it gets out into the
weaker zone again it is stimulated to a positive reaction
once more. If the tube is now removed the specimen will,
in some cases, after a short time turn sharply towards the
place where it was, and move in that direction. In other
cases the negative reaction finally predominates. It not in-
frequently happens that in the earher part of this reaction the
anterior end only moves very slightly towards, or very
slightly away from the stimulus, so that the body seems, at
first sight, to be fixed in one position. The planarian, in this
strenuous reaction, probably comes as near to the hypothe-
cated behaviour of the famous “ Buridan’s ass” as anything
is ever likely to in actual practice.
xiv per cent.—One specimen gave clearly marked positive
reaction in every case. Others as in the preceding solutions
(a5 pee cent. and ~, per cent.).
yy per cent. _Well- marked positive reaction. Specimens
give complete typical food reaction.
In one case, with a small worm, I was able to produce
crawling in a backward direction by continuous stimulation
- the anterior end in the middle line of the body with
a> per cent. ZnSQ,.
Summary.—The results from solutions of salts of two
heavy metals are in accord with those obtained with other
chemicals.
Other Salts.
Sodium Chloride, + per cent. and ;'; per cent.—Nega-
tive reaction ; distinct, but not as strongly marked as the
negative reaction to strong acids.
gly per cent.—Weak negative reactions and weak positive
reactions in about equal numbers. Many of the trials produce
no response whatever.
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 655
qa per cent.—Weak positive reactions in nearly every
case. No negative reactions. The typical, complete food
reflex I have not been able to induce with sodium chloride.
Concentrations below this do not produce any definite re-
action.
In general, NaCl is a very ineffective stimulus to pla-
narians, either to the positive or the negative reaction. Dis-
tilled water is a considerably stronger stimulus to the positive
reaction.
Sodium Bromide, 2 per cent.—Weak but distinct
negative reaction in all cases.
2 per cent.—Well-marked positive reaction in all cases.
Complete normal food reaction is produced.
Potassium Chloride, 2 per cent.—The animals usually
react in a peculiar way to this and stronger solutions of KCl.
When stimulated they stop, turn the anterior end either
slightly towards or slightly away from the source of stimula-
tion, and then stay in the same place and squirm and twist
the body. In some cases there is a well-marked negative
reaction.
+ per cent.—Some specimens give negative reactions
in the first few trials; afterwards give definite positive
responses, as do other specimens in all cases. In one case
the specimen gave marked positive reaction, and after the
head was turned towards the stimulus, remained quiet in the
same position as long as the chemical acted.
z5 per cent.—All specimens give positive reaction or
are indifferent. ‘The whole food reaction took place on the
end of the tube. In this experiment it could be clearly
demonstrated that the pharynx is positively chemotactic to
this substance. It is probably positively chemotactic to all
substances which induce the preceding portions of the feed-
ing reaction. If, after the pharynx had been extruded, the
tube was turned about so that the ventral surface of the
animal could be seen, and the posterior part of the body was
moved with a needle, so as to change the position of the
pharynx with reference to the mouth of the tube, it could be
656 RAYMOND PRARL.
seen that this organ bent directly towards the mouth of the
capillary. The pharynx oriented itself with reference to the
issuing chemical.
The cases in which specimens were “indifferent ” to this
solution (i.e. did not give either the positive or negative re-
action) were evidently not due to the fact that the animal
was not stimulated, but, on the contrary, that it was stimu-
lated about equally to negative and positive responses. This
was indicated by their restless behaviour when “ indifferent.”
While the animal as a whole moves in a straight line, the.
head constantly moves slightly towards and away from the
stimulus. Evidently the solution is not quite strong enough
to induce a definite negative reaction, nor quite weak enough
to cause a clear positive response.
ss per cent., z= per cent., and 4, per cent.—Distinct posi-
tive reaction in all cases.
ziz per cent.—Positive reactions in some cases, mainly
indifferent. The ‘‘ indifference” is now due to lack of
stimulation.
Below ;+, per cent. I have been unable to get definite
responses of any sort with KCl.
Magnesium Chloride, 4 per cent.—Usually sharp
negative reaction. In some cases a slight turn towards the
stimulus preceded the negative response, and in some few
other trials the animal was indifferent.
=; per cent.—Weaker negative reaction. In one case
clear positive reaction. No local contraction of the region
stimulated is caused by this chemical.
zi; per cent.—Positive reaction in all cases. Complete
food reaction could be induced.
qiy per cent.— Weak positive reaction or indifferent.
Summary.—To the salts NaCl, NaBr, KCl, and MeCl,
the planarians react as to other chemicals, by giving the
negative response to strong concentrations and the positive
to weak.
Cane-sugar.—Sugar solutions, in all concentrations
above ;', per cent., so far as I have been able to discover,
MOVEMENTS, KTC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 657
cause well-marked positive reactions in all cases. This is
the only chemical which I have found that causes only one of
the reactions.
Distilled Water.—To distilled water applied by the
capillary method the organisms give a well-marked positive
reaction in all cases. That the reactions to very dilute solu-
tions of chemicals were not due to the distilled water in cases
where this was used as the solvent, rather than to the chemical
itself, was proven in the following way :—Parallel experiments
were performed, using tap water as a solvent, and in every
case the same reaction was given to the tap-water solution as
to that in distilled water. At the same time the specimens
would not react to clear tap water applied in the same way by
the same tube.
2. General Summary.—Putting all the results on the
effects of localised chemical stimul together, we are forced to
the somewhat remarkable conclusion that practically all sub-
stances are both “ attractive ” and “ repellent” to planarians.
Hvidently, then, the chemical composition of a substance is
not of the first importance in determining how the individuals
shall react to it; but, on the contrary, its concentration 1s the
important matter. To weak solutions of any chemical the
animals give positive responses, while to strong solutions they
give negative.
Between the behaviour towards chemical stimuli and
towards mechanical stimuli there is a very close parallelism,
or, perhaps better, identity, which is evidently something of
fundamental importance. In order to bring this out more
clearly it may be well to arrange in tabular form the results
of the study of the reactions to these two stimuli.
658 RAYMOND PEARL.
Mechanical Stimuli. Chemical Stimuli.
Strong. Weak. Strong. Weak.
Unilateral stimula- | Negative re- | Positive | Negative re- | Positive
tion of head region | action reaction | action reaction.
Stimulation of head | Hither avery | Positive | Strong nega- | Positive
region on median | strong ne-| reaction tive reac-| reaction.
line gative reac- tion, or
41i0n, OF crawling
crawling backwards
backwards
Stimulation of middle | Essentially the same as | The same as for stimula-
region of body for stimulation of the} tion of the head, except
head that the sensitivity is
much less, and dimin-
ishes more rapidly pos-
teriorly than in case of
mechanical stimuli.
Stimulation of pos- | Crawling Local con-] Crawling | No effect,
terior region of | ahead traction ahead or slight
body local con-
traction.
From this close parallelism we must conclude, I think, that
in the behaviour of planarians the qualitative character of a
stimulus is of little importance in comparison with its quanti-
tative relations. Or, to express it differently, to all stimuli
which are of low intensity the flat-worm gives the positive
reaction, while to stimuli which are of high intensity it gives
a negative response. This sort of behaviour will at once be
seen to be, in the long run, purposive, and is, further, of a
kind which might very well have been developed by the
action of natural selection. In the long run the planarian’s
reactions will take it away from injurious substances and
into favourable surroundings.
These results on chemicals are interesting in connection
with the work so much done in recent times on the specific
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS, 659
effests of ions and the conclusions based on very fine quanti-
tative results with chemicals. 'T'wo such series of experi-
ments as those quoted above from HCl and CuSO, indicate
what wculd be the worth of the assignment of an absolute
value for the concentration of either of these two substances
which wovld produce the positive reaction in planarians.
Such instances might be multiplied, and they serve to bring
out the fact, anparently so frequently lost sight of, that what
an organism wi'l do when stimulated is quite as much a
function of the physiological condition of the organism itself
at the time as it is of the stimulus.
A comparison of these results with those of Yerkes (: 02)
on the reactions of Gonionemus is of much interest. This
author finds that thou gh there is a well-marked and
characteristic food reaction, which is given in response to
food substances, whether in solid or liquid form, yet this
reaction cannot be induced by othor chemicals. It is stated
that a number of chemicals were tried in all concentrations
for the special purpose of determining, whether the food
reaction might not depend upon intensity rather than quality
of stimulus. ‘This was not found to be the case. We must,
then, conclude that Gonionemus 1s a stage farther along in
its psychic development than is the flat-worm, for the medusa
reacts with reference to the quality as well as to the in-
tensity and location of the stimulus, while with the flat-worm
the intensity and location of the stimulus are by far the most
important factors. It is necessary in the case of the flat-
worm, to be sure, that there be mechanical and chemical
stimuli acting together in order to produce the complex of
reflexes forming the complete food reaction, thus indicating
some relation to quality of stimulus. But for the production
of what is, in one sense, the most important phase of the re-
action, the turning towards the source of stimulation, the
quality of the stimulus is not significant.
With an understanding of the method of reaction to
localised chemical stimuli, a number of interesting special
problems present themselves. While it will not be possible
660 RAYMOND PEARL. J
to take up all of them in this paper, a few of the Bre
important ones may be considered.
One such important general question which arises is the
problem of orientation to diffusing chemicals. Do planarians
orient themselves along radial lines of diffusion and proceed
towards the centre of diffusion? It would seem chat in the
case of such a perfectly bilaterally symmetrica! organism as
Planaria, if anywhere, Loeb’s theory of orientation ought to
hold good. This theory accounts for orientation by sup-
posing that when an organism is stimulated unilaterally its
motor organs are caused to act either more strongly or more
weakly, as the case may be, on that side than on the other.
This results in bringing the lo xis of the body parallel
with the lines of action of lus; and then, since
symmetrical points on eit e body must be equally
stimulated, the organi straight line towards or
away from the sti 1gs has shown (: 01) that for
most stimuli thi rientation does not hold in the
case of the I
of the reactions of planarians to
ich has been given, it will be at once
seen that there is in this case, to some degree at least,
an orienting reaction. With weak chemical stimuli the
head turns towards the stimulus in such a way as to point
the anterior end very directly towards the source of stimula-
tion. It might be thought that this marked a pure orienta-
tion, but it must be remembered that the organisms turn the
head just as precisely towards the point from which a weak
mechanical stimulus comes. ‘The two reactions are evidently
exactly the same thing. However, a single mechanical
stimulus can hardly be considered a directive stimulus of
the sort which induces an orientation, such as, for example,
the electric current. The orientation of unicellular organisms
to the constant current is the purest type of an orienting
response, however, and the most characteristic thing about it
is that the organism, after having the anterior end turned
towards one of the poles, keeps the long axis of the
chemical stim
MOVEMENTS, BTC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 661
body parallel to the lines of action of the stimu-
lus. \This movement of the animal in a constant relation to
a orgie’ acting stimulus is, as I understand it, the funda-
mental ¢riterion of an orientation according to the theory
above mettioned. Now if we find, as has been shown above
to be the case, that the organism gives precisely the same
reaction to a chemical unilaterally applied as it does toa
single weak mechanical stimulus similarly applied, it seems
doubtful whether we can consider that there is such an
orientation in the case of the chemical, even though the head
is directed very precisely towards it. On the contrary, it
seems apparent that we are dealing here with a well co-
ordinated motor reflex : only—such as, for example, the reflex
of a frog’s hind leg, which b I Bee its foot very exactly to the
point stimulated on the side af tl
A crucial test of this poi it ay be obtained by submitting
rc
the animals to the action of som 3
known to give the positive reactio hie
only arranging the experiment so that it
large area. Under these conditions, if the organism shows
positive orientation, it ought to move along the lines of diffu-
sion straight up to the source of diffusion. ‘l’o test this matter
I constructed a trough of the form shown in Fig. 33, I.
On a plate of glass A was fastened the trough B, which was
cut froma block of paraffin. The internal dimensions of this
trough were 50mm. x 50mm. xX 5mm. Only the sides were
of paraffin, the glass plate serving as the bottom. A hollow
was cut in one end of the trough, and a glass tube D, about
4 cm. long, was fastened into it in an upright position. Then
from the point on the inside of the trough a fine needle was
thrust through the paraffin till it came out into the hollow
previously cut in the wall. ae
Fic. 45.—Diagram showing the electrotactic reaction of Planaria when
the long axis of the body i is in line with the current direction, and
the head is towards the kathode. Contracted portions are indicated
by heavy lines.
moment of making, the effect of a current of medium intensity
is to cause the gliding movement to stop. At the same time
there is a very definite contraction of the anode (head) end
of the body. As the current continues to act the specimen
begins to squirm about, and very soon gets out of line with
the current. Then the anterior end is turned towards the
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 689
kathode slowly, and this process may be continued until com-
plete reversal is brought about and the animal comes to lie
again in line with the current, but with the anterior end now
directed towards the kathode. This reversal into the usual
orientation is the typical reaction for fresh specimens at the
first trials of the current; it is shown in Fig. 46. In case the
specimens have been under the action of the current for some
time, there is no reversal of the position. The specimen
2 :
Vic. 46.—Diagram showing the electrotactic reaction of Planaria when
the long axis of the body is in line with the current direction, and
the head is towards the anode. Contracted portions are indicated
by heavy lines.
simply remains in the same position and contracts strongly at
the anode (head) end of the body.
Strong currents have the same effect as described in the
preceding experiment. Very weak currents either have no
definite effort, or else cause a slight jerking back of the head,
and turning a little to one side at the moment of making.
After the animals have become partially paralysed by the
690 RAYMOND. PEARL.
action of the current, the nature of the contractions and
relaxations of different parts of the body can be very clearly
seen, and since these are the most significant features of the
animal’s reactions to the electric current, they may be de-
scribed a little more fully. These reactions for the three
chief positions are shown in Fig. 47. The essential features
are contraction of the anode end of the body when in line
with the current, and convexity on the anode side when at
right angles. Besides this there seems to be some slight
expansion at the kathode end of specimens in line with the
current, but this appearance is not constant. Reversal of the -
current in these paralysed specimens causes contraction at
Fic. 47.—Diagram showing the contractions caused by the current with
the body in the three principal positions.
the new anode end or bending towards the new kathode. On
breaking the current the contracted portions relax.
c. Mechanism of the Reactions.—It will be seen from
the figures, and the account which has been given of the
responses to the electric current, that there is an apparent
anomaly in the behaviour. The specimen contracts always
at the anode end of the body, but apparently not on the
anode side of the body. I believe that the explanation for
this apparent difference in behaviour is to be found in the
structure of the animal, and in a peculiarity in the action of
the constant current which has been noted in another case.
When the animal is in line with the current the contraction
MOVEMENTS, BTC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 691
observed at the anode end is, as shown by the form taken by
the part reacting, a contraction of the longitudinal muscle-
fibres, while the fibres of the circular and transverse system
are relaxed. In other words, the current only affects those
fibres which bear a definite orientation with relation to direc-
tion of its flow, viz. those which are parallel with it. Now it
has been shown in an earlier part of this paper that in the
ordinary negative reaction the turning away from the stimulus
is produced by a contraction of the circular, transverse, and
dorso-ventral fibres (principally the circular) on the side
stimulated. Evidently when the animal is at right angles to
the direction of the flow of the current the only muscle-fibres
in the body whose longitudinal axes are in line with the
current are the fibres of the circular and transverse systems.
Unless it is assumed that the current acts differently in one
case from in another there is no apparent reason why, when
the animal is in the transverse position, the fibres which are
in line with the direction of the current on the anode side of
the body should not contract. If the fibres fulfilling these
conditions as to location and orientation (the circular system)
do contract, they will cause the anterior end to be turned
towards the kathode and the anode side to become convex,—
in other words, produce the actually observed result. The
fibres of the longitudinal system should not be affected, and
there is no evidence that they are. This explanation assumes
that the current produces its effect by directly causing the
contraction of properly oriented muscle-fibres, possibly, or
even probably, without relation to the stimulation of any
sense-organs of the animal. Or, to put it in another way, the
responses according to this view might not necessarily be
reactions of the organism at all, in the sense of being some-
thing that the animal does after receiving and transforming
a stimulus, but are direct effects of the stimulus acting on the
motor organs. It has doubtless occurred to the reader that
another explanation is possible for these reactions, namely,
that they are in no way essentially different from what would
be produced if the animal were given strong mechanical
692 . RAYMOND PHARN.
stimuli on those parts of the body which are nearest the anode
in the several positions. In other words, the constant current,
from the standpoint of the planarian, produces the same
effect on the anode side or end of the body that a strong
mechanical stimulus apphed in the same place would.
Which of these two views is the correct one the planarian
does not show clearly. Yet there is some inferential evidence
which makes it seem probable that the first view as to the
cause of the reaction is the correct one, viz. that the current
produces direct contractions of muscle-fibres oriented in hne
with its direction. The evidence for this view is as follows :—
(1) In the case of specimens which have been for some time
under the action of the current, and are, as has been
mentioned, almost completely paralysed, the essential features
of contraction on the anode side or end can still be pro-
duced by a fairly weak current. At the same time it takes a
very strong mechanical stimulus to get any reaction from
these pieces, indicating that their sense-organs are almost
completely paralysed, and their general sensitivity gone. If
the current acts merely as a stimulus qualitatively like
others which produce the same reactions, it is not apparent
why it should be effective in weak intensities when another
stimulus fails in strong intensity. If it acts directly on the
muscles we should expect that it would be capable of pro-
ducing an effect after the general sensory functions had been
lost. (2) The contractions produced by the current are
sharply localised, i. e. they involve only a certain definite
part of the body whether the current is strong or weak
(within certain hmits) ; whereas mechanical stimuli apphed
to the same places with an intensity sufficient to cause the
same definitive reaction will also cause a marked general
response of the whole organism. ‘This is just what would be
expected if the current affects only the muscles oriented in
line with it and lying at the anode pole of the worm. (3)
By analogy with other forms—for example, the Protozoa—it
would be expected that the current would produce some
ether effect than that of an ordinary stimulus appled at the
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 693
same point. In the case of the Infusoria the current causes
an entirely different reaction from that produced by any
other known stimulus.
For these reasons, then, I am inclined to think that im the
case of the flat-worm the current affects certain definitely
oriented muscle-fibres directly, and by this means produces in
the main the characteristic reactions. That the current does
not also stimulate the sense-organs, and so act like other
stimuli applied to the same places, | am not prepared to say,
but it seems probable that the phenomena observed are not
primarily caused by such action.
It has been brought out by inference that the cilia play
no part in the electrotactic reaction of planarians. This is
the true state of the case. The current in any intensity
sufficient to cause the definite reactions stops immediately, so
far as I have been able to observe, all ciliary movement. The
evidence for this is twofold. First, all gliding movement
stops in effective currents; and second, by direct observation
of specimens crawling ventral side up on the surface film no
ciliary currents can be observed while the electric current
acts. This result is of interest in connection with the
reactions of the rhabdocele Stenostoma leucops, O.
Schm. This form, which normally moves freely through the
water by the activity of its cilia, reacts to the electric current
in essentially the same way as do the Infusoria (cf. Pearl, : 00).
That is to say, the cilia on the kathode half of the body take
a reverse position when the current is made, and their effective
stroke is towards the anterior end. The different relations of
the cilia in different positions of the body are shown in
Fig. 48. This relation of the ciliary beat, coupled with the
form of the body, causes, as a mechanical necessity (cf.
Ludloff, 95), the animal to orient with the anterior end
towards the kathode. This method of reaction of Stenostoma
I worked out by precisely the same methods as I used in a
previous study of the electrotaxis of the Infusoria (: 00).
This reversal of the position of the ciha as a result of the
action of the current has hitherto been observed only in
694 RAYMOND PEARL.
the Infusoria, and to find the same thing in a multicellular
organism is a matter of considerable interest. It is out-
side the scope of the present paper to discuss the relation
of this result to current theories of electrotaxis, as I hope
to be able to do in a Jater paper, but it may be said that
this furnishes another strong piece of evidence that in the
case of these lower organisms the current does not cause the
observed reactions in any way comparable to that in which a
mechanical stimulus causes a reaction, 1. e. by furnishing a
certain “ > On the contrary, the current acts as
a physical force on a structure organised in a certain way.
Experiments on the electrotactic reaction of cut pieces of
sensation.’
a c b
Fic. 48.—Diagram showing the electrotactic reaction of the rhabdocele,
Stenostoma leucops, O. Schm.
planarians have been tried in considerable numbers, but with,
on the whole, unsatisfactory results. Anterior pieces result-
ing from transverse cuts are the only ones from which I have
been able to obtain any constant results. Such pieces react
like the normal animal in every way. Posterior pieces from
transverse cuts show the contractions on the anode side and
ends in a slight degree, but there is no constant production
of orientation. Specimens slit longitudinally in the middle
line from the posterior end nearly to the head react
essentially like a normal specimen, although much more
weakly, I have observed in one case fairly precise orienta-
tions of such a specimen, Irom specimens shit longitudinally
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS, 695
in the middle line from in front backwards I have never been
able to obtain any definite results. They simply squirm
about in an aimless way for a moment when the current is
made and then become quiet, and remain so while the current
passes. ‘The direction in which the current is flowing makes
no difference m their behaviour. All operated specimens
become very quickly paralysed by the current.
d. Summary.—tThe constant current very quickly para-
lyses planarians. Its specific effect 1s to cause a contraction
of the anode side or end of the body. This’ produces in the
case of fresh specimens a well-defined orientation, with the
anterior end towards the kathode. All progressive move-
ment after the making of an effective current is by the crawl-
ing method, the cilia being stopped or very greatly slowed
in their beat. The electrotactic reaction, so far as the attain-
ment of orientation is concerned, is essentially the same as
the negative reaction to mechanical stimuli. In the rhab-
doceele Stenostoma leucops there is found to occur a
reversal of the cia on the kathode half of the body, such as
occurs in the case of the Infusoria.
V. Reaction to Desiccation.
A series of experiments was performed to determine the
reactions of the animal on drying. This is an environmental
condition which planarians probably have had to meet with
relative frequency in the course of their history as a species,
and it is a matter of interest to determine whether they have
any method of reacting which protects them from it.
Experiments were first performed in the following
manner :—Specimens were taken from the aquarium dish on
the point of a scalpel or a spatula, and lightly touched to a
filter-paper for a moment to remove any adherent water, and
then laid upon a dry surface—either glass or paper. The
behaviour was usually as follows :—The worm would curl up
closely and thrust the head under the body, as shown im
Fig. 49. The purpose of their behaviour seems to be to get
the body into as small space as possible, and especially to keep
696 RAYMOND PEARL.
the head from drying. At fairly frequent intervals the
animal straightens out and extends the head in front as far
as possible, and makes ‘‘ feeling” movements. It is then
withdrawn, and the animal curls up again. After the drying
has proceeded for some time the most characteristic feature
of the whole reaction appears. ‘This is a lengthening of the
posterior part of the body to its fullest extent. The posterior
end then attaches itself to the surface, and strong waves of
contraction, ike those in the crawling movement, pass over
the body from the posterior end forward. No progressive
movement is made, but backward crawling is evidently
attempted, and is only prevented by the dry surface which
the animalis on. There may be considerable variation in the
first part of the reaction with regard to the curling up; this
may appear or may not, but the attempted backward crawl-
Fic. 49.—Diagram showing the reaction of Planaria to desiccation.
ing movement of the posterior part of the body I have found
to be a constant feature in the experiments which I have
performed. When the dorsal surface of the worm becomes
dry all movement ceases. If quickly put back into the water
the worm will usually recover completely, even though all
movement has ceased in the air.
If the worm is put on a slide in the centre of a small area
which has been wet, but on which there is no standing water,
it will squirm about and extend the head frequently, as im
the last experiment. If the head goes outside the wet area
it is very quickly jerked back, and the specimen gives the
negative reaction, i.e. turns away from the side stimulated.
The attempted backward crawling occurs in this case just as
in the others, a short time before the dorsal surface dries off.
It is to be noted that there is never any actual progressive
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 697
movement of a specimen in the air. If a specimen is placed
on very wet filter-paper it is not able to progress unless
water is kept constantly dropping on it from above, so that it
is at any time surrounded by a layer of water. On account
of this lack of ability to move when out of water, there is no
true hydrotaxis in the sense of movement towards water.
As has been mentioned before, specimens placed on a dry
surface dorsal side down do not show the righting reaction.
To sum up, it is found that planarians, when removed
from the water and subjected to a process of drying, are
unable to make progressive movements. At a certain stage
in the drying process they attempt to crawl backwards—a
form of movement which, under certain circumstances, might
get the animal back into water. On meeting a dry surface
with the anterior end the animals give a well-marked negative
reaction. The animal does not give the righting reaction on
being inverted on a dry surface.
On the whole, the general behaviour when subjected to
drying is purposeful; that is, it would tend to prevent the
animal ever becoming dried up under natural conditions.
There is nothing in the behaviour of planarians to indicate
how the change from aquatic to terrestrial life could be
brought about. The fresh-water Triclads, so far as I have
observed them, never leave the water and crawl up into the
air above the surface film as some other forms do.
VI. Rheotaxis.
A large number of experiments were performed early in
the course of the work with various sorts of devices to deter-
mine whether the animal showed any distinct reaction to
currents in the water, but without success. Streams of water
from a pipette, currents made by filling the tube of the
diffusion apparatus described above (pp. 661, 662) with water
and blowing into it, and other methods gave no results. If the
currents were made with sufficient force to threaten dislodg-
ment of the animal from its hold on the bottom it would stop
moving and contract longitudinally, and thus attach itself
698 RAYMOND PEARL.
more firmly to the substrate. Weaker currents caused no
effect whatever. I was inclined to believe that the longitu-
dinal contraction and the gripping of the bottom were the
only rheotactic reactions which the organism exhibited. It
was found later, however, that there was a very precise
rheotactic reaction of a different character. In the course
of the experiments on reactions to localised chemical stimuli
by the capillary tube method, it was discovered that by using
a tube with a relatively large opening (from } to } mm. in
diameter) and lettmmg@ the ordinary tap-water in which the
animals were flow out of it, by its own weight, a current of
just the right intensity to cause a positive reaction could be
produced. The animals would turn very sharply towards the
source of such a current, the reaction being evidently the
same as that given to other weak stimuli (chemical and
mechanical). This reaction is localised in the same way as
the usual positive reaction. It is given only when the current
is directed against the head or anterior part of the body.
It is thus seen that the planarian is positively rheotactic to
very weak currents, the form of the reaction being precisely
the same as that given to other weak stimuli. It seems very
doubtful if this reaction is of any importance in the normal
activity of the animal.
a. GENERAL SUMMARY AND Discussion or RESULTS.
As was stated earlier in the paper, the problem with which
this study deals is the analysis of the behaviour of the
common fresh-water planarian. The movements and reac-
tions to all the more important stimuli, with the exception of
light and heat, have been described and analysed into their
component factors in the body of the paper. It is beheved
that it is of the greatest importance to have as complete and
detailed an account of the various activities as possible, and
as a consequence full details have been given in the case of
each subject treated. Since this method of treatment
necessarily makes the account of considerable length, it has
a tendency to obscure the general and significant results in a
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 699
mass of detail. It is desirable, then, to state clearly at the
end the important general facts which have been brought out
by this study, and to discuss to some extent their significance.
In this place I shall state the results in a categorical manner,
making no attempt to indicate the evidence on which the
conclusions are based. This will avoid needless repetition.
1. The locomotor movements of Planaria are of two sorts,
oliding and crawling. The ghding movement is produced
by the beating of the cilia on the ventral surface of the
organism. It is by far the most usual method of locomotion.
For its production it is necessary that there be a layer of
sticky, mucous slime between the ventral surface of the body
and the substrate. In this slimy secretion the cilia beat and
so propel the animal (cf. pp. 544 and 545). The organism
never moyes freely through the water without some sort of
mechanical support. The rate of the gliding is changed by
the action of various agents, such as light, chemicals, elec-
tricity, etc. Its direction is always forward.
The crawling movement is produced by strong longitudinal
waves of muscular contraction passing over the body from
the anterior to the posterior end. It is more rapid in rate
than the gliding. It appears only after strong stimulation
of the organism, and its purpose is evidently to get the
animal quickly away from harmful stimuli. Its direction
may be either forward or backward.
Periods of movement alternate with periods of rest in the
course of the animal’s daily activity. When at rest the flat-
worm is in a condition of relaxation and generally lowered
tonus, corresponding to the condition of a higher organism
in sleep. The causes which induce the coming to rest are—
(a) a more or less fatigued condition of the organism. This
is the primary cause ; without it the other causes are ineffec-
tive. (b) A relatively low intensity of light. (c) Roughness of
the substrate. This brings the body into a position such that
its different parts form angles with one another, and causes
the animal to come to rest as the result of a reaction which
I have called goniotaxis (p. 562). (d) Certain chemical con-
700 RAYMOND PEARL.
ditions. Asa result of the action of some one or all of these
above-mentioned factors, collections or groups of planarians
are frequently formed.
Planarians which have been injured by operative procedure
move comparatively little durimg the course of regeneration,
thus showing a sort of regulation or correlation between
behaviour and morphogenetic processes (pp. 573, 574).
2. There are two principal qualhtatively different reactions
to stimuli, the positive and negative reactions.
The negative reaction is given in response to strong’
unilateral stimulation of the anterior portion of the body.
It consists essentially im a turning of the head away from
the side stimulated. It is brought about by the extension of
the body on the side stimulated. This extension is produced
by a contraction of the circular, dorso-ventral, and transverse
systems of muscle-fibres. The purpose of the negative
reaction is evidently to get the organism away from harmful
stimuli.
The positive reaction is given only in response to weak uni-
lateral stimulation of the anterior portion of the body. It is
essentially a turning of the head towards the source of the
stimulus. This reaction is one of considerable precision,
bringing the anterior end into such a position that it points in
most cases exactly towards the source of the stimulus. The
turning is brought about by the contraction of the longi-
tydinal muscle-fibres of the side stimulated. The evident
purpose of the positive reaction is to get the animal into
regions of beneficial stimuh.
3. Whether the negative or the positive reaction shall be
siven in response to a particular stimulus depends primarily
on the intensity of the stimulus, and secondarily on its loca-
tion. Neither reaction is given unless some part of the body
in front of the pharyngeal region is stimulated. The negative
reaction is given only in response to stimuli above a
certain intensity (strong stimuli). ‘This relation between
intensity of stimulus and form of reaction holds for both
mechanical and chemical stimuli.
MOVEMENTS, BTC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 701
4. The reactions of Planaria to a variety of chemicals, in-
cluding representatives of several of the most important
chemical groups, were studied. It was found that to a weak
solution of any substance, regardless of its chemical composi-
tion, the organism gave a positive reaction identical with the
positive reaction to mechanical stimuli. To strong solutions
of the same substances (with a single exception, see p. 657)
the organisms responded by a negative reaction identical with
that caused by strong mechanical stimuli.
Planaria does not orient itself to a diffusing chemical in
such a way that the longitudinal axis of the body is parallel
to the lines of diffusing ions. Its reactions to chemicals are
motor reflexes identical with those to mechanical stimuli. The
positive reaction is an orienting reaction in the sense that it
directs the anterior end of the body towards the source of the
stimulus with considerable precision, but it does not bring
about an orientation of the sort defined above.
5. Several important features in the normal behaviour of
the flat-worm are found upon analysis to have their explana-
tion in the positive and negative reactions to mechanical and
chemical stimuli.
The method by which the organism gets its food is simply
a special case of the positive reaction. From substances
which serve as food for the planarians, various juices diffuse
into the surrounding water. When the planarian meets any
of these diffusing substances it gives the positive reaction,—
that is, turns in the direction from which the stimulus comes.
The food substance acts as a weak chemical stimulus, to
which the animal reacts in the same way as to all other weak
chemicals.
The direction of the planarian’s movement, and its behaviour
with reference to obstacles in its path, are usually deter-
mined by its reactions to mechanical stimuli.
The behaviour of the organism with reference to the
surface film is determined by its reactions to mechanical
stimuli.
6. Strong stimulation—either mechanical or chemical—of
voL. 46, parr 4.—NEW SERIES. Z%
702 RAYMOND PEARL.
the posterior portions of the body induces the crawling move-
ment. This is to be regarded as the specific reaction of this
portion of the body. Weak stimulation of the same region
causes local contraction at the poimt stimulated in the case of
mechanical stimuli, while weak chemical stimuli applied to
this region are ineffective.
7. The ventral surface of the body of Planaria is strongly
positively thigmotactic, and the dorsal surface is negatively
thigmotactie.
8. When the organism is placed in an inverted position it
performs the righting reaction. This reaction consists in a
turning of successive parts of the body about the longitudinal
axis through 180°. During the process the animal takes the
form of a spiral. The anterior end is brought into the up-
right position first. On analysis the righting reaction is
found to be a special case of the reaction to strong stimuli
(the negative reaction). It is brought about by an extension
of one side of the body, while the other side maintains its
original length (pp. 676—679). 'The reaction is given when-
ever the ventral surface is removed from a solid or the surface
film of the water.
9. To the constant electric current Planaria reacts by
turning the anterior end towards the kathode. Complete
orientation and movement towards the kathode may occur.
The turning towards the kathode is brought about by an
extension of the anode side of the body. The current causes
a contraction of muscular elements whose long axes are
parallel to the direction of the current (pp. 690—693). The
current very quickly paralyses planarians on which it acts.
The rhabdocele Stenostoma leucops orients to the
current with the anterior end towards the kathode, and
moves towards this pole. ‘This orientation is brought about
by changes in the positions and consequent effective beat of
the cilia, exactly like those which occur in the case of the
ciliate Infusoria. Cilia, on the portions of the body directed
towards the kathode pole, take on reversed positions.
10. All the normal reactions to stimuli are of the nature of
MOVEMENTS, BTC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 708
reflexes, more or less complex. What the animal will do
after a given stimulus, or in a given situation, can be predicted
with reasonable certainty. There is, however, some variation
in the behaviour, depending on the physiological or tonic
condition of the individual at the time of stimulation. Thus
a stimulus sufficiently weak to induce the positive reaction in
one specimen may cause the negative reaction in another; or
at different times the same individual may show different re-
actions—either the positive or negative—to the same stimulus.
11. Psychological Position of Planaria.—The objec-
tive psychological position of any organism is evidently deter-
mined by the relative simplicity or complexity of what it
does. With a view of determining what the position of
Planaria in the psychological scale is, it may be well to
make a catalogue of the things which it does in the course
of its ordinary existence.
The animal performs the following acts:
a. It moves progressively by two methods, a ciliary motion
and a muscular motion.
b. It turns, by a complex of simple reflex acts, towards all
weak stimuli investigated.
c. It turns, by another set of simple reflex acts, away from
all strong stimuli investigated.
d. It comes to rest in certain definite environmental
situations.
e. When stimulated in a certain way it extends the pharynx
and feeds.
f. When its ventral surface is removed from contact with
a solid body (or the surface film), a reflex of essentially the
same character as that of c brings this surface again into
contact with the solid.
From these essential factors is composed a behaviour
whose complexity one has only to study to realise.
The behaviour is thus seen to be, in the main, what may
be characterised as reflex. It 1s very simple to say that an
animal’s activity is composed of a series of invariable reflex
acts in response to stimuli, but I doubt whether the full
704 RAYMOND PEAR.
significance of such a condition is always realised. It implies
that the animal as an individual “ does” nothing in the sense
that a man “does” things. It is moved about from place to
place by its locomotor organs; it is put mto certain definite
and invariable relations to its surroundings by its reflex
mechanisms. Considered as a whole, such an organism is a
sort of shell to hold a series of mechanisms, each of which is
independently capable of doing a certain thing, and in the
doing produces some effect on the shell as a whole. We may
perhaps get a clearer picture of what such a reflex existence
means by considering for a moment what would be the effect
if all a man’s activities were composed of invariable reflexes,
to be set off by the appropriate stimuh. Under such circum-
stances, whenever a man saw or smelled food he would have
to go to it and eat it. Whenever anything touched him he
would have to move in a new direction very closely related
to the position of the object which touched him. Whenever
he touched water he would have to take a bath, or perhaps
drink till he could hold no more. During the day he would
have to move always in a definite direction with reference to
the sun, and so on ad infinitum. All he did would be
definitely fixed and, in a sense, predetermined by the things
about him.
It is apparent that the behaviour of Planaria is not thus
entirely and purely reflex, because there is a certain amount
of variation in it. As has been brought out in several places
in the body of the paper, and in paragraph 10 of these
conclusions, this variation in the behaviour is the result of
the physiological condition of the individual. ‘To put this in
a more concrete form, we may say that a fatigued animal
or an animal in a state of great excitation does not always
react to a certain stimulus by the same set of reflexes as that
by which a normal animal would react. Furthermore, there
is a variation in the intensity of the negative reaction
dependent upon the intensity of the stimulus producing it.
Another point in which the reactions of Planaria differ
from what would obtain in the case of an organism whose
MOVEMENTS, EIC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS, 705
behaviour was composed of invariable reflexes is found in the
behaviour following repeated strong stimuli apphed to the
anterior end (vide pp. 580, 581). In this case the organism
shows an evident modifiability in reaction, for after giving
for some time the ordinary negative reaction, and not thereby
getting away from the stimulus, it finally turns directly
towards the source of the stimulus. Again, in the righting
reactions of pieces of the body we see entirely new forms of
reaction appearing (pp. 680—683).
In order to give a concrete idea of the psychological
position of Planaria it may be well to present in parallel
columns the principal factors which make for simplicity in
the behaviour on the one hand, and for complexity on the
other hand.
Factors which tend to make Factors which tend to make
the Behaviour Simple. the Behaviour Complex.
A. -ssential reflex character at the A’. Comparatively large number of
basis of all the reactions, qualitatively different general
reactions.
B. General lack of modifiability of B’. Marked qualitatively different re-
reactions. actions to differing intensities of
stimulus.
C. Comparatively small number of C’. Definite relations of reactions to
qualitatively different reflexes location of stimulus.
composing the general reac-
tions.
D’. Rather close dependence of reac-
tions on the physiological condi-
tion of the individual. This brings
about variation in the reactions.
The behaviour of Planaria is evidently much more com-
plex than that of the Infusoria, as described by Jennings
(loc. cit.). In the case of the Infusoria, all the factors A’, B’,
C’, D’, which make the behaviour of Planaria so complicated,
are nearly or quite absent; and in respect to C these organ-
isms are at a much lower stage than Planaria. The
Infusoria have practically but one purely reflex reaction to
nearly all stimuli, and this reaction is not localised with
706 RAYMOND PEARL.
reference to the location of the stimulus. Again, the Infu-
soria do not show qualitatively different reactions to differing
intensities of stimuli, as does Planaria to a marked degree.
We thus see that Planaria stands considerably higher in
the psychological scale than the Infusoria, and that the
development is taking place along two main lines: (a) the
higher organism reacts differentially with reference to the
location and intensity of the stimulus; and (b) the physio-
logical balance in the higher organism is much more deli-
cately adjusted than in the lower, and as a consequence we
see much more variation in the physiological condition.
These variations in the physiological condition bring about
variability in the reactions.
In the case of the ctenophore Mnemiopsis Leidyi we
have an intermediate stage between the Infusoria and
Planaria. Here the animal reacts with reference to the
position, but not the intensity of the stimulus. This condi-
tion, in which an organism reacts with relation to the position
of a stimulus, and not to its intensity, must be for the mdi-
vidual a precarious one, because the animal must either go
towards or away from all stimuli alike, whether good or
harmful. Chances are theoretically equal that after each
stimulus it may get a toothsome morsel of food, or, on the
contrary, serve in that capacity itself. Further development
beyond the point in the behaviour series where Planaria
stands must be in the line of further differential reactions
with reference to quality of stimulus. A beginning along
this line is made by the planarian, and the process is carried
a step farther in the case of Gonionemus, as recently
described by Yerkes (loc. cit.).
12. Relation of Behaviour and Structure.—tThe reac-
tions of organisms are evidently, in any case, very closely de-
pendent on the structural relations of the given organism, and
on the conditions under which it lives, i.e. its environment
in the broadest sense. ‘Thus we find the asymmetrical Infu-
soria, Which live freely in the water and move about by means
of cilia, all reacting in the same way, and the determinative
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 707
factor in the reaction is the asymmetry of the body (cf.
Jennings, :00). Now Jennings has further found! that
certain rotifers, which live freely in the water and move
about by the activity of cilia in a similar way, and further-
more are asymmetrical in fundamentally the same way that
the Infusoria are, react in essentially the same manner as do
the Infusoria. Similarly, I believe that the general reactions
method of the planarians may be found to be in the main the
method by which all organisms presenting the same general
structural relations and mode of life react. Only one
example on which this conviction is based may be given
here. In the case of such fresh-water molluscs as Physa it
is apparent that the actual locomotor and sensory organisa-
tion is symmetrical in form, and furthermore these forms live
in fresh water on the surface of solid bodies just as do
planarians. Now I have found, in a series of observations
not yet published, that in the case of several of these molluscs
the fundamental scheme of reaction is like that in the
planarian. They react in the same way with reference to
the location and intensity of the stimulus, and these are the
fundamental things. In fact, the general behaviour is
strikingly alike in the two widely separated groups.
13. Purposive Character of Reflexes.—A fact which
is strongly impressed on one working on the behaviour of an
organism whose activities are largely reflex is the purposive
character of these reflexes. They are so adjusted that in the
long run they keep the animal out of danger, and get it into
favourable conditions. Inthe flat-worm these two things are
very well done in general by the negative and_ positive
reactions. Of these two reactions it 1s easy to see that the
positive is the more highly developed, in particular in the
fact that it is much more precisely localised with reference to
the position of the stimulus. We can see a reason for this in
the fact that under the conditions of the planarian’s life the
1 Complete observations not yet published. For preliminary account see
‘Science,’ N. S., vol. xv, pp. 524 and 525; and Jennings, : 01, in bibliography
at the end of this paper.
708 RAYMOND PEARL.
getting of food is of far more importance in the struggle for
existence than the avoidance of danger. This point has,
however, been discussed earlier in the paper, and need not
detain us here. The real problem is presented in the attempt
to discover how any of the purposive reflex acts in the
organisms arose. I see no reason for denying that many of
them—such as, for example, the positive reaction which gets
the animal its food—were developed by natural selection.
There are other evidently purposeful reactions, however, with
whose development it hardly seems as if natural selection
could have had anything to do, since they cannot themselves
be of selective value. This point has been well brought out
in a recent paper by Morgan (:02, p. 281). I think a pos-
sible explanation of some of these may be found in their
analysis into component factors, when it may appear that
only a very few simple reflexes had to be formed by natural
selection, and then all the reactions are built up from these.
An example will make my meaning clearer. In the righting
reaction of the planarian we have a fairly complex reaction
which is evidently immediately purposeful. Yet we find on
analysis that this reaction is at bottom nothing but a slight
modification of the ordinary negative reaction, which might
very well have been developed by natural selection. And
thus it is with other reactions and pieces of behaviour. They
are for the most part built up’from a very few simple
purposive reflexes. If we can get them subdivided and
spread out, as it were, so that we can see what goes to
compose them, we may find that our problem has diminished
very much, and we shall have to deal with only a few factors
where before there appeared to be many.
A. difficult problem in purposeful behaviour presents itself
when we find that new methods of reaction appear at once if
the usual reaction is prevented. The best examples of this
are found in the righting reaction of cut pieces of planarians.
Here we find pieces of the body, in which the normal
mechanism of the reaction has been destroyed, immediately
reaching a certain end (the righting) by a method differing
MOVEMENTS, ETC., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 709
entirely from any that planarians ever used before to attain
the same end, so far as we have evidence. These phenomena
have a considerable resemblance to such phenomena as the
well-known regeneration of the lens from the iris in some
Amphibia. It is not easy to see how such behaviour comes
about, and natural selection helps us very little. The matter
belongs apparently to the same class of phenomena as
morphological regulations, and probably has ultimately the
same explanation. What this explanation is we do not know.
14. Functions of the Nervous System.—The most im-
portant function of the brain is the preservation of the tonus
of the organism. After its removal the general tonus rapidly
diminishes, and on this account the positive reaction—which
depends rather closely on the physiological condition
be obtaimed only with great difficulty in such decapitated
Can
specimens. There is no evidence of the presence of special
centres in the brain. The nervous system, as a whole, has
its main function in the rapid conduction of impulses.
15. Subjective Psychic Attributes.—One of the
principal questions which forever recurs with regard to work
on animal behaviour is, does the animal possess conscious-
ness? Now although it has been shown what the component
parts of the activities of the planarian are, yet it cannot be
said, as it seems to me, that the planarian does not, or, on the
other hand, that it does, possess consciousness. All that any
such an organism ever has done in the past, or ever will do
in the future, cannot tell us whether it was conscious in the
doing or not. Any “ objective criterion” of consciousness
does not exist. Furthermore, whether consciousness is or is
not present in any given case is not, in any event, the greatest
concern of the physiologist, who rests content with the objec-
tive explanation of how results are brought about, regardless
of what the animal is thinking: about the matter. On this
subject Claparéde (: 01, p. 24), in concluding an interesting
and valuable discussion, has said, “A la question ; les
animaux sont-ils conscients ? la physiologie—et méme la
psychologie en tant que cette science est explicative—doivent
710 RAYMOND PEARL,
done répondre non seulement, ‘Je Vignore, mais encore,
‘Peu m’importe’!” With this standpoimt I am in thorough
accord.
H. List or LITERATURE.
BarpeEen, C. R. :01.—‘*On the Physiology of the Planaria maculata,
with Hspecial Reference to the Phenomena of Regeneration,” ‘ Amer.
Journ. Physiol.,’ vol. v, pp. 1—55.
BarpegEn, ©. R. : 01, a—* The Funetion of the Brain in Planaria
maculata,” ibid., vol. v, pp. 175—179.
Cuicukorr, G. D. ’92.—‘‘* Recherches sur les Dendrocceles d’eau douce
(Triclades),” ‘ Arch. de Biol.,’ t. xii, pp. 435—-568, pls. xv—xx.
Cuitp, C. M. :01.—“'The Habits and Natural History of Stichostemma,”
‘Amer. Nat.,’ vol. xxxv, pp. 975—1006.
CLAPAREDE, HE. :01.—‘‘ Les Animaux sont-ils Conscients ? ”’ ‘ Rev. Philos.,’
t. li, pp. 481—498.
Duyne, J. van. °96.—‘ Ueber die Heteromorphose bei Planarien,” ‘ Arch.
f. d. ges. Physiol.,’ Bd. lxiv, pp. 569—574, pl. x.
Franpsen, P. :91.—‘‘ Studies on the Keactions of Limax maximus to
Directive Stimuli,” ‘Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci.,’ vol. xxxvii, pp.
185 —227.
GamBLzE, F. W. ’93.— Contributions to a Knowledge of British Marine
Turbellaria,’ ‘Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.,’ vol. xxxiv, pp. 433—528,
pls. xxxix—xli.
Hessz, R. ’97.—“ Untersuchungen iiber die Organe der Lichtempfindung
bei niederen Thieren: II, Die Augen der Plathelminthen, insonderheit
der tricladen Turbellarien,” ‘ Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool.,’ Bd. Ixii, pp. 527—
582, Taf. xxvii and xxvill.
Jenninoes, H. S. ’97.—*Studies on Reactions to Stimuli in Unicellular
Organisms: I, Reactions to Chemical, Osmotic, and Mechanical Stimuli
in the Ciliate Infusoria,” ‘ Journ. Physiol.,’ vol. xxi, pp. 259—322.
Jennines, H. 8S. ’99.—* Studies on Reactions to Stimuli in Unicellular
Organisms : II, The Mechanism of the Motor Reactions of Paramecium,”
‘Amer. Journ. Physiol.,’ vol. ii, pp. 311—341.
Jennines, H.S. 799, a—* Studies on Reactions to Stimuli in Unicellular
Organisms: ILI, Reactions to Localised Stimuli in Spirostomum and
Stentor,” ‘ Amer. Nat.,’ vol. xxxiii, pp. 873—389.
Jenninos, H.S. 799, d.—‘‘ Studies on Reactions to Stimuli in Unicellular
Organisms: 1V, Laws of Chemotaxis in Paramecium,” ‘ Amer. Journ.
Physiol.,’ vol. ii, pp. 855—379.
MOVEMENTS, E'C., OF FRESH-WATER PLANARIANS. 711
Jennines, H.S. 99, e.—‘‘The Psychology of a Protozoan,’ ‘Amer. Journ.
Psychol.,’ vol. x, pp. 503—515.
Jennines, H.S. :00.—“ “On the Notochord of Cephalodiscus,” ‘Zool.
Anz.,’ No. 545, 1897.
9. is *©On the Origin of Vertebrate Notochord and Pha-
ryngeal Clefts,” ‘ Rep. Brit. Assoc.,’ Sept., 1898.
10. On Further Anat. and Budding Processes of
Cephalodiscus,” ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinb.,’
vol. xxxix, pt. il, No. 17.
11.
a “Qn the Diplochorda,” part ui, ‘Q. J. M. S.,’
vol. xliii, pt. il.
DESCRIPTION OF PLATES 32 & 33,
Illustrating Mr. A. T. Masterman’s paper “On the
Diplochorda.”’
Fies. 1—5.—Selected sections (1, 3, 5, 7, 15) from a longitudinal sagittal
series through Cephalodiscus dodecalophus (Zeiss, obj. 7, eyep. 1).
Fies. 6—8.—Selected sections (1, 4, 6) from a transverse series through
Cephalodiscus dodecalophus (Zeiss, obj. 7, eyep. 1).
Fic. 9.—A semi-diagrammatic right half of a polyp.
o* jay CME '
all
le
‘ ' i /
7 = ayer | :
= Ls Meee
a = ‘ i Re | a
me “s ' a
Soe aa
~ ss : : on ks
“ad Oe aG
ITY
____UNIVERs
left collar cavity.
right glomer Was.
‘
4 e ' ! Li 7 a E 2
perveardial sae. : sub-neurad gland rig ht collar cary. et
heart. WUPY RUCALS. \
dorsal blood sinus
ad rf
media dorsal - >
MEE ERLEPY : ;
“left collar car ity.
ae sub-neural gland. vyontnal blood sinus
™)\ peripharyngea witty glomerulus.
vA \
roove
I \
ventral blood. sinus pertcar dial sac.
oral grooves and glomerulus.
Lametlov
stomach
\ \ ectodermal pw.
\
\ sub-neuratl gland,
Q7ULS. 2
dorsal blood sinus.
vj Pi
( \
dorsal groove of phany ne.
\ pleurochord.
Masterman del
dors av
%) e *
a)
groove
g lands
—=— ET EA ay a arr ss
\ e
NAL 5
Pp erwhar oy Tuy Ca)
groove.
left canal...
from dorsal sinus.
=
'
'
'
!
left glomerulas.
.
}
|
Huth, Lith London
ie
Lipsy ay
OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS —
*
«
——*
-
\
-
.
~
= e
- : ‘
i ‘
~
.
i
’
'
é
‘
r
.
+ ; -
' \
* ‘ :
.
* ~
‘ J
me ~
®
'
«
.
Quant Fourn, Mucr Sei, Vt LEN SIL, 33.
right pre-oral cana.
, f central nerve mass.
\ periwardial sac.
an ventrat blood
S 272225".
Wag — coniral nerve mass.
_. dorsal blood sinus.
Masterman del, 8. Huth, Lit? London.
LIBRAR
OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS
| |
:
;
;
;
»
=
-
~
'
‘|
e .
*
* id
e° 6
2 ,
‘ _
.
,
-
. ;
‘
. a 4
: ~
HYPURGON SKEATI. 729
oa Hypurgon Skeati, a New Genus and Species
of Compound Ascidians.'
By
Igerna B. J. Sollas, B.Sc.Lond.,
Bathurst Student of Newnham College.
With Plates 34 and 35.
Amone the marine sponges from the Malay Peninsula
collected by Mr. R. Evans, of Oxford, at present Curator
of the Government Museum in Georgetown, Demerara, and
very kindly handed over to me by Dr. Harmer for description,
there were included two specimens of the new genus of
Synascida Didemnida, which I have endeavoured to describe
below.
The locality named on the collector’s label in the case of
each of the two specimens is Pulau Bidang.
The association of the Tunicate with a sponge was merely
fortuitous, and due solely to participation in the same surface
of support.
The colony forms a thin sheet, little over 1 mm. in thick-
ness, adherent to the substratum. The colour in spirit is a
dirty yellowish brown.
The appearance of the colony when examined by reflected
light under a low power of a binocular microscope is repre-
11 take the Greek imovpydc, and by lengthening the 6 get iroupydy,
meaning a place where things are made serviceable.
730 IGERNA B. J. SOLLAS.
sented in Pl. 34, fig. 2. This external view shows at once
the character to which the generic name alludes, namely, the
presence in the test of numerous ovoid fecal pellets. These
are seen through the transparent substance of the test, and
now appear of an opaque cream-white colour. Clusters of
calcareous asters (fig. 3) mark out the oral siphons, since
they make a conspicuous snow-white patch around each
siphonal aperture. These white spots are visible also with
the naked eye.
The arrangement of the ascidiozoids is irregular. A large
number of them share the same atrium, the atria being
shallow but extensive cavities with but few and small
siphons. The siphons are not visible in surface view, but in
section it is seen that their lps are formed of transparent
test-tissue destitute of spicules.
The bulk of the common test, which consists of actual
tunicin, is small, its substance being excavated by numerous
oval spaces, in which the fecal pellets he. To reach this
position the pellets must, after being ejected into the atrium,
sink through the excessively thin epithelial wall of that
cavity. The cellular elements in the test are of the usual
types; bladder-cells are specially abundant near both upper
and under surfaces, and round the oral siphons. Spicules
occur in small numbers, chiefly aggregated round the oral
siphons and in the neighbourhood of the branchial sac.
They may be isolated or packed in dense clusters (Pl. 34,
fie. 3). Finally the renal vesicles, described presently, are to
be reckoned among the structures included in the test. The
ascidiozoids, as is common among Didemnida, have a sharp
constriction between the branchial region of the body and
the abdomen.
The number of lobes round the oral siphons varies from
four to six. The tentacles are twenty-four in number ;
twelve long ones alternate with twelve short. The branchial
sac has four rows of five stigmata on each side. Connectives
(Hancock; trabecule, Yves Delage) are absent. The
dorsal languets are long and median in position, ‘The sub-
HYPURGON SKEATI. 731
neural gland has a simple opening with a swollen lower lip
(Gie.4, d.t.), ”-
Through the narrow aperture of communication between
the two regions of the body the esophagus descends to open
into the stomach, while the intestine passes upwards into the
rectum, which lies above the constriction, so that the anal
opening is close to the base of the branchial chamber.
The walls of the stomach are raised up round the termina-
tion of the cesophagus; or, in other words, the cesophagus
has its opening deep in the cavity of the stomach; the ter-
minal part of the cesophagus is richly ciliated. ‘The intestine
of a young bud is frequently found attached at both ends to
the cesophagus, to which it owes its origin. When this is
the case the thoracic portion of the same bud is to be seen
lying in the test at the opposite side of the cesophagus. The
budding is thus of the type known as pyloric (Giard),
and found among Didemnide in the tribe Didemnine (Y.
Delage).
The walls of the stomach are smooth; seen en face from
the outside they show a beautiful reticulum formed of the
more deeply staining protoplasm which surrounds and con-
nects the nuclei of the cells of the gastric epithelium.
The intestine as it leaves the stomach is richly ciliated; in
passing thence to the anus its walls become continually
thinner, the walls of the rectum being almost membranous.
The anus has thickened lips. The alimentary canal is bathed
by blood-sinuses along its whole course.
The heart in its pericardium runs more or less vertically
between the upper and lower walls of the abdominal
cavity. Its lower end abuts against and sends a large vessel
into a prominence of the test, the sides of which are covered
by a patch of specially large cells of the mantle which form
the glandular part of the renal organ (r. gl., figs. 5 and 7).
The excreta of these glandular cells appear to be picked up
by wandering cells—presumably corpuscles of the blood con-
tained in neighbouring vessels or sinuses. These cells would
then migrate into the test, carrying their burden with them.
fan IGERNA B. J. SOLLAS.
Large numbers of vesicular cells containing concretions are
to be found embedded on each of the above-mentioned
prominences of the test, while in older kidneys there may be
a relatively enormous rounded mass of such vesicles more
deeply situated in the test substance (fig. 7, k.). Some such
masses may be found in the basal layers of the test at a
distance from the abdominal cavity of any zooid ; these have
evidently been left behind, the zooid to which they belonged
having shifted upwards as the floor of the cloacal cavity was
raised by the continual addition of fresh pellets. .
Thus the excretory organs of Hypurgon agree with the
simple type of excretory organ found in Botryllus, in that
the urihary concretions are stored in the cavities of single
vesicular cells; but apart from this particular they are of a
type unlike any yet described (Dahlgriin, ‘ Archiv fiir mikr.
Anat.,’ vol. lvii, 1901) among Tunicates, and are far less
simple than any known in other Synascida.
The reproductive organs lie in shallow depressions of the
wall of the abdominal cavity (fig. 9). The testis is oval,
and the vas deferens makes four or five turns of a spiral
around it. The ovary has membranous walls, and contains a
string of eges of successive ages. I have not seen an oviduct.
Any mature ova that I have seen have sunk deep into the
test, and so have come to he in a great recess of the abdomi-
nal cavity (fig. 10), communicating with it by a narrow
aperture. The material contains but one larva, which was
developing in a completely closed cavity in the test (fig. 11).
This may or may not be the normal course taken by the
developing eggs. Hggs are not to be seen being sheltered
by any other part of the organism than the test, though eggs
of all ages were found in the ovaries.
The fecal pellets, which contribute so largely to the
formation of the test, show a very remarkable degree of
coherence. If a piece of the colony be boiled in sulphuric
acid, the residue consists of feecal pellets which retain their
form perfectly, and continue to do so even if the boiling be
much prolonged. EHvyen thin sections of pellets, isolated by
HYPURGON SKEATI. 180
boiling microtome sections of the colony in sulphuric acid,
may still be mounted whole after this treatment. Boiling in
aqua regia and boiling in fuming nitric acid are equally
ineffectual in disintegrating the pellets; when these latter
reagents are used the test naturally forms part of the residue,
since they are not capable of dissolving tunicin.
When isolated by means of sulphuric acid the pellets have
a black colour, due to the action of the acid on the organic
matter contained in them. These blackened pellets may next
be washed and calcined, and though raised repeatedly to
cherry heat they still remain intact, and are now opaque
white when examined by reflected ight. Mounted in oil, or
passed through oil into balsam, they become transparent.
Calcined pellets dissolve completely in hydrofluoric acid.
Prolonged boiling in a strong solution (nearly saturated) of
caustic soda resulted in the dissolution of calcined pellets.
It seems, then, that the strong coherence of the pellets must
be due either (1) solely to cohesion and adhesion between the
foreign particles contained in them, or (2) to a deposition of
silica between these particles. The siliceous nature of the
greater part of this foreign matter makes it impossible to
determine between these two alternatives. It naturally
suggests itself that this property of coherence of the pellets
is an adaptation to enable the animal to utilise waste organic
matter with impunity. But it must be mentioned that the
pellets are porous, taking stains readily both before the
treatment described above, and also at every stage during it.
It is curious that the pellets are also highly fragile; they
crumble at once under pressure of the cover-slip.
Melicerta tubes were boiled in acid for comparison: the
form of the component pellets was lost almost immediately—
as soon as the cementing substance between neighbouring
pellets disappeared.
A parasitic crustacean was found in one ascidiozoid,
occupying a large part of its branchial chamber. The body
of the parasite is a mere sac filled with ova in an advanced
state of segmentation. There appear to be six pairs of
VoL. 46, PART 4.—NEW SERIES. BBB
134 IGERNA B. J. SOLLAS.
appendages belonging to the anterior region of the body,
besides one foremost pair which serves as an organ of
attachment, and is inserted into the tissues of the host.
The systematic position and diagnosis of the genus may
be stated as follows:—Synascida Didemnida Didemnina,
(Y. Delage). Colony thin; ascidiozoids with four rows of
branchial slits and twenty-four tentacles; vas deferens
spirally coiled round the testis; feecal pellets included in the
test, in which organ the renal vesicles are likewise contained.
In conclusion, it gives me much pleasure to take this
opportunity of expressing my thanks to Mr. Graham Kerr
for kind help and advice.
LITERATURE CONSULTED.
Herpman.— Voyage of H.M.S. Challenger,’ Tunicata 11.
Yves Detacr.— Zoologie coneréte,’ viil.
Dautertn, W.— Archiv fiir nat. Mikr.,’ lviii, 1901.
Grarp.—‘ Arch. d. Z. expér.,’ i, 1872.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES 34 & 35,
llustrating Igerna B. J. Sollas’s paper “On Hypurgon
Skeati, a New Genus and Species of Compound
Ascidians.”
as. Caleareous spicule. aé.s. Atrial siphon. dd. c. Blood-corpuscle. 47. .
Vesicular cell of test. 4/.s. Blood-sinus. d.d. Dorsal languet. d. ¢. Dorsal
tubercle. end. Kndostyle. ” Fusiform cell. g. Nerve ganglion. #, Heart.
int. Intestine. ¢. Larva. 2.¢e. Notochord. @. Gisophagus. ov. Ova. p.
Fecal pellet. p.e. Pericardium. ect, Rectum. 7. Renal organ. r.gl.
Glandular cells of renal organ. 7.¢. Renal concretion. s¢. Stomach. 4.
Testis. v.app. Vase. appendage. v.d, Vas deferens.
HYPURGON SKEATI. 735
PLATE 34.
Fig. 1.—A piece of a colony of Hypurgon Skeati, slightly larger than
natural size.
Fic. 2.—A portion of the surface of a colony seen under a binocular micro-
scope. xX 75.
Fig. 3.—Calcareous spicules from the test of Hypurgon Skeati. aand d
from one colony; ¢, ¢, and f froma second. f, acluster of spicules.
Fie. 4.—A vertical section through a part of a colony of Hypurgon
Skeati, showing the branchial sac and parts of the abdominal cavity of one
zooid (slightly reconstructed from neighbouring sections). x 80.
Fie. 5.—Vertical section of an abdominal cavity.
Fie. 6.—Diagrammatic reconstruction of a slice of acolony of Hypurgon
Skeati, showing one zooid from the left side and one from the dorsal surface.
Drawn as though it were transparent.
PLATE 35.
Fie. 7.—Section of a renal organ of Hypurgon Skeati which has been
functioning long enough to form the considerable accumulation of concre-
tions K.
Fic. 8.—Portion of the test of H. Skeaticontaining renal vesicies, more
highly magnified.
Fie. 9.—Section of an abdominal cavity of zooid of H. Skeati, to show
reproductive organs.
Fic. 10.—Section of alarge ovum of H. Skeati ina recess of the abdominal
cavity.
Fie. 11.—Section of a tailed larva of H. Skeati developing in a closed
cavity in the test.
«J
e
. sy
=
7
~_ “<
t .
¢
at
riz
ees OF THE -
NIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS
Lt
SSS Se a ee a a
SPT Lee? we a cabin Pen Sl OM) Mh
n'
eet
“Eg
Sollas del,
Quart. Fourm. Mur Sei. VALENS PAL 34.
ebiop %
SS 0 SES coe,
Se,
€, 4
Misti
sere eae s © yee *
“ae
ee
Lit London.
Hut!
iret
Wy wee Mee Mm eee is
Ligeary y
OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS
a ¢
‘re
aly
P
a ‘
\ | f
> al » \
PAS
e ar a ~ r
ar
Dries Y
ened
Lt
OF THE |
ITY OF {LLINO!S
oe Othe
ona
‘| yam
_—— eT ese Y
bs 4 ;
’ '
*
i
Ps"
val
7 ’
, Abe
PL.
= | bas <
aA. ke
J *
oye Ne.
hafriti cs
La,$rps 32
L134 oy
o +
‘ wo)
er,
T aR }
| Huth, Lith” London.
Sollas del.
ANATOMY OF ARENICOLA ASSIMILIS. (ot
;
The Anatomy of Arenicola assimilis, Ehlers,
and of a New Variety of the Species, with
some Observations on the Post-larval Stages.
By
J. H. Ashworth, D.Sc.,
Lecturer on Invertebrate Zoology in the University of Edinburgh,
With Plates 36 and 37.
ConTENTS.
PAGE
I. Introduction . , 737
II. Arenicola eaeimilts, Ehlers. f . 740
ILI. Specimens of Arenicola from New Fenland « Foe
IV. Systematic Position of A. assimilis and of the Specimens from
New Zealand , ey dod
V. Post-larval Stages of Arenicola tiem the Falkland Tebwils . 764
VI. Adult Specimens of Arenicola from the Falkland Islands . 768
VII. Distribution of Arenicola assimilis : - 412
VIII. Specific Characters of the Caudate Arenicolide ee ee
IX. Summary of Results. : : : Bab i
| . 780
X. Literature
I. Introduction.
In response to my inquiry regarding the occurrence of
Arenicola on the shores of New Zealand, Professor Benham
kindly sent to me three specimens of this worm from Otago
Harbour, and one from the Macquarie Islands.
‘The specimens were caudate Arenicolide resembling A.
marina, Linn., and A. claparedii, Levinsen, in external
form. A eapid examination of the grosser anatomical
features of one of the Otago specimens seemed to point to its
738 J. H. ASHWORTH.
close affinity with the latter species, for it was at once seen
that the New Zealand specimen possessed multiple ceso-
phageal glands and that there were no pouches on the first
diaphragm—two features known only in, and considered to
be almost diagnostic of, A. claparedii. At first, also, only
five pairs (the number occurring in A. claparedii) of
nephridia were seen in the Otago specimen, but finally a
much reduced pair was found in the segment anterior to the
one bearing the first fully developed nephridia. In the
other three specimens sent by Professor Benham there are
six pairs of fully developed nephridia, which is evidently the
normal condition. The lateral lobes of the prostomium of
these specimens were found to be more feebly developed than
those of A. claparedii. There were therefore two points
in which the southern specimens agreed with Levinsen’s
species, viz. the presence of multiple cesophageal glands and
the absence of diaphragmatic pouches; and two features in
which they differed, viz. the form of the lateral lobes of the
prostomium and the number of nephridia.
On sectioning the anterior end of one of the Otago sjpeci-
mens a pair of large otocysts was found, each opening to the
exterior by a narrow tube. The presence of these well-
developed organs, in conjunction with the important differ-
ences above mentioned, finally settled that the New Zealand
specimens do not belong to the species A. claparedii, in
which the absence of otocysts is so characteristic and
remarkable a feature.
These specimens agree with A. marina in the number,
position, and character of their gills, in the number of their
nephridia, and in the general anatomy of their otocysts ; but
the southern specimens are clearly distinguished from
A. marina by their multiple cesophageal glands, by the
absence in the former of diaphragmatic pouches, and by
other less obvious features.
The only other known species to which the New Zea-
land specimens show any close similarity is A. assimilis,
Khiers (1897, pp. 103, 104), of which only the external
ANATOMY. OF ARENICOLA ASSIMILIS. 739
characters are briefly described. Ehlers states that this
species closely resembles A. marina in general external
characters, but that in A. assimilis there are twenty
chetigerous segments and as arule there are thirteen pairs
of gills, the first being situated on the eighth chetigerous
annulus, but occasionally only twelve pairs of gills are
present. hlers also finds that, compared with A. marina,
the median lobe of the prostomium of A. assimilis is
proportionately smaller than the lateral ones, and the noto-
podial setae somewhat more feebly feathered.
The New Zealand specimens differ from Ehlers’ species in
the number of cheetigerous segments and in the position of
the first gill, but unfortunately Ehlers does not mention the
nephridia or nephridiopores, the cesophageal glands or the
otocysts,—important diagnostic characters concerning which
information was essential before the affinity of the New
Zealand specimens with A. assimilis conld be either
accepted or rejected. My thanks are due to Dr. Michaelsen,
of the Hamburg Museum, who collected the specimens
examined by Ehlers, for kindly sending to me two complete
examples of A. assimilis from Uschuaia, in Tierra del Fuego,
and an incomplete specimen from Punta Arenas, in the Straits
of Magellan.
As Ehlers has given only a brief account even of the
external characters of his species,’ I propose to describe the
principal features of the three specimens given to me by Dr.
Michaelsen before proceeding to consider the New Zealand
specimens in detail.
1 Since writing the above I have received, through the kindness of Pro-
fessor Ehlers (1901), a copy of his recently published monograph, ‘ Die Poly-
cheeten des magellanischen und chilenischen Strandes,’ in which he describes
(pp. 177, 178) the structiire of the otocysts of A. assimilis, and also states
that the alimentary canal, the vascular system, and the nephridia of this
species agree, so far as he can ascertain, with those of A. marina. ‘This
agreement is, however, not quite so close as Khlers’ statement would lead
one to expect, since, for example, the cesophageal glands in the latter species
are a single pair, while in A. assimilis there are several pairs. These points
are further discussed below.
740 J. H. ASHWORTH.
II. Arenicola assimilis, Ehlers.
The two complete specimens found at low-tide mark at
Uschuaia are 105mm. and 120 mm. long respectively. The
specimen from Punta Arenas would have been about 120 mm.
long if complete. Their colour in spirit is a fairly uniform
yellowish brown, but the tail of one specimen is of a some-
what darker colour. ‘The body is slightly swollen in the
anterior region. The animal closely agrees in form with
specimens of A. marina of the same size.
External Characters.—The prostomium (see fig. 20) is
moderately developed; the two lateral lobes are in the form of
a V, the arms of which embrace the median lobe.t The
prostomium resembles that of A. marina and A. cristata,
except that the median lobe is proportionately smaller in
Ehlers’ species. ‘lhe nuchal organ is similar in its structure
and relations to that of A. marina. ‘The metastomial
grooves indicating the track of the cesophageal connectives
are well marked.
There are twenty chetigerous segments, the last thirteen
of which are branchiferous; the first gill is thus on the
eighth chetigerous annulus. In this character A.
assimilis differs from all other caudate Arenicolide, in
which the first gill (except in those abnormal cases in which
the first true gill is missing) is on the seventh chetigerous
annulus. Of the three specimens in my possession only one
has thirteen pairs of fully developed gills; in another the first
right gillis very minute; while in the third specimen the first
left gill is small, and the last gill on each side is considerably
smaller than the preceding one. Ehlers (1897, p. 104) records
specimens with only twelve pairs of gills.
‘he gills of the specimens from Uschuaia are dense bushy
structures resembling the dendritic type of gill found in
1 There is a rough sketch (“d’aprés Ehlers”) of the prostomium of A.
assimilis ina memoir by Fauvel (1899, p. 178), which, however, does not give
an accurate impression of its form, as the two lateral lobes are represented as
separate, whereas they are actually united posteriorly to form the V-shaped
structure described above.
ANATOMY OF ARENICOLA ASSIMILIS. TAl
littoral specimens of A. marina. ‘There are in most of them
about eight main stems, each 2°5 mm. to 3 mm. long, bearing
five or six dichotomously subdivided branches on each side.
The gills of the specimen from Punta Arenas are larger and
of a somewhat more regular form. ‘lhe eight or nine stout
main stems are about 4 mm. long, and are regularly arranged
in radiating fashion; each bears six or seven pairs of
branches which divide dichotomously. Although at first
sight this gill seems to approach to the pinnate type, the
lateral branches are neither so numerous nor so regularly
arranged as in pinnate gills, and the gill may be regarded
as merely a well-developed example of the dendritic type.
The skin is subdivided into annul. Between the prosto-
mium and the first chretigerous annulus there are five rings
(see fig. 20). The first four of these represent the region
found in other species of Arenicola which has been shown
to be composed of the peristomium (here represented by the
first two of these rings) fused with the first body-segment of
the post-larva, the setze in which disappear very early (see
figs. 19, 20). The fifth ring is the first annulus of the first
chetigerous segment, this segment being composed of three
annuli, viz. a chetigerous one and the annulus preceding
and following it. The second and third chetigerous seg-
ments also consist of three annul, the middle one bearing the
setee. The fourth and succeeding segments up to the end of
the branchial region are composed of five annuli, the fourth
of which is chetigerous. The region between any two
cheetigerous annuli behind the third is therefore subdivided
into four rings.
The epidermis of the tail is raised -into numerous papille.
The segmentation of this region is only feebly marked, but it
is indicated, especially in the anterior portion of the tail,
by the presence of somewhat larger annuli placed at regular
intervals, upon which the epidermal papille are distinctly
larger than those on the intervening annuli. Hach of these
larger rings is followed by a slight constriction, denoting the
presence internally of a septum, best seen in those parts of
742 J. H. ASHWORTH.
the tail which were stretched at the moment of death. The
space between two of the larger annuli is subdivided at the
anterior end of the tail into two or three rings, but further
back into from four to ten. ‘These smaller annuli also bear
epidermal papillae, but in the anterior tail region they are
distinctly smaller than the papille found on the larger annuli.
Proceeding backwards along the tail, the difference in the
size of the annuli and of the papille they bear may be
clearly recognised until the middle of the tail has been passed ;
then the papille become almost equal in size, and near the
anus it is impossible to distinguish any difference between
those of the various annuli. ‘There are about twenty-eight
segments in the tail of each of the complete specimens.
Seteze.—The capillary setz (figs. 1, 14) of the notopodium
are very similar to those of A. marina. ‘They attain a
length of 4:3 mm., and on their distal fourth bear small
pointed processes, which, as Khlers (1897, p. 104) remarked,
are not so’ well developed as those of A. marina. The
processes are usually present on both sides of the seta; they
are moderately obvious on one side, but on the other they are
very minute, and are borne on the edge of a thin border or
lamina. This lamina, which seldom exceeds 6 « in width,
extends along the seta for a distance of about one third its
length. In some of the setz the lamina is not denticulate at
its margin, and in others is only very faintly so; but it is
crossed by fine oblique lines, the intervals between which
correspond roughly to the size of the teeth on the dentigerous
lamine. From an examination of the sete of A. assimilis
and A. marina, it seems probable that the lamina at first
possesses an entire margin, but later this tends to break up
from the edge inwards, thus giving rise to the minute teeth
which are usually seen on full-grown sete. ‘This explanation
would account for the fact that in some sete the margin of
the lamina is entire, while in others it bears either exceed-
ingly minute denticulations or the more obvious teeth shown
in fig. 1 a. These three conditions are occasionally seen at
different points along the border of a single seta.
ANATOMY .OF ARENICOLA ASSIMILIS. 743
Sete similar to those above described are present in A.
marina, and in some examples the lamina is very well
marked, e. g. in a specimen of the Laminarian variety the thin
border extends for nearly a millimetre alone the seta, and
attains a width of 20 mw. Similar sete are present in A.
cristata, but in A. claparedii! the lamina is not so well
developed, being short and narrow. In A. ecaudata and A.
grubii the lamina is also very narrow, seldom exceeding
about 3p in width.
The neuropodia of A. assimilis are easily seen, even in
the first segment. ‘They are especially well developed in
the branchial region, where each resembles a pair of closely
applied tumid lips, between which is the row of crotchets.
These (fig. 9) are often curved, and are 0°6 mm. to 0°7 mm. in
length, being considerably longer than cheetee from specimens
of A. marina of the same size. (The longest crotchets found
in a specimen of A. marina 125 mm. long are only 0°47 mm.
in length.) The rostrum is short and blunt, even in unworn
cheetzee. ‘There is a small subrostral enlargement, and about
six to nine teeth are present just behind the rostrum.
Musculature.—The musculature calls for little comment ;
it is similar to that of A. marina, except that the oblique
muscles are present along the whole animal from the first
diaphragm to the end of the tail. They are exceedingly thin
bands, somewhat broader in the posterior part of the gill
region, but even here seldom exceeding 0°5 mm. in width, and
as a rule they are only 0°2 mm to 0°3 mm. wide. There is a
dorsal mesentery in the first and second chetigerous seg-
ments supporting the dorsal blood-vessel. The three dia-
phraems are, as usual, situated at the anterior ends of the first,
third, and fourth chetigerous segments. ‘There are no
pouches on the first diaphragm. This condition was con-
sidered to be so marked a feature of A. claparedii that it
was given as one of the diagnostic characters of this species
(Gamble and Ashworth, 1900, pp. 533, 541), since all other
Arenicolidze whose anatomy is fully investigated possess
' See Gamble and Ashworth, 1900, pl. xxini, fig. 23.
744 J. H. ASHWORTH.
diaphragmatic pouches, and in some species they attain a
large size, e.g. in A. cristata they may reach a length of
12mm. Many of the blood-vesseis which cross the ccelom
obliquely to the nephridia and gills are provided with a very
obvious connective-tissue strand or band, which gradually
increases in size in the posterior segments of the gill region,
forming in the last two or three segments of this part of the
body an almost complete septum supporting the afferent and
efferent branchial vessels. ‘There are well-developed caudal
septa.
Alimentary Canal.—The most striking feature of the
internal anatomy of A. assimilis is the presence of multiple
cesophageal pouches. These are placed on the sides of the
cesophagus, just behind the third diaphragm. ‘There are in
each of two specimens six, and in another eight, pouches on
each side. ‘he anterior pair is long—-12 mm. in one speci-
men, 17 mm. in another,—and each of them is usually swollen
at or near its anterior free end, having a club-shaped appear-
ance. Their abundant blood-supply is evidenced by the
network seen in their walls. In the contracted condition
these anterior pouches are digitiform structures with a some-
what moniliform appearance. ‘The smaller posterior glands
are from 1 mm. to 4 mm. in length, and are pear-shaped or
oval sacs with rather thicker walls. As in other Areni-
colide, the cavity of each pouch is partially subdivided by
numerous septa produced by infolding of the wall; each
septum, therefore, is composed of two lamelle of glandular
epithelium, between which is a cavity filled with blood. The
partitions are very obvious in the smaller pouches, and in
the larger pouches when in a contracted condition; but when
these are fully distended the septa become mere ridges on
the inner wall of the pouch. In the presence of multiple
cesophageal pouches A. assimilis conforms to another of
the features hitherto considered to be peculiar to A.
claparedii, as in all other species of Arenicola in which
the pouches are known there is only a single pair.’ In other
' Ehlers (1901, p. 177) states that the gut of A.assimilis agrees with
ANATOMY OF ARENICOLA ASSIMILIS. 745
respects the alimentary canal resembles that of A. marina.
The ventral groove, which is well seen in the intestine, may
be traced forwards into the stomach to about the level of the
eighth or seventh seta.
Vascular System.—The vascular system closely agrees
with that of A. marina (see Gamble and Ashworth, 1898,
pl. 11), except in the fifth and seventh chetigerous seg-
ments. In each of these there is only one pair of vessels,
afferent branches of the ventral vessel, passing to the
nephridia. The first pair of efferent branchial vessels is
situated in the eighth segment; this and the four succeeding
pairs open into the subintestinal vessels, while the last eight
gills, i. e. those of the thirteenth to twentieth segments,
return blood to the dorsal vessel. The body-wall is well
supplied with blood-vessels, especially in the anterior region ;
in sections of the peristomium and first cheetigerous seg-
ment there are numerous vessels lying either in the con-
nective tissue or in small ccelomic canals (see below) just
beneath the epidermis (fig. 22); im sections of some of the
posterior segments the vessels are not so abundant.
The heart is of moderate size, and has the usual relations.
There is a cardiac body formed by ingrowths, chiefly of the
posterior wall of the heart, and this is well developed in one
of the specimens 120 mm. long.
Coelom.—The ccelom is spacious, as in A. marina. A
remarkable feature noticed at once in sections (fig. 22) of the
anterior end of A. assimilis is the large number of ccelomic
spaces in the body-wall and between the muscles. In this
portion of the animal there are exceedingly numerous ccelomic
canals lying in the subepidermal tissue of the body-wall,
penetrating into the muscle-bands, especially of the buccal
musculature, insinuating themselves between the brain-lobes
and between the brain and the prostomial epitheliuin, and
often accompanying the blood-vessels which supply the body-
that of A. marina, but the presence of multiple cesophageal glands in the
former while there is only a single pair in the latter species is a point of
difference of considerable systematic importance.
746 J. H. ASHWORTH.
wall. In each of these canals the thin lining of ccelomic
epithelium may be easily recognised, and ccelomic corpuscles
may also be found in many of them. Similar canals are
present in A. marina (Gamble and Ashworth, 1898, p. 28),
in A. grubii, and to a less extent in the other species ;
but the development of these outgrowths of the cclom
reaches its maximum in A. assimilis. They probably act
as nutritive, and possibly also as excretory and respiratory
channels. There are very few coelomic canals in the pos-
terior part of the animal. The coelomic fluid and corpuscles
resemble, as far as can be ascertained in preserved specimens,
those of A. marina.
Nephridia.—There are six pairs of nephridia, the ex-
ternal openings of which are slightly posterior to the dorsal
ends of the fourth to the ninth neuropodia. The funnels of
the first pair of nephridia le on the anterior face of the
third diaphragm. This condition is found again only in
A. marina; the first pair of nephridia of other species
corresponds in position to the second pair of A. assimilis
and A, marina. The dorsal lip of each nephrostome
(fig. 17) bears about twelve to fourteen spatulate or triangular
ciliated processes attached by their narrower ends. These
are subdivided distally, some of the larger ones into five or
six. The edge of the ventral lip of the nephrostome is
thrown into folds or frills, so that although it agrees in
general shape with the ventral lip of the nephrostome
of the marina section of the genus, the ventral nephro-
stomial lip of A. assimilis is quite distinguishable by this
peculiar character. ‘This frilling is probably not due to con-
traction on killing, as it is not seen in specimens of
A. marina, A. claparedii, and A. cristata which have
been killed in a similar manner.
The nephrostome of the first nephridium les on the
anterior face of the third diaphragm, and is directed an-
teriorly, It is smaller than any of the other nephrostomes,
its dorsal lip bears only eight to eleven processes, and the
frilling of the edge of the ventral lip is not so well marked.
ANATOMY OF ARENICOLA ASSIMILIS. 747
The first nephridium is usually distinctly smaller than any
of the others, a condition frequently noticed in A. marina,
Although this nephridium possesses a gonidial vessel, no
gonad is developed upon it.
Gonads.—The gonads are, as in other species, associated
with the nephridia, and are present on all except the first
pair. Hach gonad is a club-shaped mass of cells about 1*5
mm. long (fig. 17), formed by proliferation of the cells
covering the gonidial vessel (Gamble and Ashworth, 1900,
p- 521) immediately behind the nephrostome. The forma-
tion of ova and spermatozoa follows the same course as in
A.marina. The ova present in the coelomic fluid of the
specimen from Punta Arenas are apparently mature,! and
have a distinct but thin vitellne membrane (3 yw thick).
They are not spherical, but somewhat discoidal. he face of
the disc is usually oval, and measures 0°19 to 0°20 mm. by 0°15
to 0°16 mm. in diameter. The thickness of the egg is about
0075 mm. Measurements of a considerable number of well-
preserved unshrunk eggs from the ccelomic fluid show that
the three axes above named are fairly constant in propor-
tion. It will be convenient to correct here a statement in
the memoir by Dr. Gamble and myself (1900, p. 527) in
which the ova of A. marina, A. claparedii, and A.
cristata are described as spherical. This isa mistake, as the
ova of all these species are flattened in one plane, like those of
A.assimilis described above. In A. marina? the face of
the egg is either circular (usually) and about 0°14to0°15 mm.
in diameter, or it is oval, with diameters of 0°16 and 0°12 to
0:14 mm., and the third axis of the egg is from 0:08 to 0:09
mm. in length. The ova of A. claparedii are usually only
slightly oval, the two diameters of the face of the egg being
about 0°16 mm. and 0°14 to 0°16 mm. respectively, and the
1 This specimen was taken in September, 1892.
2 The following description and measurements may replace those given on
p. 527 in the memoir cited above; they have been drawn either from living or
well-preserved ova, most of which have come into my hands since the com-
pletion of that memoir, =~ .
748 J. H. ASHWORTH.
thickness of the egg 0°07 mm. In A. cristata the three
axes of ova removed from a ripe female in Naples measure
0°155 mm., 0°145 mm., and 0°07 mm. respectively.! The ova of
A. grubiiand A. ecaudata are not compressed in this way,
or only very shghtly so. They are usually ovoid, and ripe ova
of the former species are 0°17 mm. long and 0°15 mm. broad
and thick. The largest ova of A. ecaudata which I have seen
have slightly smaller dimensions, but they are probably not
quite mature. The ova of A. grubii and A. ecaudata are
distinguished by their stout vitelline membrane, which is 5
to 6 thick; while in'A. claparedii, A. cristata, and A.
assimilis itis 2 to3m,andin A. marina only slightly over
1 « in thickness.
Brain.—The brain of A. assimilis conforms to the
general plan seen in the marina section of the genus. It
consists of a pair of anterior lobes placed well forward in
the prostomium, a pair of posterior lobes which lie below the
nuchal organ, and an intermediate region which connects the
anterior and posterior lobes. ‘he anterior lobes are short
but very broad; in fact, this is by far the broadest part of
the brain; behind these lobes the brain gradually tapers.
The brain may be roughly compared in shape to two slightly
flattened pears lying side by side with their narrower faces
adjacent and fused along the middle third of their length.
The broad forwardly directed ends of the pears represent
the anterior cerebral lobes, while the tapering ends represent
the posterior lobes, which are continuous with two nerve-
tracts lying below the epithelium of the nuchal organ. The
anterior brain-lobes are separated in front by a coelomic space.
Hach gives off anteriorly and dorsally a series of nerves
to the epithelium of the prostomium. ‘The anterior part
of these lobes consists almost entirely of small cells situated
in clusters and separated from one another by fibrous tracts
and by neuroglial tissue. Further back the delicate neuro-
pile which forms the core of these anterior lobes is well seen,
| See also Child (1900), p. 592, for further observations on the ova of A.
cristata.
ANATOMY OF ARENICOLA ASSIMILIS. 749
surrounded by clusters of nerve-cells and neuroglial tissue.
Bundles of nerve-fibrils may be traced from the bases of the
prostomial epithelial cells into the neuropile (see fig. 23).
Larger unipolar ganglion-cells are found immediately out-
side the neuropile, and particularly on the side nearest the
middle line. The csophageal connectives arise from the
anterior lobes at the point where the neuropile reaches its
greatest development (fig. 22). The eyes are found on the
dorsal side of this part of the brain. There are four or five
on each of the anterior lobes. re ros “
ens ra Se
Ne as
J» ‘em v7 be oT a's at
LM, eel ee ‘eyed
A oe |
a ete
PLIBRAR
OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS
dl
va
aA
~
ol
. - ;
2
n" -
2
a |
-_ : 4
ae | >
; ® ‘
PAT. ‘x 7 -
a se —f, “2
- o— | oe. _
ape ore — — ——
——_—
JH Ashworth del,
Per.
ABS. Ch. Seg?
é,
Fs
y
NF]
iF
i
SURE EINE
MV;
rl Moa Ma ek, DELON OE 36
Oe.Gl. | Oe.GL.
ty,
tl tt Nain My 0,
a GastL a.
Prost. Md. Fs
Prost.Lat.
SS Ze
08, SS : ‘ a
Bates 1830 E
\ ie Le Sere 784 ten te
Sd E\\y ee Ss. Bpatere'c 90 %o oo =
APN ag OEE
X a" Waa * }
Cl. x 210.
Huth, Lith’ London
a on’
Pinte =
UNIVERSITY. OF ILLINOIS
JH Ashworth del.
2 3.x 210
Huth lath’ London.
RARY
OF THE
6s
. LIB
ITY OF ILLINOIS
RS
i
UNIVER
Seok TO VOL. 46,
NEW SERIES.
Arachnid entosternite, by Pocock,
225
Arenicola assimilis, anatomy of,
by J. H. Ashworth, D.Sc., 737
Ascidians, new genus and species of,
by Igerna B. J. Sollas, 729
Ashworth, on the anatomy of Areni-
cola assimilis, 737
Bernard, studies in the
Parts IIT, IV, and V, 25
Bryce, Dr. Thomas H., on artificial
parthenogenesis and fertilisation:
a review, 479
— on the maturation of the ovum in
Echinus esculentus, 177
Buller, on chemotaxis aud fertilisa-
tion, 145
retina,
Cephalodiscus, central complex of, by
Masterman, 715
Cestode from Cestracion, by Haswell,
399
Cestracion, cestode from, by Haswell,
399
Cheilostomata, the morphology of,
by Harmer, 263
Chemotaxis in the fertilisation of
eggs, by A. H. Reginald Buller,
B.Se., Ph.D., 145
Corystes, metamorphosis of, by
Gurney, 461
Dendy, Prof.,
mirabilis, l
Diplochorda, by Masterman, 715
Doncaster, on the development and
anatomy of Sagitta, 351
Drummond, Isabella, on the deve-
lopment of Paludina vivipara,
with special reference to the urino-
genital organs and theories of
Gasteropod torsion, 97
on Pelagohydra
Kchinus, maturation of ovum in, by
Dr. Bryce, 177
Entosternite of Arachnids, by Pocock,
225
Fertilisation and artificial partheno-
genesis, 479
Fertilisation and chemotaxis, 145
Fleure, on the relations of the kidneys
in Haliotis tuberculata, 77
Gasteropods, torsion in, 97
Gurney, Robert, on the metamor-
phosis of Corystes Cassive-
launus, 461
voL. 46, pART 4,—NEW SERIES.
788 - INDEX.
Haliotis, kidneys of, by H. J. Fleure,
77
Harmer, on the morphology of the
Cheilostomata, 263
Haswell, Prof., on a cestode from .
Cestracion, 399
Hypurgon Skeati, by Igerna B. .
J. Sollas, 729
Kerr, Prof. Graham, on the develop-
ment of Lepidosiren paradoxa,
Part ITI, 417
Kidneys of Haliotis, by H. J. Fleure,
77
Lepidosiren paradoxa, develop.
ment of; by Prof. Graham Kerr,
Part III, 417
Masterman, on central complex of
Cephalodiscus, 715
Ovum, maturation of, in Echinus, 177
Paludina vivipara, development
of, by Isabella M. Drummond, 97
Parthenogenesis, artificial, by Bryce,
479
Pearl, Raymond, on the movements
and reactions of Planarians, 509
Pelagohydra mirabilis, a free-
swimming Hydroid, by Professor
Arthur Dendy, 1
Planarians, movements and reactions
of, by Raymond Pearl, Ph.D., 509
Pocock, on the Arachnid entosteruite,
225
Retina, studies in, by Henry M.
Bernard, Parts III, 1V, and V, 25
Sagitta, development and anatomy of,
by L. Doncaster, 351
Sollas, Igerna B. J., on Hypurgon
Skeati, a new genus and species
of compound Ascidians, 729
Torsion in Gasteropods, by Isabella
M. Drummond, 97
PRINTED BY ADLARD AND SON,
BARTHOLOMEW CLOSE, E.C.; 20, HANOVER SQUARE, W.;
AND DORKING.
i\
\\
7
At
XD
ot Sin ie cee ielmeriaatll a,
i
{
iy
;
’
4
t
i
eo =< -
nk, ee
d “py Ae ~ 2
eee rs he
rs
ao
gg
3 0112 105749540
3 0112 058508794